Manual

Reference Guide
Reference Guide
 Table Of Contents

WELCOME TO SCIA SCIENTIFIC SOFTWARE ....................................................... 1

GETTING STARTED.................................................................................................. 3

Disclaimer .............................................................................................................................................................. 3

Contact address ..................................................................................................................................................... 3

Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 4
About program .................................................................................................................................................... 4
About documentation .......................................................................................................................................... 4

Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Installation options .............................................................................................................................................. 5
System requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 6
Demo version ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Uninstalling program........................................................................................................................................... 7

Running the program ........................................................................................................................................... 7

Starting program.................................................................................................................................................. 7
Program files and folders..................................................................................................................................... 8

Upgrade from other products .............................................................................................................................. 8

Upgrade from EPW ............................................................................................................................................. 8

TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONS ................................................................... 11

Terminology......................................................................................................................................................... 11

Co-ordinate systems............................................................................................................................................ 12
Introduction to co-ordinate systems................................................................................................................... 12
Global co-ordinate system ................................................................................................................................. 12
User-defined co-ordinate system ....................................................................................................................... 12
Entity co-ordinate systems................................................................................................................................. 13
Introduction to entity co-ordinate systems ..................................................................................................... 13
Cross-section co-ordinate system................................................................................................................... 13
Beam co-ordinate system ............................................................................................................................... 14
Geometric block co-ordinate system.............................................................................................................. 14
Point definition co-ordinate systems ................................................................................................................. 14
Introduction to point definition ...................................................................................................................... 14
Cartesian co-ordinate system ......................................................................................................................... 15
Cylindrical co-ordinate system ...................................................................................................................... 15
Spherical co-ordinate system ......................................................................................................................... 16

Conventions for applied physical quantities ..................................................................................................... 16

Input quantities conventions .............................................................................................................................. 16
Output quantities conventions ........................................................................................................................... 16

Units ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Introduction to units .......................................................................................................................................... 17
Length units ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
Angle units ........................................................................................................................................................ 19

iii
 Reference Guide

LAYOUT AND OPERATION.................................................................................... 21

Layout and operation overview ......................................................................................................................... 21

User interface....................................................................................................................................................... 21
Introduction to user interface............................................................................................................................. 21
Title bar ............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Status bar ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
Menu bar............................................................................................................................................................ 23
Tree menu window ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Toolbars............................................................................................................................................................. 24
Command line ................................................................................................................................................... 24
Property table .................................................................................................................................................... 26
Progress bar ....................................................................................................................................................... 28
Application windows......................................................................................................................................... 28
Introduction to application windows.............................................................................................................. 28
Graphical window.......................................................................................................................................... 28
Graphical window pop-up menu.................................................................................................................... 29
Document window ......................................................................................................................................... 30
Preview window............................................................................................................................................. 30
Property window ............................................................................................................................................... 31
Property window............................................................................................................................................ 31
Action buttons................................................................................................................................................ 32
Detailed properties ......................................................................................................................................... 34
Example ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Database managers ............................................................................................................................................ 36
Introduction to database manager .................................................................................................................. 36
Layout and operation of a database manager ................................................................................................. 36
Opening the database manager ...................................................................................................................... 39
Pop-up menu of database manager ................................................................................................................ 40

PROGRAM SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 41

Language of program ......................................................................................................................................... 41

Language of the program................................................................................................................................... 41

User level.............................................................................................................................................................. 41
Level of the user interface ................................................................................................................................. 41

Application options ............................................................................................................................................. 42

Workspace settings ............................................................................................................................................ 42
Environment settings ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Graphic templates settings................................................................................................................................. 44
Directories settings ............................................................................................................................................ 44
Project settings .................................................................................................................................................. 44
Protection settings ............................................................................................................................................. 45
Adjusting the application options ...................................................................................................................... 45

Project settings .................................................................................................................................................... 46

Basic project settings ......................................................................................................................................... 46
Basic project data........................................................................................................................................... 46
Functionality settings ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Loads settings ................................................................................................................................................ 49
Combinations settings .................................................................................................................................... 49
Procedure for setting project data .................................................................................................................. 49
Display style settings ......................................................................................................................................... 50
Display Setup palettes.................................................................................................................................... 50
Colours Setup................................................................................................................................................. 51
Font Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 52

iv
 Table Of Contents

Beam type Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 52

Dimension line Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 53
Units Setup..................................................................................................................................................... 53
Scales................................................................................................................................................................. 54
Adjusting the scales ....................................................................................................................................... 54
Fast multiplying of scales .............................................................................................................................. 55
Example of scales setup ................................................................................................................................. 56
Advanced settings.............................................................................................................................................. 58
Document Setup............................................................................................................................................. 58
Picture gallery Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 58
FE mesh Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 58
Solver Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 58
Advanced geometry setup .............................................................................................................................. 59

BASIC WORKING TOOLS ...................................................................................... 61

Selections.............................................................................................................................................................. 61
Introduction to selections................................................................................................................................... 61
Making a selection............................................................................................................................................. 61
Removing the entities from selection ................................................................................................................ 64
Making a selection based on a specific property ............................................................................................... 65
Adjusting the filter for selections ...................................................................................................................... 65
Modifying a selection ........................................................................................................................................ 66
Applying a selection .......................................................................................................................................... 66
Clearing a selection ........................................................................................................................................... 66
Saving and reading a selection .......................................................................................................................... 67
Selections versus editing of properties .............................................................................................................. 70
Controlling the selection-versus-editing process ............................................................................................... 71
Selections of slabs with openings ...................................................................................................................... 71

Activity ................................................................................................................................................................. 73
Introduction to activity ...................................................................................................................................... 73
Activity types .................................................................................................................................................... 73
Switching the activity On or Off ....................................................................................................................... 73
Activity according to layers............................................................................................................................... 74
Activity according to current selection.............................................................................................................. 74
Activity according to working plane ................................................................................................................. 74
Activity according to clipping box .................................................................................................................... 74
Inverting the activity.......................................................................................................................................... 74
Controlling the display style of inactive members ............................................................................................ 75

Clipping box ........................................................................................................................................................ 75

Introduction to clipping box .............................................................................................................................. 75
Defining a new clipping box ............................................................................................................................. 75
Defining the clipping box around the working plane ........................................................................................ 75
Defining the clipping box around an entity ....................................................................................................... 75
Defining the clipping box around the model ..................................................................................................... 76
Using the clipping box....................................................................................................................................... 76
Adjusting the clipping box in the setting table .................................................................................................. 77
Adjusting the clipping box using the mouse...................................................................................................... 77
Moving the clipping box.................................................................................................................................... 78

Layers................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Introduction to layers......................................................................................................................................... 78
Layers manager ................................................................................................................................................. 78
Defining a new layer ......................................................................................................................................... 79
Applying defined layers..................................................................................................................................... 79
Displaying and hiding a layer............................................................................................................................ 80
Ignoring selected layers in calculation .............................................................................................................. 80

v
 Reference Guide

User co-ordinate system (UCS) .......................................................................................................................... 81

Introduction to a user co-ordinate system.......................................................................................................... 81
Adjusting a user co-ordinate system.................................................................................................................. 81
UCS defined by three points .......................................................................................................................... 81
Horizontal UCS defined by one point............................................................................................................ 81
Vertical UCS defined by two points .............................................................................................................. 81
Vertical UCS perpendicular to global X-axis ................................................................................................ 82
Vertical UCS perpendicular to global Y-axis ................................................................................................ 82
UCS identical with the global co-ordinate system ......................................................................................... 82
UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's X-axis ............................................................................................ 82
UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's Y-axis ............................................................................................ 82
UCS defined according to an entity's LCS..................................................................................................... 82
UCS defined from a view direction ............................................................................................................... 83
Editing a user co-ordinate system...................................................................................................................... 83
UCS Manager ................................................................................................................................................ 83
Modifying an existing UCS ........................................................................................................................... 84
Defining a new UCS ...................................................................................................................................... 84
Copying an existing UCS............................................................................................................................... 85
Moving an existing UCS................................................................................................................................ 85
Rotating an existing UCS............................................................................................................................... 85
Deleting an existing UCS............................................................................................................................... 85
Storing the user co-ordinate system ............................................................................................................... 86
Using a user co-ordinate system ........................................................................................................................ 86
Rules for using a UCS.................................................................................................................................... 86
Using a UCS in the graphical window ........................................................................................................... 86
Using a UCS from the command line ............................................................................................................ 87

Working plane ..................................................................................................................................................... 87

Introduction to a working plane......................................................................................................................... 87
Adjusting a working plane................................................................................................................................. 87

Cursor SNAP modes ........................................................................................................................................... 87

Introduction to SNAP modes............................................................................................................................. 87
Grid SNAP modes ............................................................................................................................................. 87
Object SNAP modes.......................................................................................................................................... 88
Adjusting a SNAP mode.................................................................................................................................... 88
Adjusting the temporary one-step SNAP mode................................................................................................. 89

Dot grid ................................................................................................................................................................ 90

Introduction to a dot grid ................................................................................................................................... 90
Adjusting dot grid parameters ........................................................................................................................... 90
Using the dot grid .............................................................................................................................................. 90

Line grid............................................................................................................................................................... 91
Introduction to a line grid .................................................................................................................................. 91
Types of line grid............................................................................................................................................... 91
Line grid manager.............................................................................................................................................. 93
Creating a new line grid..................................................................................................................................... 94
Adjusting line grid parameters .......................................................................................................................... 94
Adjusting the display style of line grid .............................................................................................................. 95
Displaying and hiding a line grid ...................................................................................................................... 95
Using a line grid ................................................................................................................................................ 96
Editing an existing line grid............................................................................................................................... 96

Window pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................................ 97

Introduction to window pop-up menu ............................................................................................................... 97
Functions of the pop-up menu ........................................................................................................................... 97
Using the window pop-up menu........................................................................................................................ 99

Adjusting the viewpoint (view direction + zoom) ............................................................................................. 99

vi
 Table Of Contents

Introduction to view adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 99

Adjusting the view........................................................................................................................................... 100
Limiting the view ............................................................................................................................................ 102
Adjusting the view numerically....................................................................................................................... 102
Adjusting perspective projection ..................................................................................................................... 103
Special view settings ....................................................................................................................................... 103

View parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 104

Introduction to view parameters ...................................................................................................................... 104
Overview of view parameters.......................................................................................................................... 104
Adjusting the view parameters ........................................................................................................................ 112
Predefined view parameters settings ............................................................................................................... 114
Drawing of input data with eccentricity .......................................................................................................... 114

Regeneration of view......................................................................................................................................... 118

Introduction to regeneration of view ............................................................................................................... 118
Redrawing the active graphical window.......................................................................................................... 119

Calculator .......................................................................................................................................................... 119

Calculator ........................................................................................................................................................ 119

MATERIALS........................................................................................................... 121

Introduction to materials.................................................................................................................................. 121

Material types.................................................................................................................................................... 121

Material properties ........................................................................................................................................... 121

Materials manager ............................................................................................................................................ 122

Specifying the materials for the project .......................................................................................................... 123

Defining a new code-specific material ............................................................................................................. 123

Defining a new user-defined code-specific material ....................................................................................... 123

Defining a new general material ...................................................................................................................... 124

Editing the defined material............................................................................................................................. 124

Copying the defined material ........................................................................................................................... 124

Changing the defined material......................................................................................................................... 125

Deleting the defined material ........................................................................................................................... 125

Reviewing the defined material parameters ................................................................................................... 125

CROSS-SECTIONS ............................................................................................... 129

Introduction to cross-sections .......................................................................................................................... 129

Sectional characteristics and other properties................................................................................................ 129

Overview of sectional characteristics and parameters ..................................................................................... 129
Sectional characteristics .................................................................................................................................. 130
Calculation of sectional characteristics ........................................................................................................... 130
Other cross-section parameters........................................................................................................................ 132

vii
 Reference Guide

Special sectional characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 133

Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM ................................................................................................... 133

Cross-section types ............................................................................................................................................ 135

Geometric shapes............................................................................................................................................. 135
Thin-walled cross-sections .............................................................................................................................. 136
Steel rolled cross-sections ............................................................................................................................... 136
Welded steel cross-sections ............................................................................................................................. 138
Welded hollow cross-sections ......................................................................................................................... 139
Haunch cross-sections ..................................................................................................................................... 139
Built-up steel cross-sections ............................................................................................................................ 140
Multi-material built-up cross-sections ............................................................................................................. 141
Concrete cross-sections ................................................................................................................................... 142
Timber cross-sections ...................................................................................................................................... 142
Bridge cross-sections....................................................................................................................................... 142
Numerical cross-section .................................................................................................................................. 143
General cross-section....................................................................................................................................... 143

Defining a new cross-section ............................................................................................................................ 144

Cross-section manager..................................................................................................................................... 144
General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section ........................................................................... 145
Selecting the cross-section type....................................................................................................................... 145
Specifying sectional parameters and properties............................................................................................... 146
Reviewing the calculated sectional characteristics .......................................................................................... 148
Importing the cross-sections from another project .......................................................................................... 149

Modyfying an existing cross-section ................................................................................................................ 151

Editing a cross-section..................................................................................................................................... 151
Deleting a cross-section................................................................................................................................... 151
Copying a cross-section................................................................................................................................... 152
Replacing a cross-section ................................................................................................................................ 152

General cross-section ........................................................................................................................................ 152

General cross-section....................................................................................................................................... 152
Examples of a general cross-section................................................................................................................ 153
Rules for general cross-sections ...................................................................................................................... 154
Type of partial sections in the general cross-section ....................................................................................... 154
Polygonal cross-section ............................................................................................................................... 154
Thin walled cross-section............................................................................................................................. 156
Library cross-section.................................................................................................................................... 156
Thin-walled versus solid cross-section ........................................................................................................ 156
General cross-section editor ............................................................................................................................ 157
Opening the General cross-section editor .................................................................................................... 157
Using the General cross-section editor ........................................................................................................ 157
Functions of the General cross-section editor .............................................................................................. 158
Creating a new general cross-section .............................................................................................................. 163
Inserting a new polygonal section................................................................................................................ 163
Plane polygon toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 165
Inserting a new thin walled section .............................................................................................................. 166
Inserting a new library section ..................................................................................................................... 167
Inserting a new opening ............................................................................................................................... 167
Import of a general cross-section ................................................................................................................. 168
Adjusting the properties................................................................................................................................... 169
Properties of the final general cross-section ................................................................................................ 169
Properties of the partial cross-section .......................................................................................................... 170
Modifying the existing general cross-section .................................................................................................. 171
Modifying the properties of the whole cross-section ................................................................................... 171
Modifying the properties of a partial cross-section...................................................................................... 173
Changing the geometry of the general cross-section.................................................................................... 173
Changing the geometry of a partial section.................................................................................................. 173

viii
 Table Of Contents

Defining a parametric cross-section ................................................................................................................ 174

Introduction to the parametric cross-section ................................................................................................ 174
Defining a new parameter ............................................................................................................................ 174
Assigning the parameters ............................................................................................................................. 174
Example of parameterised cross-section ...................................................................................................... 174

Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................ 179

Library cross-sections...................................................................................................................................... 179

GEOMETRY ........................................................................................................... 181

Elements of a model .......................................................................................................................................... 181

Nodes .................................................................................................................................................................. 181

Introduction to nodes ....................................................................................................................................... 181
Types of nodes................................................................................................................................................. 182
Defining a new node........................................................................................................................................ 183
Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node ................................................................................................ 183
Deleting the nodes ........................................................................................................................................... 184

Beams ................................................................................................................................................................. 184

Introduction to beams ...................................................................................................................................... 184
Common beam parameters .............................................................................................................................. 185
Buckling parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 187
Beam types ...................................................................................................................................................... 187
General beam ............................................................................................................................................... 187
Column ........................................................................................................................................................ 188
Horizontal beam........................................................................................................................................... 189
Haunch beam ............................................................................................................................................... 189
Beam of a variable cross-section.................................................................................................................. 193
Defining a new beam....................................................................................................................................... 194
Inserting a new beam ................................................................................................................................... 194
Inserting a new beam of a complex axis shape ............................................................................................ 195
Defining a haunch on a beam member......................................................................................................... 196
Defining a beam member with a variable cross-section............................................................................... 197

Slabs ................................................................................................................................................................... 197

Slab types ........................................................................................................................................................ 197
Plate ............................................................................................................................................................. 197
Wall.............................................................................................................................................................. 199
Slab components .......................................................................................................................................... 200
Shell ............................................................................................................................................................. 205
Membranes................................................................................................................................................... 208
Orthotropy.................................................................................................................................................... 208
Plates with beams......................................................................................................................................... 213
Defining a new slab ......................................................................................................................................... 215
Defining a new plate .................................................................................................................................... 215
Defining a new wall ..................................................................................................................................... 215
Defining a new subregion ............................................................................................................................ 215
Defining a new opening ............................................................................................................................... 216
Defining a new internal edge ....................................................................................................................... 216
Defining an internal node in a slab .............................................................................................................. 216
Defining a new rib ....................................................................................................................................... 217
Defining a new plate with beams ................................................................................................................. 217
Defining a new plate from beams ................................................................................................................ 220
Defining a new load panel with beams ........................................................................................................ 223
Defining a new load panel ........................................................................................................................... 226
Defining a new shell ........................................................................................................................................ 228
Defining a new shell .................................................................................................................................... 228

ix
 Reference Guide

Sample shells ............................................................................................................................................... 228

Shell templates ............................................................................................................................................. 232
Defining a new membrane............................................................................................................................... 234
Defining a new membrane element.............................................................................................................. 234
Geometric manipulations................................................................................................................................. 234
Geometric manipulations with slabs ............................................................................................................ 234
Editing the shape of a slab ........................................................................................................................... 234
Intersection of two shells ............................................................................................................................. 237
Modification of the geometry and properties of plates with beams ............................................................. 242

General solids .................................................................................................................................................... 245

General solids .................................................................................................................................................. 245
Defining a new general solid ........................................................................................................................... 245
Editing the existing general solid .................................................................................................................... 246
Geometrical manipulations with general solids............................................................................................... 247
Boolean operations with general solids ........................................................................................................... 247

Catalogue blocks ............................................................................................................................................... 249

Introduction to catalogue blocks...................................................................................................................... 249
Overview of catalogue blocks ......................................................................................................................... 249
Catalogue block types...................................................................................................................................... 249
Catalogue block - Beam............................................................................................................................... 249
Catalogue block - 2D frame ......................................................................................................................... 250
Catalogue block - 3D frame ......................................................................................................................... 250
Catalogue block - 2D lattice girder .............................................................................................................. 250
Catalogue block - 3D lattice girder .............................................................................................................. 251
Catalogue block - Mast ................................................................................................................................ 252
Catalogue block - Curve .............................................................................................................................. 253
Defining a new catalogue block ...................................................................................................................... 254
Catalogue block manager............................................................................................................................. 254
Defining a new catalogue block................................................................................................................... 255
Selecting the catalogue block type............................................................................................................... 256
Specifying the block parameters .................................................................................................................. 257
Reviewing the block parameters .................................................................................................................. 258

User blocks......................................................................................................................................................... 258

Introduction to user blocks .............................................................................................................................. 258
Using the user blocks....................................................................................................................................... 258

Moving the entities ............................................................................................................................................ 260

Introduction to moving of entities ................................................................................................................... 260
General rules for move of entities ................................................................................................................... 261
Moving the geometric entities ......................................................................................................................... 263
Moving an entity via the property table ....................................................................................................... 263
Moving an entity via a menu function ......................................................................................................... 263
Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu .......................................................................................... 264
Moving an entity using Drag&Drop feature ................................................................................................ 265
Rotating an entity via its vertex co-ordinate change .................................................................................... 265
Rotating an entity via a menu function ........................................................................................................ 265
Rotating an entity via the right mouse button pop-up menu ........................................................................ 266
Rotating an entity using Drag&Drop feature ............................................................................................... 267
Mirroring an entity....................................................................................................................................... 267
Moving the additional data entities.................................................................................................................. 268
Introduction to moving of additional-data entities ....................................................................................... 268

Copying the entities........................................................................................................................................... 268

Introduction to copying of entities................................................................................................................... 268
Making a single copy via menu function......................................................................................................... 268
Making a single copy via window pop-up menu ............................................................................................. 269
Making multiple copies via menu function ..................................................................................................... 269

x
 Table Of Contents

Deleting the entities ........................................................................................................................................... 271

Introduction to deleting of entities................................................................................................................... 271
Deleting the user-selected entities ................................................................................................................... 271
Deleting invalid entities................................................................................................................................... 271

Editing the entity properties ............................................................................................................................ 272

Introduction to editing of entity properties ...................................................................................................... 272
Editing the beam properties in its property dialogue ....................................................................................... 272
Editing the beam properties in the property window....................................................................................... 272
Adjusting the buckling parameters .................................................................................................................. 273

Modifying the shape and dimensions .............................................................................................................. 273

Treatment of linked nodes in manipulation functions ..................................................................................... 273
Editing the shape in the property window ....................................................................................................... 275
Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature.................................................................................................... 275
Scaling the entities........................................................................................................................................... 276
Stretching the entities ...................................................................................................................................... 276
Trimming the entities ...................................................................................................................................... 277
Extending the entities ...................................................................................................................................... 277
Enlarging the entities ....................................................................................................................................... 278
Breaking the entities in defined points ............................................................................................................ 278
Breaking the entities in intersections ............................................................................................................... 278
Coupling the entities........................................................................................................................................ 279
Reversing the orientation of an entity.............................................................................................................. 279
Inserting a node into a polygonal entity .......................................................................................................... 280
Deleting a node from a polygonal entity ......................................................................................................... 280
Coupling curves into a polyline....................................................................................................................... 281
Editing the circular arc angle........................................................................................................................... 281
Editing the circular arc bulge........................................................................................................................... 281
Editing the circular arc radius.......................................................................................................................... 282
Editing the Bezier curve weight factors........................................................................................................... 282
Converting a curve into a line.......................................................................................................................... 282
Converting a line into a circular arc ................................................................................................................ 283
Converting a line into a parabolic arc.............................................................................................................. 283
Converting a line into a Bezier curve .............................................................................................................. 283
Converting a line into a spline curve ............................................................................................................... 284

Connecting and disconnecting the entities ...................................................................................................... 284

Introduction to connecting and disconnecting of entities ................................................................................ 284
Defining a new connection of two entities ...................................................................................................... 284
Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity............................................................................... 285
Defining a new connection of intersecting entities.......................................................................................... 285
Modifying the connection of two entities ........................................................................................................ 286
Modifying the connection of intersecting entities ........................................................................................... 286
Deleting the connection of two entities ........................................................................................................... 287
Deleting the connection of intersecting entities............................................................................................... 287

Truing of slabs and walls.................................................................................................................................. 288

Parameters controlling the alignment of the structure ..................................................................................... 288

Openings in beams ............................................................................................................................................ 293

Opening in webs of beams............................................................................................................................... 293

Structural model ............................................................................................................................................... 298

Introduction to structural model ...................................................................................................................... 298
Parameters of structural model ........................................................................................................................ 298
Defining the structural model .......................................................................................................................... 303
Displaying the structural model....................................................................................................................... 303
Modifying the structural model ....................................................................................................................... 304
Regenerating the structural model ................................................................................................................... 304

xi
 Reference Guide

Manual input of end cut................................................................................................................................... 304

Structural shape of 2D members...................................................................................................................... 307

MODEL DATA........................................................................................................ 309

Introduction to model data............................................................................................................................... 309

Supports ............................................................................................................................................................. 309

Types of supports ............................................................................................................................................ 309
Point supports .............................................................................................................................................. 309
Line supports................................................................................................................................................ 311
Line support on a slab .................................................................................................................................. 313
Surface support on slab ................................................................................................................................ 313
Friction support............................................................................................................................................ 314
Defining a new support ................................................................................................................................... 316
Defining a new support ................................................................................................................................ 316
Defining a new support on a slab................................................................................................................. 317
Defining a new friction support ................................................................................................................... 317
Fast definition of specific support types ...................................................................................................... 317
Parameters of a non-linear support .............................................................................................................. 318

Hinges (pins) ...................................................................................................................................................... 318

Beams .............................................................................................................................................................. 318
Introduction to hinges .................................................................................................................................. 318
Specifying hinge parameters ........................................................................................................................ 318
Defining a new hinge ................................................................................................................................... 319
Fast definition of specific hinges ................................................................................................................. 319
Slabs ................................................................................................................................................................ 320
Hinges in slabs ............................................................................................................................................. 320

Rigid arms.......................................................................................................................................................... 322

Rigid arms ....................................................................................................................................................... 322
Defining a new rigid arm................................................................................................................................. 322
Defining a new line rigid arm.......................................................................................................................... 323

Modifying the existing model data................................................................................................................... 323

Changing the parameters of model data .......................................................................................................... 323
Moving the model data .................................................................................................................................... 324
Copying the model data................................................................................................................................... 324
Deleting the model data................................................................................................................................... 325

Absences............................................................................................................................................................. 325
Introduction to absences .................................................................................................................................. 325
The principle of Absences ............................................................................................................................... 325
Creating a project allowing for absences......................................................................................................... 326
Absence groups ............................................................................................................................................... 326
Defining a new absence................................................................................................................................... 326
Absence on a beam member ............................................................................................................................ 327
Absences in a support ...................................................................................................................................... 327
Associating the absence group with a load case .............................................................................................. 328
Displaying the required Absence group .......................................................................................................... 328
Editing the existing absence ............................................................................................................................ 328
Deleting the existing absence .......................................................................................................................... 328

Beam nonlinearity ............................................................................................................................................. 329

Defining a new beam nonlinearity................................................................................................................... 329
Editing the existing beam nonlinearity ............................................................................................................ 329
Types of nonlinearity....................................................................................................................................... 329
Tension only ................................................................................................................................................ 329

xii
 Table Of Contents

Press only..................................................................................................................................................... 330

Limit force ................................................................................................................................................... 330
Gap............................................................................................................................................................... 331
Initial stress .................................................................................................................................................. 333
Cable ............................................................................................................................................................ 334

FOUNDATION AND SUBSOIL .............................................................................. 337

Foundation blocks and strips ........................................................................................................................... 337

Foundation block ............................................................................................................................................. 337
Foundation strip............................................................................................................................................... 338
Upper soil of foundation block and strip ......................................................................................................... 338
Defining a new foundation block type............................................................................................................. 339
Inserting the foundation block into model....................................................................................................... 339
Defining a new foundation strip ...................................................................................................................... 339

Subsoil ................................................................................................................................................................ 340

Introduction to subsoil ..................................................................................................................................... 340
Defining a new subsoil type ............................................................................................................................ 340
Defining subsoil parameters ............................................................................................................................ 340
Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a beam member .................................................................................... 341
Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a slab..................................................................................................... 341
Using the subsoil ............................................................................................................................................. 342

Geologic profile ................................................................................................................................................. 342

Geologic profile manager ................................................................................................................................ 342
Defining a new geologic profile ...................................................................................................................... 343
Editing the existing geologic profile................................................................................................................ 344

Boreholes............................................................................................................................................................ 344
Introduction to boreholes................................................................................................................................. 344
Inserting a new borehole.................................................................................................................................. 345
Editing the existing borehole ........................................................................................................................... 346
Deleting the existing borehole ......................................................................................................................... 346
Displaying or hiding the existing boreholes .................................................................................................... 346
Displaying the earth surface ............................................................................................................................ 346
Refreshing the earth surface ............................................................................................................................ 347

Interaction with subsoil (Soilin) ....................................................................................................................... 347

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 347
Geometry ......................................................................................................................................................... 348
Defining a new Soilin support ......................................................................................................................... 348
Surface support on slab ................................................................................................................................... 348
Soilin calculation parameters........................................................................................................................... 349
Calculated C parameters.................................................................................................................................. 350
Literature ......................................................................................................................................................... 351

LOADS ................................................................................................................... 355

Introduction to loads......................................................................................................................................... 355

Load types.......................................................................................................................................................... 355

Introduction to load types ................................................................................................................................ 355
Point force in node........................................................................................................................................... 355
Point force on beam......................................................................................................................................... 356
Line force on beam.......................................................................................................................................... 357
Line force on slab edge.................................................................................................................................... 359
Surface load on slab......................................................................................................................................... 360
Moment load in node....................................................................................................................................... 361

xiii
 Reference Guide

Moment load on beam ..................................................................................................................................... 361

Line moment load on beam ............................................................................................................................. 361
Line moment on slab edge............................................................................................................................... 361
Thermal load on beam ..................................................................................................................................... 362
Temperature distribution curve ....................................................................................................................... 363
Thermal load on slab ....................................................................................................................................... 365
Translation of support...................................................................................................................................... 366
Translation of a point on beam ........................................................................................................................ 366
Rotation of support .......................................................................................................................................... 367
Rotation of a point on beam ............................................................................................................................ 368
Longitudinal strain........................................................................................................................................... 368
Flexural strain.................................................................................................................................................. 369
Slab displacement and curvature ..................................................................................................................... 369
Pond load - water accumulation ...................................................................................................................... 372
Soil pressure and water pressure ..................................................................................................................... 374
Pressure load.................................................................................................................................................... 377
Internal forces not calculated in the model ...................................................................................................... 377
Dynamic loads ................................................................................................................................................. 380
Harmonic load.............................................................................................................................................. 380
Seismic load ................................................................................................................................................. 380
General seismisity........................................................................................................................................ 382
Free loads ........................................................................................................................................................ 382
Introduction to free loads ............................................................................................................................. 382
Free point load ............................................................................................................................................. 386
Free moment load ........................................................................................................................................ 386
Free line load ............................................................................................................................................... 386
Free surface load .......................................................................................................................................... 387
Displaying the generated free surface load .................................................................................................. 388

Load direction ................................................................................................................................................... 388

Direction of loads ............................................................................................................................................ 388

Defining a new load........................................................................................................................................... 390

Defining a new point load in a node................................................................................................................ 390
Defining a new point load on a beam .............................................................................................................. 390
Defining a new line load on a beam ................................................................................................................ 390
Defining a new thermal load on a beam .......................................................................................................... 391
Defining a new line load on slab edge............................................................................................................. 391
Defining a new surface load on a slab ............................................................................................................. 391
Defining a new thermal load on slab ............................................................................................................... 391
Defining a new free point load ........................................................................................................................ 392
Defining a new free line load .......................................................................................................................... 392
Defining a new free surface load ..................................................................................................................... 392
Defining a new slab displacement ................................................................................................................... 392
Fast definition of specific load types ............................................................................................................... 392

Modifying the existing load .............................................................................................................................. 393

Changing the load parameters ......................................................................................................................... 393
Moving the load............................................................................................................................................... 393
Copying the load.............................................................................................................................................. 393
Deleting the load.............................................................................................................................................. 393
Editing the shape of free load .......................................................................................................................... 393

Load cases .......................................................................................................................................................... 394

Introduction to load cases ................................................................................................................................ 394
Load case manager .......................................................................................................................................... 394
Defining a new load case................................................................................................................................. 394
Defining the load case parameters................................................................................................................... 395
Using the load case .......................................................................................................................................... 396
Dynamic load cases ......................................................................................................................................... 397

xiv
 Table Of Contents

Dynamic load cases...................................................................................................................................... 397

Defining a new dynamic load case............................................................................................................... 397
Defining the harmonic load case.................................................................................................................. 397
Defining the seismic load case..................................................................................................................... 398
Defining the seismic spectrum ..................................................................................................................... 399

Load groups ....................................................................................................................................................... 399

Introduction to load groups.............................................................................................................................. 399
Load group manager........................................................................................................................................ 400
Defining a new load group .............................................................................................................................. 400
Using the load group ....................................................................................................................................... 401

Load case combinations.................................................................................................................................... 401

Introduction to load case combinations ........................................................................................................... 401
Types of load case combinations..................................................................................................................... 402
Load case combination manager ..................................................................................................................... 403
Defining a new combination............................................................................................................................ 405
Exploding the load case combination .............................................................................................................. 405
Combination key ............................................................................................................................................. 406
Example........................................................................................................................................................... 406
Load case combinations according to EC........................................................................................................ 410
Load case combinations to ÈSN ...................................................................................................................... 413
Load case combinations to NEN ..................................................................................................................... 416
Advanced combinations of load cases ............................................................................................................. 417
Non-linear combinations.............................................................................................................................. 417
Stability combination ................................................................................................................................... 418

Result classes ..................................................................................................................................................... 419

Introduction to result classes ........................................................................................................................... 419
Result class manager ....................................................................................................................................... 419
Defining a new result class .............................................................................................................................. 419
Using the result class ....................................................................................................................................... 420

Load generators................................................................................................................................................. 420

Introduction to load generators........................................................................................................................ 420
Wind generator ................................................................................................................................................ 420
Wind generator ............................................................................................................................................ 420
Types of wind load....................................................................................................................................... 421
Using the wind generator ............................................................................................................................. 423
Adjusting the wind generator parameters .................................................................................................... 423
Example of wind generator application ....................................................................................................... 426
Snow generator ................................................................................................................................................ 431
Snow generator ............................................................................................................................................ 431
Types of snow load ...................................................................................................................................... 431
Using the snow generator............................................................................................................................. 432
Adjusting the snow generator parameters .................................................................................................... 432
Snow weight to EC1 .................................................................................................................................... 434
Combined wind and snow generator ............................................................................................................... 435
Snow and wind generator............................................................................................................................. 435
Plane load generator ........................................................................................................................................ 436
Introduction to plane load generator ............................................................................................................ 436
Principle of plane load generator ................................................................................................................. 436
Parameters of plane load .............................................................................................................................. 436
Defining a new plane load ........................................................................................................................... 437
Inputting the loading polygon ...................................................................................................................... 438
Editing the polygon...................................................................................................................................... 439
Pond water ....................................................................................................................................................... 442
Introduction to pond load............................................................................................................................. 442
Pond load - water accumulation................................................................................................................... 442
Defining a new pond load ............................................................................................................................ 445

xv
 Reference Guide

Theoretical background ............................................................................................................................... 446

Span loads .......................................................................................................................................................... 447

Introduction to spans ....................................................................................................................................... 447
What is the span............................................................................................................................................... 448
Types of spans ................................................................................................................................................. 449
Span defined by means of polyline .............................................................................................................. 449
Span defined by means of linked nodes....................................................................................................... 450
Work with spans .............................................................................................................................................. 453
Defining a new span-load ............................................................................................................................ 453
Changing location of span-load ................................................................................................................... 455
Modifying the span length ........................................................................................................................... 455
Copying the span-load to another beam member......................................................................................... 457
Copying beam members subject to span-load.............................................................................................. 457

Predefined load.................................................................................................................................................. 457

Introduction to predefined loads...................................................................................................................... 457
Predefined load manager ................................................................................................................................. 457
Defining a new predefined load....................................................................................................................... 458
Editing the predefined load.............................................................................................................................. 458
Applying the predefined load .......................................................................................................................... 459
Input and display conventions for predefined load.......................................................................................... 460

Mobile load ........................................................................................................................................................ 461

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 461
Brief introduction to the theory ....................................................................................................................... 461
Influence lines.............................................................................................................................................. 461
Application of mobile load .......................................................................................................................... 462
General facts ................................................................................................................................................ 462
Simple load system ...................................................................................................................................... 462
Advanced load system ................................................................................................................................. 463
Determining the maximal effect of distributed load .................................................................................... 463
Determining the maximal effect of concentrated forces .............................................................................. 464
Determining the maximal effect of the combination of distributed and concentrated loads........................ 465
Parameters used to determine the maximal effect........................................................................................ 465
Loading track................................................................................................................................................... 465
Defining a new track .................................................................................................................................... 465
Editing the existing track ............................................................................................................................. 466
Deleting the existing track ........................................................................................................................... 466
Unit loads ........................................................................................................................................................ 466
Unit loads ..................................................................................................................................................... 466
Unit loads manager ...................................................................................................................................... 466
Defining a new unit load.............................................................................................................................. 467
Load systems ................................................................................................................................................... 468
Load systems................................................................................................................................................ 468
Mobile load systems manager...................................................................................................................... 468
Simple load system ...................................................................................................................................... 468
Advanced load system ................................................................................................................................. 469
Defining a new load system ......................................................................................................................... 471
Generated load cases ....................................................................................................................................... 471
Theory.......................................................................................................................................................... 471
Manager for generated load cases ................................................................................................................ 471
Specifying a new definition for generation of load cases ............................................................................ 471
Calculation and evaluation .............................................................................................................................. 473
Calculation and evaluation procedure.......................................................................................................... 473
Calculating the influence lines ..................................................................................................................... 473
Reviewing the calculated influence lines ..................................................................................................... 473
Calculating the utilisation of influence lines................................................................................................ 474
Evaluating the utilisation ............................................................................................................................. 475

xvi
 Table Of Contents

MASSES ................................................................................................................ 477

Introduction to masses...................................................................................................................................... 477

Mass types.......................................................................................................................................................... 477

Point mass........................................................................................................................................................ 477
Line mass......................................................................................................................................................... 477

Defining a mew mass......................................................................................................................................... 478

Defining a new point mass in node.................................................................................................................. 478
Defining a new point mass on a beam member ............................................................................................... 478
Defining a new line mass on a beam member ................................................................................................. 478

Modifying the existing mass ............................................................................................................................. 479

Editing the existing mass................................................................................................................................. 479
Moving the existing mass ................................................................................................................................ 479
Copying the existing mass............................................................................................................................... 479
Deleting the existing mass ............................................................................................................................... 479

Mass groups ....................................................................................................................................................... 479

Introduction to mass groups ............................................................................................................................ 479
Mass group manager........................................................................................................................................ 479
Defining a new mass group ............................................................................................................................. 479
Defining the mass group parameters ............................................................................................................... 480

Combinations of mass groups .......................................................................................................................... 481

Introduction to combinations of mass groups.................................................................................................. 481
Mass group combination manager................................................................................................................... 481

CONSTRUCTION STAGES, PRESTRESSING, TDA............................................ 483

Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 483

Brief introduction to construction stages ........................................................................................................ 484

Brief introduction to prestressing.................................................................................................................... 484

Brief introduction to TDA ................................................................................................................................ 484

Implementation of construction stages and TDA ........................................................................................... 485

Modulus of elasticity changing over time........................................................................................................ 485

Application in your design practice ................................................................................................................. 486

References .......................................................................................................................................................... 486

Preparatory operations..................................................................................................................................... 486

Input of geometry and other data..................................................................................................................... 486
Adjustment of parameters................................................................................................................................ 487

Construction stages ........................................................................................................................................... 487

Creating a Construction stages project ............................................................................................................ 487
Construction stages setup ................................................................................................................................ 487
Construction stages manager ........................................................................................................................... 488
Creating a new construction stage ................................................................................................................... 488
Defining the changes to the structural scheme ................................................................................................ 492
Phased cross-section ........................................................................................................................................ 492
Defining the introduction of a new phase of the cross-section ........................................................................ 494

xvii
 Reference Guide

Running the calculation ................................................................................................................................... 494

Results of construction stages analysis............................................................................................................ 495

Nonlinear construction stages .......................................................................................................................... 495

Nonlinear construction stages.......................................................................................................................... 495
Linear versus Non-linear construction stages .................................................................................................. 496

TDA (Time Dependent Analysis) ..................................................................................................................... 498

Input ................................................................................................................................................................ 498
TDA setup.................................................................................................................................................... 498
Material setup .............................................................................................................................................. 499
Mesh setup ................................................................................................................................................... 500
Calculation setup.......................................................................................................................................... 500
Local beam history....................................................................................................................................... 500
Time axis...................................................................................................................................................... 501
Analysis ........................................................................................................................................................... 502
Finite Element formulation .......................................................................................................................... 502
Modelling of prestressing............................................................................................................................. 503
Solution strategy .......................................................................................................................................... 504
Running the calculation ............................................................................................................................... 504
Results ............................................................................................................................................................. 505
Standard results ............................................................................................................................................ 505
Tendon stresses ............................................................................................................................................ 505

Prestressing........................................................................................................................................................ 509
Pre-tensioned prestressed concrete .................................................................................................................. 509
Introduction to prestressing.......................................................................................................................... 509
Materials of Prestressing Tendons ............................................................................................................... 509
Properties of pre-tensioned tendons ............................................................................................................. 509
Types of Prestressing Units.......................................................................................................................... 511
Short-term losses.......................................................................................................................................... 512
Stressing bed ................................................................................................................................................ 513
Bore hole pattern.......................................................................................................................................... 514
Sectional strand pattern................................................................................................................................ 518
Beam strand pattern ..................................................................................................................................... 521
Results.......................................................................................................................................................... 525
Post-tensioned prestressed concrete ................................................................................................................ 529
Source geometry .......................................................................................................................................... 529
Internal tendons............................................................................................................................................ 536
External tendons........................................................................................................................................... 542
Results.......................................................................................................................................................... 543

CALCULATION...................................................................................................... 545

Introduction to calculation ............................................................................................................................... 545

Checking the data.............................................................................................................................................. 545

Introduction to check of data ........................................................................................................................... 545
Parameters of data check ................................................................................................................................. 545
Performing the check of data........................................................................................................................... 546

Generating the FE mesh ................................................................................................................................... 547

Parameters of FE mesh .................................................................................................................................... 547
Previewing the FE mesh .................................................................................................................................. 549
Mesh refinement.............................................................................................................................................. 550
Mesh refinement .......................................................................................................................................... 550
Refinement around a node ........................................................................................................................... 550
Refinement along a line ............................................................................................................................... 551
Refinement across an area............................................................................................................................ 551

xviii
 Table Of Contents

Calculation types ............................................................................................................................................... 551

General calculation parameters........................................................................................................................ 551
Static linear calculation ................................................................................................................................... 552
Static nonlinear calculation ............................................................................................................................. 552
Dynamic natural vibration calculation............................................................................................................. 553
Dynamic forced harmonic vibration ................................................................................................................ 553
Harmonic band analysis................................................................................................................................... 553
Dynamic seismic calculation ........................................................................................................................... 557
Buckling analysis............................................................................................................................................. 558
Nonlinear stability calculation......................................................................................................................... 558
Soilin calculation parameters........................................................................................................................... 558
Non uniform damping in dynamic calculation ................................................................................................ 558
Non uniform damping.................................................................................................................................. 558
Damper setup ............................................................................................................................................... 559
Defining a new damping group.................................................................................................................... 559
Defining a new damper ................................................................................................................................ 559

Performing the calculation ............................................................................................................................... 560

Adjusting the calculation parameters............................................................................................................... 560
Performing the calculation............................................................................................................................... 560
Controlling and reviewing the calculation process.......................................................................................... 561
Performing the repetitious calculations ........................................................................................................... 562
Repairing the instability of model ................................................................................................................... 562

Solution methods ............................................................................................................................................... 563

Direct solution ................................................................................................................................................. 563
Iterative solution .............................................................................................................................................. 563
Timoshenko method ........................................................................................................................................ 564
Newton-Raphson method ................................................................................................................................ 564

Initial deformations........................................................................................................................................... 564

Introduction to initial deformations ................................................................................................................. 564
Initial-deformation manager ............................................................................................................................ 564
Initial deformation curve ................................................................................................................................. 565
Defining a new initial deformation curve ........................................................................................................ 565
Applying the initial deformation ..................................................................................................................... 566

Plastic hinges ..................................................................................................................................................... 566

Introduction to plastic hinges .......................................................................................................................... 566
Plastic hinges to EC3....................................................................................................................................... 566
Plastic hinges to DIN 18800............................................................................................................................ 567
Plastic hinges to NEN...................................................................................................................................... 567
Calculating with plastic hinges........................................................................................................................ 568

Global optimisation........................................................................................................................................... 568

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 568
Optimisation manager ..................................................................................................................................... 569
Defining a new optimisation............................................................................................................................ 569

Advanced calculations ...................................................................................................................................... 570

Advanced calculations..................................................................................................................................... 570

RESULTS............................................................................................................... 571

Opening the service Results.............................................................................................................................. 571

Selecting the beam members for display......................................................................................................... 571

Selecting the load for the display of results..................................................................................................... 573

xix
 Reference Guide

Adjusting the style of result diagrams............................................................................................................. 573

Regenerating the diagrams............................................................................................................................... 576

Animation of results.......................................................................................................................................... 576

Results on beams ............................................................................................................................................... 578

Displaying the internal forces.......................................................................................................................... 578
Displaying the deformation on beam members ............................................................................................... 579
Displaying the deformation of nodes............................................................................................................... 580
Displaying the resultant of reactions ............................................................................................................... 580
Displaying the nodal space support resultant .................................................................................................. 580
Displaying the reactions .................................................................................................................................. 583
Displaying the foundation table....................................................................................................................... 584
Displaying the bill of material ......................................................................................................................... 586
Displaying the intensity ................................................................................................................................... 587
Displaying the stress on members ................................................................................................................... 588
Selecting the joints for display of connection forces ....................................................................................... 589
Displaying the connection forces..................................................................................................................... 589
Displaying the calculation report..................................................................................................................... 590
Displaying the results in tabular form ............................................................................................................. 590
Displaying the results in named fibres............................................................................................................. 591
Displaying the stress distribution over the cross-section ................................................................................. 594
Fast selection of result quantities for the display............................................................................................. 595
Displaying the natural frequencies .................................................................................................................. 595
Evaluating the results for harmonic load ......................................................................................................... 596
Calculation of internal forces in ribs ............................................................................................................... 596

Results on slabs.................................................................................................................................................. 597

Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs................................................................................................. 597
Displaying the internal forces on slabs ............................................................................................................ 598
Principal internal forces................................................................................................................................... 599
Design internal forces...................................................................................................................................... 600
Displaying the stresses on slabs....................................................................................................................... 601
Stresses ............................................................................................................................................................ 602
Displaying the contact stress on slabs ............................................................................................................. 602
Calculated C parameters.................................................................................................................................. 602
Displaying the settlement ................................................................................................................................ 603
Results in membrane elements ........................................................................................................................ 604
Displaying results for individual FE nodes or elements .................................................................................. 605
Isolines, isobands, etc. ..................................................................................................................................... 606
Style of isolines............................................................................................................................................ 606
Detailed setup .............................................................................................................................................. 615
Palette values for isobands/isolines.............................................................................................................. 616
Averaging strips............................................................................................................................................... 617
Averaging strips ........................................................................................................................................... 617
Defining a new averaging strip .................................................................................................................... 619
Editing the existing averaging strip.............................................................................................................. 624
Deleting the averaging strip ......................................................................................................................... 625
Displaying the averaged results ................................................................................................................... 625
View parameters related to averaging strips ................................................................................................ 625

Refreshing the results ....................................................................................................................................... 626

Principle........................................................................................................................................................... 626
Refresh of results............................................................................................................................................. 626
Example for refresh of results ......................................................................................................................... 627

Selected sections ................................................................................................................................................ 630

Selected sections for result diagrams............................................................................................................... 630
Defining a new section for display of results .................................................................................................. 631

xx
 Table Of Contents

Displaying the results in selected sections....................................................................................................... 631

Displaying the resultant in the section across a slab........................................................................................ 637

GRAPHIC OUTPUT ............................................................................................... 639

Introduction to graphic output ........................................................................................................................ 639

Direct graphic output........................................................................................................................................ 639

Making the direct graphic output..................................................................................................................... 639
Editing the graphic output layout .................................................................................................................... 639
Adjusting the page for the drawing ................................................................................................................. 642
Saving the drawing to an external file ............................................................................................................. 643
Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue................................................................................... 643
Using the templates in graphic output ............................................................................................................. 644
Items of graphic output drawing...................................................................................................................... 644
Line .............................................................................................................................................................. 644
Polyline ........................................................................................................................................................ 644
Rectangle ..................................................................................................................................................... 644
Circle............................................................................................................................................................ 645
Text .............................................................................................................................................................. 645
Automatic text.............................................................................................................................................. 645
Title block .................................................................................................................................................... 646
Picture .......................................................................................................................................................... 647
Inserting and editing the items of the drawing ................................................................................................ 649
Inserting the text into graphic output drawing ............................................................................................. 649
Adding the title block to the drawing........................................................................................................... 649
Inserting the picture into graphic output drawing ........................................................................................ 649
Adjusting the picture properties................................................................................................................... 651
Editing the items of graphic output drawing................................................................................................ 652
Moving the item of a drawing...................................................................................................................... 652
Copying the item of a drawing..................................................................................................................... 653
Resizing the item of a drawing .................................................................................................................... 653
Rotating the item of a drawing..................................................................................................................... 653
Selecting the suitable stretch mode .............................................................................................................. 654
Grouping of items ........................................................................................................................................ 655

Picture gallery ................................................................................................................................................... 655

Introduction to the picture gallery ................................................................................................................... 655
Picture gallery manager ................................................................................................................................... 655
Using the Picture gallery manager ............................................................................................................... 655
Adjusting the manager ................................................................................................................................. 657
Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery............................................................................................ 657
Processing the pictures in the Picture gallery............................................................................................... 660
Editing the picture in the picture gallery ......................................................................................................... 664
Introduction to editing of picture ................................................................................................................. 664
Printing the edited picture ............................................................................................................................ 664
Exporting the edited picture ......................................................................................................................... 664
Copying the edited picture to clipboard ....................................................................................................... 664
Adjusting the editing dialogue ..................................................................................................................... 664
Adjusting the view ....................................................................................................................................... 665
Adding the manually drawn entities ............................................................................................................ 668
Modifying the manually drawn entities ....................................................................................................... 671
Modifying the window drawing................................................................................................................... 674

Paper space gallery ........................................................................................................................................... 674

Introduction to Paper space gallery ................................................................................................................. 674
Paper space gallery manager ........................................................................................................................... 675
Editing the drawing in the gallery ................................................................................................................... 675
Creating a new drawing in the gallery............................................................................................................. 675

xxi
 Reference Guide

Creating a new drawing based on a template .................................................................................................. 676

Printing the drawing from the gallery.............................................................................................................. 676
Copying the drawing in the gallery ................................................................................................................. 676
Deleting the drawing from the gallery............................................................................................................. 676
Making or changing the drawing..................................................................................................................... 676
Saving a template ............................................................................................................................................ 677
Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings..................................................................................... 677

DOCUMENT........................................................................................................... 679

Introduction to document................................................................................................................................. 679

Document window............................................................................................................................................. 679

Introduction to document window................................................................................................................... 679
Opening the document window ....................................................................................................................... 680
Document window toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 680
Creating the document..................................................................................................................................... 681
Inserting a new item into document ............................................................................................................. 681
Inserting a new item into document from the graphical window................................................................. 682
Inserting a drawing into the document......................................................................................................... 685
Inserting a picture from the Picture gallery.................................................................................................. 685
Inserting a new text line ............................................................................................................................... 686
Inserting an external image file.................................................................................................................... 686
Inserting an external text file ....................................................................................................................... 687
Inserting the end of page.............................................................................................................................. 687
Inserting the table of contents ...................................................................................................................... 687
Inserting an empty chapter........................................................................................................................... 687
Creating the advanced documents................................................................................................................ 688
Editing the basic document properties............................................................................................................. 691
Manager of documents................................................................................................................................. 691
Basic document properties ........................................................................................................................... 692
Adjusting basic document properties ........................................................................................................... 693
Document action buttons ............................................................................................................................. 694
Editing the document layout............................................................................................................................ 694
Introduction to editing of document layout.................................................................................................. 694
Editing the properties of document items .................................................................................................... 694
Sorting the items of the document ............................................................................................................... 695
Deleting the items from the document ......................................................................................................... 695
Editing the header ........................................................................................................................................ 695
Editing the footer ......................................................................................................................................... 695
Document-tree pop-up menu ....................................................................................................................... 696
Modifying the structure through the document ............................................................................................... 696
Editing the geometry in the document table................................................................................................. 696
Editing the additional data in the document table ........................................................................................ 697
Previewing the document ................................................................................................................................ 697
Adjusting the document preview ................................................................................................................. 697
Printing and exporting the document............................................................................................................... 698
Adjusting the printing device ....................................................................................................................... 698
Printing the document .................................................................................................................................. 698
Exporting the document ............................................................................................................................... 698

Refreshing the document .................................................................................................................................. 700

Principle........................................................................................................................................................... 700
Refresh of document........................................................................................................................................ 700
Example for refresh of Document ................................................................................................................... 700

Preview window................................................................................................................................................. 702

Introduction to preview window...................................................................................................................... 702
Opening the preview window.......................................................................................................................... 703

xxii
 Table Of Contents

Adjusting the display style in the preview window ......................................................................................... 703

Adjusting the preview window settings........................................................................................................... 703
Exporting the preview ..................................................................................................................................... 703
Printing the preview ........................................................................................................................................ 703
Editing the structure from within the preview window ................................................................................... 703

Visual style of the document............................................................................................................................. 704

Visual style ...................................................................................................................................................... 704
Visual styles manager...................................................................................................................................... 704
Adjusting the visual style ................................................................................................................................ 704

Table Manager and Table Composer .............................................................................................................. 707

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 707
Manufacturer's versus user's table template..................................................................................................... 707
Table Manager................................................................................................................................................. 709
Table Manager dialogue .............................................................................................................................. 709
Creating a new table template ...................................................................................................................... 710
Modifying the existing table template.......................................................................................................... 710
Renaming the existing user-defined template .............................................................................................. 711
Deleting the existing table template............................................................................................................. 711
Copying the existing table template............................................................................................................. 711
Selecting the required template for display.................................................................................................. 712
Table Composer............................................................................................................................................... 712
Table Composer dialogue ............................................................................................................................ 712
Standard settings .......................................................................................................................................... 713
Examples...................................................................................................................................................... 716
Simplified Table Composer dialogue........................................................................................................... 719
Advanced settings ........................................................................................................................................ 719

TEMPLATES AND PARAMETERS ....................................................................... 725

Project templates............................................................................................................................................... 725

Introduction to templates ................................................................................................................................. 725
Template manager ........................................................................................................................................... 725
Creating a template.......................................................................................................................................... 726
Opening a template.......................................................................................................................................... 726
Selected manipulations with templates............................................................................................................ 726

Parametric input ............................................................................................................................................... 727

Introduction to parametric input ...................................................................................................................... 727
Using the parameters in the project ................................................................................................................. 728
Parameters manager ..................................................................................................................................... 728
Defining the parameters ............................................................................................................................... 728
Available parameter types............................................................................................................................ 728
Modifying the existing parameters............................................................................................................... 731
Deleting the existing parameters.................................................................................................................. 731
Applying the parameters .............................................................................................................................. 732
Boolean operators in parameters.................................................................................................................. 732
Using numerical constants in parameters..................................................................................................... 733
Creating a parameter-based template............................................................................................................... 734
Preparing the project for becoming a parameter-based template ................................................................. 734
Manager of parameter sets ........................................................................................................................... 734
Defining the set of parameters ..................................................................................................................... 735
Saving the parameter-based template........................................................................................................... 736
Using the parameter-based template................................................................................................................ 736
Opening the parameter-based template ........................................................................................................ 736
Example - three span continuous beam ........................................................................................................... 737
Defining a normal continuous beam ............................................................................................................ 737
Specifying the parameters ............................................................................................................................ 738

xxiii
 Reference Guide

Arranging the parameters into sets............................................................................................................... 740

Saving the project as template ..................................................................................................................... 741
Opening the template ................................................................................................................................... 742

ROUNDTRIP - IMPORT, EXPORT, UPDATE........................................................ 745

Introduction to roundtrip................................................................................................................................. 745

SCIA ESA PT .................................................................................................................................................... 747

SCIA ESA PT.................................................................................................................................................. 747
SCIA ESA PT import ...................................................................................................................................... 747
SCIA ESA PT export....................................................................................................................................... 747
SCIA ESA PT update ...................................................................................................................................... 747
SCIA ESA PT update dialogue ....................................................................................................................... 747

Allplan................................................................................................................................................................ 750
Allplan ............................................................................................................................................................. 750
Allplan - Importing SCIA ESA data................................................................................................................ 750
Allplan - Update from ESA file....................................................................................................................... 751
Allplan - Exporting SCIA ESA data................................................................................................................ 751
Allplan - Save to ESA file ............................................................................................................................... 751
Allplan - Edit in Modeller ............................................................................................................................... 752
Allplan - Calculate ESA .................................................................................................................................. 752

Esa-PrimaWin ................................................................................................................................................... 753

Esa PrimaWin.................................................................................................................................................. 753
Esa PrimaWin import ...................................................................................................................................... 753
Esa PrimaWin export....................................................................................................................................... 753

Esa In.................................................................................................................................................................. 753

Esa In............................................................................................................................................................... 753
Esa In import ................................................................................................................................................... 754
Esa In export.................................................................................................................................................... 754

XML ................................................................................................................................................................... 754

XML ................................................................................................................................................................ 754
XML import .................................................................................................................................................... 754
XML export..................................................................................................................................................... 754
XML file editor................................................................................................................................................ 755
XML update .................................................................................................................................................... 755
XML update example ...................................................................................................................................... 756

Graphical format............................................................................................................................................... 763

Graphic format................................................................................................................................................. 763
Graphic format export ..................................................................................................................................... 765
Export and import of DXF, DWG and VRML ................................................................................................ 766
Export from the graphical window .............................................................................................................. 766
Export from the picture gallery .................................................................................................................... 767
Export from the Paperspace gallery ............................................................................................................. 767
Import into the graphical window................................................................................................................ 767
Import into the Paperspace gallery............................................................................................................... 771
Import of a general cross-section ................................................................................................................. 775

Revit ................................................................................................................................................................... 776

Revit ................................................................................................................................................................ 776
Revit import..................................................................................................................................................... 777
Revit export ..................................................................................................................................................... 777
Revit update..................................................................................................................................................... 777

xxiv
 Table Of Contents

IFC...................................................................................................................................................................... 781
IFC................................................................................................................................................................... 781
IFC import ....................................................................................................................................................... 782
IFC export........................................................................................................................................................ 783
IFC update ....................................................................................................................................................... 783

DSTV.................................................................................................................................................................. 784
DSTV .............................................................................................................................................................. 784
DSTV import ................................................................................................................................................... 784
DSTV export ................................................................................................................................................... 784

ProSteel .............................................................................................................................................................. 785

Pro Steel .......................................................................................................................................................... 785
Pro Steel import............................................................................................................................................... 785
Pro Steel export ............................................................................................................................................... 786
Pro Steel update............................................................................................................................................... 788

StepSteel............................................................................................................................................................. 789
StepSteel - analysis model ............................................................................................................................... 789
StepSteel - import of analysis model ............................................................................................................... 790
StepSteel - export of analysis model ............................................................................................................... 790
StepSteel - structural model............................................................................................................................. 791
StepSteel - import of structural model............................................................................................................. 791
StepSteel - export of structural model ............................................................................................................. 791

CEA Plant-4D.................................................................................................................................................... 791

CEA Pland-4D................................................................................................................................................. 791

Tekla................................................................................................................................................................... 792
Tekla................................................................................................................................................................ 792

Google Earth...................................................................................................................................................... 792

Google Earth.................................................................................................................................................... 792

ADVANCED MODULES ........................................................................................ 793

Design of connections........................................................................................................................................ 793

Frame connections........................................................................................................................................... 793
Theoretical background for frame connections ............................................................................................... 793

Code checks ....................................................................................................................................................... 793

Code checks of steel structures........................................................................................................................ 793
Theoretical background for steel code checks................................................................................................. 793
Code check of concrete structures ................................................................................................................... 793
Theoretical background for concrete code check ............................................................................................ 793
Code checks of timber structures..................................................................................................................... 793

GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................... 795

xxv
Welcome to SCIA Scientific Software
Thank you for choosing SCIA.ESA PT.

SCIA
1974-2007 Version 2007.1

scia scia

Reference Guide
scia scia

SCIA.ESA PT is a Windows software system for calculation and design of civil engineering structures.
It provides a wide range of application:
from calculation of simple single-beam structures
to analysis of frames
to advanced design of complex and extensive three dimensional projects of steel, concrete, timber, and
almost any other material.

You can find more about the company and its products on www.scia-online.com. You may get connected to
SCIA Internet pages through program function Help > SCIA On-line.

Version info

Documentation title Reference Guide

Version 20071:01
Produced 2007
Translated N/A

Software covered SCIA ESA PT

Version 2007.1
Build 7.1.01 – 7.1.178

1
Getting started
Disclaimer
This document is being furnished by SCIA for information purposes only to licensed users of SCIA software
and is furnished on an "AS IS" basis, that is, without any warranties, whatsoever, expressed or implied. SCIA
is not responsible for direct or indirect damage as a result of imperfections in the documentation and/or
software.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of SCIA. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software
may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license agreement. It is against the law to copy or use
the software except as specifically allowed in the license.

© Copyright 2000-2004 SCIA Group. All rights reserved.

Contact address
SCIA Group n.v.
Scientific Application Group
Industrieweg 1007 B-3540 Herk-de-Stad (België)
Tel.(+32) (0)13/55 17 75 Fax.(+32) (0)13/55 41 75
E-mail scia@scia.be

SCIA W+B Software b.v.

Postbus 30119 NL-6803 AC Arnhem (Nederland)
Tel.(+31) 26-3201230 Fax.(+31) 26-3201239
E-mail scia@scia.nl

SCIA CZ, s.r.o.

Thákurova 3, 160 00, Prague 6 (Czech Republic)
Tel.(+420) 2 – 2432 2425 Fax. (+420) 2 – 2432 2288
e-mail info.praha@scia.cz

SCIA CZ, s.r.o.

Slavíèkova 1a, 638 00, Brno (Czech Republic)
Tel.(+420) 5 – 4519 3526 Fax. (+420) 5 – 4519 3533
e-mail info.brno@scia.cz

3
Reference Guide

Introduction
About program
Program mission
The SCIA.ESA PT software system has been designed and developed to provide structural engineers and
designers with an efficient, comprehensive and robust tool.
Theoretical background
SCIA.ESA PT is a software system for a static and dynamic analysis of structures and their design to
standards. It is grounded on the displacement-based finite element method.
SCIA.ESA PT does not work with finite elements directly but it exploits structural elements (referred to as
members) on which a finite element mesh is automatically generated just before the calculation.
SCIA.ESA PT can be used to calculate and design structures consisting of beam members (modelled by linear
finite elements) and planar parts such as walls, plates, and curved slabs (modelled by 2D finite elements).
Types of calculation
SCIA.ESA PT comprises calculation modules for the following types of calculation:
 linear static calculation (including some non-linear features),
 geometrically non-linear calculation,
 dynamic natural vibration calculation,
 seismicity calculation,
 buckling analysis.
Code checks
In addition to the calculation itself, SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to carry out the final design of a structure in
accordance with appropriate technical standards.
The "Code Check library" of SCIA.ESA PT contains a multi-national set of technical standards for various
material types, mainly for steel and concrete.

Important note: A proper and exhaustive application of program features assumes that a user is
well accustomed to the principles of the finite element method, is familiar with appropriate technical
standards and conventions, and is a skilled professional in the field of design and calculation of
engineering structures.

About documentation
We recommend undergoing a specialised training for SCIA.ESA PT organised for you by your
local SCIA dealer before using the program for real work.
The documentation contains explanation of the program principles, theoretical background and operation and
will provide the user with invaluable knowledge about the SCIA.ESA PT software.
Purpose and contents
This manual provides an in-depth coverage of SCIA.ESA PT main module functionality and covers the input,
calculation and result-evaluation phases for both frame and shell structures.
Special modules such as those for non-linear or dynamic calculation, for design to individual technical
standards, etc. are handled in separate manuals.
Style
The following text format conventions and symbols are used throughout this manual:

bold Indicates texts used in the program (menus, texts in dialog

windows, buttons, etc.).
E.g. Enter the length of the beam member in the Length field.
[bold] Indicates a button.
E.g. Click on [OK] to confirm.

 Step 1 Indicates the different steps in a procedure. Each step

describes one action.
 Step 2

4
 Getting started

E.g.
Enter the value in the Coefficient field.
Click on [OK] to confirm.
Menu > Submenu Indicates items and subitems from the main menu (on top of
the screen) or from the menu tree (left side of the screen).
E.g. ... choose Setup > Options from the main menu.
Bold With Capital First Refers to a chapter of the manual.
Letters E.g. For more details see chapter Detailed Description.

Installation
Installation options
All the installation options are introduced by the Setup program.
SCIA.ESA PT uses a standard Setup program like many other MS Windows applications.
The installation of SCIA.ESA PT can be made in three modes:
 local installation,
 installation on a network server,
 connection to a network server.
Local installation
Starting the installation
The installation of SCIA.ESA PT is started by running SETUP.EXE program. Once this program has been
started, a language selection dialogue appears on the screen. The language selected here determines the
language of the installation program.
The selected language also affects the language of help files that will be installed. In addition, the selected
language is adjusted as a default language for the first run of the installed SCIA.ESA PT.
Selection of target folder
The following dialogue provides for the selection of path to the application files. By default, the path is set to:
C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESAxx (where is may differ according to a particular version of the program).
Choice of installation type
One of the following types of installation can be selected:
Typical All program files are installed.
Compact Only the essential files are installed.
Selective The user may select whether help files will be installed and what
language versions will be installed.

The next dialogue then summarises the installation information. Once the information is confirmed, the
installation process is started.
The installation program adds group SCIA.ESA PT xx (xx differs according to a particular version of the
program) into Start > Programs. The new group contains items for running the application and its help. In
addition, a short-cut is added onto the desktop.
Maintaining and uninstalling the application
The repairing of the installation or its uninstalling can be started either by a repeated start of SETUP.EXE from
the installation medium or by a selection of appropriate item in Control panel > Add or remove programs.
Update to a higher version
If the installation program finds on the computer an already installed lower version of the program, it updates
the existing installation to the new version.

Installation on a network server

The installation on a network server can be started by command SETUP.EXE /A. This command starts the
installation program in an administration mode.

5
Reference Guide

First, the language of installation must be selected. This language determines the language of help files on all
workstations connected to the server.
In the next dialogue, the folder is selected where all the files of the server installation will be extracted. After
confirmation of the folder, the administration installation is extracted and the network installation is created.

Connection to the network installation

The installation on a workstation in "connection to the network server" mode can be carried out by running the
file SETUP.EXE in the root folder of the network installation.
As first step, the language of the installation is selected. This language determines the language of the
application on its first run.
No other settings must be done. No files are copied to a local drive. Only components from the server are
registered.
The installation program adds group SCIA.ESA xx into Start > Programs. The new group contains items for
running the application and its help. In addition, a short-cut is added onto the desktop.
Both the local installation and the installation of the connection to the network server adjust the default setting
of application folders. This setting can be later changed using command Settings > Options, tab Files,
folders.
The default setting is as follows:
Cross-section library folder C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA1\Prof, where C:\Program
Files\SCIA\ESA1 is replaced by the real folder where the
application has been installed.
System database folder C:\Program Files\SCIA\ESA\db, where C:\Program
Files\SCIA\ESA1 is replaced by the real folder where the
application has been installed.

In addition, the following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows 2000 or Windows XP:
User files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\User
Temporary files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Temp
Project files C:\Documents and Settings\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Data

The following folders are set when the application is installed under Windows NT:
User files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\User
Temporary files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Temp
Project files C:\WINNT\Profiles\USER_PROFILE_NAME\ESA1\Data

USER_PROFILE_NAME is the name of user profile of the current user.

Note: If the user has to or decides to reinstall the program, for any reason, it is generally
advisable NOT TO delete the contents of User files folder. This folder holds all possible settings
made by the user. If the folder is removed as well, all the previously made settings will be lost
(which of course, may be desirable in some cases).

System requirements
Hardware requirements
processor speed 1.5 GHz
RAM 512 MB
graphic card 32 MB, OpenGL support
disk space for the program 200 MB
disk space for projects and the required space may be in GB (Giga Bytes) for
temporary files excessive project

Software requirements

6
 Getting started

MS Windows 2000
MS Windows XP

Login requirements
In order to install SCIA.ESA PT, the account must have administrator rights.
In order to run SCIA.ESA PT, the account can have just user rights.

Demo version
Demoversion is fully functioning in all modules with limitation in calculation. Only 25 beam members and 2 load
cases can be calculated. It is even possible to print results, but all printed material contains background text
"UNLICENCED SOFTWARE".

ATTENTION: A project created in the demoversion CANNOT be opened in a full version!!!

Uninstalling program
In order to uninstall the program use standard Windows procedure: invoke Control panel and select Add or
remove program.

Running the program

Starting program
Depending on your personal habits select one of the following ways:
Short-cut on desktop
1. If the short-cut has been placed on the desktop automatically during the installation, proceed to
step 3.
2. Place the short-cut on the desktop.
a. Click the right mouse button on the desktop.
b. Select New > Short-cut command.
c. Browse the hard disk to find the folder you have installed SCIA.ESA PT into.
d. Select ESA.EXE and finish the New Short-cut command.
3. Double click the short-cut to start the program.
Start menu
1. Click Start button on the left of Windows status bar.
2. Select Programs > SCIA > ESA.
Windows explorer or another file manager
1. Browse the hard disk to find the folder you have installed SCIA.ESA PT into.
2. Select ESA.EXE file and double click it to start the program.

Tips for advanced users: If you are familiar with Microsoft Windows features you may as well
do any of the following:
 Assign a hot key to the SCIA.ESA PT program to start it by pressing the defined key combination.
 Integrate SCIA.ESA PT into your favourite file manager and start it from the toolbar of that file
manager.
 Insert SCIA.ESA PT to the Windows 2000 toolbar.
 Insert SCIA.ESA PT to the Microsoft Office short-cut panel.
 Use any other approach available in Microsoft Windows environment.

7
Reference Guide

Program files and folders

The program uses numerous folders and file types to store its data.
Folders
Program folders
main program folder It contains the program executable and auxiliary files.
set It contains initialisation files for a new project. (The information
stored here may be overridden by the data from files saved in
User folders, if available.)
db It stores system databases (e.g. materials, bolts, etc.)
prof It contains cross-section databases.
DocumentTemplates This folder offers a set of default templates for document. Its
contents is automatically copied into the appropriate user folder
on first program run.
GraphicTemplates This folder offers a set of default templates for graphical
outputs. Its contents is automatically copied into the
appropriate user folder on first program run.

Note: All the program folders are ReadOnly.

User folders
set It contains initialisation files for a new project.
db It stores files with user-defined databases.
prof It contains cross-section databases.
DocumentTemplates This folder holds the templates for document.
GraphicTemplates This folder holds the templates for graphical outputs.

Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.
Temporary folder
This folder stores all the information that the program needs to store during its run.
Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.
Project folder
This folder stores the user-crated projects.
Note: The destination of this folder may be adjusted in the appropriate program setup dialogue.

Files
ESA Project file
ESAD Project file that has been created in a demo or student version of the program. It
cannot be read into a standard licensed version of the program.
EPW Project file created in Esa Prima Win
DB4 Database file
SET Initialisation file for the adjustment of project and user interface.
OTS File with table templates for document.
EPD Template for drawing in Paper space.

Upgrade from other products

Upgrade from EPW
SCIA.ESA PT keeps compatibility with program Esa Prima Win.

8
 Getting started

The users of ESA Prima Win may import their EPW projects into SCIA.ESA PT using the appropriate Import
function.

9
Terminology and conventions
Terminology
Global terms
additional data entity An entity that defines properties other than the shape of a
structural member, e.g. load, support, hinge, etc.
catalogue block; A predefined template structure; some of repeatedly used
type structure types of structure have been pre-created and can be quickly
defined by a simple selection of the appropriate type in the
integrated catalogue.
cut-out A rectangular area created by a mouse when dragged over the
screen; the area extends from the point where the drag move
started to the point where the left button was released; the
sides of the cut-out are always horizontal and vertical.
entity Either a beam member, load, support, hinge or any other part
of a structure model the properties of which are defined and
can be edited.
generator A part of the program that automatically generates some kind
of data, e.g. the finite element mesh, load from a given wind
conditions, etc.
geometric entity An entity that defines the geometry (or shape) of the structure.
See member.
intersection line A polygonal line drawn by a mouse on the screen; the line can
intersect as many entities as desired.
member Any structural member.
mesh finite element mesh
solver A part of the program that calculates the structure subject to
the defined load using the selected type of calculation. The
solver first assemblies the set of equations, then carries out the
numerical solution of the problem.

Geometric entities
beam member A straight or curved member defined by means of its midline
and cross-section. The cross-section may be constant or
varying along the length of the beam member.
cross-link A connection of two intersecting beam members.
force load Load in the form of force. It can be either point or continuous.
foundation block A type of support that represents a pad foundation.
hinge Connection of two members. It can be either rigid or of defined
elasticity.
load Any kind of load that the structure is subject to.
moment load Load in the form of bending moment. It can be either point or
continuous.
node Generally a vertex of a member or a point where two or more
members intersect.
predefined load A load defined by means of the composition of e.g. floor. The
user defines individual layers of the floor, their height and
specific weight.
rigid arm A beam member of an infinitely large stiffness.
support Point or line support of a structure. Several types of supports
are available: standard, foundation pad, wall, etc.

11
Reference Guide

Cross-sections
catalogue cross- A cross-section that can be defined by selecting from the
section library of cross-sections. The library is an integral part of
SCIA.ESA PT.
general cross-section A cross-section the shape of which is completely defined by the
user.
reference point The reference point is defined according to a cross-section
type:
for catalogue cross-sections it is located in the first point of the
cross-section,
for general cross-sections and cross-sections defined by a
polygon it is identical with point [0,0].

Note: Some more terms may be found in the Glossary at the end of the documentation.

Co-ordinate systems
Introduction to co-ordinate systems
As a user of SCIA.ESA PT you will come across a set of various co-ordinate systems. Some co-ordinate
systems are essential for the work with the program itself, some others may significantly reduce the effort and
time necessary to get the required result.
The co-ordinate systems may be divided into several groups according to what they relate to:

global co-ordinate system the essential co-ordinate system, provides for

positioning and orienting of a model and its
unambiguous definition
user-defined co-ordinate systems facilitates the model definition, the user may
UCS define it’s origin and direction

point definition co-ordinate systems; provides for the definition of geometry in the
geometry definition co-ordinate systems most straightforward way

entity co-ordinate systems defines the orientation of individual entities in a

local co-ordinate system model and provide for the unambiguous
interpretation of physical quantities related to
the entity

Global co-ordinate system

The global co-ordinate system used in the program is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate
system.
The axes of the system are marked X, Y, and Z.

Note: It is highly recommended to locate the created model of a structure close to the origin of
the global co-ordinate system (i.e. near the point whose global co-ordinates are 0, 0, 0) in order to
prevent possible numerical inaccuracy due to numerical operations carried out with excessively
great numbers.
It is further recommended to focus on this point especially after the model geometry has been
imported from a third-party CAD program.

User-defined co-ordinate system

In order to simplify and speed up work with a model, the user can define its own co-ordinate system or
systems and locate their origin, including possible inclination, anywhere in the global co-ordinate system.
The user-defined co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.
The axes of the system are marked X, Y, and Z.
The user co-ordinate system may be set arbitrarily and the setting can be changed during work as many times
as required. In addition, any number of user co-ordinate systems may be defined simultaneously but just one

12
 Terminology and conventions

of them can be active at a time. The user can swap between the previously and also newly defined user co-
ordinate systems whenever it seems to be convenient.
For information about setting and using of user co-ordinate systems see chapter Basic Working Tools > User
co-ordinate system.

Entity co-ordinate systems

Introduction to entity co-ordinate systems
Each structural entity, that means each member, has got its own local co-ordinate system. This co-ordinate
system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system.
The system provides for:
 unambiguous positioning of the member in space,
 unambiguous definition of load and boundary conditions,
 unambiguous interpretation of results.
This chapter also deals with a group of co-ordinate systems that do not refer to a structural entity in the full
meaning of the word, but that is very closely related to it. This group consists of co-ordinate systems used with
cross-sections.

Cross-section co-ordinate system

There are several co-ordinate systems used with cross-sections. All the sectional co-ordinate systems are two-
dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate systems.
Principal (or main) axes
The principal axes correspond to the principal moments of inertia of a cross-section. They are marked u and v.
The u axis is called (according to the official Eurocode terminology) a major axis and the v axis is called a
minor axis.
The principal axes are used to evaluate important sectional characteristics necessary for design and
assessment to technical standards (code check), e.g. moments of inertia, radiuses of gyration, etc.
Centroidal axes
The two centroidal axes pass the centroid of a cross-section and the first moments (the static moments) of the
cross-section around these axes are equal to zero.
The centroidal axes are marked y and z.
The centroidal axes are used to evaluate important sectional characteristics necessary for design and
assessment to technical standards (code check), e.g. moments of inertia, radiuses of gyration, section
modulus, etc.
For symmetrical cross-sections, the centroidal axes are identical to the principal axes.
For example, for steel cross-sections the centroidal y axis is parallel to the flanges and the centroidal z axis is
perpendicular to the flanges.
Geometric co-ordinate system
The geometric axes are used to define co-ordinates of cross-section vertices. The axes of the system are
marked y and z.
Orientation of the cross-section co-ordinate system with reference to the beam local co-ordinate
system
A cross-section is oriented so that the centroidal axis y is identical with beam local axis Y and the centroidal
axis z is identical with beam local axis Z. If the beam member is being rotated around its local X axis, also the
sectional centroidal axes rotate.

13
Reference Guide

Beam co-ordinate system

The beam co-ordinate system is a three-dimensional right-handed Cartesian co-ordinate system with axes
marked x, y, and z.
Each beam member is defined by means of two end points – by a "starting point" and by an "end point". Each
beam member has got a unique local co-ordinate system, the origin of which is located in the starting point of a
beam member. The x-axis is always identical with the longitudinal beam axis and its direction is from the
staring point towards the end point. By default, the y-axis is generally horizontal (unless the beam orientation
prevents this) and the z-axis is generally vertical (again, unless the beam orientation in space prevents this
configuration).

The local co-ordinate system can be rotated around its x-axis if required.
In addition to this local co-ordinate system, also a principal (or main) co-ordinate system can be referred to on
a beam member. The principal co-ordinate system of a beam member is related to the principal co-ordinate
system of the cross-section of a beam member.

Geometric block co-ordinate system

Some of geometric blocks use a specific co-ordinate system. The system is used only throughout the phase of
block definition. The concrete co-ordinate system, if applied, is always displayed in the dialogue for block
definition.

Point definition co-ordinate systems

Introduction to point definition
Any geometric entity is defined by positions of its vertices. The vertices are defined as points inserted into
required location. Any inserted point, regardless the entity type it relates to, can be defined in one of the
following co-ordinate systems:
 Cartesian co-ordinate system
 Cylindrical co-ordinate system

14
 Terminology and conventions

 Spherical co-ordinate system

The choice of a particular system depends on several factors:
 how is the point position defined in the model drawings,
 what is the most efficient and most easiest way for the specific situation,
 which particular system is preferred by the user.

Cartesian co-ordinate system

A point in the Cartesian co-ordinate system is uniquely defined by three length co-ordinates x, y, and z. The
individual co-ordinates represent the distance of the point from the origin of the co-ordinate system measured
along individual axes x, y, and z respectively.

Cylindrical co-ordinate system

In the cylindrical co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of any point is given by three components r, theta, and z.
The co-ordinates r and theta represent polar co-ordinates of a point in xy plane. And the z co-ordinate is a
distance of the defined point from xy plane.
Thus the ordinate along x, y, and z axis are respectively:
x = r × cos (theta),
y = r × sin (theta),
z = z.

15
Reference Guide

Spherical co-ordinate system

In the spherical co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of any point is given by three components r, Psi, theta.
Thus the ordinates along x, y and z axis are:
x = r × sin (theta) cos (Psi),
y = r × sin (theta) sin (Psi),
z = r × cos (theta).

Conventions for applied physical quantities

Input quantities conventions
The following notation and conventions are user in the program and in the program documentation.
Axes
global X Y Z
local x y z

External forces
Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz

Prescribed displacement and rotation

global Ux Uy Uz Fix Fiy Fiz
local ux uy uz fix fiy fiz

Both external forces and translations are considered as positive when acting in the direction of an appropriate
axis. E.g. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the direction of the positive global X-axis is
taken as positive. Force defined in global co-ordinate system and acting in the direction opposite to the
direction of the positive global X-axis is taken as negative.

Output quantities conventions

The following notation is user in the program and in the program documentation.
Axes
global X Y Z
local x y z

16
 Terminology and conventions

Displacement and rotation

global Ux Uy Uz Fix Fiy Fiz
local ux uy uz fix fiy fiz

Reactions
Rx Ry Rz Mx My Mz

Internal forces
N Vy Vz Mx My Mz

Stress
sig x sig y sig z
tau xy tau yz tau xz

Units
Introduction to units
SCIA.ESA PT supports various unit types.
SI units International system of units (metric practice)
FPS units foot-pound-second unit
Imperial, English units, FPS unit
US unit

Length units
Imperial length units
The imperial units for length are:
 inch (in),
 foot (ft).
The official values for conversion are:
quantity multiply by to obtain
inch 25.400 millimetre (mm)
foot 0.3048 metre (m)

Display style of length units

Display style of length units is defined by format, precision and unit symbol.
Format
The format can be:
 scientific (1.55E+01)
 engineering (15.50E+00) (the exponent is ..., -09, -06, -03, +00, +03, +06, +09, ... )
 decimal (15.50)
 fractional (15 1/2)
Precision
The precision for scientific and decimal format is defined as follows. Sample value is 3.1415926
Decimal length Precision Result

17
Reference Guide

in Units Setup
0 0 3
1 0.1 3.1
2 0.01 3.14
3 0.001 3.142
4 0.0001 3.1416
etc. etc. etc.

The precision for fractional format is defined as follows.

Fractional precision in Units Setup Precision
0 1
1 ½
2 ¼
3 1/8
4 1/16
etc. etc.

Unit symbol
unit symbol
millimetre mm
centimetre cm
decimetre dm
metre m
st
inch (1 option) in
nd
inch (2 option) "
st
foot (1 option) ft
nd
foot (2 option) ‘
st
foot-inch (1 option) ft in
nd
foot-inch (2 option) ‘"

Example
The value is 78.24 cm.
Format Precision Unit symbol Result
scientific 0.001 centimetre (cm) 7.824E+01 cm
scientific 0.01 millimetre (mm) 7.82E+02 mm
engineering 0.001 centimetre (cm) 78.240E+00 cm
engineering 0.01 millimetre (mm) 782.40E+00 mm
decimal 0.01 centimetre (cm) 78.24 cm
decimal 0.001 inches (in) 30.803 in
decimal 0.001 inches (") 30.803 "
decimal 0.001 feet (ft) 2.567 ft
decimal 0.001 feet (') 2.567 '
decimal 0.001 feet-inches (ft in) 2 ft 6.803 in
decimal 0.001 feet-inches (' ") 2' 6.803"

18
 Terminology and conventions

fractional 1/16 feet(') 2-9/16'

fractional 1/16 inches (") 30-13/16"
fractional 1/16 inches (in) 30-13/16 in
fractional 1/16 feet-inches (' ") 2' 6-13/16"

Input of length units

For metric units (mm, cm, dm, m), the scientific and decimal formats are supported. Once the value is input,
the value is transformed into the defined format, precision and unit.
For the imperial units (in and ft), the scientific, decimal and fractional formats are supported. The use of
symbols " and ' is supported. The fractional input (-1/2, -3/4, …) is supported. When entering fractions, the
fractions must be separated from the rest by a hyphen. Once the value is input, the value is transformed into
the defined format (scientific, decimal, fractional), precision and unit symbol.
It is always possible to enter a number in greater precision than defined by settings. The precise value is
stored internally and the displayed value reflects the Units setup.

Examples for imperial units

Input string Display setting Result
3.5 decimal, inches (") 3.5"
3-1/2 decimal, inches (") 3.5"
5' decimal, inches (") 60"
5.3' 6" decimal, inches (") 69.6"
5.3' 6.6" decimal, inches (") 70.20"
5.3' 6.6 decimal, inches (") 70.20"
3.5 decimal, feet (') 3.5'
3-1/2 decimal, feet (') 3.5'
5' decimal, feet (') 5.0'
5.3' 6" decimal, feet (') 5.80'
5.3' 6.6" decimal, feet (') 5.85'
5.3' 6.6 decimal, feet (') 5.85'
3.5 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 3' 6"
3-1/2 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 3' 6"
5' fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 0"
5.3' 6" fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 9-5/8"
5.3' 6.6" fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 10-1/4"
5.3' 6.6 fractional, feet (')-inches (") 5' 10-1/4"

Angle units
The display of the angle unit is defined by the format and the precision.
Format
 decimal degrees (45.000)
 degrees/minutes/seconds (45d0'0")
 grads (50.000g)
 radians (0.7854r)
Precision
The precision of angle units is analogous to decimal format of Length units.

19
Reference Guide

Similarly to Length units, the settings for display style of angle units can be made in Units setup.

20
Layout and operation
Layout and operation overview
SCIA.ESA PT is a computer program designed for running on Microsoft Windows platform. Therefore, the
program incorporates common MS Windows features and conventions. Consequently, user accustomed to
another MS Windows application will have no difficulties in both (i) orienting in the program and (ii) operating it.
Nevertheless, we assume it more that practical to make a complete description of:
 program interface components,
 their layout on a screen,
 basic and advanced program controls such as dialogues, menus, etc.,
 operation of the program control elements.
The following pages will give you a detailed description of every part of the program that you can come across
during your work.

User interface
Introduction to user interface
The user interface is a part of the program that can be seen on the screen and that provides for the
communication between the user and the program. It is often called a "graphical interface".
The user interface consists of several mutually connected and co-operating parts. The following table shows a
brief overview of them.

Title bar It is the top most part of the application window. It holds the
basic information about the application.
Status bar It displays various information related to a concrete
program action.
Menu bar This bar contains a menu that can be used to operate the
program.
Tree menu window It contains a tree-like menu used to call individual program
functions.
Toolbar It provides for fast access to most common functions.
Working window There are two types of application working window:
graphical window and document window (see below).
Graphical window It is a type of an application window that shows drawings of
the designed object. The window displays the designed
object, calculated results and accepts commands from a
mouse.
Document window It is a type of an application window that shows the
information about the designed object in the form of tables,
text comments and, of course, drawings
Preview window The window shows various types of information in the form
of tables and drawings. It can be used to edit objects
properties. This is a special kind of a document window.
Command line The command line can be used to type commands to
operate the program and it also displays brief instructions
about what to do during individual running actions
Graphical window pop-up This menu is a menu associated with each of opened
menu graphical windows of the application. It provides for fast
access to some of the most often used functions.

In addition to these standard Windows application parts of a user interface, SCIA.ESA PT makes use of a set
of unique specially developed control elements that are described in separate chapters (e.g. Property window,
database manager, etc.).

21
Reference Guide

Title bar
The title bar is the heading of the application window. It consists of three parts:
 the program icon (on the left side of the bar)
 text information about the application name
 text information about the name of the opened and active project and the number of the active
project window
 three control buttons for (i) minimising the application window, (ii) making the application window
full-screen, and (iii) closing the application on the right side of the bar.

Note: The first and the last feature of the title bar is the common feature of any Microsoft
Windows application.

Example of a title bar

Status bar
The status bar is a bar placed at the bottom of the application window. It is used to display information about
the program and/or about the functions under process and it contains a few control elements. By default the
status bar shows the following information:

co-ordinates of the mouse
cursor position in UCS
co-ordinates of the mouse
cursor position in GCS
project length units
orientation of working plane
[SNAP mode]
[Filter for selections]
[Current UCS]
[Active code]
When a function requiring the definition of a point (e.g.
insertion of a beam member) is running, the status bar
shows the cursor position in the current user co-ordinate
system.
If selected in the application settings the status bar shows
the co-ordinates also in the global co-ordinate system.
The bar displays the current length unit (e.g. meter, inch,
etc.). The unit can be easily changed by simple clicking on
the unit box on the status bar.
The working plane box of the status bar shows the current
orientation of the working plane. The orientation can be
changed by clicking on the working plane box.
This button enables the user to adjust required SNAP
mode.
Selections may be limited to specific entities. This can be
adjusted by means of selection filter. The status bar shows
the current filter status and also provides for its change.
This button displays the current UCS for the active window.
If pressed, it opens the UCS manager.
A small icon shows the flag of the country whose code is
currently set as active.

The status bar also displays a brief help text for program elements like a toolbar button or a menu function if
the mouse cursor is just being placed on such an element.
Example of a status bar

Note: The status bar in the picture does not show the global co-ordinates of the mouse position.
This option can be switched on or off in the Application settings.

22
 Layout and operation

Menu bar
The menu bar is, by default, located just under the Title bar of the application window. It can be, however,
moved into another position within the application window. It can be either docked to the left or upper edge of
the application window, or it can be let floating anywhere within the work area.
Majority of SCIA.ESA PT functions is accessible via this menu. There are some functions that can be
accessed only from the tree menu of from toolbars.
Example of menus
menu View > View

menu Modify > Edit curves

Tree menu window

The tree window is similar in function to the menu bar but it is more readable and user-friendly.
The individual items of the tree may be:
service It opens another tree menu in the same window. E.g. service Structure,
Loads, etc.
function It opens a specific function, e.g. Point load in node, Cross-link, etc.
branch It opens a branch of the tree and shows individual functions in it. E.g.
branch Point load offers functions Point load in node and Point load on
beam member.

How to operate the tree menu

The procedure to operate the tree menu is very straightforward and closely resembles the operating rules for
standard Microsoft Windows tree control.
Opening branches of the tree
The tree consists of a main branch and possible sub-branches. If an item has a sub-branch, it is indicated with
a plus sign (+) in front of the item name. The sub-branch can be opened (listed on the screen) by means of
either (i) a left mouse button single click on the plus sign or (ii) a left mouse button double-click on the item
name. If the same action is made with already opened a branch, the branch is closed.
Activating tree branch items
In order to activate an item of a branch (either a main branch item that opens a service or sub-branch item that
opens a particular function), simply double-click on the item name with the left mouse button. Depending on
the item type either a corresponding function is activated or a particular service tree menu is displayed.
If the branch item represents a particular function, it can also be activated using a button at the bottom part of
the tree menu window.
Closing a service

23
Reference Guide

In order to close the whole service you can do the following:

 press the [Close] button,
 if a function is still opened, press the [Esc] key twice,
 a function has been already closed or terminated, press the [Esc] key once.
Closing a function
In order to close the function, you can use one of the following ways:
 press the [Close] button (this option closes the service as well),
 press the [Esc] key once.

 click the [Arrow] ( ) button on the toolbar at the top of the command line.
 invoke the window pop-up menu and select function End.
Terminating a function
In order to abandon the activated function without accepting the already made changes, press [Ctrl] + Break
keys simultaneously.
It is also possible to invoke the window pop-up menu and select function Cancel.

Example of a tree menu

Toolbars
Toolbars are a small floating windows-like objects containing sets of buttons. The buttons can be used for
opening various functions. The toolbars may be let floating on the screen or may be docked to any side of the
screen.
Examples
toolbar View

toolbar Geometrical
manipulations

Command line
The command line provides for the following:

24
 Layout and operation

 some functions can be activated via typing the appropriate command,

 if any function has been already called (regardless whether via the command line, menu, tree menu,
or toolbar button), it displays guiding instructions on the command line,
 if any function requires a numerical input (e.g. co-ordinates of an inserted point), the corresponding
value or values may be typed on the command line.
Especially the second feature is very useful particularly for beginning users as they are clearly guided through
the function they want to use and can simply follow the presented step-by-step instructions.
Syntax of commands
The syntax of a command on the command line is:
command parameter1 [parameter2] [parameter3] [etc.]
Example
SEL BEAM1
This command adds the beam member named BEAM1 into the current selection.
Syntax for input of co-ordinates
The important thing to be aware of is that if a co-ordinate is typed by means of one or two numbers only, it is
considered to be defined in the active working plane of the current user co-ordinate system.
If the point is defined by means of three values, it is considered to be defined in the current user co-ordinate
system. In this case, the orientation of the working plane is not taken into account at all.
General syntax for the definition of a point
[prefix] [number] [separator] [number] [separator] [number]
Prefix
none absolute co-ordinate in UCS
@ relative co-ordinate related to the last input point, defined in
UCS
* co-ordinate in GCS
@* relative co-ordinate related to the last input point, defined in
GCS

Number
[space] [sign] [nnn] [.] [nnn] [exp] [sign] [nnn]
[space] if any, ignored
[sign] sign plus or minus (‘+’ or ‘-‘)
[nnn] row of digits 0,1, ..., 9
[,] decimal comma or point
[exp] exponent – sign ‘e’ or ‘E’

Separator
; length value follows
< angle value follows

Syntax for the definition of a point in Cartesian co-ordinates

[*,@][X],[Y],[Z]
Examples
12.4;45.8;12.4 absolute point co-ordinate in UCS 12.4, 45.8, 12.4
123.4;345.8 absolute point co-ordinate in the current working plane of
the UCS 123.4, 345.8
@123;23;5 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in UCS
123, 23, 5
@123;23 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in the
current working plane of the UCS 123, 23

25
Reference Guide

@123 relative co-ordinate related to the last inserted point in the

current working plane of the UCS 123, 0
*123;23;5 global co-ordinate in GCS 123, 23, 5
* the origin of GCS 0, 0, 0

Syntax for the definition of a point in polar co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[angle]
Examples
123<90 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 123, 0
123<180 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, -123, 0

Syntax for the definition of a point in spherical co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[ angle]<[angle]
Example
123<90<90 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 0, 123

Syntax for the definition of a point in cylindrical co-ordinates

[*,@][length]<[angle],[length]
Example
123<90;200 absolute co-ordinate of point in UCS 0, 123, 20

Property table
A property table is a SCIA.ESA PT unique control used in the program dialogues and in the Property window.
The control looks like a table (basically a two column multi-row table) whose first column contains names of
individual items displayed in the table and the second column shows their values.
Generally, the values in the "value cells" of the property table may be modified. There are various means for
the change of the value (see bellow). In addition, the individual items of the table may be interlinked either (i) to
another part of the program (e.g. another dialogue) or (ii) to a graphical window. Both variants represent a
powerful feature increasing significantly the simplicity and speed of editing process.
In order to unify the appearance of the program dialogues, the property table is also used even for passive
display of information. In such a case, the "value cells" are disabled to prevent an accidental alteration of the
values.
Type of property table cells
name cell It contains the name of the item whose value is displayed in the
coupled value cell.
group cell This is a special case of the name cell. Sometimes, the name cell is
standalone and is not coupled with any value cell. This is used to
display e.g. the name of a group of items.
value cell This cell holds the corresponding data. The data may or may not be
edited depending on the particular situation.

The value cell may be of several types. Where possible, the cell terminology is taken from the standard MS
Windows terminology for dialogue box components. In parenthesis, a descriptive name is added (if applicable).
edit box The basic type of cell provides for manual input of value. Depending on
(simple value the particular item the value may be either numerical or
cell) alphanumerical.

combo box This control is used for items where the proper value is defined by
(selection list selection from a list of available variants.
cell)
tick box This type of cell provides for two limit value only – for YES and NO.

26
 Layout and operation

(yes/no cell)
button The button can be used to start a required type of action, e.g. open a
dialogue, etc.
colour list This type is similar to the combo box. The difference is that it offers
colours only.

Combination of cell types in one table cell

The individual cell types may be combined within a single cell. That means that, for example, one table cell
may consist of a combo box and a button, or of three edit boxes.
This feature is used e.g. in tables where a cross-section should be specified. The table sell then contains:
 a combo box with all cross-section already defined in the current project,
 a button that opens the Cross-section manager and thus provides for the definition of a new cross-
section type if none of the existing ones meets requirements on the particular item.
Interconnection between table cells and graphical window
In some dialogues, individual table items may be related to a specific part of the drawing shown in the
graphical window. In such a case, it would be useful:
 to highlight the appropriate part of the drawing if the corresponding table cell is selected, or
 to highlight the appropriate table cell if the corresponding part of the drawing has been clicked on.
The SCIA.ESA PT property table makes this possible. Therefore, where applicable and useful, the appropriate
table cells are interlinked with corresponding drawing parts.
As an example we may give the dialogue for editing of a cross-section. Here, the dimensions of a cross-
section represent exactly what this feature is ideal for. On clicking any of dimension lines in the drawing, the
corresponding table row is highlighted, and vice versa.
Example of a property table
The picture below shows the cross-section editing dialogue. The mouse cursor is positioned in the graphical
window of the Cross-section manager over the height dimension line. After the left mouse button was clicked,
the corresponding item in the table above the picture got the focus (the blue item).

27
Reference Guide

Progress bar
Especially for large models, some actions performed in SCIA.ESA PT may be rather time consuming. In order
to tell the user what the progress is, a progress bar is shown on the screen.
It simply:
 indicates that the program is working,
 measures what portion of the total work has been already finished.
The progress bar may appear either in a modal dialogue or on a status bar.
It may look like e.g.:

Note: If the application window is not maximized, it may happen that the progress bar cannot fit
into the status bar whose length is limited by the adjusted width of the application window. In that
case, the progress bar that would normally appear on the status bar is invisible.

Application windows
Introduction to application windows
All the information that the program can give to the user is displayed in an application window. An application
window can of the following types:
 graphical window,
 document window,
 preview window.
The user can use all the window types at the same time and swap between them freely, or he may use just
one type at a time. It depends completely on his or her will and habits.
At the same time, as many graphical and document windows can be opened as the user considers convenient
to him. On the other hand, there can be opened just one preview window.

Graphical window
This window can be perceived as a drawing board, however with rather advanced functionality. A model
defined by the user is displayed in this window. The individual parts of a model can be literally drawn in this
window. All selections of any function are made in this window type and any response of the program to the
user’s action affecting the model is shown in this window. Also the calculated results are shown in this window.
The window both displays the project data and receives information from the user provided by means of
mouse moves and clicking.
An arbitrary number of graphical windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for one or
several different projects.
Example of a graphical window

28
 Layout and operation

Graphical window pop-up menu

Every graphical window that SCIA.ESA PT creates has a pop-up menu associated with it. This menu provides
for a fast access to some frequently used functions.
To access this menu, move the mouse pointer so that it is within the window - not inside the title bar, nor on
the window's borders. Then press the rightmost mouse button to make the menu appear on the screen. Then
move the mouse to highlight the required option. Click the leftmost button to start the selected action.
The window pop-up menu is described in detail in a separate chapter Basic working tools > Window pop-up
menu.
Example of a pop-up menu

29
Reference Guide

Document window
This window type is used to display a document or report about an analysed model, its input data, results of
calculation, and assessment to technical standards (i.e. code check). This window can contain both graphical
and text information.
An arbitrary number of document windows, regardless of their type, can be opened at the same type for one or
several different projects.
Example of a document window

Preview window
At first sight, the preview window looks like a document window. In fact, it is a simplified version of the
document window. You can display information about required entities in this type of window in the form of
clearly readable tables and even edit the structure data in them.
For example, it is possible to display in the preview window information about selected cross-sections, about
selected beam members and their load, etc.
Example of a preview window

30
 Layout and operation

Property window
Property window
The property window has its name derived from a property table that is displayed in it. The property window
summarises parameters, characteristics and selected options of particular entities such as nodes, beam
members, loads, result diagrams, etc.
The property window always shows information related to the selected entities or selected function. However,
the property window has been designed to not only passively display the properties, but also to provide for fast
and easy modification of them.
If the current selection consists of only one entity, generally all the parameters can be modified. If more than
one entity has been selected, the property window automatically applies a filter and displays the parameters
that the selected entities have in common.
If a function has been started, the property window may contain some switches that may affect the behaviour
of the function. Most of the functions from service Results are good examples as the property window enables
the user to select required quantity to-be-displayed, adjust the style of result diagrams, etc.
Example of a property window

31
Reference Guide

Action buttons
As the name suggests, the Property Table comprises properties of a particular part of a structure model.
Sometimes however, the property table contains also a control that starts a particular action related to the
element whose properties are displayed in the table.
If such controls (buttons in particular) are put somewhere inside the table, they may be overlooked. Therefore,
these buttons were "extracted" from the table and are located in a special section called Action buttons or
Action toolbar.
Thus, all the actions that are accessible for the current properties or for the "property-owner" are visibly and
clearly separated from the often long list of information and can be easily accessed.
Action buttons are used in various parts of SCIA.ESA PT.
Action buttons in the Property Window
The table below presents some (not all) applications of Action buttons.
service Steel >
function Check

Refresh It redraws the screen in order to reflect the changes made in

the Property Window (see also Refresh of results).
Single check It opens a dialogue that provides for checking of a single
selected beam member.
Optimisation It opens a dialogue for the optimisation of selected beam
members.
Preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant
information in it.

32
 Layout and operation

service Steel >

function Connection
check

Open preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant
information in it.

service Results >

function Internal forces

Refresh It redraws the screen in order to reflect the changes made in

the Property Window (see also Refresh of results).
Preview It opens the Preview window and displays the relevant
information in it.

Action buttons in Database managers

Action buttons are used for example in the Load case combinations manager.
Explode This buttons explodes the defined combination and shows the
critical (or significant) internally generated combinations.
Explode to all possible This buttons explodes the defined combination and shows ALL
possible internally generated combinations.

See also chapter Exploded combinations.

33
Reference Guide

Detailed properties
Models created in SCIA.ESA PT consist usually of a large number of individual elements. Some of these
elements themselves have a lot of specific properties. Some of the properties may depend on other properties.
Consequently, the total number of properties that must be treated may be enormous.
If all the properties were listed in the Property window, whenever the particular element is selected, the
Property window would be overfilled, unclear, and its contents confusing, which in turn could lead to
unintentional mistakes during the input of property values.
Therefore, a new solution has been developed. Property tables that are too complex to be shown in a single
Property window are divided into several parts, each of which contains properties related to a single "master"
property listed in the main property table.
The "slave" property tables are simple modal dialogues accessible from the main property table via a button.

Example
Let’s imagine a simple frame connection of a column and inclined beam member.

The Property table shown in the Property window of such a connection may look like:

34
 Layout and operation

If an end plate is inserted into the connection, a button next to the check box appears and if pressed, the End
plate property dialogue is displayed:

Here all the properties related to the end plate may be defined.
Similarly, if bolts are defined, a button next to the Bolts check box is offered and if pressed, the Bolts property
dialogue is displayed:

35
Reference Guide

Here all the properties related to the used bolts may be specified.

Database managers
Introduction to database manager
A database manager is a tool that provides for all possible operations related to manipulation with entities
stored in some of program databases. The term "program database" stands e.g. for a database of materials,
cross-sections, catalogue blocks, etc. defined in a current project.
It is obvious that:
 individual entities of these databases must be somehow defined,
 there must be a way to edit them, copy them, delete them,
 the user must have an opportunity to review parameters of the individual entities,
 there must exist a procedure to select one entity as a "default" for functions requiring an entity of
that type as an input parameter,
 the approach to all these points must be unique regardless the type of database.
Consequently, SCIA.ESA PT integrates a tool called "manager".

Layout and operation of a database manager

A manager consists basically of the following controls:
List of defined entities of a The list shows all the entities related to the database of the manager
particular database that have been defined in the current project so far.
Property table This table shows a brief summary of parameters for the database entity
that is just selected in the list of already defined entities (see above).
Graphical window This window displays a drawing of the database entity whose
parameters are just listed in the property table.
Control buttons The buttons provide the access to the functions that are accessible
from within the particular manager.
Filter The filter allows for a readable representation of data in the Manager.

List of defined database entities

36
 Layout and operation

The list summarises all the database entities that has been defined in the project. Most often, the list contains
names of the entities. However, if useful and practical, some additional information may be added next to the
name.
Property table
The property table displays parameters for the entity that is selected in the list of defined entities. It provides for
a quick review of the parameter values. Some of the parameters can also be edited here. But normally, the
modification of the parameters is performed in the editing dialogue for a particular entity type.
Graphical window
This window contains a schematic drawing of the database entity the parameters of which are presented in the
property table. This window is fitted with a pop-up menu. The menu offers the user some important functions
related to the displayed entity.
Control buttons
There are several control buttons in the Manager that allow to user to use various actions that may be
performed with database entities.
button meaning
[New] This button opens the New entity dialogue where a new entity
can be defined and inserted into the current project.
The newly defined entity is inserted at the end of the list of
defined entities.
[Insert] This button also opens the New entity dialogue where a new
entity can be defined and inserted into the current project.
But, the newly defined entity is inserted before the currently
selected entity in the list of defined entities.
This feature can be used to have the entities in user-defined
order and not in the order of insertion.
[Edit] This button opens the Editing dialogue for the entity currently
selected in the List of defined entities. The Editing dialogue
provides for thorough and detailed review or editing of the entity
parameters.
[Delete] This button allows the user to get rid of those entities of the
particular database that are no longer necessary in the project.
[Copy] The Copy button makes a copy of the entity that is selected in
the List of defined entities.
[System It enables the user to read items from a standard system
database] database.
[Read] It enables the user to read database items from an external file
– user’s database.
[Save] It saves selected entities of the database to an external file –
user’s database.
[Text Output] This button opens the preview window and displays all the
parameters in it for the entity that is selected in the List of
defined entities.
[Close] This button has got two functions. First, it sets the currently
highlighted item in the List of defined entities as the active (or
current) entity. Second, it closes the database manager.
[Unify] This button enables the user to select items from the list of
defined items that will be united with the currently selected item.
Thus it is possible to get rid of excessive number of doubled
items, or to establish a single item for entities that originally
used several items (e.g. to assign one cross-section to beam
members that originally had different cross-sections). See
Example below.

Example - function Unify

Let us suppose that we have defined three beams, each of them of a different cross-section.

37
Reference Guide

Later you may want to unify the section of the two left beams and have both of them of rectangular cross-
section. Of course, you may edit the properties of the beam and change its cross-section. On the other hand,
sometimes it may be useful to "unify" the sections (and if required, get rid of the abandoned cross-section type,
that can be automatically deleted from the database).
You call the Unify function to merge two cross-sections into one. In our example do the following:
1. select the rectangular cross-section,
2. call function Unify,
3. select the I section,
4. confirm with OK,
5. the I-section is removed from the project database, two beams are assigned the same rectangular
cross-section.

Filter
The filter provides for more readable representation of data in the Manager if the current project contains an
excessive number of defined entities of the particular type. The filter allows the user to set a limited set of
entities that are displayed in the List of defined entities. The entities that do not meet the chosen criterion are
"removed" from the list, but still remain normally defined in the project.

Note: Some specific database managers may contain additional functionality. It is added in the
form of additional control buttons.

Name
Note: The name of any item in any manager should be up to 8 characters in length. Longer
names should not be used and may be truncated by the program.

Example of a database manager

38
 Layout and operation

Opening the database manager

A Manager is opened whenever the appropriate function is activated. E.g. function Library > Cross-sections
opens the Cross-section manager, etc.
In general, the particular manager is also opened when a general procedure for the definition of a new
database entity is invoked. In such a case, the opening of the manager is usually one of the first steps of the
procedure.
From the user’s point of view a database manager is a standard Windows modal dialogue. That means that:
 it is opened via a function associated with it,
 it must be closed before the user can continue with the started multi-step action of before another
function can be activated.
 it contains control elements that provide for actions and tasks that are accessible from within the
manager.
The operation is simple and straightforward and is clear from the description of layout of a database manager.

Note: The Particular manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain
an item associated with the particular database manager Such an item contains a button to open
the appropriate manager.

Example:
A cross-section manager opened from within the property dialogue of a new beam member.

39
Reference Guide

Pop-up menu of database manager

The graphical window of a database manager is equipped with a pop-up menu that summarises some
important functions.
Zoom rectangle The user may define the cut-out that should fit into the
graphical window.
Zoom all This option zooms the drawing in or out so that the whole
drawing fits the available window area.
Gallery It copies the drawing into the Picture gallery.
Document It copies the drawing into the Document.
Print This function prints the drawing on the connected graphical
device.
Copy to clipboard It copies the drawing into the Windows clipboard.
Copy to BMP file It saves the drawing into a Windows Bitmap file.
Copy to WMF file It saves the drawing into a Windows Meta File.

40
Program settings
Language of program
Language of the program
By default, the program starts and works in the language chosen during the installation. For many users,
however, another language of the user interface may be more suitable. The language of the application and
language for outputs can be set in the Setup > Options dialogue.
The procedure for adjustment of a required language
1. Open function Setup > Options :
a. using menu function Setup > Options,

b. using icon Options settings ( ) on toolbar Main.

2. Select tab Other.
3. In the group Language default select the required language for the program.
4. In the group Language default select the required language for outputs.
5. Confirm the settings.

Note: The change takes affect only after the restart of the program.

User level
Level of the user interface
The user may choose from two predefined settings of the user interface:
Standard This option is recommended for beginners and for those who
need to analyse just simple, mainly 2D, frame structures. In this
level, the program automatically hides some features that are
not essential for standard or simple projects.
Advanced This option is useful for those who need to make a project of a
complex structure and for well trained and advanced users of
the program. In this mode, the user has access to all program
features which inevitably leads to longer menus and fuller
dialogues.

Standard level
In the Standard level there are several limitations:
Project settings:
Functionality
Project settings:
Model
Project settings:
Loads
Service Structure
Service Structure:
New beam
Service Structure:
Support
Only options Non-linearity, Buckling and CAD-shape are
available.
In Non-linearity, only options Initial deformations and
nd
curvature and 2 order – geometrical nonlinearity are
available.
Only option One is available.
Neither Wind load nor Snow load can be defined.
Items Arbitrary profiles, Import ESA project, Rigid arm,
Cross-link are not available.
In 3D model, parameter Alpha is not available.
Only Point supports in node can be defined.

41
Reference Guide

Node It is not possible to define local co-ordinate system of nodes.

Geometrical The following geometric manipulations are not available:
manipulations
 Scale
 Stretch
 Enlarge by defined length
 Break in defined points
 Join
 Extend
 Polyline edit
 Curve edit
Calculation Function Mesh generation is not available. The mesh can be
generated only as an integral step of calculation procedure.
Force load Parameter Eccentricity is not available for force loads.
Predefined load Predefined load is not available.
User co-ordinate Definition and storing of named user co-ordinate systems is not
system available.
Line grid Line grid is not available.
Selections Filter for selections is not available.

Application options
Workspace settings
Workspace settings cover various parameters that allow the user to adjust the SCIA.ESA PT user interface to
meet his/her needs, requirements and habits.

Environment This group comprises parameters linked to the display style, in

other words the style in which the information is shown on the
screen. In addition, this group contains also some general
parameters related to the user interface.
Templates Here, the user may specify template drawings that are used
whenever a new drawing is being printed or created in the
Paper space gallery.
Directories Appropriate directories (or folders) can be defined for individual
program files.
Protection This group defines the type of protection.
Code This tab contains a button adjusting an active code of the
project.
Other This group enables the user to adjust language of the
application and default behaviour on opening of the program.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Environment settings
Parameters affecting the user interface appearance make up this group of Workspace settings.
Window settings
Show scrollbar in view This item specifies whether the graphical windows are
equipped with scroll-bars on their right and bottom edges.

42
 Program settings

Rendering The item sets the mode that is used for drawing into application
graphical windows.
Hidden lines This option specifies the mode for hidden lines of individual
structural entities.
Line pattern length This item specifies the style of dashed lines.

Rendering
Disabled
Disabled – wire
Enabled (hardware or
graphic card rendering)
Software emulation
This mode disables any rendering. The drawing on the screen
is fast but reverse surfaces of the structure cannot be hidden
and are shown.
This mode is almost identical to the one above. It is however
modified to run even on computers with old types of graphical
cards where the mode above may not function properly.
If this option is selected, the hardware rendering capability of
the computer is employed. This option may lead to a "distorted"
display on some computers, especially those with older models
of graphic cards.
This options tells the computer to simulate the rendering
capability by means of software algorithms. This option should
work properly on all computers. However, if selected on slower
one it may lead to longer response of the computer during
regeneration of the screen.

Hidden lines
The Hidden lines option serves as a substitute for full and proper rendering if the Rendering itself is disabled.
The available options are:
Invisible The hidden lines (hidden parts of entity surfaces) are not drawn
at all.
Dashed The hidden lines are drawn in dashed style.

In addition to the above-mentioned options, it is possible to select whether the intersections of individual
surfaces should be calculated and displayed.

Note: The settings made here determine which mode of rendering and hidden line display is set
for the application. This setting does not mean that the rendering of the scene (i.e. of what is
displayed on the screen) is really applied. To do so, the rendering must be switched on for the
required graphical window. This can be done by means of the appropriate view parameter for the
appropriate graphical window.

Line pattern length

This item affects the style of dashed lines. The dashed lines may be used whenever within the projects. Any
dashed line is controlled by this item.
Small number means short lines used in the dashed line with smaller gaps in between.
Large number means long lines used in the dashed line with longer gaps in between.

Command settings
Right mouse button If this option is ticked, the right mouse button generates End of
click generates End of command when pressed in any opened function such as
function definition of a new beam member, move of beam member, etc.

Skins
Select skin This option allows the user from pre-defined screen styles of
the application.

43
Reference Guide

Other parameters
Maximum number of
grouping properties
Display global co-
ordinates in status bar
This value determines the maximum number of entities that
can be selected at a time so that the Property window was
filled with the parameters of the selected entities. If the number
specified here is exceeded, the property window is left blank
and can be filled in only on user’s explicit request.
By default, the status bar displays co-ordinates defined in an
active user co-ordinate system. In addition, the global co-
ordinates may be displayed as well.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Graphic templates settings

This tab enables the user to define templates which new drawings will be based on. This option may be useful
for example if a title block with the company logo should be attached to every drawing.
Print picture Defines the template for function Print picture.
Overview drawings Defines the template for drawings created in the Paper space
manager gallery.
Project system The user may create (or receive from another user) his/her own
templates templates. These templates may be stored in various folders.
The parameter here states which folder shopuld be used to
search for user templates. All found templates in this folder are
offered in dialogue New project.
The templates are language dependent, i.e. if ESA runs in
Slovak, only Slovak templates are offered.;

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Directories settings
This dialogue allows the user to specify the location of SCIA.ESA PT files. The adjustment can be made
separately for individual file types.
Temporary The folder stores any temporary files.
User The folder stores all files with user-made settings.
Project The folder stores projects created and saved by the user.
Database The folder stores databases provided with the program.
Profiles The folder stores databases of cross-sections provided with the
program.
User block library The folder stores all user blocks that may be arranged in
subfolders of this main library folder.

Note: The changes made in this dialogue will take affect ONLY after the program is closed and
restarted. The items on this tab sheet CANNOT be edited if any project is currently opened.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Project settings
This dialogue offers a set of settings that relates to projects opened in SCIA.ESA PT.
None No action is carried out when the application is started.
Last opened project The last opened project is automatically loaded into the
application on its start.
Show Open project When the application is started, the Open project dialogue is

44
 Program settings

dialogue automatically displayed to allow for the selection of the project

to be processed.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Protection settings
The Protection settings specify the type of software protection that is used with the program.
The hardware lock (dongle) that is an integral part of a properly licences installation of SCIA.ESA PT contains
information about available (i.e. legally purchased) modules. The licence information can also be stored in a
coded file that can be stored on the local computer or anywhere within the local network. The licence
information from this coded file can be read by a commercial licence manager Flexlm. The licence manager
can manage multiple licences and control the number of simultaneously attached (i.e. working at the same
time) users. The licences controlled by the licence manager Flexlm are called "floating" licences. The licence
stored directly in the dongle is called "standalone".
Type
demo The program starts in demo mode only.
only standalone The licence information is read only from the hardware lock.
only floating The licence information is read only from the licence file of
licence manager Flexlm.
first standalone, then First, the licence stored in the hardware lock is sought. In case
floating of failure, the licence manager Flexlm is used to find a valid
and free licence.
This option is useful if a user with a local hardware lock wants
to use his/her licence. The licence-seeking process ensures
that the licence from the local hardware lock is used instead
preferably and the network licence is preserved for other users
that are not equipped with hardware locks.
first floating, then First, the licence is sought using the licence manager Flexlm.
standalone In case of failure, the local hardware lock is sought.

Software floating protection

local For standalone licence, the local hardware lock is used. For
floating licence a local licence file is used. The file provides for
an automatic start and configuration of the licence manager
Flexlm.
network A network licence is used. The licence manager must be
installed by the administrator on the network server.

For setting of application options see chapter Adjusting the application options.

Adjusting the application options

The procedure for the adjustment of application options
1. Open Options dialogue
a. either: using menu function Setup > Options,

b. or: using button [Options] ( ) on Main toolbar.

2. Make required settings on individual tabs.
3. Confirm with [OK].

The dialogue also contains three save/read buttons.

Read application Reads settings as they were pre-defined by the developer of the
default program.
Read user Reads settings that have been previously saved as user’s own

45
Reference Guide

default default.
Save as user Saves the current settings as the user’s default settings. These
default settings may be later read by the above mentioned function.

Project settings
Basic project settings
Basic project data
The basic data of a project describe the project and define some of its main parameters.
Project filename
It shows the name of the project.
Project data
This group of items allows the user to enter some statistical data about the project
Name name of the project
E.g. Eddy Merckx's Airport – Brussel
Part name of the project part, if the project is complex and consists
of several partial sub-projects
E.g. Western hall + connection footbridge
Description E.g. variant A (underground parking, restaurants on first floor,
check-in desks on second floor)
Author name of the project author
E.g. Sven Nijs
Date date of the last project modification, or date of the program
creation, etc.
E.g. 02/02/02

Structure
Here, you can choose the type (or we can say "dimension") of the structure you want to model. Depending on
the type selected, some of the functions and options of the program may be disabled or hidden (e.g. in the
case of 2D frame oriented in plane XZ, the button for setting the sight of the model from the direction of X and
Z axes respectively won't be present on the View toolbar). This feature leads to a significant simplification in
the operation of the program for simpler types of structures. The functions and options that are not appropriate
(are not possible practically) for the particular type are hidden and do not add to the complexity of the program.
The idea behind this feature is: A complex task requires a complex tool, but a simple task can get by a simple
tool.
Truss XZ The beam members of a model are capable of carrying axial
forces only. That means that pin ends (hinges) are
meaningless, supports do not have rotation degrees of freedom
defined and results consists of axial forces only. Only a 2D
model can be created.
Frame XZ The beam members can represent a planar frame structure.
Only a 2D model can be created.
Truss XYZ This mode is similar to Truss XZ, but a real 3D structure can be
created.
Frame XYZ This option is similar to Frame XZ, but a real 3D structure can
be created.
Grid XY A horizontal grate can be modelled in this mode.
Plate XY This mode provides for analysis of combined beam member
and slab structure. All the members must be located in a
horizontal plane. Only a 2D model can be created.
Wall XY This mode is similar to Frame XZ mode, but vertical walls can
be inserted as well. Only a 2D model can be created.

46
 Program settings

General XYZ This option allows the user to model and analyse a 3D
structure consisting of any structural members: beam members
as well slabs (plates, walls, shells).

Note: Item Structure is compulsory and the user has to make a choice from the available
variants.

Material
This option tells the program which materials will be used for members of the structure. The advantage of this
in advance selection is that the program functions working with materials will know, which material the user is
interested in. Therefore, the functions will not offer other material types and, consequently, the dialogs, lists
and similar items will be lucid and readable as much as possible.
If the user realises later that some other material type is necessary, it is of course possible to call the setting
dialogue any time in the future and widen the selection of used material types.

Note: At the beginning, i.e. at the time when a new project is being created, it is necessary to
select at least one material type.

Project level
The user can choose a layout of the program interface which best reflects (i) his or her habits, (ii) his or her
level of familiarity with the program, and (iii) the complexity of the project to be dealt with. Two options are
available:
Standard the program interface will offer the most often used functions
and features
Advanced the program interface will offer all available functions and
features

Model
One the project will contain a single model of a structure
Absence the project can contain some members that may be missing in
some stages of the analysis
Construction stages the project will represent modelling of construction stages
appearing during the execution of the structure

Code
The selection of the active code determines how the program deals with data related to a specific technical
standard. In practice it means that the code selection affects:
 the materials offered as code-related materials, e.g. steel or concrete grades, etc.
 the procedures, algorithms and possible parameters performing and necessary to perform code
checks.

Note: The choice of a particular national standard may have an effect on the layout and even
functionality of numerous functions. E.g. functions like Load case and Load group have got
parameters that depend on the current code of the project. That means that these function offer the
user different parameters for e.g. Czech standard than for let’s say Eurocode. Also the functionality
of some functions or services is different for different codes.

The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Functionality settings
SCIA.ESA PT offers a wide range of capabilities. In order to make the operation of the program as clear and
simple as possible, the project settings allow for selection of those features that are needed and required.
The Functionality settings dialogue comprises options that control both the appearance and function of the
program. That means that until some advanced feature is selected in this dialogue, the program neither
performs the specific task nor even offers it in the menu.

47
Reference Guide

The functionality options are divided into several groups.

Non-linearity
This option controls whether the non-linear analysis is available in solver options and, therefore, whether the
user can perform a non-linear calculation of his/her problem. The Non-linearity functionality comprises several
sub-items. These sub-items are independent on each other and only some of them may be selected for a
particular project.
Initial deformations and If this option is ON, functions for introduction of initial
curvature deformations before calculation are available.
nd
2 order – geometrical If this option is ON, functions for geometrically non-linear
non-linearity calculation are available.
Support non-linearity If this option is ON, functions for non-linear analysis of supports
are available.
Beam local non- If this option is ON, functions for non-linear analysis of beam
linearity members are available (e.g. beam member acting only under
compression, etc. may be analysed).
Friction support If ON, friction supports may be defined in the model.
Nonlinear line support If ON, nonlinear line supports may be used in the model.

Stability
This option allows the user to calculate stability problems.
Dynamics
When ticked the option makes the dynamic analysis features available to the user. The appropriate dynamics-
related functions and parameters become available in menus and solver adjustment dialogues.
There is one dynamics sub-option:
Seismic If this option is ON, seismic calculations can be performed.

Initial stress
The option, when selected, opens possibility for the introduction of initial stress state in members of a structure
being modelled in SCIA.ESA PT.
Subsoil
The Subsoil functionality represents an important and powerful feature of the program especially if the
interaction of the analysed structure with its subsoil must be taken into account.
Structural shape
This option enables the user to use two different "shapes" in his/her model. Normally, the calculation model is
created and used for calculations, evaluation of results and design and checking to a particular technical
standard.
In addition, the user may also define a structural shape that is derived from the calculation shape and can be
used for impressive drawings and is also useful during the design of connections.
Climatic loads
If wind or snow loads are supposed to act on the structure, this functionality option must be set ON.
Parameters
Advanced users of SCIA.ESA PT may find it very useful to define some of the program input values as
parameters. Parameters, if applied, provide for fast, easy and simple change of e.g. structure dimensions, load
values, etc. One single modification of the appropriate parameter leads to automatic regeneration of the model
with the new defined value.
Prestressing
This option provides for calculation of prestressing.
Steel
Design of steel structures may require not only the determination of internal forces and deflexions, but also
some other tasks related to a safe design and realisation of a steel structure.
Pinned connections This option opens possibility for the definition of pinned
connections of steel members.

48
 Program settings

Frame connections This option opens possibility for the definition of frame
connections of steel members.
Fire resistance The type of fire resistance for steel members may be defined
after this option has been selected.
Overview drawings This option controls whether "wizards" for automatic generation
of pictures in the Picture gallery are available or not.
Expert system If this option is ON, the user may use the expert system for the
design of connections. User defined connections may be saved
into this system and the saved connections may be applied
later to other joints.
Connection This option activates a wizard that helps the user create
monodrawings drawings of defined connections.

The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Loads settings
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.
Wind region
This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may influence wind
loads that the building will be exposed to. The user may choose from three options for this item:
None There is be no wind load applied.
Code The wind region is defined according to appropriate national
standard.
Library The user specifies the height-wind pressure curve. The real
load is then defined as a force load but its type must be set to
Wind. The load value input by the user then represents the
load width.

Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators > Wind
generator.
Snow region
This parameter defines the region where the modelled structure will be located. The region may influence
snow loads that the building will be subject to. The user may choose from three options for this item:
None There is be no snow load applied.
Code The snow region is defined according to appropriate national
standard.
Snow weight The user specifies the snow weight per square meter. The real
load is then defined as a force load but its type must be set to
Snow. The load value input by the user then represents the
load width.

Note: For more information about the generation of wind load see chapter Loads > Load generators > Snow
generator.

Combinations settings
This tab provides for the adjustment of load case parameters for automatic generation of load case
combinations based on a particular national standard.
The procedure for setting the parameters is the same as for other project parameters.

Procedure for setting project data

The procedure for the adjustment of project parameters is similar for all groups of parameters.

49
Reference Guide

1. Procedure for setting Basic project data

2. Open dialogue Project data in one of the following ways:
a. Use Menu function Tree > Project.
b. Click Tree menu item Project.
3. Select the required tab (Basic data / Functionality / Loads / Combinations).
4. Adjust the required parameters or select options that should be applied in the project.
5. Click [OK] to confirm the settings.

Display style settings

Display Setup palettes
SCIA.ESA PT uses a set of palettes to display project data (i) in the graphical window of the program, (ii) in the
document window, and (iii) on an external graphical device. The palette comprises settings of:
 colours,
 line styles,
 fonts,
 dimension lines,
 beam types.
It is possible to adjust separate palettes for individual output "directions". What’s more, it is possible to use
settings from one palette for another one, i.e. load settings of one palette into the other one.
The available palettes are:
white background Used for the screen, the structure is drawn in colours on white
background.
black background Used for the screen, the structure is drawn in colours on black
background.
document – colour Used for the document, the structure is painted in colours.
document – Used for the document, the structure is painted in black-and-
monochrome white style.
graphic output – colour Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the
structure is painted in colours.
graphic output – Used for the graphical output (paper space gallery), the
monochrome structure is painted in black-and-white style.

The procedure for selection of palettes for individual output "directions"

1. Open any of the following Setup dialogues (all of them can be found under function Setup of the
main menu):
a. Colours / lines,
b. Fonts,
c. Beam types.
d. Dimension lines.
2. At the top of the dialogue, select the tab corresponding to the "device" you want to adjust.
3. In the combo box named Current palette select the required palette.
4. If required, make any changes to the settings (see chapters Colours setup, Font setup, Beam type
setup, Dimension line setup for more information).
5. Confirm with [OK].

Loading and saving defined settings

Loading and saving settings for all the palettes at the same time
If required, you may use one the three buttons at the bottom edge of the dialogue to reload or save the settings
for all the palettes used in the program.

50
 Program settings

Load program default This option loads default settings as they were adjusted by the
settings developer of the program.
Store user default This option saves the current settings for all palettes as your
setting personal settings.
Store user default This option loads the settings that have been previously saved
setting by means of the button described one line above.

Loading and saving settings for a separate palette

If required, you may use one the three buttons in the top part of tabs Screen, Document and Graphic output
to reload or save the settings for the selected group of parameters. Each of the following buttons works just
with one sub-tab of the main tabs, i.e. for example with tab Screen > Fonts, Document > Structural types,
etc.
Load program default This option loads settings for the current tab as were define by
settings the manufacturer.
Store user default This option saves the current settings as a user-defined
setting default.
Load user default This option reads the settings that have been previously saved
setting with button Store user default setting.
Load settings from This option enables the user to load into the current tab
other palette settings from the corresponding tab of any other palette.
Convert colours to grey This option converts the colours on the current tab into grey
scale scale.
This option is not available for dimension lines.
Convert colours to This option converts all the colours on the current tab into black
black colour.
This option is not available for dimension lines.

Colours Setup
Adjustment of colours is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
The adjustment of colour and line style can be made separately for each entity type and drawing part. The
following parameters can be adjusted for each available entity or symbol:
colour The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or
may mix his/her own shade.
line style The user may select from a set of available line styles.
width This parameter defines the thickness of the line.
If the width type is set to pixels, the user may select the
thickness in pixels of the screen.
If the width type is set to metric, the user may adjust the
thickness in metric units.
width type This options tell in which units the line thickness is specified.
Pixels are useful if the drawing is "tuned" for screen display.
Metric option is usually the right choice if the final drawing is
made on a graphical device such as printer, plotter, etc.

The procedure for adjustment of colours

1. Open dialogue Colours Setup using menu function Setup > Colours / lines,
2. Make the required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the
use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

51
Reference Guide

Font Setup
Adjustment of fonts is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
For each of the texts the following parameters can be adjusted:
size Specifies the size of labels.
size definition Specifies how the size is measured. It may be measured in
units of graphical device or in absolute units (i.e. the units in
which the structure is defined).
colour This item specifies the colour of the text.
placement The labels may be put into:
the plane of the screen
plane XZ
plane XY
bold Labels are in bold letters.
italic Labels are in italic letters.
underline Labels are in underlined letters.
strikeout Labels are in stroked out letters.

The procedure for adjustment of fonts

1. Open dialogue Fonts Setup using menu function Setup > Fonts,
2. Make the required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the
use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

Beam type Setup

Adjustment of beam types is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
For each of the types the following parameters can be adjusted:
colour The user may select from a set of basic pre-defined colours or
may mix his/her own shade.
style The user may select from a set of available line styles.
width This parameter defines the thickness of the line.
If the width type is set to pixels, the user may select the
thickness in pixels of the screen.
If the width type is set to metric, the user may adjust the
thickness in metric units.
width type This options tell in which units the line thickness is specified.
Pixels are useful if the drawing is "tuned" for screen display.
Metric option is usually the right choice if the final drawing is
made on a graphical device such as printer, plotter, etc.
middle line This option specifies the style that is used to display beam
member middle line.
surface This option specifies the style that is used to display beam
member surface.
labels This option specifies the style that is used to display beam
member labels.
cross-section This option specifies the style that is used to display beam
member cross-section.

52
 Program settings

The procedure for adjustment of beam types

1. Open dialogue Beam types Setup using menu function Setup > Beam types,
2. Make the required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Note 1: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the
use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.
Note 2: The Setup dialogue supports the standard Windows feature – multiple selection.
Therefore, if the same property should be set for several beam types, the types can be selected at
the same time and the property adjusted in one step. The multiple selection is accessible via [Shift]
+ click and [Ctrl] + click combination.
Note 3: For more information about structural types see chapter Geometry > Structural model.

Dimension line Setup

Adjustment of dimension lines is a part of settings made for graphical palettes.
The dialogue enables the user to set the following parameters of dimension lines:
end mark style This option defines the shape of end mark (slash or arrow).
size definition This option specifies how the size is measured. It may be
measured in units of graphical device or in absolute units (i.e.
the units in which the structure is defined).
end mark size This parameters specifies the size of end mark.
font size This parameters specifies the size of dimension line font.
plot line style This parameters specifies the style of plot line.
plot line offset This parameters specifies the offset of plot line.
st
1 dimension line This parameters specifies the offset of the dimension line
offset closest to the dimensioned object.
next dimension line This parameters specifies the offset of other dimension lines.
offset

The procedure for adjustment of dimension line style

1. Open dialogue Dimension lines Setup using menu function Setup > Dimension lines,
2. Make the required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The settings are made separately for individual palettes. For more information about the
use of palettes see chapter Display Setup palettes.

Units Setup
In SCIA.ESA PT the user uses and comes into contact with a good number of various physical quantities. In
order to allow the user to adjust preferable units and display style of these quantities, the program offers a
means for user’s adjustment.
The adjustment can be done in Units Setup dialogue.
Unit "parameters"
Unit It sets the unit in which the value of appropriate quantity is
displayed.
Decimal length It defines number of decimal digits to be displayed when the
corresponding quantity is displayed.
Output format It specifies the format of displayed value for individual the
quantity. See below.

Output format

53
Reference Guide

decimal standard representation of a number 78.24 cm

782.4 mm
scientific representation of a number by means of 7.824E+01 cm
a base and an exponent 7.82E+02 mm
engineering representation of a number by means of 78.240E+00 cm
a base and an exponent, where the 782.40E+00 mm
exponent is always a multiple of three
fractional
fractional representation of a number by means of 3/16 in
a fraction
deg/min/sec representation of a number used for
angles
ft in representation of a number used for 2 ft 6.803 in
imperial units

The procedure for adjustment of units

1. Open dialogue Units Setup:
a. either using menu function Setup > Units,

b. or using button Units ( ) on toolbar Project.

2. Make the required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Note: For more information about units see chapter Terminology and conventions > Units.

Scales
Adjusting the scales
The entities displayed on the screen are displayed in a specific scale in order to fit into the area of the
graphical window. The user may adjust the scales to comply with his/her wishes.
The procedure for adjustment of scales
1. Open the Scales Setup dialogue:
a. either using menu function Setup > Scales,

b. or using button Scale manager ( ) on toolbar View.

2. Make the settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

54
 Program settings

The items in the dialogue are divided into two groups:

Loads and masses
Model and results
This part deals with loads and masses.
The scale is adjusted in such a way so that the here given
number of units (e.g. 5000 N) occupied 1 metre on the drawing.
In other words, the mark of force equal to 5000 N is as long on
the screen as a beam long 1 meter.
This part deals with model data and results.
The value given here means that the largest of the marks
related to model data or the largest diagram of results are as
big as the number here specifies.
For example, value 2 means that the largest mark for model
data will be 2 m (measured in the geometry units) large.

Note: The size of drawn symbols (loads, masses, etc.) is calculated from the values of
parameters described above and also from the value of scales multiplier described in chapter Fast
multiplying of scales. The larges symbol of all the symbols is as big as the value of multiplier. I.e., if
the multiplier is equal to 1, the largest symbol is one metre long, if the multiplier is equal to 2, the
largest symbol is two metres long. The size of other symbols is in proportion to the largest symbol
and is calculated from the parameters specified in the table above.
The dialogue contains also three save/read buttons.
Read application Reads settings as they were made by the developer of the
default program.
Read user default Reads settings that have been previously saved as user’s own
default.
Save as user Saves the current settings as the user’s default settings. These
default settings may be later read by the above mentioned function.
See also Example of scales setup.

Fast multiplying of scales

The scales adjusted in the Scale Setup dialogue can be quickly modified by a single click.

55
Reference Guide

Toolbar View contains an edit box with two spin arrows ( ) which can be used to easily define a
multiplier for current scales.
Scales for all entities are so adjusted that the largest drawn symbol is as long (in metres) as the multiplier
value.
For more about the procedure of setting the symbol size see chapter Adjusting the scales.
See also Example of scales setup.

Example of scales setup

The following set of pictures explains the principles of scales setup.
There are two 1 kN forces and three 1 kg masses defined in the sample structure.

Figure 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 1
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 1

The largest symbol is 1 metre long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of loads and masses
are of the same size.

Figure 2
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 2
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 1

56
 Program settings

The largest symbol is 1 metre long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of masses are half
size of the load symbols.

Figure 3
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 1
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 2

The largest symbol is 2 metres long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of loads and
masses are of the same size.

Figure 4
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Force = 1
Setup > Scales > Loads and masses > Mass = 2
Fast scales multiplier on toolbar View = 2

57
Reference Guide

The largest symbol is 2 metres long (see the auxiliary dimension line on the left). Symbols of masses are half
size of the load symbols.

Advanced settings
Document Setup
The Document Setup dialogue enables the user to adjust default values for the style of document. The
parameters are described in chapter Document > Adjusting the document default settings.

Picture gallery Setup

The Gallery Setup dialogue enables the user to adjust default values for style of pictures inserted into or
created in the Picture gallery. The parameters are described in chapter Graphic output >Picture gallery >
Picture gallery manager > Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery > Adjusting the default values for new
pictures.

Note: The settings adjusted in this dialogue are taken into account whenever a new drawing is
inserted into the picture gallery by means of Picture to gallery function ( ). For example, if the
default picture style is set to "wire", the drawing from the graphical window is inserted as "wired"
even though it was e.g. rendered in the graphical window. The style may be later edited in the
Picture gallery manager.

FE mesh Setup
Finite element mesh is generated automatically by the program. The user, however, may specify parameters
that control the generation process.
These parameters may be defined in the calculation dialogue or in the program setup.
The setup dialogue can be opened using menu function Setup > Mesh.
The meaning f individual parameters is given in chapter Calculation > Generating the FE mesh > Parameters
of FE mesh.

Solver Setup
This setup dialogue provides for adjustment of basic parameters controlling the calculation. The parameters
are described in chapter Calculation> Calculation types > Static linear calculation.
The parameters may be also specified in the calculation dialogue just before the calculation is executed.

58
 Program settings

Advanced geometry setup

The parameters in the first group are identical with some items from the Parameters controlling the alignment
of the structure. These values are used for all geometrical operations and for your convenience they are added
into this dialogue as well
Geometric tolerances
Min. distance of two Specifies the min. distance of two nodes for which the two
nodes, node to curve nodes are considered separate nodes. If the real distance of
two nodes is lower than this parameter, the two nodes are
merged together.
This parameter is used by the function for connection of entities
and by the function for check of data.

Max. distance of node Specifies the maximal allowable distance of a node from the
to 2D member plane plane of a 2D member. If the actual distance is larger than this
limit value, the geometry is considered invalid and a
corresponding warning is issued.

Displaying
Precise member This parameter comes into account only if surfaces are
surface switched on.
If ON, the shape is displayed as precisely as possible.
If OFF, only the schematic shape of the cross-section is
displayed.
The parameter has meaning in particular for steel rolled
sections.

Immediate refresh of If ON, the structural model is automatically refreshed after all
structural model changes.
If OFF, the structural model is refreshed manually on user’s
request.

Precision of displayed This parameter control smoothness of curves and curved

curves surfaces. The higher the number the smoother the curve. On
the other hand, the higher the number the slower the response
of your computer may be.
The parameter must be from interval <1, 10>.
The parameter does not affect the precision of the calculation.

Precision of cut-out This parameter controls smoothness of the displayed shape of

mesh intersecting surfaces.
The parameter does not affect the precision of the calculation.

59
Basic working tools
Selections
Introduction to selections
Whenever the user needs to do anything with any part of his/her model, s/he must, first of all, determine which
part of the model should be treated. In other words, the user has to make a "selection" of members that will be
processed.
Once the selection is defined, the required operation may be started. The selection may be formed by a single
entity or it may hold as many entities as required. Generally, the selection may contain entities of the same
type, or it may contain several entity types. Which of the two cases is applied depends on the intended
operation. Some operations require specific entity types, other operations may be carried out with any entity
types.
In general, there are two approaches to start an operation:
 the user first makes the selection and then starts the appropriate function (the function then deals
with the prior made selection),
 the user first starts the required function and then (i.e. from within the function) makes the selection.
Which approach is actually applied depends only on work habits of a particular user.
To sum up, the selection can be not only made and utilised in a function, but it can be also modified (reduced
or extended), cleared, saved into a file for later use or loaded from a previously created file.
Selections are controlled by:
 Menu View > Selections,
 Selections toolbar.

Making a selection
In order to make a selection, the program must be in the selection-enabled mode. This mode is the default
mode of the program and only a limited number of functions changes this mode into a selection-disabled
mode. The selection-enabled mode is identified by the mouse cursor that looks like a diagonally oriented arrow
with a small square attached to the tip of the arrow. Once this cursor is on the screen, it is possible to make
selections freely.
There are two basic ways to make a new selection: using the mouse or typing a command on the command
line. In both ways it is a piece of cake.
In addition, a selection can also be made via filters. That means, that the user specifies a condition that should
be fulfilled by all selected entities. For example, the user may specify the condition that the cross-section must
be a rolled IPE 300. The filter-controlled selection then looks for and selects all beam members with such a
cross-section.
Making a selection by the mouse cursor
When using the mouse cursor, there are several selection modes:
single selection One entity is selected each time the user clicks the
mouse button.
intersection line The user draws a line (or a polygon) on the screen. The
program selects all entities that have an intersection with
the drawn line.
rectangular cut-out The user draws a rectangle on the screen. The program
selects all entities located inside the rectangle or
overlapping it (see the paragraph below for details about
this selection mode).
polygonal cut-out The user draws a closed polygon on the screen. The
program selects all entities located inside the polygon.
working plane The program selects all entities located in the current
working plane.
select-all All currently displayed entities are selected
previous Activates the last made selection.

61
Reference Guide

How to activate the required selection mode:

selection via toolbar Selections via menu Tools > Selections
mode
Single click button [Selection by call function Selection by mouse
selection mouse]
Intersection click button [Selection by cut- call function Selection by cut-out
line out]
Rectangular click button [Selection by call function Selection by
cut-out intersection line] intersection line

Polygonal cut- click button [Selection by call function Selection by

out polygonal cut-out] polygonal cut-out
Working click button [Select by call function Select by working
plane working plane] plane
Select all click button [Select all] call function Select all
Previous click button [Previous call function Previous selection
selection]

Single selection
In order to make a selection, the user has to:
1. place the mouse cursor on the entity he/she wants to select,
2. click the left mouse button.
That is all that is necessary to make a selection by mouse. To add another entity, the user just puts the cursor
on another entity and clicks the left mouse button.
Intersection line
When this mode is invoked, all entities that are intersected by a defined line are added into the selection. The
line may be either a single straight line or a polygon consisting of straight lines.
The procedure to define a polygon
1. Position the mouse cursor to the place where the polygon should start.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Position the mouse cursor where the end point of the polygon line segment should be located.
4. Click the left mouse button.
5. Repeat the previous two steps as many times as required.
6. Close the polygon, ie. either
a. press [ESC] key, or
b. invoke the pop-up menu, select End polyline command and run it, or
c. define the last point with a double-click on the left mouse button.
Cut-out
This mode enables the user to select all entities located inside a mouse defined cut-out. There are two
different kinds of the cut-out. The first one serves for selection of entities located fully inside it. The other one
can be used to select entities that are both fully inside and overlap the cut-out.
The procedure to define a cut-out that selects inside-located entities only
1. Place the mouse cursor to the TOP LEFT corner of the rectangular cut-out.
2. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
3. Drag the mouse to the BOTTOM RIGHT corner of the rectangular cut-out.
4. Release the button.
5. The procedure to define a cut-out selecting both inside-located and overlapping entities
6. Place the mouse cursor to the TOP RIGHT corner of the rectangular cut-out.
7. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
8. Drag the mouse to the BOTTOM LEFT corner of the rectangular cut-out.

62
 Basic working tools

9. Release the button.

Polygon
This mode is similar to the previous one. The difference is that the user draws an arbitrarily shaped closed
polygon instead of a simple rectangle.
The procedure to define a polygonal cut-out
1. Position the mouse cursor to the place where the polygon should start.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Position the mouse cursor where the next vertex of the polygon should be located.
4. Click the left mouse button.
5. Repeat the previous two steps as many times as required.
6. Close the polygon:
a. either press [ESC] key, or
b. invoke the pop-up menu, select Close polygon command and run it.
Working plane
In this mode, the program automatically selects all entities located in the current working plane.
Select-all
All displayed entities are automatically selected.
Filter-controlled selection
The filter-controlled selection is useful if the user wants to select all entities that meet a specific condition. This
type of selection is described in the following chapter.
Making a selection from the command line
A selection can be also made (sometimes very effectively) from the program’s command line.
The procedure is similarly simple as the "mouse procedure". The user types a command on the command line
and the selection is made.
Command syntax
SEL [switch] parameter [parameter2] [parameter3] [etc.]

or

SELM [Enter]
name1 [Enter]
name2 [Enter]
...
END [Enter]

The latter alternative provides fo multiple selections. SELM + [Enter] starts the multi-selection mode. Then you
can type the names of required entities one by one – each one followed by [Enter] key. The selection can be
completed with command END (followed by [Enter] key).

Switch
switch meaning
+ adds into selection
- subtracts from the current selection
| inverts the current selection

Parameter
parameter example description
entity name SEL BEAM23 selects entity named BEAM23
entity name with a SEL BEAM2? selects all entities whose name starts
wildcard with BEAM2 and is followed with a single

63
Reference Guide

character
SEL B? if beam members are named B and
numbered, this command selects all
"one-digit" beam members
SEL B?? if beam members are named B and
numbered, this command selects all
"two-digit" beam members
SEL B* selects all entities whose name starts
with letter B
SEL B1 B2 selects entities named B1 and B2
NONE SEL NONE clears the selection

Examples
sel none clears the selection
sel * selects all entities
sel N1 selects entity N1
sel + N* adds into the current selection entities whose name starts with
N
sel – B* removes from the current selection entities whose name starts
with B
sel | B1 inverts entity B1 in the selection (i.e. if the entity WAS in the
selection, it is removed; if the entity WAS NOT in the selection,
it is added)

Removing the entities from selection

When using complex and extensive selections, it may be necessary or at least useful to remove a particular
entity or entities from the already made selection.
In general, there are two ways to remove an entity from an existing selection: "[Ctrl] key" method and "Inverted
selection mode" method.
"[Ctrl] key" method
All the selection modes for making a selection can be used as well for removal of specific entities from the
current selection. In order to activate the "subtract from selection" mode, the user must press down and hold
[Ctrl] key on the keyboard.
Example 1:
Let’s assume that a selection of some entities has been already made. Now, the user needs to remove one
particular entity.
The procedure will be:
1. Position the mouse cursor over the entity that should be extracted from the selection.
2. Press down and hold [Ctrl] key.
3. Click the left mouse button.
4. The entity is removed from the selection.
5. Release [Ctrl] key.
Example 2:
Let’s assume that a selection of some entities has been already made. Now, the user needs to remove a few
entities that are parallel to each other and located close to each other.
The procedure will be:
1. Select Intersection line selection mode.
2. Position the mouse cursor next to the first entity that should be removed from the selection and
outwards from the others.
3. Press down and hold [Ctrl] key.

64
 Basic working tools

4. Define the intersection line, i.e. the line or polygon intersecting all the required entities.
5. Close the intersection line.
6. Release [Ctrl] key.

"Inverted selection mode" method

It is also possible to press button [Selection mode toggle] ( ) on toolbar Selections. All the selection
modes described in chapter Making a selection then remove entities from the previously made selection.

Note: It is also possible to remove entities from selection using command "SEL" typed on the
command line with the appropriate switch and parameter. For more information see chapter Making
a selection.

Making a selection based on a specific property

Very often the user needs to select all entities that meet some specific condition. For example, to select all
beam members made of one material type or all supports allowing for free movement in X-direction, the filter-
controlled selection is the right choice.
The procedure to apply a filter-controlled selection
1. Select one entity that meets the required condition.
2. In the property table click the left column cell of the row that contains the required condition.

3. Click icon [Quick select] ( ) at the top of the property dialogue frame.

Note: This type of selection may be used to select e.g.

- all the beam members of the same cross-section,
- all the slabs of the same thickness,
- all the entities located in the same layer, etc.

Adjusting the filter for selections

Sometimes it may be very useful to limit the selection on some entity types only. SCIA.ESA PT enables the
user to specify the filter for selections.
There are three filter options:
OFF The filter is OFF and any entity of any type may be selected.
For service Function for making a selection recognises only those entities
which the active service can deal with.
For tree The type of entities that can be selected is defined by the
position of cursor in the tree.

Filter for service

If this filter option is selected, the set of entities for selections is defined by the currently opened service. The
user can select only those entities that the service can deal with.
For example, if service Loads is open, and this filter option is ON, only beam members, nodes, and loads of all
types can be selected.
Filter for tree
If this filter option is selected, the set of entities for selections is defined by the currently opened service. and
by the position of cursor (by the focus) in the tree menu. The user can select only those entities that are
specified by the function "under focus".
For example, if service Loads is open, and this filter option is ON, and the focus in on function Line force on
beam, only line loads can be selected.
The procedure to adjust the required filter
1. Click button [Filter] on the Status bar.
2. A short menu is opened.
3. Select the required filter.

65
Reference Guide

The alternative procedure for the adjustment of the required filter

1. Press in button [Filter for selection on/off] ( ) on Selection of objects toolbar in order to select
Filter for service.
2. This action makes another filter button available – [Filter by service tree on/off] ( ).
3. Press in button [Filter by service tree on/off] on Selection of objects toolbar in order to select
Filter for tree.

Modifying a selection
Any existing and active selection may be modified, i.e. some of the selected entities may be removed from it
and some other entities may be added to it.
Removal of entities from the selection
In order to remove an entity from the current selection, follow the procedure given in chapter Removing the
entities from selection.
Adding another entity into the selection
In order to add another entity into the current selection, simply follow the procedure for making the selection.
Until you clear the selection, any new selected entities are added to the current selection.

Applying a selection
A selection is usually made to carry out an action (i.e. call one or more of SCIA.ESA PT functions). In fact, vast
majority of SCIA.ESA PT functions works with a selection and modifies the entities in the selection according
to defined functionality. Therefore, it must be clear how to associate the selection with the required action.
Fortunately, this crucial step is completely automatic and absolutely straightforward in SCIA.ESA PT despite
the fact that there exist two opposing approaches.
Applying a pre-created selection
This approach leads to the following steps:
1. Select the required entities.
2. Start the function.
3. The function "works" with the previously made selection.
Applying a post-created selection
On the other hand, this approach means:
1. Call the required functions.
2. Select the entities that should be treated with the function.
3. The function then processes the in-function-defined selection.

Both approaches have their advantages. The latter is useful mainly if the user wants to apply the same
function on several different selections. It is possible to change the function parameters for each particular
selection, but the main function itself must be called just once.

Clearing a selection
If a selection is no longer useful, or if it was made improperly (e.g. wrong entities have been selected), or if any
other reason occurs, the selection may be cleared. It means that the selected entities are removed from the
selection but NOT from the project. Just the selection is emptied.
There are several ways to clear a current selection:
 Press [ESC] key,
 Click [Cancel selection] ( ) button on the Selections toolbar,
 Call function Cancel selection from menu Tools > Selections.
All the possibilities are equivalent to each other.

66
 Basic working tools

Saving and reading a selection

Any selection made for any purpose can be saved to a disk for later re-use.
Any selection can be saved or loaded through appropriate functions from the Selections toolbar or via menu
Tools > Selections.
The selections are stored with the project. It is however possible to export the selections out of the project and
use them in another project. This export can be made in the Selection manager (see below).
There are, in principle, three actions that can be done with selections:
 a new selection can be saved (done through Save selection dialogue),
 an existing selection can be loaded (done through Selection manager dialogue),
 an existing selection can be updated (done through Selection manager dialogue).
In addition (as already stated), any selection can be exported from the project to an external file that can be
later imported into another project.
Note: Be careful when using one selection (EPS) file with multiple projects. The program makes
no special checks and mechanically reads the selection from the file. However, the entities stored in
the selection that do not exist in the project are, naturally, ignored.

Saving a new selection

When a selection is being saved, the Saved selection dialogue is opened on the screen.
Saved selection dialogue

Name You can assign an arbitrary name to each saved selection.

Edit selection The selection that was made in graphical window before
invoking this dialogue can be further modified or reviewed in
the Make selection dialogue – see below.
This option can be also useful when a new selection is made
directly in the Selection manager – see below.
Select picture Each saved selection can be accompanied with an illustrative
picture – e.g. screen copy – that may be worth thousand words
in explaining which entities are in the selection in question.
Comment You may add e few lines of comment.

67
Reference Guide

Description This field contains an automatically generated list of all entities

included into the selection.

Make selection dialogue

On condition that you know the names of individual entities in your project, you can manually add or remove
the required entities to or from the selection.
Available (entities) This list contains a list of all available entities that can be
included into the selection. This list does not contain the
entities that have been already inserted into the current
selection.
Selected (entities) This list names the entities that have been inserted into the
currently edited selection.
Button [--] This button collapses all the branches of the tree with the list of
(available/selected) entities.
Each list in the dialogue has its own button.
Button [++] This button expands all the branches of the tree with the list of
(available/selected) entities.
Each list in the dialogue has its own button.
Button [>] Use this button to move the highlighted item from the
"available" to the "selected" list, i.e. add it to the selection.
Button [>>] Use this button to move all the items from the "available" to the
"selected" list, i.e. add them to the selection.
Button [<] Use this button to move the highlighted item from the
"selected" to the "available" list, i.e. remove it to the selection.
Button [<<] Use this button to move all the items from the "selected" to the
"available" list, i.e. remove them to the selection.

Loading a saved selection

68
 Basic working tools

Once a selection was saved, it is possible to load it back for use with any function that works with selections.
Any saved selection can be loaded through the Selection manager. The Selection manager is a standard
SCIA ESA PT database manager.

Selection manager
New Creates a new selection.
Edit Edits the existing selection.
Copy Creates a copy of an existing selection.
Delete Deletes the existing selection.
Undo, Redo Takes back the last action done in the manager.
Read from disk Reads a selection that was saved to an external EPS file.
Save to disk Saves the selection into an external file with extension EPS.
Selection properties The right-hand side of the Selection manager dialogue contains
the information about the selection. The content is identical to
the Saved selection dialogue described above.

Updating a saved selection

Any saved selection can be updated any time later, if required. The update is made through the Selection
manager. That is however modified a bit. The button load is replaced with button [Update].
The fact that the update uses the Selection manager has one major advantage. Let us assume that you
loaded a saved selection, modified it in the graphical window, started function Update named selection and
only then you realise that you do not want to lose the original selection – that it is still useful and necessary.
You are in the Selection manager, so instead of selecting (and updating, i.e. changing) one of the existing
named selections, you can create a new selection and use it for the update function. In other words, you can
swap from "Update" to "Save as new" even if the update function is already in the progress.

69
Reference Guide

The procedure to save a new selection to a disk

1. Make a selection.
2. Start function Save selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).
3. Select Save as new from the submenu.
4. Fill in the parameters in the Saved selection dialogue.
5. Confirm with [OK].

The procedure to update the existing selection

1. Load the required selection (see below for the procedure).
2. Modify the selection as required.
3. Start function Save selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).
4. Select Update existing from the submenu.
5. The Selection manager is opened on the screen.
6. Select the selection to be updated.
7. (If you change you mind, you can create a new empty selection to be "replaced" by the updated
selection).
8. Confirm with [Update].

The procedure to read a selection from a disk

1. Start function Load selection (either on toolbar Selections or in menu Tools > Selections).
2. Select the selection you want to read.
3. Confirm with [Load].

Selections versus editing of properties

Selections are very advanced feature of SCIA.ESA PT. They do not provide just for the passive selection of
entities that will be further treated in some way. The selections represent a powerful tool for editing of the
project.
The principle is that whenever whichever entity is inserted into a current selection, its properties are
automatically and immediately displayed in the property window of the application.
If multiple entities of the same type are selected then the intersection of their properties is displayed in the
window. If multiple entities of different types are selected, the user may choose the type whose properties
should be displayed. It is of course possible to simply swap between the types once the parameters for one
type have been reviewed.
What’s more, any data displayed in the property window can be edited and the change is immediately
recorder.
Editing in the property window for one selected entity
If just one entity is selected, the property window shows it’s properties and, if possible, co-ordinates of its
endpoints. Once the user changes any of the values in the property window, the change is recorder and the
entity is re-displayed to reflect the changes.
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of the same type
If several entities of the same type are selected, the property window displays the intersection of their
properties. That means that the dialogue contains values of those parameters which are identical. If any
parameters are of different value for different beam members in the selection, the value cell in the property
window is left blank.
The user may once again edit any item in the property window. This relates even to the blank cells. If a value is
input into any of the cells, that value is assigned to all the entities in the selection.
Editing in the property window for multiple selected entities of various types
Here the same can be said as in the paragraph above. What’s more, the combo box at the top part of the
property window contains a list of all types whose entities are in the current selection. When the used selects
any item from this list, the properties of this entity type are shown in the property window.
The user may then review or edit them as described above.

70
 Basic working tools

Note: See also chapter Controlling the selection-versus-editing process.

Controlling the selection-versus-editing process

The principle of editing in the Property window as described in chapter Selections versus editing of properties
can be controlled by means of settings made in the Environment settings.
The Environment settings dialogue contains item Maximum number of grouping properties. This items
tells the program what is the maximum number of entities for which the "selection-versus-editing" process
should be started.
In other words, if the user selects fewer entities than specified in the parameter Maximum number of
grouping properties, the Property window is filled in with the parameters of selected entities. Consequently,
the parameters can be easily edited.
On the other hand, if the number of selected entities is greater than the number specified in parameter
Maximum number of grouping properties, the Property window is left blank. If required, the Property
window may be filled in manually by pressing button [Update property dialogue] ( ) located at the top right
corner of the Property window..
This feature may be useful particularly for large projects with a great number of entities. The time that is
necessary to collect and sort all the parameters of all selected entities is growing with the number of selected
entities. In addition, it is assumed that usually the user will select only a limited number of entities for direct
editing in the Property window. And, if the user selects a really vast number of entities, it is assumed that the
selection was made for some of manipulation functions and not for direct editing.
Therefore, it is possible to make as large selection as necessary and apply any of manipulation function to it,
but the Property window is not filled in for excessive selections. If, however, the user does want to edit
directly even the enormous number of entities, he/she may fill in the Property window manually by means of
the above mentioned button.

Selections of slabs with openings

If a slab has an opening or a subregion, there are a few rules concerning the selection of such a slab.
Let’s assume a simple rectangular slab with an opening.

Adjust the view parameters so that only the middle line of a slab is displayed on the screen

If you select the outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected.

71
Reference Guide

In order to select the opening, you must select the opening itself.

And now, let’s change the view parameters and let also the surfaces of the slab displayed.

If you select the surface outline of the main slab, the main slab is highlighted and also selected. In addition, the
opening is highlighted, BUT be careful, it is NOT selected.

In order to select the opening, you must select the opening itself.

72
 Basic working tools

Activity
Introduction to activity
The concept of activity is based on the assumption that it is convenient to hide a part of the modelled structure
and work only the remaining part. This is useful mainly for larger projects where a great number of beam
members and other entities may reduce the lucidity and comfort of performed operations.
The activity feature provides for selection of only those members that are essential for a certain manipulation
or operation. The rest of the structure is temporarily hidden from the user’s view.
In SCIA.ESA PT the activity can be realised by means of two approaches:
 Layers - see chapter Layers for more details
 Activity functions – see individual activity functions.

Activity types
There are several approaches the user may choose to determine which part of the structure should be active
(i.e. visible and available for manipulations).
Layers The activity is completely controlled by layers.
See chapter Basic working tools > Layers > Displaying and
hiding a layer.
Working plane Only members located in the current working plane become
active.
Selection Only members being currently selected become active.
Optionally, the selected members may become inactive and all
the others remain active.
Clipping box Only members located inside the current clipping box become
active.

Switching the activity On or Off

Despite the currently selected type of activity, the user may decide whether the activity as a whole should be
switched on or off. In other words, whether only the "active" part of the modelled structure should be visible or
whether the whole structure should be displayed and available for manipulations.
The procedure to switch the activity (i.e. to switch it ON if the activity is OFF and vice versa)
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity On (or Activity Off).
 Or click button Activity On (or Activity Off) on Activity toolbar ( ).

Note: Both the menu item and the tooltip of the function mentioned above contain the
information about the current Activity type.

73
Reference Guide

Activity according to layers

When this activity type is selected, the information specified in the Layers manager controls the activity of
structure members.
For more details about layers and their use see chapter Basic working tools > Layers > Displaying and hiding a
layer.
The procedure to adjust the activity according to layers
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by layers.
 Or click button Activity by layers on Activity toolbar ( ).

Activity according to current selection

The user may simply select (using standard SCIA ESA PT selections) members that he/she wants to make
either active or inactive. In general, there are two approaches:
 selected members are let active; all the others become inactive,
 selected members become inactive; all the others are let active.
Making the selected members active
The procedure to adjust the activity according to selection – selected members become active
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by selection (Selected members On).
 Or click button Activity by selection (Selected members On) on Activity toolbar ( ).
Making the selected members inactive
The procedure to adjust the activity according to selection – selected members become inactive
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by selection (Selected members Off).
 Or click button Activity by selection (Selected members Off) on Activity toolbar ( ).

Activity according to working plane

When this activity type is selected, the members located in the currently adjusted working plane become
active. All other members become inactive.
For more details about working plane see chapter Basic working tools > working plane > Adjusting a working
plane.
The procedure to adjust the activity according to working plane
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by working plane.
 Or click button Activity by working plane on Activity toolbar ( ).

Activity according to clipping box

When this activity type is selected, the members located inside the currently adjusted clipping box become
active. All other members become inactive.
For more details about clipping box see chapter Advanced tools > Clipping box > Introduction to clipping box.
The procedure to adjust the activity according to clipping box
1. Activate the clipping box and adjust it in required way.
2. Adjust the activity type to "by clipping box":
a. Either call function Tools > Activity > Activity by clipping box.
b. Or click button Activity by clipping box on Activity toolbar ( ).

Inverting the activity

If required, the currently adjusted activity may be inverted so that:
 the currently active members become inactive,

74
 Basic working tools

 the currently inactive members become active.

The procedure to invert the activity
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Invert current activity.
 Or click button Invert current activity on Activity toolbar ( ).

Controlling the display style of inactive members

The user may decide whether the members that are currently inactive should be partly visible or completely
hidden.
The procedure to display inactive members
 Either call function Tools > Activity > Draw inactive members.
 Or click button Draw inactive members on Activity toolbar ( ).

Note 1: When visible, the inactive members are drawn in a style defined for Inactive members
in Colours setup (see chapter Program settings > Project settings > Display style settings > Colour
setup).
Note 2: The function works like an ON / OFF switch. That means that if the inactive members
ARE NOT drawn, the function makes them appear. If the inactive members ARE drawn, the
function hides them.

Clipping box
Introduction to clipping box
Clipping box is a very powerful tool that facilitates manipulation mainly with excessive structures. The Clipping
box defines an area (3D-area) that is visible on the screen. The rest of the structure located behind the given
area is temporarily hidden from the user’s view.

Defining a new clipping box

The definition of a new clipping box is similar to the adjusting of the clipping box in the setting table.
The procedure for the definition of a new clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Clipping box
- new.
2. Define the origin (i.e. the centre) of the clipping box.
3. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.
4. Fill in the table.
5. Confirm with button [OK].

Defining the clipping box around the working plane

Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that only entities located in the
working plane are visible.
The procedure for attaching the clipping box to the working plane

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Attach to
workplane.
2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Defining the clipping box around an entity

Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that only selected entities are
visible.
The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around selected entities

75
Reference Guide

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Around
selected entity.
2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Defining the clipping box around the model

Sometimes it may be very useful to define the clipping box in such a way so that it "outscribes" the whole
model.
The procedure for adjusting the clipping box around the whole model

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Around all
entities.
2. The clipping box is adjusted accordingly.

Using the clipping box

The procedure to switch the clipping box ON or OFF

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Clipping box
On/Off.
2. The clipping box is activated or switched off accordingly.
Example of clipping box application
view
without
clipping
box

view with
clipping
box ON

76
 Basic working tools

view with
clipping
box ON
after being
zoomed in

Adjusting the clipping box in the setting table

The procedure for tabular adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function
Alphanumerical edit.
2. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.
3. Fill in the table.
4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note 1: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping
box is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button.
Note 2: If the clipping box is ON and has been defined around the current working plane, the
setting dialogue looks different and allows the user to specify the depth around the working plane.

Adjusting the clipping box using the mouse

The procedure to adjust the clipping by mouse
1. Turn the clipping box ON.
2. Position the mouse cursor over one of the clipping box borders.
3. Click the left mouse button to select the clipping box.
4. Special box-editing symbols are displayed in the centre of all clipping box surfaces. The ball symbol
provides for resizing of the box, the cylinder symbol enables the user to rotate the box.
5. Select corresponding symbol for required manipulation.
6. Position the mouse cursor over the symbol.
7. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
8. Drag the mouse to adjust the clipping box as required.
9. Release the mouse button.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 as many times as required to tune the adjustment of the box.
11. Press [Esc] key to close the adjustment function.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the adjusting of clipping box. To start the video, just position the mouse
cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the
video pop-up menu and select function Play.
The alternative procedure for mouse controlled adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Graphical
edit.
2. The clipping box is turned ON and swapped into the editing mode.

77
Reference Guide

3. Follow the procedure described above.

4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the graphical dialogue was invoked, the
clipping box is switched ON before enabling the adjusting.

Moving the clipping box

If required, the current clipping box can be moved to a new location. The size of the clipping box remains
unchanged, only its position in space is altered.
The procedure for moving of the clipping box
1. If it is not the case, activate the clipping box (i.e. switch it on).
2. On toolbar View click button [Clipping box for active view] ( ) and select function Move.
3. Define the new origin (i.e. the centre) of the clipping box.
4. The clipping box is moved accordingly.

Layers
Introduction to layers
One of the important entity properties that should be understood well is the layer property. Experienced users
definitely use layers all the time and that is why their work is so effective. Good use of layers is one of
important aspects of a good model-making-and-evaluating practice.
Basically, layers are the computer equivalent of tracing overlays on a drawing board. However, layers are
much more powerful because you can have many layers in a single project and you can control the visibility
and colour of layers independently. This makes working with very complicated projects much more efficient.
When you start a new project, it has only one layer. The first thing you should do, therefore, when you start a
new SCIA.ESA PT project is to create some new layers.

Layers manager
The Layers manager is a tool to control the layers defined in a project. The Layers manager provides for
creating, editing and deleting of layers.
The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other SCIA.ESA PT managers do. It contains
control buttons for standard manager operations:
New It creates a new layer. The new layer is created with
default properties that may be later edited.
Edit It opens an editing dialogue where the layer’s properties
may be changed.
Copy This function creates a copy of the selected layer.
Delete It removes the selected layer from the project database.
Undo / Redo It performs an Undo or Redo operation.
Text Output It opens a small document window with a table that
summarises properties of selected layers.

In order to open the Layers manager use either menu function Tools > Layers or tree menu function Tools >
Layers.
The Layers manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain item Layer. Such an
item contains a button to open the Layers manager.

78
 Basic working tools

Displaying and hiding a layer

The Layers manager also enables the user to specify which layers should be visible and which ones should be
hidden.

Defining a new layer

A new layer can be defined in the Layers manager.
The procedure to define a new layer
1. Open the Layers manager.
2. Click button [New] to create a new layer.
3. If required, click button [Edit] to change the default layer parameters (name, colour, visibility).
4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as you need.
5. Close the Layers manager.

Applying defined layers

A defined layer may be applied in the property dialogue of each particular entity. One of the table items
contains the layer name. This item defines the layer that the entity is put into.
Once the layer is specified in the property dialogue of an entity, the entity may be displayed or hidden
according to the settings made in the Layers manager.

79
Reference Guide

The picture above shows the selection of the appropriate layer for a beam member.

Displaying and hiding a layer

One of the important features of a layer is that it can be hidden. Let’s assume that the user have finished
modelling of one part of the structure. Let’s suppose that now s/he needs to work on another part of the same
structure and that the new part is independent on the first part. The best s/he can do is hide the whole first part
or at least its major part. This can be done by switching the appropriate layers off. The new part of the
structure then can be modelled in new layers.
The layers can be switched OFF or ON (i.e. displayed or hidden) in the Layers manager.
The procedure for hiding (or displaying) a layer
1. Open the Layers manager.
2. In the right hand side part of the dialogue is located a layer property table containing option Display.
3. Select the layer or layers you want to display.
4. Tick the option Display.
5. Select the layer or layers you want to hide.
6. Remove the tick from the option Display.
7. If necessary, repeat the steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Layers manager.

Ignoring selected layers in calculation

It may happen that a calculation model of a structure may be quite simple. Simultaneously, the structure may
contain a lot of additional parts that have no load-bearing function but that are important for production of nice-
looking and accurate drawings.
Such a situation calls for using of special type of layers – layers used in structural model only and ignored in
the calculation. This feature may be adjusted in the Layers manager.
The procedure for extracting the layer from calculation
1. Open the Layers manager.
2. In the right hand side part of the dialogue is located a layer property table containing option
structural model only.

80
 Basic working tools

3. Select the layer or layers you want to ignore in calculation.

4. Tick the option Structural model only.
5. Select the layer or layers you want to consider in calculation.
6. Remove the tick from the option Structural model only.
7. If necessary, repeat the steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Layers manager.

User co-ordinate system (UCS)

Introduction to a user co-ordinate system
The definition of points may be facilitated by the application of a user co-ordinate system. This system can be
so defined (i.e. positioned and oriented) that it reflects the geometry of the model (or its part) that is being
defined.
The user can define as many user co-ordinate systems as necessary. However, only one of them can be
active in one graphical window at a time. Nevertheless, the user may swap between individual user co-ordinate
systems at any time. What’s more, even a new user co-ordinate system may be defined any time it is
necessary or efficient to do so.
The active user co-ordinate system is indicated on the program status bar.

Adjusting a user co-ordinate system

UCS defined by three points
A new UCS can be defined by means of three points that do not lie on the same line. Each of the points has a
precisely specified meaning:
st
1 point It defines the origin of the new co-ordinate system.
nd
2 point It defines the direction of X-axis of the new co-ordinate system.
rd
3 point It defines the side to which the Y-axis of the new co-ordinate system will point.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Horizontal UCS defined by one point

A new co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-ordinate
system (UCS). The axes of the user co-ordinate system are parallel with corresponding global co-ordinate
axes.
That means that:
 the X-axis of the UCS is parallel with the X-axis of the global co-ordinate system (GCS),
 the Y-axis of the UCS is parallel with the Y-axis of the GCS,
 the Z-axis of the UCS is parallel with the Z-axis of the GCS.
The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always horizontal.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Vertical UCS defined by two points

A new co-ordinate system is defined by two points (or one line).
The first inserted point defines the origin of the new co-ordinate system. The second point defines the direction
of the X-axis of the new system. However, the X-axis is not defined precisely by the second point. The X-axis
is always horizontal, and therefore, the second inserted point specifies the direction of the X-axis of the new
user co-ordinate system. The Y-axis of the new user co-ordinate system is always vertical.
The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note 1: The two inserted points defining the new system MUST NOT lie on a vertical line.

81
Reference Guide

Note 2: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Vertical UCS perpendicular to global X-axis

A new user co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-
ordinate system.
The axes of the user co-ordinate system are oriented in such a way so that:
 the X-axis of the user-coordinate system is always horizontal,
 the Y-axis of the user-coordinate system is always vertical,
 the XY plane of the user-coordinate system is perpendicular to the global X-axis.
The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Vertical UCS perpendicular to global Y-axis

A new user co-ordinate system is defined by a single point. The point defines the origin of the new user co-
ordinate system.
The axes of the user co-ordinate system are oriented in such a way so that:
 the X-axis of the user-coordinate system is always horizontal,
 the Y-axis of the user-coordinate system is always vertical,
 the XY plane of the user-coordinate system is perpendicular to the global Y-axis.
The XY plane of this user co-ordinate system is always vertical with the Y-axis pointing upwards.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS identical with the global co-ordinate system

A new user co-ordinate system is identical with the global co-ordinate system.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's X-axis

A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) is defined according the following rules:
 the X-axis of the new UCS is put into the Y-axis of the current UCS,
 the Y-axis of the new UCS is put into the Z-axis of the current UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS perpendicular to the current UCS's Y-axis

A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) is defined according the following rules:
 the X-axis of the new UCS remains unchanged,
 the Y-axis of the new UCS is put into the Z-axis of the current UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS defined according to an entity's LCS

A new user co-ordinate system is defined by means of an existing entity (e.g. beam).
The new user co-ordinate system has got its origin in the starting point of the selected entity. The axes of the
user co-ordinate system are identical with the local co-ordinate axes of the selected entity.

82
 Basic working tools

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

UCS defined from a view direction

A new user co-ordinate system is calculated from the current view direction. In other words, the X-axis of the
new co-ordinate system appears horizontal on the screen, the Y-axis of the new co-ordinate system appears
vertical on the screen, and the Z-axis of the new co-ordinate system points towards the user’s eyes.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Editing a user co-ordinate system

UCS Manager
The UCS manager gives the user full control over the existing user co-ordinate systems. Similarly to other
database managers, it provides for the definition of a new UCS, for the modification or copying of existing
systems, and for removal of no-longer-used co-ordinate systems.

Association of the active graphical window with a particular UCS

The UCS manager is also used to select a particular UCS and associate it with (assign it to) the active
graphical window. The UCS that is selected (highlighted) in the list of defined UCSs becomes the one
associated with the graphical window.
The procedure for the selection of UCS for the active graphical window
1. Open the UCS manager:
a. in tree menu call function Tools > UCS,
b. on status bar click button showing the name of UCS associated with the active
graphical window.
2. Select the UCS that should be assigned to the active graphical window.
3. Close the UCS manager.

83
Reference Guide

Modifying an existing UCS

An existing user co-ordinate system may be edited and thus its origin or direction of axes or both may be
altered. In general, there are two ways to modify an existing UCS:
 type values of UCS parameters into the editing dialogue of the UCS,
 apply one of many modifying functions collected in submenu UCS (opened either from menu Tools
> UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ) on toolbar View) (see chapter
Adjusting a user co-ordinate system).
The procedure for direct editing of UCS parameters
1. Open the UCS manager.
2. Select the UCS you want to modify.
3. Click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS.
4. Type in the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes.
5. Close the editing dialogue.
6. Close the UCS manager.
The procedure for the modification of a UCS by means of UCS submenu functions
1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to modify is the current (active) one, make it current first.
2. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active
view] ( ) on toolbar View).
3. Select the required way of modification.
4. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).
5. The UCS has been modified and is now kept as the current UCS.
6. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active
view] ( ) on toolbar View).

7. Select function Store the current UCS ( ).

8. Select the name of the UCS that has been modified and rewrite it with the new adjustment.

Defining a new UCS

A new user co-ordinate system (UCS) can be defined in the UCS manager.
The UCS manager can be used to define completely a new user co-ordinate system if the user knows
numerically the parameters of the system. That means, if the user knows the exact global co-ordinates of the
UCS’s origin and the exact direction vectors of individual UCS’s axes. Otherwise, the UCS manager is used to
create a new UCS instance, and one of numerous UCS-modifying functions is later applied to specify the origin
and orientation of the UCS exes.
The procedure for the definition of a new UCS from within the UCS manager
1. Open the UCS manager.
2. Click button [New]. This creates a copy of the current UCS.
3. Click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS.
4. Type in the required values for the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes.
5. Close the editing dialogue.
6. Close the UCS manager.
The procedure for the definition of a new UCS parameters using a menu/toolbar function
1. Open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for active
view] ( ) on toolbar View).
2. Select the required way of definition.
3. If necessary, input required parameters (i.e. required point or points).
4. Once more open submenu UCS (either in menu Tools > UCS, or under button [Setting of UCS for
active view] ( ) on toolbar View).

5. Select function Store the current UCS ( ).

84
 Basic working tools

6. Type the name of the UCS and confirm with [OK].

7. That’s it. A new UCS is defined and will appear in the UCS manager.

Copying an existing UCS

Any of already defined UCSs may be copied. The copy may be further modified to define a new unique user
co-ordinate system.
The procedure to make a copy of an existing UCS
1. Open the UCS manager.
2. Select the UCS you want to copy.
3. Click button [Copy] to create a new UCS that is identical in its parameters with the selected one.
4. If required, click button [Edit] to adjust parameters of the new UCS and type the required values for
the origin of the UCS and for direction of its axes. Then close the editing dialogue.
5. If required, repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as necessary.
6. Close the UCS manager.

Moving an existing UCS

An existing UCS can be moved to a new origin. The orientation of the system remains unchanged, only the
UCS’s origin moves to a new position.
The procedure to move a UCS to a new origin
1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to move is the active one, make it active first.
2. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Move (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of UCS
for active view > Move from toolbar View).
3. Define the new origin of the UCS.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Rotating an existing UCS

An existing UCS can be rotated by a specified angle. The origin of the system remains unchanged, only the
direction of UCS’s axes changes accordingly. The rotation is performed in the adjusted working plane, i.e. the
axis of rotation is normal to the current working plane.
The procedure to rotate a UCS
1. If it is not the case that the UCS you want to move is the active one, make it active first.
2. Make sure that the working plane is adjusted properly, i.e. that it is oriented in such a way that a
normal to the working plane is parallel with the axis of intended rotation.
3. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Rotate (You may as well activate toolbar function Setting of
UCS for active view > Rotate from toolbar View).
4. Type the angle by which the UCS should be rotated.
5. Close the dialogue.

Note: Please read Rules for using a UCS.

Deleting an existing UCS

It may happen that some of the previously user co-ordinate systems are no longer necessary, or even that
some of the user co-ordinate systems have been defined by mistake. Such user co-ordinate systems may be
removed from the project.
The procedure to delete an existing UCS
1. Open the UCS manager.
2. Select the UCS you want to delete.
3. Click button [Delete].
4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary.

85
Reference Guide

5. Close the UCS manager.

Storing the user co-ordinate system

Any UCS created by the user may be stored as a named UCS. The user can specify the name and once
stored, the UCS is listed in the UCS manager.
The procedure to store the UCS as named UCS
1. Adjust the UCS as required.
2. Call menu function Tools > UCS > Store the current UCS (You may as well activate toolbar
function Setting of UCS for active view > Store the current UCS from toolbar View).
3. Input the required name.

Using a user co-ordinate system

Rules for using a UCS
There are some rules concerning the use of user co-ordinate system that should be clearly stated here in order
to prevent a possible confusion.
UCS in windows
Each graphical window can have a different UCS. The UCS can be assigned to a particular window from the
UCS manager.
The procedure for association of a particular graphical window with a particular UCS
1. Select the graphical window you need to associate with the required UCS.
2. Open the UCS manager.
3. Select the required UCS.
4. Close the UCS manager.
Modification of an existing UCS in the UCS manager
If a UCS is edited in the UCS manager (i.e. edited numerically), the changes are made to the UCS that is
being edited.
Modification of an existing UCS by means of modification functions
If a current UCS assigned to a particular window is edited by means of a function for modification of UCS, IT IS
IMPORTANT TO KNOW that:
 Before the modification itself, the window is associated with the default (called current) UCS.
 The modification is made with the current UCS.
 The current UCS is let associated with the window.
If a named user-created UCS was associated with the window before the modification has been performed,
that UCS remains unchanged.
If a named user-created UCS should be modified using modification functions, the following procedure must be
executed.
The procedure for modification of a named use-created UCS
1. Use modification function or functions to define the UCS as required.
2. Call function for storing of the current UCS.
3. Rewrite the original named user-created UCS with the newly defined one.

Using a UCS in the graphical window

The origin of the current user co-ordinate system is always displayed in the graphical window. Also directions
of individual co-ordinate system axes are shown.

If the program is in point definition mode or point selection mode, the co-ordinates of the mouse cursor are
displayed on the program status bas. The co-ordinates are given in user co-ordinate system.

86
 Basic working tools

Note: If required, the co-ordinates of position of the mouse cursor may also be displayed in the
global co-ordinates.

Using a UCS from the command line

If co-ordinates of an inserted point are typed on the command line without any prefix, the co-ordinates are
considered to be in the current UCS. For more information about the syntax of the command line see chapter
Command line in book Layout and operation > User interface.

Working plane
Introduction to a working plane
A working plane is a plane in which the mouse cursor moves in the three-dimensional modelling space. The
working plane can be adjusted arbitrarily to reflect the current needs of the user. The working plane is always
placed into one of the basic planes of a user co-ordinate system (UCS). It means that the working plane is very
closely bound to UCS.

Adjusting a working plane

A working plane can be adjusted in any direction. There is only one limitation. A working plane is always bound
to the currently set user co-ordinate system. The working plane may be oriented in one of the main planes of
this co-ordinate system, i.e. into XY, XZ or YZ plane.
Therefore, in order to adjust the working plane into the required direction, the user may need to adjust the user
co-ordinate system first.
The procedure to adjust the working plane into the required UCS main plane
1. Verify that the current UCS is defined as required.
2. Adjust the working plane into XY or YZ or XZ plane of the UCS:

a. Either using toolbar View and its button [Setting of UCS for active view] ( ),
b. Or calling function Tools > UCS,
3. In both cases, select one of the following items: XY workplane, YZ workplane, or XZ workplane.

Cursor SNAP modes

Introduction to SNAP modes
Whenever the user needs to define a new point (e.g. an end-point of a new beam member), it is possible to do
so by typing the point co-ordinates on the command line. It is clear that this approach will not be always the
most efficient one. Very often, a new point is identical with one of the already defined points (e.g. individual
beam members are connected to each other). What’s more, the geometry of the structure is usually regular in
some way, and therefore, end-points of individual entities fit into a regular scheme. Both of these facts have
been taken into account during the design of SCIA.ESA PT’s SNAP modes.
A SNAP mode is a mode for locking a mouse cursor into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid or with
characteristic points of already defined entities (such as their end-points, middle points, centres of circles, etc.).
When the SNAP mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point
on the grid or to the nearest characteristic point.

Grid SNAP modes

The grid SNAP mode is a SNAP mode where the mouse cursor is locked into alignment with a grid. SCIA.ESA
PT offers two types of grid:
 a dot grid (that may be either orthogonal or radial),
 a line grid (that may be both two- and three-dimensional).
When this SNAP mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point
of the grid.

87
Reference Guide

The grid SNAP mode can be combined with the object SNAP mode if required.
The activation of the grid SNAP mode can be done in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

Object SNAP modes

The object SNAP mode is a SNAP mode where the mouse cursor is locked to commonly needed points, or we
can say characteristic points, on entities (such as their end-points, middle points, centres of circles, etc.).
If required, the object SNAP mode can be combined with the grid SNAP mode.
A required kind of the object SNAP mode can be selected (activated) in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

The picture above shows "in action" the SNAP mode set to Midpoints.

Adjusting a SNAP mode

Adjustment of the required SNAP mode or modes can be done in the Cursor snap setting dialogue.

The dialogue offers a vide range of SNAP variants:

Line grid The cursor is locked to the vertices of a defined line grid.
Dot grid The cursor is locked to the points of a defined dot grid.
Only snapped points If this option is ON, the first two variants are

88
 Basic working tools

automatically turned OFF and only characteristic points

of already defined entities may be used to snap to. In
other words, only the object SNAP mode is enabled.
Midpoints Middle points of entities are used as snap points.
Endpoints / Nodes End points of entities are used as snap points.
Intersections Intersections of entities are used as snap points.
Orthogonal points This option snaps to a point which forms a perpendicular
with the selected object.
Tangential points The Tangential point SNAP mode snaps to a tangent
point on a circle.
Arc / circle centre This option snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline
arc segment. The cursor must pass over the
circumference of the circle or the arc so that the centre
can be found.
Points on line / curve N-th The program automatically divides a selected entity into
N segments and thus generates (N+1) points on an
entity under cursor. The points may be used to snap to.
Points in line / curve % of This option is similar to the one above. But the division
length of a beam member is defined by percents and not by the
number of segments.
Surface edges This option is available only if at least one of the above
listed object SNAP modes is ON.
If this option is ON, the mouse cursor snaps also to the
surface lines of entities.

The procedure for the adjustment of the required SNAP mode:

1. Open the Dot grid setting dialogue. The dialogue can be opened in two ways:
a. via [Snap mode] button on the Status bar,

b. via [Cursor snap setting] button ( ) on the toolbar at the command line.
c. using menu function Tools > Cursor snap setting.
2. Select the required SNAP option or options.
3. Press button [OK] to close the dialogue.

Adjusting the temporary one-step SNAP mode

Sometimes it may be useful to let the current SNAP mode AS IS, and change the SNAP mode just and only for
a single step (single action). For example, all new end-points of a set of beam members are defined as end-
points of existing entities, but suddenly it may happen that one particular point would be easily defined as a
midpoint.
In SCIA.ESA PT the user may change the SNAP mode temporarily for a single step only.
The procedure for the adjustment of a temporary SNAP mode
1. Once a function requiring the definition of points is started a toolbar is displayed at the top of the
command line.

2. Proceed with the opened function up to the moment you need to change temporarily the SNAP
mode.
3. Click the required icon on the mentioned toolbar.
4. The SNAP mode is temporarily re-adjusted for the following single step.
5. Once you define the point, the SNAP modes returns to the original setting.

89
Reference Guide

Dot grid
Introduction to a dot grid
A dot grid is an area in the graphical window covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing. The spacing
between grid dots is adjustable. The grid dots are not plotted.
The dot grid is always put into the current working plane, so that it can be used for the definition of points (e.g.
end points of individual members) by means of mouse.
Properly adjusted dot grid may significantly speed up the process of geometry definition.
SCIA.ESA PT offers two types of the grid: orthogonal and radial.

Adjusting dot grid parameters

The dot grid can be adjusted to meet the needs of a particular project. Sometimes, it may be good idea to re-
adjust the grid settings from time to time, especially if the geometry of the whole structure is not regular and
varies from one part to another.
The procedure to adjust dot grid parameters
1. Open the Dot grid setting dialogue:

a. Either using toolbar View and its button [Setting of the dot grid] ( ),
b. Or via menu function Tools > Dot grid settings
2. Select the required type of the grid: orthogonal or radial
3. Type in the parameters of the grid (the individual parameters are self-explicable).
4. Close the dialogue.

7. The adjusted grid will be displayed on the screen unless it is switched off.

Using the dot grid

The dot grid may be used to insert points if the following conditions are met:
 the dot grid is switched on (i.e. it is displayed),
 the snap mode is adjusted to stick to the grid points,
 the program is in the point definition mode.

90
 Basic working tools

To be precise, the first condition does not have to be fulfilled and the dot grid may still be used. But as the dots
of the grid are not visible, it is not recommended to use this configuration (unless you are a really advanced
and skilful user of SCIA.ESA PT).
Displaying the dot grid
The dot grid may be switched on and off in two ways:
 Using button [Show / hide dot grid] ( ) on the bottom horizontal scrollbar of a graphical window,
 Using menu function View > View > Show / hide dot grid.
Setting the snap mode to use the dot grid
The capability of the snap mode to stick to the dot grid can be set in two different dialogues. The result is the
same regardless of which dialogue is used.
Setting in Snap mode dialogue
1. Open the Cursor snap setting dialogue.
2. Tick the option Dot grid on or off (as required).
3. Close the dialogue.
Setting in Dot grid settings dialogue
1. Open Dot grid setting dialogue.
2. Tick option Snap cursor to dot grid on or off (as required)
3. Close the dialogue

Line grid
Introduction to a line grid
A line grid is a kind of a three dimensional grid. Individual vertices of the grid can be used to define points of
the modelled structure.
One can imagine the line grid as a set of wire cubes placed one next to another to create a larger wire cube.
The vertices of individual small wire cubes are the vertices of the line grid. What’s more, the cubes may be not
only regular cubes, but also other solids like a tetrahedron, irregular hexahedron, etc. The grid may be of either
regular or irregular (variable) dimensions in any direction.
The tool is extremely useful for the definition of complex 3D structures on condition that at least some parts of
the structure are regular (i.e. of the same spans or of the same height).

Types of line grid

A line grid may be of several types. Each type may be useful for different "configuration" of the geometry of a
modelled structure.
Cartesian This line grid represents the basic type. The vertices of the grid
are defined in Cartesian co-ordinates and the grid as a whole
resembles a regular rectangular prism.

91
Reference Guide

Oblique This type is based on the previous one. In addition, the user may
define two angles that make the grid oblique.

Spherical Vertices of this grid type are defined by means of spherical co-
ordinates.

Cylindrical Vertices of this grid of this type are defined by means of cylindrical
co-ordinates.

92
 Basic working tools

Line grid manager

The Line grid manager provides for operations related to line grids. It can be used to create a new line grid, to
switch the existing line grids on or off, to modify an existing grid, to copy it or delete it.
The manager is operated the same way as any other SCIA.ESA PT database manager.
The procedure to open the Line grid manager
 Either: Use tree menu function Tools > Line grids.
 Or: Use menu function Tools > Line grids.

 Or: Click button [Line grid] ( ) on View toolbar.

93
Reference Guide

Creating a new line grid

Similarly to a great number of other "objects" in SCIA.ESA PT, a new line grid can be created in the
appropriate database manager. The Line grid manager has been designed to create and edit line grids
The procedure to create a new line grid
1. Open the Line grid manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. The editing dialogue is opened.
4. Specify grid dimensions.
5. Adjust its display parameters.
6. Close the editing dialogue.
7. Choose whether the new line grid should be displayed or hidden.
8. Close the Line grid manager.
Note: If no line grid has been defined in the current project so far, step 1 leads directly to opening of the
editing dialogue. As a result, step 2 is automatically skipped.

Adjusting line grid parameters

Each line grid is defined by means of:
 dimensions in individual directions,
 location of its origin (i.e. the insertion point),
 possible rotation,
 angles of obliqueness (for oblique line grid only),
 name,
 parameters of its display style.
Line grid type
The combo box at the bottom part of the dialogue selects the required grid type.
Line grid dimensions
Depending on the grid type, the dimensions are defined in Cartesian, spherical, or cylindrical co-ordinates.
There are two ways to define the individual "spans" and "floor heights":
 the user inputs the dimensions of individual "spans" and "floor heights",
 the user inputs the co-ordinates of individual line grid vertices (i.e. co-ordinates of end-points for
individual "spans" and "floors").
The approaches are independent for each direction. In other words, the user can specify the dimension of the
grid in X and Y direction by means of "span" lengths and then use grid absolute co-ordinates for the definition
of individual "floors" (in the case of Cartesian type) or vice versa. Which approach will be used can be set in
the combo box located above the table for each particular direction.
Another general rule is that:
 either each "span" and each "floor" of the line grid is defined explicitly,
 or a "span" or "floor" dimension is input only once and the number of repetition of this dimension is
added (if "spans" or "floors" of the same dimension are adjacent to each other).
The latter can be user for grid with repetitious "spans" and may significantly speed up the definition of the grid.
Insertion point and rotation
This point defines the location of the grid in the global co-ordinate system.
If required, the whole line grid may be rotated around the global Z-axis.
Name
The name serves for easy identification of individual line grids if more than one grid are defined.
Parameters of display style
The user can control the way the line grid is displayed on the screen.

94
 Basic working tools

Adjusting the display style of line grid

The user can easily control the appearance of the grid on the screen by means of a few parameters. The
parameters are grouped on the Drawing setup tab of the line grid editing dialogue.
Base plane This parameter specifies which plane is the base plane
for the labelling system of the grid.
Lines between planes Connecting lines may be or may be not drawn between
individual grid layers (i.e. "floors" or "spans" depending
on the base plane).
Label format The user can control the format of the labels.
Visibility of grid layers Individual grid layers (i.e. "floors" or "spans" depending
on the base plane of the grid) may be visible or hidden.
Labelling of grid layers Individual grid layers may be labelled.
Dimensioning of grid layers Dimension lines may be added to individual grid layers.

Base plane
The base plane defines the plane where the main grid labels will be located. The user can select from the
three base planes oriented in the three main planes of the global co-ordinate system (XY plane, YZ, plane, XZ
plane).
Lines between planes
The individual grid layers (e.g. "floors" in case of XY base plane) may be graphically connected to each other
or may be drawn as separate layers. If the lines are drawn, the final line grid looks like a three dimensional
solid. If the lines are not drawn, the final grid resembles of a set of sheets put one above the other.
Label format
The user may adjust the format of the labels. The following parameters can be specified:
 position of labels,
 offset of labels,
 text size,
 a circle drawn around labels.
Visibility of grid layers
Each layer can be separately set as visible or hidden. This may be very useful especially for large and complex
line grids.
Labelling of grid layers
Labels are added to individual layers according to the user’s settings. There are two types of labels:
 labels for individual "spans" in a grid layer,
 labels for the whole grid layer.
Each of the types is controlled by a separate parameter.
Dimensioning of grid layers
The individual grid layers may be equipped with dimension lines. The dimension lines may dimension:
 either individual spans in individual directions,
 or the total dimension in individual directions.

Displaying and hiding a line grid

A line grid can be switched on / off (in other words displayed / hidden or activated /deactivated) in the Line
grid manager. It is possible to switch on as many different line grids as required.
The procedure for switching a line grid on / off
1. Open the Line grid manager.
2. In the list of defined line grids select the line grid you want to switch on or off.

95
Reference Guide

3. In the grid property table tick option Visible in order to switch the grid on, or remove the tick from
this option to hide the grid.
4. Repeat points 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Line grid manager.

Using a line grid

In order to use a previously defined line grid, two conditions must be met:
 at least one line grid must be switched on,
 the SNAP mode must be set to pick points of line grid.
Once the two conditions are met, the vertices of the displayed line grids may be used to define points. When
the mouse cursor is positioned on a line grid point (vertex), the program automatically detects it, snaps to it
and shows its co-ordinates. If the user wants to use the highlighted point, the only thing he/she have to do is
click the left mouse button.

The picture above shows the use of line grid for the insertion of columns during creation of a model of a hall.

Editing an existing line grid

The way to edit parameters of an already defined line grid is very straightforward and simple.
The procedure to edit an existing line grid
1. Open the Line grid manager.
2. Select the grid you want to modify.
3. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
4. Change the required parameters on the Input data tab.
5. Change the required parameters on the Drawing setup tab.
6. Close the editing dialogue.
7. Close the Line grid manager.
If a defined line grid is no longer needed it may be deleted. The Line grid manager’s button [Delete] can be
used for this operation.

96
 Basic working tools

Window pop-up menu

Introduction to window pop-up menu
Every graphical window that is created in SCIA.ESA PT has a pop-up menu associated with it. This pop-up
menu provides for fast access to frequently used functions. The menu can be invokes by clicking the right
mouse button if the mouse cursor is positioned inside the window.
The list of functions offered in the pop-up menu depends on several factors:
 whether any function is opened (has been activated),
 whether some entities are selected,
 whether the mouse cursor is positioned on some entity (at the moment when the right mouse button
is being pressed),
 if the mouse cursor is positioned on some entity ,what kind of entity it is.
In addition to the pop-up menu in graphical window, SCIA.ESA PT offers also a similar menu in a document
window. This particular type of pop-up menu is described in chapter covering the document.

Functions of the pop-up menu

The pop-up menu of the graphical is created dynamically. That means that the functions offered in the menu
vary according to the current state of the program.
Standard pop-up menu
Zoom all
Zoom – cut-out
Set view parameters
Cursor snap setting
Copy picture to clipboard
Export picture to file
Picture to document
Picture to gallery
Print picture
Wire model in manipulations
Picture wizard
Displays the whole model.
Displays the selected cut-out so that it fits the whole
area of the graphical window.
Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters,
i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled
structure is displayed on the screen.
Opens the dialogue for adjustment of required SNAP
mode.
Copies the contents of the graphical window into
clipboard of Windows system.
Saves the contents of the graphical window into an
external file. The user may choose from a list of
supported file formats.
Inserts the contents of the graphical window into the
document as a new picture.
Inserts the contents of the graphical window into the
Picture gallery as a new picture.
Opens the graphic output dialogue and allows the user
to carry out the print set-up before the print itself.
If the option is ON and the view direction or zoom is
being adjusted by means of mouse (i.e. appropriate
control keys and right mouse button held down during
mouse movement), only a simplified wire representation
of the structure is displayed during the operation of
adjustment.
If the option is OFF, the normal (or full) display is used
during the operation.
It is clear that the latter may lead to slower response of
the program.
Starts the wizard for generation of pictures.
See appropriate chapters in the Picture gallery.

97
Reference Guide

Pop-up menu if a function is opened

If a function (e.g. Insert a new beam, Define load, etc.) is opened, SCIA.ESA PT adds an additional function to
the pop-up menu.
End of command This command may be used to close the currently
opened function. The command closes just the function
and lets the current service opened.

Pop-up menu if some entities are selected

If at least one entity is selected, the contents of the pop-up menu is rearranged in order to provide for common
manipulations with the selected entities. The pop-up menu consists of the following functions:
Set view parameters (for the Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters,
selected entities only) i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled
structure is displayed on the screen. The settings made
here are applied to the selected entities only.
As this function deals with a specified set of entities, the
range of the view parameters in the setting dialogue is
limited to parameters related to the selected entities.
Set view parameters for all Opens the dialogue for adjustment of view parameters,
entities i.e. the parameters that control the way the modelled
structure is displayed on the screen.
The settings made here are applied to all entities in the
model.
Cursor snap setting Opens the dialogue for adjustment of required SNAP
mode.
View This sub-menu comprises majority of the standard pop-
up menu functions.
Move Start function for move of beam members.
Rotate Start function for rotation of beam members.
Scale Starts function for change of the scale of beam
members.
Stretch Opens function for stretching of beam members.
Mirror Opens function for mirroring of beam members.
Copy Starts function for copying of beam members.
Copy Add data Starts function for copying of additional data.
This item is only available if at least one entity of
additional data is in the current selection.
Move Add data Starts function for moving of additional data.
This item is only available if at least one entity of
additional data is in the current selection.
Delete Opens function for deletion of selected entities.
Picture wizard Opens wizard (i.e. a set of dialogues) that helps the user
generate pictures of the modelled structure.

Pop-up menu if the cursor is positioned over any entity

If the mouse cursor is located over an entity at the moment the mouse button is clicked, the program adds a
few special items that are related to the very entity under the cursor.
Brief information about the This menu item contains type and name of the entity
entity under cursor under cursor. This item performs no action, it just says
the user which entity the mouse cursor is positioned
over.
Edit properties Opens the property dialogue for the entity under cursor.
In this property dialogue the parameters of the entity
may be changed as required.

98
 Basic working tools

The picture below shows a sample pop-up menu that was invoked with the mouse cursor positioned over an
entity called B3.

Using the window pop-up menu

The pop-up menu of the graphical window can be invoked any time the graphical window is displayed and
holds the focus.
The procedure for opening and using the pop-up menu
1. Place the mouse cursor into the drawing area of the required graphical window (please notice that
several graphical windows may be opened at a time and therefore the cursor must be put into the
required one).
2. If required, position the cursor over particular entity.
3. Click the right mouse button.
4. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select the function that should be invoked and click the left mouse button.
6. The function starts or is performed (if the function does not require any parameters or response of
the user, it is carried out immediately).
7. Finish the opened function.
Note: If the pop-up menu is invoked accidentally, just place the mouse cursor anywhere into the empty area
of the graphical window and click the left mouse button. The pop-up menu disappears.

Adjusting the viewpoint (view direction + zoom)

Introduction to view adjustment
If a simple two-dimensional structure is being modelled and analysed, it may be sufficient enough to have just
one side view of the structure during the whole design and evaluation process. However, if a complex three-
dimensional structure is handled, the user needs to:
 view the structure from different sides,
 zoom in important details,
 zoom out to get the overall view,
 possibly limit the view to only a part of the structure.
All the points mentioned above can be covered by one term – the user needs to adjust the view.

99
Reference Guide

This task may be carried out by means of numerous view adjusting functions that SCIA.ESA PT offers in its
menus and toolbars.

Adjusting the view

The adjustment of the view may consist of two separate operations:
 definition of the view direction (i.e. from which side the structure is looked at),
 specification of the distance of the view point from the structure (i.e. how big the structure appears
to be on the screen).
SCIA.ESA PT offers a wide range of functions to adjust the required view. Some functions perform just one of
the two mentioned operations, others merge both of them into one action.
Menu functions for adjustment of the view
View > ZOOM > Zoom + Zooms in.
View > ZOOM > Zoom - Zoom out.
View > ZOOM > Zoom Cut-out Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is
then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the
graphical window.
Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes.
Position it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press
the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse
to place the cursor to the bottom right corner of the cut-
out. Release the button.
View > ZOOM > Zoom All Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the
whole area of the graphical window.
View > ZOOM > Zoom All – Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the
Selection whole area of the graphical window.
View > View > View X Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive X-axis direction.
Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure
into the whole area of the graphical window.
View > View > View Y Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive Y-axis direction.
Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure
into the whole area of the graphical window.
View > View > View Z Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive Y-axis direction.
Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure
into the whole area of the graphical window.
View > View > View AXO Sets the view point vector to (1, -1, 1). Simultaneously
zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole
area of the graphical window.

Toolbar functions for adjustment of the view

Functions for the adjustment of the view are arranged on toolbar View.

View in direction X Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive X-axis direction.
Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure
into the whole area of the graphical window.
View in direction Y Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive Y-axis direction.
Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure
into the whole area of the graphical window.
View in direction Z Adjusts the view in such a way so that the structure is
viewed from the positive Y-axis direction.

100
 Basic working tools

Simultaneously zooms in or out to fit the whole structure

into the whole area of the graphical window.
View in direction AXO Sets the view point vector to (1, -1, 1). Simultaneously
zooms in or out to fit the whole structure into the whole
area of the graphical window.
Zoom in Zooms in.
Zoom out Zooms out.
Zoom by cut-out Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is
then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the
graphical window.
Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes.
Position it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press
the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse
to place the cursor to the bottom right corner of the cut-
out. Release the button.
Zoom all Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the
whole area of the graphical window.
Zoom all – selection Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the
whole area of the graphical window.

Window scroll-bar wheel-like buttons for adjustment of the view

Each graphical window has got three wheel-like buttons on the scroll-bar. If the scroll-bar is visible the
"wheels" may be used to adjust the required view. The function of the three wheel-like buttons is:
Zoom (located on the bottom Zooms in or out.
scroll-bar)
Rotate horizontally (located on Rotates the structure around the vertical axes (i.e.
the bottom scroll-bar) vertical axis of the screen).
Rotate vertically (located on Rotates the structure around the horizontal axes (i.e.
the right hand side scroll-bar) horizontal axis of the screen).
The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press the left
mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the mouse over the
pad.
Mouse controlled adjustment of the view
In addition to the standard menu and toolbar functions SCIA.ESA PT offers also a set of fast-access functions
for the view adjustment.
Zoom in Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold
them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you)
over the pad.
Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold
them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you)
over the pad.
Rotate Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required view direction.
Shift Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required position of the
structure on the screen.

The pictures in the table are videos that demonstrate the individual view adjusting features. To start the video, just position
the mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to
invoke the video pop-up menu and select function Play.
Rotation of view
The centre of rotation depends on initial conditions.

101
Reference Guide

No entity is selected
Some entities are selected
One node is selected
Clipping box is ON
The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a
centroid of an imaginary rectangular prism outscribed
around the existing model.
The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a
centroid of an imaginary rectangular prism outscribed
around the selected entities.
The selected node is the centre of rotation.
The centre of rotation is put into the point that forms a
centroid of the current clipping box.

Limiting the view

If a modelled structure is larger and complex, it may be convenient to display only a limited part of it. This
"limitation" can be achieved in two different ways:
Activity or layers The parts of the structure that are not necessary for the
current operations may be hidden, in other words
removed from the view.
This approach is described in chapter Basic working
tools > Layers or Basic working tools > Activity.
Clipping box The view can restricted to a three-dimensional area
(defined as a rectangular prism) called clipping box. If
the clipping box is defined, only entities located inside it
are displayed.
Features of the clipping box are described in chapter
Advanced working tools > Clipping box.

Adjusting the view numerically

The view direction may be specified also numerically by means of view direction vector. The vector can be
defined in the View parameters dialogue on tab View. The three numbers in the table represent the X, Y, and Z
components of the view direction vector.
Examples:
View direction vector View
-1.0
1.4
-1.0

102
 Basic working tools

-1.0
-1.4
-1.0

0
0
1

Adjusting perspective projection

By default, an orthogonal projection is used to display three-dimensional models on the screen. As an
alternative, also a perspective projection can be activated.
The perspective projection can be set using:
 Either: Menu function View > View > Perspective view,

 Or: Button [Switch view to perspective mode] ( ) on toolbar View.

Special view settings

In addition to the adjustment of the viewpoint (view direction and zoom), some other properties of the view can
be controlled by the user.
Wire model in manipulations
This option can be set in:
 Either: Menu View > View > Wire model in manipulations,
 Or: Right mouse button pop-up menu of the graphical window.
Option is ON Only a simplified representation of the structure is
displayed during the mouse controlled adjustment of the
view.
This option increases significantly the response of the
computer during the above mentioned operation. It is
therefore more than recommended for standard speed
computers and other than very simple models.
Option is OFF This option results in "fully displayed structure" during
the mouse controlled adjustment of the view.
This option may lead to slow response of the computer

103
Reference Guide

and is recommended only for very state-of-the-art and

fast computers and simple models.

View parameters
Introduction to view parameters
Each entity that is defined in SCIA.ESA PT is not "just a geometrical shape". There is a good number of
various attributes attached to each entity. The attributes may be for example material, cross-section, layer,
name, construction type, etc. Each of the attributes that is defined for a particular entity can be displayed on
the screen.
What’s more, some of the attributes such as for example cross-section or surface can be drawn in several
ways. SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to control the way individual entities are displayed by means of view
parameters.
These view parameters tell the program which particular attribute of each entity should be shown and which
graphical representation should be used.
View parameters can be defined en block for the whole structure as unique, or they may be defined separately
for individual entities. Each entity can be displayed with different view parameters.

Overview of view parameters

Available view parameters
 Tab Structure  Tab Labels  Tab Model
 Tab Loads  Tab View  Tab Miscellaneous

Note: In addition to these general view parameters, there are a few specialised tabs with view
parameters for a particular advanced module, e.g. Steel code check, etc. These tabs are not shown
until such a module is initialised.
Note: The following list contains the available view parameters. It should be noted that not all of
them are always offered in the Setup dialogue. The Setup dialogue offers only those parameters for
which the appropriate entity type has been already defined. E.g. until you define at least one
support in your model, view parameters for supports are not shown in the dialogue.
Tab Structure
Group Service
Display on opening the If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically
service displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu).
If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is
opened.

Group Structure
Style + colour the style and colour of members of the model (beams, plates,
shells, etc.)
normal: settings made in Setup > Colour/Lines dialogue are
used,
by layers: each member is displayed in the colour of the
appropriate layer, all members assigned to the same layer are
of the same colour,
by material: each member is displayed in the colour of the
appropriate material, all members made of the same material
are of the same colour,
by cross-section: each member is displayed in the colour of
the appropriate cross-section, all members of the same cross-
section are of the same colour,
according to structural type: each member is displayed in
the colour corresponding to its structural type.

104
 Basic working tools

Note: If e.g. two materials, two layers, two cross-sections

have assigned the same colour, than the same colour is used
for members of different controlling property.
Draw member system the system line (midline) is drawn if this option is ON
line
Note: If this option is OFF and also Member surface is OFF,
then the whole structure disappears from your view.
Member system line controls the style of the member's system line (midline)
style
Definitions: System line is a line connecting the nodes of a
member. This line is what you define when you input a new
member. Fine elements are also generated on this system line.
Reference line coincides with the system line if no eccentricity
of a member is defined. If eccentricity is defined, the reference
line is the centroidal axis of the member. Even if eccentricity is
defined, the finite elements are generated on the system line
(and the defined eccentricity is used in the relevant formulas of
the finite elements). Bar is a highlighted system line. However,
the bar is not drawn from the node to the node. It just indicates
the member and leaves some space around the node for
further information to be displayed.

system line: the system line of members is drawn.

system line + reference line: system line (solid) and possibly

reference line (dashed) is displayed

bar: highlighted "system line" is drawn

system line + bar: the system line is displayed and it is

highlighted with the bar

105
Reference Guide

Model type you can define different geometry parameters for the
"calculation model" of your structure and for the " structural
model" of your structure. The calculation model is used for the
numerical analysis, the structural model can be used for
drawings, detailing, attractive presentations of your project, etc.
For example, you can define different eccentricities in the two
models, you can define cut-offs at ends of beam members in
the structural model, etc. This parameter tells the program
which model you want to see on the screen.
analysis model: the parameters relating to the calculation
model are used to display the structure
structural model: the parameters relating to the structural
model are used to display the structure
Example: When you open the property table of a member,
the calculation-model-parameters are in the top part of the
table. The structural -model-parameters are grouped lower in
the table under heading structural model.

Member surface defines whether the surface of members should be displayed

Rendering specifies the style the surface of members is displayed
wired: only the wired scheme of the surface is displayed

106
 Basic working tools

hidden lines: the real surface is calculated and those surface

lines that are hidden from the view are not drawn

rendered with edges: the real rendered view with outlined

edges is displayed

rendered: the real rendered view is displayed

transparent: the surface is filled but it is transparent (this

rendering style may be e.g. useful when you want to present
designed steel frame connections - the structure may be
transparent, the connection may be fully rendered)

Example: The picture shows the combination of transparent

rendering style for beam member and full-rendering for

107
Reference Guide

connection.

Draw cross-section this option tells if the cross-section of a beam member should
be displayed
Cross-section style if the previous option is ON, this item defines the style of the
displayed cross-section
section: one section is drawn about in the middle of each
beam member. The section is 3D oriented, i.e. it is displayed
AS IS in the structure and in some views may not be clearly
recognisable.
in screen plane: one section is drawn about in the middle of
each beam member. The section is transformed into the screen
plane so that it is clearly recognisable in all view of the
structure.
longitudinal XZ: a short part of XZ projection of the beam
member surface is drawn. In other views than side view, the
section may be hardly recognisable.
longitudinal XY: a short part of XZ projection of the beam
member surface is drawn. In other views than plan view, the
section may be hardly recognisable.

Group Member parameters

Buckling lengths buckling lengths (in all directions) for individual beam members
are displayed
Member non-linearities if a non-linearity is assigned to a member, a symbol is
displayed indicating the type of the assigned non-linearity
FEM Type various FEM types can be assigned to individual members
(tension only, normal beam member) and a description
indicating the selected type is displayed if this option is ON

Group Mesh
Draw mesh the generated mesh is displayed (the mesh can be displayed
only if it has been already generated)
Draw refinement the FE mesh can be refined in manually defined area and the
defined refinements are displayed if this option is ON

Note: The finite element mesh can ONLY be displayed if at one calculation has been already
performed and its results are still available.

Group Local axes

Nodes axes of local coordinate systems of individual nodes are
displayed

108
 Basic working tools

Members 1D axes of local coordinate systems of individual beam members

are displayed
Members 2D axes of local coordinate systems of individual plate and shell
members are displayed

Group Sections
Members 1D sections (i.e. sections for the evaluation of results) on beam
members are displayed
Members 2D sections (i.e. sections for the evaluation of results) through
plate/shell members are displayed

Group Calculation info

Display singularity if a calculation fails, the problematic place is shown

Tab Labels
Group Beam labels
Display label controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are
displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown
Name, Cross-section individual labels correspond to individual items in the property
name, Cross-section table of a member
type, Length, Layer,
Type and priority

Group Node labels

The meaning is more or less self-explanatory.
Group Slab labels
The meaning of most of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.
Edges each edge of a slab has a unique number (unique within the
single slab) and these edge numbers are displayed if this
option is ON

Group Mesh
Display label see above
Nodes FE-node numbers
Elements 1D numbers of 1D finite elements
Elements 2D numbers of 2D finite elements

Note: The finite element mesh can ONLY be displayed if the calculation has been already
performed and its results are still available or if the mesh has been generated by means of function
Calculation > Generate mesh.

Group Buckling lengths

Display label, Name The meaning is more or less self-explanatory
Label Description of the buckling length including the dimension.

Group Sections
Display label, Name The meaning is more or less self-explanatory.

Group Non-linearities
Display label The label of the defined type of non-linearity.

Tab Model

109
Reference Guide

Group Service
Display on opening the If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically
service displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu).
If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is
opened.

Group Supports
The meaning of most of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.
Group Other model data
The meaning of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.
Group Support labels
Displays the label of supports.
Group Labels of other model data
Displays the label of other model data such as hinges, cross-links, etc. This view parameter displays or hides
the label for all the types of other model data at the same time. It is not possible to attach the label to e.g. one
type of other model data only.

Tab Loads
Group Service
Display on opening the If ON, entities appropriate for the service are automatically
service displayed as soon as the service is opened (in the tree menu).
If OFF, no change of display takes place when a service is
opened.

Group Display loads

Display If OFF, no load is displayed at all. This item controls the whole
tab.
Load case You can select here the load case to be displayed.
Plane load generator Displays the loading polygon of the plane load generator.
Absences Displays the absences.
Absence You can select here the absence group to be displayed.

Groups for individual type of load

The meaning of the view flags is more or less self-explanatory.

Groups Labels of loads

Display label This item controls the display of load labels.
Name If ON, the name of the load is attached to every loading
impulse (force, moment, temperature load, etc.)
Value Shows the "input" value of the load.
See the note below.
Total value Shows the "real" value of the load.
See the note below.

Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its
force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or
as a predefined load. For such loads, SCIA ESA PT can display two different types of data. First,
the input value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter
of length can be displayed (i.e. the total value).

Groups Masses
Displays the masses.

110
 Basic working tools

Groups Labels of loads

Display label This item controls the display of mass labels.
Name If ON, the name of the mass is attached to the mass symbol.
Value Shows the size of the mass.

Tab View
Groups Display tools
Disable tooltips If ON, no tooltips in the graphical window are shown. I.e. no
information concerning the entity under cursor is displayed.
This option may reduce the response time in large projects. It
also reduces the size of images in the Picture gallery.
Before this option takes effect, the screen must be
regenerated.
Disable layers If ON, no information on layers is stored in the data for the
graphical window. This option may reduce the response time in
large projects. It also reduces the size of images in the Picture
gallery.
However, if this option is ON, it is not possible to e.g. make
export of the drawing into DXF file including layers – only one
"universal" layer is exported.
Before this option takes effect, the screen must be
regenerated.
On the other hand, this option does not prevent you from using
e.g. activity by layers. This feature is fully working regardless of
this parameter.
View vector X, Y, Z Enables the user to numerically adjust the view direction.
Clipping box Switches the Clipping box ON/OFF.

Tab Miscellaneous
Group Results diagram
Results Displays the result diagrams on members.

Group Construction stages

Display Displays data relating to construction stages.
It controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are
displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown.
Already installed Already installed members are displayed.
Currently installed Currently installed members are displayed.
Not yet available Members that are not yet available are displayed.
Already removed Members that have been already removed are displayed.

Group Construction stages data labels

Label local beam Attaches labels to the local beam member history.
history

Group Connection force

Display Displays the forces in connections (in joints of several beam
members)

Group Connection force labels

Display label Displays the labels of connection forces.
It controls the group as a whole - if ON, the selected labels are

111
Reference Guide

displayed, if OFF, no labels of the group are shown.

Name The name is attached to connection forces.

Adjusting the view parameters

In general there are three ways to adjust the view parameters:
 in the Setup dialogue,
 using the fast-access group-commands,
 using the fast-access window-buttons for certain types of entities.
Adjusting the view parameters using the Setup dialogue
The Setup dialogue provides for the adjustment of all available view parameter. In addition to the parameters
themselves, the dialogue contains also other controls. They are grouped at the bottom of the dialogue.

Check / uncheck group If the cursor is placed on the name of a group of view
parameters (in any of the tabs), it is possible to use this check
box to select or deselect the whole group.
Lock position You can move the dialogue to any position on your screen and
check this option. When you closed the dialogue and open it
again, it is not displayed in the centre of the screen (which is
the default position), but in the place you "locked" it.
Check / uncheck all This check box can be used to select or deselect all the view
parameters on the active tab.

The procedure to open the Setup dialogue

The Setup dialogue can be opened using:
 the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model (or if required Fast adjustment of
viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical window and selecting command Setup
dialogue,
 the pop-up menu (opened by a click of the right mouse button on the area of the graphical window)
and selecting the function Set view parameters for all (or if required Set view parameters for
selected).

Adjusting the view parameters using the fast-access group-commands

For selected groups of entities (the groups in terms of the overview of available parameters) fast-access
group-commands are available in the menu opened through the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on
whole model (or if required Fast adjustment of viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical
window.
Most groups from the Setup dialogue can be quickly controlled (switched ON/OFF) through these commands.
Each command in the menu can be used to display or hide the entities (labels) covered by the corresponding
group. The commands work like a toggle menu item: one click on them selects the group, next click deselects
the group, etc.
Detailed "toggling"
The fast-access group-commands can work in two modes. The required mode can be set in the menu that
opens when you click on the button Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model (or Fast adjustment of
viewflags on selection) on the button-bar of the graphical window.
Default In this mode, whenever you turn the corresponding group OFF,
(i.e. Detailed Off) the whole group becomes hidden.

112
 Basic working tools

Whenever you toggle the group ON, the whole group is

displayed.
Detailed In this mode, whenever you turn the corresponding group OFF,
(i.e. Detailed On) the whole group becomes hidden (so far it is the same as in the
pervious mode).
But, whenever you toggle the group ON, the only those entities
are displayed that are "ticked" (selected) in the Setup dialogue.
See the example below.

Note: The Detailed mode is not available until you at least once open the Setup dialogue for
View parameters, make your settings there and confirm them with [OK] button.
Example
Let us take group Other model data. It can offer the following entities:
 hinges on beam members,
 hinges on slabs,
 cross-link,
 rigid arm,
 relative node,
 internal node,
 internal edge.
Let us suppose that you use Fast adjustment of viewflags on whole model.
First, let us talk about the Default mode. If you toggle the group OFF, all the above listed entities become
invisible. If you then toggle the group ON, all the above listed entities are displayed on the screen.
Now, let us move to the Detailed mode. Let us suppose that in the Setup dialogue, the following settings were
made when the dialogue was edited last time:
hinges on beams

hinges on slabs

cross-link

rigid arm

relative node

internal node

internal edge

If you toggle the group OFF, all the above listed entities become invisible. There is no difference in hiding the
group. However, when you toggle the group ON, only the selected entities are shown on the screen (i.e.
hinges on beam members, cross-link, rigid arm, relative node) while the entities that are not marked in the
Setup dialogue remain hidden (i.e. hinges on slabs, internal node, internal edge).
This mode is intended for such a style or phase of work when you need to check your model repeatedly and
you want to see and hide in turns some part of your model.

Adjusting the view parameters using fast-access window-buttons for certain types of entities.
The button bar of the graphical window offers a set of buttons for fast displaying or hiding of certain types of
entities or their labels.
Show / hide surfaces Displays / hides the surface outline of members (beam
members, slabs, shells).
Render geometry Switches ON/OFF rendering of members.
Fast adjustment of Offers a menu with fast-access group-commands (see above)
viewflags on whole or opens the Setup dialogue (see above).The adjustment is
model valid for all entities in the model.

113
Reference Guide

Fast adjustment of Offers a menu with fast-access group-commands (see above)

viewflags on selection
Show / hide label of
nodes
Show / hide label of
members
Show/hide dot grid
Select load case for
display
or opens the Setup dialogue (see above). The adjustment is
valid for currently selected entities.
Displays / hides numbers of nodes. It effects the whole model.
Displays / hides numbers of members (beam members, slabs,
shells). It effects the whole model.
Displays / hides the dot grid.
Selects the load case that will be displayed if the view
parameter for load is switched on.

Note: Please note that some view parameters always relate to the whole structure. For example,
it is not possible to display reinforcement in selected beam members only, it is either shown in the
whole structure, or hidden everywhere. In order to see e.g. the mentioned reinforcement in selected
beam members only, function Activity must be used to hide (or display in grey colour) the
"unwanted" members.
Note: Not all view parameters are always offered in the Setup dialogue or in the menu with fast-
access group-commands. The Setup dialogue and the menu with fast-access group-commands
offer only those parameters for which the appropriate entity type has been already defined. E.g.
until you define at least one support in your model, view parameters for supports are not shown.

Predefined view parameters settings

Full and complete setting of all the view parameters may be awkward and tiresome task. Especially if the user
needs to repeatedly swap between two types of display.
Consequently, SCIA.ESA PT offers several sets of predefined settings. The predefined sets should cover most
of commonly needed cases. The predefined sets can be found in menu View > Set view parameters and they
are:
Model of structure This variant displays the structure itself as is. Any supports,
loads, etc. are not shown to provide for clear view of the
structure.
Analysis model This option displays the model with the focus laid on the
numerical calculation. Therefore, only axes of individual
beam members are displayed and they are accompanied
with supports, loads, local co-ordinate systems and other
data that are important from the calculation point of view.
Structural model This variant shows the structural model of the structure.

Drawing of input data with eccentricity

Terminology
system line
The line inputted by the user, it has nodes at its ends.
eccentricity of beam
The offset of a beam member defined in the local coordinates of the beam member. We have the eccentricity
in y- and z-direction.
reference line
The reference line of a beam member if obtained when the eccentricity is added to the system line. The
reference line corresponds to the centroidal axis of the beam member.
eccentricity of loads
The offset of the load (or we may say add-data in general) related to the reference line.

Current status

114
 Basic working tools

Recent versions of ESA PT drew loads relatively to the system line of the corresponding beam
member. Consequently, users could not check their real position on the beam members, which
could result in the wrong interpretation of input data and also results as we have to realise that
results are related to the reference line and not to the system lines.
A related topic is the drawing of surfaces (and reference lines) of beam members with regard to
Construction Stages (CS). Cross-sections could change their shapes over time (in general the
shape may differ for every CS). This influences the position of the reference lines of beam
members in individual CS and, of course, it also influences the drawing of loads and results on
beam members.

Drawing of input data with the eccentricity taken into account

Loads
So far, the load was displayed on the system line of the beam member. This was a correct solution only if the
load was defined without any eccentricity and if the reference line (centroidal line) of the beam member
coincided with the system line (i.e. in the case of a straight beam member the line connecting the end nodes of
the beam member). However, as soon as any eccentricity was introduced either to the beam member or to the
load, this display style became misleading.
The new solution is based on the principle that all the loads (and other displayed quantities such as hinges,
and even results) are always displayed in their real position.
A few examples dealing with input data follows.
A beam member with a one-side haunch subjected to a distributed load.

As you can see, the load follows the reference line (centroidal axis) of the beam member.
A beam member with a one-side haunch subjected to an eccentric distributed load.

Here, the load acts on eccentricity defined in the z-direction. In the next picture, also the eccentricity in y-
direction was introduced to the load.

115
Reference Guide

When required, also a line showing the defined eccentricity of the load can be drawn. Thus, you can more
easily see what the real action of the load is. In addition, in the case of several eccentrically loaded beam
members located close to each other, it will be unambiguous which load belongs to which beam member.
The procedure to display the "eccentricity lines"
1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.
2. Select Tab Loads/Masses.
3. Tick option Display eccentricity.
4. Confirm with [OK].

In addition to the "eccentricity lines", you can also display the magnitude of the specified eccentricity.
The procedure to display the eccentricity label
1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.
2. Select Tab Loads/Masses.

116
 Basic working tools

3. Tick option Labels of loads > Display label and Labels of loads > Eccentricity label.
4. Confirm with [OK].

Note: Loads are always drawn at their real location. View parameter Miscellaneous > Drawing
style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at has no effect on the loads.
Supports
Let us have two beams supported at the end. One of the beams is defined with the system-line in the centre
line of the beam. The second beam has the system line at the bottom surface.

117
Reference Guide

The support is displayed where its real location in the calculation model is: (i) in the first case at the centre line
of the beam, (ii) in the second case at the bottom edge of the beam.
Note: Supports are allways drawn at the system line of the beam. View parameter
Miscellaneous > Drawing style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at has no effect on
the supports.
Hinges
Hinges, which also belong to additional data of the SCIA PT model, can also take into account possible
eccentricity of the beam member at which they are defined.
Unlike loads and supports however, hinges allow the user to decide on the drawing style.

The procedure to select the display mode

1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.
2. Select Tab Misc..
3. Set the option Drawing style for Model+Loads > Show add data, results at to:
a. Reference line in order to see the real position of the hinge (the hinge is put on a
short rigid arm that is not drawn in the screen).
b. System line in order to see the schematic position of the hinge.
4. Confirm with [OK].
Results
Note: Results are always drawn in the system line. (Despite the specification, it was not done in
this version.)
Structural model
Note: The display of eccentric entities relates exclusively to the analysis model. It has no relation
to the structural shape.

Regeneration of view
Introduction to regeneration of view
It is a common phenomenon in CAD and similar "drawing" programs that once the drawing becomes excessive
or is being edited and modified, the "current state" displayed on the screen may happen not to reflect
completely the "reality". This is due to the fact that it is not possible to guarantee a flawless automatic
regeneration of the view. If the automatic regeneration of the view had to be ensured, it would result in
unbearably slow response of the program.
Therefore, SCIA.ESA PT, similarly to other graphically oriented program, offers the user the possibility to
regenerate the view manually at any time when necessary.

118
 Basic working tools

Redrawing the active graphical window

This function redraws the graphical window if some changes affecting the display were made and the window
has not been regenerated automatically.
The procedure to regenerate the contents of the graphical window

1. Press button [Redraw] ( ) on toolbar View.

2. The contents of the active window is regenerated and redrawn.

Calculator
Calculator
Any time you enter a number into an edit box or command line, you may use the internal calculator. This
calculator provides for basic operations: addition, multiplication, subtraction and division. You may use
brackets, basic goniometric functions (tan, sin, cos) and it is possible to calculate powers of numbers. The
calculator takes account of priorities of operators.
If you want to use the calculator to calculate the value in the input box, you must start with the equals sign (=).
As soon as you type the first character, a temporary field - "bubble" - appears just below the input box. This
new field calculates the result of the input formula. If the field shows "error" than the syntax of the formula is
invalid.

Valid operators and functions

= obligatory, this character must start the formula
+ addition; e.g. 1+2
- subtraction; e.g. 2-1
* multiplication; e.g. 1*1
/ division; e.g. 2/1
^ power;; e.g. 2^3
() brackets; e.g. 2*(3+3)
e exponential notation, useful for large numbers; e.g. 1e5
sin() sinus; e.g. sin(45)
cos() cosine; e.g. cos(30)
tg() tangent; e.g. tg(45)

The calculator may be used also in the situation when set of numbers is to be input, e.g. when point
coordinates are defined. In such a case any of the coordinates can be input as formula, and any of the
coordinates can be input as number.
Example 1
The input of point
1;=2*(3+2);sin(45)*5
is "decoded" as:
X=1
Y = 2*(3+2) = 10
Z = sin(45)*5 = 3,5355339
Example 2

119
Materials
Introduction to materials
Material is one of the principal parameters that affect the behaviour of the structure.
In SCIA.ESA PT, the user can define his/her own material or use a pre-defined material type from SCIA.ESA
PT database. The predefined materials correspond to materials defined in particular technical codes. The
properties of predefined materials thus depend on the active code adjusted in the current project.

Material types
In SCIA.ESA PT the user may select from the following material types:
steel represents material based on a particular national code for materials
concrete represents material based on a particular national code for materials
timber represents material based on a particular national code for materials
general enables the user to define an arbitrary material that is completely
independent on codes assigned to the project

Note: Even the properties of a code-based material may be edited.

Material properties
For each material, the user must specify its properties. It is clear that for material types corresponding with
material grades of a particular technical code the properties are predefined.
The properties may be divided into two groups:
 basic material properties,
 advanced material properties.
Basic material properties
The basic properties are those that are necessary for the standard finite element calculation of the model.
Without them, no analysis is possible.
The basic parameters are:
 unit mass,
 modulus of elasticity,
 Poisson’s coefficient.
Advanced material properties
The advanced parameters may be required for:
 either an advanced type of calculation (e.g. non-linear analysis, dynamic calculation, etc.),
 or checking to a particular technical code.
Examples of advanced parameters may be:
 independent G modulus,
 logarithmic decrement,
 nominal or design strength,
 ultimate strength,
 etc.
There are also special material parameters that do not affect the calculation and results, but that may help the
user to make the model clearer. This is e.g. colour. The colour may be used when beam members are
displayed on the screen. Thus, all the beam members made of the same material will be drawn in the same
colour. The display style can be set in View parameters.

121
Reference Guide

Note: The units for the individual material parameters may be set in Units setup.

Materials manager
The Materials manager is a tool that provides for control of material defined in the project. The Materials
manager provides for creating, editing, deleting, and saving of materials.
The manager itself uses the same "manager philosophy" as other SCIA.ESA PT managers do. It contains
control buttons for the standard manager operations:
[New] It creates a new material.
[Edit] It opens an editing dialogue where the material’s
properties may be changed.
[Copy] This function creates a copy of the selected material.
[Change] It enables the user to replace an existing material with a
new one. All the members in the project that ware made
of the original material are now made of the new one.
[Delete] It removes the selected material from the project
database. It is not possible to delete material that is
used anywhere in the structure.
[Undo] / [Redo] It performs an Undo or Redo operation.
[Text Output] It opens a small document window with a table that
summarises properties of selected materials.
[Read from system database] It reads predefined materials from system database.
[Read from user database] It reads material types that the user has saved into
his/her external database.
[Save to user database] It saves selected material types into the user’s external
database.

In order to open the Materials manager use:

 either menu function Tools > Materials,
 or tree menu function Tools > Materials,

 or button Materials ( ) on toolbar Project.

Note: The Materials manager can also be opened from various property dialogues that contain
item Material. Such an item contains a button to open the Materials manager.

122
 Materials

Specifying the materials for the project

When a new project is being created, the user has to specify basic project parameters. Material is one of the
compulsory parameters. It is not necessary to specify all the materials that will be used. However, at least one
material type must be selected (e.g. steel).

The program adds into the project all material grades defined for the selected material type in the active code
of the project. The active code can be also defined in the project setup dialogue.
It is possible to add some material type in the same way any time later (i.e. not only during the phase of project
creation). The user may use tree menu function Project to open the Project settings dialogue. Here it is
possible to add ticks to any other material types that have not been selected at the beginning. Once again, the
program adds into the project all materials that are specified in the active national code for the selected
material type.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings
dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Defining a new code-specific material

All the code specific materials (that means material grades for particular material types specified by a particular
national technical code) are stored in the material system database.
The procedure for the definition of a new code-specific material
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Click button [System database] ( ).
3. A dialogue with available materials appears on the screen. Its left hand side window shows that
materials defined in the project. The right hand side window lists all available code-specific
materials.
4. Add as many materials into the project as required.
5. Close the System database dialogue.
6. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings
dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Defining a new user-defined code-specific material

The user may need to define a material (related to a specific code) that does not coincide with any standard
grade specified in technical codes.
The procedure for the definition of a new user-defined code-specific material
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Click button [New] ( ).
3. Select the required material type.

123
Reference Guide

4. A new material is added to the List of defined materials in the Materials manager.

5. Click button [Edit] ( ).

6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.
7. Type required parameters.
8. Confirm with [OK] button.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required.
10. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the specific material type is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to add
such material into the project. For example, unless timber is selected in the project settings
dialogue, the material manager does not allow the user to add any timber material.

Defining a new general material

The user may need to define any non-standard material that will be used for calculations. It won’t be possible
to use such material for code checks, but it may be used for other calculations.
The procedure for the definition of a new general material
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Click button [New] ( ).
3. Select the material type General.
4. A new material is added to the list of defined materials in the Materials manager.
5. Click button [Edit] ( ).
6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.
7. Type required parameters.
8. Confirm with [OK] button.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required.
10. Close the Materials manager.

Note: Unless the material type General is selected in the project settings, it is not possible to
add such material into the project.

Editing the defined material

The user may need to edit the properties of a particular material. It can be done in the Materials manager.
The procedure to edit the materials properties
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Select the material that should be edited.
3. Click button [Edit] ( ).
4. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.
5. Type required parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Materials manager.

Copying the defined material

If necessary, it is possible to create a copy of any of the already defined materials. This copy may be later
edited.
The procedure for the copying of a particular material
1. Open the Materials manager.

124
 Materials

2. Select the material that should be copied.

3. Click button [Copy] ( ).
4. A copy of the selected material is added to the List of defined materials in the Materials manager.

5. Click button [Edit] ( ).

6. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.
7. Type required parameters.
8. Confirm with [OK] button.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 as many times as required.
10. Close the Materials manager.

Changing the defined material

Sometimes, the need may arise to replace a particular material with another one. E.g. to increase the grade of
material used for some structural members. The user must select the original material, specify the substituting
material, and the program applies the change to all affected members.
The procedure for the change of a particular material
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Select the material to be changed.
3. Click button [Change] ( ).
4. Select the type of the substituting material.
5. The material is replaced.
6. If required, click button [Edit] ( ).
7. The editing dialogue for the selected material is opened.
8. Type required parameters.
9. Confirm with [OK] button.
10. Repeat steps 2 to 10 as many times as required.
11. Close the Materials manager.

Deleting the defined material

Any material that is no longer necessary may be deleted from the project.
The procedure for the deletion of a particular material
1. Open the Materials manager.
2. Select the material to be deleted.
3. Click button [Delete] ( ).
4. Confirm the action.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.
6. Close the Materials manager.

Reviewing the defined material parameters

There are a few ways to see and scrutinise the parameters of a particular material.
Property table in the Materials The Materials manager contains a vertically oriented
manager window that displays the parameters of currently
selected material in a property table.
Property table in the dialogue Each dialogue for editing of a material contains a
for editing of a material property table with all the available parameters of the
edited material.
Document-style view in the This is the most sophisticated kind of display for

125
Reference Guide

preview window parameters of a material.

Property table in the Materials manager

The property table in the Materials manager provides for quick overview of parameters of individual materials.
It is possible to edit some of the parameters.
Property table in the dialogue for editing of a particular material type
The property table in this dialogue provides for both lucid overview of the material parameters and their
straightforward modification.

Document-style view in the preview window

The material parameters can be displayed in tabular form in the Preview window. The preview window
displays a table with all the material parameters sorted in it.
The table is in fact a standard SCIA.ESA PT document table and consequently its format can be adjusted to
meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.
The picture below shows a sample preview of material properties for three selected materials.

126
Materials

127
Cross-sections
Introduction to cross-sections
A cross-section together with material is a basic property of a beam member. In practice, one can meet a wide
range of various cross-section types, shapes, and sizes. SCIA.ESA PT provides powerful tolls for easy
definition of almost any cross-section type.
A cross-section in SCIA.ESA PT is defined not only by dimensions and shape, but also by the material or
materials used. This means that if you want to use in your project the exactly same shape of a cross-section
for two different beam members and each of the two beam members is made of a different material, let’s say
of wood and concrete, you have to define two different cross-sections: one of wood and the other of concrete.
To minimize the effort the user has to invest in order to define a cross-section, the program offers selection
from a plentiful library of:
 industrially produced steel profiles (e.g. I-beams, channels, angles, tubular profiles, etc.),
 common geometric shapes,
 often used shapes for thin-walled cross-sections,
 common shapes of concrete profiles,
 commonly used welded steel sections (both open and box) made of steel flats,
 often applied two material built-up sections,
 possible combinations of two or more steel cross-sections welded together,
 variants of rolled cross-section pairs,
 standard bridge sections,
 solutions for haunch application,
 common timber profiles.
In addition, the program allows the user to define an arbitrary cross-section regarding shape, size, number of
parts, number of materials used for individual parts, etc. If required in some special cases, a cross-section may
be defined not via its shape and size, but only by means of explicitly typed sectional characteristics as the
characteristics are what is essential for the calculation.

Sectional characteristics and other properties

Overview of sectional characteristics and parameters
The calculation method (applied in the calculation module of SCIA.ESA PT) requires some characteristics of
cross-sections to be determined beforehand and supplied in the form of input data. In addition, some other
sectional characteristics are required for the design and check of cross-sections according to appropriate
national technical standards.
SCIA.ESA PT calculates all the required sectional characteristics and offers them both (i) to the calculation
module in the form of internally supplied data, and (ii) to the user in the form of editable tables.
In addition to sectional characteristics, a cross-section in SCIA.ESA PT has some additional parameters such
as name, material, type description, colour, etc. All of these parameters are available to the user for inserting,
editing, reviewing, and printing.
Generally, the parameters may be divided into three groups:
basic sectional Sectional characteristics that are common to all cross-
characteristics section types, i.e. sectional area, moment of inertia,
section modulus, radius of gyration, position of centroid,
position of shear centre, etc.
sectional characteristics Some sectional characteristics that are specific for a
specific for particular cross- particular cross-section type and are undefined or
section type unused for other types; for example, stiffeners for
concrete or bridge sections, etc.
general parameters Mainly non-numerical parameters such as material,
name, colour, etc.

129
Reference Guide

Each of the groups is dealt with in a separate chapter.

Sectional characteristics
The user normally defines a cross-section by means of its type and dimensions. SCIA.ESA PT calculates
automatically the required sectional characteristics.
The basic automatically calculated sectional characteristics are:
A Surface
Ay/A, Az/A Effective surface for shear in y and z direction respectively (ESA-Prima
Win considers shear force deformation).
AL Painting surface of the cross-section defined per one metre of length.
Iy, Iz Moment of inertia for bending around the principal y and z axis
respectively
IyLCS, IzLCS Moment of inertia for bending around the yLCS and zLCS axis
respectively. The yLCS, zLCS axes are parallel to the axes of the input
axis system, and go through the centre of gravity. The input axis system is
visible on the picture of the cross-section.
Alpha Angle between the x axis of the input axis system and the principal x axis.
It Torsion moment of inertia.
Iw Warping constant.
Wely, Welz Elastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively
Wply, Wplz Plastic section modulus for bending around the y and z axis respectively
cyLCS, czLCS Coordinates of the centre of gravity in the input axis system.
dy, dz Coordinates of the shear centre relative to the centre of gravity
Points points where the stresses are calculated
y, z Coordinates of a point in the input axis system.
Shear y, Shear z Shear stress in this point for a unit shear force in y and z direction
respectively.

The sectional characteristics are calculated automatically on closing of the dialogue for the editing of a cross-
section. In addition, the automatic calculation may be carried out at any time during the editing phase via
button [Update] of the above-mentioned dialogue.
In addition to the common sectional characteristics, there are some other parameters that are common to all
cross-section types, such as name, type description, colour, etc.

Note: Each cross-section has two co-ordinate systems which are displayed in the picture of the
cross-section : (i) the input co-ordinate system - the co-ordinates of the points where stresses are
calculated, co-ordinates of the centre of gravity and the shear centre are given in this axis system;
(ii) the principal co-ordinates in the centre of gravity.

Calculation of sectional characteristics

Basic sectional characteristics
The following sectional characteristics are calculated for all cross-section types using the standard formulas
known from basic mechanics:
 Surface A
 Moments of inertia Iy, Iz
 Moments of inertia IyLCS, IzLCS
 Angle Alpha
 Elastic section moduli Wely, Welz
 Plastic section moduli Wply, Wplz

130
 Cross-sections

 Coordinates of the centroid cyLCS, czLCS

 Radii of gyration iy, iz.
For the calculation of the following characteristics three different types of calculation are implemented.
 shear surfaces Ay and Az
 torsion moment of inertia It
 warping constant Iw
 shear centre dy, dz,
 shear stresses.
Each method is described in a separate paragraph. The last paragraph describes the calculation method for
built-up sections.
Cross-section characteristics – thin-walled cross-sections
Thin-walled sections are cross-sections:
 which contain only thin-walled elements and rolled elements
 which contain maximally one hole
All standard and built-up steel sections in SCIA.ESA PT are of this type.
torsional moment of inertia, It
for open thin-walled cross-sections, it is calculated using the following formula :

i.e. the sum over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled cross-section where:
d = width of each rectangular part,
t = thickness of each rectangular part.
For closed thin-walled cross-sections, it is calculated using the following formula (2nd formula of Bredt) :

where:
Am = surface inside the centreline of the thin-walled section
the sum is over the rectangular parts of the thin-walled section
d = width of each rectangular part
t = thickness of each rectangular part

Note: For more explanation on these formulas we refer to "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage, Band
I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhüttenleute, Düsseldorf, par. 7.4.3.2.2.".
warping constant, Iw
Warping constant, Iw, is calculated by numerical integration over a cross-section coordinate along the centre
line for those thin-walled open cross-sections, for which it is - according to the theory - different from zero
Cross-section characteristics – Geometric shapes, timber sections, concrete sections
The following formulas are used :
 effective surfaces for shear are taken equal to the total surface Ay = Az = A)
 torsional moment of inertia It : is calculated as the polar moment, It = Iy + Iz, except for rectangular
sections (see the remark at the end of this topic)
 warping constant Iw is equal to 0
 shear centre : dy, dz are equal to 0

131
Reference Guide

It for rectangular cross-sections

For the calculation of It for rectangular cross-sections, an empirical formula based on the height-to-width ratio
of the section is used:

where:
b = width of the cross-section
h = height of the cross-section
gamma = coefficient depending on the height to width ratio according to the following table :
h/b gamma
1 0.1406
1.2 0.1661
1.5 0.1958
2 0.2287
3 0.2633
5 0.2914
10 0.3123
infinity 0.3333

Note: For more information about this method see e.g. "Stahl im Hochbau, 14. Auflage, Band
I/Teil 2, Verein Deutscher Eisenhüttenleute, Düsseldorf, Table 7.85.".
Cross-section characteristics – built-up cross-sections
The following rules are valid for built-up cross-sections.
Cross-sectional area, A
The cross-sectional area, A, is calculated by summing up the sectional areas of individual cross-sections,
Moments of inertia Iy and Iz
The moments of inertia Iy and Iz are calculated with the parallel axis theorem; the partial profiles of the cross-
section are assumed to be perfectly connected to each other even for very large profile inter-centre distances.
This assumption may lead, particularly with large profile spacing, to discrepancies between the program theory
and real structure elements. When assembling an equation system, the difference between the calculated and
actual stiffness is not taken into consideration. Therefore, a variance in internal force distribution in statically
indeterminate structures may occur.
Torsional moment of inertia, It
The torsional moment of inertia, It, is taken to be a simple sum of torsional stiffness values for the individual
cross-section parts.
Warping constant, Iw
The warping constant, Iw, is taken as the sum of warping constants of the individual cross-section parts.

Other cross-section parameters

In addition to sectional characteristics, a cross-section in SCIA.ESA PT has some additional parameters such
as name, type description, colour, etc.
The common parameters in SCIA.ESA PT (except the common sectional characteristics) are:
Name A name of a cross-section. The name must be unique
within one project. If an attempt to insert a name that
already exists in the project, the typed name is not
accepted and is automatically changed to a project-unique
name.
Type This parameter describes briefly the cross-section type so
that the user can easily and quickly see what type the
particular cross-section is.

132
 Cross-sections

Detailed (description) Some cross-sections (e.g. welded ones) use this item to
specify the cross-section type, shape and possibly
dimensions in more detail.
Material This item defines the material the cross-section is made of.
Colour This item defines the colour that is used in SCIA.ESA PT to
draw the cross-section in the cross-section manager.
Edit property If this option is not selected then it is not possible to edit
individual calculated sectional characteristics.
If the option is ON, some of the sectional characteristics
may be manually edited in order to define the cross-section
whose characteristics exactly correspond to particular
conditions.
Buckling y-y, z-z These two parameters determine the buckling curve types
used for buckling calculations.
Fabrication This item specifies the way the cross-section is produced.

In addition to the numerical data available for a cross-section, the program offers also a drawing of the cross-
section with marked vertex numbers. The numbers are important mainly if the user includes a cross-section
characteristics table into a document where some of the values correspond to individual vertices. Therefore, it
is essential to know the convention of vertex numbering. The vertex numbers are given on a separate tab of
the graphical window in the editing dialogue.

Special sectional characteristics

During the input of a new of cross-section, the user may also specify Average yield strength.
Use If ON, the yield strength of the material is increased due to cold
working. The term 'average yield strength' is used.
k The value k is a coefficient depending on the type of forming. Default
value k = 7.0 is for cold rolling.

Note: This option is ONLY available if EC3 is selected as a national code, and (at the same
time) the fabrication parameter of the cross-section is set to Cold formed.

Sectional characteristics calculated by FEM

The sectional characteristics can be calculated through Finite Element Method. This is recommended and
sometimes compulsory especially for complex shape cross-sections, composite cross-section, phased cross-
sections, etc.
This calculation can be applied to Concrete sections, Timber sections, Polygon sections and Graphical cross-
sections. If the FE analysis option in the Cross-section parameters dialog is not marked, these sections are
calculated with the general method. If the option is marked, the finite element calculation is used.
Options of the Cross-section characteristics dialog
Draw group
Prandtl – F The Prandtl function is displayed on the cross-section

dF/dz The first derivative of the Prandtl function – torsional

shear stress

dF/dy The first derivative of the Prandtl function – torsional

shear stress

tau xz The translational force induced shear stress

tau xy The translational force induced shear stress

133
Reference Guide

Torsion
Displays the calculated torsional stiffness of the cross-section.

Ay (z) /A groups: the calculated shear relaxation

With Tau xz(y) The calculated Ay/A value with transversal stress.
If the switch is on, this value will be used.

Without Tau xz(y) The calculated Ay/A value without transversal stress.
If the switch is on, this value will be used.

No calculation The cross-section shear relaxation is not taken into

account and the shear area to cross-section area ratio
equals one.

Calculation of the torsion moment of inertia and the torsion stress

This calculation is based on the theory of Prandtl. This method is applicable to general cross-sections. For
background information we refer to "Handbook of engineering mechanics, W.Flügge, First edition, paragraph
36.3".
Calculation of the shear areas Ay and Az and the shear stresses
This calculation is based on the theory of Grasshof-Zuravski, which assumes that the cross-section is thick-
walled and symmetrical.
If a cross-section is symmetrical about one axis only, the results related to the other axis will be technically
incorrect and such results should no longer be taken into account for the calculation. The calculation is carried
out for the transversal shear effect being both included and not included.
In practice, the theory is also sufficiently accurate for what is termed high cross-sections (in the bending and
shear plane). The calculation leads to rather high errors in the case of low cross-sections. Thin-walled cross-
sections are inadmissible.
If a cross-section is made of several materials (heterogeneous cross-section), the calculated shear areas Ay
and Az can be used under the following conditions:
1. the heterogeneities are symmetrical
2. the heterogeneity does not disturb the Grasshof-Zuravski theory’s stress
3. the heterogeneity is diffused
4. a local heterogeneity consists of less than 10% of the cross-section area

Mesh size
The size of the mesh for this calculation can be adjusted in the editing dialogue of the particular cross-section.
Important
The FE analysis of a cross-section is performed in two steps:
1. shear analysis for Ay, Az and tau_xy, tau_xz,
2. torsion analysis for It, F, dF/dy, dF/dz.
The size of the FE mesh for the shear analysis is given by the parameter adjusted in the dialogue.
However, as the torsion analysis is extremely time-consuming, it uses adapted mesh size with elements 3
times larger than for the shear analysis. This may lead to the result that even if the original mesh is
symmetrical, the mesh for the torsion analysis may become non-symmetrical. Especially if the elements are
quite large, this may distort the results (e.g. break their symmetry in case of a symmetrical cross-section).
The calculated results are displayed on the mesh defined in the dialogue and used for the shear analysis.

It is highly recommended to have at least 1000 finite elements for the shear analysis, which mean at least
300 finite elements for the torsion analysis.

The picture below shows an example of a very coarse mesh that gives completely unreliable and unusable
results of the torsion analysis.

134
 Cross-sections

However, if the mesh is fine enough (here about 2000 elements not shown in the picture), the results are
accurate – see below:

Cross-section types
Geometric shapes
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of basic cross-section shapes.
The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just has to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, choose the appropriate
shape and size, and review or change the required parameters.
Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and the user
may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.
Sample cross-sections

135
Reference Guide

Note: A separate book Profile library: Checked sections contains an overview of rolled cross-
sections included in SCIA.ESA PT’s database.

Thin-walled cross-sections
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of common steel thin-walled cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of this cross-section type into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

Steel rolled cross-sections

Hot-rolled and cold-formed cross-sections made of steel are cross-sections manufactured in specialised
factories. In SCIA.ESA PT whenever the user wants to use a hot-rolled or cold-formed steel cross-section, s/he
may select appropriate shape and size from the integrated library of industrially manufactured cross-sections.
All sectional characteristics are automatically read into the program and the user is not forced to take care of
anything related to the section and its parameters and characteristics.
The procedure for insertion of a rolled cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
By default, all the sectional characteristics of a rolled or formed cross-section are automatically imported into
SCIA.ESA PT the moment the user makes a selection of required shape and size in the integrated cross-
section library. If required, the user may specify the non-numerical parameters such as name, colour, material,
etc. In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates data such as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.
The table below shows diagrams of the above-mentioned sectional characteristics for an I-beam.

136
 Cross-sections

Warping lines

Shear Y

Shear Z

Shape of stiffeners

137
Reference Guide

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes. E.g. the
shape of stiffener is not provided for angles, or no additional parameters are available for bars, etc.
Sample cross-sections

Welded steel cross-sections

SCIA.ESA PT provides for easy definition of commonly used types of welded cross-sections made of steel flats
by offering the selection from a library of such cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of a welded cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

138
 Cross-sections

Welded hollow cross-sections

Welded cross-sections are similar to welded built-up open cross-section. The user can make a selection from a
library of commonly used shapes of welded hollow sections.
The procedure for insertion of a welded hollow cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for
any other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose
the appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

Haunch cross-sections
It is quite common that a beam member contains haunches at one or both of its ends. Sometimes the beam
cross-section just simply "changes" its dimension (usually the height), sometimes a special cross-section is
made for such a beam member. This special cross-section consists of two parts – one that remains constant
along the whole beam span, and one that "makes" the haunch. SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to select from a
set of pre-defined "haunch" cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of a "haunch" cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any
other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,

139
Reference Guide

 diagram of warping lines,

 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

Built-up steel cross-sections

Built-up members are used when a single member would not be sufficient or when the slenderness ratio is too
high and resulting in excessive vibrations or when a built-up member would reduce the complexity of the
connection.
The procedure for insertion of a built-up cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
 shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

140
 Cross-sections

Multi-material built-up cross-sections

Cross-sections composed of two different materials are quite common in the engineering practice. They
provide for the combination of "good qualities" and "advantages" of the combined materials. Probably most
often a steel beam is joined together with a concrete slab creating thus the top flange of the cross-section.
However, SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to define materials of the composite cross-section freely.
The procedure for insertion of a composite cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any
other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
In addition to the basic sectional characteristics, the program also calculates, designs and displays data such
as:
shape of a wall stiffener,
 diagram of warping lines,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Y-direction,
 diagram of shear stress distribution over the cross-section for a unit force acting in Z-direction,
 centre lines of the cross-section.

Note: Some of the above mentioned data depend on the shape of the particular cross-section.
Therefore, some of the values may not be available for some of the cross-section shapes.
Sample cross-sections

141
Reference Guide

Concrete cross-sections
SCIA.ESA PT offers a predefined set of concrete cross-section shapes that are used most often. The section
may be simply selected from the library list. All basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated by
the program.
The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any
other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
Similarly to other cross-section types, basic sectional characteristics are automatically calculated and the user
may type in the non-numerical parameters such as name, material, colour, etc.
Sample cross-sections

Timber cross-sections
Members made of wood generally use a wooden-specific cross-sections. SCIA.ESA PT library of pre-defined
cross-sections offers also a set for this material.
The procedure for insertion of a concrete cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any
other cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
Sample cross-sections

Bridge cross-sections
Special cross-sections are used for bridges. SCIA.ESA PT offers a collection of such cross-sections.
The procedure for insertion of a bridge cross-section into a project is identical with the procedure for any other
cross-section type; the user just have to specify the type in the type-selection dialogue, then choose the
appropriate shape and size, and oversee or change the required parameters.
As for any other cross-section type, the sectional characteristics such as sectional area, moment of inertia,
position of centroid, etc. are calculated automatically by the program. The user may input or modify other
cross-section parameters such as material, name, etc.
Sample cross-sections

142
 Cross-sections

Numerical cross-section
A numerical cross-section is a special cross-section type. It enables the user to define an arbitrary cross-
section. The user does not have to define the shape of the cross-section. The only thing s/he has to do is fill in
a table of sectional characteristics.

General cross-section
A general cross-section is a cross-section that:
 may be of an arbitrary shape,
 may consist of an arbitrary number of partial cross-sections,
 may be made of an arbitrary number of materials.
This type of cross-section may be useful mainly for sections tailored for a specific purpose (steel thin walled
cross-sections, aluminium sections, bridge sections, hollow concrete sections, etc.).

143
Reference Guide

The general cross-section may be designed by means of a tool called General cross-section editor. This editor
is a special environment, fully integrated into SCIA.ESA PT that provides the user with all functions necessary
for an efficient design of a "free-shape" and "free-composition" cross-section.

Defining a new cross-section

Cross-section manager
The Cross-section manager is a versatile tool for dealing with cross-section. The cross-section manager is
used to:
 define a new cross-section,
 edit an existing cross-section,
 delete an existing cross-section,
 review parameters of existing cross-sections,
 choose one if the existing cross-sections as a "default" for later called functions that require a cross-
section as a parameter.
The cross-section manager is one of the "managers" integrated in SCIA.ESA PT and its layout and operation
is identical to the other SCIA.ESA PT "managers". It is open when function Cross-sections is activated. It may
represent one of the steps in the General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section.
Generally, there are several ways to open the Cross-section manager:
 Tree menu function Library > Cross-sections.
 Project toolbar.
 Menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.
 "Manager" button in any of numerous property dialogues that contain at least one item Cross-
section.

Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the program)
is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.

144
 Cross-sections

General procedure for the definition of a new cross-section

The process for the definition (or we can say insertion) of a new cross-section in a SCIA.ESA PT project
consists of a few steps.
Procedure for the definition of a new cross-section
1. Call function Cross-sections. There are various ways to do so:
a. Use tree menu function Library > Cross-sections.
b. Start function for the insertion of a new beam member and open the Cross-
section manager from within the Beam properties dialogue.
c. Click the appropriate icon on the Project toolbar.
d. Call menu function Libraries > Cross-sections.
2. Function Cross-sections opens the Cross-section manager.
3. Press button [New item]. This action opens a dialogue for the selection of cross-section type. (Note:
If no cross-section has been defined yet, this step is automatically skipped and the cross-section
type dialogue is opened directly).
4. Select the appropriate cross-section type.
5. Specify the sectional parameters and properties.
6. Review the calculated sectional characteristics and possibly include them into a document.
7. Close the Cross-section manager or repeat steps 3 to 6 as many times as required.

Selecting the cross-section type

The selection of a required cross-section type or types can be done in the New cross-section type dialogue.

The dialogue consists of the following control and information elements:

List of available cross- It contains all the available cross-section types.
section types
List of possible variants It offers possible sub-types for the selected type.
(sub-types) for the current
type
Drawing of the currently It shows the particular selected cross-section.
selected variant
List of already defined It lists all he already defined (inserted) cross-section.
cross-sections
Control buttons They provide for the control of the dialogue.

145
Reference Guide

List of available cross-section types

The dialogue offers a list of available cross-section types. The contents of the list may vary depending on the
purchased configuration of SCIA.ESA PT and the material types selected for the particular project.
For example, a user who selected steel and concrete materials in the Project settings dialogue can select
from variety of steel and concrete cross-sections, while another user who selected just timber material in the
project settings can only use timber cross-sections.
List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type
This dialogue element displays a set of graphical symbols (icons) representing the individual variants of the
cross-section type that is currently selected in the List of available cross-section types.
Note: If the type selected is "rolled steel cross-section ", the list of possible variants is different
than for other cross-section types. In this case, the list offers both "shapes" of rolled section and
available dimensions for each particular "shape". That means that the user can select directly the
required type (shape) of rolled section and its appropriate size.
Drawing of the currently selected variant
A small window displays a drawing of the currently selected variant of the currently selected cross-section
type. A short "description name" of the particular variant is added to the drawing mainly to facilitate the
identification of a particular cross-section sub-type and type.
Note: This window is hidden if the rolled steel cross-section type is selected.
List of already defined cross-sections
In addition to the available cross-section types, the dialogue displays a list containing all the cross-sections
that have been defined (i.e. inserted into the project) so far.
Control buttons
Button [Add] and Button with a "Right Arrow"
Button [Add] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Depending on the cross-section type and
variant, a new cross-section is either (i) inserted directly into the SCIA.ESA PT project, or (ii) a dialogue for
editing of cross-section parameters is opened. The former happens if e.g. a rolled steel section has been
selected because there is no need to specify its dimensions, name, etc. The latter action is performed if some
kind of specification is required for the selected cross-section such as the definition of dimensions for welded
steel or cast concrete cross-section, etc. Once a new cross-section is inserted by means of this button, the
cross-section is added to the List of already defined cross-sections.
Button [Close]
This button closes the New cross-section type dialogue.

Specifying sectional parameters and properties

The specification of cross-section parameters can be done in a dialogue for editing of a particular cross-
section. This dialogue is opened automatically once the user selects and confirms the required type in the New
cross-section type dialogue. In addition, the editing dialogue can be opened any time later via the [Edit] button
of the Cross-section manager.

146
 Cross-sections

The editing dialogue consists of three main parts:

Graphical window It displays the cross-section including dimension lines,
labels, etc.
Property table If comprises all the parameters and sectional
characteristics of the cross-section and provides for their
editing.
Control buttons They perform various tasks connected with the editing.

Graphical window
The graphical window displays the cross-section, dimension lines, labels and, if available, some of the cross-
section properties or characteristics: for example cross-section vertex numbers, shape of stiffeners, diagrams
of selected quantities such as shear stress distribution, etc. These additional data about the cross-section are
shown on separate tabs (one tab per each property).
Property table
The property table contains all the available and computable cross-section characteristics and parameters.
Here the parameters can be input or edited.
The parameters can be divided into three groups: basic sectional characteristics, parameters independent of
the cross-section type and type-specific parameters.
It should be stated here that some of the parameters (basic sectional characteristics in particular) cannot be
neither input nor edited as they are uniquely determined by the shape and dimensions of the cross-section and
are therefore automatically calculated by the program.
There exists a special interconnection between the property table and graphical window that will be described
later in this chapter.
Control buttons
Button [Update]
This button starts an algorithm that recalculates the sectional characteristics on the basis of input values.
On entering the editing dialogue for a new cross-section, the property table shows only those parameters that
may be edited. In order to see also the computer sectional characteristics, the button must be user.
What’s more, the computed sectional characteristics listed in the property table disappear once the user
changes any of the input values. The characteristics are displayed again after this button is pressed. It must be
also used to initiate the regeneration of some of the drawings in the graphical window.

147
Reference Guide

Button [Document]
This button invokes the preview window to show the cross-section parameters in a document-style table. The
table may be edited the same way as a standard document table.
Button [OK]
This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.
If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.
If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into the
project.
Button [Cancel]
This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.
If a new cross-section has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.
If an existing cross-section has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account and the project
remains unchanged.
Graphical window versus property table relation
The graphical window and the property table are provided with a special interlink that provides for easy and
lucid style of editing.
The graphical window contains two types of labelling symbols: either dimension lines, or labels, or both. The
dimension lines describe dimensions of the individual cross-section edges and parts. The labels depict partial
units (e.g. individual rolled steel sections) of a built-up or composite cross-section.
The same items (partial units or dimensions) that are referred to in the graphical window by means of
dimension lines and labels can also be found in the property table where they form individual editable cells. In
order to facilitate the editing process, there is a link between corresponding property table cells and graphical
symbols in the graphical window. That means that if the user wants to change a dimension of a cross-section,
it may either (i) select the appropriate cell in the table, or (ii) select the corresponding graphical symbol in the
graphical window. What’s more, in order to find quickly which dimension or partial unit the individual table cells
refers to, the user can simply select the cell in the table and the appropriate dimension line or label is
highlighted in the graphical window.

Reviewing the calculated sectional characteristics

There are a few ways to see and scrutinise the parameters of a cross-section including both the input data and
calculated sectional characteristics.
Property table in the Cross-
section manager
Property table in the
dialogue for editing of a
cross-section
Document-style view in the
preview window
The Cross-section manager contains a vertically oriented
window that displays the basic sectional characteristics and
parameters of currently selected cross-section in a property
table.
Each dialogue for editing of a cross-section contains a
vertically oriented property table with all the available
parameters of the edited cross-section.
This is the most sophisticated kind of display for
parameters of a cross-section. It is accessible from within
the dialogue for editing of a cross-section.

Property table in the Cross-section manager

The property table in the Cross-section manager provides for quick overview of basic characteristics and
parameters of individual defined cross-sections. It is possible to edit some of the parameters, however, this
table is not primarily intended for thorough editing of a cross-section. If a cross-section must be modified, the
cross-section editing dialogue should be invoked.
Property table in the dialogue for editing of a cross-section
The property table in this dialogue provides for both clear overview of the cross-section parameters and their
straightforward modification. Most of the items may be edited in this dialogue. The only exception is the
sectional characteristics that are automatically calculated from the dimensions. Such characteristics are not
allowed to be modified.
Document-style view in the preview window
The sectional characteristics and all the other parameters can be displayed in a readable way in the preview
window. The preview window then displays a table with all the cross-section parameters sorted in it.

148
 Cross-sections

The table is in fact a standard SCIA.ESA PT document table and consequently its format can be adjusted to
meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.
The table shows not only all the parameters of the cross-section and all its parameters which are displayed in
the property tables of dialogues for dealing with cross-sections (i.e. Cross-section manager and Editing
dialogue), but also a set of additional information including a couple of diagrams. The additional information
depend on the type of cross-section.
The picture below shows a sample preview for an angle section

Importing the cross-sections from another project

Quite often, the user may encounter the situation that s/he wants to use the same cross-sections in several
different projects. Especially for "man-made" cross-sections (i.e. not rolled ones), the repetitious definition of
the same cross-sections may be rather time consuming and boring. What’s more, it may become a source of
serious mistakes.
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to solve this task effectively and clearly. The procedure consists of two
separate steps and is limited only by one rule.
Export of required cross-sections from the "source" project
Firstly, the cross-sections defined in one project must be exported into an external database. Later, they may
be imported into other projects. The export can be controlled in the Write to database dialogue.

149
Reference Guide

The left hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections defined in the current project.
The right hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections saved in the selected user-database file.
The buttons below the list boxes can be used to manage the external database.
Write to Writes the selected cross-section from the list of project cross-sections
database into the database file.
Write all Writes all the cross-section from the list of project cross-sections into
the database file.
Delete Deletes the selected cross-section from the database file.

The procedure for export of cross-sections into an external database

1. In it is not the case, define the required cross-sections in the original (or source) project.
2. Open the Cross-section manager.
3. Press button [Save into file] ( ).
4. Define a new or browse for the existing User-database file.
5. The Write-to-database is opened on the screen.
6. Export the required cross-sections.
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Close the Cross-section manager.

Import of required cross-sections into the "target" project

Once the required cross-sections have been successfully exported into the user-database file, they may be
imported into the target project.
The import can be controlled in the Read from database dialogue, which is similar in appearance to the Write
to database dialogue (see above).
The left hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections defined in the current project.
The right hand side of the dialogue lists all the cross-sections saved in the selected user-database file.
The buttons below the list boxes can be used to import items from the external database.
Copy to project Copies the selected cross-sections from the external user-database
into the current project.
Copy all Copies all the cross-sections from the external user-database into the

150
 Cross-sections

current project.

The procedure for import of cross-sections from an external database

1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Press button [Read from file] ( ).
3. Browse for the existing User-database file.
4. The Read-from-database is opened on the screen.
5. Import the required cross-sections.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Close the Cross-section manager.

Limitations of the import process

Despite the fact that the Import is rather versatile, there is a limitation with reference to material code of cross-
section materials. As a cross-section stores, among others, the information about the material it is made of,
there is a rule concerning materials defined in the project.

Note: AT LEAST ONE of the material codes defined in the source project MUST also be defined
in the target project. Otherwise, the import is not made correctly.

Example:
Source project material Target project material Import result
codes codes
Material codes defined in Material codes defined in the
the source project, i.e. the target project, i.e. the project
project from which the into which the cross-sections
cross-sections have been are being imported
exported
CSN, EC, DIN EC, SIA correct
CSN, DIN EC, SIA INCORRECT
CSN,DIN DIN correct

Modyfying an existing cross-section

Editing a cross-section
Any cross-section that has been inserted into a project can be edited any time later. In order to do so, the user
has to activate the editing dialogue of the particular cross-section.
Procedure for editing of an existing cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.
3. Use button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue for the selected cross-section.
4. Make the necessary changes of cross-section parameters.
5. Close the editing dialogue using [OK] button to confirm the changes.
6. If required, repeat steps 2 to 5 for other cross-sections.
7. Close the Cross-section manager.

Deleting a cross-section
A cross-section that is no longer used in a project, i.e. that is no longer assigned to any of the beam members
in the modelled structure, can be removed from the project database. The deletion may both save the
computer memory and improve the orientation in the project data.

151
Reference Guide

It is advisable to remove all unnecessary cross-sections from the project. Any redundant item in the project
database deteriorates the lucidity of the data and may be a source of an accidental mistake.
Procedure for deletion of an existing cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.
3. Use button [Delete] to erase the cross-section from the project database.
4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.
5. Close the Cross-section manager.

Note: If a cross-section is used anywhere in the project, the program does not allow the user to
remove it.

Copying a cross-section
It may be convenient for some reason or another to create a copy of an existing cross-section. The copy may
be later modified to define a new cross-section that is similar to its original and varies in a few parameters only.
This procedure may be useful for example if the user wants to make experiments or variants for cross-sections
of the same geometry but different material.
Procedure for copying of an existing cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.
3. Use button [Copy] to make a copy of the selected cross-section.
4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.
5. Close the Cross-section manager.
This procedure will be most likely immediately followed by the procedure for editing of a cross-section in order
to make necessary modifications to the copies.

Replacing a cross-section
Sometimes a need may arise to replace one cross-section used in the structure with another one in all its
appearances. This task may be done effectively by means of Change cross-section function.
This function allows the user to replace one of the already defined cross-sections with a new one. Once the
new cross-section is defined, it is applied for all beam members in the structure where the "replaced" cross-
section was used so far.
Procedure for replacing of an existing cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the required cross-section in the list of defined cross-sections.
3. Use button [Change] to replace the selected cross-section with a new one.
4. If required, repeat steps 2 and 3 for other cross-sections.
5. Close the Cross-section manager.

General cross-section
General cross-section
A general cross-section is a cross-section that:
 may be of an arbitrary shape,
 may consist of an arbitrary number of partial cross-sections,
 may be made of an arbitrary number of materials.
This type of cross-section may be useful mainly for sections tailored for a specific purpose (steel thin walled
cross-sections, aluminium sections, bridge sections, hollow concrete sections, etc.).

152
 Cross-sections

The general cross-section may be designed by means of a tool called General cross-section editor. This editor
is a special environment, fully integrated into SCIA.ESA PT that provides the user with all functions necessary
for an efficient design of a "free-shape" and "free-composition" cross-section.

Examples of a general cross-section

This chapter has been made just to give a gist of what form a general cross-sections can be.

153
Reference Guide

Rules for general cross-sections

The final cross-section may consist of several partial sections. The mutual position of these partial sections
follows several rules:
 The partial sections may be independent, i.e. they do not intersect nor "touch" each other.
 The partial sections may "touch" each other or they even may overlap one another (see Properties
of the partial section).
 It is possible to combine solid (thin-walled) partial section, thin-walled partial section and library
cross-section in one general cross-section.
 If solid and thin-walled sections are combined in the general cross-section, principles given in
chapter Thin-walled versus solid cross-section should be taken into account.

Type of partial sections in the general cross-section

Polygonal cross-section
A polygonal cross-section is an arbitrary closed polygon. It is clear that individual segments (edges) of the
polygon MUST NOT intersect each other. On the other hand, if the final cross-section consists of several
partial sections, these may intersect or overlap - see Rules for general cross-sections.
The individual segments of the polygon may be (i) linear or (ii) circular.
It is possible to adjust the following parameters for the polygonal section.
Name Specifies the name of the polygonal. It is used for easier orientation

154
 Cross-sections

especially if the final cross-section consists of a larger number of

partial sections.
Type This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial
section.
Material See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Corrosion See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Phase See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Overlap See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

A polygon may also be used to create an opening in another polygonal cross-section. The only requirement is
that the opening intersects or lies inside the other partial section that may be either of polygonal or thin-walled
type. The intersection of two regions is deducted from the non-opening shape. A few examples follow.
"Full-time" opening
The smaller polygon (with one circular edge) is fully inside the rectangular polygon. The result is a cross-
section of rectangular outline with an opening.

Partial opening
The two triangular openings just overlap the solid square.

The result is an irregular hexagonal cross-section.

155
Reference Guide

Thin walled cross-section

A thin-walled cross-section is a section defined by its centreline (or midline) and the width. If a cross-section is
supposed to have segments of different width, it must be defined as consisting of two (or more) partial and
interconnected sections.
Even a thin-walled cross-section may be subject to corrosion. It should be stated, however, that in SCIA.ESA
PT the corrosion affects only the thickness of the section. The length of the midline remains unaffected by the
corrosion.
Opening may also be defined in a thin-walled cross-section. It is possible to just cut (shorten) a thin-walled
section or even make a whole in it (even though this may be considered strange from the practical point of
view).
For more information about openings in a thin-walled section, see chapter Thin-walled versus solid cross-
section.
Name Specifies the name of the polygonal. It is used for easier orientation
especially if the final cross-section consists of a larger number of
partial sections.
Type This parameter cannot be changed and indicates the type of the partial
section.
Material See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Corrosion See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the section web.
Alignment The "definition" line may be either the mid-line of the section, or its left
or right surface line.
Phase See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.
Overlap See chapter Properties of the partial cross-section.

Library cross-section
A partial section of a general cross-section may also be formed by standard cross-sections imported from the
cross-section library, e.g. by rolled steel cross-sections, predefined concrete sections, wooden sections, etc.
An arbitrary number of library sections may be added into a general cross-section and they may be freely
combined with polygonal and/or thin-walled sections.
What’s also important is the fact that once inputted the library cross-section may still be edited inside the
General cross-section editor, e.g. the depth of a concrete section, its inclination, etc. may be changed.

Thin-walled versus solid cross-section

A partial cross-section of a general cross-section may be defined as a thin-walled section or as a solid section
(thick-walled) section. If the final general cross-section consists of one type of sections only, there is nothing to
bother about. If all the partial sections are thin-walled, the final cross-section is thin-walled as well. If all the
partial sections are solid, the final cross-section is solid as well.

156
 Cross-sections

But what happens if thin-walled parts are combined with solid ones? In SCIA.ESA PT, the final cross-section is
considered as solid section.
What’s more important to know is the fact that even an opening is considered to be a "solid" section, so if a
thin-walled section is cut with an opening, the result is a solid cross-section.

Note: It is important to remember this rule as it determines which formulas are used to calculate
sectional characteristics.

General cross-section editor

Opening the General cross-section editor
The General cross-section editor is a tool that, at first sight, resembles the Picture gallery editor. What both
editors have in common is that they both are a "drawing tool" for creation of a "drawing".
In General cross-section editor, the drawing represents a cross-section. In Picture gallery, the drawing is a
picture of analysed structure.
The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to create a new general cross-section
1. Open the Cross-section manager:
a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,
b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,
c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.
2. Click button [New] to add a new cross-section.
3. Select General in the Available groups list.
4. Click button [Add].
5. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
6. Define the new cross-section.
7. Close the editor.
8. Confirm the new cross-section.
9. Close the New cross-section dialogue.
10. Close the Cross-section manager.
The procedure to open the General cross-section editor in order to edit an existing general cross-
section
1. Open the Cross-section manager:
a. either via tree menu item Library > Cross-sections,
b. or using menu function Libraries > Cross-sections,
c. or by means of button [Cross-sections] on toolbar Project.
2. In the list of defined cross-section, select the one you need to change.
3. Click button [Edit] to edit the selected cross-section.
4. The Cross-section edit dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. If only some of the general parameters need to be altered, make the change in the property table of
the dialogue.
6. If the shape or property of only a partial section need to me modified, press button [Edit] in the
property table of the dialogue.
7. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
8. Make the necessary changes.
9. Close the editor.
10. Confirm the result in the General cross-section editor.
11. Close the Cross-section manager.

Using the General cross-section editor

Once the General cross-section editor is opened, it is possible to define (draw) a new cross-section or edit an
existing one. This may be done by means of numerous functions available in the General cross-section editor.

157
Reference Guide

The functions can be sorted by their type:

 Working plane and user-coordinate system
 Adjustment of the view
 Setting of view parameters
 Dot grid
 Selections
 SNAP mode
 Geometric manipulations
 Input of a new partial cross-section
 Dimension lines
 Definition and application of parameters
The individual functions are described in separate chapters of this book.

Functions of the General cross-section editor

Working plane and user co-ordinate system
The principles of working plane and user co-ordinate systems have been laid in the main reference manual.
Those capabilities that are meaningful also in the General cross-section editor have been implemented in it.
UCS by 3 points Defines a UCS by means of 3 points.
According to entity LCS Defines a UCS in such a way that X-axis goes along a
selected entity edge (e.g. polygon segment).
GCS The UCS is made identical to the GCS.
GCS parallel The UCS axes are parallel with the GCS axes but the
origin is not in the origin of the GCS.
Move The UCS may be moved to a new origin.
Rotate The UCS may be rotated.
Previous The previous UCS may be taken back.

Note: For more information about working plane and user co-ordinate systems in general see
chapters Basic working tools > Working plane and Basic working tools > User co-ordinate system
(UCS).

Adjusting the view

The General cross-section editor offers similar view adjusting function as the main SCIA.ESA PT graphical
environment.
Zoom in Zooms in.
Zoom out Zooms out.
Zoom – Cut-out Requires defining a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is
then magnified in order to fit into the whole area of the
graphical window.
Zoom – All Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the
whole area of the graphical window.
Zoom – Selection Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the
whole area of the graphical window.

Note: For more information about adjusting the view in general see chapter Basic working
tools > Adjusting the viewpoint.

158
 Cross-sections

Controlling the view parameters

The user may control the way the partial cross-sections are drawn on the screen. There are several means of
control.
Names of partial sections and node (vertex) numbers

A button on the main toolbar ( ) can be used to switch ON / OFF the labels giving (i) partial section names
and (ii) vertex numbers of polygonal partial section or thin-walled partial section.
Depiction
OFF

Depiction
ON

Colour palette
As in the main graphical environment of SCIA.ESA PT, the user may adjust colour for individual types of lines.
In the General cross-section editor the following colours related to the cross-section may be set in addition to
standard line types.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.
Cross-section outline Specifies the colour of the contour of the cross-section.
Cross-section midline Specifies the colour of the midline of the cross-section.
Cross-section fibre Specifies the colour of letters used to depict cross-
section vertices.
Cross-section corrosion Specifies the colour of the corrosion level.
Cross-section joints
Cross-section insert point Specifies the colour of the insertion point, i.e. the point
that is used to manipulate with the section by mouse.

Fonts
Once again, the General cross-section editor enables the user to set required font type and size.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.
Labels of nodes Specifies the font used to depict cross-section vertices.
Labels of sectional parts Specifies the font used to depict partial cross-sections.
Main labels Specifies the font used for basic labels.

Dimension lines

159
Reference Guide

Similarly to dimension lines used in picture gallery or paper-space gallery, it is possible to set the basic
parameters of dimension lines used for dimensioning of general cross-sections.

The setup dialogue may be opened via button ( ) on the main toolbar.

Dot grid
The definition and use of the dot grid are identical with those of the main SCIA.ESA PT graphical environment.
Note: For more information about dot grid in general see chapter Basic working tools > Dot
grid.

Making the selection

Making a selection by the mouse cursor
single selection One entity is selected each time the user clicks the
mouse button.
rectangular cut-out The user draws a rectangle on the screen. The program
selects all entities located inside the rectangle or
overlapping it (see the paragraph below for details about
this selection mode).
intersection line The user draws a line (or a polygon) on the screen. The
program selects all entities that have an intersection with
the drawn line.
polygonal cut-out The user draws a closed polygon on the screen. The
program selects all entities located inside the polygon
select-all All currently displayed entities are selected
previous Activates the last made selection.
clear selection The current selection is cleared (the entities are not
deleted, they are just unselected).

Note: For more information about selections in general see chapter Basic working tools >
Selections.

Adjusting the snap mode

The principles of "snapping" have been laid in other chapters of the main reference manual. Here, in the
general cross-section context, it is worth to say that the same SNAP modes can be utilised for the definition or
modification of a general cross-section in the General cross-section editor.
Available SNAP modes are:
Dot grid The cursor is locked to the points of a defined dot grid.
Only snapped If this option is ON, the first two variants are automatically turned OFF
points and only characteristic points of already defined entities may be used
to snap to. In other words, only the object SNAP mode is enabled.
Midpoints Middle points of entities are used as snap points.
Endpoints / End points of entities are used as snap points.
Nodes
Intersections Intersections of entities are used as snap points.
Orthogonal This option snaps to a point that forms a perpendicular with the
points selected object.
Tangential The Tangential point SNAP mode snaps to a tangent point on a circle.
points
Arc / circle This option snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline arc segment.
centre The cursor must pass over the circumference of the circle or the arc so
that the centre can be found.
Points on line / The program automatically divides a selected entity into N segments

160
 Cross-sections

curve N-th and thus generates (N+1) points on an entity under cursor. The points
may be used to snap to.
Points in line / This option is similar to the one above. But the division of a beam
curve % of member is defined by percents and not by the number of segments.
length

Note: For more information about SNAP modes in general see chapter Basic working tools >
Cursor SNAP modes.

Geometric manipulations
Several geometric manipulations are available to modify the already input polygonal partial cross-sections. The
functions are analogous to geometric functions for ESA PT structural entities (e.g. beam members).
Geometric manipulations
Move Moves selected partial section/sections to a new location.
Copy Makes a copy of the selected partial section/sections.
Multicopy Makes several copies of the selected partial section/sections.
Rotate Rotates the selected partial section/sections.
Scale Enlarges or scales down the selected partial section/sections.
Mirror Creates a mirror image of the selected partial section/sections.
Trim Trims the selected partial section/sections to a given border entity.
Extend Extends the selected partial section/sections to a given border entity.

Edit polyline
Insert node Inserts a node to the selected part of a polygon.
Remove node Removes the selected from the selected part of a polygon.

Geometric manipulation with curves

Edit arc angle Changes the angle of the selected arc.
Edit arc bulge Changes the bulge of the selected arc.
Edit arc radius Changes the radius of the selected arc.
Convert curve Converts the selected curve to a straight line.
to line
Convert line to Converts the selected straight line to an arc.
circle arc

Note: For more information about geometric manipulations in general see chapter Geometry.

Dimension lines
Once the general cross-section is defined (or partly defined), it is possible to add dimension lines to the
drawing of the section.
There are three types of drawing lines: (i) vertical, (ii) horizontal, and (iii) general.
The procedure to input a new dimension line
1. Open function Dimension line from the tree menu of the General cross-section editor.
2. If required, change dimension line parameters.
3. Select the first point that the dimension line refers to.
4. Select the second point that the dimension line refers to.
5. Define the position of the dimension line.
6. Repeat as many times as required.

161
Reference Guide

Parameters of dimension line

Name Specifies the name of the dimension line.
Style Selects the style: vertical, horizontal, general.
Label Specifies a text label attached to the dimension line.
Plot line offset Defines the offset of the plot line from the cross-section.

offset = 5

offset = 50
Plot line Selects the type of plot line.

short

long
Label alignment Defines the alignment.

162
 Cross-sections

left

centre

right

Example of dimension lines

Creating a new general cross-section

Inserting a new polygonal section
The procedure to insert a new polygonal section

163
Reference Guide

1. Open the General cross-section editor.

2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Polygon.
3. If required, adjust polygon parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.
4. Close the setting dialogue.
5. Define the starting point of the section’s outline:
a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,
b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.
6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the polygon.
7. When finished, close the function:
a. either by pressing [Esc] key,
b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.

Note 1: See also chapter Plane polygon toolbar.

Note 2: When you start inputting individual vertices, the program draws the outline of the
section. If possible, the program also closes the polygon and gives the idea of what the cross-
section would look like if you input the vertex and then immediately close the function. If however, it
is not possible to close the polygon (without intersecting one or more segments), the polygon is let
open and only the defined part of the polygon is drawn.

The two pictures below demonstrate what has been said in the note above. Please note, that the vertex at the
cursor (small square) has not been input yet.

The program suggests the "closed" shape (Fig. above).

There is no possibility to close the polygon at the moment (Fig. above).

Example of a polygonal section

164
 Cross-sections

Plane polygon toolbar

Once function New polygon is started the user may select advanced option from toolbar Plane polygon.

Buttons of the toolbar have the following meaning.

New circle
If this button is pressed, the sub-toolbar with two buttons is opened.
New circle – centre, radius point
The user must define the centre point and a point on the circle that specifies the radius.
New circle – 3 points
The user must input three points located on the circle.

New rectangle
The user must define two opposite corners of a rectangle.

New polygon
The user must define individual vertices of the polygon.

New straight line

The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a straight line.

New circular arc

The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon will be a circular arc (the intermediate point and
end point of the circular segment must be input).

Select line
This button is useful if a new polygon is supposed to follow the shape of a previously defined polygon. The
user does not have to pick all the vertices of the new polygon, but may select existing edges of the already
input polygon.
Example:
Let’s assume that a polygon has been input as shown below.

165
Reference Guide

Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon.
The procedure may be:
1. Start function New polygon.
2. Input the first point to the right of vertex P4 of the defined polygon.
3. Input the second point in directly in vertex P4.
4. Press button [Select line] on the toolbar.
5. Select edge P4-P5 of the first polygon.
6. Select edge P5-P7 of the first polygon.
7. Select edge P7-P6 of the first polygon.
8. Press button [New straight line] on the toolbar.
9. Input the remaining vertices of the new polygon.

Step back
This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon. If a polygon is being defined, the last vertex is
removed. If a circle is being defined by means of three points and two points have been defined so far, this
function removes the second point of the circle but leaves the first circle point unaffected.

Inserting a new thin walled section

The procedure to insert a new thin walled section
1. Open the General cross-section editor.
2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Thin walled.

166
 Cross-sections

3. If required, adjust section parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.
4. Close the setting dialogue.
5. Define the starting point of the section’s midline:
a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,
b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.
6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the section midline.
7. When finished, close the function:
a. either by pressing [Esc] key,
b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.
Example of a thin-walled section

Inserting a new library section

The procedure to insert a new library section
1. Open the General cross-section editor.
2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Section from library.
3. Select the type and size of the library section.
4. If required, adjust section parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.
5. Close the setting dialogue.
6. Define the location of the reference point of the section:
a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,
b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.

Inserting a new opening

An opening is in fact a polygon. So the procedure for its definition is very similar to that for polygonal cross-
section. The difference is that the opening has got no material property.
The procedure to insert a new opening
1. Open the General cross-section editor.
2. Use the tree menu located on the left hand side to start function Polygonal opening.
3. If required, adjust parameters in the dialogue that opens on the screen.
4. Close the setting dialogue.
5. Define the starting point of the opening’s outline:
a. either by means of mouse which "sticks" to selected SNAP points,
b. or by typing the vertex co-ordinates on the command line.
6. Use the same approach to define additional vertices of the polygon of the opening.
7. When finished, close the function:
a. either by pressing [Esc] key,
b. or via right mouse button’s pop-up menu and its function End of command.

167
Reference Guide

Import of a general cross-section

Not only a structure itself, but also a cross-section shape can be imported from DWG/DXF files.
The editor of a general cross-section can be opened via the Cross-section manager. Use function New cross-
section > General cross-section.

Procedure to import the shape of a cross-section from DWG/DXF file

1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Start function New.
3. Select General.
4. The Cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
5. Double click function Import DXF/DWG.
6. Browse for the file to be imported.
7. The import dialogue is opened on the screen.
8. Make necessary adjustments and/or actions (see below for the meaning of dialogue controls).
9. Complete the action of the import usng buttons [Import selected] or [Import all].

Layers
This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are
shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.
Entity types
This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import
dialogue.
Selection mode
Thin walled The selected lines are imported as a thin-walled section.
Polygons The selected lines are imported as a polygonal cross-section.

168
 Cross-sections

Polygonal openings The selected lines are imported as a polygonal opening in the
cross-section.
Scale
The scale for the import. It may be necessary when the drawing is not in SI units. The item provides for the
transformation from "imaginary" units of the DWG/DXF file and metres (used in ESA PT as the basic unit).
Sizes
This is an informative item, which shows the dimensions calculated from the input scale.
Connect single curves to closed polygon
The following procedure merges individual lines of the drawing into polygon
Press [Select curves].
Select lines to be inserted into the polygon.
Press [Connect curves].
Repeat as many times as required.
Press [End]
Preview window
The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard ESA PT mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated,
zoomed in/out).

Adjusting the properties

Properties of the final general cross-section
The final general cross-section has a set of properties that may be adjusted by the user.
Name Specifies the name of the cross-section
Buckling y-y Buckling length related to y-y axis.
Buckling z-z Buckling length related to z-z axis
Fabrication Type of fabrication of the section.
Display final If ON, the shape of the area of the section is drawn as filled.
shape If OFF, only the contour of the section is drawn.
See example below.
Refresh Regardless of the adjustment of the parameter above, displays
temporarily the final shape of the section.

Example
Final shape ON

169
Reference Guide

Final shape OFF

Properties of the partial cross-section

Each partial section of a general cross-section has several parameters that may (but also may not) be adjusted
independently on other parts of the general cross-section. For example, individual partial sections may be
made of different material or they may be subject to different level of corrosion, etc.
The parameters are:
Material This parameter specifies the material the part is made of.
Corrosion Here, the user may define that the partial section has been exposed to
the elements and has been "weakened" due to corrosion.
Phase The partial section may belong to a particular phase (or stage) of the
construction process.
Overlap If two partial sections overlap, this parameter says which of the two
parts is of higher priority and should be taken as the leading part. The
other part is then cut accordingly (see the example below).

Corrosion example
If corrosion is defined, the corresponding partial cross-section is drawn with a dashed line next to the outline of
the section. The dashed line shows the corroded part of the section. Sectional characteristics are automatically
calculated from the part of the section that has NOT corroded.

Overlap example
Let’s assume a general cross-section consisting of two overlapping partial sections: (i) a square and (ii) a
triangle.

170
 Cross-sections

The square is made of concrete (will be drawn in grey colour), the triangle of steel (will be drawn in blue).
First, let’s set the overlap for the square to 1 and let the overlap for the triangle on the default value equal to
zero.
The square is of higher priority, its shape is taken as the leading one, and a part of the triangle is automatically
cut off.

Second, if the overlap priorities are swapped, i.e. the overlap for the square is set to 0 and the overlap for the
triangle is set to 1, the result will be the opposite. The triangle will remain unaffected and a part of the square
will be removed from the final cross-section.

Modifying the existing general cross-section

Modifying the properties of the whole cross-section
The properties of a general cross-section can be edited in two ways. First, they may be changed directly in the
Editing dialogue of the cross-section. Second, it is possible to change them in the General cross-section editor.

171
Reference Guide

Editing dialogue
Procedure for changing the properties in the editing dialogue
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the cross-section to be modified.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. On its right hand side there is a list of sectional properties.
6. The first three groups may be edited here – see below for details.
7. Change the required parameters.
8. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].
9. Close the Cross-section manager.
Parameters that may be changed in the editing dialogue:

Name Specifies the name of the cross-section

Mat 1, 2, etc. Materials used in the general cross-section. There may be one or more
materials defined in one general cross-section.
Colour Colour of the section.
It is applied when colours by cross-section are adjusted in the
graphical window of SCIA.ESA PT.
Buckling y-y Buckling length related to y-y axis.
Buckling z-z Buckling length related to z-z axis.
Fabrication Type of fabrication of the section.

General cross-section editor

Procedure for changing the properties in the editor
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the cross-section to be modified.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Click button [Edit] located in the property table.
6. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
7. On its left hand side there is a list of sectional properties.
8. Change the required parameters.
9. Close the editor.
10. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].
11. Close the Cross-section manager.
Parameters that may be changed in the editor are described in chapter Properties of the final general cross-
section.

172
 Cross-sections

Modifying the properties of a partial cross-section

Properties of a partial section of a general cross-section may be edited in the General cross-section editor.
Procedure for changing the properties of a partial section
1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Select the cross-section to be modified.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Click button [Edit] located in the property table.
6. The General cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
7. Select the part of the general cross-section to be edited.
8. On its left hand side there is a list of sectional properties.
9. Change the required parameters.
10. If required, clear the selection and modify other parts of the cross-section.
11. Close the editor.
12. Close the editing dialogue via button [OK].
13. Close the Cross-section manager.

Note: For library cross-sections, the parameters that may be changed in the editor depend on
the type of the section. For example, the depth and width will be offered in the property table for
rectangular concrete section, while the selection of a different size or type will be available for rolled
cross-section.

Changing the geometry of the general cross-section

Any part of the general cross-section may be treated the same way as a standard geometric entity in the main
SCIA.ESA PT environment.
The cross-section as a whole or any of its parts may be:
 moved to a new location,
 copied,
 rotated,
 mirrored,
 enlarged to the given scale,
 trimmed,
 stretched.
The application of above-mentioned functions is the same as the application of corresponding functions in the
main SCIA.ESA PT environment.

Changing the geometry of a partial section

The geometry modification functions applicable to the whole cross-section (see chapter Changing the
geometry of the general cross-section) are also available for any of the partial sections.
In addition, polygon-editing functions are available for thin-walled and polygonal sections. These are:
Insert node into This functions enables the user to add a new intermediate vertex to the
polyline outline or midline, respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-
walled section.
Delete node This function removes the selected node from the outline or midline,
from polyline respectively, of an already defined solid or thin-walled section.

Further, co-ordinates of vertices of both polygonal outline of a solid section and midline of a thin-walled section
can be manually edited in the property table. The user just has to select the required node (or nodes) and
retype the appropriate co-ordinate in the property table.

173
Reference Guide

Finally, for library sections, the property table provides for the modification of the:
 insertion point (which leads to a change of the position of the section within the general cross-
section).
 rotation.

Note: All the available modification functions and procedures may be freely combined for any of
the partial sections in order to achieve the required final shape and dimension of the overall general
cross-section.

Defining a parametric cross-section

Introduction to the parametric cross-section
Sometimes it may be useful to define the general cross-section not by direct definition of its dimensions, partial
section types, etc., but by means of parameters. The parameters may be later easily modified and thus the
shape and/or dimension of the general cross-section may be changed.

Note: For more information on parameters see chapter Advanced tools > Parametric input >
Using the parameters in the project of the main Reference manual of SCIA.ESA PT.

Defining a new parameter

The procedure to define a new parameter
1. In General cross-section editor, open tree menu function Parameter.
2. The Parameters manager opens on the screen.
3. Define the required parameters and set their type and values.
4. Close the Parameters manager.
5. It is now possible to assign the defined parameters to appropriate dimensions.

Assigning the parameters

The procedure to assign the defined parameter
1. Input the cross-section in usual way.
2. Define the parameters.
3. Select the node (vertex) whose position should be defined by means of "length" parameter.
4. In the property table of the node, select the appropriate parameter.
5. Repeat for other nodes.
6. If applicable, select the rolled cross-section whose size and type is to be defined via parameter.
7. In the property table of the node, replace the type by the appropriate parameter.
8. Repeat for other rolled cross-sections.
9. Close the General cross-section editor.

Note 1: Whenever the value of parameters is changed, the corresponding cross-section is

reshaped accordingly.
Note 2: What’s more, the parameters appear in the editing dialogue of the cross-section.
Therefore, it is easy to change the cross-section section without necessity to open the General
cross-section editor.

Example of parameterised cross-section

Let’s create a simple rectangular cross-section with two circular openings. Further, let’s edit this section and
make it parameterised.

Note: The dimensions stated in this example are in metres. Generally, be careful with units when
defining new parameters.

174
 Cross-sections

First of all, define the section in usual way. Input the bottom left corner of the section to the origin of the global
co-ordinate system (This is not a general condition, but it is assumed in our example).

Then, define the necessary parameters:

Parameter Type Evaluation Value / Formula
H Css length Value 0.6
B Css length Value 1.0
H1 Css length Formula H * 0.5
D Css length Value 0.25
D1 Css length Formula H1 + D / 2
B1 Css length Formula B/3
B2 Css length Formula B/3*2

Further, assign the parameters to appropriate points of the defined cross-section.

Select the top left corner of the rectangle (see below).

In the property table set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H (see below).

Clear the selection. Select the top right corner and set the global Z co-ordinate to parameter H and the global
Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see below).

175
Reference Guide

Z = H; Y = B

Clear the selection. Select the bottom right corner and set the global Y co-ordinate to parameter B (see below).

Y=B

Clear the selection. Select the centre of the left circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-ordinates to
parameter B1 and H1 respectively (see below).

Z = H1; Y = B1

Clear the selection. Select the centre of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-ordinates to
parameter B2 and H1 respectively (see below).

176
 Cross-sections

Z = H1; Y = B2

Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the left circular opening and adjust its global Y and Z co-
ordinates to parameter B1 and D1 respectively (see below).

Z = D1; Y = B1

Clear the selection. Select the top most point of the right circular opening and adjust the global Y and Z co-
ordinates to parameter B2 and D1 respectively (see below).

Z = D1; Y = B2

Close the General cross-section editor. In the editing dialogue, you can see the three Value-type
parameters B, H, D that fully define the cross-section’s dimensions (see below).

177
Reference Guide

The same parameters may be reviewed, though not changed, in the Cross-section manager (see below).

Any time in the future, you may edit these three values and reshape the cross-section.
It may also be convenient to make copy or copies of this cross-section and create a set of cross-sections of
different size.

178
 Cross-sections

What’s more, dimension lines may be added to the cross-section. If provided with proper labels they may
significantly improve the clearness of the parameters (see below).

An example of the "D" dimension line is in the figure below (see the parameter values on the left).

Appendix
Library cross-sections
List of cross-sections available in ESA PT cross-section library is given in a separate book.

179
Geometry
Elements of a model
A model of a structure consists of many parts or elements. Some of them form the geometry of the model and
some of them define other properties of the structure or define effects that the structure is subject to.
node Primarily, it represents an end-point of a beam member. It also
defines the point where finite element node will be placed. In
addition, it may define a place where two beam members touch
or intersect each other.
beam A beam member represents a beam member that the real
structure consists of. Beam in the model may represent a
whole set of structural members such as a column, joist, tie
beam, rafter, strip foundation, etc.
plate, wall Plates and walls model slabs and load bearing walls ob the
analysed structure. Both entity types may contain openings or
subregions. Before calculation the finite element mesh is
generated on them.
rigid connection of If two beam members have a common end point, the
beams connection of the beam members in this point (or node) is
normally rigid. Also, if any two members that intersect each
other are told to be connected (via a linked node), the
connection is rigid by default.
connection of beams The parameters of any connection of two beam members can
with defined non-rigid be adjusted in a way so that the connection corresponds to the
properties practical solution of the detail. That means that the degrees of
freedom in the connection may be altered and the connection
in any direction (concerning both translation and rotation) may
be either rigid or free or anything in between (i.e. elastic).
load A structure does not exist on its own; it is subject to multiple
effects of various load types. All the load types that can be
applied on the model in SCIA.ESA PT are described in a
separate chapter.
support A structure itself must be somehow supported, as the supports
must, in the end, bear the entire load applied on the structure.
The applicable support types are described in separate
chapters.
mass Masses are used in connection with dynamic calculation to
define the "dynamic" properties of the structure.
Structural shape The shape of structure that is not considered during
calculations, but is used for preparation of drawings and design
of connections.

Nodes
Introduction to nodes
The term "node" is a common finite element method term. However, when talking about SCIA.ESA PT
program, we have to make a strict definition of what the word "node" means in the context of this software.
First of all, we have to distinguish between a standard finite element node and an ESA node. The two node
types have something in common, but there are also some differences.
FE node
A standard finite element node will be always referred to as an "FE node". Normally, the user will not
encounter this type of node when creating a model of a structure. The FE nodes must be dealt with just before
the calculation of the project, and usually only in special cases. For common projects, the user can rely totally
on the automatic finite element mesh generator integrated in the SCIA.ESA PT program.

181
Reference Guide

Node
The word "node" will be used to talk about ESA nodes – i.e. about nodes (or points, if you prefer) that the user
deals with.
A node is the simplest entity applied in SCIA.ESA PT program. A node is the basic element. The nodes define
other entity types. For example, a beam member is defined primarily by its two end-points that are nothing else
but two nodes.
Each node has got some properties including:
 position in modelling space (i.e. co-ordinates),
 nodal co-ordinate system (used to define the direction of direction-related properties such as
degrees of freedom).
Each node may belong to just one beam member or to as many beam members as required. If a node belongs
to several beam members, the beam members are mutually connected in such a node and internal forces from
one beam member are transferred into the other beam members. If required, special boundary conditions can
be defined for the connection and thus only some of the internal forces (e.g. only bending moments or shear
forces) may be transferred into the adjacent entities.
What the node and FE node have in common is that both are a proper finite element node. That means that
the finite element mesh generator will ALWAYS place an FE node into an ESA node. On the other hand, the
generator may add some more FE nodes in between the user-defined ESA nodes, in order to ensure that the
finite element mesh corresponds with the required fineness.
There are several types of nodes depending on their "relation" to the beam member they are part of.

Types of nodes
SCIA.ESA PT recognises primarily two types of nodes:
 an absolute node,
 a linked node.
It is important to understand the differences between the two types as the type of node can have a significant
influence on the model properties and behaviour and it also affects functions used for the modification of model
geometry.
Absolute node
An absolute node is defined by its "absolute" position, or we can say absolute co-ordinates, in space.
An absolute node is used to define end-points of members (e.g. beam members).
Linked node
A linked node is usually defined by its position, or we can say relative co-ordinate, on a beam member.
As the term "linked" suggests, a linked node is used to "link" two entities together.
On the screen, a linked node is marked by a unique graphical symbol. The linked node mark looks like a pair
of short parallel lines drawn in a node.
Difference between absolute and linked node
In order to show an example, let’s assume a simple plane frame consisting of two vertical columns and a
horizontal beam connecting heads of the two columns with a short cantilever on one side.

Column B1 has two end-nodes N1 and N2. Both nodes are absolute.
Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. Node N3 is absolute, node N4 is linked and is bound (linked) to
beam B3.

182
 Geometry

Horizontal beam B3 has three nodes N2, N4, and N5. Nodes N2 and N5 are absolute. Node N4 is linked is
related to beam B3.
The linked node N4 guarantees that column B2 is connected to beam B3 and that internal forces in any of the
two beam beam members are transferred into the other one. This configuration represents the state usually
required in practice.
To demonstrate what happens if the linked node is not applied, let’s consider the sample structure as shown in
the following figure.

The structure here is very similar to the previous one. However, there exists a seemingly small difference and
the difference leads to significant consequences.
Column B2 has two end-nodes N3 and N4. And both nodes are absolute.
Horizontal beam B3 has just two end-nodes N2 and N5 which are both absolute.
Because there is no node lying on horizontal beam B3 in the place where column B2 intersects with this
horizontal beam, the two beam members do not have a single common node and are not connected to each
other. Both the beam members would act as separate structures and not as a single column-beam unit.
The differences between the two node types concerning modification functions (such as move, rotate, etc.) are
given in chapters describing the modification functions.

Defining a new node

Even though SCIA.ESA PT knows the entity "node" and uses it for various purposes (mainly related to the
definition of structure model), nodes themselves are not defined as separate and self-standing entities. A new
node can only be defined as an integral part of a new beam member. It is not possible to define an
independent and self-standing node.
On the other hand, it is possible that, thanks to various geometric manipulations, some nodes become self-
standing. This may occur after a node looses its relation to the beam member, for example due to the deletion
of the beam member. Such nodes are called free nodes and have no specific purpose in the project.
Therefore, SCIA.ESA PT offers tools for their removal (see chapter Deleting the nodes).

Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node

The procedure for the definition of a local co-ordinate system of a node
1. Use the UCS Manager to create a new user co-ordinate system. Define the co-ordinate system in
such a way so that its axes are oriented in the direction required for the orientation of the local co-
ordinate system of the nodes.
2. Make sure that no entities are selected. If necessary, clear the selection.
3. Select the node (or nodes) where the local co-ordinate system should be applied.
4. In the property dialogue (that opens in the property window) tick option LCS.
5. The dialogue then offers a list of defined user co-ordinate systems.
6. Select the UCS that is adequate for the selected nodes. That means the UCS whose axes are
oriented in direction of the intended local co-ordinate system of the node or nodes.
7. Clear the selection

183
Reference Guide

Deleting the nodes

Nodes, similarly to other entities, may be deleted if they are no longer necessary. On the other hand, one must
be aware that there are some conditions that must be met so that the program can perform the deletion of
node.
First, it is not possible to delete a node that relates to any entity. For example, it is not possible to delete the
end-point (i.e. node) of an existing beam member. If this should really be done, the relating entity must be
deleted together with the node or nodes. Therefore, it is possible to delete a beam member and two nodes that
are the beam member end-points.
Second, if it happens and some nodes are free nodes (i.e. do not relate to any entity), it is possible to remove
such nodes.
Deletion of proper nodes (nodes that relate to beam members)
Procedure for deletion of nodes
1. Select the nodes that are supposed to be deleted.
2. Select also the entities that the selected nodes relate to.
3. Call function Delete:
a. either: open menu function Modify > Delete,
b. or: use window pop-up menu function Delete,
c. or: press key Del.
4. Confirm the question box (or question boxes).
Deletion of free nodes
Free nodes (if they occur in a project) can be deleted either manually or automatically
Procedure for manual removal of free nodes
1. Select any free nodes that should be deleted.
2. Call function Delete:
a. either: start menu function Modify > Delete,
b. or: start window pop-up menu function Delete,
c. or: press key Del.
3. Confirm the question box (or question boxes).
Procedure for automatic removal of free nodes
1. Start function Check structure data.
a. either: use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data,
b. or: start tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data.
2. Make sure that option Search free nodes is ticked.
3. Press button [Check].
4. Check the upper right part of the dialogue and verify whether any free nodes have been discovered.
5. If so, make sure that option Delete free nodes is selected.
6. Press button [Continue] to delete the revealed free nodes.

Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation > Check
of data.

If the user is not sure whether there are any free nodes in his/her project, it is always possible to use the
second approach because it means that the program automatically finds any free nodes in the project and
informs the user about the findings. The user then may decide whether the discovered free nodes should be
deleted or kept.

Beams
Introduction to beams
From the definition point of view, beam members used in SCIA.ESA PT can be divided into several types
concerning their orientation (vertical, horizontal, etc.) or cross-section (constant, variable). In addition, there

184
 Geometry

exists another division taking account of the function of beam members or their position in the structure (see
chapter Structural model)
Regardless of the type, each beam member is primarily defined by its two end-points and by a set of
properties. The properties can be defined in advance (i.e. before the beam member is inserted into the
modelled structure) or afterwards. Once a beam member is inserted, it is not bound to its position forever. If
required, it can be moved to another location, rotated, prolonged, shortened or adjusted in any other way to
correspond with the changing demands. Also its properties such as material, cross-section, type of transmitted
internal forces, etc. can be modified any time and as many times as required.
There are two criterions concerning the definition of beam members:
 Which type of beam member can be inserted (defined) directly in one-step action.
 Which type of beam member can be defined via additional adjustment of appropriate properties on
already inserted (defined) beam members.
Types of directly defined beams
general beam This beam type can represent an arbitrarily oriented and
located beam member.
column This type represents a vertical column.
horizontal beam This type represents a horizontally oriented beam member.

What all the above-mentioned beam types have in common is that they have a constant cross-section.
Types of beams defined as a "property" of existing beams
haunch beam A haunch beam is a beam of a linearly variable cross-section.
The change of cross-section may extend from one end point to
the other end point, or from one end point to an intermediate
point lying on the beam member. The cross-section on both
ends of a haunch must be of the same shape (e.g. rectangular,
solid I-section, etc.).
beam of variable cross- A beam member of this type can consist of multiple intervals
section (arbitrary each of which can be of different cross-section, material, and
beam) other properties.

Common beam parameters

Some of beam member parameters that define the properties of a beam member are common for all beam
types.
Name A name of the beam member.
Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a beam
member but may take effect later. For example, some functions
performing design and check to technical standards take
account of the type.
Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a beam member
and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one
of cross-section properties).
Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the
inserted beam member around the longitudinal axis of the
beam member.
Member system line at The beam member is inserted by means of two insertion
points. This property item determines the position of the
insertion points on the cross-section of the beam member.
Eccentricity ey, ez The eccentricity is similar to the previous feature. However,
while the Insertion point item only allows for positions of the
insertion point in certain characteristic points of the cross-
section, the Eccentricity provides for an arbitrary position of
the insertion point.
LCS - local co-ordinate This item specifies the way the local axes of the beam member
system of the beam are determined.

185
Reference Guide

LCS Rotation This value defines the rotation of local axes of the beam
member. The rotation is measured around the beam member
longitudinal axis, i.e. X-axis.
FEM type This item says which type of finite element will be used for the
beam member.
Buckling length Buckling length for individual directions may be specified on
each beam member. For more information see chapter
Buckling parameters.
Layer Any entity including a beam member can be put into a layer.
The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in
common (e.g. one floor, columns of one floor, columns of the
same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they
can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the
structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

Name
The name is used mainly for a unique identification of beam members (or all entities in general). The name can
be displayed on a screen, printed in output documents, used for selections, etc. For example, the name
together with an advanced feature of the program command-line can be used for very fast multiple selection of
all beam members whose name starts with the same letter or letters (e.g. SEL B1? selects all beam members
whose name consists of letter B and a number within the range from 10 to 19).
The name is typed as a simple text.
Type
The type is not very important for the very act of beam member insertion (or definition). The beam type has
also no effect on calculation of deflections and internal forces.
However, if one thinks about further analysis and evaluation of the structure in design (code check) modules
and if one wants to perform detailing works (e.g. define lattice girder connections), the beam type must be set
properly. Especially the module for design and checking of connections uses the type as a crucial piece of
information.
The required type can be selected from a list of available options.
Cross-section
The beam member shape is defined by the selected cross-section type. Beams of "general beam", "column"
and "horizontal beam" type have got a constant cross section over their length. On the other hand, "haunch
beams" and "arbitrary beams" can have the cross section variable along the longitudinal axis.
The orientation of the cross-section in the beam member local co-ordinate system can be adjusted via angle
Alpha (see below).
The appropriate cross-section can be:
 either selected from a list of already defined cross-sections,
 or defined as a new cross-section in the project via the [Cross-section manager] button.
Alpha
This parameters defines the inclination of the cross-section Z-axis from the beam local Z-axis. This parameter
together with "LCS rotation" provide for an arbitrary "positioning" of a cross-section in a model.
The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding table
cell.
Member system line at
By default, a beam member is inserted into the model by the end points of its midline. The user, however, may
decide to insert the beam member by any of outer corners of the beam member cross-section. This option is
useful when an eccentricity is to be introduced and it coincides with the outer dimensions of the cross-section.
The required Insertion point can be selected from a list of available option.
Eccentricity
If required, an eccentricity may be input in order to provide for more precise definition of structure shape. The
eccentricity is defined in the definition axes of the cross-section.
The eccentricity is defined by two values: eccentricity in Y-direction and eccentricity in Z-direction. Both values
are input into the appropriate table cells in units that have been pre-adjusted in project settings and that are
shown in square brackets in the table cells.

186
 Geometry

Tip: If the eccentricity value is such that the "eccentric insertion point" coincides with an outer
corner of the cross-section, the eccentricity may be defined simply by means of the "Insertion point"
parameter (see above).
Local co-ordinate system (LCS)
Each beam member has got its local co-ordinate system. The user can define the orientation of the system’s Y
and Z axes. There are several options:
 to accept the default standard setting
 to define the orientation of Y-axis either by a vector or by a point that the axis passes through,
 to define the orientation of Z-axis either by a vector or by a point that the axis passes through.
 to specify that the beam member local Z-axis is parallel to the Z-axis of the current UCS.
LCS rotation
Sometimes it may be convenient to rotate the local co-ordinate system. For example, if the user wants to
define some load acting in a general direction and introduce it in beam member local co-ordinate axes.
The angle defines the rotation of the local co-ordinate system around the X-axis of the same system.
The angle is input in the pre-adjusted angle unit that is shown in square brackets in the corresponding table
cell.
FEM type
From the finite element analysis point of view, the beam member can act like a standard beam member or like
a hinged (pinned) rod. The difference is that the standard beam member is capable of transferring all the
internal forces, while the latter variant only provides for transferring of the axial force.
The required option can be selected from a provided list.
Layer
Each beam member can be "put into" a specific layer. The layer, that could be called group, thus can comprise
such beam members that will be in the future treated simultaneously. A good and well thought out grouping of
beam members in layers can significantly facilitate the manipulation with the model, including even the
evaluation of results. And what’s more, a professional use of layers may save a lot of the user’s valuable time.
The required layer may be selected from a list of already defined layers. Or, a new layer may be defined for the
beam member.

Buckling parameters
Buckling parameters are described in detail in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters > Code
independent buckling parameters
and in chapter related to individual national codes.
Additional information can be found in Book Steel Code Check chapter Buckling parameters > Buckling
parameters related to a particular standard.
For adjustment of buckling parameters see chapter Adjusting the buckling parameters.

Beam types
General beam
A general beam member has got only the common beam parameters. Once these parameters are specified,
the beam member may be inserted into the model.
In order to insert a new general beam member into a model of the structure that is being analysed, you just
follow the general procedure for the definition of a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the specification
of beam member’s position. A general beam member is defined by its two end-points (or we can say nodes).
Therefore, the beam member position must be specified by insertion of two points: first, the starting or begin
point and then the end point.

187
Reference Guide

Column
A column is an always vertical beam member of a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam
parameters, it has the following properties:
Length This parameter says what is the length (height) of the inserted
column.
Insertion point This option specifies which of the two column end-points is
considered as the base (or insertion) point.

In order to insert a new column into a model of the structure, the general procedure for the definition of a new
beam should be followed. Attention must only be paid to the specification of beam member position. A column
is defined by its base point (starting point) only. Therefore, the beam member position must be specified by
insertion of a single point.

Note: The statement that the column is always vertical is related to the user co-ordinate system.
Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even horizontal, a column
defined in this UCS will not be vertical from the global co-ordinate system’s point of view. It will
vertical in the context of the current UCS.

188
 Geometry

Horizontal beam
A horizontal beam is always horizontal and has a constant cross-section. In addition to common beam
parameters, beam has the following properties:
Direction A horizontal beam may be oriented either along the global X-
axis or global Y-axis.
Length This parameter says what is the length of the inserted beam.
Insertion point This option specifies which of the two beam end-points is
considered as the insertion point.

In order to insert a new horizontal beam into a model, you just follow the general procedure for the definition of
a new beam. Attention must only be paid to the specification of beam’s position. A horizontal beam’s position is
specified by insertion of a single point that determines the location of the adjusted insertion point.

Note: The statement that the horizontal beam is always horizontal is related to the user co-
ordinate system. Therefore, if the user defines such a UCS whose Z-axis is inclined or even
horizontal, a horizontal beam defined in this UCS will not be horizontal from the global co-ordinate
system’s point of view. It will horizontal in the context of the current UCS.

Haunch beam
A haunch beam is a beam member whose cross-section varies along the length of the beam member. It is also
possible that a part of the beam member is of a constant cross-section and only the remaining part contains a
haunch.
Therefore, the list of haunch beam parameters may be rather long. It contains the following items:
Haunch placement Specifies the location of the haunch on the beam member.
Cross-section Tells which cross-section will be used to form the haunch. (see
Note below ! )
List of dimensions that This list contains the dimension of the assigned cross-section
can vary along the that may vary along the haunch length.
haunch length
Alignment Specifies the alignment of the haunch.
Length of haunch Determines the length of the haunch.
This item is not accessible if the haunch is defined per the
whole beam member, i.e. from one beam member end to the
other.

189
Reference Guide

Co-ordinate definition Tells if the haunch length is input in relative beam member co-
ordinate (i.e. from zero to one) or in absolute values (i.e. for
example in metres).
This item is not accessible if the haunch is defined per the
whole beam member, i.e. from one beam member end to the
other.

Haunch placement
The variants for the placement are:
From start The haunch starts at the
starting point of the beam
member and its length is
determined by the value input
in cell Length of haunch.

From end The haunch starts at the end

point of the beam member
and its length is determined
by the value input in cell
Length of haunch.

Symmetrical The haunch is located at both

ends of the beam member its
length is determined by the
value input in cell Length of
haunch.

From start – The cross-section varies

whole length along the whole beam
member length. The haunch
starts at the starting point of
the beam member.

190
 Geometry

From end – The cross-section varies

whole length along the whole beam
member length. The haunch
starts at the end point of the
beam member.

Symmetrical The haunch is at both sides

– whole of the beam member, is
length symmetrical and extends
from each of the beam
member ends towards the
beam member centre.

Cross-section
The cross-section defined here replaces the original cross-section of the beam member on which the haunch
is defined. That means that the original beam member cross-section can be of any type. When a haunch is
defined on a beam member, the original cross-section is completely forgotten and the haunch cross-section is
applied.
Examples
A haunch on a basic cross-section of I shape with the height equal to 300 millimetres and top flange thickness
50 millimetres.
Height of haunch Shape of haunch
H = 500 mm

H = 1000 mm

H = 1000 mm
and
top flange thickness
increased to 200 mm

Note: It is important to be aware of the fact that only specific cross-sections can be used for
haunches. For example, it is not possible to use a rolled cross-section as it not possible to change
its height over the length of a beam member.

List of dimensions that can vary along the haunch length

The cross-section defined for a haunch can vary in size along the haunch length. However, not all the possible
dimensions of the cross-section can vary. The list of dimensions that may be variable is limited and is stated in

191
Reference Guide

the haunch property dialogue. What’s more, these dimensions are highlighted in yellow both in the haunch
property dialogue and in the cross-section editing dialogue.
Thanks to the "highlighted" dimensions the cross-section changes linearly its shape along the haunch. The
haunch starts with the cross-section specified by the "highlighted" values. And at the end of the haunch there
is the cross-section of standard dimensions as defined in the Cross-section manager.
Alignment
The alignment of the haunch may be of several types.
In order to explain clearly the meaning of individual option, let’s assume a horizontal beam member with a
haunch whose cross-section is of variable height as well as of variable width.
Default The alignment of the haunch is
adjusted according to the
Insertion point of the beam
member. E.g. if the Insertion
point of the beam member is set
to Top, Top surface alignment of
the haunch is used.
Centre In plan view as well as in side
line view the midline of the beam
member remains straight and
horizontal. Both left and right
surface are inclined to allow the
cross-section change its width.
The centre line of the beam
member (i.e. the centroid axis) of
side view the beam member remains
straight. Both top and bottom
surface are symmetrically
inclined to allow the cross-section
change its height.

plan view
Top The top surface of the beam
surface member remains flat and
horizontal. The bottom surface is
inclined in order to provide for the
change of the height.
In plan view, the midline of the
beam member is straight. Both
side view left and right surface are
symmetrically inclined to allow
the cross-section change its
width.
Bottom The bottom surface of the beam
surface member remains flat and
horizontal. The top surface is
inclined in order to provide for the
change of the height.
In plan view, the midline of the
beam member is straight. Both
side view left and right surface are
symmetrically inclined to allow
the cross-section change its
width.

192
 Geometry

Left The left surface of the beam

surface member remains flat and
horizontal. The right surface is
inclined in order to provide for the
change of the width.
In side view, the midline of the
beam member is straight. Both
plan view top and bottom surface are
symmetrically inclined to allow
the cross-section change its
height.
Right The right surface of the beam
surface member remains flat and
horizontal. The left surface is
inclined in order to provide for the
change of the width.
In side view, the midline of the
beam member is straight. Both
plan view top and bottom surface are
symmetrically inclined to allow
the cross-section change its
height.

Beam of a variable cross-section

SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to define a beam member whose cross-section varies arbitrarily along the beam
member length.
Beam member of arbitrarily variable cross-section can be divided into segments called spans. Each span has
got specific properties that are absolutely independent on the properties of adjacent spans.
Coordinate definition Specifies whether individual spans will be defined in absolute
or relative co-ordinates. See note below.
Length Defines the length of the span.
Type of cross-section Specifies how the cross-section of the span varies.
Cross-section or This option depends on the previous one. In general, it defines
cross-sections the cross-section of the span.

Alignment The alignment is identical to the alignment of a haunch.

Tip: The individual spans can be of different cross-section. And as material is a parameter of
cross-section, it is possible that the individual spans are of different material.

Note: When spans are defined in absolute coordinates, one must be careful to "cover" the whole
length of the beam member. Otherwise, the "span-profiles" cover only part of the original length of
the beam member. Or, if the sum of the spans exceeds the length of the beam member, spans
overlapping the original length of the beam member are ignored, in other words, the arbitrary beam
is simply cut at the length of the original beam member.
Type of cross-section
The cross-section of the span and its change can be defines in several ways.
Prismatic The cross-section of the span is constant.
Parametric haunch A standard haunch is inserted into the span.
Two cross-sections Two cross-sections corresponding to the two end-points of the
span are defined. The cross-section varies over the span from
one section to the other.

Cross-section / Cross-sections
For prismatic cross-section, this item offers the selection of just one required cross-section.

193
Reference Guide

For parametric haunch, two cross-sections must be specified. However, both of are based on one base
cross-section. The user can specify parameters of the two end-sections. Each of the end-sections may be
either identical with the base cross-section, or changes of the base cross-section dimensions can be specified.
If the "two cross-sections" option is chosen, the user just selects two end cross-sections.
Example

The beam member defined in the property table above looks like:

Defining a new beam

Inserting a new beam
When inserting a new beam member into a model the user must distinguish between two situations:
 insertion of a general beam member or column or horizontal beam,

194
 Geometry

 insertion of a beam member that has got a variable cross-section (either haunch or generally
variable cross-section).
The first situation means a real insertion of a new beam member into the model. The latter means that
appropriate properties are defined on already an existing beam member in the model. The procedures for the
definition of a "haunch" beam and a beam with a variable cross-section are given in separate chapters.
The principle of the procedure for insertion of a new beam member is identical for both a general beam
member and a column and a horizontal beam. It is clear that there are some differences between the individual
beam types, and therefore there must be slight differences also in the defining procedure. However, the
differences are so small that a united procedure may be presented here and the differences discussed in
chapters dealing with appropriate beam type.
Procedure for insertion of a beam
1. In the main tree menu, select and open service Structure. (As an alternative, service Structure
may also be opened via its toolbar button or via the menu function).
2. In the Structure service, open the appropriate function according to beam member type you want to
insert.
3. Fill in the displayed dialogue, i.e. define the properties of the beam member(s) you want to define in
the next step.
4. Confirm the property dialogue by pressing [OK] button.
5. Define the position of the beam member (using a mouse and any of available snap mode options or
by typing the co-ordinates on the command line). This point varies according to the selected beam
type (see General beam, Column, or Horizontal beam chapter).
6. The beam member has been inserted.
7. Either (i) close the function or (ii) insert another beam member, i.e. repeat steps 5 and 6.
8. Close the Structure service.

Inserting a new beam of a complex axis shape

Real structures are very often composed of members whose longitudinal axes are not straight-line segments.
SCIA.ESA PT enables the users to draw almost any shape they may find in architectural sketches.
The principle for the insertion of a non-straight beam member remains the same as for a straight one (i.e.
general beam). The only difference is in the definition of the endpoints of the beam member.
The procedure for the insertion of a polygonal beam member
1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the beam member do the following:
2. Click button [New polyline] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets
into the "point definition mode".
3. Enter the vertices of the polygon one after another.
4. Press [Esc] key to finish the definition of the polygon.
5. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a beam member, i.e. close the function or
service.
The procedure for the insertion of a circular arc beam member
1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the beam member do the following:
2. Click button [New arc] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets into
the "point definition mode".
3. Enter the starting point of the arc.
4. Enter the intermediate point of the arc.
5. Enter the end point of the arc.
6. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a beam member, i.e. close the function or
service.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse
cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the
video pop-up menu and select function Play.
The procedure for the definition of a Bezier-curve beam
1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the beam member do the following:

195
Reference Guide

2. Click button [New Bezier] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets
into the "point definition mode".
3. Enter the starting point of the curve.
4. Enter the end point of the arc.
nd
5. Enter the 2 control point of the curve.
rd
6. Enter the 3 control point of the curve.
7. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a beam member, i.e. close the function or
service.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.
The procedure for the definition of a parabolic-curve beam member
1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the beam member do the following:
2. Click button [New parabolic arc] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program
gets into the "point definition mode".
3. Enter the starting point of the curve.
4. Enter the intermediate point of the curve (i.e. the vertex of the parabola).
5. Enter the end point of the curve.
6. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a beam member, i.e. close the function or
service.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.
The procedure for the insertion of a spline-curve beam member
1. When asked to enter the first endpoint of the beam member do the following:
2. Click button [New spline] ( ) that appears just above the command line once the program gets
into the "point definition mode".
3. Enter the vertices of the spline one after another.
4. Press [Esc] key to finish the definition of the spline curve.
5. Then follow the standard procedure for the definition of a beam member, i.e. close the function or
service.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the curve definition procedure.

Note: Please note, that it is possible to enter multiple "shaped" beam members from within one
call of Drawing a member function. You can enter one shape (e.g. polygon), press [Esc] to finish
the definition of the polygon. You however are still "inside" the Drawing a member function.
Therefore, you may for example click [New arc] button, define an arc and again you are still
"inside" the Drawing a member function. This fact can be easily visually verified on the screen. As
far as you are still "inside" the Drawing a member function, the inserted beam members are drawn
in RED colour. Only when you close the Drawing a member function, the beam members are
redrawn in violet colour which means that they are selected.

Defining a haunch on a beam member

A haunch beam is not a special type of beam member in the full meaning of the word. A haunch is in fact a
property that can be assigned to any previously defined beam member. Consequently, the definition of a
haunch beam is always a two-step procedure.
First step is the insertion of the beam member itself (either a general beam or column or horizontal beam). This
is then followed by the specification of parameters defining the haunch.
The procedure for the definition of a haunch
1. Insert the beam member that is supposed to contain a haunch and close the New beam function.
(Unless it has been made earlier).
2. In the tree menu open service Structure.
3. Start function Haunch.
4. Input and select required parameters and properties of the haunch.
5. Confirm the setting with [OK] button.
6. Select the beam member(s) that should contain the haunch.

196
 Geometry

7. Close the function.

8. Close the Structure service.

Note: A standard beam member (i.e. horizontal beam, column or general beam member) is
defined with a specific cross-section. This cross-section is one of the beam’s parameters. However,
when a haunch is defined on this beam member, the haunch defines its own cross-section and
assigns it to the beam member. The original cross-section is overloaded (forgotten for the moment).
However, if the haunch is later deleted, the beam member remains in its position and takes back its
original cross-section.

Defining a beam member with a variable cross-section

Similarly to haunch beam, also this beam type is not a specific type in the full meaning of the word. Once again
it is an advanced property of a beam member. Therefore, the procedure is similar to the definition of a haunch.
The procedure for the definition of a beam member with variable cross-section
1. Insert the beam member that is supposed to contain a haunch and close the "New beam" function.
(Unless it has been made earlier).
2. In the tree menu open service Structure.
3. Start function Arbitrary profile.
4. Define required number of spans.
5. Input and select required parameters and properties of the spans.
6. Confirm the setting with [OK] button.
7. Select the beam member(s) that should be of the specified type.
8. Close the function.
9. Close the Structure service.

Slabs
Slab types
Plate
Parameters
Name Defines the name of the slab.
Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks.
The check procedure applied depends on this
parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection
of proper type.
Material Defines the material of the slab.
FEM model Isotropic
A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions
is used.
Orthotropic
An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal
directions is used.
Membrane
Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the
slab.
Thickness It is possible to input a slab of constant or variable thickness.
See below.
Thickness value For constant thickness, just one thickness value must be
defined.

197
Reference Guide

For variable thickness, two thickness values must be defined.

Variable thickness type If the variable thickness type is selected, the user must specify
the direction in which the thickness varies.
Point 1 Defines the first point used for the definition of variable
thickness.
Point 2 Defines the second point used for the definition of variable
thickness.
Member system-plane The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
at mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.
Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.
LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.
LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily
turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.
LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.
Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Example of a slab

Variable thickness
The variable thickness of a slab can be input in the property table of a slab. Two points must be input to define
the gradient of thickness change. Corresponding thickness values are specified for each point. The adjusted
gradient is related to the global co-ordinate system. It is advisable to input the two points in place where the
thickness change starts and ends. Otherwise it may happen that due to the extrapolation of thickness, the final
thickness value becomes negative, which would result in an error message during the calculation of the
project.
Example of a slab of variable thickness

198
 Geometry

Note: The definition of a slab of variable thickness is a two-step procedure. First, a slab of a
constant thickness must be input. This slab may be then modified and changed into a slab of
variable thickness. The reason is that the "property" of variable thickness is bound to the particular
nodes of the slab that are not yet known in the phase of slab input. In other words, variable
thickness is similar to a haunch on a beam member – it is an additional property of a slab, not the
basic, fundamental parameter.

The effect of LCS Z-axis parameter

Parameter LCS Z-axis controls the direction of local Z-axis of the slab. It should be remembered that the
parameter might affect the direction of load defined in LCS of the slab.
normal orientation

swapped orientation

Wall
Parameters
Name Defines the name of the wall.
Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks.
The check procedure applied depends on this
parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection
of proper type.
Material Defines the material of the wall.
FEM model Isotropic

199
Reference Guide

A normal isotropic wall with identical properties in all directions

is used.
Orthotropic
An orthotropic wall with different properties in two orthogonal
directions is used.
Membrane
Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the
wall.
Thickness The thickness of the wall is always constant.
Thickness value The thickness value must be defined.
Member system-plane The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
at mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.
Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.
LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.
LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily
turned around. This check box does it.
LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.
Layer Selects the layer of the slab.
Height Defines the height of the wall.
Insertion point The wall may be input using its base or its top edge.

The effect of LCS Z-axis parameter

Parameter LCS Z-axis controls the direction of local Z-axis of the wall. It should be remembered that the
parameter might affect the direction of load defined in LCS of the wall. For more information see chapter Plate.

Slab components
Introduction to slab components
There may be a situation that it is convenient to separate a part of a main slab and specify special parameters
for this part. SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to define various types of such a part.
Subregion A subregion is a slab defined inside the main slab. This
subregion may be of different thickness, material, etc. than the
main slab.
For example, a subregion may be useful to define a local
thickening of the slab, to implement area load acting on a part
of the slab only, etc.
Opening An opening is just an opening in the main slab.
Internal edge An internal edge is a line intersecting the main slab. For
example, line load may be defined along this edge.

The number of subregions and opening in the main slab is not limited. Individual subregions and openings may
even overlap the main region or intersect each other. The final shape is found as the intersection of all defined
subregions and openings with the order of definition taken into account.
It is not possible, e.g. to insert a subregion into an opening. However, it is possible to do so if at least one edge
of the subregion lies on any edge of the opening.
On the other hand, it is possible to define a main slab into an opening inserted into another main slab.

Subregion of a slab
Parameters

200
 Geometry

Name Defines the name of the subregion of the slab.

Material Defines the material of the subregion of the slab.
Thickness It is possible to input a slab of constant or variable thickness.
Thickness value For constant thickness, just one thickness value must be
defined.
For variable thickness, two thickness values must be defined.
Variable thickness type If the variable thickness type is selected, the user must specify
the direction in which the thickness varies.
Member system-plane The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
at mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.
Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the subregion of the slab may be
input.

Opening in a slab
Parameters
Name Defines the name of the opening.
2D member Informs about the master plate.

201
Reference Guide

An opening may be input in two ways: (i) as a normal opening that lies fully inside the main slab, (ii) as an
opening that overlaps the main slab – such an opening then serves as a "cut" to the main slab.
normal opening

opening as a
cut – definition
phase

202
 Geometry

opening as a
cut – final
shape

Internal edge in a slab

Parameters
Name Defines the name of the internal edge.

Internal node in a slab

If required, it is possible to define a node inside any slab. This node may be used to attach another entity, for
example.
Example
The following couple of pictures show an example of an internal node. The first picture shows the symbol that
is used to depict an internal node in a slab.

203
Reference Guide

The second picture then shows the tooltip that appears on the screen whenever the mouse cursor passes over
the node.

Rib in the slab

Name Defines the name of the rib.
Type Informs about the type of the entity.
Cross-section Defines the cross-section of the rib.
Alignment Specifies the alignment of the rib:
Bottom
The rib is attached to the bottom of the slab. The eccentricity is
calculated automatically as the sum of the half of slab
thickness and the distance from the bottom slab face to the
centroid of the cross-section.
Top
The rib is attached to the top of the slab. The eccentricity is
calculated automatically as the sum of the half of slab
thickness and the distance from the top slab face to the
centroid of the cross-section.
Centre
Middle axis of the rib and the slab are coincident. The final
eccentricity is equal to zero. The calculation model shows a
partial doubling of stiffness of the (i) slab and (ii) the rib.
Effective width Specifies how the effective width is defined:
Default
The effective width is determined as a multiple of slab width.
The multiple can be defined in Calculation, Mesh > Solver
setup > Number of thicknesses of rib plate.
Width

204
 Geometry

The effective width is explicitly specified. The value can be

input below.
Number of thicknesses
The effective width is determined as a multiple of the thickness.
The multiple can be input below this parameter.
for internal forces Two types of effective width can be input. Both the value are
used for the modelling of composite cross-section. Value "for
internal forces" is used to recalculate internal of the created
composite cross-section section. Value "for check" (see below)
is used to define the cross-section for the needs of design and
check of reinforced cross-section.
Usually, a rectangular section is attached to the slab creating
the final T or L section. However, also other library cross-
sections can be used to form various composite sections (e.g.
steel I section + concrete reinforced plate).
for check See above.
FEM type Defines the type of finite element:
Standard
The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can
transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.
Axial force only
Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of
transferring the axial force only.
Buckling and relative Can be used to specify buckling lengths.
lengths
Layer Specifies the layer of the rib.
2D member Informs about the "associated" slab.

General parameters
Length Tells the length of the rib.
Shape Informs about the shape of the entity.
Beg. node Specifies the starting node of the rib. This parameter can be
edited, which would affect the location and length of the rib.
Before editing, you must find the name of node you want to use
as the beginning node.
End node Similar to above. Defines the end-node of the rib.

Structural model
This set of parameters can be used to specify the structural model of the rib. The structural model is important
especially if drawings and/or impressive pictures of the structure are to be made.
See chapter Geometry > Structural model > Parameters of structural model for more details.

Shell
Introduction to shells
ESA PT enables the user to define curved 2D members – called shells in ESA PT. They are defined by border
lines (i.e. border curves). At the moment ESA PT accepts if the shape of the shell is defined by four, three or
two curves / straight lines.
Some shapes require certain "mathematical imagination" when they are created. Therefore, the basic shapes
has been pre-created in the form of templates and can be easily input through user blocks.
The following pictures present a few samples of what can be created in ESA PT.

205
Reference Guide

206
 Geometry

Shell parameters
Shell parameters
Name Identifies the shell. It is useful e.g. for output tables and for
selections made from the command line.
Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
Note: This type plays role e.g. in code checks.
The check procedure applied depends on this
parameter. Therefore, pay attention to the selection
of proper type.
Material Specifies the material.
FEM model Isotropic
A normal isotropic shell with identical properties in all directions
is used.

207
Reference Guide

Orthotropic
An orthotropic shell with different properties in two orthogonal
directions is used.
Membrane
Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the
shell.
Thickness / Material Thickness is constant in case of shells.
Thickness value Specifies the thickness.
Member system-plane The input-plane (system-plane) of the shell may be in the mid-
at surface of the shell, at the top surface or bottom surface of the
shell.
Eccentricity If required, z-eccentricity of the shell may be input.
LCS Type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.
LCS Z axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the shell may be easily
turned around. This check box does it.
LCS Angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.
Layer Specifies the layer.

Membranes
Prerequisites for membrane elements
Theoretical assumptions
Membrane elements are shell elements with zero flexural stiffness and zero axial compression stiffness.
Prerequisites
In Project settings > Functionality options Nonlinearity > Membrane elements and 2nd order –
geometrical nonlinearity must be selected.
In Calculation, Mesh > Solver Setup the parameter Nonlinearity > Geometrical nonlinearity – 2nd order
must be set to Newton-Raphson method (even the Modified Newton-Raphson is not allowed for this type of
calculation).
Usually the nonlinear calculation must be run in order to obtain realistic results. This means that at least one
nonlinear combination must be defined.
Note: Technically speaking, ESA PT allows you to run even a linear calculation with the
membrane members defined, but the results may be seriously affected (negatively) by the one-step
solution. Therefore, in general, use the nonlinear calculation for the membrane members.

Limitations for membrane elements

There are several limitations concerning the membrane elements.
1. Membrane elements can be modelled in general XYZ – environment only.
2. It is not possible to calculate PNL for these membrane elements.
3. It is not possible to set orthotropic parameters for the membrane elements.
4. It is not possible to define ribs for these membrane elements.
5. It is not possible to define prestressed tendons for these elements.
6. It is not possible to use other, steel and aluminium materials.
7. It is not possible to set physical non-linearity for these elements.

Orthotropy
Orthotropic properties of slab members
The procedure to define an orthotropic slab
1. Open service Structure.

208
 Geometry

2. Start any function for the input of a slab member (plane 2D member, wall, shell member).
3. The property dialogue opens on the screen.
4. Fill in the required parameters.
5. Set the FEM model parameter to orthotropic.
6. A new item appears in the dialogue: Orthotropy.
7. Click the three-dot button [...] in this added line.
8. A dialogue with orthotropy parameters is opened on the screen.
9. Input correct values.
10. Confirm with [OK].
11. Confirm the slab-property-dialogue.
12. Input the slab member.

Orthotropy parameters
There are two cases of orthotropy :
1. physical orthotropy caused by different moduli in the x and y direction, i.e. a real material property
due to the technology of material production (various layers, wood, etc.)
2. technical or shape orthotropy of ribbed plates / walls

a) Physical orthotropy
First we describe the parameters for the physical orthotropy. The orthotropic material is defined by the
following physical constants:
h E1 E2 G12 12 G13 G23
The value of 21 is determined as follows :
21 = 12 * E2/E1
The shear modulus G12 is determined using Kirchoff’s plate:

The parameters G13 and G23 are necessary because Mindlin’s plate element is used, with a substantial
influence of shear forces qx and qy on the deformations.
We assume a plate/wall with a uniform thickness h.

The parameters entered in the program are calculated from these physical constants as follows:
A. For a plate element

For a plate element the angle Beta between the direction 1 (for which the orthotropy parameters are entered)
and the local x direction of the element can be entered.

B. For a wall element

209
Reference Guide

C. For a shell element

A shell element is a plate / wall element and possesses both kinds of physical constants with no additional
constants.

b) Technical orthotropy
For technical or shape orthotropy we refer to P. Timoshenko, S. Woinowsky, Theory of plates and shells,
McGraw Hill, second edition, 1987. The relation between the bending moments and the curvature of an
orthotropic plate is given by the following relation:

The definition of moments an curvatures are as follows:

The following notations are used in the program:

D11 = Dx
D22 = Dy
D33 = 0.5 Dxy
D12 = Dx
D44 and D55 are added because Mindlin elements with shear force deformation are used. In many cases there
are no simple formulas to calculate these stiffnesses. Shear force deformation is neglected (as by other FEM
elements) when big values are entered for this two constants. Further a recommendation how to calculate
these factors in some practical cases is given.

Determination of rigidities in various specific cases:

The expressions given for the rigidities are subject to slight modifications according to the nature of the
material employed. In particular, all values of torsional rigidity Dxy based on purely theoretical considerations
should be regarded as a first approximation, and a direct test must be recommended in order to obtain more
reliable values of the modulus G. Usual values of the rigidities in some cases of practical interest are given
below:
b.1) Isotropic plate
An isotropic plate with constant thickness is defined by : thickness h, modulus of elasticity E and Poisson
coefficient :

210
 Geometry

b.2) Reinforced concrete slabs

Let Es be Young’s modulus of steel, Ec that of the concrete, c Poisson’s ratio for concrete, and n = Es / Ec. For
a slab with two way reinforcement in the directions x and y we can assume:

In these equations, Icx is the moment of inertia of the slab material, Isx that of the reinforcement taken about the
neutral axis in the section x = constant, and Icy and Isy are the respective values for the section y = constant.
It is obvious that these values are not independent of the state of the concrete. For instance, any difference of
the reinforcement in the directions x and y will affect the ratio Dx / Dy much more after cracking of the concrete
than before.
b.3) Slab reinforced by a set of equidistant ribs

211
Reference Guide

In this case the orthotropic plate theory can only give a rough idea of the actual state of stress and strain of the
slab.
With :
E = modulus of the material (for instance, concrete)
I = moment of inertia of a T section of width a1
Az = shear surface of a T section of width a1
C = torsional rigidity of one rib
=h/H
When you enter this T section a geometric section, I, Az and C are calculated automatically by the program.
Then we may assume:

with D’xy the torsional rigidity of the slab without the rib

You can check this by taking the ribs not into account. The solution must be the same as for isotropic plates in
section b.1.
b.4) Gridworks
The gridwork consists of two systems of parallel beams spaced equal distances apart in the x and y directions
and rigidly connected at their points of intersection. The beams are supported at the ends, and the load is
applied normal to the xy plane. If the distances a1 and b1 between the beams are small in comparison with the
dimensions a and b of the grid, and if the flexural rigidity of each of the beams parallel to the x axis is equal to
I1 and that of each of the beams parallel to y axis is equal to I2, the coefficients are as follows:

For all types of elements the thickness which is taken into account for the calculation of the dead weight must
be entered in the Load t field. This thickness is multiplied with the density of the selected material.

212
 Geometry

Plates with beams

Plates with beams
SCIA ESA PT offers a set of function for fast definition of non-ordinary slabs. Special function is available for:
 plate with beams, i.e. ribbed plate (isotropic, orthotropic, membrane),
 load panel with beams, i.e. load panel laid on beams,
 plate from beams, i.e. plate composed of beams (isotropic and orthotropic),
 load panel inside a regular slab.

Plate with beams

This function enables the user to input a plate with stiffening ribs. The calculation takes this entity as a real
ribbed plate. The same result can be obtained by a separate input of the plate and the ribs using two separate
functions (Structure > Plane 2D member + Structure > Plate rib).
See also Defining a new plate with beams.

Load panel with beams

This function is useful for structures where the only purpose of the plate is to distribute the defined load into the
system of beams on which the plate is laid. The plate itself is ignored in the calculation. Its only purpose is to
allow for the input of plane load on this plate. This plane load is then automatically recalculated to a distributed
load acting on the beams supporting the plate.
Only surface load can be define on this type of plate.
See also Defining a new load panel with beams.

Plate from beams

This is a special type of plate whose all features can be fully exploited in connection with function upgrading a
2D project to 1D project.
The idea is the following:

213
Reference Guide

You have a floor composed of let us say prefabricated panels (e.g. hollow core slabs). The checks that are to
performed require that these panels be defined. On the other hand, the analysis of the whole structure can be
performed with a "substitute" plate whose properties correspond to the system of the panels. It is possible to
use the analysed model of the substitute slab, extract just one of the beams into a separate project including
the internal forces obtained by the analysis of the whole structure and perform a detailed checking of that
single member.
It is not possible to define additional data such as supports, masses, loads, etc. on the beams in this type of
plate with beams.
See also Defining a new plate from beams.

Load panel
A load panel is a plate that is subjected to surface load but is missing in the calculation model of the structure.
For example, roof window is a typical example. It is normally ignored in the analysis of the structure, but it may
be subjected to snow load. SCIA ESA PT enables you to input such a window (or any other part of the
structure that has the same behaviour) as a load panel, specify the load that the load panel is subjected to and
the program itself transforms the surface load to a set of linear uniformly distributed loads acting on the edges
of the load panel. Moreover, you may specify different weight factors for individual edges. For example, the
picture below displays a load panel whose weight factors on two opposite sides are equal and whose weight
factors on two other opposite sites are zero.
Only surface load can be define on this type of plate.
See also Defining a new load panel.

214
 Geometry

Defining a new slab

Defining a new plate
Procedure for the definition of a new plate
1. Open function Plane slab:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Plane slab,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane slab.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Input individual vertices of the slab.
5. Close the function.

Note: If two overlapping slabs are input, the question that arises is "what property should be
assigned to the intersection of the two slabs?" The answer is simple: "The parameters of the later
input slab are those of the highest priority."

Defining a new wall

Procedure for the definition of a new wall
1. Open function Wall:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Wall,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Wall.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Input individual vertices of the wall.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new subregion

Procedure for the definition of a new subregion
1. Open function Subregion:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Subregion,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component > Plane
slab.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the slab where the subregion is to be inserted.
5. Press [Esc].
6. Input individual vertices of the subregion.
7. Close the function.

215
Reference Guide

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-
component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new opening

Procedure for the definition of a new opening
1. Open function plane Opening:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Opening,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component >
Opening.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the slab where the opening is to be inserted.
5. Press [Esc].
6. Input individual vertices of the opening.
7. Close the function.

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-
component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new internal edge

Procedure for the definition of a new internal edge
1. Open function plane Internal edge:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Internal edge,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component >
Internal edge.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the slab where the internal edge is to be inserted.
5. Press [Esc].
6. Input the starting and end point of the internal edge.
7. Close the function.

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-
component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining an internal node in a slab

Procedure for the definition of a new internal node in a slab
1. Open function Internal node:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Internal node,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function 2D member component >
Internal node.
2. Select the slab where you need to insert the rib into.
3. Press [Esc].
4. Insert the node.
5. Close the function.

216
 Geometry

Defining a new rib

Procedure for the definition of a new plate rib
1. Open function Plate rib:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Plate rib,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function 2D components
component > Plate rib.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the slab where you need to insert the rib into.
5. Press [Esc].
6. Input the starting and end point of the rib.
7. Close the function.

Note: There are a few limitations concerning the rib:

(i) the rib must not "overlap" the slab, the rib must be attached to the slab along its whole length,
(ii) the rib must not intersect an opening or a subregion,
(iii) the rib however may go along the edge of an opening.
(iv) a geometric manipulation with an earlier defined rib may result in an forbidden configuration of
the rib; Such a situation is corrected during the Check of data before calculation.
Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-
component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new plate with beams

Input parameters for the plate
Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure
applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to
the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions
is used.
Orthotropic
An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal
directions is used.
Membrane
Special membrane elements are used for the analysis of the
slab.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plate at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

217
Reference Guide

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily
turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.
normal orientation

swapped orientation

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance
between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that
is required under the plate.

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate
edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the
local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first Available only if Position set to Number.

Offset last These values define the offset of the first and last beam from
the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the
positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Alignment Top
The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.
Centre
The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane
of the plate.
Bottom

218
 Geometry

The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Generate subregions If ON, the final plate is defined with as many subregions as
there are beams in the plate. One beam is accompanied with
one subregion and they together create a T-section composed
of the beam (i.e. rib) and the effective slab width.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)
Name Defines the name of the rib.

Type rib Informs about the type of the entity.

Cross-section Defines the cross-section of the rib.

Alignment Disabled.
Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Shape of rib T symmetric

The beam and the plate form a regular T-section.
slab left
The plate is on the left side of the effective slab width.
slab right
The plate is on the right side of the effective slab width.
slab non-sym
The final cross-section is not symmetrical. The user must
define the effective width on the left of the rib and on the right
of the rib.

Effective width Specifies how the effective width is defined:

Default
The effective width is determined as a multiple of slab width.
The multiple can be defined in Calculation, Mesh > Solver
setup > Number of thicknesses of rib plate.
Width
The effective width is explicitly specified. The value can be
input below.
Number of thicknesses
The effective width is determined as a multiple of the thickness.
The multiple can be input below this parameter.

for internal forces Two types of effective width can be input. Both the values are
used for the modelling of composite cross-section. Value "for
internal forces" is used to recalculate internal of the created
composite cross-section section. Value "for check" (see below)
is used to define the cross-section for the needs of design and
check of reinforced cross-section.
Usually, a rectangular section is attached to the slab creating
the final T or L section. However, also other library cross-
sections can be used to form various composite sections (e.g.
steel I section + concrete reinforced plate).
for check See above.
FEM type Defines the type of finite element:
Standard
The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can

219
Reference Guide

transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only
Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of
transferring the axial force only.
Buckling and relative Can be used to specify buckling lengths.
lengths
Layer Specifies the layer of the rib.
2D member Informs about the "associated" slab.

The procedure to define a new plate with beams

1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Plate with beams.
3. Set the FEM model to Isotropic with beams or Orthotropic with beams or Membrane with
beams.
4. Fill in other parameters (see below).
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Define the shape of the plate.
7. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on
the screen.
8. Fill in the required parameters (see above).
9. Confirm with [OK].
10. The input is complete.

Defining a new plate from beams

Input parameters for the plate
Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure
applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to
the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Isotropic

A normal isotropic slab with identical properties in all directions
is used.
Orthotropic
An orthotropic slab with different properties in two orthogonal
directions is used.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plate at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.

Eccentricity z If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily

220
 Geometry

turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.
normal orientation

swapped orientation

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance
between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that
is required under the plate.

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate
edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the
local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first Available only if Position set to Number.

Offset last These values define the offset of the first and last beam from
the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the
positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Position in plate Specifies the position of the beam over the height of the plate.

221
Reference Guide

Alignment Top
The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.
Centre
The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane
of the plate.
Bottom
The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Beams eccentricity Z Defines the eccentricity of the beams in the Z-axis.

Generate subregions If ON, the final plate is defined with as many subregions as
there are beams in the plate. One beam is accompanied with
one subregion and they together create a T-section composed
of the beam (i.e. rib) and the effective slab width.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)
Name A name of the beam member.

Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a beam
member but may take effect later. For example, some functions
performing design and check to technical standards take
account of the type.

Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a beam member

and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one
of cross-section properties).

Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the

inserted beam member around the longitudinal axis of the
beam member.

Member system line at Disabled.

Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Eccentricity ey, ez Disabled.

LCS Disabled. Set to z by vector.

LCS Rotation Disabled.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard
The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can

222
 Geometry

transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.

Axial force only
Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of
transferring the axial force only.

Buckling length Disabled.

Layer Any entity including a beam member can be put into a layer.
The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in
common (e.g. one floor, columns of one floor, columns of the
same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they
can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the
structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

The procedure to define a new plate from beams

1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Plate with beams.
3. Set the FEM model to Isotropic from beams or Orthotropic from beams.
4. Fill in other parameters (see below).
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Define the shape of the plate.
7. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on
the screen.
8. Fill in the required parameters (see above).
9. Confirm with [OK].
10. The input is complete.

Defining a new load panel with beams

Input parameters for the plate
Name Defines the name of the slab.

Type Specifies the type of the slab. The user may select from types:
(i) plate, (ii) wall, and (iii) shell.
This type plays role e.g. in code checks. The check procedure
applied depends on this parameter. Therefore, pay attention to
the selection of proper type.

Material Defines the material of the slab.

FEM model Only option Load panel with beams is available.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the plate.

Member system plate at The input-plane (system-plane) of the input slab may be in the
mid-surface of the slab, at the top surface or bottom surface of
the slab.

Eccentricity If required, eccentricity of the slab may be input.

LCS type Defines the type of the local coordinate system of the slab.

LCS axis The orientation of the local Z axis of the slab may be easily
turned around. This check box does it. See figures below.
normal orientation

223
Reference Guide

swapped orientation

LCS angle The direction of the local X-axis may be input here.

Layer Selects the layer of the slab.

Geometry of beams (part of the input parameters for the plate)

Position The position of the beams can be defined by the distance
between two adjacent beams or by the number of beams that
is required under the plate.

Offset Available only if Position set to Distance.

This value defines the offset of the first beam from the plate
edge. The distance is measured in the positive direction of the
local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Offset first Available only if Position set to Number.

Offset last These values define the offset of the first and last beam from
the plate edge. The numbering of beams is made in the
positive direction of the local y-axis of the plate.
The beams follow the direction of the local x-axis of the plate.

Distance Specifies the axial distance between two adjacent beams.

Position in plate Specifies the position of the beam over the height of the plate.

224
 Geometry

Alignment Top
The beams are laid on the top surface of the plate.
Centre
The axis of the beam is at the same level as the middle-plane
of the plate.
Bottom
The beams are attached to the bottom surface of the plate.

Beams eccentricity Z Defines the eccentricity of the beams in the Z-axis.

Input parameters for the beams (parameters from the separate dialogue for the beams)
Name A name of the beam member.

Type The beam type is not essential for the definition of a beam
member but may take effect later. For example, some functions
performing design and check to technical standards take
account of the type.

Cross-section The cross-section influences the properties of a beam member

and defines its shape and also material (as the material is one
of cross-section properties).

Alpha This angle determines the rotation of the cross-section of the

inserted beam member around the longitudinal axis of the
beam member.

Member system line at Disabled.

Informs about the alignment adjusted in the plate parameters.

Eccentricity ey, ez Disabled.

LCS Disabled. Set to z by vector.

LCS Rotation Disabled.

FEM type Defines the type of finite element:

Standard
The standard 1D finite element is used. The element can
transfer both moments, axial and shear forces.
Axial force only
Truss finite element is applied. This element is capable of

225
Reference Guide

transferring the axial force only.

Buckling length Disabled.

Layer Any entity including a beam member can be put into a layer.
The layer can thus comprise entities that have something in
common (e.g. one floor, columns of one floor, columns of the
same length, etc.) Once layers are defined and assigned, they
can be used to e.g. display just a particular part of the
structure, make selection of that particular part, etc.)

The procedure to define a new load panel with beams

1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Load panel with beams.
3. Fill in other parameters (see below).
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Define the shape of the plate.
6. When the shape definition is complete the input dialogue with beam (rib) parameters is opened on
the screen.
7. Fill in the required parameters (see above).
8. Confirm with [OK].
9. The input is complete.

Defining a new load panel

Parameters
Name Defines the name of the load panel.
2D member Informs about the master plate.
Load panel By default set to YES.
It can be switched off – then a normal opening would be input.
Weights of edges Each edge can have its own weight factor assigned. These
weights are used to recalculate the surface load input on the
load panel to a system of linear loads assigned to individual
edges of the load panel.

A load panel may be input in two ways: (i) as a normal load panel that lies fully inside the main slab, (ii) as a
load panel that overlaps the main slab – such a load panel then serves as a "cut" to the main slab.

226
 Geometry

normal load
panel

load panel as a
cut – definition
phase

load panel as a
cut – final
shape

Procedure for the definition of a new load panel

1. Open function plane Load panel:
a. either use menu function Tree > Structure > Load panel,
b. or open tree menu service Structure and call function Plane component > Load
panel.
2. Input and adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the slab where the opening is to be inserted.
5. Input individual vertices of the opening.
6. Close the function.

227
Reference Guide

Note: As soon as the function is invoked and the master slab selected, working plane is
automatically moved to the plane of the selected master slab. When the definition of the slab-
component is over, the working plane returns back to its original position.

Defining a new shell

Defining a new shell
Each shell is defined as a closed polygon consisting of straight or curved lines.
The procedure to define a shell
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Shells.
3. Fill in the parameters – see chapter Shell parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Input the vertices of the polygon.
6. If the defined polygon is not closed, the program tries to close it automatically.

Tip: If you want to define a curved 2D member, it may be very useful to input the shape-defining
curves in advance as normal lines (service Structure > Drawing tools > Line). See also Sample
shells.

Sample shells
Cylinder
Start function Structure > Shell.
Adjust the parameters.
On the toolbar at the command line select that you want to input a circle.

Define its centre and radius. (Our example: centre = 0, 0, 0; radius point = 2, 0, 0)

Define the surface line – probably by typing the vertex coordinate on the command line. (Our example: 2, 0, 3)

228
 Geometry

Input the other circle by its centre only – probably by typing the vertex coordinate on the command line. (Our
example: 0, 0, 3)

Program closes the polygon and the cylinder is there.

229
Reference Guide

Parabolic cylinder
The shell of rectangular plan view, whose two opposite edges are straight lines, and the other two opposite
edges are parabolic arcs.
Start function Structure > Shell.
Adjust the parameters.
Insert the first straight line (start in point 0, 0, 0 and end in 0, -5, 0).

The second edge is parabolic, so press button Parabolic arc on the toolbar at the command line.

Input the intermediate point (3, -5, 3) and the end point (6, -5, 0).

230
 Geometry

Add one more straight edge ending in point 6, 0, 0.

Input the other parabolic edge with the intermediate point in 3, 0, 1 and the end point in 0, 0, 0 (do not forget to
swap to parabolic arc mode).

The final rendered shell looks like:

231
Reference Guide

Shell templates
Some most common shells used in civil engineering practice have been pre-defined and can be inserted into
your project as a user block.
Available templates
cone

truncated cone

232
 Geometry

cylinder

spherical cap

elbow

The procedure to input shell template

1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function User blocks.
3. Select the required shape.
4. Double-click on its icon to open the template-dimensions dialogue.
5. Input the dimension.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Insert the shell into your project.
8. If necessary, modify the shell parameters (e.g. thickness, material, etc.).

233
Reference Guide

Defining a new membrane

Defining a new membrane element
The procedure to define a membrane member
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Plane 2D member or Shell member.
3. Fill in the parameters – see chapter Plate or Shell parameters to learn more about individual
parameters.
4. Tick checkbox Membrane.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Input the shape of the membrane member.

Geometric manipulations
Geometric manipulations with slabs
Slabs like any other entity may be moved, shifted, rotated, etc. Standard geometry-manipulation functions may
be applied to slabs with a few exceptions:
 a slab is manipulated (i.e. copied, moved, etc.) including all its components (i.e. subregions,
openings, etc.),
 slab components may be freely manipulated inside the area of the main slab,
 it is not possible to copy or move any slab component to another main slab,
 if node or nodes (vertices) of a slab (both main and component) are manipulated, the operation is
valid only if the final slab remains planar (i.e. all the vertices of a slab must lie in one plane both
before and after the manipulation),
 geometry manipulation functions applicable to slabs are: (i) copy (single and multiple), (ii) move, (iii)
stretch, (iv) rotate, (v) scale, (vi) mirror.
 individual nodes of a slab may be moved to a new location using the Drag&Drop feature or via
standard geometry manipulation functions like move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale.

Note: To move a node, you must first select the node and then invoke the required function
(either the Drag&Drop feature or any of standard geometry manipulation functions.

Editing the shape of a slab

A slab is in fact a closed polygon. Consequently, the shape of a slab can be modified using functions for
editing of polygons: (i) insert vertex, (ii) remove vertex, (iii) move vertex. The latter is possible through either (i)
direct modification of vertex coordinates in the property window (available for selected vertices) or (ii) drag-
and-drop feature.
Example
Let’s demonstrate the feature on an example. Let’s have a rectangular plate and let’s assume that we need to
change it to a L-shape plate.

234
 Geometry

First, use function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – insert node and insert two vertices into the
required slab edge. One of the inserted vertices should in the corner of the "flange" of the final L-shape. The
other vertex can be inserted anywhere between the first inserted vertex and the "flange-edge" of the plate.

Now, move the intermediate-vertex to its final location.

And finally, move the other "flange" vertex to its final position.

235
Reference Guide

In addition, individual slab edges may be treated as a standard polyline segment or "line", which means that
they may be converted to arcs.
Example
Let’s take the L-shaped plate created in the previous example. Let’s call function Modify > Curves edit >
Convert line to circle arc. In this first step simply define an arbitrary arc (turned to the right side, of course) as
it will be modified to the final shape in the second step.

Finally, use function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by radius to input the proper final radius of the
circular arc.

236
 Geometry

Intersection of two shells

The problem of intersection of two shells (or plates) is divided into two separate problems:
1. calculation of the intersection (i.e. the intersection curve),
2. removal of the part (called cut-out) that should not be considered in the calculation (if such a part
exists).
Procedure to generate the intersection of two shells
1. Input the shells.
2. If you want to limit the action on selected shells only, select the required ones.
3. Call function Modify > Connect members / nodes.
4. The program calculates the intersection of all defined shells (the function connects also nodes to
beam members and beam members to slabs).
Procedure to define the cut-out (i.e. to define the part of a shell that should be removed from the
model)
1. In you have not done so yet, define the intersection – see above.
2. Start function Structure > 2D member components > Cut-out.
3. Select the shells you want to process and confirm the selection with [Esc].
4. The program highlights individual parts of the selected shells. The boundaries of the parts are
defined by the shell edges and by the generated intersections.
5. Select the parts that should be removed and confirm with [Esc].
6. The program draws a cut-out symbol around the border of the selected part(s).

Example
Let’s demonstrate the procedures on a simple example of two intersecting semi-cylinders that may represent
an intersection of two corridors.
Define the shells.

237
Reference Guide

Call function Modify > Connect members / nodes ([ ]) to generate the intersection curves.

They may be better seen in the plan view (the black curves).

When you rotate the view, you may see that even though the intersection has been generated, both shells
remain unchanged, i.e. it is not possible to pass from one corridor to the other one.

238
 Geometry

Now call function Structure > 2D member components > Cut-out and select both shells. Then select three
end-outs.

239
Reference Guide

When you confirm the selection, the program removes the selected parts from the calculation model. To verify
it, generate the FE mesh and display it.

When you rotate the view, you may see that it is possible to freely pass from one corridor to the other.

Note: In ESA PT terminology, the cut-out is an extra entity added to the shell (it is called
Additional Data, or Add Data). The removed part of the shell is not removed from the graphical
scene, the shell still remains unchanged, and is drawn AS IS. The cut.-out is drawn as an additional
entity relating to the shell.

240
 Geometry

It means that if you display rendered surfaces (or rendered middle plane) of the shell, the removed
part (the cut-out) is still displayed.

In order to see the final shape with cut-outs removed, it is necessary to switch off the rendering and
display the generated finite element mesh. See the example above.

Examples
The enclosed images show a practical application of shell intersections and cut-outs.

241
Reference Guide

Modification of the geometry and properties of plates with beams

In general, the following text applies also to plates from beams and load panels with beams.

Modifying the layout of beams

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), the properties specified in
the table with input parameters of the plate can be arbitrarily modified. That means that it is possible to change
the number and distance of the beams, their alignment, etc.
In order to change for example the cross-section of the beams, it is necessary to select separately the beams
that are to be modified. In general, it is possible that each beam has different cross-section, is inserted into a
different layer, etc.
The procedure to change the layout of the beams
1. Select the plate that is to be modified.

242
 Geometry

2. The properties of the plate are displayed in the Property window.

3. In section Beam layout change the required parameters.
4. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.
5. Clear the selection.

Changing the general properties of the plate

The general parameters (listed in the table with Input parameters for the plate) can be changed in the same
way as for normal slabs. For example, the name, material, LCS, etc. can be modified this way.
Special note must be made concerning the FEM model of the plate. Plates with beams and plates from beams
are input through the same function. The final type of the plate is adjusted in the input parameters. However,
once the plate is defined, there are some limitations concerning the change of the FEM type.
1. If a plate with beams of any type (isotropic, orthotropic or membrane) has been defined, it cannot be
changed to a plate from beams. The user can only swap freely between isotropic, orthotropic and
membrane option.
2. The same applies to the plate from beams. Once a plate is input as a plate from beams, it cannot be
changed to a plate with beams. Once again, it is possible to swap between orthotropic and isotropic
plate from beams.
The procedure to change the general properties of the plate
1. Select the plate that is to be modified.
2. The properties of the plate are displayed in the Property window.
3. Change the required parameters at the top part of the table.
4. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.
5. Clear the selection.

Changing the geometry of the plate

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), all the changes to the
geometry affect also the beams. If the plate is for example rotated, the beams rotate as well. If an additional
vertex is added to the outline of the plate and the shape of the plate is changed, the beams are regenerated
accordingly.
Example:
Let us have a plate like this:

Let us rotate it by 90 degrees.

243
Reference Guide

Let us change its shape. (The user changes just the shape of the plate, the beams are modified automatically
to correspond to the new geometry of the plate.

The procedure to change the geometry of the plate

1. Select the plate that is to be modified.
2. Use any available general function to change the shape. For example:
a. select the required nodes and drag-and-drop to their new position,
b. click action button [Table edit geometry] to open a table with the coordinates of
the plate and make necessary changes,
c. use function for editing of a polygon (menu Modify > Polyline edit > Insert node /
Delete node / etc.
3. All the changes are immediately reflected in the model.
4. Clear the selection.

Inserting an opening into a plate with beams

As long as the beams are not disconnected from the plate (see further in the text), the inserted openings and
load panels affect also the beams.
It can be clearly seen in the following picture. Let us have a plate with beams. An opening is inserted. One of
the edges of the opening follows the axis of one of the beams. Another beam is "cut" by the opening.
As a result, we get a plate with beams with:
 the beam that is "cut" by the opening is really cut into three segments and the segment lying below
the opening is removed, which means that only two segments remain in the model (see the blue
numbers in the picture),
 the beam that goes along the edge of the opening is also divided into three segments and all the
three segments remain in the model (see the red numbers in the picture).

244
 Geometry

Disconnecting the beams from the plate

If required, it is possible to disconnect the beams from the plate and treat both as separate entities (standard
beams and standard plate).
The procedure to disconnect the beams
1. Select the plate that is to be modified.
2. Click action button [Edit beams].
3. This action removes the relation between the plate and the beams.
4. From this moment, both entities are independent.

General solids
General solids
In addition to beam members and slabs, you can use in SCIA ESA PT a general entity called general solid.
It is a geometrical shape that forms a part of your project but is completely neglected during the calculation.
General solids can be used to model parts of the model that should appear in drawings but that have no real
meaning for the analysis (air-conditioning, railing, etc.).
General solids can be also effectively used if SCIA ESA PT is used in combination with a CAD program and
the architectural model is imported into it from that third-party CAD program.

Defining a new general solid

There are two types of solid that can be defined in SCIA ESA PT.
Extruded prism

The extruded prism is a solid whose the base can be formed by a closed polygon of an arbitrary shape (with
both straight and curved edges) and whose height can follow either a straight line (the picture above) or a
curve (circle, parabola, Bezier curve or spline) (the picture below).

245
Reference Guide

Cylinder

The cylinder is a kind of the extruded prism. The limitation is that the base is always formed by a full circle. The
height can once again follow either a straight line or a curve.

The procedure to input a new extruded prism

1. Open service Structure.
2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids.
3. Select and start function Extruded prism.
4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.
5. Define the base of the prism (i.e. input a closed polygon).
6. Once the polygon is closed, the working plane is automatically readjusted to allow for the input of
the height of the prism.
7. Input the height (a straight line or a curve).
8. Close the function.
The procedure to input a new cylinder
1. Open service Structure.
2. Expand branch Drawing tools > General solids.
3. Select and start function Cylinder.
4. Input a few parameters of the solid: Name, Layer, Colour.
5. Define the base of the cylinder (i.e. input a circle).
6. Once the base is input, the working plane is automatically readjusted to allow for the input of the
height of the cylinder.
7. Input the height (a straight line or a curve).
8. Close the function.

Editing the existing general solid

Any of the defined general solids can be modified using the same procedure that applies to other SCIA ESA
PT entities such as beam, slab, etc.
The procedure to modify the existing general solid

246
 Geometry

1. Select the solid to be edited.

2. Its properties are displayed in the Property window.
3. Change the required parameters. The changes are immediately reflected in the graphical window.
4. If you want to modify the geometry, press action button [Table edit geometry]. This button opens a
dialogue with coordinates of the vertices that define the shape of the solid. Make any changes that
are necessary and confirm with [OK].

Geometrical manipulations with general solids

You may perform standard geometrical manipulations with general solids. For example, they may be moved,
copied, stretched, etc. The procedures are the same as for standard SCIA ESA PT entities.

Boolean operations with general solids

SCIA ESA PT enables the user to perform standard Boolean operations with general solids.
The operations will be demonstrated on a set of simple examples.
Let us have two solids (cuboids) that intersect each other.

Union
The union operation merges the two cuboids into one solid.

Subtraction
When you perform the subtraction, you may decide whether the subtracted solid should be deleted or kept in
the model.
If you decide to delete it, it is removed.

If you keep it, it remains unaffected.

247
Reference Guide

Intersection
There are two types of intersection: XOR (exclusive OR) and OR.
For the XOR option, what remains from the solids is the part that belongs to just one of them. The part that
belongs to both solids (the intersecting part) is removed.

For normal OR it is the opposite way. The parts of the solids that belong to all intersecting solids are kept in the
model and the rest is removed.

Division
This operation divides the solids into more separate shapes. The parts that belong to just one solid are
separated and the parts that belong to more solids create a new solid or solids.

The procedure to perform a Boolean operation

1. Open service Structure.
2. Expand branch Transfer/Break/Unify.
3. Select the required function (Union of solids, Subtraction of solids, Intersection of solids,
Division of solids).
4. Select the original entity for the operation.
5. Select the secondary entity or entities for the operation.

248
 Geometry

6. End selection with [ESC].

7. For subtraction and intersection operations decide on the type of the operation (see above).
8. That’s it.

Catalogue blocks
Introduction to catalogue blocks
Catalogue blocks represent a powerful tool that allows the user to define the "whole" structure in a single step.
The word "whole" has been put into the quotation marks as the structure created here may either (i) really form
the whole structure that should be analysed, or (ii) be just a part of a larger, complex model.
The catalogue block is a smaller, or we can say standard or template, structure the geometry of which has
been defined in advance by the developer of SCIA.ESA PT. The user has to specify only the dimensions and
properties of his/her particular application. The whole geometry-definition process is confined to a simple filling
in of a short table.
SCIA.ESA PT offers a wide range of catalogue blocks (standard template structures) such as 2D and 3D
lattice girders, towers (masts), 2D and 3D frames and much more. The procedure for their definition has been
unified and, therefore, once the user becomes accustomed to the definition of one of the catalogue block
types, he/she is capable of inserting all other types.

Overview of catalogue blocks

Catalogue blocks, or we can say standard template structures, that are accessible in SCIA.ESA PT can be
divided into groups according to their shape and dimension:
beam A beam member of variable cross-section.
planar frame Simple two-dimensional frames.
frame 3D A couple of classical 3D frames.
tower 2D A set of 2D masts (analogous to 3D masts).
tower / mast A series of lattice masts with most usual variants of diagonal
arrangement.
two-dimensional lattice Simple 2D lattice girders with various arrangements of diagonals and
girder - straight variant verticals.
two-dimensional lattice A set of 2D lattice girders with curved chords and different arrangement
girder - curved variant and number of diagonals and verticals.
three-dimensional lattice Practical variants of three-dimensional lattice girders with alternative
girder - straight variant arrangement of diagonals, verticals and chord elements.
three-dimensional lattice Several possible arrangements of diagonals, verticals and chord
girder - curved variant elements for 3D lattice girders with curved chord.
curve A set of commonly used curves such as a circle, ellipse, parabola, etc.

Catalogue block types

Catalogue block - Beam
Catalogue block Beam represents an I-beam of a cross-section varying along the span. In cross-section the
beam is shaped like letter I with haunches in the inner corners between the flanges and the wall. In longitudinal
section, the beam is symmetrical and resembles of letter A. However, the longitudinal shape may be affected
by the concrete values of individual beam dimensions.
Beam parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
beam. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen
on the accompanying picture.
Cross-section Catalogue block Beam always requires the definition of its cross-

249
Reference Guide

section before the specification of dimensions.

Catalogue block - 2D frame

Catalogue block Plane frame (2D frame) is a simple 2D frame. There are several types of the shape available.
2D Frame parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen
on the accompanying picture.
Cross-section Separate cross-section may be defined for columns and cross-beam of
the frame.

Catalogue block - 3D frame

There are two variants of 3D frame available in SCIA.ESA PT: a regular orthogonal frame and a "tapering"
one. For both variants a dialogue of the same type is opened and must be filled in.
3D Frame parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
frame. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen
on the accompanying picture.
Cross-section Three different cross-sections must be defined for this type of
catalogue block. Each cross-section is used for members oriented in
one direction: along X-axis, along Y-axis, along Z-axis.

Catalogue block - 2D lattice girder

A wider range of plane lattice girders is available in the catalogue block library. They cover the most often used
types of girders.
Separate sets have been prepared for both straight and curved variants of plane lattice girders. The
manipulation with girders, procedure of definition, and meaning of parameters is the same for both.
Lattice girder parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be

250
 Geometry

clearly seen on the accompanying picture.

The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of
spans of the girder.
Cross-section Cross-sections may be defined separately for individual parts of the
girder: upper chord, lower chord, verticals, and diagonals.

Catalogue block - 3D lattice girder

A wider range of space lattice girders is available in the catalogue block library. They cover the most often
used types of girders.
Separate sets have been prepared for both straight and curved variants of 3D lattice girders. The manipulation
with girders, procedure of definition, and meaning of parameters is the same for both.
Lattice girder parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
lattice girder. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be
clearly seen on the accompanying picture.
The parameters define not only the size and shape, but also number of
spans of the girder.
Cross-section Cross-sections may be defined separately for individual parts of the
girder: upper chord, lower chord, verticals, and diagonals.

251
Reference Guide

Catalogue block - Mast

SCIA.ESA PT offers a whole set of masts, or we can say towers, with different arrangement of diagonals. The
user thus can select the required type. It may however happen that none of the pre-defined shapes satisfies
particular needs and the user needs to define a mast of type that is not in the library. Then it is possible to
select the most similar, or the closest, type, insert it into the project and subsequently apply modification
functions (e.g. delete, move, copy, etc.) to adjust the shape as necessary.
Mast parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions The dimensions define the size and consequently also the shape of the
mast. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can be clearly seen
on the accompanying picture.
Cross-section Three different cross-sections must be defined for this type of
catalogue block. Each cross-section is used for members oriented in
one direction: horizontal beams, vertical (or inclined) beam members,
and diagonals.

252
 Geometry

Note: If the current project is of 3D type, the user may choose from a set of three-dimensional
masts. It the project is of 2D type, only two-dimensional musts are available.

Catalogue block - Curve

Catalogue blocks provide not only for simple structures, but also for common geometric shapes such as
curves. A whole set of basic curves is available in SCIA.ESA PT. For each curve shape (e.g. circle, ellipse,
hyperbole, etc.) the user can select the most appropriate way of its definition.
Together with the shape also a cross-section is defined and as a result a curved beam member is created. The
generated beam member is not smooth-curved, but the exact curve of the shape is substituted with a polygon
of straight segments.
A big advantage of the pre-defined curve catalogue blocks is that not only the whole curve, but only a required
segment of it can be defined. Thus the field of application becomes much wider for this SCIA.ESA PT feature.
Curve types
circle (x) A circle segment defined by means of radius and a set of X
co-ordinates.

circle (y) A circle segment defined by means of radius and a set of Y

co-ordinates.

circle (f) A circle segment defined by means of radius and a central

angle.

ellipse (x) An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and

minimum radius and a couple of X co-ordinates.

ellipse (y) An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and

minimum radius and a couple of X co-ordinates.

ellipse (f) An ellipse segment defined by means of maximum and

minimum radius and a central angle.

253
Reference Guide

parabola (x) A parabolic segment defined by means of its height, length

and a couple of X co-ordinates.

parabola (y) A parabolic segment defined by means of its height, length

and a couple of Y co-ordinates.

hyperbole A hyperbolic segment defined by means of a X co-ordinates.

(x)

hyperbole A hyperbolic segment defined by means of a X co-ordinates.

(y)

hyperbole (f) A hyperbolic segment defined by means of two central

angle.

chain curve A "chain-curve" segment defined by means of X co-

(x) ordinates of chain-curve ends.

chain curve A "chain-curve" segment defined by means of chain-curve

(s) end co-ordinates measured along the curve.

sinusoid A segment of a standard sinusoid.

spiral A segment of a spiral.

Curve parameters
Name The name is used for unique and straightforward identification of the
catalogue block.
Dimensions and The dimensions and other parameters define the size and the shape of
parameters of shape the appropriate curve. Meaning of individual dimension parameters can
be clearly seen on the accompanying picture.
Number of straight This number specifies how many line segments is used to substitute
segments per curve the exact curve shape. The higher the number is the smoother is the
final generated curve.
Cross-section The generated "curved" beam member has got a constant cross-
section. If necessary, it may later altered via standard beam-
modification functions.

Defining a new catalogue block

Catalogue block manager
The Catalogue block manager is a tool that provides for all the possible operations related to the definition or
editing of catalogue blocks. The user may to:
 define a new catalogue block,
 select an already defined catalogue block and insert it repeatedly into the project,
 choose an already defined catalogue block, modify it as required and insert the modified variant into
the project.

254
 Geometry

The Catalogue block manager is one of the managers integrated in SCIA.ESA PT and its layout and
operation are identical to other SCIA.ESA PT Managers.
The Catalogue block manager is open when function Catalogue block is activated. It may represent one of
the steps in the General procedure for the definition of a new catalogue block.
Generally, there are several ways to open the Catalogue block manager:
 Tree menu function Library > Catalogue blocks.
 Tree menu function Structure > Catalogue blocks.
 Menu function Libraries > Catalogue blocks.

Note: Which way is actually chosen depends on two factors: (i) where (what part of the program)
is the manager called from, and (ii) habits of a particular user.

Defining a new catalogue block

The process for the definition (or we can say insertion) of a new catalogue block into a SCIA.ESA PT project
consists of a few steps.
The procedure for the definition of a catalogue block
1. Call function Catalogue block. There are several way to do so:
a. Use tree menu function Library > Catalogue block.
b. Activate menu function Libraries > Catalogue block.
c. Open service Structure in the menu tree and then call function Catalogue block.
2. The function opens the Catalogue block manager. If no catalogue block has been defined yet in
the project, the program automatically opens New catalogue block dialogue (see point 4 of the
procedure.
3. Select function New in the Catalogue block manager dialogue.
4. From the New catalogue block dialogue select the required type of catalogue block (standard
structure).
5. Fill in the catalogue block parameters (name, dimensions, cross-section type, etc.).
6. Review the catalogue block parameters.
7. Close the Catalogue block manager.

255
Reference Guide

8. Insert the catalogue block into the modelling space. This step may be repeated as many times as
required. This insertion phase is a standard "insert new entity" action and can be closed accordingly.

Note 1: Step 2 may be preceded by one more intermediate step. If no cross-section has been
defined when the Catalogue block manager is being opened, the dialogue for the definition of a new
cross-section is opened first. After at least one cross-section is defined, dialogue and Cross-section
manager are closed, then the Catalogue block manager is finally opened.
Note 2: Step 8 is available ONLY IF the Catalogue block function was called from within
service Structure. Otherwise, the catalogue blocks defined in steps 1 to 7 are added into the
project and saved with it when the project is saved, but they are not included into the model.
Note 3: When a catalogue block has been defined and is being inserted into the modelling
space, the mouse cursor is attached to one of the block nodes. If required, the user may change
this node and define a new insertion point of the catalogue block. To do so, button [Change the
insertion point] ( ) that is located at the end of the toolbar above the command line must be
pressed. The catalogue block is then temporarily placed "somewhere" into the modelling space and
the user may select the new insertion point (using any SNAP options that may be convenient for
this). Once the new insertion point is selected, the mouse cursor is attached to it and the user may
finish the insertion of the catalogue block.

Selecting the catalogue block type

The selection of the required catalogue block type or types can be done in a New catalogue block dialogue.
The dialogue consists of the following control and information elements:
List of available catalogue It contains all the available catalogue block types.
block types
List of possible variants It offers possible sub-types for the selected type.
for the current type
Drawing of the currently It shows the particular selected catalogue block.
selected variant
List of already defined It lists all he already defined (inserted) catalogue block.
catalogue blocks
Control buttons They provide for the control of the dialogue.

List of available catalogue block types

The dialogue offers a list of available catalogue block types. The contents of the list may vary depending on
the current configuration of the program. The list provides for the selection of required type of standard
structure (e.g. mast, 2D truss girder, etc.).
List of possible variants (sub-types) for the current type
This dialogue element displays a set of graphical symbols (icons) representing the individual variants of the
catalogue block type that is currently selected in the List of available catalogue block types.
Drawing of the currently selected variant
A small window displays a drawing of the currently selected variant of the currently selected catalogue block
type. A short "description name" of the particular variant is added to the drawing mainly to facilitate the
identification of a particular catalogue block sub-type and type.
List of already defined catalogue blocks
In addition to the available catalogue block types, the dialogue displays a list containing all the catalogue block
that have been defined (i.e. inserted into the project) so far.
Control Buttons
Button [OK]
Button [OK] confirms the selection of a particular type and variant. Once this button is pressed a dialogue for
editing of catalogue block parameters is opened. When the parameters are specified and confirmed, a new
catalogue block is added to the List of already defined catalogue blocks.
Button [Close]
This button closes the New catalogue block dialogue.

256
 Geometry

Specifying the block parameters

The specification of catalogue block parameters can be done in a dialogue for editing of a particular catalogue
block. This dialogue is opened automatically once the user selects and confirms the required type in the New
catalogue block type dialogue. In addition, the editing dialogue can be opened any time later via the [Edit]
button of the Catalogue block manager.
The editing dialogue consists of three main parts:
Graphical window It displays the particular catalogue block. For some types it includes
dimension lines, labels, etc.
Property table It comprises all the parameters the catalogue block and provides for
their insertion and editing .
Legend drawing It shows the meaning of individual parameters on a drawing of a
sample catalogue block structure.
Control buttons They close the editing dialogue in the required way.

Graphical window
The graphical window displays the catalogue block. For some of the types also dimension lines and labels are
available. The drawing immediately reflects any modifications of geometry parameters made in the property
table.
Property table
The property table contains all the parameters that are necessary for full definition of the selected catalogue
block structure. The parameters can be both input or edited in this table.
The parameters can be divided into three groups: name, geometry parameters, and specification of cross-
section or cross-sections. The number of cross-sections that must be specifies depends on the type of the
catalogue block. E.g. curves require just one cross-section, and e.g. 3D frames need three ones.
If the graphical window displays also dimension lines, then there exists a special interconnection between the
property table and graphical window. The principles, main features and advantages of this interconnection are
described in detail in book Cross-sections, chapter Specifying sectional parameters and properties.
Control buttons
Button [OK]
This button closes the dialogue and accepts all the inputs and changes made in it.
If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is inserted into the project.
If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are taken into account and saved into the
project.

257
Reference Guide

Button [Cancel]
This button closes the dialogue and all the inputs and changes made in it are abandoned.
If a new catalogue block has been defined in the editing dialogue it is NOT inserted into the project.
If an existing catalogue block has been modified here, the changes are not taken into account.

Reviewing the block parameters

There are a few ways to see, scrutinise, and edit (if necessary) the parameters of a catalogue block.
Property table in the The Catalogue block manager contains a vertically oriented window
Catalogue block manager that displays the parameters of currently selected catalogue block.
Property table in the Each dialogue for editing of a catalogue block contains a property table
dialogue for editing of a with all the parameters of the edited catalogue block.
catalogue block
Document-style view in This is the most sophisticated kind of display for parameters of a
the preview window catalogue block. It is accessible from within the dialogue for editing of a
catalogue block.

Property table in the Catalogue block manager

The property table in the Catalogue block manager provides for quick overview of parameters of individual
catalogue blocks. It is possible to edit some of the parameters, however, this table is not primarily intended for
thorough editing of a catalogue block.
If a catalogue block should be modified, the catalogue block editing dialogue should be invoked via button
[Edit].
Property table in the dialogue for editing of a catalogue block
The property table in this dialogue provides for both lucid overview of the catalogue block parameters and their
straightforward modification.
Document-style view in the preview window
The parameters of a catalogue block can be displayed in a readable way in the preview window. The preview
window then displays a table with all the catalogue block parameters sorted in it.
The table is in fact a standard SCIA.ESA PT document table and consequently its format can be adjusted to
meet any specific requirements. The adjustment can be done the same way as with any other document table.
This display style can be invoked from within the Catalogue block manager by pressing button [Text output].

User blocks
Introduction to user blocks
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to make a library of his/her projects that are used over and over again. These
projects may be at any time included into a newly created project or appended to an earlier created and
currently edited project.
The projects in this user-created library are called User blocks and the library is called User block library.

Using the user blocks

The application of user blocks can be divided into three independent steps. The steps must be carried out in
the given order and all of them must be made.
Creating the user block
A user block can be created as a standard project. There are no explicit restrictions to it. Usually, the user will
be working on his/her project and either at the end or some time during the design phase s/he decides to make
a user block of the current state of the project.
Then the only thing that must be done is save the project to the disk. It may be useful, however not
compulsory, to use function Save As and give the project such a name that gives a hint about the structure in
the project.
Storing the user block to the library

258
 Geometry

In order to be usable as a user block, the project must be stored in the User block library folder (see
Program settings > Directory settings). This may be achieved in two ways.
 The user specifies the proper path in the Save As dialogue (see paragraph above) and saves the
project directly to the User block library folder.
 The user saves the project to his/her common project folder and then copies the file to the User
block library folder. The file may be copied in any file-management tool (e.g. Windows Explorer,
Total Commander, My Computer dialogue, etc.)

Tip: The user blocks may be stored not only in the given User block library folder, but they may
be arranged in a tree of subfolders. The subfolders may then group user blocks that have
something in common. This arrangement may lead to easier and clearer application of user blocks,
especially if a long time passes from the time they were created and stored.
Inserting the user block into another project
The procedure for insertion of a user block into a project
1. Open service Structure:
a. either by means of tree menu function Structure,
b. or by means of menu function Tree > Structure,
c. or by means of icon Structure on toolbar Project.
2. Select and activate function User blocks.
3. A User block wizard opens on the screen. Its left hand side window shows the organisation of the
User block library folder, i.e. it shows any possible subfolders. The right hand side window then
displays all available user blocks saved in the appropriate folder or subfolder.
4. Select the required folder.
5. Select the required User block.
6. Click [OK] in order to insert the block to the current project.
7. Select the required options for the import (see below).
8. Position the user block to the desired place and click the left mouse button to put the block there.
9. If required, repeat the previous step as many times as required or necessary.

Note: It the User block is a parameterised project, the program asks the user to provide all
necessary parameters in order to complete the definition of the user block.
Import user block parameters
Import type Only structure
Only structural members (beam members, slabs, shells, etc.) will be
imported.
Structure with all other data
Both the structure and all other defined data such as supports, loads,
load cases, connections, etc. will be imported.
Structure with selective other data
The structure will be imported together with user-selected model and
other data.
Only other data
Only the model and other additional data will be imported. No structural
member will be added to the current project.
Model (available only for option Structure with selective other data)
If ON, the model data (e.g. supports) will be imported.
Loads (available only for option Structure with selective other data)
If ON, the loads will be imported.
Connections (available only for option Structure with selective other data)
If ON, the connections will be imported.
Import structure New layers
into The structure will be imported into new layers. The number of newly

259
Reference Guide

created layers corresponds to the number of layers in the user block.

Identical layers by name (when exist)
The import procedure tries to place the structural members from the
user block into identical layers in the current project – if such layers
exist. In necessary, new layers are created.
Current layer
The whole user block is imported into the current (active) layer of the
current project.
Load cases Add block library item
New load cases are added in the Load case manager. The number of
added load cases is equal to the number of load cases stored in the
imported user block.
Collect block library item by name
The import procedure compares the names of load cases in the
imported user block and in the current project and when possible, it
puts the imported loads into the existing load cases.
Cross-sections Analogous to the load cases above.
Load groups Analogous to the load cases above.
Others Analogous to the load cases above.

Note: The number and type of the parameters in the import user block dialogue may vary
depending on the contents of the current project and imported block.
Limitations of the import
Different national code in the imported user block and current project
The national code of the imported user block is changed to the national code of the current project.
Each used material of the user block is shown to the user. User has to assign one material from the current
project. The assignment rule can be remembered and used for next user blocks (then it is applied
automatically without asking). No materials from the user block are added to the new project.
Parameters
After the modification of the user block, all parameters are disconnected from the block items and they are not
copied into current project.

Moving the entities

Introduction to moving of entities
The preparation of a model is rarely completed simply by insertion of new entities such as beam members,
slabs, loads, supports, etc. Most likely you will need to modify the inserted objects in some way in order to
create the model you really need.
SCIA.ESA PT provides a whole range of functions for moving of entities. For some intriguing manipulations the
functions may have to be combined in order to obtain the required effect. Sometimes, there may be a few ways
to obtain the same result. If so, it will be solely on the user which concrete procedure will be selected and
carried out.
The move operations can be sorted by:
 the entity type which is being moved,
 the trajectory followed by the entity that is being moved.
Type of manipulated entity
 move of a geometric entity the description of which is given below,
 move of an additional-data entity (such as load, support, etc.) which is described in a separate
chapter.
Trajectory followed by the manipulated entity
(simple) move It shifts the object from one position to another. The trajectory is a

260
 Geometry

straight line and the orientation of the object remains unchanged.

rotation It rotates the object around a given point. The trajectory is a circle or a
part of a circle.
mirroring It makes a "mirror image" of the object.

Thus, for geometric entities one can use the following set of move functions:
(Simple) Move Move via a property table
Move using a menu function
Move by means of Drag & Drop feature
Move via the right mouse button pop-up menu
Rotation Rotation by means of changing one vertex location
Rotation using a menu function
Rotation via the right mouse button pop-up menu
Mirroring

In addition to move of entities, some other modification functions can be applied, such as copying, deleting,
changing of dimensions, connecting and disconnecting of members, dividing and joining of members, etc.
These functions are described in separate chapters.

Tip: If the modification is supposed to be done with a large or complex model or if the
modification itself is going to be rather excessive, it is highly recommended to make a backup copy
of the project prior to the intended changes. The program contains UNDO function, nevertheless, it
is always better to have got a backup copy so that one can:
 return to the original if the manipulations lead to a state that is even less suitable than the
original,
 compare the results of both variants if the results of the modified structure may seem to
be strange or unexpected.
Note: Please, note that any kind of model modification will lead to the necessity to carry our all
the previously performed calculations once more because the change in the structure geometry, the
re-positioning of load, and the modification of boundary conditions do result in a different
distribution of internal forces.

General rules for move of entities

There exists a set of rules that are followed when nodes or beam members change their position. The rules,
for example, guarantee that an undefined state of geometry or otherwise forbidden situation won’t arise once
the move operation has been carried out.
Linked versus absolute node
SCIA.ESA PT uses two types of nodes: absolute and linked. If a modification function is carried out with a
part of a structure model, the result will depend on the type of nodes that are included in the structure part
being moved. The differences may occur for move of separate nodes as well as for move of whole beam
members (and of course, for move of both nodes and beam members at the same time).
The rules that are applied during move operations are given below. The rules are divided into two separate
parts. The first one deals with move operation that includes nodes only. The other part describes that rules that
are followed when either beam members or beam members and nodes together are being moved.
Rules for move of nodes
 When an absolute node or several absolute nodes are moved, the beam member(s) connected to
the node before the move operation remains connected also after the operation. It is not possible to
"tear" the node out of the beam member. This feature may be used to e.g. rotate, shorten, or
prolong a beam member.
 If all the nodes relating to a particular beam member are selected for the move operation, the result
is the move of the whole beam member. This feature can be therefore deliberately used for the
repositioning of beam members.
 An absolute node can be moved to an arbitrary new position. The connected beam member follows
the move of the node and, as a result, the beam member connected to the moved node may change
its orientation or length or both. A curved beam member may also change its curvature.

261
Reference Guide

 A linked node can be moved in two ways. First, it may be moved the same way as an absolute
node. Second, it can be shifted in a way so that it remains bound to the beam member it relates to.
The latter result is achieved if nodal co-ordinates are modified in the property table.
Rules for move of beam members
 When a beam member is being moved to a new location, it may remain attached to the rest of the
model (with simultaneous distortion of the model) or it may separate from the remaining part of the
model. Which variant actually happens depends on the type of connection between the moved and
unmoved beam members (See below).
 If the beam member that is being moved is connected to the attached beam member s by means of
linked nodes, the connection remains unchanged and the ends of the connected beam members
move together with the moved beam member. That means that the attached beam members may
change its orientation, size, curvature, or both.
 If the connection between the moved and attached beam members is NOT made via linked nodes,
the beam member that is being moved is separated from the structure.
 If a beam member is placed to a new location, the program verifies whether some unattached nodes
would not remain in the original beam member location. If so, such nodes are automatically moved
together with the beam member. If not, the beam member is moved and new end nodes are
automatically created for the beam member in its target location.
 If the beam member end nodes in its target location fit into some of the existing nodes, the existing
nodes are assigned as the end nodes of the beam member and no new nodes are created.
For more information about nodes read chapter Nodes.
Practical examples of node type influence
Let’s assume a simple plane frame consisting of two columns and a horizontal beam.

As the first step, let’s consider that the right hand column is connected to the horizontal beam by means of a
linked node. The linked node is marked by the short double line drawn at the connection of the members.
Now, let’s move the horizontal beam up and right. The result can be seen in the figure below. The right hand
column has remained connected to the horizontal beam, has inclined to the right and has changed its length.
On the other hand, the left hand column has stayed in its original position without any change. There is no
linked node on the horizontal beam in the point of connection with this column.

In the second step of the example, let’s assume that the linked node is missing also at the connection of the
horizontal beam with the right hand column. Consequently, when the beam is moved (again up and right), both
the columns undergo no change at all (see the figure below).

262
 Geometry

Moving the geometric entities

Moving an entity via the property table
If you want to move a node or a beam member to a new location and you know the co-ordinates of the final
position, you can define the co-ordinates directly in the property dialogue.
When moving a single node, its new position can be defined simply be typing the new X, Y, and Z co-
ordinates. When moving two or more nodes and when moving a beam member or beam members, one must
be aware of the fact that only some of the co-ordinates may be allowed to be changed.
For example, if you want to move a vertical column, it is not possible to move it in vertical direction. The only
change that is allowed is the horizontal move. This limitation stems from the following:
In order to move an entity using the discussed approach, you have to select its end points, i.e. its end nodes.
The move is carried out via the change of the position of these end nodes.
Assuming the situation that two nodes located one above the other, it is illogical to modify their Z co-ordinate,
as the two nodes would become identical. Therefore, only X and Y co-ordinates may be modified in the
example under consideration.
Similar rules are applied for entities oriented in a different than vertical direction.
The procedure for move of a node or nodes
1. Select the nodes you want to move.
2. In the property table, modify the co-ordinate or co-ordinates you require to.
3. Confirm each modified co-ordinate with [Enter] key.
4. After each confirmation, you will see the response in the graphical window, as the model will be
regenerated.
5. Clear the selection (unless you want to continue to work with the selected nodes)
The procedure for move of a beam member(s)
1. Select end nodes of the beam members you want to move.
2. In the property table, modify the co-ordinate or co-ordinates you require to.
3. Confirm each modified co-ordinate with [Enter] key.
4. After each confirmation, you will see the response in the graphical window, as the model will be
regenerated.
5. Clear the selection (unless you want to continue to work with the selected nodes)

Moving an entity via a menu function

Function Move entity can be activated in two ways:
 using menu item Modify > Move,

 using the [Move] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

Both the approached call the same function for move of geometric entities.
The function works with selected entities and moves them to a new location. The selection can be made:
 either before the activation of the function,
 or after the activation of the function.
The Move operation done with a previously made selection of entities

263
Reference Guide

If some entities have been selected prior to calling the Move function, the function requires only the definition
of the move vector and then it performs the move operation with the already selected entities. Once the entities
are moved to a new location, the function is closed and the selection of the entities remains the same as it was
before the function call.
The procedure for the Move operation done with a previously made selection of entities
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other
purposes.
2. Call function Move.
3. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it
can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
4. Define the second reference point.
5. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.
The Move operation done with a selection created as a part the function procedure
The Move function can be, of course, called also without any existing, previously made selection. The selection
of the entities that are supposed to be moved is then made as a part of the Move operation procedure. Once
the operation is completed and the function closed, the selection is cleared and does not exist any more.
However, it may be renewed via the Previous selection function.
The procedure for the Move operation done with an afterwards-created selection of entities
1. Call function Move.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection part of the procedure.
4. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it
can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
5. Define the second reference point.
6. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.

Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu

An entity or a set of entities can be moved quite simply using the pop-up menu that appears when you click the
right button of your mouse.
Move of one or more previously selected entities using the right mouse button pop-up menu
The procedure is very similar to the procedure for the Move operation called from menu and done with a
previously made selection of entities. The only difference is the way the Move function is called.
The procedure for the Move operation using the right mouse button pop-up menu
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved or adopt the existing selection made for other
purposes.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select the Move function.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it
can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains unchanged.
Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu
If only a single entity should be moved, the procedure may be even simpler and shorter. During this approach,
no selection is necessary to be made and, therefore, no selection remains active after the operation.

264
 Geometry

The procedure for Move of a single entity using the right mouse button pop-up menu
1. Place the mouse cursor on the midline of the entity you want to move.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select the Move function.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move is defined by two
reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin of the move vector.
The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end point of the move vector.
Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the entity being moved, it
can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed.

Moving an entity using Drag&Drop feature

An entity can be moved by simple picking and dragging over the graphical window. This approach can be
applied on a single entity as well as on multiple entities.
The procedure for Drag&Drop move
1. Select the entity or entities you want to move
2. Place the mouse cursor on one of the selected entities near to its end point. This end point will
become a reference point for the move operation.
3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
4. Drag the mouse over the graphical window until the moved elements gets to the intended target
position. You will see the current position of the moved entities in thin-line style.
5. Release the mouse button.

Tip: The Drag&Drop approach for the move operation is convenient mainly if the target position
of the moved entity end-point lies (i) on a point of a grid, (ii) in an end-point of another entity, (iii) in
an intermediate point (e.g. one quarter, one half, centre of an arc, etc.) of another entity, or (iv) in
any other point that is easily and uniquely accessible by the mouse cursor.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the Drag&Drop moving procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse
cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the
video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Rotating an entity via its vertex co-ordinate change

If you want to rotate a beam member and you know the final position of its vertices, you may do that in the
property table. This approach is useful mainly if one of the vertices remains in its original position, i.e. if the
vertex (the one that does not change its position) represents a centre of revolution.
In order to rotate a beam member, select one of the end nodes of the beam member and modify its co-
ordinates. The procedure of co-ordinate modification is the same as if you move a node.

Rotating an entity via a menu function

Function Rotate can be activated in two ways:
 using menu item Modify > Rotate,

 using the [Rotate] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

The function works with selected entities and rotates them to a new location. The selection can be made:
 either before the activation of the function,
 or after the activation of the function.
The procedure for the rotation (selections is made after the function is started)
1. Call function Rotate.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.

265
Reference Guide

4. Define the centre of rotation.

5. Define the first reference point. (The angle of rotation is defined by means of two reference points.
These points together with the centre of rotation define the rotation angle.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The move operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.
The alternative procedure for the rotation with pre-selected entities
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
2. Call the Rotate function.
3. Define the centre of rotation.
4. Define the first reference point. (The angle of rotation is defined by means of two reference points.
These points together with the centre of rotation define the rotation angle.)
5. Define the second reference point.
6. The move operation has been completed and the selection remains as it was prior to calling the
rotation function.

Alternative with defined angle of rotation

In any of the above described procedures, you can alternatively define the axis and angle of rotation. The
procedure will be explained for the option when selection of entities is made after the function is called.
Procedure to rotate an entity by given angle
1. Call function Rotate.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. There is a special icon added to the end of the toolbar above the command line: "Enter the angle of
rotation". Press this icon.
5. The Rotation angle and axis dialogue is opened on the screen.
6. Input the angle and specify the way you want to define the axis (see below).
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Input the centre of rotation.
9. If required (depending on the option selected in the Rotation angle and axis dialogue), define the
axis of revolution.
10. The entity is rotated.

Rotation angle and axis dialogue

Rotation
Angle Specifies the angle of rotation

Axis vector
Working plane The axis of rotation is perpendicular to the current working plane.
normal vector
Define axis by The axis must be defined by two points. The centre of rotation is input
cursor for all options. This option then requires one more point.
Enter custom The axis of rotation is defined by the vector – see below.
axis vector
Custom axis The vector defining the axis of rotation if option Enter custom axis
vector vector was selected.

Rotating an entity via the right mouse button pop-up menu

The procedure for the rotation of entities using the window pop-up menu is very similar to the same procedure
for the move of entities. The only difference is that instead of two reference points the user has to define the
centre of rotation and two reference points.

266
 Geometry

For details see chapters Moving an entity via the window pop-up menu and Rotating an entity via a menu
function.

Rotating an entity using Drag&Drop feature

The Drag&Drop feature can be in some special cases applied also for the rotation of an entity. During the
Drag&Drop operation, just one of the end point of a beam member can be moved to another location. If some
specific conditions are satisfied, the result of the operation may be the rotation of a beam member.
The conditions that must be fulfilled are:
 One of the beam members end-points must also be the centre of rotation.
 The other end-point must be the point that is being Drag&Dropp-ed.
 The original and target position of the moved point must lie on a circle with the centre in the centre
of rotation defined above.
If the last of the conditions stated above is not satisfied, the "move" is still a kind of rotation, but
simultaneously, the beam member changes its length. Such an operation is not called rotation in the full
meaning of the word and is considered to be an operation changing dimensions of a member.
The procedure for the Drag&Drop rotation
1. Select one end node of the beam member you want to rotate.
2. Place the mouse cursor on the selected node.
3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
4. Drag the mouse over the graphical window until the node reaches the intended target position. You
will see the current position of the moved entity in thin-line style.
5. Release the mouse button.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the Drag&Drop procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor
over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-
up menu and select function Play.

Mirroring an entity
Any entity can be mirrored to a new location. The "mirror" is perpendicular to the current working plane. The
user just has to define the inclination of the mirror. Once again, as in the case of move and rotation, there are
two possible ways to carry out the operation and two ways to activate the function itself.
Function Mirror can be activated in two ways:
 using menu item Modify > Mirror,

 using the [Mirror] ( ) icon on the Geometrical manipulations toolbar.

The procedure for the mirroring (selections is made after the function is started)
1. Call the Mirror function.
2. Make the selection of entities you want to be rotated.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Define the first reference point. (The plane of the mirroring is always perpendicular to the current
working plane. The precise orientation of the mirror is then defined by means of two reference
points.)
5. Define the second reference point.
6. The mirroring operation has been completed and the selection is cleared.
The alternative procedure for the mirroring with pre-selected entities
1. Make the selection of entities you want to be moved.
2. Call the Mirror function.
3. Define the first reference point.
4. Define the second reference point.
5. The mirroring operation has been completed and the selection remains as it was prior to calling the
mirroring function.

267
Reference Guide

Moving the additional data entities

Introduction to moving of additional-data entities
The term Additional data covers two major groups of entities: loads and model data (e.g. supports, hinges,
etc.). Both the groups form a very important part of a SCIA.ESA PT project. Even though the two groups have
a lot in common, they represent separate compact units. The units are dealt with in separate chapters in this
manual. Therefore, also the move operations for the individual units are explained in separate texts. This
division has been applied in order to provide the reader with a good consistency in chapters devoted to related
topics.
The relevant chapters are:
 Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data
 Loads > Modifying the existing load > Moving the loads
 Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Copying the model data
 Loads > Modifying the existing load > Copying the loads

Copying the entities

Introduction to copying of entities
Copying of beam members is an easy way to create models of complex structure. This is useful particularly if
the geometry of the modelled structure shows at least a few signs of regularity.
Beam members may be copied one by one or en bloc. It is possible to create only one or more copies at a
time. If required, additional beam members may interconnect the individual copies with the original and with
each other in specified point.
In general, the user may choose from the following approaches:
 making a single copy of the original using menu function,
 making a single copy of the original using the pop-up menu of the graphical window,
 making multiple copies at a time with an advanced definition of copy parameters (e.g. the copied
members may rotate simultaneously with being shifted)

Making a single copy via menu function

The procedure to make a single copy of a beam member
1. Start function Copy:

a. either: use button [Copy] ( ) on toolbar Manipulations

b. or: open menu function Manipulations > Copy
2. Select beam member(s) that should be copied.
3. Press key [Esc] to end the selection phase.
4. Define the direction and distance for the copy operation. That is, define first and second point of a
vector that defines both the direction and distance. (The vector along which the selected entities
move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the
Start point and defines the origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End
point and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not
have to be located on the entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling
space.)
5. Once you define the second point, the action of copying is performed.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.
7. The function is closed.
An alternative procedure for making a single copy of a beam member
In general, the alternative procedure is identical to the one above. The difference is that you may swap the first
two steps.
1. First, you select the entities.
2. Second, you open the Copy function.

268
 Geometry

This approach means that once the second point of the copying vector (i.e. the vector that define the direction
and distance for the copy operation) is specified, the copy operation is performed. The selected entity remains
selected and may be copied to another location.

Making a single copy via window pop-up menu

Copying arbitrary number of entities
The procedure for the copy operation
1. Select the entities to be copied.
2. With the mouse cursor inside the graphical window but NOT OVER any entity, click the right mouse
button.
3. A menu appears on the screen
4. Select function Copy.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create
the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the
origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end
point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the
entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The operation is performed, copies are created, the function is closed and the selection remains
unchanged.
Copying just a single entity
When only a single entity is copied, it is not necessary to make any selection.
The procedure for the copying of a single entity
1. Position the mouse cursor into the graphical window and over the entity you want to copy.
2. Click the right mouse button
3. A menu appears on the screen
4. Select function Copy.
5. Define the first reference point. (The vector along which the selected entities move in order to create
the copy is defined by two reference points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the
origin of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point and defines the end
point of the copy vector. Please note that the first reference point does not have to be located on the
entity being copied, it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
6. Define the second reference point.
7. The operation is performed, the copy is created, and the function is closed.

Tip: This approach can be applied even if no entity has been already inserted into selection. The
fact that the mouse cursor is positioned on an entity has bigger priority that the fact that any
selection has been made. Therefore, it is possible to prepare a selection for any operation, then
position the mouse cursor over a single entity and copy this particular entity. The selection remains
untouched.

Making multiple copies via menu function

SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to make a multiple copy of the original entity. For this operation, the user has to
adjust a set of copy parameters. The parameters are grouped in a dialogue that opens automatically once the
Multicopy function is activated.
Number of Specifies the number of copies that will be made.
copies
Connect Defines whether the individual copies will be interconnected by means
selected nodes of newly inserted beam members. If so, the user must specify the
with new beams nodes (i.e. insert them into the selection for the copy operation) where
the interconnection will be realised.
Distance vector By default the distance vector is defined by means of two reference
points specified by the user. (The vector along which the selected
entities move in order to create the copy is defined by two reference

269
Reference Guide

points. The first reference point is the Start point and defines the origin
of the copy vector. The second reference point is called the End point
and defines the end point of the copy vector. Please note that the first
reference point does not have to be located on the entity being copied,
it can be defined anywhere within the modelling space.)
However, it is possible to enter the vector numerically in the Multicopy
table.
Rotation By default, the copied members are just shifted along the specified
vector (see above). It is however possible to rotate the copied
members during their "move".
How to define The distance input either in the table or by means of two reference
the distance points can specify:
 either the distance between two adjacent copies,
 or the distance between the original and the last copy.
If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options
becomes identical.
How to define The rotation angle input in the table can specify:
the rotation
 either the angle between two adjacent copies,
 or the angle between the original and the last copy.
If only one copy is being made, the meaning of the two options
becomes identical.
Rotation around The rotation may be defined around UCS axes or around the distance
vector. It is obvious that the latter enables the user to input just one
angle – around the distance vector.

It is clear from the list of parameters that this variant of copy function provides for advanced definition of
copying vector (i.e. the vector that define the direction and distance for the copy operation).
The procedure to make a multiple copy of a beam member
1. Start function Multicopy:

a. either: use button [Multicopy] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations

b. or: open menu function Manipulations > Multicopy
2. Select beam member(s) that should be copied.
3. Press key [Esc] to end the selection phase.
4. Set the parameters for the copy operation (see above for their meaning).
5. Define the direction and distance for the copy operation. That is, define first and second point of a
vector that defines both the direction and distance. (NOTE: This point is automatically skipped if the
distance vector has been input numerically in the table – point 4).
6. Once you define the second point, the action of copying is performed.
7. The function is closed.
The alternative procedure for the multicopy operation
As in the case of other manipulation functions, it is once again possible to swap the first two steps of the
procedure.
1. First, you make the selection of entities that you want to copy.
2. Second, you call the Multicopy function.
Then you follow the procedure given above starting from the step 4.
At the end, the selection that has been made prior to calling the copy function remains unchanged.
The picture below shows a possible application of Multicopy function. A spiral staircase can be "generated"
just in one multicopy step.

270
 Geometry

Deleting the entities

Introduction to deleting of entities
Any entity that is no longer required and becomes redundant or even makes an obstacle to the achievement of
the user’s main goal – creation of an accurate model of the real structure, can be deleted.
It may happen that some entities have been somehow distorted during the modelling process that they
become hidden to the user’s eye. This may happen if two beam members lie on each other (i.e. their middle
axes become identical) of if the beam member length changes to zero.
SCIA.ESA PT provides a set of tools for all above-mentioned circumstances.

Deleting the user-selected entities

The procedure for the deletion of entities
1. Select the entities that should be removed.
2. Start function Delete:
a. either: via menu Modify > Delete,
b. or: via the window pop-up menu.
3. The program informs you about what have been selected.
4. If the report corresponds to what you are expecting, confirm the action. If you are not sure about the
reported message, abort the action, clear the selection and start again.
5. If the action has been confirmed, it is performed and the selected entities are removed from the
project.
It may happen that after the operation is completed some free nodes remain in the project. They may be
removed by means of function Check structure data.

Deleting invalid entities

Invalid entities are such that do not have proper function in the model. They may be for example beam
members of zero length, duplicate beams, free nodes, etc.
Procedure for automatic removal of invalid entities
1. Start function Check structure data.
a. either: use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data,
b. or: start tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Check structure data.
2. Make sure that required options are ticked.
3. Press button [Check].
4. Check the upper right part of the dialogue and verify whether any free nodes have been discovered.

271
Reference Guide

5. If so, make sure that option Delete is selected in required fields.

6. Press button [Continue] to delete the revealed free nodes.

Tip: For more information about function Check structure data see chapter Calculation >
Check of data.

Editing the entity properties

Introduction to editing of entity properties
Once a new beam member is inserted into the model, it does not mean that must be there AS IS forever and
that no property of the beam member can be changed.
The user may at any time open the property dialogue of a particular beam member and edit the properties in it.
In addition, it is also possible to use a simpler procedure – editing in the property window of the application.
This approach is not only faster, but it also provides for simultaneous editing of multiple beam members.

Editing the beam properties in its property dialogue

The procedure for the editing of beam properties in the beam property dialogue
1. Position the mouse cursor over the beam member you want to edit.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. The window pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select function Edit properties.
5. The property dialogue of the beam member opens on the screen.
6. Modify any parameters you need to.
7. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.

Editing the beam properties in the property window

Whenever an entity is selected in SCIA ESA PT, its properties are displayed in the property window.
Therefore, it is possible to simply edit any item in the property window and the change is immediately taken
into account and the entity is re-drawn with the new parameters.
The procedure for the editing of properties of a single beam member
1. Make sure that no entities are in the current selection.
2. Position the mouse cursor over the required entity.
3. Click the left mouse button to select the entity.
4. The properties of the entity are displayed in the property window.
5. Edit any parameter you need to.
6. Clear the selection.
The procedure for the editing of properties of a multiple beam members at a time
1. Make sure that no entities are in the current selection.
2. Select the entities you need to edit.
3. The properties for the selected entities are displayed in the property window (for details see chapter
Selections versus editing of properties).
4. Edit any parameters you need to.
5. Clear the selection.

Note: Please, be careful when editing the properties of multiple entities at the same time. Once
you type and confirm the value into a particular cell of the property window, the change is
immediately made for all currently selected entities. Even if the original value of the edited property
was different for individual entities, it becomes unique with the change being confirmed. The
change is confirmed as soon as you either type the value and press Enter, or as soon as you type

272
 Geometry

the value and leave the cell. The cell may be left either using the left mouse button click on another
cell or pressing Tab key.

Adjusting the buckling parameters

The procedure for adjustment of buckling parameters for a particular member
1. In the graphical window, select the beam member (or members) whose buckling settings should be
modified.
2. The beam member properties are displayed in the Property window.
3. In the table cell Buckling lengths use the combo box to select the required Buckling length definition
and go to the last step of the procedure.
4. If the required Buckling length definition has not been defined yet, use the button at the right hand
side of the cell to create a new Buckling length definition.
5. Press button [Edit buckling] to open the editing dialogue.
6. Adjust required parameters.
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Clear the selection.

Note: When the Buckling length manager is opened, it displays ONLY those buckling length
definitions that correspond to conditions of the selected beam member(s). If e.g. a beam member
with one buckling segment is selected, the manager hides any buckling length system for more
then one segment.

Modifying the shape and dimensions

Treatment of linked nodes in manipulation functions
As stated earlier in chapter Types of nodes, there are two types of nodes in ESA. This paragraph will
emphasize important rules taken into account in manipulation functions.
In SCIA.ESA PT, a connection where the end point of one beam members gets in contact with an intermediate
point of another beam members of two beam members is called a LINKED NODE. The said is true on
condition that the two beam members were "told" to be connected to each other. What, however, remains an
open issue is what should happen to the linked node when one of the beam members is repositioned. Should
the linked node stay "rooted" in the original location, or should it follow the manipulation formula?
As the problem is rather complex, SCIA.ESA PT presents a logical compromise solution.
Manipulation functions are divided into two groups:
 a global change of beam member position and / or orientation is possible,
 only an "in-axis" modification of beam member geometry is available.
In-axis modification
Manipulation where only the "in-axis" modification can be carried out leads to the situation that the linked node
remains in its original position. This group of manipulation functions consists of a limited number of functions:
trim, extend, enlarge, break in defined points.
Out-of-axis modification
Manipulation where only a general modification of the beam member orientation can be performed cause that
the linked node is manipulated as well and may change its position. This is the case of majority of manipulation
functions, e.g. move, rotate, mirror, stretch, scale, etc.
If the manipulation brings any ambiguity to what should be done with the linked node, the linked node is
disconnected and the connection of the two beam members is broken. This may happen in function Join (two
beam members into one).
Examples

273
Reference Guide

The original structure

The cantilever end

moved up and right using
function Move node.

The cantilever end

moved right using
function Move node.

274
 Geometry

The cantilever end

moved right using
function Extend (by
defined length).

Note: The distinction between "in-axis" and "out-of-axis" modification is not based on the actual
result of the manipulation that has been carried out. It is based on the principle, i.e. on the fact
WHAT CAN BE DONE by means of selected manipulation function. If the function provides for an
"out-of-axis" manipulation, rules for "out-of-axis" manipulation are applied even if the final position
of the beam member looks like after an "in-axis" manipulation.

Editing the shape in the property window

Whenever an entity is selected, the property window of the application displays its properties including the
endpoints and even co-ordinates (for nodes). If any of the geometry attributes is changed in the property
window, the shape of the corresponding entity is modifies accordingly.
The procedure to change the endpoints of a beam member
1. Select the entity that should be moved.
2. The property window displays (among others) names of the end-nodes.
3. Input the name of a new end-node or nodes.
4. The beam member changes accordingly.
The procedure to move the endpoint of an entity
1. Select the end point of the entity that should be moved.
2. Type the new values for co-ordinates (you may define the co-ordinates either in the UCS or in the
GCS, you may even combine the definition, i.e. input e.g. X co-ordinate in one system and Z co-
ordinate in the other system).
3. The endpoint moves accordingly.

Editing the shape using Drag&Drop feature

The shape of beam members may be changed using the Drag&Drop feature. Any end point of beam member
can be "grabbed" and "dragged" over the working plane. The trajectory of the dragging determines whether the
operation is a pure rotation or shape modification.
If a curved beam member is modified in this way, it is possible to pick not only the end-point, but also the
characteristic point of the curve. Thus e.g. the shape of Bezier curve can be modified, etc.
The videos below show a few possible applications.
Editing circular arc

Editing Bezier curve

Editing spline

The pictures above are videos that demonstrate the Drag&Drop procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor
over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-
up menu and select function Play.

275
Reference Guide

Scaling the entities

The Scale function changes the size of the selected entities by given factor.
The procedure for the scaling of entities
1. Start function Scale:
a. either call menu function Modify > Scale

b. or click button [Scale] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities to be modified.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Input the centre of affinity.
5. Input the first point defining the magnification scale.
6. Input the second point defining the magnification scale.
7. The operation is performed and function closed.
The alternative procedure for the scaling of entities
As with other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.
1. First, you make the selection.
2. Second, you start the function.
Once the function ends, the original selection remains untouched.
There is one more feature related to this alternative procedure. The function can be opened via the window
pop-up menu. If the pop-up menu is used, one must be aware of where the mouse cursor is precisely
positioned when the right mouse button is clicked. If the cursor is on an empty are of the modelling space, the
operation is carried out with currently selected entities. However, if the cursor is positioned just over a
particular beam member, the function only deals with this particular beam member and the current selection is
ignored.

Stretching the entities

The Stretch function changes the size of the selected entities by given factor.
The procedure for the stretching of entities
1. Start function Stretch:
a. either call menu function Modify > Stretch,

b. or click button [Stretch] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities to be modified.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Input the centre of affinity.
5. Input the first point defining the stretching.
6. Input the second point defining the stretching.
7. The operation is performed and function closed.
The alternative procedure for the stretching of entities
As with other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.
1. First, you make the selection.
2. Second, you start the function.
Once the function ends, the original selection remains untouched.
There is one more feature related to this alternative procedure. The function can be opened via the window
pop-up menu. If the pop-up menu is used, one must be aware of where the mouse cursor is precisely
positioned when the right mouse button is clicked. If the cursor is on an empty are of the modelling space, the
operation is carried out with currently selected entities. However, if the cursor is positioned just over a
particular beam member, the function only deals with this particular beam member and the current selection is
ignored.

276
 Geometry

Trimming the entities

The Trim function trims the selected entities according to the specified "trimming" entity.
The procedure for the trimming of entities
1. Start function Trim:
a. either call menu function Modify > Trim,

b. or click button [Trim] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select entities to which the other ones should be trimmed.
3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.
4. Select entities that should be trimmed (i.e. shortened).
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by
the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the
function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command
line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.
Example:
before trimming after trimming

Extending the entities

The Extend function extends the selected entities according to the specified "boundary" entity. In order words,
the function extends the selected entities in a way so that they reach and touch the other specified entity.
The procedure for the extending of entities
1. Start function Extend:
a. either call menu function Modify > Extend,

b. or click button [Extend] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select entities to which the other ones should be extended.
3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.
4. Select entities that should be extended.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by
the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the
function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command
line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.
Example:
before extending after extending

277
Reference Guide

Enlarging the entities

The Enlarge function extends the selected entities by a given value.
The procedure for the enlarging of entities
1. Start function Enlarge by defined length:
a. either call menu function Modify > Enlarge by defined length,

b. or click button [Enlarge by defined length] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical

manipulations,
2. In the dialogue that appear on the screen, type the value by which the selected entities should be
enlarged.
3. Select entities that should be enlarged.
4. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the selection is stored by
the computer and cleared. All the selections necessary for the successful performance of the
function must be made from within the function according to the instructions given on the command
line. Once the function is closed, the original selection is restored.

Breaking the entities in defined points

The procedure for the breaking of an entity in a specified point
1. Start function Break in defined points:
a. either call menu function Modify > Break in defined points,

b. or click button [Break in defined points] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical

manipulations,
2. Select the entity that should be broken.
3. Press [Esc] to end this particular selection.
4. Define the point of division.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Breaking the entities in intersections

Any intersecting entity can be divided in the point of intersection, if required.
The procedure for the breaking of entities in the point of their intersection
1. Start function Break in intersections:
a. either call menu function Modify > Break in intersections,

b. or click button [Break in intersections] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical

manipulations,

278
 Geometry

2. Select the entity that should be broken.

3. Press [Esc] to end the function.
4. All the selected and intersecting entities are divided (broken) in the point of intersection.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Coupling the entities

If required, any two entities that touch each other in their endpoints can be coupled (joined) to create a single
entity.
The procedure for the coupling of entities into one
1. Start function Join:
a. either call menu function Modify > Join,

b. or click button [Join] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entity that should be joined together.
3. Press [Esc] to end the function.
4. The individual entities are coupled.

Note 1: The entities that are being coupled together, must lie on one line. Otherwise, it is not
possible to create a single beam member from them.
Note 2: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Reversing the orientation of an entity

Each entity has got its starting point and end point. These points for example define the orientation of the local
X-axis of a beam member. If necessary, the user may reverse the orientation by swapping the end-nodes.
The procedure to reverse the orientation of a beam member
1. Start function Reverse orientation:
a. either call menu function Modify > Reverse orientation,

b. or click button [Reverse orientation] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,

2. Select the entities that should be reverted.
3. Press [Esc] to end the function.
The alternative procedure to reverse the orientation of a beam member
As with some other geometry manipulation functions, it is possible to swap the first two steps.
1. First, you make the selection.
2. Second, you start the function.
The function is immediately performed and automatically closed.

Note: The change of beam member orientation can be easily verified when local co-ordinate
system of the edited entity is displayed. The direction of the local X-axis inverts once the function is
finished.
Example:
before reversing after reversing

279
Reference Guide

Inserting a node into a polygonal entity

Into any entity (polygonal or single-segment one) an inner vertex may be inserted. The inserted vertex may be
used as a node for further geometrical manipulations. For example, another entity may use it as its end-point,
the node may be moved to modify the shape of the original entity, etc.
The procedure for the definition of an inner vertex
1. Start function Insert node:
a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – Insert node,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Insert node into polyline] ( > ) on toolbar
Geometrical manipulations,
2. Select the polylines where the inner nodes (vertices) should be inserted.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Define the points where the inner nodes should be located.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.
6. The nodes are inserted into the selected polylines in the defined points.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
Only the points for the inner nodes must be then specified.

Deleting a node from a polygonal entity

This function is analogous to the insertion of a node into a polyline. However, it removes the selected inner
nodes from an existing polygonal entity. The result is that the selected vertex is removed and the two adjacent
vertices are connected with a straight line.
The procedure for the deletion of an inner vertex
1. Start function Delete node:
a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Edit polyline – Delete node,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Delete node on polyline] ( > ) on toolbar
Geometrical manipulations,
2. Select the polylines from which the inner nodes (vertices) should be removed.
3. Press [Esc] to end the selection.
4. Select the nodes that should be removed.
5. Press [Esc] to end the function.
6. The selected nodes are removed from the selected polylines.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.
Only the inner nodes for the deletion must be specified.

280
 Geometry

Coupling curves into a polyline

Any two entities may be joined together to create a polygonal entity. The only prerequisite is that the two
entities must have one common end-point.
The procedure for joining of entities into a polyline
1. Start function Join curves into polyline:
a. either call menu function Modify > Polyline edit > Join curves into polyline,

b. or click button [Polyline edit ] > [Join curves into polyline] ( > ) on toolbar
Geometrical manipulations,
2. Select the entities that should be joined together.
3. Press [Esc] to end the function.
4. The entities are joined together and from now on they represent a single polygonal entity.

Note: If any entities have been selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not
require making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the circular arc angle

A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc’s angle, the
arc's bulge, and the arc's radius.
The procedure for the modification of the angle of a circular arc
1. Open function Edit arc angle:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc angle]
( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by angle.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the circular arc bulge

A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc's angle, the
arc’s bulge, or the arc's radius.
The procedure for the modification of the bulge of a circular arc
1. Open function Edit arc bulge:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc bulge]
( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by bulge.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

281
Reference Guide

Editing the circular arc radius

A defined circular arc may be edited afterwards if such a need arises. It is possible to edit the arc's angle, the
arc's bulge, or the arc’s radius.
The procedure for the modification of the radius of a circular arc
1. Open function Edit arc radius:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit arc radius]
( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – arc by radius.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Editing the Bezier curve weight factors

The procedure for the modification of a Bezier curve
1. Open function Edit Bezier weight factors:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Edit Bezier
weight factors] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Edit curve – Bezier weight factors.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select and edit multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to end the selection.
4. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Type the new value.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. The modification of the shape is made accordingly.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

It is also possible to edit the shape of a Bezier curve using the Drag&Drop feature.
The alternative procedure for editing of Bezier curve shape
1. Simple select the curve you want to edit.
2. The curve is then highlighted including the two control points located outside the curve.
3. Position the mouse cursor over the required point.
4. Press and hold the left mouse button.
5. Drag the mouse over the pad to place the point into its new location.
6. Release the button.

Converting a curve into a line

Any curve, i.e. circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve and spline can be converted into a straight line, if
necessary. SCIA.ESA PT offers a universal function that converts any curve into a line.
The procedure for the conversion of a curve into a line
1. Open function Convert curve to line:

282
 Geometry

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert curve to
line] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert curve to line.
2. Select the arcs that should be edited. It is possible to select multiple arcs at time.
3. Press [Esc] key to carry out the conversion.

Note: If any entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand.

Converting a line into a circular arc

If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, beam members defined as straight may be
afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a circular arc
1. Open function Convert line to circle arc:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to
circle arc] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to circle arc.
2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.
3. Define an intermediate point of the arc.
4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the
other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action
and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a parabolic arc

If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, beam members defined as straight may be
afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a parabolic arc
1. Open function Convert line to parabolic arc:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to
parabolic arc] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to parabolic arc.
2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.
3. Define an intermediate point of the parabola.
4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the
other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action
and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a Bezier curve

If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, beam members defined as straight may be
afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a Bezier curve
1. Open function Convert line to Bezier:

283
Reference Guide

a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to
Bezier] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line Bezier.
2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.
3. Define two control points of Bezier curve.
4. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the
other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action
and restores back the original selection.

Converting a line into a spline curve

If required, a line may be converted into a curve. In other words, beam members defined as straight may be
afterwards transformed into curved (shaped) ones. This function can treat only one entity at a time.
The procedure for the conversion of a straight line into a spline
1. Open function Convert line to spline:
a. either click button [Geometrical manipulations with curves] > [Convert line to
spline] ( > ) on toolbar Geometrical manipulations,
b. or use menu function Modify > Curves edit > Convert line to spline.
2. Select the entity (just one) that should be converted.
3. Define control points of the spline. You may input as many control points as required.
4. Press [Esc] to end the definition of control points.
5. The conversion is done.

Note: If just one entity is selected prior to calling this function, the function itself does not require
making of any other selection. The function is applied on the selection made beforehand. On the
other hand, if several entities are selected prior to calling this function, the function clears stores the
selection, clears it, asks the user to select a single entity for the manipulation, performs the action
and restores back the original selection.

Connecting and disconnecting the entities

Introduction to connecting and disconnecting of entities
If a structure consists of more than one member, it is necessary to define the connection of the individual
entities. The connection may be rigid or free or anything in between.
In SCIA.ESA PT the rigid connection is realised by means of linked nodes and cross-links. The "something in
between" connection may be realised by means of hinges (see chapter Hinges) or by means of hinged cross-
links. And there is no need to define a free connection, just let the beam members unconnected.
The difference between individual types of connections can be summarised as follows.
 A linked node is a connection where an end-point of one entity is connected to any point of another
entity.
 A cross-link is the connection of two intersecting entities. Both entities remain "undivided" in the
connection, they just pass through it.
 A hinge may be inserted into an end-point of a beam member if other than rigid connection is
required.

Defining a new connection of two entities

IN order to define a new connection of two entities if the end-point of one entity lies anywhere on the other one,
the user has to insert a linked node. Once the linked node is inserted, the two entities become fixed together. If
other than fixed connection is required, it is necessary to define a hinge in the linked node.

284
 Geometry

The procedure for the definition of a new linked node may vary according to initial conditions:
 The two entities have already been inserted into the model and now the need to connect them has
arisen.
 One entity has been inserted into the model and the user wants to define the point where the other
entity should be connected. However, the other entity will be defined later. (see paragraph Inserting
a linked node for future connection of an entity)
The procedure for connection of two entities
1. Open function Connect nodes to beams:
a. either using menu function Modify > Connect members/nodes
b. or using button [Connect nodes to members] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations
c. or using button tree menu function Connect members/nodes.
2. Select beam members and / or nodes that should be connected.
3. Close the function.
It is possible to apply an alternative procedure and swap the first two steps of the stated procedure.
The alternative procedure for the connection of two entities
1. Select beam members and / or nodes that should be connected.
2. Open function Connect nodes to beams:
a. either using menu function Modify > Connect members/nodes,
b. or using button [Connect nodes to members] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.
c. or using button tree menu function Connect members/nodes.
3. The function is carried out and closed.

Note: It is important to know what one wants to connect and make the selection accordingly.
This note is important especially for curved beam members. If the two connected beam members
have two or more intersections and both the beam members are selected for the operation, the
connection (linked nodes) are created in all the intersection points. Therefore, if the connection of
such beam members is required in one specific point only, it is necessary to select the required
end-point of the first beam member (i.e. its node) and the other beam member. Then the
connection is generated in the selected node only.

Inserting a linked node for future connection of an entity

It is possible to specify a point on a beam member where another entity will be later attached.
The procedure for the definition of the connecting point (for later insertion of the other entity)
1. Open function Node on beam:
a. either using menu function menu Tree > Structure > Node on beam,
b. or using service Structure and function Node on beam.
2. Select the beam member where the point (i.e. linked node) should be defined.
3. Specify the location of the linked node.

Defining a new connection of intersecting entities

Any two intersecting entities may be connected in a point called cross-link. The cross-link ensures that the
two entities remain undivided but act together and allow for transfer of internal forces from one entity to the
other one.
The cross-link may be either fixed or hinged. The hinged variant does not transfer bending moments from one
entity to the other.
The procedure for the definition of a new cross-link
1. Open function Cross-link
a. either from menu Tree > Structure,
b. or from tree menu service Structure.

285
Reference Guide

2. In the Property window specify the parameters of the cross-link, i.e. its name and property: fixed
versus hinged.
3. Select the beam members that should be connected.
4. Close the function.
5. The cross-link is generated and displayed in the form of a thick dot with thin short lines along the
connected beam members.
It is possible to use an alternative procedure, which means that first, the selection of beam members is made
and only then the function is called. If applied, this procedure does not require the user to close the function
but does not allow for the modification of cross-link parameters. They would have to be edited afterwards.

Modifying the connection of two entities

Any defined linked node can be edited if required. Any of its parameters can be reviewed or changed.
Name It is used for identification of the node.
Connection Says that the node is connected (linked) to an entity. States the
"owner" of the node.
Coordinate Specifies the co-ordinate type by means of which the position of the
node on its "owner" is defined.
Position x Defines the position.
LCS The node can have its local coordinate system. To define it, at least
one UCS must be defined by the user. If it is done, it is possible to
coincide the LCS of the node with the required UCS.
(see also Defining a local co-ordinate system of a node).

The procedure for the modification of linked node properties

1. Select the node you need to modify.
2. The node parameters are displayed in the Property window.
3. Modify any parameter you need to.
4. The modification is immediately taken into account.
5. Clear the selection.

Note 1: It is possible to edit the linked node even if it has not been attached to the second entity.
Thus e.g. its relative position on the beam member can be modified.
Note 2: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the
change made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes.
Note 3: The Property window shows among others the beam members that are connected in the
selected node.

Modifying the connection of intersecting entities

Any defined cross-link can be edited if required. Any of its parameters can be reviewed or changed.
Name It is used for identification of the node.
Connection Defines the type of the connection (fixed or hinged)

The procedure for the modification of cross-link properties

1. Select the cross-link you need to modify.
2. The cross-link parameters are displayed in the Property window.
3. Modify any parameter you need to.
4. The modification is immediately taken into account.
5. Clear the selection.

Note 1: It is possible to modify several nodes at a time. The user must be aware of that the
change made in the Property window will be applied to all selected nodes.

286
 Geometry

Note 2: The Property window shows among others the beam members that are connected in the
selected cross-link.

Deleting the connection of two entities

Deleting the connection via the property table of the linked node
To delete the connection of two entities realised by means of a linked node, the connection itself must be
removed, not the node.
The procedure for deletion of connection realised by means of a linked node
1. Select the node where the connection should be removed.
2. The node parameters are displayed in the Property window.
3. In the Property window click the button next to cell Linked node (the button contains the name of the
connected beam member).
4. A short pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Click item Disconnect.
6. Clear the selection.
Deleting the connection via the function for disconnection of entities
The procedure for disconnection of two entities
1. Open function Disconnect linked nodes:
a. either using menu function Modify > Disconnect linked nodes,
b. or using button [Disconnect linked nodes] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.
2. Select beam members and / or nodes that should be connected.
3. Close the function.
It is possible to apply another altered procedure and swap the first two steps of the procedure.
The alternative procedure for the disconnection of two entities
1. Select beam members and / or nodes that should be connected.
2. Open function Disconnect linked nodes:
a. either using menu function Modify > Disconnect linked nodes,
b. or using button [Disconnect linked nodes] ( ) on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.
3. The function is carried out and closed.

Note: It does not matter whether a node or a beam member is selected. Always either the linked
node that is selected directly or the linked node connecting the selected beam member or members
is removed.

Deleting the connection of intersecting entities

To delete the connection of intersecting entities realised by means of a cross-link, the cross-link itself must be
removed
The procedure for deletion of connection realised by means of a cross-link
1. Select the cross-link that should be removed.
2. Open function Delete:
a. either using menu function Modify > Delete,
b. or using the window pop-up menu function Delete.
3. Confirm the action.
4. The cross-link is deleted.

287
Reference Guide

Truing of slabs and walls

Parameters controlling the alignment of the structure
These parameters control the alignment, connection, and check of the structure.
Align structural entities to planes (moving nodes)
This group of parameters controls the process of alignment of entities into selected planes.
Align If ON, selected structural members will be checked and,
if necessary, aligned to appropriate planes.

Master planes
Planes of (This option is available ONLY if (i) project functionality Parameters is ON
parametric and (ii) at least one coordinate of at least one node of the structure is
input defined through a parameter.)
The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the planes created
in nodes whose at least one coordinate is defined by means of a
parameter.
For example, if the X-coordinate of a node is defined as a parameter, the
YZ-plane is put into this node and it forms the master plane. Similarly, if
e.g. the Y-coordinate is defined through a parameter, the master plane is
put into the XZ plane created in the node.
GCS main The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the three main
plains planes of the global coordinate system.
GCS parallel The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the planes parallel
planes with three main planes of the global coordinate system.
UCS XY The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into all XY planes of all
planes the defined user coordinate systems.
UCS XY The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into planes parallel with
parallel all the XY planes of all the defined user coordinate systems.
planes
Line grid The selected entities will be aligned in order to fit into the main planes of
planes the line grid.
Max. distance This parameter specifies the maximum distance between parallel master
between planes for which the tested plane is considered a new master plane. If the
parallel tested plane is closer to an existing plane, then no new master plane is
master created and the tested plane is coincided with the existing plane.
planes
Note: Max. distance between parallel master planes must be greater
than Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned.
Max. angle Analogous to the condition above.
between
master
planes
Parameterize (This option is available ONLY if (i) project functionality Parameters is ON
the structure and (ii) at least one coordinate of at least one node of the structure is
by master defined through a parameter.)
planes If the program creates master planes in the nodes defined through a
parameter (see Planes of parametric input above) and if this option is ON,
then the program parameterizes all the nodes found in the appropriate
master plane. Follow the example below.

288
 Geometry

Let us assume a simple structure with four columns. Just one column
head (marked with the arrow) is defined by means of a parameter for the
Z-coordinate. The X- and Y-coordinates of this column head and all the
coordinates of other column heads are defined directly by a number. Now,
if options Parameterize the structure by master planes and Planes of
parametric input are ON, the program does the following (among other):
- it checks if there is a nodal coordinate defined through a parameter (in
our picture: the Z-coordinate of the node marked with the arrow is
parameterised),
- if so, it creates a plane "perpendicular" to the parameter: which means
that if the parameter is defined for the Z-coordinate, the XY-plane is
created and put into the parameterised node (in the picture: shown as
transparent),
- if other nodes lie in this plane, their appropriate coordinate is
parameterised as well (in our picture: the Z-coordinate of the remaining
three column heads is parameterised).

Limits
Max. distance between If the distance between the master plane and tested node
master plane and node to be is greater than the value specified here, the alignment is
aligned not performed. Otherwise, the node is aligned into the
plane.
Max. total displacement of If the alignment of the node would mean that the node
node would move more than specified in this field, the
alignment is not performed. This value prevents creation
of long and sharp corners if two planes meet at a very
small angle.
Note: Max. distance between master plane and node to
be aligned must be lower or equal to Max. total
displacement of node.
Keep original shape of the If ON, the alignment uses eccentricities to keep the
model original shape of the structure. If OFF, the individual
members are aligned into the midplane.
The meaning of the parameter can be best explained
using a simple example of three walls put one onto
another.
Let us assume a sample structure composed of three
walls of different thickness with one face aligned.

289
Reference Guide

If the option is ON, the program generates exactly this

shape. On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the
program considers the shift of the walls as an inaccuracy
and puts their mid-plane into one plane - see below.

Geometrical tolerance
The parameters in this group are identical with those in Setup > Geometry/Graphics. These values are used
for all geometrical operations and for your convenience, they are added into this dialogue as well.
Keep original shape of the If ON, the alignment uses eccentricities to keep the
model original shape of the structure. If OFF, the individual
members are aligned into the midplane.
The meaning of the parameter can be best explained
using a simple example of three walls put one onto
another.
Let us assume a sample structure composed of three
walls of different thickness with one face aligned.

290
 Geometry

If the option is ON, the program generates exactly this

shape. On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the
program considers the shift of the walls as an inaccuracy
and puts their mid-plane into one plane - see below.

Min. distance of two nodes, Specifies the min. distance of two nodes for which the
node to curve two nodes are considered separate nodes. If the real
distance of two nodes is lower than this parameter, the
two nodes are merged together.
Max. distance of node to 2D Specifies the maximal allowable distance of a node from
member plane the plane of a 2D member. If the actual distance is larger
than this limit value, the geometry is considered invalid
and a corresponding warning is issued.
Recommendation: These two parameters should be lower at least by a factor of ten than parameters Max.
distance between parallel master planes, Max. distance between master plane and node to be aligned and
Max. total displacement of node.

Connect
This group of parameters control the process of connection of intersecting and "touching" entities.
Connect If ON, the program connects automatically the intersecting

291
Reference Guide

entities and provides for the transfer of loads and internal

forces between them.
Link nodes of slabs as This option works only with vertex-nodes of slabs. It has no
linked nodes to beam influence on internal nodes.
If ON, the node where a slab and a beam member are
connected is made as a linked node. If so, any future
manipulation with the beam member affects also the node of
the slab. The node follows the movement of the beam
member and the shape of the slab is modified accordingly.
Example: Let us assume the following simple structure.

If the option is ON and the linked node is generated and if

we then move the column by a certain distance, the slab
"follows" the movement.

On the other hand, if the option is OFF, the same operation

(moving the column) will split the structure into two parts.

Link free nodes as This option has meaning only for XML import from certain
internal nodes programs that allow to define free nodes used e.g. for the
definition of loads. In SCIA•ESA PT such nodes are linked
as internal nodes of appropriate slabs (it means that those
free nodes must be located inside of a slab).

292
 Geometry

Check structure data

This group controls the process in which the structure data are checked for compliance with restrictions implied
by SCIA•ESA PT algorithms and Finite Element Method principles.
Check If ON, the data are check and, if necessary and
possible, corrected.
If OFF, no data check is performed.

Openings in beams
Opening in webs of beams
Normally, when a beam member is defined in SCIA•ESA PT, its cross-section is constant along the whole
length. Haunches and arbitrary beams are the only exceptions. But even for these two situations, we usually
have a solid web of the beam member that may change its height or width or both over a specified interval.
Function Opening in beams (Member 1D opening) introduce a qualitatively new feature. This function enables
you to define an opening anywhere in the beam member. Compare the two beam members in the following
picture to understand what the opening means.

Parameters of the opening

General
Name Specifies the name of the opening
Shape Rectangular
The opening is rectangular in shape.

Circular
The opening is circular in shape.

Cross-section
The shape of the opening is defined by a specific cross-section
(e.g. Z-section as in the figure below).

293
Reference Guide

Rectangular shape
B Width of the rectangular opening.
H Height of the rectangular opening.
Alpha Inclination of the opening.

Circular shape
Diameter Diameter of the circular opening.
Number of edges The circle of the opening is idealised by a polygon with n-
vertices. The number here specifies the number of edges
(vertices) of this idealised shape of the opening.

Cross-section-type shape
Cross-section Specifies the cross-section that defines the shape of the
opening.
Alpha Inclination of the opening.

Position
Alignment Centre
Centre-line of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the
cross-section.

294
 Geometry

Top
Top face of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the
cross-section.

Bottom
Top face of the opening is aligned with the centre-line of the
cross-section.

Perpendicular offset Specifies the offset in the position of the opening. The offset is
measured along the height of the opening. I.e. if the opening is
oriented in Y direction (see parameter below) the offset is
made in another direction than for orientation Z.

Orientation Y
The normal to the opening follows the direction of the local Y-
axis of the beam member. The picture below shows a Y-
oriented opening with Top alignment.

295
Reference Guide

Z
The normal to the opening follows the direction of the local Z-
axis of the beam member. The picture below shows a Z-
oriented opening with Top alignment.

Beta Rotation of the opening around the X-axis of the beam

member.

Depth Full
The opening goes through the whole thickness of the web of
the cross-section. (For inclined and rotated openings it cuts the
flanges as well).

296
 Geometry

Partial
The opening cuts out just a portion of the web.

Depth value Specifies the depth of the partial opening.

The depth is measured from one side-face of the beam

cross-section. In order to cut a part of the web from the other
side, define angle Beta equal to 180 degrees, which turns the
opening around and the depth is measured from the other face.

Calculation
Use for analysis and If ON, the opening is used for the calculation and design.
design If OFF, the opening is used just for the drawings and the
calculation is performed with the original cross-section without
any openings and cut-outs.

Number of FE Specifies the number of finite elements generated along the

length of the opening.
Note: For rectangular opening parallel with the longitudinal axis
of the beam member, a single finite element is sufficient. For
other configurations, larger number is necessary to model the
opening properly.

297
Reference Guide

Geometry
Position x Defines the position of the opening in the direction of the local
X-axis of the beam member.

Coordinate definition Selects if the position is defined in relative (<0, 1>) or absolute
coordinates.

Origin The position can be measured from the beginning or from the
end of the beam member.

Repeat (n) Defines number of identical openings located one next to each
other.

Regularly If ON, the specified number openings is distributed uniformly

along the length of the beam member.
If OFF, the distance between adjacent openings can be defined
– see below.

Delta x Defines the distance between two adjacent openings.

Note: If you need to specify a specific opening that cuts just a specific part of your beam
member (i.e. it does not make just a simple hole), it may be sometimes more efficient to use trial-
and-error approach instead of detailed studying of individual parameters.

The procedure to input a new opening in a beam

1. The beam into which the opening is to be inserted must be already present in the model.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Select and start function Member 1D opening.
4. The Member 1D opening dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Fill in the parameters (see above).
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Select the beam(s) where the specified opening(s) should be inserted.

Note: The openings in beams are accessible only if the project level is set to advanced.

Structural model
Introduction to structural model
structural model, as the name itself suggests, represents the shape of structure with reference to requirements
of design and detailing.
The calculation model is usually simplified to some extent because the numerical analysis does not require or
is not able to process all detailed information about the model. When however, a drawing should be prepared
or some detail of the structure properly designed (e.g. a connection of two steel beam members) more
information is needed.
SCIA.ESA PT stores the two kinds of information separately. Basic geometry information is used for
calculations, structural model information is used for detailing, preparation of drawings, check of connections,
etc.

Parameters of structural model

The parameters describing structural model are summarised in the table below.
priority definition This parameter specifies "how" the priority will be defined.
priority value The value defines the priority of the beam member.
perpendicular This option specifies the alignment of the beam member to its
alignment middle axis.

298
 Geometry

eccentricity definition This parameter defines eccentricity that may be introduced.

eccentricity ey, ez Depending on the previous parameter, the eccentricity can be
specified.
end cuts End-cuts can be defined automatically or manually. See below.
offset parameters Offset parameters differ for automatic and manual end-cuts.
See below.

In addition, there is one more parameter related to structural model. The basic beam parameter Type defines
the structural type of beam member. This parameter defines the priority of the beam member if the priority is
specified according to member.
Priority
The priority is taken into account when connection of intersecting or touching beam members is solved. The
meaning will be best explained on a small example.
Let’s assume a column with a beam member attached to its head. The calculation model looks like:

Now, let’s display the structural model. The priority of the column (B17) is set to 100. The priority of the inclined
beam member (B18) is set to 80. The automatically created detail will look like:

Now, let’s decrease the priority of the column (B17) to 50. The result will be:

299
Reference Guide

Perpendicular alignment
If adjusted to default value, the alignment of the structural model is taken from the alignment of the calculation
model.
Eccentricity
The eccentricity may be defined in several ways:
whole member The eccentricity is constant along the beam member.
each end point The eccentricity is defined separately for the two end points. In
between, it varies linearly.
purlin on rafter The eccentricity is so adjusted so that one member is put (laid)
on the other. This option is useful mainly for "intersecting"
beam members that touch with their surfaces.
See below.

Purlin on rafter
The effect of this option is shown on the following two pictures. The first one shows intersecting beam without
defined eccentricity.

In the second picture, option Purlin on rafter is assigned to transverse beams. As a result they are put atop
the other two beams.

300
 Geometry

Note 1: The priority of "purlins", i.e. the beams with Purlin on rafter option must be lower than
the priority of the intersecting beams. Otherwise, the setting will have no effect.
Note 2: Purlins and rafters must be connected by means of linked nodes. Otherwise the
automatic calculation of vertical offset cannot be performed.

End cuts
Automatic end cuts
Automatic end cuts are calculated automatically. Individual beam members are so adjusted to make a neat
detail in joints. In addition, it is possible to define a gap that must be made between the face of the given beam
member and the joined member.
x-gap begin gap at the beginning of the beam member
x-gap end gap at the end of the beam member

Manual end cuts

The user may define the detail of the beam member end manually. This may be useful for large models that do
not change any more. Once the manual end cut is adjusted, there is no need to calculate it again when the
model is regenerated. It also enables the user to design special details.
begin x-offset end cut in longitudinal direction at the beginning of the beam
member
begin Rz inclination Rz of the face of the beam member at the beginning
of the beam member
begin Ry inclination Ry of the face of the beam member at the beginning
of the beam member
end x-offset end cut in longitudinal direction at the end of the beam member
end Rz inclination Rz of the face of the beam member at the end of the
beam member
end Ry inclination Ry of the face of the beam member at the end of the
beam member

Example
beam:
automatic end cut

301
Reference Guide

beam:
automatic end cut
gap = 50 mm

beam: Offset filled in from previous automatic end cut.

manual end cut The end offset is 50 mm bigger than the beginning offset.

beam:
end offset = 500

302
 Geometry

beam:
end offset = 0
Ry = 135
column:
Ry = 45

Defining the structural model

In order to use the structural model the user has to select this feature in the functionality list in the Project
settings dialogue.
The structural shape may be then defined at the same time as new beam members are inserted into the
model. Or, if preferred, new beam members may be defined without thinking about the structural model and
the structural parameters may be specified later.
The procedure for adjusting the structural model for a new beam member
1. Start the function for the definition of a new beam.
2. In the property table adjust the required beam parameters.
3. At the bottom part of the table fill in the parameters of structural model.

4. Confirm the settings with [OK].

5. Finish the standard definition of a new beam member.

Displaying the structural model

Whether the screen shows the calculation or structural model of the structure is controlled by view parameters.
In general, there are two ways to display the structural model:
 via manual adjustment in View parameters dialogue,
 using fast display swap function View > Set view parameters > structural model.

Note: If the structural model is being displayed for the first time, or if changes were made to the
some of the structural parameters of arbitrary beam or beams, it may be sometimes necessary to
regenerate (or generate) the structural model.

303
Reference Guide

Modifying the structural model

The modification of structural model is subject to the same principles as editing of basic beam properties.
Once a beam member is selected, it’s parameters including structural model parameters are displayed in the
Property window. Here, they may be easily edited.

Note: Due to time response optimisation, the changes made in the Property window may not be
taken into account immediately. In such a situation, the user has to use manual regeneration of the
structural model.

Regenerating the structural model

As the background calculations forced by changes in the structural model may be rather time consuming,
especially when a long set of changes is being made. Therefore, the model itself is not automatically
regenerated on the screen after every particular change. The user must invoke the overall regeneration of
structural model when he/she decides that it’s time to do so.
The procedure for the regeneration of the structural model
1. Call function Generate structural shape:
a. either using menu function View > Set view parameters > Generate structural
shape,
b. or using button Generate structural shape ( ) on toolbar View.
2. The view is regenerated.

Manual input of end cut

In some cases it may be required to input the end cut of structural model manually. In order to save the user
from the necessity to calculate the offset values by hand, it is possible to exploit several functions.
The functions will be explained on simple examples.
One by others
Let’s have a simple frame.

We want to prolong the columns to the top edge of the horizontal beam and shorten the horizontal beam so
that there is a gap 100 mm between the face of the column and the end-face of the beam.
1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method One
by Others.
2. Select the horizontal beam as the member to be cut.
3. Select the two columns as the cutting members.

304
 Geometry

4. Press [Esc] to end the selection of cutting members.

5. Define the gap (the gap was chosen as big as 100 mm in order to make the result of this example
clear on the screen). You can also verify the to-be-cut and cutting members in the dialogue.

6. You get the result:

Others by one
Let’s have a simple frame.

We want to shorten the columns to the bottom edge of the horizontal beam and prolong the horizontal beam to
outer surface of the columns.
1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method Others
by One.
2. Select the horizontal beam as the cutting member.

305
Reference Guide

3. Select the two columns as the members-to-be-cut.

4. Press [Esc] to end the selection of members-to-be-cut.
5. Define the gap (we type zero in our example). You can also verify the to-be-cut and cutting
members in the dialogue.
6. You get the result:

Splice
Let’s have the same frame as in the two examples above.
Let’s focus on one corner only.

We want to join the two members under the 45° angle.

1. Call function Modify > Calculate member end-cut > Calculate member end-cut - method Splice.
2. Select the horizontal beam as the first member.
3. Select the column as the second members.
4. Define the gap of 25 mm.
5. You get the result:

306
 Geometry

Structural shape of 2D members

Even though SCIA•ESA PT is primarily a state-of-the-art and sophisticated tool for static, dynamic, etc.
calculations, it can serve also as a powerful modeller, as it can remember two types of model: structural model
(called CAD model in previous versions of SCIA•ESA PT) and analysis model (called calculation model in
SCIA•ESA PT). The former represents the real shape of the structure and is also used for imports from other
CAD programs, the latter contains certain simplifications and idealisations enforced by the applied numerical
method of solution.
So far, the structural model in SCIA•ESA PT was restricted to beam members only. Now, this feature extends
to plates, walls, and shells as well. The user can take the full advantage of this fact and (and it is important)
within one project define both the tuned analysis model that provides accurate results and fine-looking
structural model reflecting the real configuration of the structure.
But this is not all! SCIA•ESA PT enables the user to import the model of the structure from a third-party
software. Most often, what is imported is the structural shape (fig. 1). The user then faces the problem of
transforming this structural model into a working analysis model – usually, there will be problems with contacts
of adjacent members (fig. 2). SCIA•ESA PT comes with a handy solution. After a single click and a little-play
with a few parameters that control the whole process, SCIA•ESA PT can automatically convert the structural
model into the analysis one (fig. 3). Should it happen that a conflict have arisen during this conversion, the
user is immediately and graphically informed about it in the screen (fig. 4). Once such places are corrected
manually, nothing prevents the user from defining the required boundary conditions, load cases, loads and
other data needed for a successful calculation of the project.
Fig. 1

307
Reference Guide

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

308
Model data
Introduction to model data
A model of a structure created in SCIA.ESA PT consists not only of structural members (such as beam
members, columns, slabs, etc.) but also of a whole set of additional entities. These additional entities are as
important for successful calculation and design as the geometry itself.
The additional entities are called additional data. The term additional data covers loads, supports, hinges,
masses (in case of dynamic analysis), etc. The load represents a complex and rather coherent group and
therefore it is dealt with in a separate chapter.
Entities such as supports, foundations, and hinges are called Model data. They are described in separate
chapters. In SCIA.ESA PT menus and dialogues they are usually treated separately as well, but occasionally
the term Model data is used when the action or setting is related to all model data (e.g. view parameters).

Supports
Types of supports
Point supports
There are three basic types of point supports in SCIA.ESA PT. Each of them, however, can be of many
different configurations.
Standard This support is defined by six
support separate parameters. Each
parameter defines the
constraint in one direction:
translation in X, Y, Z axis and
rotation around the same
axes.

Foundation This support is modelled by

block means of a foundation block.
In addition, some parameters
related to the surrounding soil
are defined as well.

309
Reference Guide

Column This support is used to model

the case where the
supporting is realised by a
column.

Standard support
A standard support defines an idealised supporting restricted to a single point. The user may define the way
the support acts in individual directions, i.e. in translation along and rotation around axes of selected co-
ordinate system.
Free The support is free in the specified direction. That is it imposes
no constraint in the direction.
Rigid The support in fully rigid in the specified direction.
Flexible The support is flexible (elastic) in the specified direction. The
user has to define the required stiffness of the support.
Rigid press only Same as pure Rigid but the support acts ONLY under
compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.
Flexible press only Same as pure Flexible but the support acts ONLY under
compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.
Nonlinear The stiffness of the support is defined by means of a non-linear
function (force-displacement diagram).
For more information read chapter Parameters of a non-linear
support.
Friction The "stiffness" of the support is calculated from defined friction.
See chapter Friction support.

Note: If supports of Press only type (both rigid and flexible) appear in the model, a
NONLINEAR calculation MUST be executed. Linear calculation can be run as well, but it does NOT
take account of the press only behaviour. The nonlinear calculation requires a definition of a
nonlinear load case combination. Unless a nonlinear combination is defined, the nonlinear
calculation is not accessible in the calculation dialogue.
Other parameters of a standard support
Angle This parameter specifies the inclination of the support. The
format of this parameter is:
Rx12,Ry12,Rz12
where Rx defines the inclination from X axis, and Ry and Rz
define the inclination from Y and Z axis respectively. The angle
is input in adjusted angle units.
Size x; These two parameters define the size of the support. The size
Size y parameter is taken into account only if the support is at a slab.
The size is used to calculate the appropriate reduction of slab
bending moment in the surroundings of the support.

Note: Parameter Angle mentioned above and the adjustment of orientation described below are
available for all support types, not only for the standard support.

Orientation of a support

310
 Model data

Support in a node A nodal support may be oriented in:

Support on a beam
 global co-ordinate system,
 local co-ordinate system of the node.
A point support on a beam member may be oriented in:
 global co-ordinate system,
 local co-ordinate system of the node,
 selected user co-ordinate system.

Foundation block
A support may be defined in the form of a foundation block. The supporting is then specified by the material
and dimensions of the block together with the properties of the soil below and above the footing surface.
The support of Foundation block type requires the definition of the following parameters.
Foundation block Selects the type of foundation block.
Foundation Defines the properties of the soil below the footing surface.
Upper soil Defines the properties of the soil above the footing surface.

Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the
Project settings and if material Concrete has been specified for the project.

Column
If only a part of the final structure is modelled (e.g. just one or a few floors instead of the whole building), it may
happen that a support in the model is in fact a column in the real structure. SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to
model even such situation.
The support is defined through the following parameters. The program automatically calculates the stiffness of
the support.
Length Defines the length of the supporting column.
Hinged Says whether the column is pinned at the end or rigidly fixed.
Connection The column may either end in the support or may continue
(e.g. to another floor).
Cross-section Specifies the cross-section of the supporting column.

Line supports
There are three basic types of linear supports in SCIA.ESA PT. They are similar to point support types.
Standard This support is defined by six
support independent parameters. Each
parameter defines the
constraint in one direction:
translation in X, Y, Z axis and
rotation around the same
axes. The parameters are the
same as for point support
except that it is not possible to
define non-linear and friction
line support.

311
Reference Guide

Foundation This support is modelled by

strip means of a foundation strip. In
addition, some parameters
related to the surrounding soil
are defined as well.

Wall This support is used to model

the case where the supporting
is realised by a wall.

Foundation strip
A linear support may be defined in the form of a foundation strip. The supporting is then specified by the
properties and dimensions of the strip together with the properties of the soil below and above the footing
surface.
This type of support is described in chapter Foundation strip and requires the following parameters to be input.
Foundation Defines the properties of the soil below the footing surface.
Width Defines the width of the foundation strip.
Upper soil Defines the properties of the soil above the footing surface.

Note: A foundation block can be used only if the Subsoil functionality has been selected in the
Project settings.

Wall
A structure member may be in real life very often supported by a wall. If this is the case and only a part of the
real structure is being modelled (e.g. one floor), SCIA.ESA PT allows definition of such supporting condition
with minimal effort.
The program automatically calculates the stiffness of the support from the following parameters:
Material Specifies the material of the supporting wall.
Width Defines the width of the supporting wall.
Height Defines the height of the supporting wall.
Hinged Tells whether the wall is rigidly fixed into the supported
member or is pinned into it.
Connection Determines if the wall is only under the supported member or
also above it.

Note: A supporting wall can be used only if material Concrete has been specified for the project
in the Project settings.

312
 Model data

Orientation of a linear support on a beam member

A linear support on a beam member can be acting:
 in the direction of global co-ordinate axes,
 in the direction of axes of the local co-ordinate system of the particular beam member.
The setting can be made in the property dialogue of each new support.

Line support on a slab

Parameters
Name Specifies the name of the support.
Constraint conditions See table below.

Constraint conditions
Free The support is free in the specified direction. That is it imposes
no constraint in the direction.
Rigid The support in fully rigid in the specified direction.
Flexible The support is flexible (elastic) in the specified direction. The
user has to define the required stiffness of the support.
Rigid press only Same as pure Rigid but the support acts ONLY under
compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.
Flexible press only Same as pure Flexible but the support acts ONLY under
compression. If the support gets under tension it stops acting.

Geometry
System The support may be defined in local or global coordinate
system.
Edge Specifies the edge where the support is located.
Position x1 Defines the starting point of the support.
Position x2 Defines the end point of the support.
Coordination definition The position of starting and end point may be defined in
absolute or relative coordinates.
Origin Defines the origin for the coordinate system (above).

Note: A line support on the edge of a 2D member that was input as a shell member can only be
defined in global coordinate system. If the user requires the definition of the constraint conditions in
the local coordinate system of the slab, the 2D member must be input as a plane 2D member.

Surface support on slab

Parameters
Name Specifies the name of the support.
Type Defines the type of support – see below.
Subsoil If necessary for the selected type, this item specifies the
subsoil parameters.

Type
Individual A particular subsoil type is assigned to the slab.
The subsoil is defined by means of C parameters. These user-
defined C parameters are used for the calculation (of e.g

313
Reference Guide

contact stress in the footing surface)

Soilin For such a support, the interaction of the structure with the
foundation subsoil is carried out by means of SOILIN module.
Parameters C1z, C2x, C2y are calculated by SOILIN module.
Note: Parameters C1x and C1y are defined in
Setup > Solver dialogue.
Both Both of the above mentioned types are combined on the same
slab.
The user defines which C parameters will be user-defined and
which ones will be calculated by SOILIN module.
Parameters can be defined in Setup > Solver dialogue. Those
C parameters that are input in this dialogue as zero, will be
calculated by the SOILIN module. Nonzero parameters will be
taken as they are input.
Note: Parameters C1x and C1y must ALWAYS
be user-defined. SOILIN module is not able to
calculate them.

SOILIN
Module Soilin can calculate parameters C1z, C2x, C2y. The other parameters must be defined by the user.
It is also possible to eliminate the automatic calculation of some C parameters and define them manually. This
can be achieved by special adjustment of the subsoil parameters and set the type to Both (!).
If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to zero, this C parameters will be calculated by the program.
If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to non-zero value, such C parameter will be taken as input.
The type Both is not too common and it was introduced mainly for two reasons:
1. I use type Soilin but I want to have different friction in different parts of the structure. Therefore, the solver
setup dialogue is not enough for me, because is just one value can be adjusted there for the friction.
Therefore, I can use type Both and thus I am able to define several subsoils with non-zero constants C1x and
C1y with all other parameters adjusted to zero. When the Soilin module runs, the non-zero constants C1x and
C1y are of higher priority than those determined by the solver and are applied. Other "zero" values indicate
that the values determined by the solver are applied.
2. Sometimes it may be necessary to "suppress" higher values of shear (C2x, C2y) calculated by Soilin
module. This may happen e.g. when a new plate is modelled on an old one and the old plate is defined as the
first layer of the subsoil. It is a correct and proper solution, but as E modules of soil and concrete are
dramatically different, the Soilin module calculates high C2parameters. Consequently, the stiffness of the
foundation slab in the model is bigger than if the two slabs were "joined" together and input as a homogenous
monolith. Therefore, C2 parameters may be reduced artificially. This can be achieved in type Both. I define the
subsoil with zero C1z (it will be determined by the Soilin module) and other non-zero parameters (C2 and
friction). Thus the Soilin module will provide only for C1z parameter.

Friction support
Parameters
From reaction The user may select the reaction that defines the force pushing
against the support.
C flex Stiffness of the support.
mju Coefficient of friction.
If friction of X / Y / Z or XY / XZ / YZ type is selected, one mju
value must be input.
If friction of X+Y / X+Z / Y+Z type is selected, two mju values
must be input.
Independent If simple friction (X, Y, Z) is defined in two directions, this option
is available. It specifies that friction in one direction is
independent on the friction in the other direction.

From reaction

314
 Model data

X, Y, Z The final limit force can be calculated from the reaction in a

specified direction. If a support in X-direction is being defined, it
can be said that the friction force should be determined from
the reaction calculated in either Y or Z direction.
XY, XZ, YZ The final limit force can be calculated as a compound friction.
Only one of the stated options is offered for each direction. E.g.
if a support in X-direction is being defined, it can be said that
the friction force should be determined from the reactions
calculated in Y and Z direction. The friction force is calculated
from the following formula:

X+Y, X+Z, Y+Z The same as above can be said here. Different procedure is
however used to calculate the limit force. E.g. for friction
support in X-direction the following formula is employed:

Note: Friction can be input in one or two directions. It is not possible to define friction in all three
direction otherwise the "thrust" could not determined.
Note: Composed friction (e.g. YZ or Y+Z) can be input in one direction only.
Note: Option Independent friction is available ONLY if simple friction (X, Y, Z) is defined in two
directions.

When inserted into the model, a friction support (friction defined in Y and Z direction) is marked with the
following symbol (remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model
data).

Examples:
Let’s assume a plane XY and a support that can slide on it in any direction with a friction.
X friction
C flex x 1E5
mju x 0.20
from reaction Z

315
Reference Guide

Y friction
C flex y 1E5
mju y 0.55
from reaction Z
Z rigid (or press only)
Independent friction YES

Let’s assume a pipe in a borehole in X-direction.

X friction
C flex x 1E5
mju x 0.20
from reaction YZ
Y flexible
stiff y 5E5
Z flexible
stiff z 3.5E6

Defining a new support

Defining a new support
In order to define a new support, the supported member must have been already inserted into the model.
The procedure differs little bit according to the shape and placement of the support. In general, however, it is
simple and straightforward and the difference for individual variants is only in the specification of the support
precise position.
The procedure for the definition of a new support
1. Open tree menu service Structure.
2. Open branch Support.
3. Start function for the support type that should be inserted:
a. In node for a point support located in a node.
b. On beam for a point support located "somewhere" on a beam member.
c. Line on beam for a linear support of a beam member.
4. Choose the required support type:
a. Standard support
b. Foundation block or foundation strip
c. Column or wall
5. Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).
6. Specify the orientation of the support.
7. Specify the location of the support:
a. No action is needed for a point support in node.
b. Specify the position of the support on a beam member (in the case of point support
on a beam member).
c. Specify the position of the start-point and end-point of support on a beam member
(in the case of linear support on a beam member).
8. Confirm the settings with button [OK].
9. Select nodes (for point support in node) or beam members (for point and line support on a beam
member) where the adjusted supporting conditions should be defined.
10. Close the function.
11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 as many times as required.

316
 Model data

12. Close the service Structure.

Defining a new support on a slab

The procedure for the definition of a new support
1. Open tree menu service Structure.
2. Open branch Support.
3. Start function for the support type that should be inserted:
a. line support on slab edge,
b. surface support.
4. Input necessary parameters for the selected support type (point or linear).
5. Confirm the settings with button [OK].
6. Select slabs where the adjusted supporting conditions should be defined.
7. Close the function.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
9. Close the service Structure.

Defining a new friction support

Procedure for the definition of a friction support
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Support > in node or Support > point on beam.
3. Select the direction for the "friction-controlled-behaviour" (see chapter Friction support for more
information).
4. Type and adjust other parameters of the support (see the second note below).
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Input the support / support into the model.
7. Close the function.
8. Close the service.

Note: In order to use friction supports the Project Setup dialogue options must be assigned
appropriately. Options Nonlinearity and Friction supports must be selected.
Note: See also chapters under Model data > Supports, chapters Point supports and Defining a
new support in particular.

Fast definition of specific support types

Selected types of nodal supports can be inserted into the model in a very straightforward way.
Once the user opens service Structure, a new toolbar is displayed at the top of the command line. This toolbar
offers the most common support types:

 sliding support in a node ( ),

 hinged support in a node ( ),

 fixed support in a node ( ).

The procedure for the fast definition of a support
1. Open service Structure.
2. A new toolbar appears at the top of the command line.

3. Click the required button.

4. The property table for the selected support type is displayed in the Property window.
5. If required, change any parameters.

317
Reference Guide

6. Select nodes to position the support.

7. Close the function.
8. Close the service.

Parameters of a non-linear support

Parameters of a nonlinear support can be divided into two groups:
Stiffness This basic stiffness is used for the initial linear calculation.
Function The function defines non-linear behaviour of the support. This
function is taken into account during the non-linear calculation.

Non-linear function manager

Non-linear function that specifies the behaviour of a non-linear support can be defined in a standard SCIA.ESA
PT database manager.
The function itself consists of a positive and negative branch. The function must always pass the zero point,
i.e. the zero displacement must correspond to zero force. Any "switchbacks" in the diagram are not allowed.
This means that e.g. the positive branch may rise or keep a constant force value but it is not possible to let the
force go down with increasing displacement.
In addition to the function itself, there is a special parameter for the positive and negative axis. Possible values
of this parameter are
Rigid If ON, the support is considered infinitely rigid once the limit
displacement (the last input displacement value defined in the
diagram) is reached.
Free If ON, the support is considered free once the limit
displacement (the last input displacement value defined in the
diagram) is reached.
Flexible If ON, the stiffness of the support is considered constant once
the limit displacement (the last input displacement value
defined in the diagram) is reached. The force value specified
for the last input displacement is used.

Hinges (pins)
Beams
Introduction to hinges
If a structure consists of more than one member, it is necessary to define the connection of the individual
entities. The connection may be rigid or free or anything in between.
In SCIA.ESA PT the rigid connection is realised by means of linked nodes or cross-links and described in
chapter Connecting and disconnecting the entities. The "something in between" connection may be realised by
means of hinges (described in this chapter) or by means of hinged cross-links (see chapter Connecting and
disconnecting the entities). And there is no need to define a free connection, just let the beam members
unconnected.
The difference between individual types of connections can be summarised as follows.
 A linked node is a connection where an end-point of one entity is connected to any point of another
entity.
 A cross-link is the connection of two intersecting entities. The both entities remain "undivided" in the
connection, they just pass through it.
 A hinge may be inserted into an end-point of a beam member if other than rigid connection is
required.

Specifying hinge parameters

Hinge parameters can be input in the property dialogue for a new hinge.
Parameters of a hinge

318
 Model data

Name Is used for the identification of a hinge.

Position on a beam
Constraint conditions
in individual directions
The hinge can be inserted into the starting point of a beam
member, into the end point of a beam member, or to both ends.
Degrees of freedom may be defined independently for
individual directions: translations along X, Y, and Z axes,
rotation around X, Y, and Z axes.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the local co-ordinate
system of the beam member.

Constraint conditions
In each direction (translations along X, Y, and Z local beam member axes, rotation around X, Y, and Z local
beam member axes) the condition may be:
rigid There is no release of degree of freedom defined for the
specific direction. The entities are fully connected in this
direction.
free The degree of freedom in the specified direction is released.
The two entities are not connected in the given direction.
flexible There is defined a certain degree of flexibility in the specified
direction. The user then has to specify the stiffness of the
connection in the given direction.
nonlinear The behaviour of the hinge must be specified by means of a
non-linear function. A particular function may be selected in the
Hinge property dialogue. Unless the function has been
defined earlier, it must be defined when the hinge is being
inserted into the model. It is possible to call the Nonlinear
function manager directly from the Hinge property dialogue.

Defining a new hinge

A hinge may be defined in any connection of two entities.
The procedure fort the definition of a new hinge
1. Open service Structure and call menu Hinge on beam:
a. either using menu function Tree > Structure > Hinge on beam,
b. or using tree menu function Structure > Hinge on beam.
2. The property dialogue for a new hinge is opened.
3. Fill in the parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK] button.
5. Select beam member where the new hinge or hinges should be applied.
6. Close the function.
7. Close the service.

Fast definition of specific hinges

Once the user opens service Structure, a new toolbar is displayed at the top of the command line. This toolbar
offers the most common types of hinges:

 two-direction pin in the first end-node of a beam member ( ),

 two-direction pin in the second end-node of a beam member ( ),

 two-direction pin in both end-nodes of a beam member ( ).

The procedure for the fast definition of a two-direction pin
1. Open service Structure.
2. A new toolbar appears at the top of the command line.

319
Reference Guide

1. Click the required button.

2. The property table for the selected hinge type is displayed in the Property
window.
3. If required, change any parameters.
4. Select nodes where the hinge should be inserted.
5. Close the function.
6. Close the service.

Slabs
Hinges in slabs
A connection of two slabs may be modelled as a fixed one or a hinge may be inserted to create a pinned
connection. Two configurations of slab hinge are allowed:
free connection There is no rotation restraint in the hinge and the two slabs
may freely rotate around the hinge.
flexible connection The stiffness of the hinge in rotation is specified. As a result,
the bending moment is partially transferred through the hinge.

Under any configuration, all translations are fully transferred from one slab into the other.
Parameters
Name Specifies the name of the hinge.
fix Specifies the hinge configuration:
free
A standard pinned connection is use. There is no rotation
restraint.
rigid
The members connected in the hinge are fully fixed. There is
no hinge.
flexible
The connection is partially fixed – the user must define the
stiffness in rotation.
Stiffness For a flexible hinge the stiffness must be input.
Position x1 Defines the starting point of the hinge. By default, the hinge
extends along the whole edge of the slab. However, if required,
it may be restricted to only a part of the edge.
Position x2 Defines the end point of the hinge. See above.
Coordinate definition Selects the coordinate system that is used to define the length
of the hinge.
Origin Specifies the origin of the coordinate system used for the
definition of the length of the hinge.

Example
Let’s input two identical rectangular slabs. In fact, each slab consists of two square slabs attached closely to
each other. This configuration has been chosen with a view to inserting the hinge. Both ends of both slabs are
fixed.
And now, let’s insert a hinge into one of the two slabs – into the middle of the span. The model can be clearly
seen on the figure below.

320
 Model data

Let’s subject the slabs to uniform distributed load acting in the direction perpendicular to the slab. The result
bending moment clearly demonstrates the effect of the hinge.

The top slab (in the figure above) is with the hinge in the middle of the span. The bending moment is zero
there. The bottom slab (in the figure above) is without a hinge and therefore, the middle of the span there is the
place where the bending moment reaches its maximum.
The results can be seen also in the following figure showing diagrams of bending moment displayed on a
longitudinal section across the slab.

321
Reference Guide

Rigid arms
Rigid arms
The modelling of complex structures sometimes requires that two nodes of the model be connected by what
the elementary mechanics call rigid arm. The rigid arm is in fact a very, very, very stiff beam member that
transfers all the internal forces from one pint to another without any change in their value.
ESA PT allows you to insert two types of rigid arms:
1. standard rigid arm, i.e. node-to-node rigid arm.
2. line rigid arm, i.e. node-to-edge(line) rigid arm.
The latter can be used to link a node to an edge of a nearby slab.
Node-to-edge (line) rigid arm
The master must be always a node.
The slave is always a line (edge of a slab).
All finite element nodes generated on the connected line are connected to the master node.
One master node can connect more several lines.

Defining a new rigid arm

Procedure to define a new (node-to-node) rigid arm
1. The parts of the structure that are to be linked by the rigid arm must be already defined.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Start function Rigid arms.
4. Select the master node.
5. Select at least one slave node.
6. End the function.
Inserting a hinge to the slave node
By default the rigid arm is always "rigid". Alternatively, you may modify the inserted rigid arm, so that the slave
node is pinned to the arm.
Procedure to insert a hinge into the rigid arm
1. Select the rigid arm into which the hinge is to be inserted.
2. The properties of the selected rigid arm are displayed in the Property window.
3. Select option Hinge on slave.
4. Clear the selection.

322
 Model data

Defining a new line rigid arm

Procedure to define a new (node-to-edge) rigid arm
1. The parts of the structure that are to be linked by the rigid arm must be already defined.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Start function Line rigid arms.
4. Select the master node.
5. Select the slave edge(s).
6. End the function.
Inserting a hinge to the slave edge
By default the rigid arm is always "rigid". Alternatively, you may modify the inserted rigid arm, so that the slave
edge is pinned to the arm.
Procedure to insert a hinge into the line rigid arm
1. Select the line rigid arm into which the hinge is to be inserted.
2. The properties of the selected rigid arm are displayed in the Property window.
3. Select option Hinge on slave.
4. Clear the selection.
Note: Line rigid arm uses an extra view parameter. This means that the display on standard and
line rigid arms can be controlled separately.

Modifying the existing model data

Changing the parameters of model data
SCIA.ESA PT offers a unique and unified system of editing for all types of entities that appear in the project.
The task of changing model data is no more complex than editing of properties of any geometrical entity.
The procedure for the modification of parameters of model data entities
1. Simply select the model data entity (or entities) that should be modified.
2. The intersection of properties for the selected entities is displayed in the Property window.
3. Change the parameters as required.
4. The change is automatically applied.
5. Clear the selection.
This procedure may be applied to any model data entity. The procedure given above may be thus used for
editing of standard supports, foundation blocks, foundation strips, supporting columns, and all other support
types. It is applicable as well for the modification of hinge properties.
The procedure can also be used to change types of some model data entities. For example, a standard
support may be changed to supporting column, a foundation strip changed to a standard linear support, etc.
The property dialogue also provides for a direct access to individual database managers that are relevant for
the selected entity or entities.
If only a single entity should be modified and the user would prefer to see the regular property table of the
entity including the drawing explaining the parameters, an alternative approach may be used.
The alternative procedure for editing of model data entities
1. Position the mouse cursor over the entity that should be modified.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. The graphical window pop-up menu appear on the screen.
4. Select function Edit properties.
5. The property dialogue for the selected entity is opened.
6. Change any parameters you need to modify.
7. Confirm the settings with button [OK].
8. The operation is completed.

323
Reference Guide

Moving the model data

SCIA.ESA PT distinguishes between basic geometric entities such as nodes and beam members and other
entities called Additional data. Model data are a subset of the Additional data group. Any manipulation with
Model data is carried out by means of manipulation functions for the Additional data.
The procedure for moving of the model data
1. Select the modal data that are to be moved.
2. Icon Move add data ( ) becomes accessible on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.
3. Click the icon.
4. Define the target position for the moved entities.
5. All the selected entities are moved into the new location (i.e. into one particular point or onto a one
particular beam member).
6. Press [Esc] to and the function.
The function for the move of additional data is also accessible via the window pop-up menu.
The alternative procedure for the same task
1. Select the modal data that are to be moved.
2. Position the mouse cursor outside any entity on the screen.
3. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.
4. Select function Move Add data.
5. Follow the final steps of the procedure described above.
There is also an alternative to the above mentioned procedure. The alternative is useful if only one particular
entity should be moved.
The alternative procedure for moving of a single model data entity
1. Position the mouse cursor on the entity you want to move.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select function Move Add data.
5. The function will treat the single entity – the one over which the mouse cursor was positioned when
the mouse button was clicked.
6. Define the target position for the moved entities.
7. The selected entity is moved into the new location.
8. Press [Esc] to and the function.

Copying the model data

SCIA.ESA PT distinguishes between basic geometric entities such as nodes and beam members and other
entities called Additional data. Model data are a subset of the Additional data group. Any manipulation with
Model data is carried out by means of manipulation functions for the Additional data.
The procedure for copying of the model data
1. Select the modal data that are to be copied.
2. Icon Copy add data ( ) becomes accessible on toolbar Geometrical manipulations.
3. Click the icon.
4. Define the target position for the copied entities.
5. All the selected entities are copied into the new location (i.e. into one particular point or onto a one
particular beam member).
6. If required, select another target positions.
7. Press [Esc] to and the function.
The function for copying of additional data is also accessible via the window pop-up menu.
The alternative procedure for the same task
1. Select the modal data that are to be copied.

324
 Model data

2. Position the mouse cursor outside any entity on the screen.

3. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.
4. Select function Copy add data.
5. Follow the final steps of the procedure described above.
There is also an alternative to the above mentioned procedure. The alternative is useful if only one particular
entity should be copied.
The alternative procedure for copying of a single model data entity
1. Position the mouse cursor on the entity you want to copy.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select function Copy add data.
5. The function will treat the single entity – the one over which the mouse cursor was positioned when
the mouse button was clicked.
6. Define the target position for the copied entities.
7. The selected entity is copied into the new location.
8. If required, select another target positions.
9. Press [Esc] to and the function.

Deleting the model data

Any model data entities can be deleted the same way as geometrical entity.
The procedure for deletion of model data
1. Select entities that will be removed.
2. Start function Delete:
a. either use menu function Modify > Delete,
b. or invoke the window pop-up menu and here select function Delete.
3. A dialogue asking for your confirmation appears on the screen.
4. Confirm it.
5. The data are deleted from the project.

Absences
Introduction to absences
In practice, it may happen that selected parts of a structure are not always acting. It may happen, for example,
that fresh concrete members are not capable of transferring any load. Or it is possible that some bracing steel
diagonals are missing at an early stage of construction. And the list of similar examples may be even longer.
The question raised here is: how could the engineer take account of this?
SCIA.ESA PT brings solution in the form of Absences. Absence means that a certain part of a model is
missing (or absenting) in a certain load case.

The principle of Absences

It is possible to define that either a member or a support is absenting. The principle applied in SCIA.ESA PT
can be expressed in three points:
1. The user defines which members or supports are missing, i.e. absenting (regardless of any other
circumstances).
2. The user defines which members or supports are missing at the same time. That means that the
absenting members are sorted into groups. The members or absences from the same group are
always absenting together.
3. The user defines which group of absenting members is absenting in which load case.

325
Reference Guide

Note: The first and second points are in fact joined in a single step of the absence-definition
procedure.

Creating a project allowing for absences

In order to allow the calculation to take account of any absences (i.e. members or supports missing from a
selected load cases), the appropriate project parameter must be adjusted accordingly.
The procedure to activate Absences in the project
1. Open the Project data dialogue:
a. using tree menu item Project.
b. using menu item Tree > Project.
2. On tab Basic data, set item Model to Absence.
3. Confirm the setting with [OK].

Note: Only linear calculation can be performed if absences are defined in the model.

Absence groups
Absenting members are grouped together in groups called Absence groups.
The management of these groups can be performed in the Absence group manager. This manager is one of
many SCIA.ESA PT database managers.
The manager provides for all standard operations with database data: (i) creation of a new group, (ii) editing of
a group, (iii) activation of a selected group (i.e. displaying of the group), (iv) removal if a group, etc.
The procedure for opening of the Absence group manager
1. Open tree menu branch Absences.
2. Select function Absences manager and start it.
3. The Absences manager is opened on the screen.

Defining a new absence

The procedure for definition of a new absence on a member
1. Open tree menu branch Absences.
2. Select service Absences and open it.
3. At the top of the service, select Absences group which you want to define the new absences into. If
required, a new group may be created.
4. Select function Beam and start it.
5. Type the name of the new absence.
6. Confirm it with [OK].
7. Select member or members where the absences should be defined.
8. Close the function.
9. If required, repeat steps 4 to 8.
10. Close the service.
The procedure for definition of a new absence in a support
1. Open tree menu branch Absences.
2. Select service Absences and open it.
3. At the top of the service, select required Absences group for your absences. If required, a new
group may be created.
4. Select function Support and start it.
5. Type the name of the new absence.
6. Confirm it with [OK].
7. Select supports where the absences should be defined.

326
 Model data

8. Close the function.

9. If required, repeat steps 4 to 8.
10. Close the service.

Note 1: If no absence group has been defined prior to the definition of a new absence, step 4 of
the above stated procedure is preceded by opening of the Absences group manager. There, the
user may define required Absences group or groups.
Note 2: Be aware of that the display of absences in controlled by means of special absences-
related view parameters.
Note 3: Absences groups are an analogy to load cases. Also the principle of dealing with these
two "concepts" in SCIA.ESA PT environment is similar. For example, only ONE absences group
can be displayed at a time.

Absence on a beam member

An absence on a beam member has the following parameters:
Name Specifies the name of the absence.
Group Specifies the group into which the absence is included.
Each absence can be inserted into one group only.
See the Note below.

Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences
service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.

Absences in a support
An absence in a support has the following parameters:
Name Specifies the name of the absence.
Group Specifies the group into which the absence is included.
Each absence can be inserted into one group only.
See the Note below.

Note: Parameter Group can be adjusted either (i) in combo box placed at the top of Absences
service, or (ii) afterwards during editing of an existing absence in the Property window.

327
Reference Guide

Associating the absence group with a load case

The association of a defined Absence group with a certain Load case can be made in Load case manager.
The Absence group is one of the parameters of a load case.
The procedure for association of a defined Absence group with a certain Load case
1. Open Load case manager.
2. Select the load case where the absences should be taken into account.
3. Set parameter Absences to required value, i.e. select from the given list of existing Absence groups
the group that should be associated with the given load case.
4. Close the Load case manager.

Displaying the required Absence group

Only one absences group can be displayed at a time. The user may select the required group in two ways:
 in service Absences,
 via View parameters dialogue.
The procedure to select absence group for display in service Absences
1. Open tree menu branch Absences.
2. Select service Absences and open it.
3. At the top of the service, select Absences group that you want to be displayed.
4. Close the service.
The procedure to select absence group for display in View parameters dialogue
1. With the mouse cursor positioned inside the graphical window, click the right mouse button to
invoke the window’s pop-up menu.
2. Select function Set view parameters.
3. The View parameters dialogue is opened on the screen.
4. In group Absences select the required Absences group.
5. Close the dialogue.

Note: Absences are normally displayed ONLY if service Absences is open. Otherwise,
absences are hidden by default. It can be however changed on user’s request in dialogue View
parameter settings where permanent display of absences may be adjusted by ticking the
appropriate option.

Editing the existing absence

If required, it is possible to change parameters of an already defined absence.
The procedure for editing of an existing absence
1. Select the absence to be edited.
2. The Property window shows the parameters of the absence.
3. Edit the required parameter.
4. Clear the selection.

Note: If the Absence group parameter is changed (i.e. the edited group is put into a different
group), the edited Absence disappears from the screen, as only one group is displayed at a time.

Deleting the existing absence

If required, it is possible to delete an already defined absence or absences.
The procedure for removal of an existing absence
1. Select the absence to be deleted.
2. Press key [Delete].

328
 Model data

3. Invoke the pop-up menu and select function Delete.

4. The selected Absence is deleted.

Beam nonlinearity
Defining a new beam nonlinearity
Procedure to define a new beam member subject to local nonlinearity
1. Input the beam member in a standard way.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Start function Beam nonlinearity.
4. Select the required type of non-linearity.
5. If required, input additional parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Select the beam member(s) that should be subject to this kind of nonlinearity.
8. Close the function.
9. Close the service.

Editing the existing beam nonlinearity

Beam member non-linearity may be edited in the exactly the same way as any other model data. See chapter
Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Changing the parameters of model data.

Types of nonlinearity
Tension only
Tension-only beam members (i.e. beam members not able to bear any compression) show behaviour to the
following stress-strain diagram:

When inserted into the model, such a beam member is marked with the following symbol (remember that in
order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Note: The accuracy of the calculation may be affected by parameter Maximum iterations from
dialogue Solver Setup.

329
Reference Guide

Press only
Press-only beam members (i.e. beam members not able to bear any tension) show behaviour to the following
stress-strain diagram:

When inserted into the model, such a beam member is marked with the following symbol (remember that in
order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Limit force
This feature may be useful if a beam member is capable of bearing tension (or compression) stress up to a
certain limit. The limit is specified by the limit value of axial force input in its absolute value. When the limit
value is reached, two types of behaviour may occur: (i) the beam member loses its stability and its bearing
capacity drops to zero, or (ii) plastic behaviour get into action.
The following stress-strain diagrams demonstrate available options:
Limit compression
force combined with
loss of stability

Limit compression
force combined with
plastic behaviour

330
 Model data

Limit tension force

combined with loss of
stability

Limit tension force

combined with plastic
behaviour

When inserted into the model, a beam member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters
Direction Either Limit tension or Limit compression may be selected.
Type Buckling: If the limit force is reached, the beam member loses
its stability and bears no load at all.
Plastic yielding: If the limit force is reached, the beam
member follows the plastic stress-strain diagram.
Marginal force Specifies the value of the limit force.

Gap
There are various connection and support conditions used in a real structure. It may happen that a beam
member is not attached rigidly to the structure but "starts its action" only after some initial change of its length.
The behaviour of such a beam is defined by the absolute value of the initial "slip". The beam then member
starts to bear the load only after its elongation or shortening reaches the input value. There are three options
available:

331
Reference Guide

no tension
Modelling e.g. the instant
when a beam member
bears against a support.

no compression
Modelling e.g. a free
rope.

free in both directions

E.g. a scaffold pipe.

The algorithm applied has been designed for large structures. All beam members are tested and processed
simultaneously in every iteration step. The procedure is iterative and converges to the accurate solution. Beam
members inserted into the model may be again eliminated in a next step if their deformation gets under the
input value if initial displacement ("slip"). The convergence speed is high and does not depend on the number
of beam members. Eight to ten iteration steps should be sufficient for an arbitrary structure.
When inserted into the model, a beam member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters
Type One of three types can be selected: (i) press only, (ii) tension
only, (iii) both directions. See the diagrams above.
Displacement Specifies the value of the initial "slip" before the beam member
becomes active.

332
 Model data

Position Specifies whether the "slipping" is allowed at the beginning or

end of the beam member.

Initial stress
In slender structures the axial force in a beam member may have a big effect on the stiffness of the overall
structure and the stiffness of its parts. In general, tensile force increases the stiffness and compression force
reduces the stiffness of the structure.
It is possible to define initial pre-stressing forces in individual beam members. These forces are considered
constant along the whole beam member.
The effect of initial pre-stressing can be taken into account in ALL or NONE nonlinear combination. In addition,
also buckling calculation and dynamic free vibration analysis may take account of initial pre-stressing.
When inserted into the model, a beam member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters
Normal force Specifies the initial axial force applied in the beam member.

A bit of theory
Initial stress can be defined in two forms: either (i) as a load case, or nonlinear combination, result, or (ii) as a
given initial axial force in certain elements. For the second approach, the forces are transformed into shrinkage
or elongation of beam members. That situation is analysed in order to obtain a balanced solution. The result of
this calculation is then treated the same way as in the first approach.
In principle, the initial stress is viewed as a result of loading that was applied before the given load case or
nonlinear combination. The geometry defined by the user is, however, assumed to be the same as before this
initial loading. The solution that is used as the initial one is thus obtained on the defined (unchanged)
geometry. The procedure that follows depends on (i) whether a linear or nonlinear calculation is used and (ii)
whether we deal with the first, second or third order (the first order is a geometrically linear calculation, the
second order can be found in the dialogue under the option Timoshenko and the third order under the name
Newton-Raphson).
1. Linear calculation
The initial stress is used only to determine the impact of the stress-state on the stiffness of the structure
(termed geometrical stiffness matrix). It is advantageous to use e.g. the stress-state resulting from the
permanent load for the analysis of all load cases defined on the structure or for the dynamic analysis. With
regard to the fact that the right-hand side of the equation remains unchanged, the principle of superposition
can be applied (together with the possibility to calculate the critical combinations) and the significant effect of
the geometrical nonlinearity can be taken into account. Neither the initial stress nor the initial deformations are
added to the results (otherwise the combinations could not be created).
2. Nonlinear calculation
As a rule valid for all kinds of nonlinear calculations, the results of a nonlinear solution include also the
deformations and stresses resulting from the initial loading (i.e. not just the effect of the stress-state on the
stiffness of the structure).
a) The first and second order
The initial stress is used to modify the stiffness of the structure. The calculation is carried out with the load of a
given nonlinear combination and the results of the initial load case are then added to the obtained results,
including deformations and reactions.
b) The third order
It is necessary to take into account the way by which the initial loading was calculated. The procedure that is
used to process the initial state depends on whether the initial state was calculated by the third order or not.
What is important is whether the equilibrium was calculated on the original or deformed geometry.
The initial shape must correspond to the one for which the equilibrium was calculated.

333
Reference Guide

aa) The initial state was calculated by the 1st or 2nd order
The initial stress is used for the geometrical stiffness in the calculation. The initial shape is not changed. After
finishing the calculation, the initial deformation is added to the results of the nonlinear combination. It must be
emphasised that this approach is not suitable especially for cable and membrane structures. In any case, it is
always better to apply the third order to the determination of the initial state if the third order calculation is to be
performed.
bb) The initial state was calculated by the 3rd order
The deformations from the initial state are added to the geometry, which means that the analysis is performed
on a deformed structure. The initial loading is applied into the calculation as an old load (similarly to the
analysis of construction stages). Once the calculation has been performed, it is necessary to add the initial
deformations to the deformations of the analysed nonlinear combination, so that the user obtains, after adding
these total deformations to the initial geometry of the structure, the final shape of the structure (he is not in fact
aware that the calculation has been performed on a modified structure). The analysis of stresses in the third
order calculation is similar to the analysis of construction stages.

Consequently, in all nonlinear calculations, unlike in the linear calculation, the result of the initial state is fully
included into the results (including the initial deformations). In order to determine the detailed forces in beam
members, both (i) the final end-forces including the results of the initial load case and the (ii) the final load on
beam members (including the initial loading) are used.

Cable
Two cable elements can be modelled: (i) straight cable (pre-stressed element) and (ii) slack cable.
Straight cables
Only the pre-stressing force must be input for a straight cable.

Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options
nd
Initial stress, Nonlinearity, Beam local nonlinearity and 2 order calculation must be selected.
Slack cables
In addition to pre-stressing force, additional parameter must be defined for slack cable. The cable is subject to
additional load: either (i) self-weight load, or (ii) a general load acting under the given angle and having
identical orientation as the local rotation axis fix of the beam member. These parameters are used to
determine the slack of the cable in a particular direction. All calculations are carried out on the "deformed"
structure. That means that the final deformation of a cable is calculated from this "slack" shape and not from
the ideal straight shape of beam member.

Note: Proper settings must be made in Project Setup dialogue, Functionality tab. Options
nd
Initial stress, Nonlinearity, and 2 order calculation must be selected. Option Beam local
nonlinearity does not have be ON; it would lead to unnecessary lengthening of calculation.
Note: ONLY Newton-Raphson method can be used for this type of analysis. Timoshenko
method MUST NOT be applied for analysis of slack cables.

When inserted into the model, a beam member with this type of nonlinearity is marked by the following symbol
(remember that in order to see the symbol, view parameters must be adjusted to show model data).

Parameters
Straight If ON, the beam member is without any slack. Only the initial
pre-stressing is then considered.
Self-weight If ON, the slack cable is subject to self-weight.
Normal force Specifies the value of the pre-stressing axial force.
Pn Specifies the value of the additional force.
This parameter is ignored if Self-weight is ON.

334
 Model data

Alpha x Specifies the direction of the additional force.

This parameter is ignored if Self-weight is ON.

Technical background
No special finite element is used for this type of analysis. Regular beam member element is used, but its
flexural stiffness is very very small. Small shear forces that appear during the iterative calculation appear are
deleted.

335
Foundation and subsoil
Foundation blocks and strips
Foundation block
The user can choose from two variants of foundation block.

The parameters are:

Name The name is used for the identification of the foundation block.
Type Specifies the shape of the foundation block.
Dimensions The input of dimensions can be performed in a dialogue with
self-explanatory interactive drawing of the block. That means
that the user may click on a dimension line in the drawing and
the corresponding item of the dialogue gets the focus.
Therefore, it’s very simple to specify the dimensions of the
foundation block.
Eccentricity The foundation bock may be either symmetrical or some
eccentricity in one or both plan directions may be specified.
Cast conditions Specifies the production of the foundation block.
Material This item defines the material of the foundation block.

The foundation block editing dialogue makes it possible to display the foundation block in 2D or 3D mode.
 The 2D mode shows side view, plan view and dimension lines for all input values.
 The 3D mode enables the user to make a good visualisation of the defined foundation block
The above-mentioned properties are defined in the editing dialogue for the foundation block. The editing
dialogue can be opened from the Foundation block manager.
In addition, another important parameter of the foundation block support must be defined. It is the soil that is
below the footing surface. This last parameter is defined in the property dialogue of support, i.e. it is defined at
the moment the support is being inserted into the model.

337
Reference Guide

Foundation strip
A foundation strip is used as a kind of linear supporting. It is defined by its width and by the properties of soil
below the footing surface.
All the properties of the foundation strip are defined in the property dialogue of support, i.e. at the moment the
support is being inserted into the model.

Upper soil of foundation block and strip

Supporting of a structure defined by means of a foundation structure (i.e. foundation block or strip) is defined
not only by the dimensions of the foundation structure and properties of the soil below the footing surface, but
also by the characteristics of the upper soil.
Density Specifies the density of the soil above the foundation block or
strip.
Height Defines the height of the upper soil layer. The height is

338
 Foundation and subsoil

measured from the top-surface of the foundation block.

In addition, the user may specify the level of underground water that also influences the characteristics of the
support.

Note: The upper soil parameters are taken into account if the foundation block is checked for
stability.

Defining a new foundation block type

The procedure for the definition of a new foundation block type
1. Open the Foundation block manager:
a. either: use tree menu item Library > Foundation blocks,
b. or: use menu item Libraries > Foundation blocks.
2. Click button [New].
3. A new foundation block is created and it is added to the list of defined types.
4. Click button [Edit].
5. The editing dialogue appears on the screen.
6. Select the type you want to define.
7. Input the dimensions of the block.
8. Choose or define block’s material.
9. Confirm with button [OK].
10. Close the Foundation block manager

Note: If no foundation block has been defined so far and the user opens the Foundation block
manager, the program may automatically open the Foundation block editing dialogue directly.
Once the editing dialogue is closed, the Foundation manager appears on the screen and the user
may follow to procedure given above.

Inserting the foundation block into model

As the foundation block is a type of support it can be inserted like a standard point support. Therefore, the
procedure for the insertion of a point support can be applied. The only difference is, that the user has to specify
some additional parameters that are unique for this support type.

Note: If no subsoil and no type of foundation block has been defined and the user tries to insert
a support of Foundation block type, the program automatically creates a default subsoil type and a
default foundation block type. It is up to the user to edit these entities and input proper values of
their characteristics.

Defining a new foundation strip

As the foundation strip is a type of linear support it can be inserted like a standard linear support. Therefore,
the procedure for the insertion of a linear support can be applied. The only difference is, that the user has to
specify some additional parameters that are unique for this support type.

Note: If no subsoil has been defined and the user tries to insert a support of Foundation strip
type, the program automatically creates a default subsoil type. It is up to the user to edit this entities
and input proper characteristics of it.

339
Reference Guide

Subsoil
Introduction to subsoil
Supports of a "foundation" type, i.e. foundation block and foundation strip, are laid on the soil that forms the
base for the structure. The parameters of this soil must be defined in order to allow the program to perform
accurate calculations.
In SCIA.ESA PT the "under-foundation" soil is called subsoil and can be defined using functions:
 either: tree menu function Library > Subsoils,
 or: menu function Libraries > Subsoils.
Once at least one subsoil type is defined, it can be used for the definition of foundation blocks or foundation
strips.

Defining a new subsoil type

A new subsoil type can be defined by means of the Subsoils manager. It is one of the numerous SCIA.ESA
PT database managers.
The procedure for the definition of a new subsoil type
1. Open the Subsoils manager:
a. either: tree menu function Library > Subsoils,
b. or: menu function Libraries > Subsoils.
2. Click button [New] to create a new subsoil entity.
3. The new subsoil type is added to the list of defined subsoils.
4. Click button [Edit].
5. The editing dialogue is opened on the screen.
6. Input required values for individual parameters.
7. Confirm the parameters with button [OK].
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as many times as required.
9. Close the Subsoils manager.

Defining subsoil parameters

The definition of subsoil parameters can be done in the editing dialogue for subsoil. The editing dialogue is
accessible via the Subsoils manager.
Parameters of subsoil
Constants C1 and C2 C parameters representing the subsoil properties.
for directions X, Y, Z (see also Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a beam).
Parameters for check Here the parameters necessary for check of the subsoil to a
technical standards are defined.

Parameters for check

These data are used only for the stability check of a foundation block.
Density Soil density
Fic The value of the angle of the shearing resistance in terms of
effective stress.
Cc The value of the cohesion intercept in terms of effective stress.
Ccu The value of the undrained shear strength.
Sigma oc The admissible ground stress (optional).
Type The soil can be Undrained or Drained.

340
 Foundation and subsoil

Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a beam member

The parameters of subsoil for subsoil defined under a beam member are:
C1x resistance of environment against ux (deformation in local x direction)
C1y resistance of environment against uy (deformation in local y direction)
C1z resistance of environment against uz (deformation in local z direction)
C2x resistance of environment against dux/dx
C2y resistance of environment against duy/dx
C2z resistance of environment against duz/dx

Note: In the complete set of 6 parameters C, four parameters are significant and, if available,
can be determined from the C parameters of subsoil 2D model in EPW Soilin module and from the
stiffness of boundary bonding "k" modelling the effect of settlement basin:
C*1x (MN/m2) = b (m) C1x (MN/m3)
C*1y (MN/m2) = b (m) C1y (MN/m3)
C*1z (MN/m2) = b (m) C1z (MN/m3) + 2 k (MN/m2)
C*2z (MN) = b (m) C2x (MN/m)
where b is the width of the member.

It is not recommended to use the remaining two parameters. Reliable experimental data are not available for
C2x and C2y.

Subsoil parameters for subsoil under a slab

The parameters of subsoil for subsoil defined under a slab are:
C1z resistance of environment against wP (mm) [C1z in MN/m3]
C2x resistance of environment against wP/xP (mm/m) [C2x in MN/m]
C2y resistance of environment against wP/yP (mm/m) [C2y in MN/m]
C1x resistance of environment against uP (mm) [C1x in MN/m3]
C1y resistance of environment against vP (mm) [C1y in MN/m3]

341
Reference Guide

Note: Usually, C2x is considered equal to C2y and C1x equal to C1y.
Note: See also chapter Model data > Foundation > Subsoil.

Using the subsoil

Subsoil is used as a parameter for the definition of "foundation structures". That means as a parameter for
foundation blocks and foundation strips. Both of these foundation structures are a kind of point or linear
support.
Consequently, the subsoil type used for particular foundation block or foundation strip is adjusted in the
property dialogue of a support.

Geologic profile
Geologic profile manager
Geologic profile manager is a standard database manager. Its operation is therefore quite straightforward.
It may look like:

You can perform all common operations with geologic profiles:

 define a new one,
 edit the existing one,
 make a copy of the existing one,
 delete the existing one (unless it is used in the model),
 print or save the information about it,

342
 Foundation and subsoil

 read it from your disk (if you have saved it some time ago).

The Geologic profile manager can be opened via:

 tree menu Library > Geologic profiles,
 menu Libraries > Geologic profiles,
 it is also opened automatically whenever some entity that reguires a geologic profile as a parameter
is being input and no geologic profile has been defined yet.

Defining a new geologic profile

A new geologic profile can be input in the Geologic profile manager. Function New of the manager opens the
Geologic profile dialogue.

General geologic profile parameters

Water level Defines the level of underground water. The water level
influences the parameters of the soil.
Name Specifies the name of the geologic profile.
Not compressible In ON, the program applies coefficient of depth reduction k2 in
subsoil compliance with CSN 73 1001, art. 80.
Numerically it means that the damping of stress component sz
in the half-space is slowed down. All components of elastic-
half-space-stress-tensor are calculated in this reduced depth. It
is just an approximate calculation, not an exact solution of the
elastic layer. The difference is however negligible in
comparison with other inacuracies.

Layer-related parameters

343
Reference Guide

name name of the layer

thickness thickness of the layer
E def module of deformation
For geotechnical categories 1 and 2 the indicative value from
e.g. CSN 73 1001 can be used, for category 3 a survey should
be carried out to provide for the value.
Poisson’s ratio coefficient of transverse deformation
An indicative value or experimentally found value can be used.
(range: 0 – 0.5)
specific soil weight specific soil weight for dry soil
3
normally within the range from 18 to 23 kN/m
wet specific soil weight specific soil weight for wet soil
m structural strength coefficient
Dimensionless value in the formula for settlement according to
CSN 73 1001.

Table 10 in the standard states indicative values for various

soils in the range from 0.1 to 0.5. For category 3 it is advisable
to consult the engineer who carried out the survey of the
locality in question.
For other codes (other than CSN) this coefficient is equal to
0.2.

Note: Geologic profile must be defined up to such a depth where the effective stress is still
active, otherwise the program does not have enough information.

Editing the existing geologic profile

An existing geologic profile can be edited in the Geologic profile manager. Function Edit of the manager opens
the Geologic profile dialogue. The dialogue is described in chapter Defining a new geologic profile.

Boreholes
Introduction to boreholes
Boreholes together with geologic profiles provide the program with information relating to the composition of
foundation soil. Both data are necessary to calculate the interaction between the structure and the soil below it.
A borehole is fully defined by the (i) corresponding geologic profile, (ii) location and (iii) altitude. Usually a set
of boreholes will be defined and thus they can be used to calculate and display the surface of the land in their
surrounding. This surface can be used for impressive presentations of your project. The surface itself is not
taken into account during the calculation.
The following picture shows an example of defined boreholes. The rectangle represents the patch of land over
which the soil properties can be inter- and extra- polated.

344
 Foundation and subsoil

Next picture than shows the calculated surface.

Inserting a new borehole

Procedure to define a new borehole
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Borehole profile.
3. Fill in the parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Define the location of the new borehole or boreholes.

Borehole parameters
Name Identifies the borehole profile.
Results only When the calculation is performed, you can obtain a table of
settlement. The values of settlement are calculated in places
where boreholes are located. The borehole itself (the
corresponding geologic profile) is also used as an input value
for the calculation of interaction between the structure and the
soil.

345
Reference Guide

However, it is possible to exclude some boreholes from the

Geologic profile
input data and use them only as the location for the calculation
of results – settlement.
If this parameter is ON, the geologic profile defined in the
borehole is ignored, the conditions in this place are interpolated
from surrounding boreholes, but final settlement is calculated in
this location.
Specifies the geologic profile corresponding to the location of
the borehole.

Editing the existing borehole

The procedure to edit the existing borehole
1. Select the required borehole.
2. The property window shows the parameters of the borehole.
3. Change required parameters.
4. The changes are immediately taken into account.

Note: After the modification (especially the modification of the position) of the borehole, it may
be necessary to refresh the surface (supposing it was displayed before the changes).

Deleting the existing borehole

A borehole that has been defined by mistake or is no longer necessary for any other reason can be deleted
like any other entity in the model.
The procedure to delete borehole
1. Select the required borehole.
2. Delete it using:
a. press key [Del] on your keyboard,
b. invoke the pop-up menu and select function Delete,
c. use menu function Modify > Delete.

Displaying or hiding the existing boreholes

Display (or we can say visibility) of boreholes is controlled by view parameter Subsoil > Borehole profiles.
The procedure to display (hide) the boreholes
1. Open dialogue View parameters settings.
a. via pop-up menu function Set view parameters for all.
b. via button of the toolbar of the graphical window.
2. Set Subsoil > Borehole profiles ON (or OFF to hide).
3. Confirm with [OK].

Displaying the earth surface

The surface is calculated and displayed across the area that is defined by two conditions:
 all defined boreholes lie inside the area,
 the distance from the outline of the structure to the border of the area is at least 10 metres in any
direction.
Display (or we can say visibility) of surface is controlled by view parameter Subsoil > Surface.
The procedure to display (hide) the surface
1. Open dialogue View parameters settings.

346
 Foundation and subsoil

a. via pop-up menu function Set view parameters for all.

b. via button of the toolbar of the graphical window.
2. Set Subsoil > Surface ON (or OFF to hide).
3. Confirm with [OK].

Refreshing the earth surface

After some changes to the boreholes (or after some other modifications of the model) the surface may
disappear. The reason is the that change performed requires the regeneration of the surface and the
regeneration of it is not automatic (mainly for speed-related reasons).
The procedure to refresh the outline and/ or surface
1. If the outline is not displayed, display it.
2. Select the outline.
3. The property window shows some basic information about it and also offers two action buttons.
4. Press [Refresh outline] to refresh the outline.
5. The outline may change if new boreholes have been added after the last refresh of the surface or if
some existing boreholes has been moved to new locations.
6. Press [Refresh surface] to refresh the surface.

Interaction with subsoil (Soilin)

Introduction
The analysis of foundation structures is challenged by the problem of modelling of the part of the foundation
that is in contact with subsoil. The best solution is to use 2D model of the subsoil that properly represents the
deformation properties of the whole under-foundation massif by means of surface model. The properties of
such model are expressed by what is called interaction parameters marked C. These parameters are assigned
directly to structure elements that are in contact with the subsoil and they influence the stiffness matrix.
To simplify the matter, we may imagine that C is the characteristics of elastic, more precisely pseudoelastic,
links, or surface spring constants that change according to the actual state of the analysed system. We may
also use the professional slang that calls it "support on C parameters", which is the generalisation of standard
Winkler idea of the supporting in the form thick liquid g = C1 (MNm-3) or in the for of infinitely dense system of
vertical springs. The generalisation is very important and deals mainly with the consideration of significant
shear distribution in the subsoil that is neglected by Winkler model. The parameters of the interaction between
the foundation and the subsoil depends on the distribution and loading level, or the contact stress between the
structure surface and the surrounding subsoil, on the geometry of the footing surface and on mechanical
properties of the soil.
Calculation module SOILIN takes account of all the mentioned dependencies.
As the C parameters influence the contact stress and vice versa – the distribution of the contact stress have
impact on the settlement of the footing surface and thus the C parameters, it is necessary to use an iterative
solution.
The influence of subsoil in the vicinity of the structure
The modelling of the interaction between a structure and subsoil requires that the influence of the subsoil
outside of the structure be taken into account. This outside-subsoil supports the edges of the foundation slab
due to shear stiffness. In the past, special procedures were recommended to model this phenomenon. The
current versions of SCIA ESA PT employ a sophisticated solution whose principle is described in the following
paragraph.
The program automatically adds to the edge of the analysed foundation slab springs that approximately
substitute the effect of what is termed support elements (1 to 2 metre wide strip located along the edges of the
foundation slab, the thickness of this strip is almost zero). The solution obtained through this approach takes
into account the effect of the subsoil outside (in the vicinity) of the analysed foundation slab.
In comparison with a solution without such springs, the results obtained with the springs gives smaller
deformation of the foundation-slab edges which means larger bending moments in the foundation slab.
The springs oriented in the global z-direction are assigned to all edge nodes except the situation when a node
already has another spring assigned or if a rotation of a node is specified. In that case, the program assumes
that the user has already defined a special type of support and that it is not wanted to alter that special
configuration automatically on the background.

347
Reference Guide

These exceptions can be used to deliberately suppress the implementation of edge-springs along certain lines.
The user can define very small line springs along required lines (edges) and thus eliminate the effect of the
surrounding subsoil (e.g. if a sheet pile wall is installed).

Geometry
If the groundslab is not horizontal, one should be aware of the following:
The correct calculation of C parameters assumes that the structure that is in contact with subsoil is more or
less horizontal. Technically speaking, the inclination of the footing surface up to 5 to 8 degrees can be allowed.
Program is capable of dealing with footing surface in several z-levels, but the results are acceptable only if the
z-levels are within certain limits – see the following literature (in Czech):
 Koláø V.: Matematické modelování geomechanických úloh. Skriptum pro postgraduální studium
FAST VUT Brno, 1990, 60 str.
 Buèek J., Koláø V., Obruèa J: Manuál k programu SOILIN, FEM consulting Brno, 1993
 Buèek J., Koláø V.: Iteraèní výpoèet NE-XX - SOILIN, FEM consulting Brno, 1995
 Koláø V.: Statické výpoèty základových konstrukcí. Knižnice Aktualit Èeské matice technické Praha,
ed. plán 1994.
 Koláø V.: Teoretický manuál FEM-Z k programùm DEFOR a NE-XX, semináø FEM consulting
s.r.o., 5. - 6.10.1993 v Brnì.

Defining a new Soilin support

The interaction between the structure and subsoil is calculated if the structure is put on a support of "Soilin"
type.
The procedure to define a new Soilin support
1. Create the structure to be supported.
2. Open service Structure.
3. Start function Support > Surface (el. foundation).
4. Adjust the parameters (see chapter Surface support on slab).
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Select the slab (groundslab) or slabs that should be supported with this type of support.

Surface support on slab

Parameters
Name Specifies the name of the support.
Type Defines the type of support – see below.
Subsoil If necessary for the selected type, this item specifies the
subsoil parameters.

348
 Foundation and subsoil

Type
Individual A particular subsoil type is assigned to the slab.
The subsoil is defined by means of C parameters. These user-
defined C parameters are used for the calculation (of e.g
contact stress in the footing surface)
Soilin For such a support, the interaction of the structure with the
foundation subsoil is carried out by means of SOILIN module.
Parameters C1z, C2x, C2y are calculated by SOILIN module.
Note: Parameters C1x and C1y are defined in
Setup > Solver dialogue.
Both Both of the above mentioned types are combined on the same
slab.
The user defines which C parameters will be user-defined and
which ones will be calculated by SOILIN module.
Parameters can be defined in Setup > Solver dialogue. Those
C parameters that are input in this dialogue as zero, will be
calculated by the SOILIN module. Nonzero parameters will be
taken as they are input.
Note: Parameters C1x and C1y must ALWAYS
be user-defined. SOILIN module is not able to
calculate them.

SOILIN
Module Soilin can calculate parameters C1z, C2x, C2y. The other parameters must be defined by the user.
It is also possible to eliminate the automatic calculation of some C parameters and define them manually. This
can be achieved by special adjustment of the subsoil parameters and set the type to Both (!).
If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to zero, this C parameters will be calculated by the program.
If a certain C parameter in subsoil dialogue is set to non-zero value, such C parameter will be taken as input.
The type Both is not too common and it was introduced mainly for two reasons:
1. I use type Soilin but I want to have different friction in different parts of the structure. Therefore, the solver
setup dialogue is not enough for me, because is just one value can be adjusted there for the friction.
Therefore, I can use type Both and thus I am able to define several subsoils with non-zero constants C1x and
C1y with all other parameters adjusted to zero. When the Soilin module runs, the non-zero constants C1x and
C1y are of higher priority than those determined by the solver and are applied. Other "zero" values indicate
that the values determined by the solver are applied.
2. Sometimes it may be necessary to "suppress" higher values of shear (C2x, C2y) calculated by Soilin
module. This may happen e.g. when a new plate is modelled on an old one and the old plate is defined as the
first layer of the subsoil. It is a correct and proper solution, but as E modules of soil and concrete are
dramatically different, the Soilin module calculates high C2parameters. Consequently, the stiffness of the
foundation slab in the model is bigger than if the two slabs were "joined" together and input as a homogenous
monolith. Therefore, C2 parameters may be reduced artificially. This can be achieved in type Both. I define the
subsoil with zero C1z (it will be determined by the Soilin module) and other non-zero parameters (C2 and
friction). Thus the Soilin module will provide only for C1z parameter.

Soilin calculation parameters

Solver parameters relating to SOILIN module
Soil combination
Specifies the load combination that is used for the calculation
of C parameters.
Even though it is not an exact solution, for practical reasons the
C parameters are not calculated separately for each load case
or each load case combination. The user must specify one
particular reference combination that is used to calculate the C
parameters. The calculated C parameters are then applied in
all remaining defined load cases and combinations.
Note: The combination must be a linear

349
Reference Guide

combination (not an envelope).

Max soil interaction Limits the size of iteration step.
step
Size of soil surface Defines the size of FE element generated "in contact" with
element subsoil.
C1x Resistance of environment against wP (mm) [C1z in MN/m3]
C1y Resistance of environment against wP/xP (mm/m) [C2x in
MN/m]
C1z Resistance of environment against wP/yP (mm/m) [C2y in
MN/m]
C2x Resistance of environment against uP (mm) [C1x in MN/m3]
C2y Resistance of environment against vP (mm) [C1y in MN/m3]

C parameters
The C parameters in the Solver setup dialogue are used as starting values for the iterative calculation. These
values may be ignored if combined Soilin-subsoil support has been chosen and the user specified that a
certain C parameters is to considered as user-defined. See chapter Surface support on slab.

Calculated C parameters
The calculated C parameters can be reviewed in 2D data viewer or in service Results.
The procedure to view the C parameters in 2D Data viewer
1. Perform the calculation
2. Open tree Calculation, mesh.
3. Start function 2D data viewer.
4. Select function Subsoil.
5. Select the required parameter.
6. Adjust other drawing parameters.
7. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

Note: This function offers all five C parameters. The two that are not calculated (C1x and C1y)
are constant across the whole groundslab. The other ones may have an arbitrary distribution
depending on input boundary conditions.

The procedure to view the C parameters in service Results

1. Perform the calculation

350
 Foundation and subsoil

2. Open service Results.

3. Start function Subsoil – C parameters.
4. Select the required parameter.
5. Adjust other drawing parameters.
6. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

Note: This function offers only the (really) calculated C parameters. The two that are not
calculated (C1x and C1y) and are constant across the whole groundslab are not shown here.

Literature
[1] Altes J.
The limit depth for settlement calculations (Die Grenztiefe bei Setzungsberechnungen,
in German). Bauingenieur 51 (1976), No. 3, 93 – 96.
[2] Bažant Z.
Coefficients of Structural Strenght. In.: Proc. XI th Int. Conf. on Soil Mech. and Found.
Eng., San Francisco 1985, paper 4/A/32, pp. 1469 – 1471.
[3] Buèek J., Doležal J., Koláø V.
Program DEFOR S. Space Structures Composed of Beams and Founded on Foots.
User Manual FEM consulting Brno, 1993.
[4] Cakmak A.S. (editor)
Soil – Structure Interaction. ELSEVIER, Amsterdam, Developments in geot. engng.
No 43, 1987, 373 ppp.
[5] ÈSN – P – ENV 1997 – 1/731001 – Czech Standard for EC7 Application to the
Spread (Shallow, Raft and Plate) Foundations, with the National Rules, Prague 1993,
200 pp. An alternative to the ÈSN 731001 (from 1.10.1988) "The Subsoil Below
Shallow Foundations" (75 pp. in Czech) holding together with EC7.
[6] Desai C.S.
Soil – Structure Interaction and Simulation Problems. In.: FEM in Geomechanics, Edit.
G. Gudehus, Wiley, London, 1977, p. 209 – 250.
[7] DIN 4019 Teil 1 (1979), Teil (1981), BAUGRUND Setzungsberechnungen (Subsoil –
Foundations – Settlement Calculations, in German), 80 pp. and various recommended
text in German.
[8] Dungar R. – Studer J.
Numerical Models in Geomechanical Engineering Practice. A.A. Balkema, Rotterdam,
1986, 500 pp.
[9] EUROCODE 7 – Part 1, Geotechnical Design General Rules, Final Version, Editor:

351
Reference Guide

CEN/TC250, EC7 Com., Berlin, 1993, 116 pp.

[10] Kolaø V. – Nìmec I.
Energy Definition and Algorithms of a New Foundation Model. Proc. 5th Danube Conf.
SMFE, September 1977, Bratislava, App. p. 1 –10.
[11] Koláø V. – Nìmec I.
FEM Analysis of Structures (incl. Subsoil). UNO, EC Europe, CAD Techniques for
Bridges, Vol. I., Prague – Geneva, June 1984, 284 p.
[12] Koláø V. – Nìmec I.
NE-XX Program System. In.: Structural Analysis Systems, ed. A. Niku - Lari, Vol.I.,
PERGAMON PRESS OXFORD 1985, pp. 97 – 102, 141 – 150.
[13] Koláø V. – Nìmec I.
NEXX Program Package. In.: Software Abstracts for Engineers, Editor M. Robinson,
CITIS, Dublin, Ireland, Dez. 1988, pp. 1 – 4.
[14] Koláø V., Nìmec I.
Modelling of Soil-Structure Interaction, ELSEVIER, New York, Oxford, London,
Amsterdam, Tokyo, 1989, 340 pp.
[15] Koláø V., Nìmec I.
Contact Stress and Settlement in the Structure - Soil Interface. Study of CSAV 16.91,
Czecho slovak Academy of Sciencies, editor ACADEMIA, Prague, October 1991, 160
pp.
[16] Koláø V.
Interaction Between Structure and a Special Nonlinear Subsoil Model. In.: Numerical
Methods in Geomechanics, Proc. of 2nd Czech. Conf. Int. Partic. (IACMAG meeting),
Sept. 2 4, 1992, Prague, 37 40
[17] Koláø V., Nìmec I.
Analysis of Contact Stress in the Structure Soil Interface, In.: Numerical Methods in
Geomecha nics, Proc. of 2nd Czech. Conf. Int. Partic. (IACMAG meeting), Sept. 2 4,
1992, Prague, 41 44
[18] Koláø V.
Iterative Solutions of Nonlinear Layered Sub soil Structure Interaction. In.: Proc. of Int.
Conf. GEOMECHANICS'91, September 24 26, 1991, Czecho slo vakia, edited by
A.A.BALKEMA, Rotterdam, 1992, 197 206.
[19] Koláø V.
Interaction Between Motorway and Airport Pave ment Slabs and Their Subsoil. In.:
2nd Int. Conf. on Traffic Effects ..., High Tatras, Czechoslovakia, ed. by VTS Žilina,
April 22 24, 1991, sect.F, ref No.3, 1 8
[20] Nìmec I.
NE XX Program Package. User Manuals to the Programs NE 10, NE 14, new
editions, 1997-98.
[21] Nìmec I.
Dynamics of Foundation Plates. In.: Proc. 1st. Conf. on Mechanics, Geomech.
Section, Academy of Sciences Prague, Vol. 6, 1987, p. 90 – 93.
[22] Pasternak P.L.
Principles of the New Foundation Calculation with Two Coefficients (in Russian).
GOS. IZD. LIT. STROJ. ARCH., Moscow, UdSSR, 1954, 56 pp.
[23] Selvadurai A.P.S.
Elastic Analysis of Soil – Foundation Interaction. ELSEVIER, Amsterdam,
Developments in Geotech. Engng. Vol. 17, 1979, 543 pp.
[24] Vlasov V.Z. – Leontjev N.N.
Beams, Plates and Shells on Elastic Foundations (in Russian). GOS. IZD. FIZ. MAT.
LIT., Moscow, UdSSR, 1960, 491 pp.

352
Foundation and subsoil

353
Loads
Introduction to loads
Load represents probably the most important part of the model. The user has always to pay a great attention to
proper definition of load the structure is subject to.
SCIA.ESA PT comes with a set of tools that facilitate this very important task. The program not only provides
for numerous load types (concentrated force, linear moment load, thermal load, etc.) but also enables the user
to manage the loads in a very clear and effective way through load cases, load groups, load case
combinations and result classes. Each of these topics is described in detail in a separate chapter.

Note 1: If the current load case is of Self weight type, it is not possible to define any load in it.
Therefore, if service Loads is called with a Self weight load case active, the menu remains empty.
Note 2: The service Loads contains a long list of various load types. However, the actual offer in
the list depends on several factors. First, the Standard user level of the user interface may hide
some of the sophisticated loads. Second, the type of the load case that is set as active controls the
individual load types in the list.

Load types
Introduction to load types
Load types available in a particular project may depend on the type of project (2D, 3D, etc.) and on the
functionality adjusted for the project. In general, it can be said that loads applicable in SCIA.ESA PT can be
divided into the following groups:
self weight represents the weight of the structure
force and moment load introduces action of external forces
thermal load takes account of different temperature in different places
climatic load models effects of climatic phenomena (wind, snow)
displacement of introduces the effect of prescribed displacements for specific
specified points points of the structure

The number of available load types is really large. In order to simplify the operation of the program, a lot of the
types may be "switched off" by the user. This results in a simplified and more lucid menu of the program. By
default, only the basic load types are offered by the program. If the user wants to use some advanced load
types, he/she must select appropriate options in the functionality settings.

Note: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default, service
Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the service
(Loads), the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service Loads, the
program returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view
parameters for loads are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They
DO NOT disappear from the project. They are just not displayed. In order to see the loads even
from outside the Loads service, set the appropriate view parameters ON.

Point force in node

Parameters of point load applied into a node are:
Name Is used for identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may
further specified by the Angle item.
Type The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or
predefined load.
Angle Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic
direction.
Value Specifies the size of the load.

355
Reference Guide

System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

For information about setting a local co-ordinate system of a
node see chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-
ordinate system of a node.

Direction and angle

Items Direction and Angle may be combined together to obtain the required orientation of the load. The
Direction specifies the base direction. The Angle then defines if and how the load is inclined from the base
direction.
The syntax for item Angle is:
R[axis of rotation][angle]
E.g. Rx30 means to rotate the load around the X-axis by 30 angle units. Rz-20 means to rotate the load
around the Z-axis by minus 20 angle units. The angle units can be adjusted in program Unit setup.
Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
 For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
 For Wind load, the Value represents the loading area. The real wind pressure is defined by wind
curve specified in the project settings.
 For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
 For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.

Point force on beam

Some of the parameters for this load type are the same as for Point force in node.
In addition, parameters specifying the location of the load on a beam member must be defined as well:
Position x Defines the position of the load on the beam member.
Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or
relative.
Origin Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement
is.
Repeat Defines the number of forces acting on the beam member. If
the number is greater than 1, the forces are distributed
uniformly over the beam member.
Delta x Specifies the distance between two adjacent forces.
(available only if Repeat is greater than 1)
Eccentricity ey Specifies the eccentricity in Y-direction.
Eccentricity ez Specifies the eccentricity in Z-direction.

356
 Loads

Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the beam member may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute
co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative
co-ordinates, the position of the load on the beam member is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>.
In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.

Line force on beam

Line force load models load distributed over a beam member. It may be action along the whole beam member
or only on its part. Parameters of point load applied into a node are:
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load. The direction may
further specified by the Angle item.
Type The point load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, or
predefined load.
Angle Specifies the angle by which the load is rotated from its basic
direction.
Distribution The load may be either constant along the beam member or
linearly variable (trapezoidal).
Value Specifies the size of the load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
Bottom flange Defines the distribution of load on a built-in beam member –
see Out-of-balance factor below.
Q factor Defines the Out-of-balance factor – see below.
Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined beam
member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.
(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).
Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the beam
member.
Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the beam member.
Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or
relative.
Origin Tell where the origin for the position co-ordinate measurement
is.
Eccentricity ey Specifies the eccentricity in Y-direction.
Eccentricity ez Specifies the eccentricity in Z-direction.

357
Reference Guide

Direction and angle

Items Direction and Angle may be combined together to obtain the required orientation of the load. The
Direction specifies the base direction. The Angle then defines if and how the load is inclined from the base
direction.
The syntax for item Angle is:
R[axis of rotation][angle]
E.g. Rx30 means to rotate the load around the X-axis by 30 angle units. Rz-20 means to rotate the load
around the Z-axis by minus 20 angle units. The angle units can be adjusted in program Unit setup.
Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
 For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
 For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind
curve specified in the project settings.
 For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
 For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
System
The definition of load direction may be defined:
 in the local co-ordinate system of a beam member,
 in a selected user-co-ordinate system,
 in the global co-ordinate system.
Location
The location depends on the setting of the System.
For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.
However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.
For more information see chapter Direction of loads.
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the beam member may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute
co-ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative
co-ordinates, the position of the load on the beam member is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>.
In both cases, the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.
Out-of-balance factor
The Out-of-balance factor can be defined if option Bottom flange is ON. The Bottom flange parameter is
meaningful only for line load applied on Built-in beams. This parameter enables the user to define the
distribution of the load along the bottom flange. If parameter Bottom flange is ON, parameter Q, i.e. the out-of-
balance factor, can be input.
Q-factor = 0 symmetrical distribution on flange
Q-factor = 1 asymmetrical distribution on flange
Q-factor = qmax – qmin / q general position

358
 Loads

Line force on slab edge

Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.
Type The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load, self-
weight or predefined load.
Distribution The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly
variable (trapezoidal).
Value Specifies the size of the load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined
member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.
(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).
Edge Specifies the edge where the load is acting.
Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the edge.
Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the edge.
Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or
relative.
Origin Tells where the origin for the position co-ordinate is.

Value
The meaning of the Value depends on the Type of load.
 For Force load, the Value is the real value of the load.
 For Wind load, the Value represents the loading width. The real wind pressure is defined by wind
curve specified in the project settings.
 For Snow load, the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
 For Predefined load the meaning is analogous to Wind load.
System
The definition of load direction may be defined:
 in the local co-ordinate system of a edge,
 in a selected user-co-ordinate system,
 in the global co-ordinate system.
Location
The location depends on the setting of the System.
For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.
However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.
For more information see chapter Direction of loads.
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the edge may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-
ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-
ordinates, the position of the load on the edge is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases,
the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.
Example

359
Reference Guide

Surface load on slab

The surface load is defined on the whole slab. If only a part of a main slab is supposed to be subject to this
load, a subregion must be defined inside the main slab. The subregion must be identical with the loading area.
Alternatively, free surface load may be applied.
Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.
Type The point load may be a force load, self-weight or predefined
load.
See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.
Value Specifies the size of the load.
See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
See Line force on slab edge for detailed information.

Note: Predefined load and snow load add a new parameter to the property table: Coefficient.
The default value of this parameter is –1 (minus one) to ensure that the defined load acts
downwards and is of the same value as defined.

360
 Loads

Moment load in node

A node of the structure may be subject to a moment load. The load is defined by the direction and size of the
moment.
The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Point force in node.

Moment load on beam

The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Point force on beam.

Line moment load on beam

The meaning of individual parameters is analogous to parameters for Line force on beam.

Line moment on slab edge

Parameters

361
Reference Guide

Name Is used for the identification of the load.

Direction Specifies the direction of the moment.
Type The load may be of moment type only.
Distribution The load can be either uniformly distributed along the edge or it
can linearly variable (trapezoidal distribution).
Value Specifies the size of the load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined
member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.
(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).
Position x1 Defines the position of the load beginning on the edge.
Position x2 Defines the position of the load end on the edge.
Co-ordinate definition Specifies the definition of the position. It may be absolute or
relative.
Origin Tells where the origin for the position co-ordinate is.

System
The definition of load direction may be defined:
 in the local co-ordinate system of a edge,
 in the global co-ordinate system.
Location
The location depends on the setting of the System.
For local and user co-ordinate system, the location can be only Length.
However, for load defined in the global co-ordinate system, also a Projection may be selected.
For more information see chapter Direction of loads.
Co-ordinate definition
The location of the load on the edge may be defined in absolute or relative co-ordinates. If absolute co-
ordinates are selected, the distance is defined in real length units set for the project. In the case of relative co-
ordinates, the position of the load on the edge is defined by value from within the interval <0, 1>. In both cases,
the distance is measured from the point defined in the Origin item.

Thermal load on beam

Distribution of thermal load
Constant The load is defined by means of a single value. The value
specifies the warming to which the beam member is subject.

Linear The load is defined by means of a set of four values. The

individual values specify the temperature at individual sides
(top, left, bottom, right) of the beam member.

Thermal distribution If ON, the load is defined by means of specified thermal

curve distribution curve.

Thermal distribution curve parameters

Direction in LCS of This parameter specifies the direction from which the heat
cross-section "comes", i.e. which face of the beam is exposed to the fire.

Temperature Specifies the temperature distribution curve that is used to

distribution curve determine the final load.

362
 Loads

Number of cross-
section layers
The actual distribution of the heat over the cross-section is
generally non-linear (defined by the temperature distribution
curve). The calculation algorithm, however, required a linear
distribution. Therefore, the program must transform the curve
into a trapezoid. The accuracy of this approximation can be
controlled by this parameter. The higher the input number, the
better accuracy and the more demanding (longer) the
calculation.
The parameter can be from the interval <5, 50>.

The meaning of parameters from the Geometry group is identical with Line force on beam.

Temperature distribution curve

Thermal load can be defined through a distribution curve that defines the distribution of the heat across the
cross-section of a member.
When a member is exposed to fire, one side of the cross-section is directly exposed to the source of the heat.
The temperature to which the interior of the cross-section is exposed to decreases with the distance from the
directly exposed face. The temperature distribution curve defines this drop in the temperature.
To allow for this type of load, it is necessary to select Concrete > Fire resistance option in the Project
settings.
The temperature distribution curve can be defined in the Temperature curves manager. Once at least
temperature curve is defined, it can be used in function Load > Thermal load.

Temperature curves manager

The Temperature curves manager is a standard SCIA ES PT database manager. You can perform the
following:
 input of a new temperature distribution curve,
 review and modify the existing curves,
 copy and delete the defined curves,
 save them to an external file,
 import temperature distribution curves from previously created external files (the external file can
also be provided by a colleague user),
 import predefined temperature distribution curve created according to the regulations of EN 1168.

Temperature distribution curves input dialogue

One temperature distribution curve defined in the Temperature curves manager may in fact consist of
several individual curves. Each individual curve is defined for one time duration of fire. The final temperature
distribution curve stored in the Temperature curves manager can be thus used for any duration of fire that is
within the interval of durations of individual curves. If the user specified time duration coincides with one of the
individual curves, then that corresponding curve is used in the calculation. If the user specified time duration is
somewhere in between, the curve to be used in the calculation is automatically interpolated by the program.

363
Reference Guide

Consequently, the input dialogue is a two-level input dialogue. The first level displays the whole set of defined
curves. The second level enables the user to work with one particular individual curve.
It is, however, also possible that the final curve consists just of one individual curve.
First-level dialogue – the set of curves
Graphical window This part of the dialogue displays the defined set of curves.

Name Specifies the name of the temperature distribution curve.

Description Describes the curve (e.g. "Temperature curves for hollow core
slabs according to EN 1168").

Fire duration The final fire duration used in the calculation. If the value
specified here coincides with one of the individual curves, the
corresponding curve is used. Otherwise the final curve is
obtained through interpolation.

List of individual Lists the defined individual curves.

curves
[New] Inputs a new individual curve (opens the second-level
dialogue).

[Edit] Enables the user to edit one of the already defined individual
curves.

[Delete] Deletes one of the already defined individual curves.

[Delete All] Deletes all the already defined individual curves.

Property table Summarises the information about the individual curve

currently highlighted in the list.

364
 Loads

In addition, it enables the user to adjust the required colour of

the individual curve.

Second-level dialogue – one individual curve

Graphical window This part of the dialogue displays the defined curve.

Table In this table you input individual points that define the curve.
Distance = the distance from the face of the cross-section that
exposed to fire. The distance is measured from the face
inwards.
Temperature = the temperature at the given distance.

File duration Specifies the time duration of the fire.

[OK] Saves the input and closes the dialogue.

[Cancel] Discards the input and closes the dialogue.

The procedure to input a new temperature distribution curve

1. Open the Temperature curves manager:
a. Use tree menu function Library > Temperature curve.
b. Use menu function Libraries > Temperature curve.
2. Click button [New] to start the input of a new temperature distribution curve (if no temperature
distribution curve has been defined so far, this step is automatically skipped and you are asked to
input temperature distribution curve as soon as you the Temperature curves manager.
3. The Temperature distribution curves input dialogue is opened on the screen (i.e. the first level
dialogue).
4. Click button [New] to input one individual curve. Confirm the input with [OK].
5. If required, add other individual curves.
6. Input the required duration of the fire. (The duration of fire can be also adjusted directly in the main
dialogue of the Temperature curves manager.)
7. Close the Temperature distribution curves input dialogue. You get back to the Temperature
curves manager.
8. If required, input another time distribution curve.
9. When everything is defined, close the manager.

The procedure to import the predefined (according to a standard) temperature distribution curve
1. Open the Temperature curves manager:
a. Use tree menu function Library > Temperature curve.
b. Use menu function Libraries > Temperature curve.
2. Click icon System database.
3. The Read from database dialogue is opened on the screen.
4. The right-hand side window contains the available predefined curves.
5. The left-hand side window contains the curves that are defined in the project.
6. Use button [Copy to project] or [Copy all] to copy the required curves into your project.
7. Close the dialogue.

Thermal load on slab

Thermal load may be either constant or linear.
Constant The load is defined by means of a single value. The value
specifies the warming to which the slab is subject.
Linear The load is defined by means of a set of two values. The

365
Reference Guide

individual values specify the temperature at individual surfaces

(top, bottom) of the slab.

Translation of support
A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed displacement. In such a case, the user defines the
direction and magnitude of the known displacement.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force in
node. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.

Translation of a point on beam

A point of the structure may be subject to a prescribed displacement. The displacement means that the beam
member is "torn apart" and one part of the beam member is lifted up while the other part is pushed down. The
imposed load is clear from the picture below. The magnitude defined is equal to the distance of "torn-end-
points" of the beam member.

366
 Loads

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force on
beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Rotation of support
A node of the structure may be subject to a prescribed rotation. In such a case, the user defines the direction
and magnitude of the known rotation.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force in
node. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Note: The translation of support cannot be defined in flexible and non-linear supports.

367
Reference Guide

Rotation of a point on beam

A point of the structure may be subject to a prescribed rotation. The displacement means that the beam
member is "cracked" and both parts are bent. The imposed load is clear from the picture below. The
magnitude defined is equal to the angle between the tangents to two parts of the beam member.

The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Point force on
beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Longitudinal strain
The whole beam member may be subject to a longitudinal strain. This strain can be either uniform along the
beam or may vary linearly.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force on
beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

368
 Loads

Flexural strain
The whole beam member may be subject to a flexural strain. This strain can be either uniform along the beam
member or may vary linearly.
The definition of this load type and the meaning of the individual parameters is analogous to Line force on
beam. However, due to the nature of the load, the number of parameters is reduced.

Slab displacement and curvature

Parameters
Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification
of the load.
Epsilon [mm/m’] Relative elongation due to increase of temperature or
shrinkage.
k [mrad/m’] Curvature of the plane due to non-uniform increase of
temperature or shrinkage.

A little bit of theory

Considering that the material is homogenous and isotropic and that the temperature is distributed linearly
across the member thickness, the elongation of a member due to the increase of temperature can be easily
calculated.
Let’s assume increase of temperature at the upper surface TH and increase of temperature at the lower
surface TD. The final increase of temperature (shrinkage) can be divided into two components – see the figure
below.

Considering this, we obtain:

Elongation (in m/m’)

where
alpha coefficient of thermal expansion
Ts the increased temperature

369
Reference Guide

Positive increase of temperature gives positive value of elongation.

Curvature

where
alpha coefficient of thermal expansion
delta T difference in temperature between the surface z = -h/2 and
z = +h/2.
h member thickness

It follows from geometry that k = 1 / R, where R is a radius of a spherical surface the shape of which the
members takes if the change of shape due to an increase of temperature is not prevented.

Note: If the increase of temperature is not linear across the member, the distribution of
temperature increase must be linearised. The results must be then revised and stress resulting
from the difference between the given and linearised increase of temperature must be obtained by
a special calculation and added to this result.

Example
Imagine the following – rather theoretical – situation. Let’s have a circular slab supported in its centre only.

First, let’s subject this slab to the uniform elongation of 10 mm/m. It is possible to imagine that both surfaces of
the slab are heated.
After calculation, we may see the overall and symmetrical expansion of the slab (the figure shows both the
original slab and the deformed finite element mesh).

370
 Loads

Second, let’s subject the slab to non-uniform expansion (curvature) of 10 mrad/m. It is possible to imagine that
only one surface of the slab is heated.
After calculation, we may see the bowl-like deformation of the slab that results from this type of load. The
figure shows the both the original slab and the deformed finite element mesh. The second figure presenting the
side-view is more illustrative.

371
Reference Guide

Pond load - water accumulation

Parameters
Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification
of the load.
Loaded beams Informs about the loading conditions.
Direction Specifies the direction of the load.
Storage capacity Specifies the capacity of the roof.
Other reasons Specifies an additional height.
Division Specifies the division used for the calculation.
Max number of steps Defines maximum number of steps during the calculation.
Use other permanent If ON, other permanent load may be included.
load
Status Tells the status of he calculation.

Detailed parameters -Points

No. Automatically generated vertex number.
X, Y Co-ordinates of vertex of loading polygon.
Height Type of definition of water height.
Input: The height is manually input.
Point: The height is calculated from the value at different point
using the given slope.
Calculate: The height is calculated from defined slopes.
H Defines the water height.
Point Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the point from which the
height is calculated.
Slope Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the slope from the
selected point.

Detailed parameters -Drains

Point Number of point.
Location Location of the drain.

372
 Loads

hdn depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m
A roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using
2
a certain emergency drain, in m
b width of the drain

Detailed parameters -Slopes

The user may define subregions where planar shape is assumed. Only three points may have the height
defined. The remaining points are calculated. In case of any conflict, the area is not permitted.

Example
When defined in the model, the pond load may look like:

373
Reference Guide

Soil pressure and water pressure

Several types of load (point force, line load and surface load) can be defined as what is called "soil pressure"
or "water pressure ". Both loads are quite related and will be explained together.
Both load types appear only if a structure is located underground. Depending on the surrounding soil, level of
underground water and depth below the surface, the program automatically calculates the soil pressure and
water pressure.

In depth h (point a), the intensities of the generated loads are:

SigV,a If a is located above water level
(h <= H’d), then (h * Gdry)
If a is located below water level
(h > H’d), then (H’d * Gdry + H’w * Gwet)
It works ONLY in the negative direction of global Z-axis!

SigH,a SigH,a = SigV,a * k0

374
 Loads

SigW,a If a is located above water level

(h <= H’d), then ( 0)
If a is located below water level
(h > H’d), then (H’w * Gwater)

This would lead to a distributed load as in the image below:

Water and soil loads can be input for the following load cases:
 action type = "permanent" and load type = "standard",
 action type = "variable" and load type = "static".
The procedure to input soil / water pressure
1. Open service Load.
2. Start function the required load type (point, line, surface).
3. Adjust the parameters - see below.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Apply the load on required entities.
Soil / water load parameters
In addition to common parameters for point, line and slab load, this load type requires the input of the following
data:
Type Must be set to Soil pressure or Water pressure.
Distribution Only for line load.
The line load may be uniform or trapezoidal.
Acting area Only for point load.
Defines the acting area for the load.
Acting width Only for line load.
Defines the acting width for the load.
Coefficient Only for soil pressure.
This coefficient must be defined for horizontal soil pressure. It specifies
the ration between vertical and horizontal soil pressure.
(I.e. for vertical pressure it should be equal to 1).
Borehole profile Specifies the borehole that is used for the generation of the pressure.

The soil / water pressure is displayed as shown in the picture below.

375
Reference Guide

The brown diagram represents the "defined" load. It has been defined along the whole column.
The green diagram represents the "generated" part. The generated soil pressure reaches just to then top of
the borehole (that was used as the reference borehole).
The calculation considers the green, i.e. generated, load.

Note: Water pressure is generated only below the level of underground water. If the whole
model is above the water level, no pressure is generated at all.

Note: Please note, that the pressure is generated on the basis of data provided in the dialogue.
It means that the "geologic" data are derived exclusively from the borehole profile provided. The
generated soil pressure takes no account of possibly displayed earth surface. Even if the surface
has been calculated and is displayed, the program does not calculate the intersection of the surface
with the member that is subject to the soil pressure. The part of the member that is underground is
determined only and solely from the specified single borehole profile. See the picture below.

The picture demonstrates the note above. There are three columns defined. There are several boreholes
defined. The surface was calculated and is shown in the picture – the inclined line joining the top ends of the
two boreholes. The soil pressure was input on all the columns. The left most borehole was used as the
reference parameter for the definition of all three loads. That is the reason why the distribution of the soil
pressure generated on all columns is identical. In other words, the two columns on the right are subject to soil
pressure even above the surface. The calculated surface does not influence the generation of the soil
pressure.

376
 Loads

Pressure load
Parameters
Name Is used for identification of the load.

Type Outside
The pipe is exposed to external pressure.
Inside
The pipe is exposed to internal pressure.

Distribution Uniform
The uniform pressure acts on the pipe.
Trapez
The pressure has trapezoidal distribution.

Value – P (only for uniform distribution)

Specifies the magnitude of the pressure.
Value – P1, P2 (only for trapezoidal distribution)
Specify the magnitude of the pressure.

Close begin If ON, the pipe is closed at the starting point. This option has
an effect on the calculation algorithm.

Close end If ON, the pipe is closed at the end-point. This option has an
effect on the calculation algorithm.

Internal forces not calculated in the model

If required, the user can input to any beam member and any load case his/her definition of the distribution of
internal forces along the beam member. The input of these "not-calculated" internal forces can be made in
service Load. This user-input internal force is displayed as a normal load.
It is possible to define up to 7 different components of internal forces: N, Vy, Vz, Mx, My, Mz, Sig Y, Sig Z.
The user can choose from several types of the course of the quantity along the beam member:
 uniform (1 value is defined),
 trapezoidal (2 values on ends are defined),
 triangle (2 values on ends and 1 in the middle are defined),
 polynomial (n values in n relative sections are input).
ESA PT performs a standard analysis. The calculated results are after the calculation rewritten by the input
values - for the specific beam member and specific load case.
If Sig Y is input on a specific beam member, this value is taken into account in the calculation of von Mises
stress.
Example
Let us have a simply supported beam with two load cases defined. In both load cases, let us introduce a unit
concentrated force in the middle of the span.

377
Reference Guide

In addition, in the second load case, let us define two components of not-calculated internal forces: Vz and My.
Vz is defined as uniform over the beam.

My is input as triangular with negative values in the supports and a positive value in the middle of the span.

The input not-calculated internal forces are displayed as a normal load.

378
 Loads

When the calculation is performed and the results reviewed, the following is shown in the screen.
The first load case in which the beam is subjected to the concentrated force in the middle of the span and no
not-calculated internal forces are defined, the distribution of both Vz and My is as anyone would expect from
the external load.

in the second load case however, the specified not-calculated internal forces overwrite the calculated results
and the distribution of Vz and y corresponds not to the external load but the input values of not-calculated
internal forces.

379
Reference Guide

Procedure to input not-calculated internal forces

1. Open service Load.
2. Start function Not-calculated internal forces.
3. If required, type the name that serves better orientation in your project.
4. Select the type (one of the seven components mentioned above).
5. Select the distribution (one of the four stated above).
6. Press the three-dot button in item Parameters in order to open an extra dialogue and input the
required values.
7. Confirm the parameters with [OK].
8. Confirm the load definition with [OK].
9. Position the load to required beam members.

Dynamic loads
Harmonic load
There is no need to carry out a special dynamic calculation for a weakly damped structure. The method of
expansion into eigenmodes can be used to determine the final amplitude of deformation line as a linear
combination of the eigenmodes (the phase shift between individual eigenmodes can be ignored for weak
damping). This type of calculation only requires the definition of logarithmic decrement, frequency of excitation
impulse in Hz and amplitude of nodal impulses (see Defining the harmonic load case).
The results may than be reviewed the same way as results of a standard static calculation (see also Evaluating
the results for harmonic load).
If the phase shift between individual eigenmodes cannot be ignored due to stronger damping, the problem
must be solved as a response to a general dynamic load.

Seismic load
During earthquake, the subsoil (sub-grade or foundation) bearing a structure moves. The structure tries to
follow this movement. As a result, all masses in the structure begin to move. Subsequently, they subject the
structure to inertial forces. Supports can generally move in all directions, but normally only horizontal moves
are taken into consideration. The user may define the direction that s/he considers to be crucial for the
structure or s/he may evaluate the effect of shakes acting in different directions.

380
 Loads

Inertial forces arise from the move. It is sufficient to determine these forces and apply them on the structure.
Thus, the dynamic calculation is transformed into a static one. But the whole thing is not that simple. We do not
know the precise movement of subsoil and therefore we are not able to determine the seismic forces precisely.
But we can apply formulas of a technical standard or employ the frequency spectrum of a real earthquake.
Usually, horizontal movement of a structure is assumed for seismic load. That means that the earthquake acts
in a plane horizontal to XY plane. The direction can be specified by means of coefficient for individual co-
ordinate axes.
For example:
earthquake in X-direction set X = 1 and Y = 0
earthquake in Y-direction set X = 0 and Y = 1
earthquake in the axis of the 1st set X = Y = 0.707 (i.e. sin(45°))
quadrant

On the other hand, it is possible to take account of Z-directions as well. This can be achieved by specifying the
coefficient for Z axis.

Note: We must be careful with the coefficients as earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=0.667" is not equal
to earthquake "X=1; Y=0; Z=-0.667" nor to earthquake "X=-1; Y=0; Z=0.667".

The seismic calculation runs automatically, which means that both self-weight and input masses are used to
generate load for individual eigenmodes.
The evaluation is performed separately for each force and displacement component using generally two
available formulas:
 Square root of the sum of squares taking account of the extreme value:

 Square root of the sum of squares:

where:
Sdyn component in consideration

Sm the maximum corresponding component for individual

eigenmode
Sj other corresponding components for individual eigenmode

The final force may be both negative and positive. Both possibilities are considered in combinations.

Note: Whatever procedure we apply to the evaluation of quantity X, the result is always positive
value. But we can have also a negative value because in seismicity the vibration is around the
equilibrium position. The results of seismic calculation are always positive in SCIA.ESA PT. The
only exception is with internal forces. Here, the co-ordinate system convention in not used. Instead,
the "elasticity" convention (lower and front fibres under tension) is applied. Signs of some shear
forces and bending moments may be inverted and "minus" may appear in the results of seismic
calculation.

One more fact must be borne in mind. In static analysis we are curious about relations between individual
internal forces – e.g. extreme axial force and corresponding bending moment. Such relations, however, cannot
be determined for results of seismic calculation because each component is evaluated separately which, as
you have surely noticed, is not a linear problem.
When evaluating results of seismic analysis, the one may say "this is the maximal axial force", "this is the
maximal axial stress", "this is the maximal vertical displacement". But one cannot calculate stress in a section
from the axial force and bending moment even though they appear in the same line of result table. This is the
effect of the squares and roots in the formulas above. Accurate stress can be obtained only in appropriate
module for design and checking (steel, concrete, etc. structures).

381
Reference Guide

General seismisity
If a structure is designed for a particular earthquake, we can employ seismicity defined by means of a
frequency spectrum. The following data must be specified:
 table of frequencies and accelerations,
 coefficients of accelerations,
 direction coefficients,
 evaluation type.
For more information see chapter Defining the seismic load case.

Free loads
Introduction to free loads
Free load is related to slabs. The load is not defined by the entity it acts on, but by a specific load border. Free
loads are defined by means of "loading entities" that may overlap or affect one or more slabs.
Available types of "loading entity"
polygon The loading entity is defined by means of a general polygon.
line The loading entity is defined by means of a line or polyline.
point The loading entity is defined by means of a point.

Note: The loading entity may be oriented arbitrarily but can be input only in the XY plane of the
current UCS. Therefore, before one can input the free load, it is necessary to adjust the working
plane accordingly.

Each loading entity keeps a record of what was the orientation of the UCS when the entity was defined. The
orientation of the UCS is important as some of the loading parameters may be related to this UCS. Whenever
any already defined free load entity is selected, the appropriate UCS is activated.
If an inclined slab is subject to free load (the word inclined means that the plane of the slab and the loading
plane of the loading entity are not parallel), the final load value is calculated from the projection of defined load
onto the selected slab.
Free load is independent of finite element mesh and possible refinement or "coursing" of the mesh does not
affect the calculated results.
It is possible to manually define which particular slabs should be subject to a particular free load. Alternatively,
the program may automatically detect all affected slabs and apply the load on them. The former approach
enables the user to extract specific slabs from the effect of the defined load.
Validity of free loads
The validity of free load means (i) which particular slabs are subject to the given load and (ii) the halfspace
where the load acts (i.e. the direction of the load).
All Both entities located under and above the defined load are
subject to the defined load.
-Z If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located
along the negative half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system.
That means that ONLY the entities located UNDER the XY-
plane of the UCS are subject to the load in question.
Z If ON, the load is supposed to act only in the space located
along the positive half of Z-axis of the User coordinate system.
That means that ONLY the entities located ABOVE the XY-
plane of the UCS are subject to the load in question.
Selected The user must define which particular entities are supposed to
be subject to the given load.

The validity parameters can become more clear from the following example.
Let’s have four slabs input one above the other. Define free area load in the plane of the third slab (from the
bottom).

382
 Loads

First, set option Select to All and validity to All. Perform the calculation and open function Calculation, mesh
> 2D data viewer > Surface load. You can see that the load acts on all four slabs.

Second, set option Select to All and validity to Z. The load acts only on the top slab because it acts only on
that part of the structure that is above the plane in which the load is defined. (If the load was input let’s say 5
cm below the midplane of the third (from bottom) slab, also that slab would be subject to the load.)

383
Reference Guide

Third, set option Select to All and validity to –Z. The load acts only on two bottom slabs because it acts only
on that part of the structure that is below the plane in which the load is defined.

Fourth, set option Select to Select and validity to All. Select the most bottom slab and the third one.

384
 Loads

The load acts only on the two selected slabs only.

Note: Attention must be paid to the situation when parameter Select is set to Select and
parameter Validity is set to Z or –Z. In this case the two conditions are combined to make a
product. So it could happen that there is no slab that would comply with both the conditions: being
selected and being in the proper semi-space.

General procedure for the definition of a new free load

1. Start the appropriate function (free point load, free line load, free surface load).
2. Adjust the size and other parameters of the load.
3. Input the loading entity (i.e. the loading area/line/point).
4. If necessary, make the selection of slabs that should be subject to the load.
5. Close the function.
Example
The figure below demonstrates all three types of free load: point load (far left), polygonal two-segment line load
(far right) and surface load (in the centre).

385
Reference Guide

Free point load

Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.
Type The free point load may be of force type only.
Value Specifies the size of the load.
Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to
free loads for more information.
Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to
this load or if only selected members are supposed to be
affected by this particular load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Free moment load

Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.
Type The free moment load may be of moment type only.
Value – F Specifies the magnitude of the load.
Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to
free loads for more information.
Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to
this load or if only selected members are supposed to be
affected by this particular load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.

Free line load

Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.

386
 Loads

Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.

Type The load may be a force load.
Distribution The load may be either constant along the edge or linearly
variable (trapezoidal).
Value Specifies the size of the load.
Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to
free loads for more information.
Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to
this load or if only selected members are supposed to be
affected by this particular load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined
member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.
(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

Free surface load

Parameters
Name Is used for the identification of the load.
Direction Specifies the base direction of the load.
Type The load may be a force load, wind load, snow load or
predefined load.
Distribution The load may be either constant across the slab or linearly
variable (trapezoidal).
Value Specifies the size of the load.
Validity Defines the validity of the load – see chapter Introduction to
free loads for more information.
Select It is possible to define if all suitable members will be subject to
this load or if only selected members are supposed to be
affected by this particular load.
System Defines the co-ordinate system in which the load is applied.
Location Specifies whether the load is "put directly on an inclined
member" or whether the "projection on plan" is defined.
(Applicable only for loads defined in GCS system).

387
Reference Guide

Displaying the generated free surface load

The input free area load is displayed as a single closed polygon. Depending on its validity and depending on
the selection of "affected" slabs, the final load may be generated on several slabs.
The procedure to display the final load
1. Perform the calculation
2. Open tree Calculation, mesh.
3. Start function 2D data viewer.
4. Select Surface load.
5. Select the required parameter.
6. Adjust other drawing parameters.
7. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window).

Load direction
Direction of loads
Point force load
Point force load defined in a node or on a beam member can be acting in the following directions:
global co-ordinate Both point force load in node and point force load on beam
system member can be defined to act in the direction of the global co-
ordinate system.
local co-ordinate Point force load in node can be acting in the direction of local
system of node co-ordinate system of the node.
See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-
ordinate system of a node.
local co-ordinate Point force load on beam member can be acting in the direction
system of beam of local co-ordinate system of the beam member.

Line force load

Distributed load on a beam member can be acting in the following directions:

388
 Loads

global co-ordinate
system

projection in the global

co-ordinate system

local co-ordinate
system of beam

Moment load (point and line)

global co-ordinate Both point moment load in node, point moment load on beam
system member, and line moment load on beam member can be
defined to act in the direction of the global co-ordinate system.
local co-ordinate Point moment load in node can be acting in the direction of
system of node local co-ordinate system of the node.
See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-
ordinate system of a node.
local co-ordinate Both point and line moment load on beam member can be
system of beam acting in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the beam
member.

389
Reference Guide

Point displacement load

global co-ordinate Point displacement load in node can be acting in the direction
system of the global co-ordinate system.
local co-ordinate Point displacement load in node can be acting in the direction
system of node of local co-ordinate system of the node.
See also chapter Geometry > Nodes > Defining a local co-
ordinate system of a node.
local co-ordinate Point displacement load on beam member can be acting ONLY
system of beam in the direction of the local co-ordinate system of the beam
member.

Line displacement load

Line displacement load can be defined ONLY in the direction of local co-ordinate system of the beam member.

Defining a new load

Defining a new point load in a node
The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all nodal point loads, i.e. point force, point moment,
translation in node, rotation in node, wind pressure in node, etc.
The procedure for the definition of a new point load in a node
1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:
a. Point force > in node
b. Moment > in node
c. Point displacement > Translation of support
d. Point displacement > Rotation of support
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select nodes where the load should act.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new point load on a beam

The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all point loads located on a beam member, i.e. point
force, point moment, translation of a point, rotation of a point, wind pressure in a point, etc.
The procedure for the definition of a new point load on a beam member
1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:
a. Point force > on beam
b. Moment > on beam
c. Point displacement > on beam - translation
d. Point displacement > on beam - rotation
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Input the position of the load on the beam member.
4. Type the number of repetitions of the load and input the distance between adjacent loads.
5. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
6. Select beam members where the load should act.
7. Close the function.

Defining a new line load on a beam

The same procedure is applicable for the definition of all line loads, i.e. line force, line moment, translation of a
beam member, rotation of a beam member, wind pressure over a beam member, etc.

390
 Loads

The procedure for the definition of a new line load on a beam member
1. Open the required function via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:
a. Line force on beam
b. Line moment on beam
c. Line displacement > relative translation
d. Line displacement > relative rotation
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Input the starting point and end point of the load position. (This must be made only for force loads
as the prescribed displacement must be applied to the whole beam member.)
4. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
5. Select beam members where the load should act.
6. Close the function.

Defining a new thermal load on a beam

The procedure for the definition of a new thermal load
1. Open function Thermal load on beam via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads:
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Input the starting point and end point of the load position.
4. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
5. Select beam members where the load should act.
6. Close the function.

Defining a new line load on slab edge

The procedure for the definition of a new line load on slab edge
1. Open function Line force > on slab edge via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select the edges where the load should act.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new surface load on a slab

The procedure for the definition of a new surface load on slab
1. Open function Surface load > on slab via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select the slabs where the load should act (you may select both main slabs and subregions).
5. Close the function.

Defining a new thermal load on slab

The procedure for the definition of a new thermal load
1. Open function Thermal load on slab via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select slabs where the load should act.
5. Close the function.

391
Reference Guide

Defining a new free point load

The procedure for the definition of a new free point load
1. Open function Point force > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Define the point / points where the load should act.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new free line load

The procedure for the definition of a new free line load
1. Open function Line force > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Define the loading line / polygone.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new free surface load

The procedure for the definition of a new free surface load
1. Open function Surface load > Free via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Define the loading area (i.e. a closed polygon).
5. Close the function.

Defining a new slab displacement

The procedure for the definition of a displacement of a slab
1. Open function Slab displacement, curvature via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select slabs where the load should be applied.
5. Close the function.

Fast definition of specific load types

Some of the most often used load types may be defined very fast via buttons on the toolbar at the top edge of
the command line.
The toolbar appears only when service Loads is opened. The individual buttons provide for the definition of the
following load types:

 point force in a node ( ),

 single point force on beam member ( ),

 two uniformly distributed point forces on a beam member ( ),

 three uniformly distributed point forces on a beam member ( ),

 four uniformly distributed point forces on a beam member ( ),

 distributed load on a beam member ( ).

All the above-mentioned buttons start the corresponding function with default settings. The settings are shown
in the property window where they can but do not have to be edited.

392
 Loads

The procedure for the fast definition of specific load types

1. Start service Loads.
2. The toolbar appears on the screen.

3. Press the required button.

4. If necessary, edit the values in the Property window.
5. Select entities to which the load should be applied.
6. Close the function.

Note: The fast definition of load does not work if the current load case is either of Self weight or
wind or snow type.

Modifying the existing load

Changing the load parameters
Load is a standard SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for the modification of load is therefore identical to the procedure for the modification of model data
(e.g. supports, etc.).

Moving the load

Load is a standard SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for move of load is therefore identical to the procedure for move of model data (see chapter Model
data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data).

Copying the load

Load is a normal SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for copying of load is therefore identical to the procedure for copying of model data (see chapter
Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Copying the model data).

Deleting the load

Load is a normal SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for removal of load is therefore identical to the procedure for removal of model data (see chapter
Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Deleting the model data).

Editing the shape of free load

The shape of free load (line and surface) can be edited, if required. The procedure is identical for both load
types and differs only in the name of the function that does the editing.
The procedure to edit the geometry of free load
1. Select the load to be edited.
2. In the property window click button:
a. in case of line load, [Edit polygonal load geometry],
b. in case of area load, [Edit plane load geometry].
3. Use drag-and-drop approach to move the vertices of the load geometry, if required.
4. Invoke the pop-up menu and use appropriate function to insert or delete a vertex.
5. Invoke the pop-up menu and select required function to abandon or end the editing.

393
Reference Guide

Load cases
Introduction to load cases
Individual loads are not defined "freely". They must be included in load cases. The load cases correspond with
the professional terminology specified in national technical standards dealing with loads of civil engineering
structures. The application of load cases in SCIA.ESA PT follows the load management procedures that are
usual and also obligatory in civil engineering practice.
It is possible to specify a great number of load case parameters to control the way the program treats each
particular load case and especially the loads defined into it.

Load case manager

The Load case manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manager. It provides for basic operations with load
cases:
 creation of a new load case,
 editing of existing load cases,
 deletion of existing load cases,
 printing the information about existing load cases,
 saving and reading of existing load cases into and from an external file.
The Load case manager can be opened in one of the following ways:
 using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Load cases,
 using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Load cases.

Defining a new load case

The procedure for the definition of a new load case
1. Open the Load case manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. A new load case is created.
4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
5. Input the required values for individual load case parameters.
6. Confirm with button [OK].
7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. Close the Load case manager.

Note: By default, the first load case is automatically created once a new project is opened. The
default load case is of Self weight type. Unless the user defines another load case and sets it as

394
 Loads

an active one, it is not possible to define any load (except the self weight). See also Note 1 in
chapter Introduction to loads.

Defining the load case parameters

The parameters of a load case control the way the program treats the load inserted in the load case.
Basic parameters
Name Is used for a unique identification of the load case.
Description May add some information about the load case.
Type Specifies the type of the load case.
Load group Sorts load cases by load groups.

Load case type

The load case type can be set to:
Permanent Specifies the permanent loads.
Variable Specifies the variable loads in the project.

Other parameters depend on the adjustment of the load case type.

Parameters for permanent loads
Type (subtype)
Self weight Specifies the load case where only self-weight of the structure
can be defined.
Standard Specifies the load case where any load can be defined.
Creep Defines a special load case for specific calculation.
Prestress This type is used for calculations of prestressed structures.
Primary effects This load case is used when the primary effect are calculated.

Note: The list above may not be complete. Some types of load case may appear only for a
specific type of analysis. The list above may not be complete. The meaning of special load cases is
explained in appropriate chapters.
Direction
This item tells the program the direction in which the generated self-weight is acting.

Parameters for variable loads

Type (subtype)
Static The load case is used for static calculations.
Dynamic The load case is used for dynamic calculations.
Primary effects This load case is used when the primary effect are calculated.

Note: The list above may not be complete. Some types of load case may appear only for a
specific type of analysis. The list above may not be complete. The meaning of special load cases is
explained in appropriate chapters.

Specification of static load case

Standard Defines a general static load case. Any load can be defined in
such a load case.
Temperature Defines a load case for thermal loads.
Static wind Defines a load case for wind loads. Only wind load can be
defined in such a load case.

395
Reference Guide

Earthquake Defines a load case for seismic analysis.

Snow Defines a load case for snow loads. Only snow load can be
defined in such a load case.

Coefficient
It defines the factor used for the load case when combinations of load cases are generated. This parameter is
defined only for some codes.
Duration
For static standard loads, the duration of the load impact can be specified.
Long Is used for non-linear calculation of deformation for concrete
structures
Medium Is used for check of timber structures.
Short Default type.
Instantaneous Is used for check of timber structures.
All standard static loads are considered during the generation of load case combination as a normal variable
load. Loads of long and short duration are applied only to combinations for the calculation of deformation of
concrete structures according to the second ultimate state. Loads of medium and instantaneous duration are
taken into account only for check of timber members.
Master load case
It is possible to specify that some particular load case may be included into a combination of load cases ONLY
if another specific load case is included. The item Master load case tells the program that a particular load
case is bound to another load case – to the Master load case.
Other parameters
There are other parameters available for each load case. However, these additional parameters depend on the
active code adjusted for the project. The meaning of individual additional parameters is based on
corresponding articles of appropriate codes and it goes beyond the scope of this book.

Note: The settings may affect the functionality of the program. For example, let’s assume that
the user defines a new load case and sets its specification to Static wind. If later service Loads is
opened, the user may define only wind loads, nothing else.

Using the load case

The load case is used with each newly defined load – a particular load case must be set as active so that the
user may define a new load.
Setting the load case in service Loads
1. Open service Loads.
2. A combo box listing the defined load cases appears at the top of the service tree.
3. Use the combo box to select and set the required load case.
4. All the new loads defined later are inserted into the current load case shown in the combo box.
It is also possible to change only the displayed load case in the active graphical window.
Setting the displayed load case via window control button

1. Click button [Set load case for display] ( ) located on the window toolbar (the window’s bottom
scroll bar).
2. A list of defined load cases opens on the screen.
3. Select the required load case.
4. A new load case is displayed.

Note 1: The display style of loads is controlled by appropriate view parameters. By default,
service Loads set the view parameters related to loads ON. Therefore, whenever you are in the
service (Loads), the loads are automatically displayed. However, as soon as you close service
Loads, the program returns to the standard setting of view parameters. It may happen that the view
parameters for loads are OFF, which means that the defined loads disappear from the screen. They

396
 Loads

DO NOT disappear from the project. They are just not display. In order to see the loads even from
outside the Loads service, set the appropriate view parameters ON.
Note 2: The adjustment of the active load case for displaying of results is an integral part of
service Results and is described in corresponding chapter of the manual.

Dynamic load cases

Dynamic load cases
Dynamic load cases cover the following:
 response to a harmonic vibration,
 response to a seismic load.
A dynamic calculation is carried out for defined dynamic load cases simultaneously with a static calculation.
Dynamic load cases can be arbitrarily combined with static load cases. As a result, SCIA.ESA PT provides for
a direct combination and evaluation of results for static and dynamic analysis. For example, both static and
dynamic wind can be included into one selective group and the program automatically determines which one is
more unfavourable.
Dynamic load cases can be input only after mass groups and their combinations have been defined. A
dynamic load case can be input as a standard variable load case; only its type must be set to dynamic.
Impulses, usually but not exclusively point impulses in nodes, can then be defined in these load cases.
A load factor can be defined for a dynamic load case. The meaning of the factor is the same as for static load
case. Other parameters of a dynamic load case depend on its type.
The meaning of the nodal impulse differs according to the type of dynamic load case. No impulses appear in
eigenvalue problem (free vibration analysis) or in seismic calculation. For harmonic vibration, impulses of
exciting forces must be specified.
In case of dynamic wind, impulses from static wind are defined. The impulse size is 1 kN/m2 regardless of the
height (i.e. the product of node-corresponding area and shape coefficient). For orthogonal vibration, one must
specify the node-corresponding length of cylindrical parts of the structure where vibration can occur.

Defining a new dynamic load case

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must
have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list
of the Project setup dialogue.
A new dynamic load case can be defined in the Load case manager. A dynamic load case is defined like a
static load case, but its properties are adjusted otherwise.
The procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case
1. Open the Load case manager.
2. Press button [New] to create a new load case.
3. Set Action type to Variable.
4. Set Load type to Dynamic.
5. Select required Specification (harmonic / Karman / seismic).
6. Press button [Parameters] to specify required parameters for selected type of dynamic load case.
7. Close the Load case manager.
Each defined dynamic load case, similarly to a static variable load case, must be sorted into a group of
variable loads. Identical rules for sorting into groups and for the generation of combinations are applied for
both static and dynamic variable load cases.

Defining the harmonic load case

A general procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case is given in chapter Defining a new dynamic load
case. Harmonic load case requires input of the following parameters:
Logarithmic decrement The rate at which the amplitude decays gives us measurement
of the damping in a system. It is known as the logarithmic
decrement. This is defined as the natural logarithm of the ratio
of any two successive amplitudes.

397
Reference Guide

Frequency The frequency of the excitation impulse in Hz.

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must
have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list
of the Project setup dialogue.

Defining the seismic load case

A general procedure for the definition of a dynamic load case is given in chapter Defining a new dynamic load
case.
Seismic load case parameters
seismic spectrum X If the option is ON, the user can select required spectrum for X-
direction. The selection contains all the defined spectra stored
in the spectrum database (see Defining the seismic spectrum).
Button next to the combo box opens the Spectrum manager
and the user may modify the existing spectrum or add a new
one.
For more about the definition of a spectrum see chapter
Defining the seismic spectrum.
seismic spectrum Y ditto for Y-direction
seismic spectrum Z ditto for Z-direction
direction X Substitute seismic forces are calculated from masses defined
on the structure and from the acceleration. The values in this
and two adjacent fields (for the two other axis-directions)
specify the final direction in which the earthquake acts. Value 1
means full effect along the axis. 0 (zero) stands for no effect
along the axis.
direction Y ditto for Y-direction
direction Z ditto for Z-direction
acceleration coefficient All the acceleration values in the spectrum table are multiplied
by the given value of acceleration coefficient.
overturning level This field specifies the height of a point around which the
structure may overturn. The height is measured from origin of
the global co-ordinate system. The final turning moment is
related to this point.
evaluation type There are two basic approaches available for the evaluation of
result of seismic calculation. See below.

Evaluation type
sum The result value may be obtained as a square root of the sum
of squares of values from individual load cases. For more
information see chapter Seismic load.
extreme The result may take account of extreme values.
For more information see chapter Seismic load.
CQC Alternatively, an evaluation to CQC (Complete Quadratic
Combination) standard may be applied. This method takes the
damping – frequency diagram into account.
Button [...] opens the Damping database manager (which is a
standards SCIA.ESA. PT database manager).

Note: Prior to the definition of the first load case, at least one mass group combination must
have been already defined. In addition, Dynamics must have been selected in the Functionality list
of the Project setup dialogue.

398
 Loads

Defining the seismic spectrum

A new seismic spectrum can be defined in the Seismic spectra manager. It can also be used for editing of an
earlier input spectrum. The manager is analogous to other SCIA.ESA PT database managers.
Pressing button [New] in the manager opens the dialogue for input of a new seismic spectrum. The dialogue
consists of the following controls. The set of the control covered by the first table below can be used to define
an arbitrary user-define spectrum.
The controls described in the second table below provide for the input of seismic spectrums for national codes.
General seismic spectrum
graphical window shows the frequency-acceleration diagram of the defined
spectrum
table contains the values of frequencies and corresponding
accelerations
name is used for identification of the spectrum
control buttons enable the user to confirm or abort the input values

National seismic spectrum

In addition to the controls described in the previous table, the definition of the seismic spectrums for a
particular national code offers the following items (when the seismic spectrum is defined according to a
particular national code, the table with the input values is disabled).
Type of drawing Frequency – the horizontal axis shows the frequency
Period - the horizontal axis shows time
Type of input Input – for this option, the input table is accessible and the
user can input all the values manually
"Particular national standard" – for this option, the values are
taken automatically from the selected national seismic code.
The spectra are available for the following countries:
 India
 Czech Republic
 Slovakia
 Austria
 France
 Germany
 Eurocode
 Italy
 Suisse
Max frequency This item limits the spectrum.
Step This item defines the "density" with which the spectrum is
defined.
Code This button opens a separate dialogue that enables the user to
specify other parameters contained in the currently selected
national code.

The operation of the dialogue is quite straightforward and similar to other curve defining dialogues in
SCIA.ESA PT (e.g. see chapter Advanced input data > Initial deformations > Initial deformation curve).

Load groups
Introduction to load groups
Load groups define "how the individual load cases may be combined together" if inserted into a load case
combination.

399
Reference Guide

Load groups are important especially for the automatic generation of load case combinations. Thanks to the
load groups, the user can easily specify which load cases MUST, MUST NOT, or CAN act together.

Load group manager

The Load group manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manager. It provides for basic operations with load
groups:
 creation of a new load group,
 editing of existing load groups,
 deletion of existing load groups,
 printing the information about existing load groups,
 saving and reading of existing load groups into and from an external file.
The Load group manager can be opened in one of the following ways:
 using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Load groups,
 using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Load groups.

Defining a new load group

To define a new load group and set its parameters follow the procedures given below.
The procedure for the definition of a new load group
1. Open the Load group manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. A new load group is created.
4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
5. Input the required values for individual load group parameters.
6. Confirm with button [OK].
7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. Close the Load group manager.
The parameters of a load group
The basic parameters of load group are:
Relation The relation tells what the relation of load cases in the
particular load group is.
Load This parameters tell whether the load group is used for
permanent or variable loads.

Relation
The relation may be:
Together All load cases of the same load group of this type are always
inserted into every new load case combination if at least one of
the load cases should be put in.

400
 Loads

Exclusive Two load cases from the same load group of this type will
never appear in the same combination.
Standard This option provides for user’s sorting purposes. It allows the
user to sort load cases but it does not affect the process of
generation of load case combinations.

Load
Each load group may be used either for permanent loads or for variable loads. Permanent and variable loads
cannot appear in the same combination.

Note: There may be some other parameters available in the editing dialogue. These parameters
depend on the active code adjusted for the project and the explanation of their meaning goes
beyond the scope of this general manual.

Using the load group

The required load group can be assigned to a particular load case in the Load case manager.
The group is considered when combinations are generated from defined load cases. The rules described in
chapter Defining a new load group are taken into account and ensure that inadequate load cases are not put
into one combination and simultaneously that interlinked load cases are always acting together.

Load case combinations

Introduction to load case combinations
Load cases defined in the project can be combined in load case combinations. The combinations can be then
used for evaluation of results and for checking to national codes.
Combinations may be of various types. Each type is used for different checks. However, all the types can be
used for an initial evaluation of results (i.e. reviewing of calculated internal forces).
SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to use three different types of combination: linear, used, code-related. The linear
combination as the simplest one is not important for the following reasoning.
But when either user or code-related combination is used, there are two critical points:
the user uses the The user just trusts the program and cannot see nor
combination as a "black box" evaluate what goes on "behind the scenes".
the user explodes the The user can see and evaluate all the linear
combination into all possible combinations created from the selected set of load
combinations cases included into the combination. But the number of
these combinations may be enormous and usually
leaving the user confused and the final checking
uncertain, notwithstanding the deteriorated speed of the
program response.

The new solution is based on dynamically created list of "dangerous" combinations.

For example, in the example given later just 7 "dangerous" envelopes are created. This is a very sensible
number in comparison with the total number of 164 possible linear combinations that may be created for the
same example.
There are two approaches for the treatment of the "dangerous" combinations.
background use The combinations are created on the background and
the user is not disturbed at all.
foreground use The user may decide to explode the defined
combination and see the "dangerous" combinations.

Note 1: Regardless of the approach selected, the numerical results will be the same, as for both
approaches the calculations are performed for the same combinations.
Note 2: In addition, if there a special need arises, the user still has the choice to explode the
defined combination into all the possible linear combinations that may be then evaluated one by
one.

401
Reference Guide

Advanced load case combinations

We use the term "advanced" combination for a combination that is designed for other than static linear
combination. They treated separately in appropriate chapter of the book.

Note: A nonlinear combination MUST be defined if the user wants to perform nonlinear
calculation. A stability combination MUST be defined if the user wants to run a buckling analysis. If
such a combination (nonlinear or stability one) has not been input, the corresponding calculation is
NOT even available in the Calculation dialogue.

Types of load case combinations

SCIA.ESA PT offers the following types of combinations:
Envelope - ultimate This combination defines a base for automatic generation of
ultimate combinations.
Envelope - This combination defines a base for automatic generation of
serviceability serviceability combinations.
Linear - ultimate This combination defines one particular user-specifies ultimate
combination.
Linear - serviceability This combination defines one particular user-specifies
serviceability combination.
Code dependent According to the active code set for the project the program
combinations may offer a set of other combinations based on the particular
technical standard.

Envelope
An envelope contains all the load cases specified by the user and combined in all possible ways according to
defined Action type, Load type and Load group of individual load cases inserted into the combination.
Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated from the envelope.

IMPORTANT NOTE: This type of combination was called User combination in previous
releases of SCIA.ESA PT

What happens if this combination is exploded?

If a envelope is exploded to all possible, a set of linear combinations is generated.
Envelope ultimate
The user can enters the multiplication coefficients for individual load cases. The program generates several
combinations for the inserted load cases if there are any variable load cases. All possible combinations of
specified load cases are generated.
A small example will show the difference between Linear-ultimate (see below) and User-ultimate
combination:
A project contains two load cases: LC1 - type permanent and LC2 - type variable.
The linear-ultimate combination with the contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the following
combination:
C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2
The user-ultimate combination with contents LC1/ coefficient1 and LC2/ coefficient2 will give the following
combinations :
C1 : coefficient1 * LC1 + coefficient2 * LC2
C2 : coefficient1 * LC1
(LC2 is a variable load: both situations (with this load and without this load) are considered by the program).
Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).

Note: See also chapter Exploding the load case combination.

Envelope serviceability
This type of combination is similar to User-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a serviceability
check (deformation check).

402
 Loads

Linear combination
A linear combination is a combination of load cases in which the user explicitly specifies which particular load
cases should be included in a specific combination. The result is exactly what the user does, nothing less and
nothing more.
Linear ultimate
The linear-ultimate combinations are the combinations known from other programs: the specified load cases
are multiplied by the given coefficients and the total sum is then made. Nor additional combinations are
generated.
Ultimate combinations are used for a strength check (steel code check, reinforcement calculation).
Linear serviceability
This type of combination is similar to Linear-ultimate. Serviceability combinations are used for a serviceability
check (deformation check).
Code-related combination
A code-related combination is an extension of the envelope. Once again, all the load cases specified by the
user are combined in all possible ways according to specified Action type, Load type, Load group of
individual load cases and with respect to regulations of the particular technical standard (code).
Usually, more than one linear combination can be generated for the code-related combination.

What happens if this combination is exploded?

If a code-related combination is exploded, a set of envelopes is generated.
If a code-related combination is exploded into all possible combinations, a set of linear combinations is
generated.

Load case combination manager

The Load case combination manager provides for all the operations with combinations of load cases. This
means that the defined combinations (of appropriate type) may also be exploded here.

There are two control buttons and a filter that both enable the user to manipulate with exploded combinations.
Control buttons
[Explode to envelope] This button is available if a code-related combination is
selected in the list of defined combinations.
As a result, a set of envelopes is generated and added
to the Load case combinations manager.
[Explode to linear] This button is available if either a code-related or

403
Reference Guide

envelope is selected in the list of defined combinations.

In any case, a set of linear combinations is generated
and added to the Load case combinations manager.

Filter
The filter enables the user to view only those combinations in the Load case combinations manager that
s/he is interested in at the particular moment.
Input Only the input combinations are listed.
combinations
Note: An exploded combination is also considered as an input combination.
E.g. one Eurocode combination defined, filter set to Input.

Contents of Only the background combinations are shown.

combination
E.g. one Eurocode combination defined, filter set to Background.

404
 Loads

Defining a new combination

A new load case combination can be defined in the Combinations manager.
The procedure for the definition of a new combination
1. Open the Combinations manager .
2. Click button [New].
3. The editing dialogue for the combination is opened.
4. Type the name and description of the combination.
5. Select the type of the combination.
6. In the list of load cases on the right hand side select the required load case that should be inserted
into the combination. (It is possible to make a multiple selection if several load cases have the same
coefficient).
7. Type the coefficient for this load case.
8. Press button [Add] to insert the load case into the combination with the given coefficient.
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 for all load cases that should be inserted into the combination.
10. Confirm the definition with button [OK].
11. Repeat steps 2 to 10 for other combinations, if required.
12. Close the Combinations manager.

Exploding the load case combination

Combinations exploded automatically on background
On background, so-called background combinations are automatically created if a code-related combination or
an envelope is input.
If a code-related combination is input, the background combinations are of user-combination type. If an
envelope is input, the background combinations are of linear-combination type.
The background combinations are used for all the calculations, and the user can concentrate on the "principle"
or "mother" combination only. Thus, s/he is saved from the need to deal manually and personally with all the
possible load case combinations.
What’s more, when an output document is being printed (previewed) and a table of e.g. extremes is included in
it, the program "knows" for which background combination the extreme value has been achieved and informs
about it. The composition of the "extreme" linear combination is attached to the result table.
If required, the background combinations can be reviewed in the Load case combination manager.
The name of background combinations is derived from the name of the "principle" or "mother" combination. If
e.g. the "mother" combination is named "UEC" then the background combinations are named "UEC.1",
"UEC.2", "UEC.3", etc. (see the dot in the name and compare with the name of exploded combination below)
Combinations exploded manually by the user
Despite the fact that an input combination is automatically "exploded" on background, the user may explode
any code-related or envelope manually.
If a code-related combination is exploded, a set of envelopes is generated. If a code-related combination is
exploded into all possible combinations, a set of linear combinations is generated. If an envelope is exploded
to all possible, a set of linear combinations is generated.
The user thus gets a full control over the load case combinations.
The exploded combinations are listed in the Load case combination manager.
In order to explode a combination, one of two control buttons must be used:
[Explode to envelope] This button is available if a code-related combination is
selected in the list of defined combinations.
As a result, a set of envelopes is generated and added
to the Load case combinations manager.
[Explode to linear] This button is available if either a code-related or
envelope is selected in the list of defined combinations.
In any case, a set of linear combinations is generated
and added to the Load case combinations manager.

405
Reference Guide

The name of exploded combinations is derived from the name of the "principle" or "mother" combination. If e.g.
the "mother" combination is named "UEC" then the background combinations are named "UEC1", "UEC2",
"UEC3", etc. (notice that the number immediately follows the "mother" combination name and compare with
the name of background combination above)

Note 1: Any envelope can be exploded to all possible combinations. This means that even a
user-combination that was created from a code-related combination as a result of Explode
operation can be further exploded.
Note 2: If a code-related combination is exploded to all possible combinations, the number of
created linear combinations may be very large. Consequently, it may be rather difficult to evaluate
all the combinations properly. Therefore, this action is recommended for experienced user only.

Combination key
Whenever a table of extremes (either local, beam or global) is given in the Document, it shows not only the
value and place, but also the load case or combinations in which each particular extreme was achieved.
If the user is only using code-related combinations, the information that the extreme was achieved in this
"huge" combination may be insufficient. As stated already several times, a code-related combination may
combine several tens or even hundred linear combinations.
Therefore, SCIA.ESA PT enables the user the option to attach a legend to result tables. This legend is called
Combination key and it contains a list and composition of linear combinations (formed from the code-related
combination) for which any of extreme values has been achieved.
Only the linear combinations that appear in the result table are stated in the Combination key.

Example
Example for Envelopes
Let’s assume a continuous beam of two spans. The beam is subject to load sorted into five load cases.
LC1 – permanent – self weight, distributed load in both spans
LC2 – variable – distributed load in the left span, load group G1
LC3 – variable – distributed load in the right span, load group G1
LC4 – variable – crane, concentrated force in the middle of the left span, load group G2

406
 Loads

LC5 – variable – crane, concentrated force in the middle of the right span, load group G2

The variable load cases are divided into two groups:

G1 – imposed floor load, standard group
G2 – crane, exclusive group, only one of the load cases may be acting at the same time

The user defines the following envelopes:

LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 +1.3*LC4 + 1.3*LC5

The program will then generate (explode) the following linear combinations:
LC1
LC1 + 1.2*LC2
LC1 + 1.2*LC3
LC1 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC4
LC1 + 1.2*LC2 + 1.2*LC3 + 1.3*LC5

Example for Code-related combination

Let’s assume a continuous beam subject to several loads.

LC1 self weight

V1

407
Reference Guide

V2

V3

V4

S1

S2

Let’s define a code-related combination to Eurocode. The combination definition contains all the defined load
cases.
Name Type Load cases Coefficiens
UEC EC – ultimate LC1 1.00
V1 1.00
V2 1.00
V3 1.00
V4 1.00
S2 1.00
S2 1.00

SCIA.ESA PT creates a set of "dangerous" combinations for the given definition:

UEC.1 User – ultimate LC1 1,35
UEC.2 User – ultimate LC1 1,35
V1 1,50

408
 Loads

V2 1,50
V3 1,50
V4 1,50
UEC.3 User – ultimate LC1 1,00
V1 1,50
V2 1,50
V3 1,50
V4 1,50
UEC.4 User – ultimate LC1 1,35
S1 1,50
S2 1,50
UEC.5 User – ultimate LC1 1,00
S1 1,50
S2 1,50
UEC.6 User – ultimate LC1 1.35
V1 1.35
V2 1.35
V3 1.35
V4 1.35
S2 1.35
S2 1.35
UEC.7 User – ultimate LC1 1.00
V1 1.35
V2 1.35
V3 1.35
V4 1.35
S2 1.35
S2 1.35

When displayed in the Document, the Combinations table looks like:

409
Reference Guide

Load case combinations according to EC

SCIA ESA PT makes no distinction between primary and secondary variable load case. The algorithm takes
one load case (in turn) as the primary one and all the others are considered secondary. The coefficients Psi0
are assigned accordingly. Doing this in turns, all the possible combinations are exploited. No combination
should contain two variable load cases with the full coefficient 1.5 (one of them is always reduced by the
corresponding Psi0).
It may happen, under some special circumstances, that this approach is not the most economical one (if the
primary load is small (insignificant) and the secondary one is large - there is the difference if the coefficient
Psi0=0.5 is applied to the large load or the small one). However, this is based on the assumption that the large
load is usually taken as the primary one.

Let us consider the following load cases, groups and combinations.

Load cases:
Name Description Action type Load Load Specification Direction Duration Master
group type load
case
LC1 self weight Permanent LG1 Self -Z
weight
LC2 live load (20 Variable LG2 Static Standard Long None
kNm)

410
 Loads

LC3 snow load Variable LG3 Static Standard Long None

(10 kNm)

Load groups:
Name Load Relation Coeff 2
LG1 Permanent
LG2 Variable Standard Cat E: Storage
LG3 Variable Standard Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.

Combinations:
Name Description Type Load cases Coeff [1]
CO1 (1) EN - ULS Fundamental LC1 - self weight 1.00
(STR)
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm) 1.00

CO2 (7) EN - ULS Accidential - Psi 1 LC1 - self weight 1.00

LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm) 1.00

CO3 (1) EN - ULS Accidential - Psi 2 LC1 - self weight 1.00

LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.00

LC3 - snow load (10 kNm) 1.00

Let us use the following combinations setup:

411
Reference Guide

We get the following envelope combinations:

C1.1 (118) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.35
C1.2 (119) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.35
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.50
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.75
C1.3 (120) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.50
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.75
C1.4 (121) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.35
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.50
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 1.50
C1.5 (122) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 1.50
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 1.50
C2.1 (123) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
C2.2 (124) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 0.90
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.00
C2.3 (125) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 0.80
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.20
C3.1 (126) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
C3.2 (127) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 0.80
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.00
C3.3 (128) Envelope – ultimate LC1 – self weight 1.00
LC2 - live load (20 kNm) 0.80
LC3 – snow load (10 kNm) 0.00

Let us review the already stated:

LC1 – permanent => LG 1
LC2-variable (live load (20kNm)) => LG2 (Cat E : Storage) => from setup: Psi 0 =1.0, Psi1=0.9, Psi2=0.8
LC3–variable (snow load (10kNm) ) => LG3 (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") => from setup: Psi 0 =0.5,
Psi1=0.2, Psi2=0.0

Combination C01 (EN - ULS Fundamental(STR)) : LC1+LC2+LC3

We use Eq.6.10

It is not specified at the load case if it is the primary or secondary load case. Therefore, always one load case
(group) in turn is taken as the primary one and the rest is considered secondary. This is repeated until all the
load cases are used for the primary one.

We get the following combinations:

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases
C1.1 1.35 * LC1
Secondly, one variable load case is taken as primary one (1.5) and the rest as secondary (1.5 * Psi0) + the
permanent load is either favourable (1.0) or unfavourable (1.35)
The combinations obtained are:
Permanent load case LC1 is unfavourable (1.35) and LC2 is the primary load.

412
 Loads

C1.2 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 1.5*Psi0*LC3 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + (1.5*0.5)*LC3 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 +

0.75*LC3
(Psi0 = 0.5; LG3 is (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") )

Permanent load case LC1is favourable (1.00) and LC2 is the primary load.
C1.3 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + 1.5*Psi0*LC3 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 + (1.5*0.5)*LC3 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC2 +
0.75*LC3
(Psi0 = 0.5; LG3 is (Snow load H < 1000 m a.s.l.") )

Permanent load case LC1 is unfavourable (1.35) and LC3 is the primary load.
C1.4 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*Psi0*LC2 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + (1.5*1.0)*LC2 = 1.35*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 +
1.5*LC2
(Psi0 = 1.0; LG2 is Category E )

Permanent load case LC1 is favourable (1.00) and LC3 is the primary load.
C1.5 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*Psi0 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + (1.5*1.0)*LC2 = 1.0*LC1 + 1.5*LC3 + 1.5*LC2
(Psi0 = 1.0; LG2 is Category E )

Then we have combinations C2 and C3 that are created using these rules:

The choice between 1,l or 2,l is done by the user. Default is 1,l.

C02 - EN - ULS Accidental - Psi 1 : LC1+LC2+LC3

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases
C2.1 1.0 * LC1

Second, the combination rule applies Psi1 to one load case and Psi2 to the other one.
C2.2 1.0 * LC1 + Psi1*LC2 + Psi2*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.9*LC2 + 0.0*LC3
C2.3 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2(LG2) *LC2 + Psi1(LG3)*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.2*LC3

C03 - EN - ULS Accidental - Psi 2 : LC1+LC2+LC3

First of all, we get the combination with just the permanent load cases
C3.1 1.0 * LC1

Second, the combination rule applies Psi1 to one load case and Psi2 to the other one.
C3.2 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2*LC2 + Psi2*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.0*LC3
C3.3 1.0 * LC1 + Psi2(LG2) *LC2 + Psi2(LG3)*LC3 = 1.0 * LC1 + 0.8*LC2 + 0.0*LC3

In addition, the combinations setup dialogue makes it possible to say that instead of Eq.6.10, formulas
Eq.6.10a & Eq.6.10b should be used and the rule for the combination is:

The choice between Eq.6.10 and (Eq.6.10a & Eq.6.10.b) is done in the National Annex.
The default is Eq.6.10.

Load case combinations to ÈSN

The Czech standard introduces one conception that is different from other national codes implemented in
SCIA.ESA PT.

413
Reference Guide

The Czech standard defines a coefficient for a load case. This coefficient (load factor) is applied when the load
case is included into a combination. The coefficient is defined as one of load case parameters.
The coefficient can be defined in the Load case manager (see below).

SCIA.ESA PT distinguishes between three types of load case combinations. It is important to know what
happens to the load factor in each of the types. The following text is valid ONLY if Czech standard is adjusted
as a current code of SCIA.ESA PT. If another code is adjusted, the possible application of load factor is not
accessible.
Linear combination
If a linear combination is being defined, a coefficient may be input manually for each of the load cases included
into the combination. So far, this is true for any national code implemented in SCIA.ESA PT.
For Czech standard however, the combination input dialogue offer an option to apply the load factor defined
previously for a load case.
This gives an advantage especially if one load case is included into several combinations. There is no need to
input a coefficient for each new combination. It is sufficient enough to input the load factor once for the load
case and then simply apply it for each combination.
In order to apply the load factors to all load cases included into a combination, the user must only press button
[Apply] in item Coefficient for CSN. The appropriate load factors are assigned to corresponding load cases.

414
 Loads

Envelope combination
Here, the same can be said as for linear combination.
Code-related combination
If a code-related combination is defined, the option for application of load factors becomes inaccessible. The
reason is that the algorithm for automatic generation of envelope and linear combinations from the input set of
load cases uses load factors defined by the appropriate standard. They can be reviewed in Project setup
dialogue on Combinations tab.

Note: The same applies to the current Slovak standard.

415
Reference Guide

Load case combinations to NEN

NEN-ultimate
The simplified ultimate limit state combinations are implemented according to: NEN 6702 art. 6.3.4.1.
The coefficients can be edited in Project data , Combinations tab page service menu.

The following load types and coefficients are used.

Grep,i Permanent actions, e.g. self weight
Qrep,i Variable actions, e.g. imposed loads on floors, snow loads,
wind loads
Gamma f;g Partial safety factors for permanent actions:
1.35 for unfavourable actions in permanent combinations
(permanent actions only) (Gamma f;g - fund. combi 2)
1.2 for unfavourable actions in other combinations (Gamma f;g
– fund. combi 1)
0.9 for favourable actions (Gamma G – favourable)
See the notice at the end of this topic for the use of the 1.35,
1.2 and 0.9 coefficients.
Gamma f;q Partial safety factor for variable actions : 1.2, 1.3 or 1.5
(Gamma fq)
Momentaanfactor This factor is entered for each group of variable load cases
(Psi i) (NEN – mom. factor)
Default value : 0.5.
Service life Factor to take the service life into account (Service life).
(Psi t) Formula gives factor 1 for a service life of 50 years.
According to NEN6720, art. 5.5.2.
Model factor If a ponding water iteration is done the structure stiffness is
divided by this model factor.
Default value 1.0.
Use complex If switch ON, than each permanent load case is separately
combinations formula taken with the factor 1.2 and 0.9. Or with the factor 1.35 and
for permanent loads 0.9 in combinations without variable loads. In the standard
configuration of the program, the Gamma f;g coefficients for
permanent load cases are taken 1.2 for all load cases (or 1.35
in combinations without variable loads) or 0.9 for all load cases.

416
 Loads

The following combinations are generated :

The load coefficient set in Project settings, combinations tab page are default settings. The value for
momentaan factor can be changed for each load group in the service menu Load cases Combinations > Load
groups.
If it is chosen to generate code combinations like NEN-Ultimate, than the coefficient entered in the
Combination dialogue is multiplied with the coefficient which is generated by the program.
NEN-serviceability
The following combinations are generated :

If it is chosen to generate code combinations like NEN-Ultimate, than the coefficient entered in the
Combination dialogue is multiplied with the coefficient which is generated by the program.
NEN-special Ultimate
The design effects of actions for the fire situation are taken from the results of the analysis. It is recommended
to use the special combination rules according to NEN6702 6.3.4.2., for calculating the internal forces used in
the fire resistance check.
This special combination is given by

in which Arep represents the characteristic value of the special load (from e.g. fire exposure).

Advanced combinations of load cases

Non-linear combinations
Non-linear combinations are similar to standard combinations and are used for non-linear calculations.

Note: A nonlinear combination MUST be defined if a nonlinear calculation is supposed to be

carried out. Without a nonlinear combination defined, the program is NOT CAPABLE of running the
nonlinear calculation of any kind.

The non-linear combination may be defined with a specific kind of initial imperfection in shape of the modelled
structure. There are several ways to define the initial imperfection. In general, the imperfections are divided
into two groups:
 bow imperfection,
 global imperfection.
Bow imperfection
None
No initial imperfection is imposed.
Simple curvature
f Curvature of one beam member
1/f Radius of curvature
According to buckling data
The imperfection is derived from the buckling data. For standard sections the buckling curves are determined
according to the appropriate national standard (e.g. for EC3 Table 5.5.3 is used ). For other sections, the
buckling curves are taken from the user input made in cross-section definition.

Global imperfection

417
Reference Guide

None
No initial imperfection is imposed.
Simple inclination
dx The inclination per one meter of height in the direction of global
X-axis
dy The inclination per one meter of height in the direction of global
Y-axis

Inclination functions
dx inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global X-axis.
Z The inclination dependent on the Z-direction, i.e. on the height
of the structure.
dx inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global X-axis.
Y The inclination dependent on the Y-direction, i.e. on the length
of the structure.
dy inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global Y-axis.
Z The inclination dependent on the Z-direction, i.e. on the height
of the structure.
dy inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global Y-axis.
X The inclination dependent on the X-direction, i.e. on the length
of the structure.
dz inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global Z-axis.
X The inclination dependent on the X-direction, i.e. on the height
of the structure.
dz inclination function: The inclination in the direction of the global Z-axis.
Y The inclination dependent on the Y-direction, i.e. on the length
of the structure.

Note 1: The inclinations in both X- and Y-direction are evaluated as a sum of inclination
components dependent on vertical and horizontal direction. I.e. the final inclination in X-axis is
equal to the sum of (dx inclination function: Z) and (dx inclination function: Y), and the final
inclination in Y-axis is equal to the sum of (dy inclination function: Z) and (dy inclination function: X).
Deformation from load case
Load case The results obtained for the specified load case are imposed as
the initial imperfection for further calculations. It means that the
results for the specified load case must be calculated first. Only
then the further calculations may be performed.

Note: The results for the given load case must be already calculated. Otherwise the program
issues a warning.

Stability combination
Stability combinations are similar to standard combinations and are used for stability calculations.

Note: A stability calculation MUST be defined if a stability calculation is supposed to be carried

out. Without a stability combination defined, the program is NOT CAPABLE of running the stability
calculation of any kind.

418
 Loads

Result classes
Introduction to result classes
Result classes represent a very powerful and useful tool for the evaluation of results. They allow the user to
define a set (a class) of results for selected load cases and load case combinations. The program then treats
the class like an envelope of results.

Result class manager

The Result class manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manager. It provides for basic operations with result
classes.
The Result class manager can be opened in one of the following ways:
 using menu function Tree > Load cases, combinations > Result class,
 using tree menu function Load cases, combinations > Result class.

Defining a new result class

A new result class can be defined in the Result class manager.
The procedure for the definition of a new combination
1. Open the Result class manager .
2. Click button [New].
3. The editing dialogue for a new result class is opened.
4. Type the name and description of the result class.
5. In the list of available load cases and combinations on the right hand side select the required items
that should be inserted into the result class (Multiple selections are supported).
6. Press button [Add] to insert the load case or combination into the result class.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 for all load cases and combinations that should be inserted into the result class.
8. Confirm the definition with button [OK].
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for other classes, if required.
10. Close the Result class manager.

419
Reference Guide

The picture above shows the editing dialogue for a new result class.

Using the result class

Result classes may be used to view the effect of certain "combinations" of load cases and load case
combinations. They are offered in all dialogues for results review together with load classes and load class
combinations.

Load generators
Introduction to load generators
Load generators represent a tool that may be used for simplified definition of load. They provide for the
transformation of load from specified load area into a given planar section of the structure. It is also possible to
use generators to determine wind or snow load per given vertical section of the structure. The generation of
wind and snow load can be performed directly to a specific national technical standard or according to a user-
defined snow weight of wind distribution along the height of the building. Arbitrary polygonal areas can be used
to define the load area for recalculation of the load into a planar section.

Wind generator
Wind generator
Wind generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of wind. It is possible to apply values and
formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined curve of wind pressure along the height of a
building.
The load calculated from the given wind definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The section
is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various generated loads.

Note 1: The wind load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of
the structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane
MUST be defined as vertical. Otherwise, the wind load generator cannot be applied.

420
 Loads

Note 2: The wind load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure
consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is
generated on one of the parts only.
Note 3: Only the part of the structure that is ABOVE the terrain level is considered in the load
generation. The terrain level parameter may be thus used to exclude some part of the structure
from being subject to the generated wind load. The terrain level is always defined in global co-
ordinate system.

Types of wind load

As stated earlier, there are two ways to define wind load in SCIA.ESA PT.
The actual load may be calculated to a specific technical standard or it may be derived from a user-defined
curve of wind pressure. The type of wind load can be adjusted in the Project Setup dialogue on tab Loads.

Code wind
If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular national
standard. The sample pictures below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related parameters for EC
and NEN standards.

421
Reference Guide

User-defined wind curve

If option Library is adjusted, the user must define a height-pressure curve. The definition of the curve is made
in a standard SCIA.ESA PT dialogue for graph definition.

It is possible to define multiple wind curves. They are stored and can be easily revised, edited, deleted and
selected in a standard SCIA.ESA PT database manager.

422
 Loads

Note: The type of wind load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function
Load > Wind generator is applied.

Using the wind generator

Step 0: Enabling the wind generation and selecting the type of wind load
In order to tell SCIA.ESA PT that the load generator will be used, the user must say so on the Functionality
tab of Project setup dialogue. Item Climatic load must be selected in the functionality list.
To select the wind type see chapter Types of wind load.
Step 1: Starting the function
The wind generator can be accessed via function Load > Wind generator.
Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames
The wind load is generated for a single planar section of the structure. In order to calculate properly the load
values, the program must know the "load width", i.e. the distance between adjacent frames. Therefore, on
starting the function, the user is asked to define this dimension.
Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters
Once step 2 is done, a wind generator dialogue is opened on the screen. The user may control the generation
of the load via a set of parameters of the generator. Their meaning and application is explained in chapter
Adjusting the wind generator parameters.
Step 4: Generation of the load
On completion of the input of generator parameters and its confirmation, the adequate load is calculated and
applied on the structure.

Adjusting the wind generator parameters

The main dialogue of the wind generator enables the user to control the process of load generation. The
meaning of individual parameters and control buttons is given in a brief table below.

423
Reference Guide

The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be
considered for the load generation. Beam members that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in
thick line. The active beam member is in red while the others are in green. The remaining beam members of
the structure, i.e. those that will not be subject to the generated wind load, are drawn in thin line.
If the wind load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded beam members are
divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.
In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or beam members into two parts. This
division may be applied recursively, so any of the beam members can be divided into as many intervals as
necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and
ultimately a single beam member.
Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, beam members indicate the direction of the generated load.
Hatches attached to a beam member from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces
pressure. Hatches drawn on the inside of a beam member indicate that the load produces suction.
Parameters
Direction This parameter tells the generator the direction from
which the wind is blowing. It can be blowing from the left
or right side of the building section. The selected
direction is also indicated by a hatched rectangle drawn
at the left or right side of the structure.
Inside coefficients These coefficients define the effect of the wind inside
the building.
None = there is none overpressure or underpressure
inside the building
Overpressure = there is overpressure inside the
building
Underpressure = there is underpressure inside the
building
See Note at the end of the chapter.

424
 Loads

Preference This parameter defines the preference, or priority, for

places where the code allows for selection from multiple
values:
Pressure = greater values of shape coefficients will be
preferred
Suction = lower values of shape coefficients will be
preferred
Frame distance The distance between two adjacent frames defined
before opening the dialogue may be reviewed and/or
edited here.
Terrain level Only the part of the structure that is ABOVE the terrain
level is considered in the load generation. The terrain
level parameter may be thus used to exclude some part
of the structure from being subject to the generated wind
load. The terrain level is always defined in global co-
ordinate system.
Coefficients This group defines shape coefficients. A set of control
buttons (see below) accompanies the input boxes.
Outside = adjusts the value of shape coefficient outside
the building
Inside = adjusts the value of shape coefficient inside the
building

Control buttons
Set coefficients The value of shape coefficients typed in the Outside
and Inside input boxes, is assigned to the active interval
or beam member of the structure contour (i.e. to the
beam member drawn in red thick line).
Next The focus is shifted to the next interval or beam
member. The next interval or beam member becomes
active.
Previous The focus is shifted to the previous interval or beam
member. The previous interval or beam member
becomes active.
Divide The active interval or beam member is divided in the
given point. The point of division is defined in a dialogue
that opens after the action is started.
Connect This function is applicable only if some beam members
have been already divided. The function does nothing, if
undivided beam members form the contour of the
structure.
Two intervals are joined together. The rule is that the
active interval is preserved including the coefficients and
the next interval is linked to it.
Regenerate This button resets the program default values. It sets all
the coefficients to their default values and deletes all
possible intervals created by the user.
Print picture The current picture can be printed on an installed
printer.
Change (terrain level) The level of terrain can be adjusted in these input boxes.
It may be useful e.g. if the structure has not been
defined in zero-level (measured in the global co-ordinate
system) or if a part of the structure is protected by
surrounding buildings.
The wind load is always generated only on beam
members that are ABOVE the defined terrain level. The
terrain may be inclined which can be defined by different

425
Reference Guide

values for terrain level on the left and right side of the
structure.

Note: Czech standard (CSN) does not take the Inside coefficient into account, even though it
may be defined.

Example of wind generator application

The application of wind generator will be demonstrated on a simple example. Let’s assume a regular frame as
shown in the figure.

The frame will be subject to wind load whose intensity will be specified by means of a user-defined height-
pressure curve. For simplicity and for good demonstration, the curve is defined so that:
 2
the pressure is constant and equal to 1 kN/m over the first storey,
 2
the pressure changes linearly to 2 kN/m over the second storey,
 2
the pressure is constant and equal to 2 kN/m over the third storey,

426
 Loads

Once the wind curve is input, the wind load generator may be started. Let’s set the frame distance to 3 metres.
Let’s accept the default parameters for the direction, inside coefficients and preference.

Then, let’s adjust shape coefficient on the first beam member. Let’s set the outside coefficient to 1.0 and the
inside coefficient to 0 (zero).

427
Reference Guide

The coefficients on the second beam member will be as shown in the figure.

And the coefficients on the last beam member will be:

428
 Loads

On closing the dialogue of the wind load generator, the defined load is displayed on the screen.

In order to review and, if necessary, modify any of the defined wind parameters, it is possible to apply the
SCIA.ESA’s editing procedure. Let’s assume that the load along the second floor of the right hand side column
should be reviewed.
So, let’s select the load.

429
Reference Guide

The properties, including all parameters are displayed in the Property Window.

There are two coefficients in the Property Window named Coef1 and Coeff2. These represent the total value
of the shape coefficient at the beginning and at the end, respectively, of the selected beam member.
All the input data can also be clearly verified in a load table in either Preview window or Document window.

430
 Loads

Note:
The graphical representation of the wind load uses the following convention:
1. The graphical size of the load "diagram" takes account of both acting width, shape coefficient
and wind pressure.
2. The numerical value at the load "diagram" may show the acting width or the final load value.
The adjustment may be made using the Set view parameters function. See the Note in
chapter Basic working tools > View parameters > Overview of view parameters > Labels
and descriptions.
3. The value of the shape coefficient can be read in the property table once the required load is
selected.

Snow generator
Snow generator
Snow generator enables the user to subject a structure to the effect of snow. It is possible to apply values and
formulas given in a particular standard, or specify a user-defined value of snow weight.
The load calculated from the given snow definition is applied on the planar section of the structure. The section
is defined by the current working plane. Thus, various sections may be subject to various generated loads.
Note 1: The snow load generator may be used to generate the load on a single planar section of
the structure at a time. The section is defined by the current working plane. The working plane
MUST be defined as vertical. Otherwise, the snow load generator cannot be applied.
Note 2: The snow load generator can be used ONLY on an undivided building. If a structure
consists of two or more separate and unconnected parts in the particular planar section, the load is
generated on one of the parts only.

Types of snow load

As stated earlier, there are two ways to define snow load in SCIA.ESA PT.
The actual load may be calculated to a specific technical standard or it may be derived from a user-defined
snow weight. The type of snow load can be adjusted in the Project Setup dialogue on tab Load.

431
Reference Guide

Code snow
If option Code is selected, the user may then specify additional parameters defined in the particular national
standard. The sample picture below show dialogues for the adjustment of code related parameters for EC
standard.

User-defined snow weight

If option Snow weight is adjusted, the user must define the snow weight typical for the region in consideration.

Note: The type of snow load adjusted in this Project Setup dialogue is later used when function
Load > Snow generator is applied.

Using the snow generator

Step 0: Enabling the snow generation and selecting the type of snow load
In order to tell SCIA.ESA PT that the snow generator will be used, the user must say so on the Functionality
tab of Project setup dialogue. Item Climatic load must be selected in the functionality list.
To select the snow type see chapter Types of snow load.
Step 1: Starting the function
The snow generator can be accessed via function Load > Snow generator.
Step 2: Defining the distance between adjacent frames
The snow load is generated for a single planar section of the structure. In order to calculate properly the load
values, the program must know the "snow width", i.e. the distance between adjacent frames. Therefore, on
starting the function, the user is asked to define this dimension.
Step 3: Specifying the generator parameters
Once this step is done, a snow generator dialogue is opened on the screen. The user may control the
generation of the snow load via a set of parameters of the generator. Their meaning and application is
explained in chapter Adjusting the snow generator parameters.
Step 4: Generation of the load
On completion of the input of generator parameters and its confirmation, the adequate load is calculated and
applied on the structure.

Adjusting the snow generator parameters

The main dialogue of the snow generator enables the user to control the process of load generation. The
meaning of individual parameters and control buttons is given in a brief table below.

432
 Loads

The dialogue also displays the contour of the structure or its part (i.e. the planar section) that will be
considered for the load generation. Beam members that will be subject to the generated load are drawn in
thick line. The active beam member is in red while the others are in green. The remaining beam members of
the structure, i.e. those that will not be subject to the generated snow load, are drawn in thin line.
If the snow load is to be generated to a specific code, it is possible that some of the loaded beam members are
divided into several intervals. The division is controlled by the regulations of the particular standard.
In addition, the user may decide to divide any of the existing intervals or beam members into two parts. This
division may be applied recursively, so any of the beam members can be divided into as many intervals as
necessary. And vice versa, any of the two adjacent intervals may be connected to create one interval and
ultimately a single beam member.
Hatches drawn at the thick-line, i.e. loaded, beam members indicate the direction of the generated load.
Hatches attached to a beam member from outside of the structure contour mean that the load produces
pressure.
Parameters
Load mode This item selects the mode of snow load.
Valley effect If the building is located in a valley, this button enables
the user to take account of this fact.
Frame distance The distance between two adjacent frames defined
before opening the dialogue may be reviewed and/or
edited here.
Coefficients This group defines shape coefficients. A set of control
buttons (see below) accompanies the input boxes.
Begin = adjusts the value of shape coefficient at the
beginning of the interval
End = adjusts the value of shape coefficient at the end
of the interval

Control buttons

433
Reference Guide

Set coefficients The value of coefficients typed in the Begin and End
input boxes, is assigned to the active interval or beam
member of the structure contour (i.e. to the beam
member drawn in red thick line).
Next The focus is shifted to the next interval or beam
member. The next interval or beam member becomes
active.
Previous The focus is shifted to the previous interval or beam
member. The previous interval or beam member
becomes active.
Divide The active interval or beam member is divided in the
given point. The point of division is defined in a dialogue
that opens after the action is started.
Connect This function is applicable only if some beam members
have been already divided. The function does nothing, if
undivided beam members form the contour of the
structure.
Two intervals are joined together. The rule is that the
active interval is preserved including the coefficients and
the next interval is linked to it.
Regenerate This button resets the program default values. It sets all
the coefficients to their default values and deletes all
possible intervals created by the user.
Print picture The current picture can be printed on an installed
printer.

Snow weight to EC1

The individual parameters and their meaning are briefly described in the figure and table below.
For more information we refer to the appropriate articles of the code that are referenced in the enclosed
explanatory text below the table.

2
sk characteristic value of snow load [kN/m ]

Ce exposure coefficient

Ct thermal coefficient

The snow load acting on the roof is determined from:

s = mii . Ce . Ct . sk
where:
mii shape coefficient

Ce exposure coefficient, usually equal to 1.0

434
 Loads

Ct thermal coefficient, usually equal to 1.0

sk characteristic value of snow weight

The thermal coefficient can be lower than 1.0 in buildings where big thermal loses appear thought the roof. The
exposure coefficient can express the effect of wind on reduction of snow layer size.

Combined wind and snow generator

Snow and wind generator
In addition to separate wind and snow generators, SCIA ESA PT offers also a complex tool for the generation
of wind and snow load on frame structures.
This complex generator does several tasks at once:
 it creates a new load case for wind from the left hand side with overpressure and generates the
appropriate load for it,
 it creates a new load case for wind from the left hand side with under-pressure and generates the
appropriate load for it,
 it creates a new load case for wind from the right hand side with overpressure and generates the
appropriate load for it,
 it creates a new load case for wind from the right hand side with under-pressure and generates the
appropriate load for it,
 it creates a new load case for snow generates the snow load.

Procedure to use Snow and Wind generator

 Open service Load
 Start function Wind snow generator.
 Define the input parameters (see below).
 Confirm with [OK].
 The load-generator wizard is opened on the screen.
 If necessary, you may alter some of the parameters (for more see chapters dealing with standalone
wind and snow generators).
 Use button [Next] to go through all the screens of the wizard.
 At the end the specified load cases are created and corresponding load generated in them.

Wind snow generator parameters

Frame distance Defines the distance between adjacent frames. Similarly to
standalone wind or snow generator, you select one planar
frame that will be subject to the generated load. Therefore, you
must specify the distance to the neighbouring frames in order
to define the loading width.

Wind
Load group The generated load cases for wind load will be inserted to the
given group.
Load case name You may input the base of the load case name.
E.g. if you specify the base of the name "WND", the names of
the generated load cases will be:
 WND – LO,
 WND – LU,
 WND – RO,
 WND – RU.

435
Reference Guide

Also corresponding descriptions of load cases are

automatically generated:
 Wind from left – overpressure,
 Wind from left – underpressure,
 Wind from right – overpressure,
 Wind from right – underpressure.
Overpressure If ON, the overpressure load case will be generated.
Underpressure If ON, the underpressure load case will be generated.

Snow
Load group The generated load case for snow load will be inserted to the
given group.
Load case name You may input the name of the load case. Also a
corresponding description of the load case is automatically
generated.

International standards
For some national standards the parameters of the generator may be extended. E.g. for the French code, two
more wind load cases (front wind – overpressure and front wind-underpressure) and one more snow load case
(accidental) are generated in compliance with the provisions of the national standard. Also snow accumulation
is taken into account for the French standard.

Plane load generator

Introduction to plane load generator
A plane load generator is a tool that automatically transforms defined area load into line loads that acts on
beam members located in the specified plane.
This generator is useful for planar frames (that may be an independent structure or may form just a part of a
complex 3D frame) that are subject to continuous area load. With this generator, the user no longer has to
determine load widths and recalculate the known area load to line load.
More can be found in:
Principle of plane load generator
Defining a new plane load

Principle of plane load generator

The usual procedure applied during the definition of a new area load is:
1. to specify the load size per square metre,
2. to define the loading area,
3. to let the program calculate line loads for affected beam members.
If necessary, the input data may be edited any time later.
If the program is not said to calculate (or generate) the loads manually, the program does so automatically
before starting a calculation.
There are some limitations that one should bear in mind:
 The loading polygon (loading area) must be planar.
 The beam members that are supposed to bear the defined load must be located in the loading
plane.

Parameters of plane load

The parameters of this load type are:

436
 Loads

Name Specifies the name of the load.

Direction Selects the direction of the load. The load may act along one of
the co-ordinate axes only (i.e. in the X-direction, Y-direction, or
Z-direction).
System The load may act either along an axis of the global-coordinate
system or in the direction of a User co-ordinate axis.
2
q [kN/m ] Specifies the intensity (size) of the area load. This load will be
then recalculated onto selected beam members.
Loaded beams The area load, whose size is input in the field above, can act
on all the beam members located in the loading plane, or on
only some of them (i.e. on the user-selected beams).

Defining a new plane load

The procedure to define a new plane load
1. If necessary, define a new load case for the new load.
2. Open service Load in the tree menu.
3. Start function Plane generator.
4. Fill in the parameters in the Plane geometry dialogue .
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. If necessary, move and/or rotate the working plane so that it defines the level and orientation of the
loading plane.
7. Input the loading polygon.
8. Close the function:
a. either press [Esc] key,

b. or press button [End action] on the toolbar just above the command line ( ),
c. or invoke the window pop-up menu and select command End.
9. The Property window now shows the earlier confirmed parameters as well as a few Action buttons
(see below).

13. If required, use the action buttons to finish the definition.

14. Close the function.
Action buttons in the Plane generator property window
Refresh This button starts the generator itself. If the generator is not
started manually by the user in the phase of definition of a new
plane load, the generation is performed automatically before
calculation.
Note:

437
Reference Guide

It is highly recommended to generate the loads on beam

members manually using this button. It gives the user an
invaluable possibility to review WHAT exactly has been defined
and generated and compare it with WHAT the user wanted.
Edit plane geometry This button enables the user to edit the geometry of the loading
polygon.
See separate chapter Editing the loading polygon.
Update beams If parameter Loaded beams is adjusted to Selected, this button
selection starts the operation of selection of required beam members.
The beam members that should be subject to the input load
must be selected. The operation of selection can be closed by
the [Esc] key.

Inputting the loading polygon

When function Plane generator is started, a new toolbar is added to the bar just above the command line.

Buttons of the toolbar has the following meaning (from the left).
New circle – centre, Once button [New circle] is pressed a short sub-toolbar is
radius point offered. This is the first of the functions on this sub-toolbar.
The user must define the centre point and a point on the circle
that specifies the radius.
New circle – 3 points Once button [New circle] is pressed a short sub-toolbar is
offered. This is the second of the functions on this sub-toolbar.
The user must input three points located on the circle.
New rectangle The user must define two opposite corners of a rectangle.
New polygon The user must define individual vertices of the polygon.
New straight line The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon
will be a straight line.
New circular arc The following edge (segment) of the currently defined polygon
will be a circular arc (the intermediate point and end point of
the circular segment must be input).
New parabolic arc The following edge will be of a parabolic shape. Follow the
procedure for the input of a parabolic beam.
New Bezier The following edge will be formed by a Bezier curve. Follow the
procedure for the input of a "Bezier-curve" beam.
New spline The following edge will be formed by a spline. Follow the
procedure for the input of a "spline" beam.
Select line This button is useful if a new polygon is supposed to follow the
shape of a previously defined polygon. The user does not have
to pick all the vertices of the new polygon, but may select
existing edges of the already input polygon.
See the example below.
Step back This button goes one step back in the definition of the polygon.
For example:
If a polygon is being defined, the last vertex is removed. Or, if a
circle is being defined by means of three points and two points
have been defined so far, this function removes the second
point of the circle but leaves the first circle point unaffected.

Example for Select line function

Let’s assume that a polygon has been input as shown below.

438
 Loads

Another polygon is supposed to follow the circular part of the first polygon. The procedure may be:
1. Start function Plane load.
2. Input the first point to the right of vertex P4 of the defined polygon.
3. Input the second point directly in vertex P4.
4. Press button [Select line] on the toolbar.
5. Select edge P4-P5 of the first polygon.
6. Select edge P5-P7 of the first polygon.
7. Select edge P7-P6 of the first polygon.
8. Press button [New straight] line on the toolbar.
9. Input the remaining vertices of the new polygon.

Editing the polygon

Editing the loading polygon
The loading polygon can be edited any time after it has been defined. It is possible to modify both (i) the plane
polygon parameters and (ii) the geometry of the polygon.
Concerning the geometry of the polygon, the user may do the following:
 change the shape (moving the existing vertices of the polygon),
 insert a new vertex,
 remove the existing vertex,

439
Reference Guide

 insert a new opening into the existing polygon,

 remove the existing opening from the existing polygon,
 delete the polygon.

Note: After any modification of the polygon, button [Refresh] should be pressed to start re-
generation of the load. If the user does not carry out the generation of the load manually, it will be
performed automatically before the calculation of the project.

Changing the parameters

The procedure to edit polygon parameters
1. Select the polygon.
2. Its parameters are displayed in the Property window.
3. Change required parameters.
4. If necessary, use button [Refresh] to update the load (see the Note below).
5. Clear the selection.

Note: It is recommended to press button [Refresh] to start re-generation of the load. If this is not
done manually now, it will be performed automatically before the calculation of the project.

Changing the geometry of the loading polygon

Any of the vertices of the polygon may be moved. There is only one limitation for the operation in that the
vertex must remain in the plane of the polygon. The move of the vertex can be performed using the Drag&Drop
functionality.
The procedure to move the vertex
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.
5. Use Drag&Drop functionality to move the required vertex to its new position.
6. Close the function.
7. If the working plane was moved to the plane of the polygon at the beginning of this function, it is
moved back to its original location now.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the
picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu
and select function Play.

Inserting a new vertex

The procedure to insert a new vertex
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.
5. Start function Insert vertex:
a. using the Action button in the Property window,
b. using the window pop-up menu.

440
 Loads

6. Select edges where the new vertex or vertices will be inserted. It is possible to select several edges,
not only one.
7. Press [Esc] key to finish the selection of edges.
8. The mouse cursor becomes bound to the selected edges.
9. Define the new vertices. Proper adjustment of SNAP function can help with this task.
10. Close the function of insertion.
11. Close the function of polygon editing.
12. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the
picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu
and select function Play.

Removing the vertex

The procedure to remove the vertex
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.
5. Start function Delete vertex:
a. using the Action button in the Property window,
b. using the window pop-up menu.
6. Select vertex or vertices that will be removed. As soon as the vertex is picked, it is removed from
the polygon.
7. Close the function of deleting.
8. Close the function of polygon editing.
9. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

Inserting an opening
The procedure to insert a new opening
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon are highlighted.
5. Start function Insert opening:
a. using the Action button in the Property window,
b. using the window pop-up menu.
6. Define the new opening polygon. Proper adjustment of SNAP function can help with this task. The
opening may overlap the original polygon.
7. Close the new opening.
8. Close the function of insertion.
9. Close the function of polygon editing.
10. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the procedure. To start the video, just position the mouse cursor over the
picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the video pop-up menu
and select function Play.

441
Reference Guide

Deleting the opening

The procedure to insert a new vertex
1. Select the polygon
2. Start function Edit plane load geometry:
a. using Action button Edit plane load geometry,
b. or using window pop-up menu and its function Edit plane load geometry.
3. If the working plane is not in the plane of the polygon, it is moved there automatically.
4. The vertices of the polygon and opening (or openings) are highlighted.
5. Start function Delete opening:
a. using the Action button in the Property window,
b. using the window pop-up menu.
6. Select the opening or openings to be deleted.
7. Close the function of deleting.
8. Close the function of polygon editing.
9. Clear the selection (the polygon was selected as the first step).

Deleting the polygon

The procedure to delete the polygon
1. Select the polygon.
2. Delete the polygon:
a. use menu function Modify > Delete,
b. or use window pop-up menu function Delete,
c. or press key [Delete].
3. A message is displayed. Confirm with [OK] button.

Pond water
Introduction to pond load
Ponding of rainwater is a phenomenon that occurs during a heavy rainfall on slender flat roofs. The water flows
to the lowest point of the structure. Because the rainfall is excessively intensive, the drains cannot drain the
water. Thus the water stays at the same place and the water level raises until the level of emergency drains is
reached. Before that however the structure deforms. Due to the deformation more water flows to the lowest
pond (= ponding of water also known as water accumulation) and the structure deformation increases, thus
more water ... , thus larger deformation..., etc.
The described situation occurs mainly in the combination of flat roofs, roofs with slender roof structures, large
area roofs.
Since the collapse of view roofs in 2002, the ponding of rainwater is a hot issue in the Netherlands.

Pond load - water accumulation

Parameters
Name Defines the name of the load. It may facilitate the identification
of the load.
Loaded beams Informs about the loading conditions.
Direction Specifies the direction of the load.
Storage capacity Specifies the capacity of the roof.
Other reasons Specifies an additional height.
Division Specifies the division used for the calculation.
Max number of steps Defines maximum number of steps during the calculation.

442
 Loads

Use other permanent If ON, other permanent load may be included.

load
Status Tells the status of he calculation.

Detailed parameters -Points

No. Automatically generated vertex number.
X, Y Co-ordinates of vertex of loading polygon.
Height Type of definition of water height.
Input: The height is manually input.
Point: The height is calculated from the value at different point
using the given slope.
Calculate: The height is calculated from defined slopes.
H Defines the water height.
Point Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the point from which the
height is calculated.
Slope Only if Height is set to Point: Defines the slope from the
selected point.

Detailed parameters -Drains

Point Number of point.
Location Location of the drain.
hdn depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge, in m
A roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains using
2
a certain emergency drain, in m
b width of the drain

Detailed parameters -Slopes

The user may define subregions where planar shape is assumed. Only three points may have the height
defined. The remaining points are calculated. In case of any conflict, the area is not permitted.

443
Reference Guide

Example
When defined in the model, the pond load may look like:

444
 Loads

Defining a new pond load

The procedure for the definition of a new pond load
1. Open function Pond load – water accumulation via tree menu Loads or via menu Tree > Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Input the area where water may accumulate.
5. Press Action button [Gener loads] in the Property Window. The generator dialogue opens on the
screen.

6. Press button [Calculate] to generate the load on loaded beam members.

445
Reference Guide

7. Confirm with [OK].

8. Close the function.

Note: The loading area may be edited any time later. The procedure of the modification of
loading areas is similar to the modification of loading polygon in plane load generator.
Note: Pond load may be defined ONLY in a variable load case.

Theoretical background
References
NEN6702 – Loadings and deformations: 2001
Theory
NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.1
Ponding of rainwater is a local effect. Therefore the load should be considered as a free load and thus a
chessboard combination should be considered.
NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.4
The deflections has to be calculated in the end-situation, i.e. total deflections minus pre-camber. The start-load
for ponding of rainwater is determined as:

where
Pi;rep(x) The load in calculation step i in kN/m2

d(i-1)(x) The water depth caused by the deflection of the roof in iteration
(i-1) at location (x) in m.
dhw(x) The water depth above the non-deformed roof area in m acc. to
art. 8.7.1.5

NEN6702, Art. 8.7.1.5

446
 Loads

dhw(x=0) = dnd+hnd
dhw(x) the numerical value of the water depth at the roof edge or
emergency drain
dnd the numerical value of the water depth above the emergency
drain in m
hnd the depth of the emergency drain above the roof or roof edge,
in m

correction factor for reference period

A the roof area (vertical projection at ground plane) that drains

2
using a certain emergency drain, in m
b the width of the drain
The weight of water

Span loads
Introduction to spans
It may happen that a beam member extends over several spans. A continuous beam and a multi-span frame
are good example of this.
The frame below has four spans that are 2 m, 4 m, 4 m, and 2 m long, respectively.

447
Reference Guide

The second picture shows a continuous beam with five spans.

If the user designs such a type of structure, s/he may need to define a load that extends just over a single span
(e.g. like in the enclosed picture).

SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to do this easily. The only thing the user has to do is adjust a proper "extent" of
the load. This parameter can be adjusted during the definition of a new load. The parameter may even be
changed for already existing loads. The standard procedure described in ESA help chapter Modifying the
existing load > Changing the load parameters may be used.
The application of "span loads" itself is straightforward and requires no special preliminary steps. It is even
offered in the Standard user interface level.

What is the span

What is a span?
First of all, it is important to define what the term span exactly mean. In SCIA.ESA PT terminology the span is
one of the following:
 if a beam member is defined by means of a polyline, the span is the segment between two
adjacent vertices,
 if a linked node (or several of these) is defined on a beam member, the span is either (i) the
segment between two adjacent linked nodes, or (ii) between a linked node and the adjacent end-
node of the beam member,
 any combination of the above mentioned options.

448
 Loads

Note: A linked node does not have to be only in a real "connection" of two beam members. It is
possible to define a linked node anywhere along a beam member and let it "unlinked" to any other
member.

What is NOT a span?

In order to prevent misunderstanding, it may be also good to state what is NOT the span:
 The span is NOT a segment between a node (either end node or linked node) and a crosslink.
 The span is NOT a segment between two intersections of a beam member with two other beam
members unless linked nodes have been defined in the intersections.
 The span is NOT a segment between a node (either end node or linked node) and a support-on-
beam. The span is neither a segment between two supports-on-beam.
 The span is NOT a segment between two end nodes if several beam members lie in one line and
touch each other by their end points. In this case, each "segment" is a full beam member. No
spans appear on such a structure.

Types of spans
Span defined by means of polyline
In order to have spans "prepared" by means of a polyline, the following procedure must be used for the
definition of a new beam member.
Procedure for the definition of spans by means of polyline
1. Start function Structure > Drawing a member.
2. Define parameters of the beam member in the property dialogue.
3. Do NOT define the start point of the beam member. Instead, click button [New polyline] ( ) on the
toolbar located just above the command line.
4. Now define the start point.
5. Continue with intermediate vertices of the polygon.
6. Define the end point of the polygon, i.e. the end node of the beam member.
7. Close the function.
8. Now, the defined beam member consists of several segments. Each of the segments represents
one span.
The following pictures demonstrate the described procedure and its application.
First, the polygon is defined.

Second, when function Drawing a member is closed, a beam member is created (automatically) along the
polygon.

Finally, span-loads may be defined on individual spans.

449
Reference Guide

Span defined by means of linked nodes

This approach is suitable if:
 The spatial arrangement of the members of the structure is such that individual spans are defined
by means of the connections of beam members.
 The demand for span-loads appears in later design phases and the beam members have been
already defined without the polyline approach taken into account.
The exact procedure will differ for each of the two mentioned situations.
Definition of spans according to spatial arrangement of beam members
Procedure for the definition of spans according to spatial arrangement of beam members
1. Select the beam members that should be connected.
2. Call function Modify > Connect nodes to beams.
3. Linked nodes are created in contacts of beam members.
Example
Let’s assume a simple 2D frame.

The top horizontal beam covering all the spans of the frame is not connected to the columns yet.
So, select the top horizontal beam and the inner columns. (Surface of beams is displayed in this picture for
better clearness.)

Call function Modify > Connect nodes to beams. Or, if you prefer, use icon of the same name ( ) located
on toolbar Geometrical manipulations. New linked nodes are created in the points of "touch" between the
horizontal beam and the columns.

450
 Loads

The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.

Definition of spans on individual beam members

The procedure here is very straightforward. The user defines manually new linked nodes in points where the
end-of-span is supposed to be.
Procedure for the definition of spans on individual beam members
1. Call function Node on beam:
a. Either through menu function Tree > Structure > Node on beam,
b. Or through tree menu function Structure > Node on beam.
2. Select the beam member where the new linked node should be defined.
3. Define the position of the new linked node.
4. The linked node is created.
5. If required, repeat the whole procedure as many times as necessary.
Example
Let’s take a simple beam.

Let’s assume that the user want to "divide" the beam into three segments, i.e. have three spans on it. Adjust
the SNAP function to the picture. Option Points on line-curve Nths should be set to 3.

451
Reference Guide

Call function Node on beam, select the beam and define the point, i.e. the position of the new linked node.

Repeat the same for the second point.

The detailed view shows the graphical symbol used for linked nodes.

452
 Loads

Work with spans

Defining a new span-load
The general procedure for the definition of a new load that extends over a span instead of the whole beam
member is the same as for normal beam-load. The only difference is that parameter Extent must be adjusted
to span.
The same principle applies for all types of load on beam member:
 point load on beam member,
 line force on beam member,
 thermal load on beam member,
 moment load on beam member,
 line moment load on beam member,
 point displacement on beam member – relative translation,
 point displacement on beam member – relative rotation,
 line displacement on beam member – longitudinal strain,
 line displacement on beam member – flexural strain.
The procedure will be explained for line force load on beam only. Examples will be given for several load
types.
The procedure for the definition of a span-load on a beam member
1. Open function Line force on beam via tree menu function Loads or via menu function Tree >
Loads.
2. Specify the parameters of the load and its size.
3. Set parameter Extent to span.
4. Input the starting point and end point of the load position.
5. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
6. Select beam members where the load should act.
7. Close the function.
Example
Let’s assume a continuous five span beam. Let’s assume that this beam is subject to three different loads:
 line force load extending over the whole first span,
 thermal load extending from the point in one fourth of the third span to the point in three fourths of
the same span,
 moment load acting in the middle of the last, i.e. fifth span.
The beam is shown in the picture below.

First, let’s define the line load over the first span. Call function Line force on beam and fill in the parameters
according to the picture. REMEMBER to set the extent to span.

453
Reference Guide

Confirm the settings and select the first span of the beam.

The load is inputted there.

Second, let’s add the thermal load. This load acts not along the whole span but only over its part. Call function
Thermal load on beam. Fill in the table as shown below. Again, REMEMBER to set item extent to span.

Confirm the settings and select the third span of the beam. The load is inputted accordingly.

Finally, let’s input the moment load acting in the middle of the last span. Call function Moment > on beam and
fill in the table as given below.

454
 Loads

Confirm the settings and select the top right span of the beam. The moment is added to the beam.

At the end, the beam is subject the three prescribed loads.

Changing location of span-load

Once a span-load is defined, it is stored as a normal load. This means that it can be manipulated the same
way as any other load.
In order to move the span load, see chapter Loads > Modifying the existing load > Moving the load.

Modifying the span length

If a span length is modified, the result of the operation may depend on the type of span-load definition. And
sometimes, special measures must be taken to make the result correct.
The action of modification of span length depends on whether the load on it has been defined "relatively" or
"absolutely". If the load has been defined in relative co-ordinates, everything is clear and the user does not
have to think about it much.
On the other hand, if the span-load is defined in absolute co-ordinates, the user must pay attention to the
operation.
If the span in question is made longer, no special measures need to be taken. The after-modification span is
longer than the original one and the load can be put on the new span without any corrections.
If however, the "after-modification span" is shorter than the original, and especially, if the "after-modification
span" is even shorter than the extent of the load, the load must be corrected in order to fit the "after-
modification span".
We’ll explain the problem on a simple example.
Let’s have a three-span continuous beam subject to a uniformly distributed load over the top right span.

455
Reference Guide

The length of the loaded span is 5 metres. Let’s move the span’s left node to shorten the span to 3 metres
only. The load that is defined in absolute co-ordinates (i.e. it extents from ordinate 0,000 to ordinate 5,000)
can’t fit onto the shortened span.

For several reasons, an automatic check and correction of this situation is not performed and the user must
take the initiative. S/he must use function Calculation > Check structure data to correct any invalid data.

On opening the function a function-control dialogue is displayed. For our case, an attention should be paid to
its bottom part called Check of additional data. This option must be ticked.

Pressing button [Check] starts the checking procedure. If any invalidities are discovered, the dialogue offers to
continue and correct them. Before pressing button [Continue], make sure that option Correct position is
selected.

At the end, the program informs about the number of corrections made to the project data.

It can be seen on the screen that the load has been corrected appropriately.

456
 Loads

Note: If the user does not make the check of data personally, the situation is not so crucial as it
may seem. SCIA.ESA.PT performs the check of data before each calculation. So, if the user forgets
or does not bother to perform the check of data manually, the data are checked automatically and,
if necessary, corrected before the calculation.

Copying the span-load to another beam member

Span-load can be copied to other beam members. The procedure is identical to copying a standard load.
The procedure for copying of span-load
1. Select the span-load to be copied.
2. Call menu function Modify > Copy add data.
3. Select the target beam member, i.e. the beam member where the load should be copied to. It is
possible to select several target beam members at a time.
4. Close the function.
5. The load is copied.

Copying beam members subject to span-load

As with normal beam load, it is possible to copy the whole beam member with defined span-loads to a new
location including this span-load. Of course, any other defined properties like supports, hinges, etc. may be
copied with the beam member as well.
The procedure for copying a beam member including its load
1. Select the beam member and load that is to be copied. If you select other data like supports, they
will be copied as well.
2. Start function Modify > Copy.
3. Define the displacement vector by means of Starting point and End point.
4. Close the function.
5. Selected entities are copied.

Predefined load
Introduction to predefined loads
Predefined load represent a useful feature if the load that the analysed structure is subject to can be evaluated
from the composition of e.g. floor, or other layered construction. The real load is then defined by:
 selection of appropriate predefined load set and
 specification of loading width or area.

Predefined load manager

The Predefined load can be defined and edited in the Predefined load manager. This manager is one the
SCIA.ESA PT numerous database managers. Its operation and layout are analogous to other database
managers.
In Predefined load manager the user may:
 define a new predefined load,

457
Reference Guide

 edit an existing predefined load,

 copy an existing predefined load,
 delete an existing predefined load,
 save the existing predefined load to an external file.
The Predefined load manager can be opened in two ways:
 using tree menu function Libraries > Predefined loads,
 using menu function Libraries > Predefined loads.

Defining a new predefined load

The procedure for the definition of a new predefined load
1. Open the Predefined load manager.
2. Click button [New] to insert a new predefined load.
3. A new predefined load is added to the list of defined predefined loads.
4. Select the new predefined load.
5. Press button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
6. In the editing dialogue, input the parameters of individual layers.
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as many times as required.
9. Close the manager.

Note: If the manager is opened for the first time and no predefined load has been defined so far,
step 2 to 5 may be automatically skipped.

Editing the predefined load

The Predefined load is defined by means of individual layers that compose it.
The Predefined load may be defined in a simple operated dialogue.

458
 Loads

The user just has to type the appropriate parameters for individual layers.
Name Identifies the particular layer.
Height Specifies the height of the particular layer.
Unit load Specifies the unit weight (density) of the particular layer.
Name of predefined The whole set may be named as well in order to easily
load set identified when used in the project.

The dialogue automatically calculates the total weight of one square metre of the predefined load.
The set can be then later used in the definition of line or point load together with specified loading width or area
respectively.

Applying the predefined load

The procedure for the application of a predefined set
1. Follow the standard procedure for the definition of line or point load.
2. Parameter Type set to Predefined load.

3. A new item appears in the property table.

4. Use this item to select the required predefined load set.
5. Finish the standard procedure for the definition of line or point load.

459
Reference Guide

Input and display conventions for predefined load

When a predefined load is applied, the real load intensity is not defined explicitly by a single value. Instead,
some other data are input and the final intensity is calculated from them.
This may initiate a discussion, which value should be displayed on the screen:
 the input data?
 the final – calculated intensity value?
SCIA.ESA PT uses a compromise, allowing the user to select which value types should be displayed.
On-screen drawing
The adjustment may be made by means of appropriate View parameters. The tab Labels and descriptions
contains groups Loads:
Display label Controls whether load labels will be shown or not.
Name Shows the name of the load.
Value Displays the load’s value. See Note below.
Total value Displays total value of load. See Note below.

Note: Items Value and Total value are significant for loads that are not defined directly by its
force or moment impulse, but that were defined by means of a wind generator, load generator, or
as a predefined load. For such loads, SCIA ESA PT can display two different types of data. First,
the input value (e.g. width load) can be shown, i.e. the value. Second, the calculated load per meter
of length can be displayed (i.e. the total value).
Property dialogue
The property dialogue gives enough space for additional information, and thus the input load width and
calculated load intensity are shown – see value P.
Because the intensity is calculated from the input acting width, it is not editable.

Preview window
The preview window displays all the available information concerning the defined load.
The calculated load intensity is shown in column marked P. The input acting width is given in column marked
W.

460
 Loads

Calculation
It is obvious that the calculation uses the pre-calculated load intensity as the factually applied load.
Sign convention
However strange it may seem on the first view, the sign convention used for predefined load is based on the
same logic as for other load types.
Positive load acts in the direction of the appropriate axis.
Negative load acts against the direction of the appropriate axis.
What may seem strange is that the downward-oriented load (the weight of the predefined load "sandwich")
must be defined as negative in order to really act "downwards". The strangeness is in the fact that acting width
is input and it may seem unusual to specify a negative dimension. On the other hand, imagine a drawing
showing loads of several types. With the convention applied, all the loads acting in the same direction will be of
the same sign regardless of the type.

Mobile load
Introduction
The module generates influence lines / areas for the load moving along a given track. You can alter the
direction and intensity of the moving unit load. The result of the calculation are influence lines and load-
systems can be positioned on them. Critical positions are then found for these systems. This is known as
utilisation of influence lines. It is possible to automatically calculate the envelope of the most unfavourable
effects. Various types of load-systems allow for wider calculation possibilities.
Currently, the evaluation of utilisation is not sufficiently accurate for 2D members and 2D load. The calculation
is always simplified into a track and the effect of the width of the 2D load-system is not taken into account. The
calculation is always performed along the track.
The whole process necessary for the calculation of influence lines and evaluation of their utilisation is divided
into several steps.
 Definition of the model of the analysed structure and input of at least one load case.
 Definition of the track and unit load.
 Calculation that automatically analyses the track and unit load moving along it.
 Definition of load-systems, specification of rules for the generation of load cases and evaluation of
utilisation.
 The subsequent linear calculation generates the envelope load cases and processes the load cases
created from the movement of load-systems.

Brief introduction to the theory

Influence lines
Influence lines and mobile loads are used in the design of e.g. bridge structures where the effect of loads
moving along the structure predominates. Once the calculation of influence lines has been performed, the
linearity of the system allows for the evaluation of utilisation of influence lines with respect to the motion of an
arbitrary load-system defined according to a particular technical standard or according to the judgment of the
user.

461
Reference Guide

The influence line represents the change of resultant or effect – of e.g. bending moment, shear force, etc. – in
the particular point of a structure as a result of the move of unit load along the structure (following the given
track).
It is important to say that the effect is evaluated in a fixed point. X-coordinate of individual influence lines
represents the position of the unit load moving along the structure and the Y-coordinate of the same point
corresponds to the effect caused by the unit load in the fixed point. The final aim is to find the position of the
load-system which results in the maximal effect on the structure in the point.
The linearity of the system makes it possible to evaluate the motion of unit load along the structure and then
calculate the utilisation of the mobile load-system consisting of several concentrated forces and distributed
loads (e.g. a train on the rails) using the superposition of influence lines multiplied by the size of the load.
The influence lines and their utilisation are calculated for a fixed section. One can obtain an envelope of
maximal effects and save other corresponding values. This envelope can be combined with a standard load
(e.g. self-weight) and thus the overview of the overall behaviour of the structure can be obtained.

Application of mobile load

The principle of the utilisation of influence lines is in the superposition of load cases in such a way that we get
a mobile load-system consisting of various concentrated and distributed loads simulating e.g. a train.
The load-system used for the simulation of moving loads (e.g. trains, trucks on a motorway) can be divided into
two types:
 a simple load-system,
 an advanced load-system.

The calculation of the response of influence lines on mobile loads requires a few parameters derived from the
curve of an influence line. Each possible position of a load-system must be evaluated independently, so that
the most critical position can be determined.

General facts
A mobile load-system consists of one or several load groups. Distributed load and concentrated load impulses
with a fixed distance from a reference point can be defined for each load group. The distance between the
groups can be fixed or variable depending on whether railway or road mobile load is simulated. The aim is to
position the load group in such a way that it results in the maximal effect on the structure (see the simple load-
system and advanced load-system).
In practice, the program first calculates the influence lines for each result component.
 6 internal forces (axial force, shear forces, bending moments and torque),
 6 displacements and rotations,
 6 reactions in supports.

Basic parameters, such as the change of sign separating the negative and positive part of the influence line,
are determined for each influence line. The area below the curve is calculated for each part of the influence
line. The load-system is positioned for the given section and effect on the influence line and is moved until the
maximum is found. The found position is the extreme for one fixed section and one required component. It
must be noted that sometimes it is necessary to consider the unloading in order to take into account the effect
of load group placed on the negative part of the influence line (See Determining the maximal effect of
concentrated forces, Determining the maximal effect of distributed load and Determining the maximal effect of
the combination of distributed and concentrated loads).

Simple load system

The simple load system is defined by the following load types and characteristics:
 a group of concentrated loads defined by their size and positions that are related to the reference
point,
 a distributed mobile load that is distributed along various parts of the influence line, so that maximal
effects were imposed,

Some national standards consider the application of load systems in the design of structures such as bridges
or cranes.

462
 Loads

Advanced load system

An advanced load system is defined by means of the following parameters:
 given number of load groups,
 type of load group, e.g. loading block consisting of a given number of concentrated load impulses
characterised by the fixed mutual distance, size and position related to the reference point,
 percentage of unloading (in the program called percentage ordinates) that is used if a part of the
group of concentrated load impulses is positioned on the negative part of the influence line in such a
way that the effect of this part on the invoked maximum was changed,
 for several load groups:
o for the system with more than two load groups, a constant distance between
individual groups,
o for the system of two load groups, the maximal and minimal permissible distance
(variable distance),
 the value of distributed load,
 the value of distributed load between two positive parts of the influence line (similar effect as the
percentage of unloading – described above)
 in case of one load group it is possible to change the size of the distributed load around the
concentrated load impulse between two specified coordinates: the beginning and end of the change
of the distributed load.
The coordinates of concentrated loads that define the position of the load group are defined from a reference
point.

Determining the maximal effect of distributed load

The definition says that in order to obtain the maximal effect of the load from the influence line in a fixed
section, the ordinate of the influence line in the x-coordinate is multiplied by the size of the load. According to
this definition, the effect of the distributed load means the calculation of the area under the influence line
between every change of sign, and its multiplication by the load size. If the influence line is defined by several
positive and negative parts, the area is calculated for each part considering the sign. The overall effect is the
sum of all loaded parts. The maximal effect is caused by a distributed load positioned on the positive part of
the influence line. The load is therefore divided between each of the parts according to the following picture.

463
Reference Guide

Qm,pos&neg – mobile load in the positive or negative part

Qb,pos&neg – distributed load between load groups (interrupted)

Each line below the influence line shows the possible division of the load system. E.g. the first line represents
the distributed load Qm,pos positioned only on the first positive part. The third line is the represents the
distributed load Qm,pos divided between the first and second positive part and the unloading of the distributed
load Qb,neg that causes an important reduction of the overall effect in the summation of loaded parts. It can be
seen from the picture that the maximal effect is reached if the load is positioned only on positive or only on
negative parts of the influence line. Each of them results in an extreme. The critical position is therefore
determined separately for the positive and negative part.

Determining the maximal effect of concentrated forces

The definition says that in order to obtain the maximal effect of the load from the influence line in a fixed
section, the ordinate of the influence line in the x-coordinate is multiplied by the size of the load. In case of
simultaneous action of several loads, e.g. in a load group, the effect is obtained as a sum of each ordinate
value multiplied by the corresponding load size. The extreme can be both positive and negative. The
positioning of each load group depends on the number of load groups.

464
 Loads

One load group

In order to determine the position leading to the maximal effect of a group of concentrated forces, each force
from the given group is positioned into every intermediate point. It means that in some positions, a part of the
load group may be outside of the border of the structure.
Two load groups
For this configuration, the distance between the groups can be variable. In order to find out the critical position,
the minimal and maximal distance of load groups must be specified.
More than 2 load groups
For this configuration the distance between load groups is constant. The procedure applied is similar to one
load group.
Note: The critical position can be formed by a group when some loads are placed outside of the
structure. For the combination of asymmetrical loads, the program allows for motion of the mobile
loads in two opposite directions, so that the effect of the asymmetry can be taken into account.

Determining the maximal effect of the combination of distributed and

concentrated loads
The maximal effect of the combination of distributed load and concentrated load impulses is determined from
the maximal effect of the distributed load and from the maximal effect of the group of concentrated load
impulses.

Parameters used to determine the maximal effect

The following list describes all the parameters used for the calculation of the utilisation of influence line. Also
stated are the values prescribed in some national technical standards.
Reference point
The reference point of a load group for the determination of the position of a concentrated load impulse and for
the reduction of a distributed load.
Limited length of the motion (Limited run-length)
The limitation of the track in case that it is necessary to avoid the positioning of a part of a load group outside
of the track (outside of the structure).
Sign change
The position where the sign of the influence line changes (from positive to negative or vice versa).
Area of a region
The interval of an influence line where all the ordinate values are positive or negative.
Impact coefficient
The VOSB standard prescribes that each internal force and reaction for the position of a mobile load is
multiplied by this coefficient. The results of influence lines for deformations are not multiplied.
The same convention is applied for the dynamic coefficient in CSN 736203 and ENV 1991-3.
Mobile factor
The mobile factor is used for double and single mobile tracks or if only the main beam member of the structure
is taken into account. This coefficient is used to multiply all the results. There is no similar factor in CSN
736203, it is possible to use the value of 1.0.
Ordinate percentage
The coefficient for the reduction of the effect of a concentrated load impulse positioned on a negative part of
the influence line, so that the reduction of the determined maximum is prevented. If the zero (0) value is input,
the concentrated load impulses in the negative part are neglected completely. On the other hand, 100% means
that the loads on the negative part are not reduced at all.

Loading track
Defining a new track
Procedure to define a new track

465
Reference Guide

1. Open the branch of the main tree menu Mobile loads.

2. Start function New mobile load track.
3. Adjust its parameters in the property window.
4. Define the track.
5. End the function.
Mobile load track parameters
Name Specifies the name of the system.
Use for calculation If ON, the track is used for the calculation. Otherwise, it
is neglected.
Used nodes (informative) After the definition, it shows the overall
number of nodes of the track.

Editing the existing track

Procedure to edit the existing track
1. Select the required track (if the track is not displayed, use view parameters to make it visible).
2. You may change the parameters in the property window.

Deleting the existing track

Procedure to delete the existing track
1. Select the required track (if the track is not displayed, use view parameters to make it visible).
2. Press key [Del] or use pop-up menu function Delete or call menu function Modify > Delete to
remove the track.

Unit loads
Unit loads
Unit loads have meaning only for 3D structures where a motion of a loading vehicle acting in several tracks
parallel with the axis of the mobile track can be modelled. For 2D structures, one unit load represented by a
force Pz = -1.0 is predefined.
It is possible to set several unit loads for each track. Each impulse consists of unit loads and can be adjusted
in away so that it represents a multi-track truck. The unit load can act in the direction of individual axes of the
global coordinate system. It is for example possible to model a bridge by a small 2D system, but such a
solution makes it impossible to define a system of wheel-pairs (one next to another) of trucks or trains in a way
described in national standards.
It is possible to define a unit load that on a 3D structure acts in several tracks parallel to the defined mobile
load track (unit load along the width of a bridge). Certain standards use also a distributed load to model the
surface contact of wheels with the structure.

Unit loads manager

The Unit loads manager is a standard SCIA ESA PT database manager. It is operated in the usual way.
Parts of the Unit loads manager are:
 List of defined unit loads.
 Graphical window with a picture of the selected unit load.
 Preview window with the parameters of the unit load that is currently selected in the list.
 Control buttons – standard control buttons of the SCIA ESA PT database manager.
Procedure to open the Unit loads manager
1. Open service Mobile loads.
2. Call function Unit loads.

466
 Loads

3. The manager is opened on the screen.

Defining a new unit load

Procedure to define a new unit load
1. Open the Unit loads manager.
2. Press button [New] to create a new load.
3. Specify its parameters – see below.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Close the manager.
Parameters of unit loads
Name Name of the impulse.
Track assignment The track that is associated with the unit load.
Sections This parameter specifies the density of sections and
thus also the number of generated load cases for beam
members.
Use sections from results
The unit load is positioned into every section of a beam
member located on the mobile track.
Use step according to 2D element
The unit load is positioned with the step equal to the
value specified in the input box Step for 2D element. If
the structure contains beam members that are shorter
than this step, these beam members may not be
subjected to the unit load at all.
Generate at least one section on member
The unit load is positioned with the step equal to the
value specified in the input box Step for 2D element.
However, the unit load is positioned also on the beam
members that are shorter than this step.
Step for 2D element The size of the step for 2D elements. This parameter
specifies the density of evaluation points and thus also
the number of generated load cases for planar
members. The overall length of the track is divided by
this parameter and this quotient defines the number of
intermediate points where the mobile unit load impulse
is positioned.
A shorter step means more accurate results but longer
time of calculation.
Generate section under Load If ON, the section is generated under the defined load-
system system.
Add new impulse Adds a new unit impulse.

Impulse parameters
Type The load impulse may be: concentrated or uniform (i.e.
distributed).
Value The size of the impulse.
Default value = 1.0.
Position Position on the mobile track.
ey Eccentricity of the impulse.
ez Eccentricity of the impulse.
System Defines the coordinate system in which the impulse is
defined.

467
Reference Guide

Direction Direction of the impulse.

Load systems
Load systems
A mobile load system is composed of one or more load groups. For each group, a distributed load and several
concentrated load impulses can be defined. The distance between individual load impulses is fixed and is
defined relatively from a reference point. The distance between individual groups can be fixed or can vary to
simulate the real situation on a railway or highway bridge. The final purpose is to position the load systems into
such a position so that the produced effect on the structure is extreme.
The program first determines the influence lines for each effect, result or reaction for each section of a
structure element. Those influence lines, defined by an ordinate for a load position in regard with a fixed
section, are evaluated for all internal forces, reactions and deformations. For each influence line, the process
determines preponderant parameters like the position of the sign switching, that defines the positive, and the
negative part of the influence. For each field, the area under its curve is determined. The load system is now
placed (for a given section and a given effect) on the influence lines and is positioned until the extreme is
found.

Mobile load systems manager

Mobile load systems manager is a standard SCIA ESA PT database manager. It is operated in the usual way.
Parts of the Mobile load systems manager are:
 List of defined load systems
 Preview window with the parameters of the load system that is currently selected in the list.
 Graphical preview window showing the load system that is currently selected in the list.
 Control buttons – standard control buttons of the SCIA ESA PT database manager.

Simple load system

A simple load system is composed of one distributed load and one or more concentrated forces with fixed
distance between each other.
This load system is defined by means of the following parameters:
Name Specifies the name of the system.
100% ordinates of If this option is ON, the whole concentrated load above
concentrated load(s) the negative part of influence line is considered in the
calculation. Full load-release due to concentrated forces
happens.
Distributed load The size of the distributed load is input here.
Concentrated load A set of concentrated loads can be entered in this table.
The first column of the table contains the size of the
forces.
Offset This column defines the offset of the particular force
from the reference point – see the example below.

Note: Right click on the line number (in the table) opens a short pop-up menu that enables you
to (i) insert a new line into the table, (ii) delete the selected line from the table, or (iii) just clear the
contents of the selected line of the table.
Note: If required the whole table can be deleted (cleared) through the button [Del All] located below
the table.
Example
The following couple of pictures demonstrate the definition of a set of concentrated forces and their position.

468
 Loads

Advanced load system

An advanced load system may consist exclusively of distributed loads or it may be formed by a combination of
distributed loads and concentrated forces.
Name Specifies the name of the system.
Percentage ordinates This field defines the percentage of influence line ordinate that
will be used for concentrated loads positioned above the
negative part of the influence line.
Zero value means that the whole concentrated load is ignored in
the calculation of the sum of response.
100% means that the whole load is taken into account with the
negative sign.

Distributed load
There is a separate tab sheet for the definition of an advanced load system consisting exclusively of distributed
load.
Distributed load The size of the distributed load is input here.
Block load In the field you can input the value of the block load. The
purpose of the block is to have an easy way to define a group
composed of such a big amount of concentrated loads that it
can be consider a distributed load. During the calculation, the
block load is divided in 15 concentrated forces internally with the
corresponding decrease at the extremities.
Length of block load The length of the load block that will be divided into
15 concentrated forces.

Concentrated load

469
Reference Guide

Another tab sheet provides for the input of a load system that is formed by a combination of distributed loads
and concentrated forces.
Distributed load
Concentrated load
Offset
Number of groups
The size of the distributed load is input here.
A set of concentrated loads can be entered in this table. The
first column of the table contains the size of the forces.
This column defines the offset of the particular force from the
reference point – see the example below.
This value defines the number of groups of concentrated forces
in the load system. This parameter controls additional input
parameters.

Note: Right click on the line number (in the table) opens a short pop-up menu that enables you
to (i) insert a new line into the table, (ii) delete the selected line from the table, or (iii) just clear the
contents of the selected line of the table.
Note: If required the whole table can be deleted (cleared) through the button [Del All] located
below the table.

Additional input parameters for one (1) group of concentrated forces

Interrupt distributed
load on spot of
concentrated load
group
Interrupted load
Begin interruption
End interruption
If this option is ON, it is possible to input lower value of the
distributed load in the place where concentrated forces are
located.
The size of the distributed load in the place where concentrated
forces are located..
Beginning of the interval with reduced distributed load. The
position is defined as a distance from the reference point.
End of the interval with reduced distributed load. The position is
defined as a distance from the reference point.

Additional input parameters for two (2) groups of concentrated forces

A load system with two groups of loads is characterised by a variable distance between the load groups. The
system finds the critical distance that gives the maximal effect.
Minimum distance Minimal allowable distance of load groups.
between the load
groups
Maximum distance Maximal allowable distance of load groups.
between the load
groups
Mobile load The meaning of this parameter is similar to the Percentage
distributed between ordinates applied to concentrated forces.
the load groups In a simple load system consisting of one load group the
distributed load is divided into the positive and negative part of
the influence line in such a way that maximal effect is produced.
In case of advanced load system it is possible to input a
reduced distributed load between every positive or negative
span, which reduces the value of found maximum.

Additional input parameters for three (3) groups of concentrated forces

A load system with tree groups of loads is characterised by a fixed distance between individual load groups.
Distance between the The value defining the distance between adjacent groups of
load groups load in the load system.
Mobile load The meaning of this parameter is similar to the Percentage
distributed between ordinates applied to concentrated forces.
the load groups In a simple load system consisting of one load group the
distributed load is divided into the positive and negative part of

470
 Loads

the influence line in such a way that maximal effect is produced.

In case of advanced load system it is possible to input a
reduced distributed load between every positive or negative
span, which reduces the value of found maximum.

Defining a new load system

Procedure to define a new load system
1. Open the Mobile load systems manager using tree menu function Mobile loads > Load system
database.
2. Press button [New] to open the input dialogue.
3. Select either Simple load system or Advanced load system.
4. Input the parameters.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Repeat as many times as required.
7. Close the Mobile load systems manager.

Generated load cases

Theory
During the evaluation the influence lines of individual points of the track are evaluated for the result
components (e.g. My). The evaluation is carried out and the critical position of the load is determined. This
position causes maximal value of My in the section. The value is stored together with the corresponding values
of other components and another the evaluation continues with the next section.
Once the calculation is performed for each intermediate section, the envelope can be created. The system
then can create envelopes for other result components (e.g. Vy, Vz, etc.). It is important to bear in mind that
the envelope is not represented as an existing load case. It is a fictitious load case that generates the found
extremes. Therefore, it is of no meaning to use this envelope for e.g. the design of steel members.

Manager for generated load cases

The Manager for generated load cases is a standard SCIA ESA PT database manager. It is operated in the
usual way.
Parts of the Manager for generated load cases are:
 List of specified definitions.
 Preview window with the parameters of the definition that is currently selected in the list.
 Control buttons – standard control buttons of the SCIA ESA PT database manager.
Procedure to open the Manager for generated load cases
1. Open service Mobile loads.
2. Call function Setup generated load cases.
3. The manager is opened on the screen.

Specifying a new definition for generation of load cases

The calculation of utilisation using the envelopes is performed for the definitions of calculation of utilisation.
Each definition consists of a unit load and a load-system that moves along the influence lines from the
corresponding unit load. Several unit loads and several load-systems can be included into the definition. If so,
each of the included load-systems moves along all the unit loads.
Parameters of the definition
Name Specifies the name of the system.
Use for calculation If ON, the track is used for the calculation. Otherwise, it
is neglected.

471
Reference Guide

Select unit load Selects the required unit loads.

Select load-system Selects the required load-systems.

Limited running length

The evaluation process tries to find the most critical position of the mobile load on the structure. Sometimes
the extreme can be reached if the mobile load stays partly outside of the structure. This group of parameters
enables you to specify the part (interval) of the track where the mobile load can travel. This limitation can e.g.
prevent the load-system from leaving partly the structure.
The limitation of the track length is done in such a way that the values of influence lines outside of the specified
interval are considered as zero.
The starting point corresponds to the position of the most left concentrated load impulse in the load-system.
Similarly, the end point corresponds to the position of the most right in the group. The distributed load is
divided between the corresponding positive and negative spans of the influence line.
Enable If ON, the limited length of the track can be specified.
Start The beginning of the allowed "mobile" length.
Finish The end of the allowed "mobile" length.

Additional
Multiplication factor for
results except deformation
Mobile factor
The VOSB standard prescribes that each internal force
and reaction for the position of a mobile load is
multiplied by this coefficient. The results of influence
lines for deformations are not multiplied.
The same convention is applied for the dynamic
coefficient in CSN 736203 and ENV 1991-3.
See chapter Parameters used to determine the maximal
effect for related information.
The mobile factor is used for double and single mobile
tracks or if only the main beam member of the structure
is taken into account. This coefficient is used to multiply
all the results.
There is no similar factor in CSN 736203, it is possible
to use the value of 1.0.
See chapter Parameters used to determine the maximal
effect for related information.

Selection of members
All members If ON, all members are taken into account.
If OFF, manual selection of members must be made.
Selection Available only if the above option is OFF.
Opens a dialogue for manual selection of required
members.

Components
Select components Opens a dialogue for manual selection of required
components.
List of available components The required components can also be selected directly
in the main dialogue.

472
 Loads

Calculation and evaluation

Calculation and evaluation procedure
Several steps must be made in order to perform the calculation and design of a structure where standard loads
(wind, snow, etc.) are combined with mobile load.
Step 1: The definition of a structure + self-weight
Input the structure and at least one load case of self-weight type.
Step 3: The definition of a mobile load
Define one or more tracks in the project.
Step 3: The generation of influence lines
Run the linear calculation.
Step 4: The display of the influence lines in specified sections
The influence lines created by a move of a unit load along the structure are stored for each internal force,
reaction and deformation component in each fixed section of the structure. The influence lines can be viewed
in the tree menu Mobile loads > Influence lines.
Step 5: The definition of a load system representing the mobile load
Define a simple or advanced load system that represents the intended mobile load. Use the tree menu function
Mobile loads > Load system database.
Step 6: The determination of the critical position of the mobile load, i.e. the position where the maximal
effect is reached
As soon as the mobile load is defined, the calculation of the utilisation of influence lines can be performed. Use
the required function from the branch of the tree menu Mobile loads > Detail analysis to generate envelopes
of all found extremes in all sections.
Step 7: The combination with standard load cases
Once the calculation of influence lines has been performed, it is possible to combine the results of influence
lines with the results of standard load cases acting on the structure. Create load case combinations consisting
of generated "mobile" load case(s) and standard load case(s). Use service Results to view the result values.
Note: The list of load cases (in the Load case manager, in the dialogue for the definition of a
load case combination and also in the available load cases for the display of results) contains the
load cases that have been automatically generated and added during the evaluation of influence
lines. You must bear in mind that these envelopes only represent the found extremes and not the
positioned load system. These loading envelopes can only be considered as a result of action of a
virtual loading (load whose effect is the envelope). Therefore, it is unsuitable to use these
envelopes for the design and checking of steel members in the structure.

Calculating the influence lines

Before the calculation of influence lines can be performed, the following step must be completed:
 the project must be created and also at least the self-weigh load case must be defined,
 at least one mobile load track must be defined,
 unit load representing the loading impulse moving along the track must be defined.
Run normal linear calculation. When it is done the service Mobile loads offers the calculated influence lines.
The evaluation is described in chapter Reviewing the calculated influence lines.
Further information can be found in chapter Calculation and evaluation procedure .

Reviewing the calculated influence lines

Once the influence lines have been calculated, it is possible to view and analyse them.
Procedure to review the calculated influence lines
1. Perform the calculation following the instructions from chapter Calculating the influence lines.
2. Open service Mobile loads.
3. In the branch Influence line select the required result quantity: (i) deformation on members, (ii)
internal forces on members, (iii) deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v) member stresses.

473
Reference Guide

4. In the property window select the unit load for which the results should be analysed.
5. Either use action button [Single check] to view the results for a single member – see below for
details.
6. Or use action button [Preview] to view the results for selected members in the tabular form in the
Preview window – see below for details.

Single check – reviewing the influence lines for a single member

This function opens a specialised dialogue for the display of all available influence lines from the selected
group ((i) deformation on members, (ii) internal forces on members, (iii) deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v)
member stresses).
The dialogue consists of a graphical window and a few controls.
Graphical window
It displays the selected influence line in the defined scale. Basic zoom functions are accessible via the pop-up
menu. The left-mouse button can be pressed and hold the mouse can be moved to define a window for zoom-
window function.
It is important to know that the x-axis of the diagram shows the "unrolled" or "straightened" mobile load track. It
means that for non-straight tracks, the actual length of the track is shown.
Description of
This control defines the density of numerical values attached to the displayed influence line
 Extremes: Only extremes are depicted.
 All: All calculated values of the influence line are depicted.
 All + number: Each n-th value is depicted.
1D macro / Support / Node / 2D macro
(informative) It shows the number of the evaluated member / entity.
Section
(available only for beam members) Each influence line is related to a fixed point. This input box specifies the
position of the evaluated section, i.e. the position where the unit load is located. When you enter the value,
press button [Redraw].
Position
These input boxes are accessible for evaluation of influence lines for 2D members. They specify the
coordinates of the evaluated point. When you enter the value, press button [Redraw].
Type
Depending on the selected group ((i) deformation on members, (ii) internal forces on members, (iii)
deformation of nodes, (iv) supports, (v) member stresses) you can choose which quantity you are interested in.
Multiplication factor
The calculated ordinates of the influence line are multiplied by this factor before they are displayed in the
graphical window.
Note: This value may be of great importance especially for displacements and rotations. These
values may be very small and considered "zero" by the program. Therefore they may not be
displayed until a reasonable multiplication factor is input.
Button [Redraw]
This button regenerates the contents of the graphical window.
Note: The graphical window is always redrawn with the function "Zoom All". If you have adjusted
a detail before the regeneration and want to see it again, you must define the detail once again.
Button [To Document]
This button puts the selected influence line in tabular form into the document.

Calculating the utilisation of influence lines

Once the influence lines have been calculated, it is possible to evaluate the utilisation of mobile load and
combine the results with other load cases. The following must be done:
The definition of a load-system

474
 Loads

Define a simple or advanced load system that represents the intended mobile load. Use the tree menu function
Mobile loads > Load system database.
The calculation of the project
Run the linear calculation.
The combination with standard load cases
Activate the generation of load cases that correspond to calculated critical positions. These load cases may be
further combined with standard load cases.
Evaluation
Run the linear calculation to calculate the newly created load cases combined with the standard ones and
perform the evaluation of the model using service Results.

Evaluating the utilisation

Procedure to evaluate the utilisation
1. Perform the calculation following the steps described in chapter Calculating the utilisation of
influence lines.
2. Open service Results.
3. Select the required function to see and evaluate the results.
Note: The list of load cases (in the Load case manager, in the dialogue for the definition of a
load case combination and also in the available load cases for the display of results) contains the
load cases that have been automatically generated and added during the evaluation of influence
lines.

475
Masses
Introduction to masses
Masses represent a kind of load that is used with dynamic analysis. The mass then models the effect of some
real load. The real load is idealised and introduced in the form of a material point, i.e. mass.
To some extent, the masses are analogous to loads and mass groups are analogous to load cases.

Mass types
Point mass
Point mass represents a mass concentrated into a single point. It may be considered as analogous to point
load. Point mass may be positioned into a node or into an intermediate point of a beam member.

point mass in a node point mass on a beam member

Line mass
Line mass represents a mass concentrated into a line. It may be considered as analogous to line load.

477
Reference Guide

Defining a mew mass

Defining a new point mass in node
The procedure for the definition of a new point mass in a node
1. Open tree menu function Dynamics > Masses > Mass in node.
2. Specify the parameters of the mass:
a. weight,
b. mass moments of inertia.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select nodes where the mass should act.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new point mass on a beam member

The procedure for the definition of a new point mass on a beam member
1. Open tree menu function Dynamics > Masses > Mass on beam.
2. Specify the parameters of the mass:
a. weight,
b. position of the mass on a beam member,
c. number of repetitions.
3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select beam members where the mass should act.
5. Close the function.

Defining a new line mass on a beam member

The procedure for the definition of a new line mass on a beam member
1. Open tree menu function Dynamics > Masses > Line mass on beam.
2. Specify the parameters of the mass:
a. type of the mass distribution (uniform or trapezoidal),
b. weight,

478
 Masses

c. position on a beam member.

3. Confirm the settings with [OK] button.
4. Select beam members where the mass should act.
5. Close the function.

Modifying the existing mass

Editing the existing mass
Mass is a standard SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports or loads, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for the modification of mass is therefore identical to the procedure for the modification of model data
(e.g. supports, etc.).

Moving the existing mass

Mass is a standard SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports or loads, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for move of mass is therefore identical to the procedure for move of model data (see chapter Model
data > Modifying the existing model data > Moving the model data).

Copying the existing mass

Mass is a normal SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports or loads, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for copying of mass is therefore identical to the procedure for copying of model data (see chapter
Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Copying the model data).

Deleting the existing mass

Mass is a normal SCIA.ESA PT’s entity. Therefore, it can be modified in the same way as other entity types.
What’s more, similarly to e.g. supports or loads, it belongs to Additional data of the SCIA.ESA PT project. The
procedure for removal of mass is therefore identical to the procedure for removal of model data (see chapter
Model data > Modifying the existing model data > Deleting the model data).

Mass groups
Introduction to mass groups
Mass groups are analogous to load cases. Individual masses may be combined in mass groups and later
combinations of these mass groups may be created.

Mass group manager

The Mass group manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manager. It provides for basic operations with mass
groups.
The Mass group manager can be opened:
 using tree menu function Dynamics > Mass group.

Defining a new mass group

The procedure for the definition of a new mass group
1. Open the Mass group manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. A new mass group is created.
4. Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.

479
Reference Guide

5. Input the required values for individual mass group parameters.

6. Confirm with button [OK].
7. If required, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. Close the Mass group manager.

Defining the mass group parameters

In the editing dialogue, parameters of a particular mass group may be edited.
Load case Here, the user may select a load case that should be used for
an automatic generation of masses.
Create masses from This button tells the program to generate masses from all load
load case defined in the load case specified above.

A few notes concerning the generation of masses from load case

Mass from self-weight is created EVERY TIME and is NOT displayed.
Masses from other load cases are generated on pressing button [Create masses from load case] from the
load case adjusted in the dialogue.
They are created only once! (If the button is pressed again for the same load case, nothing happens).
On the other hand, it is possible to add masses from different load cases. Or more precisely, masses are
added according to the following criterion: if a mass has been already created from a force in a node, no other
mass (created) from a force is added to this particular node, even though the force is (created) from another
load case.
The mass remains unchanged after any modification or removal of the originan force. If the mass is supoosed
to correspond to the modified force, it is necessary to remove the mass and create it once more.
The mass is generated ONLY from vertical force component – horizontal forces would create no mass at all.
Conversion formula used: m * g = F (default value is g = 9.81).
The display of masses in controlled by a separate view parameter (pop-up menu function Set view
parameters/all) and is independent on the displayed load case.
Masses are also displayed (by default setting) in the service Masses. Therefore is probably the best approach
to generate masses from withing this servise.
The calculation module concentrates masses into nodes, therefore finer mesh is requierd. For example, part of
the mass in a node with support "will disappear" (produces no response). If the mesh is fine enough, this
arrangement has no negative influence on the accuracy of results. However, apparent irregularities may
appear if coarse mesh is used and the user wants to compare the results of this rough calculation with
manually obtained values.

Example
Below there are two pictures. The first one with line loads defined. The other one then demonstrates the
masses generated automatically from that load.

480
 Masses

Combinations of mass groups

Introduction to combinations of mass groups
Mass groups defined in the project can be combined in mass group combinations. The combinations then can
be used for evaluation of results.

Mass group combination manager

The Mass group combination manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manager. It provides for basic
operations with combinations of mass groups.
The Mass group combination manager can be opened:
 using tree menu function Dynamics > Combination of mass group.

481
Construction stages, prestressing, TDA
Introduction
Modern civil engineering structures can achieve considerable economy in construction by combination of
hybrid systems of steel and concrete or precast and cast-in-place concrete. The design of such systems takes
advantage of individual material properties. The economy and speed of construction are increased also by the
application of hybrid methods of construction. The main load-bearing members, formed by suspension or stay
cables, hangers, beam members or arches, are very often constructed in advance and are used as auxiliary
systems for other parts of the structure to reduce overall construction time and costs. The design of the
structures combines both precast and cast-in-place techniques to obtain economy in construction, and
maintains a high standard of quality while reducing the time needed to complete the construction.
During the construction these structures pass through different static systems; boundary conditions change,
new structural members are assembled or cast, post-tensioning is applied and temporary support elements are
removed. In many structures concrete structural elements of various ages are combined and the concrete is
gradually loaded. Therefore, during both construction and throughout the service life of concrete structures,
account must be taken of the creep and shrinkage of concrete. Rheological properties of concrete can
influence the serviceability of the structure in decisive ways. The bearing capacity of the structure can also be
influenced by the redistribution of internal forces caused by creep. Therefore sophisticated methods are
needed for the structural analysis.
Construction stages, Prestressing, and TDA are modules of ESA PT designed for the analysis of
prestressed concrete and composite structures with respect to step-by-step construction, change of boundary
conditions, and rheological effects of concrete. The modules allow for the structural analysis of both
prestressed concrete and composite structures, successive assembling or casting of structural elements,
progressive construction of cross-sections, gradual application of loads and prestressing, and removal of
temporary structural elements. Special construction technologies can be modelled, such as cantilever
segmental construction with both precast and cast-in-place segments, launching, cable stayed structures,
making simple beam members continuous including successive casting of composite slab, or gradual
construction of multi-storey buildings.
The implementation of these modules is the first step towards the change of design and analysis of concrete
structures in ESA PT. But the possibility to run the calculation in smooth sequence with respect to the step-by-
step construction or the introduction of time as new variable in the analysis are not the only two aspects of the
issue. Also new material parameters - rheological properties of concrete – are taken into account in the
calculation and a new feature of a real value is that the program responds to modern concepts of the analysis
of prestressing in theory of structures. The post-tensioned tendon is considered only as an external load at the
moment of prestressing. This load is calculated as the load, which is equivalent to the effects of the tendon
stressed just after short-term losses. The tendon becomes an integral part of the structure after anchoring. Its
stiffness is added into the stiffness matrix of the structure. Since that, all loads carried by the structure will
automatically cause the change of prestressing of that tendon. Both tendons and composite parts of cross-
section are modelled by eccentric finite elements. Full strain compatibility between eccentric elements
connecting two nodes is ensured along the whole length of elements. The TDA module in ESA PT allows for a
new structural model of so far unattainable quality.

Note: Each of the three mentioned modules can be used separately (e.g. module Prestressing
in linear analysis, Construction stages for the analysis of 3D steel frame structure, etc.). However
the user loses some of the features in such situation. Therefore, also the descriptions of these three
modules will contain frequent links to other modules from this "little-family".

Use of post-tensioned tendons (including free tendons and cables of suspension bridges) without
construction stages
When a linear calculation is performed, the stiffness of elements of post-tensioned tendons is not added to the
stiffness matrix for any analysed load case. The linear calculation does not make it possible to assemble two
stiffness matrices of the structure for the solution of the system, i.e. to create two left-hand sides.
Consequently, it means that we assume as if all loads (load cases) were applied in the instant of prestressing
when the prestressing force is being introduced into the tendon. It means that, for example, a load case
containing a uniformly distributed load applied to the main beam of a suspension bridge completely ignores the
free tendons – the deck deforms and the tendons remains unstressed – the force in the tendon in the
corresponding combination is equal just to the prestressing force.
The use of prestressing is thus limited to construction stages calculations and the simplification to a linear
calculation may in many projects result in incorrect results.

483
Reference Guide

Brief introduction to construction stages

Module Construction stages allows for general modelling of the construction process. In combination with the
TDA module the analysis also takes account of time as a new input variable. For the purpose of the time
dependent calculation a global, local and detailed time axis is introduced and individual time nodes are
generated. The over-time development and changes in the structure, cross-sections or loading, though, are
modelled via individual "stages of construction", where each of these stages is given a number, name and
global time.
The responses (results) of the loading increments are saved into separate loading cases separately for the
effect of the permanent loading increment, prestressing, and the sum of the rheology effects during the
previous time interval.

Brief introduction to prestressing

The module Prestressing allows for the analysis of pre-tensioned beam members. Furthermore, it is possible
to calculate and show the short-term losses.
The data defining the location and shape of strands or wires are then used during the structural analysis for the
automatic generation of the finite elements of the structural model and the calculation of its equivalent load
including the short-term losses.
To sum up, the module Prestressing enables you to analyse the effects of prestressing for 2D. It can be used
for the linear analysis of the final stage of the structure. When combined with the module Construction stages
it is also possible to model the stepwise prestressing during the assembly of the structure. When also
combined with the module TDA one can respect the impact of the rheology of concrete.
However, the module TDA can solve 2D frame structures (project type Frame XZ) only.

Brief introduction to TDA

Module TDA allows for the time dependent analysis of prestressed concrete, but also composite 2D frame
structures, while taking into account the defined stages of construction, creep, shrinkage, and ageing of
concrete. The method used for the time-dependent analysis is based on a step-by-step procedure in which the
time domain is subdivided by time nodes. The finite element analysis is performed in each time node. Linear
ageing viscoelastic theory is applied for the creep analysis.
Due to symmetry of the long-term loads both the structure and the load can be adequately modelled in a
vertical plane. On that account the plane frame structural model is used. The finite elements on eccentricity
represent e.g. the concrete box girder (or separately concrete webs and layers of deck), prestressed tendons,
diaphragms, piers, temporary anchoring ties, non-prestressed reinforcement, etc. All operations in the
construction are respected in the structural analysis according to the real production schedule. The elements
are installed or removed according to the way of construction. Various operations used in the construction
such as addition or removal of segments and prestressed tendons, changes of boundary conditions, loads and
prescribed displacements may be modelled.
The prestressed tendons are assumed also as eccentric finite elements. When they are initially stressed, only
load terms of the tendons are included in the global equilibrium equations. After anchoring also the stiffness of
the tendon is considered. Both, the bonded and unbonded tendons may be modelled. The long-term losses
are automatically included in the analysis. If any element is removed or boundary condition is changed, the
internal forces of the element and the appropriate reaction are automatically added to the load vector
increment.
The total strain of concrete at the time t is subdivided into three parts: (t) is the stress-produced strain, s(t)
the shrinkage and T(t) is the thermal expansion. Neither shrinkage nor thermal strains are stress-dependent.
The shrinkage of structural members is predicted through the mean properties of a given cross-section taking
into account the average relative humidity and member size. The stress-produced strain consists of elastic
instantaneous strain e(t) and creep strain c(t). The development of modulus of elasticity over time due to
ageing is respected. The creep prediction model is based on the assumption of linearity between stresses and
strains to assure the applicability of linear superposition. The numerical solution is based on the replacement
of Stieltjes hereditary integral by a finite sum. The general creep problem is thus converted to a series of
elasticity problems. The creep calculation is also based on the mean properties of a given cross-section. The
creep, shrinkage and ageing effects may be taken into account according to design recommendations
EUROCODE 2, CSN 73 1201 and CSN 73 6207 (Czech codes). The method respects stress history, does not
require any iteration in single step and does not restrict the type of creep function.

484
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Implementation of construction stages and TDA

Time Dependent Analysis (TDA) is closely linked to the Analysis of Construction Stages (ACS) in ESA
PT. The difference is that the rheological effects are not considered in ACS. On the other hand "the load-case"
and "the combination of load-cases" are the basic "building units" for both TDA and ACS. ACS in fact runs
independently on time. It is only a matter of form that each stage is linked to some time node.
The increments of dead load in each building stage (construction or service) and the results (the increments of
internal forces and deformations caused by this load) are stored in separate load-cases. This load is assumed
to be present (applied on the structure) until infinite time. The unloading must be modelled as a new load with
opposite sign. For example - the total internal forces in existing structural members caused by dead loads after
third building stage are obtained as the results of the combination of three appropriate load-cases. A load-case
representing the life load can be added to this combination.
If any prestressing is applied in the building stage, additional permanent load-case must be applied. Then two
permanent load-cases are defined in one building stage – one for the dead load and one for prestressing. The
user is not allowed to add loads to prestressing load-case.
One additional (empty) load-case is generated automatically in each building stage in TDA analysis. These
load-cases are used for storing of the increments of internal forces and deformations caused by creep and
shrinkage calculated during passed time interval. They are marked as creep-loadcases in ESA PT.

Modulus of elasticity changing over time

SCIA ESA PT enables the users to apply several approaches when analysing construction stages:
• Use the standard solver and calculate the construction stages without any effect of time. Only a sequence of
individual models was analysed and the internal forces changed according to changing boundary conditions.
• Use TDA (Time Dependent Analysis) calculation in which the full process of aging is taken into account,
including relaxation of the reinforcement, creep and shrinkage of concrete.
• Use the standard solver, but consider the change of modulus of elasticity (E) over time, i.e. aging of material,
through a diagram that defines the changes of the modulus of elasticity over time (E-modulus diagram).

The latter can be equally applied to both frame and plate-wall structures.
In one project, the user may define several E-modulus diagrams. It is even possible that each material used in
the project has its own E-modulus diagram. The E-modulus diagrams can be assigned to all or just some
materials used in the project.

The procedure to use E modulus functions in the calculation

There are several prerequisites that must be met to allow for the calculation with changing E modulus.

Note: The procedure listed below is not a complete tutorial. It just emphasises operations that
must be done in addition to standard steps that are done during the preparation and analysis of a
structure.

The project must be of "Construction stages" type.

1. Open function Project from the main tree menu.
2. Set item Model to Construction stages.
3. Confirm with [OK].
The E modulus option must be selected in the Construction stages Setup dialogue
1. Open service Construction stages.
2. Start function Setup.
3. Set the Type option to E modulus function.
4. Confirm with [OK].
The E modulus function(s) must be defined
1. Open E modulus function manager:
a. Use menu function Libraries > E modulus function,
b. Use tree menu function Library > E modulus function.
2. Click button [New] to input a new E modulus function.

485
Reference Guide

3. Define individual points of the function.

4. Confirm with [OK].
5. If required, repeat for as many E modulus functions as needed.
6. Close the manager.
Required materials must have the corresponding the E modulus function assigned
1. Open Material manager:
a. Use menu function Libraries > Materials,
b. Use tree menu function Library > Materials.
2. The list of material characteristics contains one additional item: E modulus function (Unless the
option E modulus function is adjusted in the Construction stages setup, this item is not
available).
3. Select the required material.
4. Select the appropriate E modulus function.
5. Repeat for as many materials as required.
6. Close the Material manager.
The Construction stages analysis must be run
1. Open the FE analysis dialogue:
a. Use menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > calculation,
b. Use tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > calculation.
2. Select Construction stage analysis option.
3. Start the calculation with [OK].

Note: Make sure that Beam settings and global time adjustments in individual construction
stages correspond with the time used for the definition of the E modulus functions.

Application in your design practice

Invitation: Modules Construction stages, Prestressing, and especially TDA are very powerful
tools, regardless of whether used separately or combined together. They all require a certain level
of professional expertise and advanced experience with ESA PT in general. It is therefore
recommended to arrange a specialised training with SCIA technical support department in order to
understand properly the general principles, main features, overall capabilities and practical
application of these modules. Please call your local dealer to obtain more information.

References
[1] Navrátil J.: Time-dependent Analysis of Concrete Frame Structures (in Czech), Stavebnicky casopis, 7 (40),
1992, pp. 429-451
[2] CEB-FIP Model Code 1990, Final Draft 1991, BULLETIN D’INFORMATION No 203, Comite Euro-
International Du Beton, Lausane, 1990.
[3] Navrátil, J.: Predpjaté betonové konstrukce [Prestressed concrete structures] (in Czech), Akademické
nakladatelství CERM, s.r.o., Brno, 2004.

Preparatory operations
Input of geometry and other data
Prior to input of data related directly to the Time Dependent Analysis or Analysis of Construction Stages,
certain preparatory operations have to be done. All structural members, prestressed members, boundary
conditions and loads, which will ever appear in the structure, must be defined in advance. After their definition,
all elements, tendons, supports, etc. will be gradually "inserted" into the structure in the Construction stages
module. The input of members, nodes, supports and loads is performed in the standard ESA PT environment.

486
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Adjustment of parameters
It is necessary to input some specific data for a TDA analysis or ACS (Analysis of Construction Stages)
analysis. These data can be input in one setup dialogue. This dialogue contains item for both TDA and
Construction stages analysis. In addition, a few other parameters for mesh generation, calculation, materials,
etc. must be set in a specific way.
Individual parameters are described in separate chapters dealing with:
 Construction stages setup,
 TDA setup,
 Mesh and calculation setup,
 Material setup.

Note: The TDA part of the setup dialogue is available ONLY if TDA module is available, i.e. if
e.g. the project is of Frame XZ type.

Construction stages
Creating a Construction stages project
If you want to perform an analysis of construction stages, you must make appropriate settings in the Project
Setup dialogue on the Basic data tab:
 Select Construction stages in the Model combo box,

Construction stages setup

The Setup dialogue for Construction stages enables you to input the default values of the parameters that
appear in the input dialogues for individual construction stages.
Load factors
Permanent (long-term) Gamma min Gamma max are attached to permanent load
load case cases of both types – load (G) and prestress (P). The load
factors Gmin(<=1), Gmax(>=1), Pmin(<=1), Pmax(>=1) are
specified (for each load case) in each construction (or service)
stage. If long-term variable load is selected in the combo box
Permanent or long-term loads, only maximum factor Qmax is
asked, because Qmin is automatically taken as zero (when all
variable load is removed). At the same time additional factor
<1 will appear.
Prestressed load case See above.
Long-term part of Factor specifies the long-term part of the load. If the dead,
variable load prestressing or variable LC is applied in a construction stage, it
can never be applied again (exclusivity), because the
configuration of the structure could be changed in next
construction steps and the results would be different.

Results
Name of generated
ultimate combination
(max)
Name of generated
ultimate combination
(min)
Name of generated
serviceability
combination
Specifies the mask for the automatic generation of names of
maximal load case combinations.
Specifies the mask for the automatic generation of names of
minimal load case combinations.
Specifies the mask for the automatic generation of names of
serviceability load case combinations.

487
Reference Guide

Note: Concerning the generated names of load case combinations, the sequence {O} is
substituted with the appropriate number during the generation of the combinations. For example,
the combination name mask F{O}-MAX gives combinations named F1-MAX, F2-MAX, F3-MAX, etc.
Note: This very same dialogue may also contain parameters for TDA. These TDA parameters
are available only in a project that supports time dependent analysis. See also TDA setup.

Procedure to adjust Construction stages parameters

1. Open the service Construction stages.
2. Start function Setup.
3. Input the required parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Close the Setup dialogue.

Construction stages manager

The Construction stages manager enables you to input, review, copy, print and delete individual construction
stages. It is a standard SCIA ESA PT database manager.
Procedure to open the Construction stages manager
1. The project must be of Construction stages type.
2. In the main tree menu open service Construction stages.
3. At the top part of the service dialogue click the "dot"-button.
4. The manager is opened on the screen.
5. The Construction stages manager opens automatically when you open the service for the first
time.

Note: When a new construction stage is created, the parameters are set to values defined in the
Construction stages setup.

Creating a new construction stage

Procedure to create a new construction stage
Open the Construction stages manager.
Click button [New].
If no suitable load case is available, you are asked to create one.
A new construction stage is added to the list.
Click button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
Fill in the parameters (see below).
Confirm with [OK].
Close the Construction stages manager.
Parameters of a construction stage

Name Defines the name of the stage.

Order of stage (informative) Gives the sequence number of the stage.

Description Contains a short description of the construction stage. It is

useful to say in a few words what happens in the current
construction stage. The comment helps the user to keep clear
image of the construction process. The name is also used in the
generated names of result classes and generated load case
combinations. E.g. for combinations, this description is the only
unambiguous identifier of the generated load case
combinations.
Note: It is highly recommended to use this field.

488
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Global time Global time in days. This time will be assigned to all actions of
the current stage. The global time must be greater than the
global time of the previous stage and lower than the global time
of the next stage.
Number of The number of subintervals on the detail time axis. The
subintervals subintervals following the first time subinterval are generated in
log scale. This parameter has an impact on the accuracy of
solution of concrete creep.
See also Time axis.
Ambient humidity Ambient moisture in percentages.

Last construction Defines, whether the current stage is the last construction stage.
stage If ON, then the next construction stage is the first service stage.
The user cannot change the structure from that time, but he can
add dead load and variable load (no prestressing!). Therefore
no changes in configuration of the structure (changes of cross-
section, prestressing, etc.) are possible in service stages.
If a variable load is assigned to a construction stage before
(including) the last construction stage, it is "consumed" and
cannot be used again in another construction stage. If a variable
load is assigned to a service stage (i.e. into a stage following
after the last construction stage), it can be reused freely in
another construction stage.
Load case Selects the load case that is assigned to the construction stage.
Note: Read the comment below the table.
Gamma min, Load factors.
Gamma max Note: Read the comment below the table.
Psi Factor for variable load.
Note: Read the comment below the table.
Variable load cases Allows for input of a variable load case into the construction
stage.
Note: Read the comment below the table.

Load case permanent or long-term

A load case of type permanent or self-weight must be defined and assigned to a construction stage. One load
case of this type must be exclusively assigned to each stage. The load case may be empty. As mentioned
above, the load case applied in a construction (or service) stage can be of two types: permanent or self-weight.
The input of a permanent load is done by standard way, but concerning the self-weight, there are two
possibilities of the input.
(1) First possibility is via permanent loads. The self-weight of the beam member is calculated by the user in
advance and is specified as a uniform or trapezoidal load distributed along the length of the beam member.
This method can be used in combination with other permanent loads, e.g. the self-weight of diaphragms,
surfacing, etc. The self-weight of the beam member can be applied in any construction stage (at any time)
independently from the time of installation of this beam member. Therefore the input of the permanent load is
not tied up with the beam members or composite parts of beam members added at the current (active)
construction stage.
(2) Second possibility of the input of own weight can be applied only on beam members added at the current
(active) construction stage on added composite parts of beam members. The appropriate load case must be of
"self weight " type. No input of other loads is possible in such a load case. Therefore, if the "self-weight" load
case is specified in current construction stage, only an increment of structural own weight is applied. The
increment is defined as the self-weight of that part of the structure (structural elements or their composite
parts) that is installed in the current construction stage.
The two approaches will be demonstrated on a simple example.
Example: Introduction of self-weight into the model

489
Reference Guide

Let’s assume a beam of a T-cross-section that is made in two phases: (i) core cross-section, (ii) composite
slab.

The cross-section consists of two stages: 1 = the "core" beam, 2 = the composite slab.
We’ll describe three model situations, two of which employ the first approach (user-calculated permanent load)
and one of which uses the second one.
We do not say which situation is better and which one is worse, we just describe them here to explain the
consequences of different approaches. It is up to the user to decide which procedure of modelling best reflects
the unique conditions of a particular project.
Situation A (user-calculated self-weight)

Stage Action Load case assigned to

1 casting the beam (phase 1 of the cross-
section is introduced into the model)
2 casting the composite slab (phase 2 of
the cross-section is introduced into the
model)
3 introduction of the manually calculated
self weight
construction stage
empty permanent-standard load
case
empty permanent-standard load
case
permanent-standard load case
with defined load that represents
the self-weight of the beam
member

In this situation, the user is fully responsible for the introduction of the self-weight into the model. On the other
hand, the process is fully under his/her control. First, the "core" beam is produced. Then, the composite slab is
cast. And only at the very end, the self-weight is introduced in its full size. To sum up, until the composite beam
is completed, it is not subject to any load.
Situation B (user-calculated self-weight)

Stage Action Load case assigned to

1 casting the beam (phase 1 of the cross-
section is introduced into the model)
2 introduction of the manually calculated
self weight
3 casting the composite slab (phase 2 of
the cross-section is introduced into the
model)
construction stage
empty permanent-standard load
case
permanent-standard load case
with defined load that represents
the self-weight of the beam
member
empty permanent-standard load
case

Once again, in this situation, the user is fully responsible for the introduction of the self-weight into the model.
First, the "core" beam is made and is subjected to no load. Then the self-weight is introduced in its full size.
Finally, the composite slab is cast. To sum up, the "core" beam is subjected to the self-weight of the whole
cross-section before the composite slab is made.
Situation C (automatically calculated self-weight)

490
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Stage Action Load case assigned to

construction stage
1 casting the beam (phase 1 of the cross- permanent-self-weight load case
section is introduced into the model)
2 casting the composite slab (phase 2 of permanent-self-weight load case
the cross-section is introduced into the
model)

In this situation, the self-weight is introduced automatically and in parts. First, the core beam is cast and is
automatically subjected to the self-weight of the completed part of the cross-section, i.e. of the "core" beam.
When the composite slab is made, its self-weight is calculated and added to the existing self-weight of the
"core" beam.
Conclusion
It is clearly seen from this very simple example that the calculation stages analysis allows for almost
innumerable possibilities. The user must therefore think in advance and must be aware of (i) what he/she
wants to model and (ii) what he/she in fact created.
Note: If the Construction stages module is combined with TDA module, other possibilities
open. E.g. it is possible to model casting on a formwork (so that even the situation C does not result
in the instant introduction of the self-weight), removal of the formwork in a specified time (and
possible simultaneous introduction of the self-weight), etc.
Prestressing
One load case (type permanent - prestress) can be specified and assigned to the current stage. Each of the
"permanent – prestress" loadcases is again exclusively assigned to one construction stage.
Gamma min Gamma max
Load factors Gamma min Gamma max are attached to permanent load cases of both types – load (G) and
prestress (P). The load factors Gmin(<=1), Gmax(>=1), Pmin(<=1), Pmax(>=1) are specified (for each load case)
in each construction (or service) stage. If a long-term variable load is selected in the combo box Load case
permanent or long-term, only maximum factor Qmax is asked, because Qmin is automatically taken as zero
(when all variable load is removed). At the same time additional factor <1 appears. Factor specifies the
long-term part of the load. If a permanent, prestressing or variable LC is applied in a construction stage, it can
never be applied again (exclusivity), because the configuration of the structure could be changed in next
construction steps and the results would be different.
In fact, no load factors are applied in TDA calculation (creep analysis) itself. Therefore, the results of creep
load cases that are generated by TDA will also have no load factors included in themselves (better said load
factor equals to 1.0). After the calculation has been performed, both SLS and ULS combinations are generated
automatically. For ULS combinations all factors for dead load G, prestressing P, quasi-permanent Q load, and
creep C are applied using both their maximum (>=1) and minimum (<=1) values.
All combinations required by the codes (for EC2 persistent and transient, accidental, seismic, rare, frequent,
quasi-permanent) must be defined manually as "envelope combinations".
Two types of variable load can be applied in service stages: short-term load case and long-term load case
(quasi-permanent). This classification has no connection to types of load cases specified elsewhere in ESA
PT. Therefore, the long-term variable load case is identified only by specifying the long-term part of the load
(using coefficient 0    1). The long-term part of the load is then used for creep analysis in TDA. Quasi-
permanent load is applied together with other loads at specified service stage in TDA. Once the long-term load
case is applied, it can never be applied again, because the quasi-permanent part () of the load will be applied
in TDA and it will cause an additional creep of concrete. The quasi-permanent part () of the load case is
assumed to stay on the structure until the end of its service life. The results of long-term load cases are also
calculated by standard ESA and they are applied (by zero or full value) in all combinations generated for this
and following service stages. It means, it is assumed that the quasi-permanent part of variable load can be
removed from the structure (or variable load can be applied by its full value) for short time (with no influence on
creep). The long-term load cases cannot be applied in construction stages (only in service stages).
Variable load cases
Variable loads (instantaneous and short-term) can be added into current stage. It is possible to add an
arbitrary amount of load cases defined in advance. The load defined in this dialog is assumed to be temporary
one and is not taken to TDA analysis. Once the variable load case is applied in construction stage, it must be
copied into new load case before it can be used in some other construction stage. We have to realize, that the
results of the same load can be different for different construction stages, because the configuration of the
structure changes. Starting from first service stage the short-term load case can be applied repeatedly,
because the structure does not change during service, and the response (results) are identical for all service

491
Reference Guide

stages. The short-term load cases are calculated by standard ESA PT with no influence of age of concrete,
and with all materials at age of 28 days.

Defining the changes to the structural scheme

Before construction stages may be input, it is necessary to define all load-bearing elements, tendons,
boundary conditions and load cases that are relevant for the structure. Following the real progress of
construction, all elements, tendons, supports etc. are then gradually included into the structure. If any element
is removed or if any boundary condition is changed, internal forces and corresponding reactions are
automatically added to the load that the structure is subject to.
In each construction stage you may:
 add a new member to the structural scheme,
 remove the existing member from the structural scheme,
 add a new support into the structural scheme,
 remove the existing support from the structural scheme.

All these actions can be done in service Construction stages.

Procedure to add member
1. Open service Construction stages.
2. Select (or define) the required construction stage (at the bottom of the service tree dialogue.
3. Call function Members > Add member.
4. Select the defined members that should be added to the structural scheme in the current stage.
5. End the function and if required, close the service.
Procedure to remove member
1. Open service Construction stages.
2. Select (or define) the required construction stage (at the bottom of the service tree dialogue.
3. Call function Members > Remove member.
4. Select the defined members that should be removed from the structural scheme in the current
stage.
5. End the function and if required, close the service.
Procedure to add support
1. Open service Construction stages.
2. Select (or define) the required construction stage (at the bottom of the service tree dialogue.
3. Call function Supports > Add support.
4. Select the defined supports that should be added to the structural scheme in the current stage.
5. End the function and if required, close the service.
Procedure to remove support
1. Open service Construction stages.
2. Select (or define) the required construction stage (at the bottom of the service tree dialogue.
3. Call function Supports > Remove support.
4. Select the defined supports that should be removed from the structural scheme in the current stage.
5. End the function and if required, close the service.

Clearing the whole stage

If required, it is possible to delete the complete definition of the current construction stage. Use function Delete
input data of stage from the service Construction stages.

Phased cross-section
This chapter is related to the Analysis of construction stages and Time dependent analysis.

492
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Modules Construction stages and TDA can use all types of database cross-sections in ESA PT. A new
feature called "phased cross-section" has been introduced for those modules. Phased cross-sections consist
of two or more parts, each of which can be of different material. Phased cross-sections allow for modelling of
composite structures. The cross-section is built-up step-by-step starting by phase 1. Each phase of the cross-
section is modelled by means of separate finite elements with eccentricity in the longitudinal direction.
Therefore, stress redistribution between two different phases of cross-section will appear in TDA analysis due
to creep and shrinkage of concrete. If any phase consists of more separate parts (of the same or different
materials), only one finite element will be generated for that phase between two nodes of the FEM mesh.
Sectional characteristic of individual parts will be transformed to one material. The generated finite element will
have transformed cross-sectional characteristic. For that reason no stress redistribution can be expected in the
analysis between individual parts of one phase.
Phased cross-sections can be created as a General cross-section. General cross-section can be defined by
means of a polygon drawing or by conversion from other types of database cross-sections. Also some pre-
defined bridge cross-sections can be defined as phased. Up to ten phases can be defined for one cross-
section.
Detailed information on general cross-section module is given in chapter Cross-sections > General cross-
section. The important limitation in ESA PT is that only one phased cross-section can be defined for one 1D
member! Therefore it is not possible to use the phased cross-section in the arbitrary beam (i.e. the beam
member consisting of several sections made of different cross-sections).
One important condition must be fulfilled when a phased general cross-section is created. The condition is
clear from the following picture.

Example of a phased cross-section

The following picture shows a hollow core floor slab [phase 1] (400 mm high) with a 50 mm topping [phase 2].

Sectional characteristics of phased cross-section

It is recommended to use FEM analysis for the calculation of sectional characteristics of a phased cross-
section. This can be done in the editing dialogue of a cross-section by ticking (selecting) the option FEM
analysis. When this option is ON, the program starts a special engine to calculate the sectional
characteristics.
The result of the analysis is shown in a separate dialogue.

493
Reference Guide

It is possible to view some results and also to select the way for the determination of shear-related parameters:
Ay/A and Az/A (see the note below).
Note: It is up to the user to review the shear-related values and select the correct (or most
correct) one manually.

Defining the introduction of a new phase of the cross-section

Chapter Defining the changes to the structural scheme describes how to introduce a new member or a new
support in a specific construction stage.
This chapter deals with the introduction of a new part of a phased cross-section, e.g. casting of composite
slab, etc.
Procedure to install a new cross-section phase
1. Select the beam member with the phased cross-section.
2. The property window displays the properties of the beam member.
3. One of the property groups is named Construction stages.
4. Use item Add to define the stage in which the base part (phase one) of the cross-section is
installed.
5. Use item Topping to define the stage in which the second part (phase two) of the cross-section is
installed.

Running the calculation

Both Analysis of Construction Stages and Time Dependent Analysis are run the same way.
Procedure to run ACS / TDA
1. Call menu function Calculation, Mesh > Calculation.
2. Select Construction stages analysis.
3. Click [OK] to start the calculation.

494
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Note: When the Time Dependent Analysis is started, the program may issue a warning that
some solver and mesh parameters must be re-adjusted in order to meet the analysis requirements.
You may either select the automatic re-adjustment and continue with the calculation, or cancel the
calculation and make manual adjustment according to chapters Mesh setup and Calculation setup.

Results of construction stages analysis

When the Construction Stages Analysis (sometimes abbreviated CSA in SCIA printed materials) has been
performed, the results can be review.
In general, you will be interested in two types or groups of results.
Results for load cases As each construction stage is assigned one load case (and this
load case is exclusive for that construction stage, i.e. it is not
used with any other construction stage), the results for load
classes show the contribution of the particular construction
stage to the overall distribution of a given quantity.
Results for load The program automatically generates result classes during the
classes Construction Stages Analysis. Two result classes are
generated for each stage: ULS class and SLS class. (ULS
class takes into account load factors gamma, SLS takes them
equal to one (1)). The classes are numbered from 1 to the
number of the last analysed stage. The results in each class
show the current overall state (condition) of the structure after
the particular construction stage.

Nonlinear construction stages

Nonlinear construction stages
The Analysis of Construction Stages (ACS) can be perform also as a non-linear analysis. Everything that was
explained for linear Analysis of Construction Stages is valid also for this advanced type of calculation. There
are a few differences.
Project parameters
nd
In the Project setup > Functionality item Nonlinearity and sub item 2 order – geometrical nonlinearity
must be selected.
Tangent versus parallel connection of a new member
The setup dialogue for construction stages offers one more parameter.
Connection of a new This parameter defines the geometrical configuration used for
member the connection of a new member in a new construction stage.
tangent: the new member is attached to the "old" member in
the direction of the tangent to the deformation line of the "old"
member
parallel: the new member is attached to the end of the
deformed "old" member in the direction parallel to the direction
of the new member on an undeformed structure.

The picture demonstrates the two options. The left hand side of the picture shows the tangent option. The
right hand side, on the other hand, contains the second option.

495
Reference Guide

TDA – Time Dependent Analysis

It is not possible to perform Time Dependent Analysis in combination with nonlinear analysis of construction
stages.
Running the calculation
Procedure to run nonlinear ACS
1. Call menu function Calculation, Mesh > Calculation.
2. Select Nonlinear stage analysis.
3. Click [OK] to start the calculation.

Linear versus Non-linear construction stages

Difference between Linear and Non-linear Construction Stages
Linear construction stages

The linear construction stages were developed mainly for the calculation of prestressed structures. It allows
the user to model the construction process and life cycle of the structure. Despite the original purpose to apply
this module to concrete structures, it can be in general used with any material. The user can add or remove
supports, members and tendons. For each construction stage, the safety factors can be set for the permanent
and variable load cases including the prestress load cases, thus resulting in a bandwidth of min/max

496
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

stresses/forces/deformations/reactions. Additionally, the user is able to model the segmentally constructed

cross-sections by adding the newly cast (concrete) or installed (steel/timber/other) materials during the
construction stage.

The module of Linear construction stages is based on the superposition (linearization) of load cases.
Therefore, the user can easily verify results by adding and removing individual load cases.
Note: Module Time dependant analysis (TDA) cannot run without this module.
The drawback of this module is that 2D members can only be added to the structure and not removed. Also,
Young’s modules cannot change and hinges can be neither added nor removed.
Non-linear construction stages
The non-linear construction stages were originally developed for the analysis of pipeline systems. In essence,
it takes into account the deformed structure of the previous stage, whilst calculating a new construction stage.
Therefore, the term "non-linear" is used. This module can work in collaboration with the non-linear conditions
and physical and geometrical non-linearity. The input of construction stages for this module follows the same
principal and uses the same dialogues as for the linear construction stages.

nd
This module is based on the 2 order-theory of Newton-Raphson method and requires a proper mesh and
incrementing of the load. It generates non-linear combinations, each representing a construction stages.
Safety factors are all equal to 1.0, i.e. there is no bandwidth of results (min/max).

497
Reference Guide

The drawback of this module is that it does not work for 2D members and TDA.

TDA (Time Dependent Analysis)

Input
TDA setup
These values must be set for the TDA.
Load factors
gamma-creep min These parameters, that are common for all construction and
(<=1); gamma-creep service stages, can be specified for generated creep load-
max (>=1) cases. In fact, no load factors will be applied in TDA
calculations. Therefore the results of creep load-cases that are
generated by TDA will also have no load factors included in
themselves (better said load factor = 1.0). After the calculation
has been performed, both SLS and ULS combinations are
generated. For ULS combinations all factors (gamma min and
gamma max) for dead load, prestressing, quasi-permanent
load, and creep will be applied using both their maximum and
minimum values.
Generate output text If this checkbox is ticked, a temporary output text-file is
file generated in the directory for analysis data and temporary files.

Time history
Number of subintervals The number of subintervals on the detail time axis. The
subintervals following the first time subinterval are generated in
log scale. This parameter has an impact on the accuracy of
solution of concrete creep.
See also Time axis.
Ambient moisture Ambient moisture in percentages.

Beam history

498
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Each member has it’s own history of in local time axis containing e.g. time of casting, end of curing, etc. All
data set in the setup dialog are related to local time axis of relevant 1D member. The origin of the local time
axis (zero time) is set to the time, when the appropriate stiffness of macro is introduced (added) into global
stiffness matrix of the whole structure ("birth of member"). The relevant member in highlighted in a special
colour in the drawing in main graphic window. The origin of local time axis is then located to global time of
current construction stage.
Time of casting Time of casting of concrete in days. It is possible to input
negative value. In such case the stiffness of the elements
between the time of casting and the birth of macro (zero local
time) is not included into global stiffness matrix. At the same
time the age of concrete elements is correct.
Time of curing Time of curing of concrete in days. In case of "phased cross-
section" it is time of curing of concrete of phase one in days.
Time of curing of Significant only in case of "phased cross-section". It is the time
composite parts of of curing of concrete of the second phase (of composite parts)
cross-section in days. This input value is in fact the duration of curing of
concrete composite parts of the cross-section – it is related to
the local time axis of the composite part.
Line support The age of concrete is respected when calculating its modulus
(formwork) of elasticity. At early stages the fresh concrete should be
properly supported by formwork (centring). It is therefore
possible to define line support of 1D member.
Time of releasing of Self-explanatory. X, Z are axes of global co-ordinate system.
displacements in X
direction,
Time of releasing of
displacements in Z
direction

Procedure to adjust TDA parameters

1. Open the service Construction stages.
2. Start function Setup.
3. Input the required parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Close the Setup dialogue.

Note: The TDA part of the setup dialogue is available ONLY if TDA module is available, i.e. if
e.g. the project is of Frame XZ type.

Material setup
These values must be set for the Analysis of construction stages and TDA.
Standard materials available in ESA PT material database can be used in TDA and ACS modules. The
number of material characteristics for concrete is increased and the influence of ageing (code dependent) is
introduced. Also the data of composition of concrete are added for TDA purposes to take into account creep
and shrinkage of concrete. New possibility to define measured values of mean compressive strength of
concrete is accessible for EC2 concrete.
On ticking the checkbox Measured values of mean compressive strength (influence of ageing) (in the
material editing dialogue opened from the Material database manager) new edit-boxes become accessible.
The user can input measured values of mean compressive strength of concrete at age of concrete t1 and t2
(t1<t2). One of the input values can be equal 28 days. This feature of the program could be used especially for
rapid hardening concrete or in case of any arrangement made to speed up the hardening of concrete (in prefab
industry). Taking into account the input parameters, the modified CEB FIP 1990 [2] functions for the
development of strength and modulus of elasticity (ageing) are used.
Some data are code-dependent.
CSN
Water content Content of water in concrete.

499
Reference Guide

EC2
Type of cement It can be either slow hardening, normal hardening, rapid
hardening or rapid hardening, high strength.

Mesh setup
These values must be set for the TDA.
 Minimal distance between two points  0.001 m
 Average number of tiles of 1D element must be  2.
 The geometry of finite elements representing the prestressed tendons is generated from the real
tendon geometry inclusive of the curves at vertexes of basic (input) tendon polygon. The finite
elements then make the polygon with the vertexes at the distances equal to Average size of
cables, tendons, elements on subsoil. After the definition of the element geometry, the mesh is
thickened according to the option Average number of tiles of 1D element, without backward
influence on the geometry of tendon elements. Therefore the option Average size of cables,
tendons, elements on subsoil must be chosen according to needed accuracy of modelling of
tendon geometry.
 Generation of nodes under concentrated loads on beam elements = on.
For reasons of numerical stability of TDA solver it is recommended to adjust:
 Minimal length of beam element = 0.05 m.
Procedure to adjust mesh parameters
1. Start menu function Setup > Mesh.
2. Adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Calculation setup
These values must be set for the TDA.
 Number of sections on average member (element) = 1 (detail results of internal forces at
intermediate sections can be obtained by refining mesh).
Procedure to adjust solver parameters
1. Start menu function Setup > Solver.
2. Adjust the required parameters.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Local beam history

Each beam member has its own history in local time axis containing e.g. time of casting, end of curing, etc. All
data set in this dialog are related to local time axis of relevant member. The origin of the local time axis (zero
time) is set to the moment, when the appropriate stiffness of macro is installed (added) into the global stiffness
matrix of the whole structure ("birth of beam member"). The appropriate beam member becomes yellow in the
drawing in main graphic window. The origin of the local time axis is then located to the global time of the
current construction stage.
Time of casting Time of casting of concrete in days. It is possible to input
negative value. In such case the stiffness of the elements
between the time of casting and the birth of macro (zero local
time) is not included into global stiffness matrix. At the same
time the age of concrete elements is correct.
Time of end of curing Time in days when curing of concrete is ended. The concrete
does not shrink during the curing.
In case of "phased cross-section" it is time of curing of concrete
of phase one in days.
Time of curing of Significant only in case of "phased cross-section". It is the time
composite parts of of curing of concrete of the second phase (of composite parts)

500
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

cross-section in days. This input value is in fact the duration of curing of

Line support
(formwork)
Time of installation of
formwork
Time of releasing of
displacements in X
direction,
Time of releasing of
displacements in Z
direction
Time of releasing in
rotation
concrete composite parts of the cross-section – it is related to
the local time axis of the composite part.
The age of concrete is respected when calculating its modulus
of elasticity. At early stages the fresh concrete should be
properly supported by formwork (centring). It is therefore
possible to define line support of 1D member.
(informative) The time is equal to the time of casting.
Self-explanatory. X, Z are axes of global co-ordinate system.
(informative) The time is equal to greater of previous two
values.

Procedure to input beam local history

1. Open the service Construction stages.
2. Start function Local history.
3. Fill in the required parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Select the required member where the defined history should be assigned.
6. End the function.
The beam members with defined local beam history are marked with symbol LBH.

Note: When a beam member is added into the model using the Construction stages service, it
physically appears in the model and is added into the stiffness matrix. On the other hand, Local
beam history may specify that such a beam member is e.g. a few days old and the concrete
already partially or fully hardened.

Time axis
The time is a new quantity in TDA analysis. First of all, the user defines global time as one of the parameters of
each construction phase. This time is be assigned to the current stage. Additional time nodes are generated
for TDA, see local history of a beam member. Therefore, number of time nodes is greater than the number of
stages. Additional time nodes required for proper accuracy of creep analysis can be generated in the dialog
Time axis edit. Logarithmic scale is used for the time axis drawing in the dialog Time axis edit.
First of all the user inputs the global time of the first construction stage, which is the first time node on the
"Time axis of construction stages". For example if we assume (local) time of casting of first macro –3 days,
then it is recommended to input time of the first stage +3 days (but it is not necessary). If we do so, the time of
first construction stage in global time axis will be still +3 days also after merger of the local axis to the time axis
of construction stages. The origin of the time axis is always moved to the time of casting of the first member!
Now we have "Merge of local time axes" (time axis of stages + local time axes): t0, t1, t2, …, ti, tj, … tn, and we
need to generate detail time nodes ti+k, k=1,2, … until ti+k<tj (to ensure the required accuracy of creep analysis).
It is done automatically.
Time axis edit dialogue
The Time axis edit dialogue consists of three parts:
 graphical window,

501
Reference Guide

 property window,
 input window.
Graphical window (of the Time axis edit dialogue)
The graphical window shows all the information related to the time axis:
 number of subintervals,
 stage node number,
 time axis of construction stages,
 merge of local time axis,
 detail time axis,
 number of all subintervals.
The graphical window supports standard features of ESA PT graphical windows:
 pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print and export functions,
 [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
 [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing.
For more information, refer also to the introductory text to this chapter and look at the procedure at the end of
the chapter.
Property window (of the Time axis edit dialogue)
This window enables you to show or hide required information in the graphical window. It is also possible to
adjust colours of individual diagrams and set the scale of the text and the picture.
Please, read also the procedure at the end of this chapter.
Input window (of the Time axis edit dialogue)
Here the number of subintervals can be input for the selected interval.

Procedure to edit time axis (change the number of subintervals)

1. Open the service Construction stages.
2. Start function Time axis.
3. The Time axis edit dialogue is opened on the screen.
4. You may:
a. review the input data: to display or hide the required axis, just click the
appropriate View checkbox in the property window of the dialogue. To change the
colour of the required axis, click the colour box in the property window of the
dialogue, a "three-dot-button" becomes enabled, press it and select the required
colour.
b. change the number on subintervals: On the axis Number of subintervals
select the interval you want to edit. The input box in the bottom right corner of the
dialogue becomes accessible and shows the currently defined number of
subintervals for the selected interval. You may change the number.
5. When ready, close the dialogue.

Note: A small number of subintervals is suitable for the first analysis and tuning of the model.
The accuracy is not perfect, but the calculation is fast and necessary re-calculations do not take too
much of your precious time. Once the model has been tuned, it is highly recommended to increase
the number of subintervals in order to obtain satisfactory accuracy of the results.

Analysis
Finite Element formulation
The method used for the time-dependent analysis is based on a step-by-step procedure in which the time
domain is subdivided by time nodes. The finite element analysis is performed in each time node. Linear ageing
viscoelastic theory is applied for the creep analysis.
The cross-sections of the structural members usually consist of various materials, e.g. concrete girder or
composite slab, prestressed tendons or reinforcement that are modelled by individual elements. Therefore the

502
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

centroidal axis of the element is to be placed in an eccentricity, relating to the reference axis, which connects
the nodes. Full compatibility at adjacent surfaces of two eccentric elements must be ensured. That’s why the
finite element with two external and one internal nodes is used. The internal node is situated at the centre of
the element. To fulfil the requirement for compatibility of two eccentric elements fixed to common nodes, the
axial and transverse displacements are approximated by the polynomial function of order 2 and 3, respectively.
All elements with different eccentricity, which connect identical nodes, create the substructure. The static
condensation of internal node parameters is used, thus the full compatibility between eccentric elements is
fulfilled.
The cross section of the element is constant along the length of element. It is assumed linear distribution of
normal forces and bending moments and constant distribution of shear forces along the length of the element.
Relatively detailed subdivision of the structural member on finite elements is therefore required.

Modelling of prestressing
The prestressing force is not constant along the length of the tendon and over time. It has to be considered at
various sections and at various construction stages respecting the prestressing losses. Some of the losses are
calculated in advance by the "pre-processor". These are short-term losses and are marked "A" (in "a"dvance),
see below. Since the tendons (or groups of tendons) are modelled as individual eccentric elements, the
calculation of the other losses will be included in the "m"ethod (marked "M") for the structural analysis itself.
The TDA solver calculates these types of losses automatically and they are displayed in Results > Tendon
stresses.
Losses during tensioning (before or during transfer of prestressing):
 Anchorage set loss, A
 Losses due to sequential prestressing (caused by the elastic deformation of concrete), M
 Losses due to deformation of stressing bed, A
 Losses due to elastic deformation of the joints of segmental structures sequentially prestressed, M
(if the joints are included in the structural model
 Losses due to steel relaxation, A
 Losses caused by the temperature differences between prestressing steel and the stressing bed, A
Note: Refer to chapter Short-term losses for the procedure how to calculate and display these
losses.

Losses after transfer of prestressing (long-term losses):

 Losses due to steel relaxation, M
 Losses due to shrinkage of concrete, M
 Losses due to creep of concrete, M
Note: Refer to chapter Tendon stresses for the procedure how to calculate and display these
losses.

Losses at service:
 Losses (changes of prestressing) caused by life load, M (calculated in standard ESA PT solver)

The local time axis for prestressed elements includes two nodes. The time of stressing is identical with the time
of the stage. An additional time node is generated as the time of anchoring (installing of prestressed element
into stiffness matrix). Time increment to anchoring is a virtual time. The purpose of introducing this time is to
distinguish the moment of equivalent load application and the moment of installing the prestressed elements
into stiffness matrix. These time nodes are identical for pre-tensioned tendons and they have no links to the
time information required for calculation of losses.
Strain equivalent to the relaxation to be passed in long-term is applied in several time nodes following the time
of anchoring. The increments of internal forces and deformations caused by the relaxation are added to the
results of dead load cases of construction or service stages, or they are added to "empty" load-cases
generated automatically for creep and shrinkage effects. The effects of creep, shrinkage, and relaxation are
mixed together (they cannot be separated, because they interact in the reality).

503
Reference Guide

Solution strategy
Creep and shrinkage of structural members are predicted through the mean properties of a given cross-
section, taking into account the average relative humidity and member size. The creep, shrinkage and ageing
effects may be taken into account according to the design recommendations of EC2, CSN 73 1201 and CSN
73 6207 (the latter two being Czech standards). The method used for creep analysis does not require any
iteration in one step and does not restrict the type of creep function. It is based upon the assumption of
linearity between stresses and strains to assure the applicability of linear superposition. The development of
modulus of elasticity over time due to ageing is taken into account.
The method used for the time-dependent analysis is based on a step-by-step computer procedure in which the
time domain is subdivided by discrete time nodes ti (i = 1,2, ... n) into time intervals. The solution in the time
node i is as follows:
1. The increments of strains, curvatures and shear strains caused by creep during the interval ti-1,ti
are calculated. Correspondingly the shrinkage strains are also calculated.
2. The load vector dFp is assembled as equivalent to the effects of generalised strains calculated in
the step 1.
3. The stiffness matrices K of the elements are calculated for the time ti and the stiffness matrix of the
whole structure Kg is assembled.
4. The system of equation Kgdg = dFp is analysed. The vector of increments of nodal displacements
dg is added to the vector of total nodal displacements g.
5. The elements are analysed in the central co-ordinate system (the co-ordinate system, in which x–
axis is created by centroids of cross-sections of the element). The increments of internal forces and
increments of elastic strains are calculated from the increments of displacements of the element
nodes.
6. The changes of the structural configuration carried on in the time node ti are introduced.
7. The increments of generalised strains of the elements that are prestressed (or loaded by changes of
temperature) in the time node ti are calculated. The losses of the prestressing due to the
deformation of the structure are automatically included in the analysis through the increments of
internal element forces.
8. The load vector dFz is assembled as equivalent to the effects of generalised strains calculated in
the step 7. The increments of other types of the long-term load applied in the time node ti are added
to the load vector dFz.
9. The system of equation Kgdg = dFz is analysed. The vector of increments of nodal displacements
dg is added to the vector of total nodal displacements g.
10. The increments of internal forces and increments of elastic strains are calculated from the
increments of displacements of the element nodes.
11. The increments of internal forces calculated in the steps 5 and 10 are added to the total internal
forces. The increments of elastic strains calculated in the steps 5 and 10 are added together and
saved to the history of elastic strains as the increments in the time node ti.
12. Go to the first step of the time node i+1.

Running the calculation

Both Analysis of Construction Stages and Time Dependent Analysis are run the same way.
Procedure to run ACS / TDA
1. Call menu function Calculation, Mesh > Calculation.
2. Select Construction stages analysis.
3. Click [OK] to start the calculation.

Note: When the Time Dependent Analysis is started, the program may issue a warning that
some solver and mesh parameters must be re-adjusted in order to meet the analysis requirements.
You may either select the automatic re-adjustment and continue with the calculation, or cancel the
calculation and make manual adjustment according to chapters Mesh setup and Calculation setup.

504
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Results
Standard results
When the Time Dependent Analysis has been performed, you may review all the standard results as in case of
a normal static linear calculation: deformations, internal forces, stresses, reactions.
For more information, refer to sub-chapters in chapter Results.

Tendon stresses
Result diagrams in graphical window
Note: The principles for displaying of results are described in chapter Results.
Procedure to display tendon stresses
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Select the load for the display.
4. Adjust the style of result diagrams.
5. Select the beam member strand patterns for which the results should be drawn.
6. Use filter to specify the tendons to be displayed (see below).
7. Press button [Refresh] to regenerate the drawing.
8. When ready, close service Results.
Filtering the results
Capabilities of filtering will be explained on a simple example.
Imagine a two span continuous beam built in two construction stages: left span in the first stage (assigned load
case 1), second span in the second stage (assigned load case 2).

Both spans are prestressed and have a beam strand pattern defined. The left span contains 5 strands, the
second one only one.

505
Reference Guide

Open service Results and start function Tendon stresses.

Set Selection to Standard and select no beam strand pattern.
Open combo box Tendons, it contains just one option: All by selection.
Now select the strand pattern in the left span and open the same combo box again. It offers All by selection
plus the five strands from the first beam.
Clear the selection, select the right hand span and look into the combo box. It offers All by selection plus the
strand from the second beam.
Select both strand patters and open the combo box once again. It offers All by selection, plus the five strands
from the first beam, plus the strand from the second beam.
This way you may select just one tendon and display the results on it. This option is convenient especially if
there are multiple strands in one beam. Compare the pictures below. The first one displays results on all
strands in the beam, the second one on just one strand.

506
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Now, set Selection to All. Select All by selection in combo box Tendons.
Set Load to Load cases and select LC1. This load case is assigned to the first construction stage when only
the left span exists. When you press [Refresh], tendon stresses are displayed only on the left span.

Similarly, if you select LC2, only tendon stresses in the right span are shown.

And finally, let Selection to All and keep All by selection in combo box Tendons.
Set Load to Classes and select Class 1. This class corresponds to the first construction stage when only the
first span exists. Press [Refresh], tendon stresses are displayed only on the left span.

Select Class 2 that corresponds to the second construction stage, when both spans exist. Press [Refresh]
and tendon stresses are displayed on both spans.

507
Reference Guide

Detailed results
It is possible to display detailed results for a single beam strand pattern
Procedure to display detailed results
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Click action button [Detailed].
4. Select one beam strand pattern.
5. A window with detailed results opens on the screen.

Preview in the Preview window

The results may be reviewed in tabular form in the preview window.
Procedure to view the preview
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Select the load for the display.
4. Adjust the style of result diagrams.
5. Select the beam strand patterns for which the results should be drawn.
6. Use filter to specify the tendons to be displayed (see below).
7. Press button [Preview] to view the table of results.

Explanation of abbreviations
SAT Stress after transfer.

LED Loss due to sequential prestressing + loss caused by the

elastic deformation of concrete.
LCS Loss due to creep and shrinkage of concrete + loss due to
long-term steel relaxation.
Lmin Loss (change of) prestressing caused by life load (min).
Lmax Loss (change of) prestressing caused by life load (max).
MinStress Minimal stress in phase.
MaxStress Maximal stress in phase.

508
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Prestressing
Pre-tensioned prestressed concrete
Introduction to prestressing
Module Prestressing makes it possible to define geometry, material and other properties of prestressed
tendon. The tendon can be inserted into beam members. It is possible to define pre-tensioned internal
tendons.
The tendons are defined through strand patterns that are supposed to be symmetrical in a beam member, thus
only one (symmetrical) half of the strand along the beam member must be defined. The input is made in three
steps:
1. Bore hole pattern is defined, i.e. the location of holes in the "face-plate" is defined.
2. Sectional strand pattern is specified, i.e. which holes of the "face-plate" are "filled" with a
strand/wire/bar.
3. Beam strand pattern is input, which means that the shape of the strands/wires/bars along the beam
member is defined (this step is subject to certain limitations that will be explained later).

Note: It is not possible to import prestressing data from EPW system.

Materials of Prestressing Tendons

The system database contains all materials for prestressing tendons listed in EC2 Code, CSN 73 12 01 and
CSN 73 62 07 (Czech standards). For instructions on how to select current material and how to work with the
system, user and project database, see chapter Database managers.
Considering the fact, that the material properties of prestressing tendons are dependent on diameter of
prestressing unit (i.e. strand/wire/bar), the materials are listed in the system database not only according to the
type, but also according to the diameter of the unit. The dialog and parameters are code and type dependent.
The relaxation table is defined in the system database for each prestressed material. Button Relaxation table
can bring the relaxation table on view. Also diagrams of the relaxation values (after pressing button Graph)
can be displayed, if required.
The user may also edit the values in the relaxation table. To do so, it is necessary to check option User
relaxation first. Only then you can open the Relaxation table dialogue and edit the values in it.

Properties of pre-tensioned tendons

The dialog Concrete > Setup can be used to define general properties and type of stressing of pre-tensioned
tendons.
Type of stressing See the figure below the table.

Anchorage set Anchorage set at stressed end of tendon.

Initial stress Specifies the initial stress at stressed end of tendon

Stress during correcting
Duration of short-term
relaxation
Duration of keeping stress
Anchorage length
Length of prestressing units
(before seating).
Defines the stress at stressed end of tendon. The
amount of relaxation can be decreased by keeping the
stress constant (so called correction of relaxation).
Specifies the time period between the end of correction
of relaxation (if any) and time of anchoring.
The duration of keeping constant stress during
correction of relaxation.
The length of development of bond between the
concrete and pre-tensioned tendon.
Total length of wires or strands (between wedges); for
pre-tensioned concrete it is equal to the length of
stressing bed plus the length of abutments, see Fig. Pre-
tensioned beam.

509
Reference Guide

Distance between sections Defines sections where results are given.

for output
Length of stressing bed self-explanatory

Shortening of stressing bed self-explanatory

due to stressing of all
prestressing units
Coefficient of thermal self-explanatory
expansion of stressing bed
Temperature of prestressing self-explanatory
units and stressing bed at
stressing
Temperature of prestressing self-explanatory
units at the time when bond
exists
Temperature of stressing bed self-explanatory
at the time when bond exists

Pre-tensioned beam

Type of stressing

510
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

Type 5

Types of Prestressing Units

Czech code CSN 73 12 01:

511
Reference Guide

 Cold-drawn wires PD, PP, PH, PV, PN, PNV

 Strands LA, LB, LC, LD, LSA, LSB

Czech code CSN 73 62 07:

 Cold-drawn wires P
 Strands Lp, Ls

EC2:
 Cold-drawn wires w
 Indented wires w
 Strands s
 Plain round bars b
 Ribbed bars

Short-term losses
Short-term losses can be calculated in advance, before the solver is run:
 Anchorage set loss
 Losses due to deformation of stressing bed
 Losses due to steel relaxation
 Losses caused by the temperature differences in between prestressing steel and the stressing bed.
Besides of those losses, calculation of some other losses is included in the method for the structural analysis
itself. Three codes are supported for the calculation of losses in ESA PT:
 EC2,
 CSN 73 6207,
 CSN 73 1201.
The losses are calculated according to assumptions given in these codes.
Anchorage set loss
There are two simplifications used in calculation of anchorage set loss:
1. EC2: we introduce effective cumulative angle =+kx over a distance x, where x is horizontal co-
ordinate,  is intended angle over a distance x, kx is unintended angle over a distance x.
2. CSN 73 1201 and CSN 73 6207: the exponential functions for friction calculations are approximated
by first two members of power function.
Relaxation
The losses of prestressing caused by steel relaxation are introduced at three levels.
At first level - the correction of relaxation is calculated, namely the relaxation which appears during keeping the
stress constant before anchoring. In fact, this is not a loss of prestressing. On the contrary the total relaxation
considered in the structural analysis is decreased by this value. The relaxation at this level is applied for types
1, 2 and 3 of stressing sequence only (see Properties of pre-tensioned tendons > Type of stressing).
At second level – the short-term relaxation loss is calculated. The calculation is performed according to
procedure of stressing and anchoring for types 1, 2 and 5 (see Properties of pre-tensioned tendons > Type of
stressing).
At third level – the long-term relaxation loss is calculated for all five types of stressing sequence. This
relaxation loss will occur after anchoring. Therefore it has an impact on the long-term behaviour of building
structure and it should be applied as one of the loads in time-dependent analysis. In ESA PT implementation
the strain equivalent to relaxation to be passed in long-term is applied in several time nodes following ttr (see
Properties of pre-tensioned tendons > Type of stressing).
The calculation of all of the relaxation losses mentioned above is based on the following principles. The
differences between the procedures applied for different national codes are only in different definition of
material characteristics. Firstly the final relaxation loss is calculated, which depends on the level of stress at
given section related to the characteristic tensile strength. In the second step - the relative decrease of stress
related to the final relaxation loss is calculated according to the duration of time interval when the stress is

512
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

applied. The only simplification is that there is no effect of the changes of steel stress during the interval on the
magnitude of relaxation in this time interval. For example - at third level – the losses of prestressing due to
creep and shrinkage of concrete do not influence the amount of steel relaxation (insignificant).
The final relaxation loss is not defined in EC2 (only the relaxation up to 1000 hours). Therefore the estimate of
the relaxation up to 30 years is used according to CEB FIP 1990 Model Code [2].
Running the losses
Having set all the input data described above, the losses can be calculated.
Procedure to calculate losses
1. Select the beam strand pattern for which the losses should be calculated.
2. The properties of the strand pattern are shown in the Property window.
3. Click button [Edit strand patterns].
4. The editing dialogue for the selected strand pattern is opened on the screen.
5. Select one strand which you are interested in.
6. Its properties are displayed in the bottom right corner of the dialogue.
7. Click action button Losses.
8. A preview window is displayed. The preview window is split into two parts. In first part some details
of tendon parameters are displayed together with the table of results. Using the toolbar at the top of
the window, all the information can be exported to a file (HTML, TXT, PDF, RTF) or directly to
printer. In the second part a diagram, the distribution of various losses along the length of the
tendon is shown. It is possible to change the scale of the diagram or the text. And the pop-up menu
(pressing right mouse button), offers some basic functions for the picture: zoom, print, copy to
clipboard or save to an external file.

Stressing bed
Stressing bed manager
The Stressing bed manager is one of the standard ESA PT database managers. It enables you to review,
input, edit, delete, print, export or import individual stressing beds.
Procedure to open Stressing bed manager
1. Open service Library.
2. Open branch Pretensioning special.
3. Start function Stressing beds.
4. The Stressing beds manager opens on the screen.

Defining a new stressing bed

Procedure to define a new stressing bed
1. Open the Stressing bed manager.
2. Click button [New].

513
Reference Guide

3. A new stressing bed is added to the manager and can be edited directly in the manager dialogue.
4. Define the parameters.
5. Close the manager.

Editing dialogue for stressing bed

Name self-explanatory

Length of prestressing units self-explanatory

Temperature loss It indicates whether the loss caused by the

temperature differences between the
prestressing steel and the stressing bed will be
calculated.
Length of stressing bed self-explanatory

Coefficient of thermal expansion of self-explanatory

stressing bed
Temperature of prestressing units
and stressing bed at stressing
Temperature of prestressing units at
the time when bond exists
Temperature of stressing bed at the
time when bond exists
Loss due to deformation of stressing
bed
Shortening of stressing bed due to
stressing of all prestressing units
self-explanatory
self-explanatory
self-explanatory
It indicates whether the loss caused by the
shortening of stressing bed due to stressing of
all prestressing units will be calculated. The
stressing bed is an auxiliary structure between
abutments where the formwork is placed. It
might be of a limited stiffness relating to high
forces applied during stressing.
self-explanatory

Editing the existing stressing bed

Procedure to edit the existing stressing bed
1. Open the Stressing bed manager.
2. Select the required stressing bed.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue for a stressing bed opens on the screen.
5. Modify the required parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Close the manager.

Bore hole pattern

Bore hole pattern
Before casting a pre-tensioned member, a steel plate is installed at the end of the stressing bed. This plate
contains holes that will define the position of strands in the end-section of the member. Not all the holes must
be necessarily used (filled with a strand) at every member. Some holes may remain empty. That is why ESA
PT distinguishes between bore hole pattern and sectional strand pattern.

514
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

First, a bore hole pattern is defined and then it is used to define a sectional strand pattern. Both these "entities"
define the location of strands at the end-section of the prestressed member.
Note: More information about the technology used for the production of pre-tensioned beam
members can be found in [3].

Bore hole patterns manager

The Bore hole pattern manager is one of the standard ESA PT database managers. It enables you to review,
input, edit, delete, print, export or import individual bore hole patterns.
Procedure to open Bore hole pattern manager
1. Open service Library.
2. Open branch Pretensioning special.
3. Start function Bore hole patterns.
4. The Bore hole pattern manager opens on the screen.

Defining a new bore hole pattern

Procedure to define a new bore hole pattern
1. Open the Bore hole pattern manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. The Cross-section database manager is opened on the screen.
4. Select the cross-section for which the new bore hole pattern should be defined.
5. Close the Cross-section database manager.
6. The editing dialogue for a bore hole pattern opens on the screen.
7. Define the bore hole pattern.
8. Confirm with [OK].
Editing dialogue for a bore hole pattern

The dialogue for the definition or editing of a bore hole pattern consists of the following parts:
 graphical window,
 definition of coordinate system,
 section of the input of regions and holes,

515
Reference Guide

 definition of reference point.

Graphical window
The graphical window displays the selected cross-section and the defined pattern of holes. It supports
standard features of ESA PT graphical windows:
 pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print and export functions,
 [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
 [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing.
Definition of coordinate system
You may select the origin of the input-coordinate-system. The selected system is marked in the graphical
window. For example:

Input of regions and holes

The holes in the plate may be defined individually one-by-one or en-block in specified regions (even the region
may contain just one hole).
Regions
A region is always rectangular and is defined by its position in the cross-section and its size. The holes are
always regularly distributed across the region. You may specify either (i) the number of holes in the horizontal
and vertical direction or (ii) the position of the first hole in each direction and the distance between the holes in
that direction.
Name Specifies the name of the region.

Left bottom y Defines the coordinates of the bottom left the corner of region.
Left bottom z
Width Specifies the width of the region.

Height Specifies the height of the region.

Type You may select the type of definition of the holes in the region:
Grid – you define the number of the holes in each direction
Increment - you define the position of the first hole in each
direction and the distance between the holes in that direction
No. of holes y Inputs the holes for type Grid.
No. of holes z
First hole y Inputs the holes for type Increment. Defines the position of the

516
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

First hole z first hole.

Dy Inputs the holes for type Increment. Specifies the distance

Dz between individual holes.

Hole diameter Defines the hole diameter.

Holes
Holes may be input directly by their position in the cross-section.
ID (informative) Shows the number of the hole. The number are
assigned automatically by the program.
Name Specifies the name of the hole.

Y The coordinates defining the position of the hole.

Z
Hole diameter Defines the hole diameter.

Holes can be copied. In that case you specify if you make just a single copy or a multiple copy, input the
distance between the copies and, if required, also the number of copies. In order to copy a hole, simply use
button [Copy] next to the list of holes and fill in the copy-dialogue.
Note: When you define the holes in regions, it may happen that some holes "fall" out of the
cross-section (especially if the cross-section is not rectrangular). These outside holes do not have
to be specially treated as they are automatically filtered when you define the sectional strand
pattern. That means that strands can be put only into real and proper holes.
Defined holes in the
bore hole pattern

517
Reference Guide

Available holes in the

sectional strand pattern

Reference point
The reference point can be used to position the bore hole pattern in the cross-section of the beam member
when the sectional strand pattern is created (you are asked to position the bore hole pattern on the cross-
section). Normally, you may accept the default setting. Only if you decide on a special configuration of the bore
hole pattern, it may be convenient to "play" with the reference point and use one bore hole pattern for different
final location of strands in the beam member.

Editing the existing bore hole pattern

Procedure to edit the existing bore hole pattern
1. Open the Bore hole pattern manager.
2. Select the required bore hole pattern.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue for a bore hole pattern opens on the screen.
5. Modify what necessary.
6. Confirm with [OK].

Note: For more information about the editing dialogue read chapter Defining a new bore hole
pattern.

Sectional strand pattern

Sectional strand pattern
Sectional strand pattern defines the position of strands at the end-section of a prestressed member. First, a
bore hole pattern must be created and later the sectional strand pattern may be defined for it.
Note: More information about the technology used for the production of pre-tensioned beam
members can be found in [3].

Sectional strand pattern manager

The Sectional strand pattern manager is one of the standard ESA PT database managers. It enables you to
review, input, edit, delete, print, export or import individual sectional strand patterns.
Procedure to open Sectional strand pattern manager
1. Open service Library.
2. Open branch Pretensioning special.
3. Start function Sectional strand pattern.
4. The Sectional strand pattern manager opens on the screen.

518
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Defining a new sectional strand pattern

Procedure to define a new sectional strand pattern
1. Open the Sectional strand pattern manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. The Cross-section database manager is opened on the screen.
4. Select the cross-section for which a new strand pattern should be defined.
5. Close the Cross-section database manager.
6. Select the bore hole pattern for which a new sectional strand pattern should be defined.
7. Close the Bore hole pattern manager.
8. A small positioning dialogue is opened on the screen.
9. Position the bore hole pattern in the cross-section (see the note below).
10. The editing dialogue for a sectional strand pattern opens on the screen.
11. Define the new sectional strand pattern.
12. Confirm with [OK].

Note: This positioning of the bore hole pattern on the cross-section may become important later
when you decide to change the height of the cross-section. The position of strands is related to the
reference point and is not affected by the change of the dimension. You may choose the reference
point which most suits your needs.
Editing dialogue for sectional strand pattern

The dialogue for the definition or editing of a sectional strand pattern consists of the following parts:
 graphical window,
 info-table,
 legend,
 strand properties,
 view parameters button,
 debonding length button,

519
Reference Guide

 control buttons.
Graphical window
The graphical window displays the selected cross-section and the defined pattern of holes. It supports
standard features of ESA PT graphical windows:
 pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print and export functions,
 [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
 [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing.
Info-table
This table is located in the top left corner of the dialogue.
Name Specifies the name of the pattern.
Cross-section name (informative) Informs about the cross-section used in the
sectional pattern.
Bore hole (informative) Informs about the bore hole used in the sectional
pattern.
Legend
The legend has two roles:
 (informative) it explains the symbols used in the graphical window (each type of strand uses a
special graphical mark or colour),
 (active) it is used for the input of individual strands into the bore holes.
Procedure to input a new strand
1. In the Legend select the required strand material and diameter.
2. In the graphical window click the holes where you want to have a strand.
3. If you need to combine more materials/diameters, simply repeat steps 1 and 2.
Procedure to delete the existing strand
1. In the Legend select item No Strand.
2. In the graphical window click the strand you want to remove.
Procedure to define debonded or fixed strand
1. In the Legend select the item Debonded or Fixed.
2. In the graphical window click the appropriate strand(s).
Alternatively, you may define these two properties in the property window of the required strand (see below).
Stand properties
Whenever a defined strand is selected in the graphical window, its properties are shown in the Properties
window.
Name Specifies the name of the strand.

ID Specifies the ID of the strand.

Group (informative) The number of strand group.

Material Selects the material and diameter.

Fixed Specifies if the strand is fixed. The fixed strand has fixed
position in the section along the whole length of the beam
member. It is straight.
Debonding length Defines whether the strand is debonded at its end and if so,
over which distance.
Also the debonded strand has fixed position in the section
along the whole length of the beam member. It is straight.

520
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Stressing sequence Defines the sequence in which the strands are stressed.

Type o stressing See chapter Properties of pre-tensioned tendons.

Stress during Stress at stressed end of tendon; the amount of relaxation can
correcting be decreased by keeping the stress constant (so called
correction of relaxation)
Duration of keeping Duration of keeping constant stress during correction of
stress relaxation.
Initial stress Initial stress at stressed end of tendon (before seating)

Anchorage set Defines the slip at the stressed end of the strand.

Anchorage length The length of development of bond between the concrete and
pre-tensioned tendon
Distance between Specifies the distance for output.
sections for output
Position Y, Z (informative) Shows the position of the strand.

Note: In the property window you may use selection-by-property. Select one strand, in the
property window select the property you are interested in, click the "funnel" icon in the top right
corner of the property window and the program selects all the strands that have the same property.
The selected strands are highlighted in the graphical window. This feature can be used for both
active and informative properties.
Note: It is possible to make a multiple selection of strands in the graphical window. Press and
hold key [Ctrl] and click the left mouse button. When the multi-selection has been made, you can
change a required property to all the selected items at once.
View parameters
This button opens a dialogue with view parameters. Their meaning is more or less self-explanatory.
Debonding lengths
A set of various debonding lengths can be defined here. One debonding length can be then assigned to a
strand in the property window.

Editing the existing sectional strand pattern

Procedure to edit the existing sectional strand pattern
1. Open the Sectional strand pattern manager.
2. Select the required strand pattern.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue for a sectional strand pattern opens on the screen.
5. Change the required parameters of the selected sectional strand pattern.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. Close the manager.

Beam strand pattern

Beam strand pattern
When a sectional strand pattern has been defined (i.e. also a bore hole pattern must have been created), it is
possible to define the shape of prestressing tendons along the member. In ESA PT this shape is defined by
means of a beam strand pattern. It is in fact a set of strand patterns defined for individual sections of the beam
member.

521
Reference Guide

Both the beam member and the prestressing reinforcement are assumed symmetrical, so just a half of the
beam member must be defined.
It depends on the shape of the reinforcement how many sections must be created for each beam strand
pattern. If the strands do not change their position in the section, one section (the sectional strand pattern) is
sufficient.

Defining a new beam strand pattern

Procedure to define a new beams strand pattern from bore hole pattern
1. Open service Concrete.
2. Start (double-click) function Pretensioning – beam strand pattern.
3. Select the beam member where the beam strand pattern is to be inserted.
4. The Select template dialogue opens on the screen.
5. Select item Bore hole.
6. In case of arbitrary beam the Cross-section manager opens on the screen and you must select the
required cross-section.
7. The Bore hole pattern manager opens on the screen.
8. Select the required bore hole pattern.
9. Position the bore hole pattern in the cross-section.
10. The editing dialogue for the beam strand pattern opens on the screen.
11. Define the required sections of the beam strand pattern. Also the selection (or input) of a pre-
stressing load case may be required during this. The load case is required for storage of results.
12. Confirm with [OK].
Procedure to define a new beams strand pattern from sectional strand pattern
1. Open service Concrete.
2. Start (double-click) function Pretensioning – beam strand pattern.
3. Select the beam member where the beam strand pattern is to be inserted.
4. The Select template dialogue opens on the screen.
5. Select item Sectional strand pattern.
6. In case of arbitrary beam the Cross-section manager opens on the screen and you must select the
required cross-section.
7. The Sectional strand pattern manager opens on the screen.
8. Select the required bore hole pattern.
9. Position the bore hole pattern in the cross-section.
10. The selection (or input) of a pre-stressing load case may be required during this. The load case is
required for storage of results.
11. The editing dialogue for the beam strand pattern opens on the screen.
12. Confirm with [OK].

Editing dialogue for the beam strand pattern

522
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

The dialogue for the definition or editing of a beam strand pattern consists of the following parts:
 tabs for individual sections with graphical window,
 tab for input of a new section,
 info-table,
 bore-hole information and button for its change,
 legend,
 strand properties,
 action button for calculation of losses in selected strand,
 strand geometry,
 view parameters button,
 debonding length button,
 template buttons,
 control buttons.
Graphical window
The graphical window displays the selected cross-section and the defined pattern of holes. It supports
standard features of ESA PT graphical windows:
 pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print and export functions,
 [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
 [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing.
Info-table
This table is located in the top left corner of the dialogue.
Name Specifies the name of the pattern.
Position (informative) Informs about the position of the section on the
beam member.
Bore hole information

523
Reference Guide

This part of the dialogue shows the bore hole selected for the current strand pattern. The button [Change bore
hole] can be used to change the pattern.
Note: If the bore hole pattern is changed, all already defined strands are deleted.
Legend
The legend has two roles:
 (informative) it explains the symbols used in the graphical window (each type of strand uses a
special graphical mark or colour),
 (active) it is used for the input of individual strands into the bore holes.
The procedures for input and removal of strands and for adjustment of special properties are described in
chapter Defining a new sectional strand pattern.
Stand properties
Whenever a defined strand is selected in the graphical window, its properties are shown in the Properties
window. The meaning of the properties is described in chapter Defining a new sectional strand pattern.
Calculation of losses in selected strand
Using the action button in the bottom part of the property dialogue you may calculate losses for the selected
strand. The button opens a dialogue with a table and diagram of calculated short-term losses.
Note: See also chapter Short-term losses.
Strand geometry
Yp; Zp coordinate of the centre of gravity of entire strand pattern
Yp, deb; Zp, deb coordinate of the centre of gravity of all debonded strands
Yp, drap; Zp, drap coordinate of the centre of gravity of all draped strands
n total amount of strands in strand pattern
Ap total area of entire strand pattern
Ac total cross-sectional concrete area without the area of strands
Ap, deb total area of all debonded strands
Ap, drap total area of all draped strands
Y; Z coordinate of the centre of gravity of the combined cross-
section - concrete plus pre-stressing steel
Iz; Iy moment of inertia for z/y-axis of combined cross-section. (z-
axis being strong axis)
Iz,c; Iy, c moment of inertia for z/y-axis of combined cross-section
without the strands (z-axis being strong axis)
Wy, top; Wy, bottom section modulus for z/y-axis of combined cross-section at top
of section
View parameters
This button opens a dialogue with view parameters. Their meaning is more or less self-explanatory.
Debonding lengths
A set of various debonding lengths can be defined here. One debonding length can be then assigned to a
strand in the property window.
Template buttons
[Create template] A new template is saved to the project.
[Create from template] The strand pattern is loaded from an existing template.

Editing the existing beam strand pattern

Procedure to edit the existing beams strand pattern from bore hole pattern
1. Select the beam strand pattern for which the losses should be calculated.
2. The properties of the strand pattern are shown in the Property window.

524
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

3. Click button [Edit strand patterns].

4. The editing dialogue for the selected strand pattern is opened on the screen.
5. Make necessary changes.
6. Confirm with [OK].

Results
Tendon stresses
Result diagrams in graphical window
Note: The principles for displaying of results are described in chapter Results.
Procedure to display tendon stresses
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Select the load for the display.
4. Adjust the style of result diagrams.
5. Select the beam member strand patterns for which the results should be drawn.
6. Use filter to specify the tendons to be displayed (see below).
7. Press button [Refresh] to regenerate the drawing.
8. When ready, close service Results.
Filtering the results
Capabilities of filtering will be explained on a simple example.
Imagine a two span continuous beam built in two construction stages: left span in the first stage (assigned load
case 1), second span in the second stage (assigned load case 2).

Both spans are prestressed and have a beam strand pattern defined. The left span contains 5 strands, the
second one only one.

525
Reference Guide

Open service Results and start function Tendon stresses.

Set Selection to Standard and select no beam strand pattern.
Open combo box Tendons, it contains just one option: All by selection.
Now select the strand pattern in the left span and open the same combo box again. It offers All by selection
plus the five strands from the first beam.
Clear the selection, select the right hand span and look into the combo box. It offers All by selection plus the
strand from the second beam.
Select both strand patters and open the combo box once again. It offers All by selection, plus the five strands
from the first beam, plus the strand from the second beam.
This way you may select just one tendon and display the results on it. This option is convenient especially if
there are multiple strands in one beam. Compare the pictures below. The first one displays results on all
strands in the beam, the second one on just one strand.

526
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Now, set Selection to All. Select All by selection in combo box Tendons.
Set Load to Load cases and select LC1. This load case is assigned to the first construction stage when only
the left span exists. When you press [Refresh], tendon stresses are displayed only on the left span.

Similarly, if you select LC2, only tendon stresses in the right span are shown.

And finally, let Selection to All and keep All by selection in combo box Tendons.
Set Load to Classes and select Class 1. This class corresponds to the first construction stage when only the
first span exists. Press [Refresh], tendon stresses are displayed only on the left span.

Select Class 2 that corresponds to the second construction stage, when both spans exist. Press [Refresh]
and tendon stresses are displayed on both spans.

527
Reference Guide

Detailed results
It is possible to display detailed results for a single beam strand pattern
Procedure to display detailed results
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Click action button [Detailed].
4. Select one beam strand pattern.
5. A window with detailed results opens on the screen.

Preview in the Preview window

The results may be reviewed in tabular form in the preview window.
Procedure to view the preview
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function Tendon stresses.
3. Select the load for the display.
4. Adjust the style of result diagrams.
5. Select the beam strand patterns for which the results should be drawn.
6. Use filter to specify the tendons to be displayed (see below).
7. Press button [Preview] to view the table of results.

Explanation of abbreviations
SAT Stress after transfer.

LED Loss due to sequential prestressing + loss caused by the

elastic deformation of concrete.
LCS Loss due to creep and shrinkage of concrete + loss due to
long-term steel relaxation.
Lmin Loss (change of) prestressing caused by life load (min).
Lmax Loss (change of) prestressing caused by life load (max).
MinStress Minimal stress in phase.
MaxStress Maximal stress in phase.

528
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Post-tensioned prestressed concrete

Source geometry
Tendon source geometry
When the shape (geometry) of a tendon is defined, it is possible to use what is termed Source geometry. The
source geometry is in fact an independently prepared shape (geometry) of the tendon without any link to a
particular structural entity that is to be reinforced. The advantage is clear. The user may prepare the shape of
the tendon just once and later assign it to numerous beam members, for example. Moreover, the source
geometry is created as if intended for a straight beam member. But, at the end it may be assigned even to a
curved beam member. The x-axis (longitudinal axis) of the source geometry simply follows the x-axis of the
beam member regardless of the possible winding character of the beam member axis. This feature
significantly simplifies the input of tendons into curved beam members.

Tendon source geometry manager

Source geometry for tendons is managed through a standard ESA PT database manager. It means that all the
input source geometries are stored in a separate database and, for example, individual items can be exported
from one project to another.
The Tendon source geometry manager slightly differs from the standard database manager in that the
graphical window is split in two, in order to show both the side-view and plan-view of the source geometry.
The procedure to open the Tendon source geometry manager
Either:
Use tree menu function Library > Post-tensioning > Tendon source geometry.
Or:
When the property table of a tendon is displayed during its input or editing, click the three-dot button [...] in
item Source geometry.

Defining a new source geometry for tendon

A new source geometry can be input from scratch or by importing another already defined source geometry.
Alternatively, the two ways can be combined. It means that the source geometry can consist of several parts
merged together in one "longer" source geometry.
Procedure to define a new source geometry
1. Open the Tendon source geometry manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. The Edit geometry dialogue is opened on the screen.
4. Input the source geometry.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Close the Tendon source geometry manager.

Edit geometry dialogue

The Edit dialogue provides for the numerical input of the shape of the tendon. The user must input individual
vertices and types of curve in each vertex.

529
Reference Guide

Note: The proportions of individual parts of the edit dialogue were deliberately distorted in order
to fit the picture into one printed page.

Type of input
In general, there are two type of input:
(i) the tendon "passes" the individual vertices following the input type of curve, i.e. the tendon does not directly
goes through the vertex,
(ii) the tendon goes directly through the vertices – this is called "points fitting".
For the first input type, the following options are available.
Circle + tangent
Circle; parameter is the distance between vertex and tangent point, see Fig. 1 – Circle - types 0 and 1.
Circle + radius
Circle; parameter is the radius of circle, see Fig. 1 – Circle - types 0 and 1. Radius and two tangents determine
the circle. Length of tangents is calculated automatically.

530
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Symmetrical parabola + tangent

Parabola; parameter is the distance between vertex and tangent point (beginning or end of parabola), see Fig.
2 – Parabola – type 2. The length of tangent & axis of symmetry of parabola determine the parabola.

Parabola + tangent [begin]

Parabolic segment with the crown of parabola at the beginning of the curve; parameter is the distance between
the beginning of the curve (tangent point at axis of symmetry of parabola) and the vertex of polygon that is
considered, see Fig. 3 – Parabola – type 3.

531
Reference Guide

Parabola + tangent [end]

Parabolic segment with the crown of parabola at the end of the curve. Parameter is the distance between the
end of the curve (tangent point at axis of symmetry of parabola) and the vertex of polygon that is considered,
see Fig. 4 – Parabola – type 4.

Parabola + vertical axis

Parabola with vertical axis with respect to macro co-ordinate system. Parameter is the length of projection of
tangent into horizontal direction, see Fig. 5 – Parabola – type 5.

532
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

For the second input type, there is just one option

Group of points fitting
The points defined in the tables of co-ordinates are the points, which the curve of the tendon must fit. The
parameters are the tangents of the curve at those points.
If you define the parameter equal to 100, then the tendon is oriented directly to the following point. If the
parameter equals to –100, then the tendon is oriented back to the previous point. Therefore the pair of values
100 and –100 defines a straight part of the tendon between two points.
If the parameter equals to 1000, then the tangent is assumed unknown (arbitrary) and the program will
calculate the tangent automatically.
As a result you can determine the limits -1.0 and +1.0 (angles 45°) for the parameters of reasonable tendon
profile. For example the parameter equal 0.0 is the input for a horizontal tangent.
The principles of the algorithm is:
1. The user defined tangents are respected.
2. Three consecutive points with the identical y (z) co-ordinate will be fitted by a horizontal straight line.
3. The angles of tangent at anchors and at consecutive points are calculated (if they were not defined by
the user). If possible, the whole first and last segment will be fitted by a straight line. If not, the straight
line will be inserted into the half of the length of first and last segment.
4. If the distance of two consecutive points is significantly shorter than the distances of the other points,
a straight line will be inserted into this segment.
5. The difference between radii of two consecutive curves is minimised.
6. The curved segment of opposite curvature is prohibited in connecting part between straight line and
the curve.
7. If two tangents intersect in the half of the length of projection of the curve, a parabola with a vertical
axis is applied.
8. In other cases two parabolas with vertical axis are applied.

Layout and controls of the Edit geometry dialogue

533
Reference Guide

Note: The proportions of individual parts of the edit dialogue were deliberately distorted in order
to fit the picture into one printed page.
Toolbar

Import from file Imports the source geometry from an external TXT or XML file.
Export to file Exports the source geometry into the external TXT or XML file.
Import from library Opens the Tendon source geometry manager and allows you
to import another tendon source geometry to the currently edited
one.
Vertical scale Changes the vertical scale in the graphical preview windows.
Draw vertex label Switches ON/OFF the labels in the graphical preview window for
plane XZ. No labels are drawn in the graphical preview window
for plane XY.
Draw number of vertex If the labels are ON, the numbers of vertices are printed.
in label
Draw vertex If the labels are ON, the numbers of coordinates of the vertices
coordinates in labels are printed.
Zoom icons The set of five standard zoom functions.

534
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Show/hide dot grid Shows/hides the dot grid.

Dot grid settings Enables you to adjust the dot grid so that it meets the needs of
the current project.

Input table for XZ plane

Icon [Delete all nodes]
This command deletes all the nodes in the table for plane XZ.
Icon [Group of points fittings]
Switches the input mode – see paragraph Type of input above.
Input table
Coord X X-coordinate of the vertex of the source geometry.
Coord Z Z-coordinate of the vertex of the source geometry.
Curve type Type of curve "in" the vertex - see paragraph Type of input
above.
Curve parameter The parameter of the curve selected in the item above - see
paragraph Type of input above.

Graphical preview window

This graphical window shows the side-view the defined tendon shape.
You can use the combination "Press-and-hold keys Ctrl+Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse right button" and
zoom-in or zoom-out the drawing, or the combination "Press-and-hold key Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse
right button" and move the drawing around the graphical window of the dialogue.
Input table for XY plane
Icon [Delete all nodes]
This command deletes all the nodes in the table for plane XY.
Icon [Group of points fittings]
Switches the input mode – see paragraph Type of input above.
Input table
Coord X X-coordinate of the vertex of the source geometry.
Coord Y Y-coordinate of the vertex of the source geometry.
Curve type Type of curve "in" the vertex - see paragraph Type of input
above.
Curve parameter The parameter of the curve selected in the item above - see
paragraph Type of input above.

Graphical preview window

This graphical window shows the plan-view the defined tendon shape.
You can use the combination "Press-and-hold keys Ctrl+Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse right button" and
zoom-in or zoom-out the drawing, or the combination "Press-and-hold key Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse
right button" and move the drawing around the graphical window of the dialogue.
Main control buttons
The [OK] button confirms the input/changes made in the dialogue and closes it.
The [Cancel] button abandons the input/changes made in the dialogue and closes it.

Note: It is not allowed to input three successive points in one line. In other words, the direction of
the tendon must change in each input vertex.

535
Reference Guide

Editing the existing source geometry of tendon

Editing the tendon source geometry in the Tendon source geometry manager
The existing source geometry can be edited from the Tendon source geometry manager opened through the
tree menu.
Procedure to edit the tendon source geometry through the tree menu
1. Open tree menu branch Library > Post-tensioning.
2. Start function Tendon source geometry.
3. The Tendon source geometry manager opens on the screen.
4. Select the source geometry that is to be edited.
5. Click button [Edit].
6. The Edit geometry dialogue is opened on the screen.
7. Modify the shape of the tendon.
8. Confirm the changes with [OK].
9. Close the Tendon source geometry manager.

Alternatively, the source geometry can be also edited through the property table of an existing tendon.
Editing the tendon source geometry from the property table of the post-tensioned internal tendon
Procedure to edit the tendon source geometry through the property table
1. Select the tendon whose source geometry is to be edited (in fact you may select any tendon).
2. The properties of the selected tendon are displayed in the property table in the property window.
3. Click the three-dot button in item Source geometry.
4. The Tendon source geometry manager opens on the screen.
5. The source geometry of the selected tendon is highlighted in the list of all available source
geometries.
6. Click button [Edit].
7. The Edit geometry dialogue is opened on the screen.
8. Modify the shape of the tendon.
9. Confirm the changes with [OK].
10. Close the Tendon source geometry manager.

Note: It is important to keep in mind that the tendon that is input in a beam member through the
source geometry, remembers that it was created this way. Moreover, the tendon keeps the link to
its source geometry. Consequently, once the source geometry is edited in the Edit geometry
dialogue and the changes are confirmed, the shape of all (repeat: All) tendons based on this source
geometry that have been already input into the model of the structure change their shape
accordingly.

Internal tendons
Parameters of the post-tensioned internal tendon
General

Name Specifies the name of the tendon.

Description This item allows the user to add a short description, if required.
Number Defines the number of the tendon.

Type (informative value)

Shows the type of the tendon (internal / external).
Layer Selects the layer of the tendon. Each layer can be assigned to a

536
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

different layer, if necessary.

Geometry

Geometry input Selects the type of the geometry input.

Source geometry
For this type of geometry, the user must define the shape of the
tendon geometry in advance. The predefined tendon is then
allocated to the beam member and, if necessary, modified in its
shape to follow the shape of the beam member. The tendon is
not stretched to fit the length of the beam member. But, it may
be curved to follow the real shape of the beam member. The
latter may be used to simplify the input of tendons in curved
beam members. The tendon is defined by its "projection" into
plane. Then, it is allocated to the curved beam member. The
shape of the tendon is modified, so that the local x-axis of the
tendon follows precisely the local x-axis of the beam member.
Direct input
For this type of geometry input, the user defines directly the
shape of the tendon in the graphical screen where the beam
member to-be-reinforced is displayed. In order to define exactly
the shape that is required, an additional toolbar is added to the
top of the command line. This added toolbar allows for the input
of circular and parabolic intervals.
Note: The same toolbar is displayed when e.g. a new beam
member is input.
LCS Specifies the way in which the local coordinate system of the
tendon (y- and z- axis) is defined.
Source geometry (This item is available only if the Geometry input is set to
Source geometry)
Here, the user must select the required source geometry for the
tendon. It is also possible to invoke the Tendon source
geometry manager and input a new source geometry.
Origin of source (This item is available only if the Geometry input is set to
geometry Source geometry)
It is necessary to define where the origin of the source geometry
is to be put in the model. In other words, the user must position
his/her tendon into the 3D space.
The position is defined by (i) the offset from the origin of the
coordinate the local coordinate system of the allocated beam
member or (ii) in the global coordinates.
Coord. X, Y, Z (This item is available only if the Geometry input is set to
Source geometry)
These three values define the position of the tendon source
geometry origin. The exact meaning depends on the adjustment
made in the item above.

Material

Material Specifies the material of the tendon.

Number of tendon Defines the number of wires or strands in tendon.

elements in tendon
Number of tendons in Specifies the number of identical tendons (e.g. in walls of single
group or multi box section, etc.) which create a group. For details see
the picture below the table.
Area (informative value)
Shows the sectional area of the tendon.

537
Reference Guide

Diameter of duct Defines the diameter of the tendon duct. The parameter is used
for the test of tendon geometry only.
Allocation This item opens an extra dialogue where the user can select
which beam members are allocated to the tendon. In general,
more than one beam member can be allocated to one tendon,
as e.g. in the case of several shorter beam members running
one after another that are reinforced by one long tendon.
Load case The user must select a load case from a list. The list contains
only the load cases the Load type of which is set to Prestress.
The effects of the prestressing of the tendon will be stored in
this load case.

Picture: Tendon groups

Stressing

Type of stressing The type of stressing is analogous to pre-tensioned tendons.

Prestressing from The program offers four options. Simultaneous anchoring of
both ends is neither economic nor practically feasible.
The options offered in the list are self-explanatory.
Coefficient of friction Friction coefficient for curved part of tendon.
in curved part of
tendon
Coefficient of friction (only for CSN / STN standard)
in straight part of Friction coefficient for the straight part of tendon.
tendon
Unintentional angular (only for EC2, NEN)
displacement The unintended angular displacement of the tendon.
Anchorage set Defines the anchorage set at the beginning of the tendon.

Stress during Defines the anchorage set at the end of the tendon.
correcting

538
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Duration of keeping Specifies the duration of keeping constant stress during the
stress correction of relaxation.
Initial stress – begin Initial stress at the beginning of tendon (before seating).

Overhang of tendon Defines the part of the tendon at its beginning which is taken
not included in into account when calculating the losses, but not when creating
structural model - the structural model. This is useful in the case that the beam
begin member (and tendon) protrudes beyond the theoretical support
and the user does not want to include this part of the structure
into the model, but wants to have proper losses and tendon
geometry for the export into CAD.
Overhang of tendon Analogous to the previous item.
not included in
structural model – end
Distance between Defines sections where results are presented.
sections for output

Arc
(These items are available only if the Geometry input is set to Direct input)
Curve type Circle + tangent
Circle: the parameter is the distance between the vertex and the
tangent point, see picture below.
Circle + radius
Circle: the parameter is the radius of the circle, see picture
below. The radius and two tangents determine the circle. The
length of the tangents is calculated automatically.
Symmetrical parabola + tangent
Parabola: the parameter is the distance between the vertex and
the tangent point (beginning or end of parabola), see picture
below. The length of the tangent and the axis of symmetry of the
parabola determine the parabola.
Curve parameter Here the corresponding curve parameter can be input.

Picture: Circle + tangent; Cicle + radius

539
Reference Guide

Picture: Symmetric parabola + tangent

Defining a new post-tensioned internal tendon

Procedure to input a post-tensioned internal tendon
1. Open service Structure.

540
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

2. Open branch Tendons.

3. Start function Post-tensioned internal tendon.
4. Fill in the required parameters.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Depending on the selected type of geometry input, (i) either define the allocation of the source
geometry, or (ii) input directly the geometry of the tendon.
7. End the function.

Editing the existing internal tendon

When the internal tendon is already defined and there is a need to change any of its properties, the following
procedure can be applied:
Procedure to edit a post-tensioned internal tendon
1. Select the tendon to be edited.
2. The property window displays its properties.
3. Change any parameter that needs to be modified.
4. If required, invoke any of the Action buttons at the bottom of the property window to carry out other
possible alterations (available actions are listed below).
5. When ready, deselect the tendon.

Action buttons available during the editing of a post-tensioned internal tendon

Select allocation
The allocation of the tendon to particular beam member(s) can be made through item Allocation in the
property table of the tendon (which is displayed in the property window during the editing). This option (in the
property table) allocates the beam member in a simple table.
On the other hand, action button Select allocation starts an interactive function that enables the user to select
the allocated members directly in the graphical window.
Edit tendon geometry
This action button starts editing of the shape of the tendon directly in the graphical window.
Table edit geometry
This button opens a dialogue on the screen. The dialogue shows the table with all the vertices of the tendon.
The coordinates and arc types including their parameters can be modified here.
Tendon losses
This action is not strictly an editing one, but it is useful during the design of the tendon as well. This action
button starts the calculation of prestressing losses and shows the results in a separate dialogue. For more
read chapter Prestressing losses in an internal tendon.
Calculation info
This button opens a report summarising the parameters of the tendon necessary for the calculation.
Default values
This action button sets all the tendon parameters to the default values (i.e. the values pre-adjusted by the
manufacturer of the program).

Prestressing losses in an internal tendon

The procedure to calculate the losses
1. Select the tendon to be edited.
2. The property window displays its properties.
3. Click Action button [Tendon losses] at the bottom of the property window.
4. Review the results in a separate preview window – see below.
5. Close the dialogue.
6. Deselect the tendon.
Preview window with calculated tendon losses

541
Reference Guide

The preview window is split into two parts. In first part some details of tendon parameters are displayed
together with the table of results. Using the toolbar at the top of the window, all the information can be exported
to a file (HTML, TXT, PDF, RTF) or directly to printer. In the second part a diagram is shown the distribution of
various losses along the length of the tendon. It is possible to change the scale of the diagram or the text. And
the pop-up menu (pressing right mouse button), offers some basic functions for the picture: zoom, print, copy
to clipboard or save to an external file.

External tendons
Parameters of the post-tensioned external tendon
General

Name Specifies the name of the tendon.

Description This item allows the user to add a short description, if required.
Number Defines the number of the tendon.

Type (informative value)

Shows the type of the tendon (internal / external).
Layer Selects the layer of the tendon. Each layer can be assigned to a
different layer, if necessary.

Material

Material Specifies the material of the tendon.

Number of tendon Defines the number of wires or strands in tendon.

elements in tendon
Number of tendons in Specifies the number of identical tendons (e.g. in walls of single
group or multi box section, etc.) which create a group. For details see
the picture below the table.
Area (informative value)
Shows the sectional area of the tendon.
Load case The user must select a load case from a list. The list contains
only the load cases the Load type of which is set to Prestress.
The effects of the prestressing of the tendon will be stored in
this load case.

Stressing

Stress after anchoring The stress in the tendon after anchoring.

542
 Construction stages, prestressing, TDA

Defining a new post-tensioned external tendon

Procedure to input a post-tensioned (free) internal tendon
1. Open service Structure.
2. Open branch Tendons.
3. Start function Post-tensioned free tendon.
4. Fill in the required parameters.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Input the geometry of the tendon.
7. End the function.

Editing the existing external tendon

When the external tendon has been already defined and there is a need to change any of its properties, the
following procedure can be applied:
Procedure to edit a post-tensioned external tendon
1. Select the tendon to be edited.
2. The property window displays its properties.
3. Change any parameter that needs to be modified.
4. When ready, deselect the tendon.

Note: There are Action buttons for this type of tendon.

Changing the geometry of a post-tensioned external tendon

When you need to alter the shape (geometry) of an external tendon, follow the rules for the modification of a
beam member. In terms of geometry, the external tendon is in fact a beam member. It has end nodes, possible
intermediate nodes and the "body" connecting them. Therefore, you may simply edit the coordinates of the
nodes, drag-and-drop the tendon or invoke any function for geometric manipulation.

Results
Results for post-tensioned tendons
The results for post-tensioned tendons can be displayed the same way as for pre-tensioned tendons. Read
chapter Pre-tensioned prestressed concrete > Results > Tendon stresses.

543
Calculation
Introduction to calculation
Once the model of an analysed structure is created, the calculation of required type may be performed.
SCIA.ESA PT applies the deformation variant of finite element method. The employed beam finite element
takes account of shear deformation.
Detailed information about the applied calculation methods may be found:
 in the following chapters and
 in a separate book Advanced calculations accessible via menu function Help > Contents >
Advanced calculations.

Checking the data

Introduction to check of data
It is a good practice and sometimes even necessity to check the data of the model from time to time or at least
before calculation. Especially for excessive models that have been modified by means of various manipulation
functions, it may happen that the model contains some invalid or obsolete data. Such data should be removed
from the project as they:
 occupy memory unnecessarily,
 could mislead some functions.
SCIA.ESA PT provides aN easy-to-use wizard that automatically searches the project and reveals improper or
invalid data.

Note: The check of data is important from one more point of view. By default the intersecting
beam members are not joined to each other. If they are supposed to act together, a linked node
must be defined in their intersection. The Check of data function traces such places and suggests
the user to make an automatic connection of affected beam members. This operation may thus
resolve possible future problems with numerically unstable solution.

Parameters of data check

The Check data function tries to reveal invalid data in the project.
Check of nodes
Search nodes This option is ALWAYS ON. This check ensures that nodal
data are correct. This option is a kind of protection against
possible damage of saved data.
Search duplicate nodes If ON, the program searches for nodes with identical co-
ordinates If two nodes of identical position are found they are
merged into a single node (i.e. one of them is removed).
The value defined in Minimal distance between two points in
the Mesh Setup dialogue is used for this check.
Ignore parameters This option is effective only if parametric nodes have been
defined in the project.
If ON, only the co-ordinates (calculated from input parameters)
are checked. If two nodes of the same co-ordinates are found,
they are merged into one node.
If OFF, the check procedure consists of two steps. First, the co-
ordinates are checked. If any two nodes of the same co-
ordinates are discovered, the defining parameters are check in
the second step. If the two nodes are defined by means of the
same parameters, they are considered duplicate and merged
into one. If, however, the two nodes are defined using different
parameters or different formulas, the nodes are let unchanged.

545
Reference Guide

If the Check of nodes discovers any disorder or "mess" in nodal data, another dialogue is displayed.
Members with This item shows the number of discovered undefined nodes.
undefined nodes Such nodes MUST always be corrected and therefore the
checkbox is ALWAYS ON.
Free nodes If any free nodes are found in the project (i.e. nodes that do not
belong to any member) the user may delete them.
It is recommended to delete any free nodes unless the user
has a specific reason for their existence in the project (e.g. free
nodes may represent a temporary state during the definition of
a complex model).
Duplicate nodes Any duplicate nodes found in the project are reported here and
it up to the user whether they will be deleted or not.
It is recommended to delete duplicate nodes.

Check of beam members

Check beams The user may decide if beam members in the project should be
checked or not.
Search null beams Beam members of zero length are found. If such beam
members are discovered in the project, they are always
deleted.
Search duplicate This check goes through the model and traces double beam
beams members, i.e. beam members of identical position, orientation
and length. If such beam members are discovered, the user
may decide whether they should be preserved or whether only
one of the identical beam members should be kept in the
project.

Note: Any two beam members are considered identical if they have identical end nodes. If two
different beam members defined by means of four different end nodes "lie" one on another, they
are not identical under the terms of this check. However, if standard check options are selected, the
check procedure discovers duplicate nodes first, merges them, and consequently also the two
beam members become identical under the conditions of the check.
Check of structure
Note: Contrary to original versions of ESA PT, version 5 DOES NOT perfom the check of
structure within this function. That means that any problems in connection of "touching" members
are not solved by this function.
A separate function Connect members/nodes must be used for this task. The function can be
found in tree menu Calculation, Mesh; on toolbar Geometry manipulation; or in menu Modify.
Check of additional data
Check additional data The program checks all additional data (e.g. loads, supports,
position etc.) and verifies the position of these data on members. For
example, some loads might have got out of beam member
during manipulation functions. Such improper data are
corrected.

Note: For the procedure read chapter Performing the check of data.

Performing the check of data

The procedure for the check of data
1. Start function Check of data:
a. either using menu function Tree > Calculation, mesh > Check structure data,
b. or using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Check structure data.
2. The Check data wizard opens the setup dialogue on the screen.
3. Select the data types that should be searched and verified.

546
 Calculation

4. Start the check with button [Check].

5. The program scrutinises all the project data.
6. If no disproportion is revealed a message telling that no problems have been found is issued.
7. If something suspicious has been discovered, the wizard displays the statistics in the dialogue.
Numbers of invalid entities for individual data types are stated.
8. Now, decide which data types should be corrected and which ones left unchanged (i.e. put a tick to
the data type that should be corrected and remove the tick from those types that should be skipped
during the correction phase).
9. Finish the Data check with button [Continue].
10. The invalid data are removed from the project.

Generating the FE mesh

Parameters of FE mesh
The user may control the shape of the finite element mesh. The Mesh setup dialogue offers a whole range of
parameters.
Mesh
Minimal distance between two If the distance between two points is lower that the value
points specified here, the two points are automatically merged
into a single point.
Average size of 2D elements / The average size of edge for 2D elements. The size
curved members defined here may be altered through refinement of the
mesh in specified points.
Defines also the size of finite elements generated on
curved members.
Average number of tiles of 1D If required, more than finite element may be generated
element on a single beam member. The value here specifies how
many finite elements should be created on a beam
member.
The value is taken into account only if the original beam
member is longer than adjusted minimal length of
beam element and shorter than adjusted maximal
length of beam element.
This option is useful mainly for stability, non-linear and
dynamic calculations where more than one finite
element is required per a structural member.

1D elements (beam members)

Minimal length of beam
element
Maximal length of beam
element
Average size of cables,
tendons, elements on subsoil
Generation of nodes in
connections of beams
If a beam member of a structure is shorter than the
value here specified, then the beam member is no
longer divided into multiple finite elements even though
the parameter above (Average number of tiles of 1D
element) says so.
If a beam member of a structure is longer than the value
here specified, then the beam member will be divided
into multiple finite elements so that the condition of
maximal length is satisfied.
It is necessary to generate more than one finite element
on cables, tendons (prestressed concrete) and beam
members on subsoil.
For more information about this issue see book
Advanced calculations, chapter Analysis of a beam
on elastic foundation versus mesh size.
If this option is ON, a check for "touching" beam
members is performed. If an end node of one beam

547
Reference Guide
Generation of nodes under
concentrated loads on beam
elements
Generation of eccentric
elements on members with
variable height
No. of FE per haunch
Apply the nodal refinement
2D elements (slabs)
Generation of refinement
bands along the lines
Include current points of the
curve into the mesh
Te generate predefined mesh
To smooth the border of
predefined mesh
Maximal out of plane angle of
a quadrilateral
The ratio of element sides in
the line refinement bands
548
member "touches" another beam member in a point
where there is no node, the two beam members are
connected by a FE node.
If the option is OFF, such a situation remains unsolved
and the beam members are not connected to each
other.
The function has the same effect as performing function
Check of data.
If this option is ON, finite elements nodes are generated
in points where concentrated load is acting.
This option is not normally required.
If this option is ON, eccentric elements are generated on
beam members with haunch and on beam members of
variable height. The finite element axis is no longer in
the axis of the original beammember, but it follows the
generated cross-sections along the haunch.
Specifies the number of FE generated on a haunch.
Specifies the mode of refinement on beam members.
No members
The refinement is applied to 2D members only.
Only beam members
The refinement applied to 2D members and beam
members the type of which is adjusted to "beam (80)"
All members
The refinement applied to 2D members as well as to all
beam members.
If ON, a band of refined mesh is generated along every
edge (both external and internal) of a slab.
If ON, every definition point of every line (i.e. every
vertex of a polyline – if a beam member is defined using
a polygon) becomes a finite element node.
If OFF, the line is divided according to the specified
element size parameters and the definition point do not
have be transferred to FE nodes.
If ON, the generator first tries to generate in every slab a
regular quadrilateral finite element mesh complying with
the adjusted element-size parameters. Only if required,
additional necessary nodes are added to the mesh.
If OFF, the finite element mesh nodes are generated
across the slab and the nodes are the elements are then
created from the nodes.
If ON, the border elements of predefined mesh are
included into the process of smoothening, i.e. the mesh
area consisting of regular quadrilaterals can be reduced.
This value determines whether a spatial quadrilateral
whose nodes are not in one plane will be replaced by
triangular elements. This parameter is meaningful only
for out-of-plane surfaces – shells. The assessed angle is
measured between the plane made of three nodes of
the quadrilateral and the remaining node of this
quadrilateral.
Defines the proportion of edges in quadrilateral
elements that may be potentially used to generate a
refinement strip along border and internal edges.
 Calculation

Predefined mesh ratio
Defines the relative distance between the predefined
mesh formed by regular quadrilateral elements and the
nearest edge. The edge may consist of an internal edge,
external edge or border of refined area. The final
distance is calculated as a multiple of the defined ratio
and adjusted average element size for 2D elements.

The procedure for the adjustment of mesh parameters

1. Call menu function Setup > Mesh.
2. Adjust the parameters (see above).
3. Confirm with [OK].
The finite element mesh may be previewed using function Mesh generation under tree menu Calculation.

Previewing the FE mesh

For complex structures it may be useful to review the FE mesh before the results are scrutinised in detail.
It is possible to control the display style of the mesh through a set of view parameters.
Tab Structure > Group Mesh
Draw mesh If ON, the mesh is displayed on the screen.

Free edges Free edge is an edge of a 2D element that is not

connected to any other element.
It may be useful to see which parts of the structure are
not connected to the rest of the model.
If this option is ON, the free (unconnected) edges of 2D
finite elements are highlighted using a thick line.
This option is independent on the option above.

Display mode The user may decide about the drawing style for the
mesh (wired, rendered, transparent).
Note: Rendered and transparent option may affect the
adjustment of colours for symbols relating to the mesh
(e.g. local axes).

Tab Structure > Group Local axes

Nodes If ON, the program displays local axes of the nodes in
the generated finite element mesh.

Mesh elements If ON, the program displays local axes of the generated
finite elements.

Tab Labels > Group Mesh

Display label If ON, the selected labels are displayed together with the
mesh.
Note: If parameter Draw mesh from tab Structure -
group Mesh is OFF, no labels are displayed.

Nodes If ON, the numbers of nodes are displayed.

Elements 1D If ON, the numbers of 1D finite elements are displayed.

Elements 2D If ON, the numbers of 2D finite elements are displayed.

549
Reference Guide

Tab Labels > Group Labels of local axes

Nodes If ON, the labels (x, y, z) of node local axes are
displayed.

Mesh If ON, the labels (x, y, z) of finite element local axes are
displayed.

The procedure for the preview of finite element mesh

1. Open View parameters setting dialogue.
2. Select Tab Structure or Labels.
3. In the required group adjust the required parameters.
4. Confirm the settings.
5. Check the mesh.
6. If required, switch the mesh off again.

Mesh refinement
Mesh refinement
The finer the finite element mesh is, the more accurate the obtained results are (i.e. the closer to the
theoretically correct ones) and the more time consuming the solution is and the more disk space is needed
both during the calculation and for storage of the results. The mesh size should be adjusted considering the
load the structure is subject to and taking account of the requirements on the calculation.
The generation of the mesh is based on the adjusted size for 2D elements. The generator creates such
elements whose edge size is as close to the adjusted value as possible. Also the division of slab / shell
borders and internal edges is based on this. Any internal nodes of slabs / shells are taken into account as well.
The mesh must be made finer in certain areas. The mesh may be refines in a circular area around a specific
point, in a band along a defined line or over the whole slab / shell.
If any two refinement areas overlap anywhere, the smaller element size is used. The refinement area does not
have be fully inside the "master" slab /shell. Only a part of the refinement area may be located inside it.

Refinement around a node

The refinement area is circular with its centre in a specified point. The finite element size outside the circle is
the standard FE size for 2D elements adjusted in FE mesh setup dialogue. The element size in the centre of
the circle is the given refined value. The size of elements in between varies linearly from the two limits.
Name Identifies the refinement.
Radius Defines the radius of circular area where the mesh will be
refined.
Ratio Defines the ratio between the average element edge size in the
centre of refinement area and the average preset element size.
dx, dy, dz Defines possible shift of the centre of refinement area from the
specified point. Thus the refinement area may be placed
anywhere in the structure.

The procedure for the adjustment of node refinement

1. Call function Node mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh
refinement > Node mesh refinement.
2. Adjust the parameters (see above).
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select nodes where the refinement should be used.
5. Close the function.

550
 Calculation

Refinement along a line

The finite element size is reduced along the specified line.
Name Identifies the refinement.
Size Defines the size of refined elements.

Note: If this type of refinement is used without proper attention, it may result in really "strange"
shapes of finite elements along the selected line. This may happen especially if the size along the
line is too far from the standard element size that is used for other edges of the elements along the
selected line (see the figure below).

The procedure for the adjustment of line refinement

1. Call function Line mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh
refinement > Line mesh refinement.
2. Adjust the parameters (see above).
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the line along which the refinement should be used.
5. Close the function.

Refinement across an area

The finite element size is reduced over the specified area.
Name Identifies the refinement.
Size Defines the size of refined elements.

The procedure for the adjustment of line refinement

1. Call function Line mesh refinement using tree menu function Calculation, mesh > Local mesh
refinement > Line mesh refinement.
2. Adjust the parameters (see above).
3. Confirm with [OK].
4. Select the regions over which the refinement should be used.
5. Close the function.

Calculation types
General calculation parameters
Any type of calculation can be controlled by means of a set of parameters.
Advanced solver option If this option is ON, the user may specify which load cases, or
load case combination in case of other than linear calculation,
will be calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated load cases or
combinations are always calculated.

551
Reference Guide

Proper FEM analysis of If this option is ON, torsional constant and shear relaxation are
cross-section calculated by means of finite element method for cross-
parameters sections defined as (i) general cross-section, (ii) geometric
shapes or (iii) wooden sections.
Neglect shear force If this option is ON, transverse shear deformation is ignored.
deformation In other words, this option ON means that the Kirchhoff
approach is applied (a normal is always perpendicular to the
deformation line).
The option OFF means that the Mindlin approach is applied (a
normal is not perpendicular to the deformation line).
Type of solver Direct or iterative solution type may be selected.
Number of sections on Defines the number of section for evaluation of results on a
average member beam member of "average length".
Section is always created in both end points and under
concentrated loads. The average length is determined from the
real length. Shorter beam members contain fewer sections
while longer beam members contain more sections.
Maximal acceptable If the maximal value of translation specified here is exceeded,
translation the user is asked to confirm that s/he still want to review the
results.
Maximal acceptable If the maximal value of rotation specified here is exceeded, the
rotation user is asked to confirm that s/he still want to review the
results.

Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue that
opens on the screen when a calculation is started.

Static linear calculation

When performing the static linear calculation, the user may specify the general calculation parameter to control
the calculation method and process.

Static nonlinear calculation

In addition to general parameters controlling the calculation, the non-linear calculation enables the user to
define additional options.
Maximum iterations Specifies the number of iterations for the non-linear calculation.
This value is taken into account only for the Newton-Raphson
method. For the Timoshenko method, the number of iterations
is automatically set to 2.
The termination of calculation is controlled by means of
convergence accuracy or by means of the given maximal
number of iterations. If the limit is reached, the calculation is
stopped. If this happens, it is up to the user to evaluate the
obtained results and decide whether (i) the maximum number
of iteration must be increased or whether (ii) the results may be
accepted. For example, if the solution oscillates, the increased
number of iterations won’t help.
Plastic hinge code If this option is ON, the non-linear calculation takes account of
plastic hinges. It is possible to select the required national
standard that will be used to reduce limit moments. If no
standard is selected, no reduction is performed.
Geometrical If this option is ON, the second order effects are considered
nonlinearity during the calculation.
It is possible to select either Timoshenko or Newton-Raphson
method.
For both methods, the exact solution of beam members is

552
 Calculation

implemented. It takes account of normal forces and shear

deformation for any kind of loading. Transformation of internal
forces into the deformed beam member axis is included.
Number of increments This parameter is applied for both Newton-Raphson and
Timoshenko method only. The values for individual methods
are independent and remembered by the programme.
Therefore, if you adjust 1 increment for Timoshenko method
and four increments for Newton-Raphson method, this
parameter will change every time you swap from one method
to the other.
Usually, one increment gives sufficient results. If deformation is
large, the calculation issues a warning and the number of
increments can be increased. The greater the value is, the
longer it takes to complete the calculation.

Limits of the calculation

Total number of nodes and finite elements unlimited
Total number of non-linear combinations 1000
Maximal number of iterations (in one increment) 999
Maximal number of increments 99

Note: Static non-linear calculation can ONLY be performed after the static calculation of the
same project has been carried out successfully. In other words, non-linear calculation is a two-step
procedure: (i) linear calculation must be completed, (ii) non-linear calculation can be started.

Dynamic natural vibration calculation

In addition to general parameters controlling the calculation, the dynamic calculation enables the user to define
additional options.
Number of eigenvalues Here the user specifies how many eigen frequencies should be
calculated.

Calculation for selected mass combinations

If general option Advanced solver option is ON, the user may specify which mass combinations will be
calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated are always calculated.

Note: The dynamic calculation can be carried out for mass combinations only.

Dynamic forced harmonic vibration

The principles of how SCIA.ESA PT deals with a structure subject to a harmonic load are given in chapters:
 Loads > Load types > Dynamic loads > Harmonic load
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining the harmonic load case
 Results > Evaluating the results for harmonic load
And the core of dynamic calculations is laid down in:
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Dynamic load cases
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining a new dynamic load case

Harmonic band analysis

Harmonic Band Analysis = Harmonic analysis performed as a multiple analysis on a range of frequencies.
Description

553
Reference Guide

This calculation represents a new way of dealing with the calculations in harmonic analysis. Multiple analyses
on a range of frequencies are carried out. The harmonic analysis is possible for a range of frequencies
controlled by the user. In the standard harmonic analysis, the forces and the frequency are defined. In this type
(Harmonic Band Analysis) of analysis, the frequency of the harmonic force varied over a range and the
harmonic analysis is performed for multiple values in that range.
To fit the needs of this type of calculation, a new load case type named "Harmonic Band Analysis" has been
introduced into ESA PT. the properties of this load case are similar to the standard harmonic load case. But,
instead of the frequency, there are 5 new parameters: A, n1, n2, C, N (explained below). The input of loads is
the same as for the standard harmonic load cases.
ESA PT generates a set of extra load cases:
1. one set of main F frequencies (their number is n=n2-n1+1) and
2. n sets of secondary frequencies (each of them with 2N items).
The secondary load cases are the standard ESA PT harmonic load cases and have standard results.
The results of the main load cases are calculated by RMS (root mean square) method from the appropriate set
of the secondary load cases.
ESA PT generates the following result classes:
1. one with all main load cases and
2. n with the sets of the secondary load cases.
Output of results
Alphanumerical output
All the results of the main and secondary load cases are presented in the standard ESA PT way in result
tables using the generated results classes.
Graphical output
The results of the main frequencies or results of the bands around the main frequency can be presented also
graphically in the form of a diagram. For that purpose a new tool has been integrated into ESA PT.
Refresh after modifications of the structure and changes in other input values
When the user changes parameters n1, n2 or N, all the generated load cases and all the generated result
classes are deleted and all the document items with band analysis load cases are not valid any more. If any
other project data are changed, all generated items remain in the project and their content is updated after next
calculation.
(Little) Theoretical background
The user defines constants A, n1, n2, C, N.
The default values are: A = 2, n1 = 6, n2 = 30, C = 3, N = 10.
From these data, a geometric series are generated using the following formula

where n varies from n1 to n2 with a step of 1.

The result is a series of so-called main frequencies F. The default set is: 4,00; 5,04; 6,35; 8,00; 10,08; etc.
Around each of these values, an interval Fi- - Fi+ is defined:

The interval [Fi- - F] is now divided into N steps to generate the secondary frequencies "f".
For each value of "f" a harmonic analysis is carried out. The displacement or inner force in a specified node in
a given direction is calculated, giving N result values. The same is done for the interval [F – Fi+]. From these
2N values, one value is calculated using RMS (root mean square) and assigned to the main frequency F.
Combination with other load cases
The results of this analysis can not be combined with other static and dynamic analyses.
Input of the load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis
The input of the load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis requires similar prerequisites as other dynamic load
cases.

554
 Calculation

Procedure do define a new load case for the Harmonic Band Analysis
1. In the Project setup dialogue, on tab Functionality, select Dynamics and Harmonic band analysis.
2. In the Dynamics branch of the tree menu define at least one Mass group and at least one
Combination of mass groups.
3. Then you may open the Load case manager and input a new load case for the Harmonic Band
Analysis.
4. Select the following options and define the appropriate parameters:
a. Action type = variable
b. Load group = as required in the particular project
c. Load type = dynamic
d. Specification = Harmonic band analysis
e. Parameters = as required in the particular project
f. Master load case = none or as required in the particular project
g. Mass combi = as required in the particular project
5. When ready, close the Load case manager.

Note: Before the calculation is performed, the load case manager shows just this (these) input
load case (cases). All the automatically generated load cases, generated according to the
description provided above, are added to the Load case manager only after the calculation has
been carried out.
Example
The list of load cases after performed Harmonic Band Analysis may look like

This picture shows an extract of the list of load cases. It contains one main frequency (BA1-F1) and eight
secondary frequencies (BA1-4, BA1-3, BA1-2, BA1-1, BA1+1, BA1+2, BA1+3, BA1+4).
Performing the Harmonic Band Analysis
In order to start the Harmonic Band Analysis, the linear static calculation must be run.
Note: Similarly to other dynamic calculations, attention must be paid the size of the finite
elements. This is true also in simple structures with a few beam members only. The analysis may
require a certain number of finite elements in order to calculate the total number of required bands.
Display of results of Harmonic Band Analysis
There is a special display mode for the results of the Harmonic Band Analysis. This mode is available in the
following functions of service Results:
 Beams > Internal forces,
 2D members > deformation of nodes,
 2D members > Internal forces.
In this mode a new item (parameter) appears in the property window. This item is called Text output and can
be set to two options: (i) Texts or (ii) Graph.
The Text option displays the results in a standard way, i.e. using the diagram in the graphical window and
alphanumerical table in the Preview window.
The Graph option draws a special diagram in the Preview window. For this option one more item is added to
the property window: Selection tool. This tool – accessible through the three-dot button – allows you to select
the beam members or slabs and nodes for which the diagram is to be displayed.
The later will be demonstrated on a few examples.
Example 1 - Setup for graphical result at main frequencies at a selected mesh node:
Function: Deformation of nodes

555
Reference Guide

Type of load: Class

Class: Main
Text output: Graph
Selection tool: S1, node no. 1.

Example 2 - Setup for graphical result at a selected band for a selected mesh node:
Function: Deformation of nodes
Type of load: Class
Class: Sec3
Text output: Graph
Selection tool: S1, node no. 1.
Note that for a band, beside the deformation curve also the RMS is drawn.

Example 3 - Setup for envelope graphical result at main band frequencies, all nodes selected:
Function: Deformation of nodes
Type of load: Class
Class: Main
Text output: Graph
Selection tool: all members, (by default all nodes are selected)
Extreme: Global

556
 Calculation

Example 4 - Setup for graphical result at the main band frequencies for all nodes displayed in the same
diagram:
Function: Deformation of nodes
Type of load: Class
Class: Main
Text output: Graph
Selection tool: all members, (by default all nodes are selected)
Extreme: no

Dynamic seismic calculation

The principles of how SCIA.ESA PT deals with a structure subject to a harmonic load are given in chapters:
 Loads > Load types > Dynamic loads > Seismic load
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining the seismic load case
And the core of dynamic calculations is laid down in:
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Dynamic load cases
 Loads > Load cases > Dynamic load cases > Defining a new dynamic load case

557
Reference Guide

Buckling analysis
Adjustment of general parameters may control the calculation.
Calculation for selected stability combinations
If general option Advanced solver option is ON, the user may specify which stability combinations will be
calculated. Otherwise, all non-calculated are always calculated.

Note: The buckling calculation can be carried out for stability combinations only.

Nonlinear stability calculation

Non-linear stability is in its first phase calculated as normal nonlinear calculation using N-R method. The load
is incremented in steps, but the incrementation does not stop at the load intensity defined by the non-linear
combination and continues until the singularity is reached. Then the solution goes back to the last regular state
and the critical load intensity is found from this state by means of eigenvalues, i.e. refined solution is sought in
the interval between the last regular and singular state.The accuracy of the solution is therefore determined by
the number of load increments. The load intensity defined in the non-linear combination has two meanings.
First, when divided by the number of the increments, it specifies the size of load increment and, second, the
calculated coefficient of the critical load is related just to it.

Soilin calculation parameters

Solver parameters relating to SOILIN module
Soil combination Specifies the load combination that is used for the calculation
of C parameters.
Even though it is not an exact solution, for practical reasons the
C parameters are not calculated separately for each load case
or each load case combination. The user must specify one
particular reference combination that is used to calculate the C
parameters. The calculated C parameters are then applied in
all remaining defined load cases and combinations.
Note: The combination must be a linear
combination (not an envelope).
Max soil interaction Limits the size of iteration step.
step
Size of soil surface Defines the size of FE element generated "in contact" with
element subsoil.
C1x Resistance of environment against wP (mm) [C1z in MN/m3]
C1y Resistance of environment against wP/xP (mm/m) [C2x in
MN/m]
C1z Resistance of environment against wP/yP (mm/m) [C2y in
MN/m]
C2x Resistance of environment against uP (mm) [C1x in MN/m3]
C2y Resistance of environment against vP (mm) [C1y in MN/m3]

C parameters
The C parameters in the Solver setup dialogue are used as starting values for the iterative calculation. These
values may be ignored if combined Soilin-subsoil support has been chosen and the user specified that a
certain C parameters is to considered as user-defined. See chapter Surface support on slab.

Non uniform damping in dynamic calculation

Non uniform damping
This type of calculation is a dynamic calculation that takes into account non-uniform damping on members and
supports.

558
 Calculation

There is a possibility to input a damping value on each 1D and 2D member. It can be (i) relative damping, (ii)
logarithmic decrement or (iii) Rayleigh damping. Moreover, a damper can be input in direction X, Y, Z of a
nodal flexible support.
If a dynamic calculation (seismic + harmonic) is carried out and the load case has "Damping group" defined,
then ESA PT takes into account the non-uniform damping of the members and supports. The modal relative
damping for each direction (i.e. the damping percentage for each mode and each direction) is calculated
automatically for each load case.
All 1D and all 2D members must have the damping value assigned before the calculation starts or the default
value is used. The input of damping in supports is possible only in the GCS directions.

Damper setup
The damper setup provides for the input of global defaults.
Base value – logarithmic Default value of logarithmic decrement.
decrement
Alpha factor for supports Factor for supports.
Must be >0; default 1.
Maximal modal damping Is used to limit the calculated damping.
Default 30%.

Defining a new damping group

Procedure to define a new damping group
1. In the Project setup dialogue > tab Functionality options Dynamics and Non proportional
damping must be selected.
2. Open service Dynamics.
3. Start function Damping group.
4. The Damping group manager is opened on the screen.
5. Click button [New].
6. A new damping group is added to the list of defined groups.
7. If necessary, change the name and/or other group parameters.

Damping group parameters

Name Specifies the name of the group.
Description Provides a short description of the group.
Type of default damping Global default
The default values are taken from the Damper setup.
Material default
The default values are taken from material properties.

Defining a new damper

A damper can be defined in a support, on a beam membe, on a slab.
Procedure to define a new damper
1. Open service Dynamics.
2. Start function Dampers.
3. If no damping has been defined so far, the Damping groups manager is opened on the screen.
Define at least one damping group.
4. The Dampers branch is opened in the tree menu bar.
5. Select and start the function corresponding to the required type of damper:
a. 1D damping,
b. 2D damping,
c. Node damping.
6. Fill in the parameters.
7. Select the appropriate beam member/slab/support where the damper is to be installed.

559
Reference Guide

8. End the function.

1D damping
Name Specifies the name of the damper.
Type Select the type of the damping parameter.
Logarithmic decrement
Relative damping
Rayleigh damping
Value Specifies the value of the parameter selected in the item
Alpha / Beta above.
Note: The Rayleigh damping requires the definition of
two parameters. The remaining two types need just one
value.

2D damping
Name Specifies the name of the damper.
Type Select the type of the damping parameter.
Logarithmic decrement
Relative damping
Rayleigh damping
Value Specifies the value of the parameter selected in the item
Alpha / Beta above.
Note: The Rayleigh damping requires the definition of
two parameters. The remaining two types need just one
value.

Node damping
Name Specifies the name of the damper.
Damping X Defines the damping in individual directions of the global
Damping Y coordinate system.

Damping Z

Performing the calculation

Adjusting the calculation parameters
The procedure to adjust calculation parameters
1. Open the Solver setup dialogue
a. either use menu function Setup > Solver,
b. or use tree menu function Calculation > Solver setup.
2. The Setup dialogue is opened on the screen.
3. Adjust the parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK] button.

Note: The adjustment of these parameters may affect the layout of the calculation dialogue that
opens on the screen when a calculation is started.

Performing the calculation

The procedure for performing of the calculation
1. Call function Calculation:
a. either using menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Calculation,

560
 Calculation

b. or using tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Calculation.

2. The Calculation settings dialogue opens on the screen (see below).
3. Adjust the parameters for calculation.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. The calculation is started and solver report dialogue is opened on the screen (for small models the
dialogue may just flash).
6. When the calculation has been finished, close the calculation report dialogue.

9. Proceed to evaluation of result.

Note: All the calculation parameters may be adjusted in the Solver Setup dialogue.

Controlling and reviewing the calculation process

Once a calculation has been started a Solver report dialogue opens on the screen.

For small models the dialogue may just "flash" on the screen and disappear again.
On finishing the calculation, the program shows the dialogue with the result of the calculation.

561
Reference Guide

If everything is OK, the Solver report dialogue can be closed and the user may proceed to the evaluation of
results. If anything went wrong during the calculation, a message is displayed and it’s up to the user to resolve
the situation.

Performing the repetitious calculations

Very often it may be necessary to repeat the calculation with the same calculation settings. It is possiblr to
repeat a normal calculation. In addition, SCIA.ESA PT offers function Hidden calculation. This function starts
the calculation without showing any information on the screen. Once the calculation is finished, all possible
open windows with displayed results are automatically regenerated.
The Hidden calculation can be performed by means of:
 either menu function Tree > Calculation, Mesh > Hidden calculation,
 or tree menu function Calculation, Mesh > Hidden calculation,

 or button [Hidden calculation] ( ) on toolbar Project.

Note: If just one type of calculation is available in the calculation dialogue, the hidden calculation
simply runs on the background. If, however, two or more calculation types are accessible
(depending on project and solver settings), the calculation dialogue is displayed and you must
choose the required calculation type.

Repairing the instability of model

It may happen that the model is so defined that the numerical solution is impossible. Most often some kind of
numerical instability may occur due to mistakes in the definition of boundary conditions.
Maximum displacement has been reached
The first case is that the numerical solution itself was correct, but the results seem to be distorted. This
situation can be revealed by the check of maximum permissible vale of displacement and rotation. If the
adjusted values are exceeded, a warning is given.
The results may be reviewed even if this situation happens. It is up to the user’s experience to decide whether
the structure is so soft and the large deformation is reasonable or whether a mistake was made in the
definition of the model.
The point where the maximum displacement has been found is stated in the warning dialogue.

Singular stiffness matrix

562
 Calculation

If the stiffness matrix is singular, the solution cannot be obtained at all. The user is informed about the
problematic place in the model. The place is stated in the warning dialogue.

Solution methods
Direct solution
This is a standard Cholesky solution based on a decomposition of the matrix of the system. The advantage is
that it can solve several right sides at the same time. This type of solution is effective especially for small and
middle-size problems when disk swapping is not necessary. The limit depends on the size of the problem and
on the size of available RAM memory.
It can be said that this solution is more convenient for most of problems.
Disadvantage of this solution may emerge with extremely large problems. The calculation time may rise
significantly if RAM size is insufficient. What’s more, if the available disk space is not large enough, the
problem cannot be solved at all.
If the problem is excessive and of poor numerical condition, the rounding error may be so big that it exceeds
the acceptable limit. This may result in imbalance between resultants of load and reactions. The difference
between the total sums of loads and reactions should not be greater than about 0.5%. But even the value of
0.1% suggests that the results may be suspicious.

Note:
Generally, the direct solver should be used only for beam structures (without any 2D members) or
planar structure composed of 2D members (i.e. a plate or a wall).
In other cases the direct solver should be used as a default solution method. The application of
iterative solution depends on the total number of nodes, band width and memory size of the
particular computer. If the direct solution leads to an excessive disk swapping, the process is
slowed down sifgnificantly and the iterative solution must be employed. This solver does not require
so much memory – 150 000 nodes needs about 250 MB RAM. Other reason for the application of
iterative solution may be poor determinetness of the equation system. These numerical problems
can result in a discrepancy between the total load and sum of reactions. If this difference is greater
than 5%, a warning is issued and the direct solver should be replaced by the iterative one.

Iterative solution
The Incomplete Cholesky conjugate gradient method is applied.
Its advantage is minimal demand on RAM and disk size. Therefore, the solution is convenient especially for
extremely large problems that cannot be solved by means of direct solution or whose calculation time would be
enormous for that kind of solution due to excessive disk operations.
Another advantage is that due to the ability of continuous improvement of accuracy the method is able to find
technically accurate solution even for equation systems that would be numerically unstable in the direct
solution.
The disadvantage is that the method can employ only one right side at a time and this increases the time
demands for equation systems with several right sides.

Note: See the note in the Direct solution.

563
Reference Guide

Timoshenko method
The algorithm is based on the exact Timoshenko’s solution of a beam member. The axial force is assumed
constant during the deformation. Therefore, the method is applicable for structures where the difference of
st nd
axial force obtained by 1 order and 2 order calculation is negligible (so called well defined structures). This
is true mainly for frames, buildings, etc. for which the method is the most effective option.
The method is applicable for structures where rotation does not exceed 8°.
The method assumes small displacements, small rotations and small strains.
If beam members of the structure are in no contact with subsoil and simultaneously they do not form ribs of
shells, no fine division of beam members into finite elements is required. If the axial force is lower than the
critical force, this solution is robust. The method needs only two steps, which leads to a great efficiency of the
method.
The first step serves only for solution of axial force. The second step uses the determined axial forces for
Timoshenko´s exact solution. The original Timoshenko´s solution was generalised in SCIA.ESA PT and the
shear deformations can be taken into account.

Newton-Raphson method
The algorithm is based on Newton-Raphson method for solution of non-linear problems. The method is robust
for most of problems. It may, however, fail in the vicinity of inflection points of loading diagram. This may occur
for example at compressed beam members subject to small eccentricity or to small transverse load. Except for
the mentioned example, the method can be applied for wide range of problems. It provides for solution of
extremely large deformations.
The load acting on the structure can be divided into several steps. The default number of steps is eight. If this
number is not sufficient, the program issues a warning.
The rotation achieved in one increment should not exceed 5°.
The accuracy of the method can be increased through refinement of the finite element mesh or by the increase
in total number of increments. For example, the solution of a single beam divided to a single finite element will
not give sufficient results.
In some specific cases, high number of increments may solve even problems that tend to a singular solution
which is typical for the analysis of post-critical states.

Note: This method requires that a beam member is divided to at least four (4) finite elements.
Usually, such division is adjusted automatically whenever Newton-Raphson method is selected for
calculation.

Initial deformations
Introduction to initial deformations
The initial deformation may be used in non-linear calculation to define the shape of the structure at the
beginning of the analysis. Thus a state of initial imperfection in shape can be easily modelled.

Initial-deformation manager
The initial deformation curves can be defined and edited in the Initial-deformation manager. This manager is
one the SCIA.ESA PT numerous database managers. Its operation and layout are analogous to other
database managers.
In the Initial-deformation manager the user may:
 define a new initial deformation curve,
 edit an existing initial deformation curve,
 copy an existing initial deformation curve,
 delete an existing initial deformation curve,
 save the existing initial deformation curve to an external file.
The Initial-deformation manager can be opened in two ways:

564
 Calculation

 using tree menu function Libraries > Initial deformations,

 using menu function Libraries > Initial deformations.

Initial deformation curve

The initial deformation is defined in the editing dialogue by means of a position-deformation curve.
The curve may be defined in a simple operated dialogue.

The user just has to type pairs of corresponding values for position and deformation. Next to the table the
curve is displayed with the position on the vertical axis and deformation on the horizontal axis.
The curve can be then later assigned to required direction in the definition of a non-linear combination.

Defining a new initial deformation curve

The procedure for the definition of a new initial deformation curve
1. Open the Initial-deformation manager.
2. Click button [New] to insert a new curve.
3. A new curve is added to the list of defined curves.
4. Select the new curve.
5. Press button [Edit] to open the editing dialogue.
6. In the editing dialogue, type pairs of corresponding values for the position-deformation curve.
7. Confirm with [OK].
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 as many times as required.
9. Close the manager.

565
Reference Guide

Applying the initial deformation

The initial deformation curve may be used in a non-linear combination to define the initial imperfect shape of
the structure.
The procedure for the application of the initial deformation curve
1. Create a new non-linear combination or edit the existing one.
2. Item Type of imperfection set to an option requiring the input of an initial deformation curve (i.e.
either Functions + curvature on beams or Inclination functions).
3. In the appropriate items choose the required initial deformation curve (each direction can use
different initial deformation curve).
4. Finish the definition or editing of the non-linear combination.
5. Use the combination for calculation.

Plastic hinges
Introduction to plastic hinges
If a normal linear calculation is performed and limit stress is achieved in any part of the structure, the
dimension of critical elements must be increased. If however, plastic hinges are taken into account, the
achievement of limit stress causes that plastic hinges are inserted into appropriate joints and the calculation
can continue with another iteration step. The stress is redistributed to other parts of the structure and better
utilisation of overall load bearing capacity of the structure is obtained.
On the other hand, there is a risk in this approach. If a hinge is added to the structure, its statical
indeterminateness is reduced. If other hinges are added, it may happen that the structure becomes a
mechanism. This would lead to a collapse of the structure and the calculation is stopped.
Plastic hinges can be thus used to calculate the plastic reliability margin of the structure. The applied load can
be increased little by little (e.g. by increasing the load case coefficients in load case combination) until the
structure collapses. This approach can be used to determine the maximum load multiple that the structure can
sustain.
Plastic hinges are considered only at ends of individual beam members. No selection of beam members is
made for the calculation with plastic hinges. If this type of calculation is selected, all beam members in the
structure are tested .
The calculation is similar to the calculation of beams with gaps. All beam members in the structure are tested
and if the limit stress is reached, the plastic hinge is inserted. If however the stress lowers in the next iteration
step, the plastic hinge may be removed.
Approaches described in EC3, DIN 18800 and NEN codes are implemented in SCIA.ESA PT.

Plastic hinges to EC3

Axis Axial load V =<0.5 V_ V>0.5 V_
yy NSd =<0.25 NRd Mpl,y,Rd Mpl,y,Rd (1-)
yy Nsd >0.25 NRd Mpl,y,Rd 1.11 (1-n) Mpl,y,Rd 1.11 (1-n-)
zz NSd =<0.25 NRd Mpl,z,Rd Mpl,z,Rd (1-)
zz NSd >0.25 NRd Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 . Mpl,z,Rd 1.56 .
. (1-n)(n+0.6) . (1-n-)(0.6+n/(1-))

where:
2
 (2 VSd / VRd –1)
a NSd / NRd
Nsd axial force
VSd shear force
Mpl,y,Rd full plastic moment around yy axis
Mpl,z,Rd full plastic moment around zz axis

566
 Calculation

VRd plastic shear force

NRd plastic axial force

Plastic hinges to DIN 18800

Axis Axial load V =<0.33 V_ V>0.33 V_
yy N =<0.10 Npl,d Mpl,y,d Mpl,y,d (1.136-0.42)
yy N >0.10 Npl,d Mpl,y,d 1.111 (1-n) Mpl,y,d (1.25-1.113 n -
- 0.4125 )

Axis Axial load V =<0.25 V_ V>0.25 V_

zz N =<0.30 Npl,d Mpl,z,d Mpl,z,d (1-0.82) / 0.95
2 2
zz N >0.30 Npl,d Mpl,z,d (1-n ) / 0.91 Mpl,z,d (1-0.95 n -
- 0.75 )/0.87

where:
 V / Vpl,d
a N / Npl,d
A axial force
V shear force
Mpl,y,d full plastic moment around yy axis
Mpl,z,d full plastic moment around zz axis
Vpl,d plastic shear force
Npl,d plastic axial force

Plastic hinges to NEN

For IPE sections
Axis Condition
yy n / 0.18 + <= 1 Mpl,y,d
yy a <=0.18 Mpl,y,d
yy a >0.18 Mpl,y,d 1.22 (1-n)
yy <=0.3 Mpl,y,d
yy >0.3 Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)
zz n <=0.36 Mpl,z,d
zz n >0.36 Mpl,z,d (1-((n-0.36) / 0.64)2)
zz <=0.3 Mpl,z,d
zz >0.3 Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)

For other sections

Axis Condition
yy n / 0.10 + <= 1 Mpl,y,d
yy n <=0.10 Mpl,y,d

567
Reference Guide

yy n >0.10 Mpl,y,d 1.11 (1-n)

yy <=0.3 Mpl,y,d
yy >0.3 Mpl,y,d (1.1-0.3 n)
zz n <=0.20 Mpl,z,d
zz n >0.20 Mpl,z,d (1-((n-0.20) / 0.80)2)
zz <=0.3 Mpl,z,d
zz >0.3 Mpl,z,d (1.1-0.3 n)

where:
 V / Vpl,d
a N / Npl,d
A axial force
V shear force
Mpl,y,d full plastic moment around yy axis
Mpl,z,d full plastic moment around zz axis
Vpl,d plastic shear force
Npl,d plastic axial force

Calculating with plastic hinges

To perform the calculation with plastic hinges taken into account, it is necessary to:
 select Nonlinearity in Project Setup dialogue,
 select required Plastic hinge code in Solver setup dialogue,
 define non-linear load case combination / combinations,
 have linear calculation of the structure successfully completed,
 start nonlinear calculation and obtain successful solution.

Global optimisation
Introduction
ESA PT enables you to perform an optimisation of the whole structure or of its selected part. The optimisation
can be run for steel and timber structures or for steel or timber parts of multi-material projects.
It is possible to optimise the value of:
 standard steel code check,
 fire resistance steel check,
 timber code check,
 bolted diagonal check.
It is also possible to perform several of the above mentioned optimisation types and then compare the results.
It is always the cross-section size or the bolt size that is optimised. In general, you must select which cross-
section types or bolted diagonal connections used in your model are to be optimised. And it is up to you to
select the cross-section types and bolted diagonal connections that are relevant to your work. It is also your
responsibility to think in advance and define and assign to beam members as many cross-section types as
necessary for a proper design and optimisation of the project.

Note: In order to perform the optimisation, calculation must be already performed.

568
 Calculation

Optimisation manager
As stated in the introduction you may perform several different optimisations. You may run the optimisation
and compare the results for different parts of the structure, for different optimisation types (e.g. standard and
fire resistance code check). Therefore, all the defined optimisations are stored in the Optimisation manager.
Thus you do not have to define all the optimisation criteria and parameters again and again.
The Optimisation manager is a standard SCIA ESA PT database manager with usual features and functions.
Procedure to open the Optimisation manager
1. Open service Calculation, Mesh.
2. Start (double-click) function Optimisation.

Defining a new optimisation

Procedure to define and run a new optimisation
1. Start the Optimisation manager.
2. Click button [New] to open the Overall optimisation dialogue.
3. Define the optimisation parameters and criteria.
4. Click button [Optimisation] to run the calculation and see its result.
5. If required, click button [Calculation] to re-calculate the model in order to reflect the results of the
optimisation.
6. Depending on what you exactly need and want, you may repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as
required.

Note: Please note, that a mechanical repetition of Optimisation and Calculation in turns may
lead to a "never-ending" cycle. The optimisation may find cross-section "A" as optimal. When you
perform the calculation, the internal forces are redistributed to reflect the optimisation results. When
you run optimisation now, it may find cross-section "B" as optimal. And another re-calculation once
more redistributes the internal forces. And it may happen that the subsequent optimisation finds the
cross-section "A" as optimal once again. And so on, and so on, and so on.

Optimisation parameters and criteria

Items
The item defines the type of the optimisation and the cross-section type that should be optimised. The type of
optimisation (e.g. standard and fire resistance code check) must be defined for the first item only. All the other
items in one optimisation definition are of the same type. One optimisation item represents one cross-section
type or one bolted diagonal connection that will be optimised.
[Add item] Adds a new optimisation item into the list.
[Remove item] Removes the existing optimisation item from the list.

Property
Name Defines the name of the optimisation (criteria).
Type of loads The optimisation may be performed for load cases, load case
combinations, result classes, etc.
Load Specifies the particular load case, combination, etc. for which the
selected cross-section type will be optimised.
Optimisation (informative) Tells the type of the optimisation.
type
Item count (informative) Shows the number of defined optimisation items.

Parameters
Cross-section optimisation
Cross-section Defines the cross-section type to be optimised.
Parameter Selects the dimension (e.g. section depth, width, etc.) that will be

569
Reference Guide

optimised.
Length (informative) Shows the current size of the selected dimension.
Minimum Defines the minimal applicable size for the optimised parameter.
Maximum Defines the maximal applicable size for the optimised parameter.
Step Defines the step for the optimisation.
Maximal check Defines the maximal acceptable value of unity check of the optimised
cross-section.
Optimised (informative) Shows the unity check for the optimised connection.
check

Bolted diagonal optimisation

Bolted diagonal Specifies the bolted diagonal to be optimised.
Bolt Specifies the bolt used.
Optimised (informative) Shows the unity check for the optimised connection.
check

Picture
The picture shows the shape of the optimised cross-section or the symbol of the bolted diagonal connection.

Control buttons
Optimisation Performs the optimisation for the defined optimisation items.
Calculation Carries out the calculation for the optimised model.

Advanced calculations
Advanced calculations
More details about various advanced types of calculation can be found in a separate book: Advanced
calculations.

570
Results
Opening the service Results
Service Results may be opened after a calculation has been successfully finished.
Service Results can be opened using:
 tree menu item Results,
 menu function Tree > Results,

 icon Results ( ) on toolbar Project.

The service may look like:

As soon as the service is opened in the tree menu window, the Property window is filled with parameters
corresponding to active function of service Results. The parameters in the Property window can be used to
adjust "WHAT" is displayed and "HOW" it is displayed.
Common parameters are:
Load type Specifies what "load type" is considered for the display.
Available load types are:
load cases,
load case combinations,
result classes.
Load case / For each of the above specified load type a set of available
combination / class items (load cases, combinations, result classes) is offered.
Selection The user may display the results either on all or only selected
beam members.
Filter The set of beam members where the results are displayed may
be specified by means of a filter.
Values For each of the result groups (internal forces, deformations,
etc.) a set of quantities id offered for display. The user may
select which one is really shown.
Drawing setup It is possible to adjust the style of the diagrams.
Other specific Some of the available result groups (internal forces,
parameters deformations, etc.) may have other group-specific parameters.

Note: If a calculation has not been performed yet or the structure has been somehow modified
after the calculation has been carried out, service Results is not accessible (to be precise, it is not
offered in the tree menu).
Note: The collection of functions offered in the service may vary according to the project type
and authorised modules.

Selecting the beam members for display

The result diagrams may be displayed on (i) all the beam members in the structure, or (ii) selected beam
members only.
Which variant is actually applied can be adjusted in the Property window by means of parameters Selection
and Filter.
Selection
All If this option is selected, the result diagrams are displayed on

571
Reference Guide

all beam members in the structure.

Current The result diagrams are displayed on all the currently selected
members.

Advanced This option allows the user to display diagrams on selected

members. It is similar to the previous option but offers
something more. See below the table.
Named This option allows the user to select one of the previously
created, named and saved selections.

Selection: Advanced
With this option, you may select required members on which the results are to be displayed and review the
results. Then you may clear the selection. The result diagrams, however, remain displayed. Now you may
make a new selection and invoke the refresh of the screen. The program will ask you what to do. The available
options are:
Use current selection
The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh are deleted. New result diagrams are displayed on the
currently selected members only.
Add current selection to previous selection
The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh remain displayed. New result diagrams are shown on the
currently selected members.
Use previous selection
The current selection is ignored. The result diagrams displayed during the previous refresh remain displayed.
Subtract current selection from previous selection
If there is a result diagram currently displayed on one of the currently selected members, this diagram is
hidden. The result diagrams that are shown on members that are not in the current selection remain displayed.
Filter
No No filter is applied.

Wildcard The set of beam members for display is defined by a wildcard

expression.
E.g. expression "N*" lists all entities whose name starts with
letter N. The expression "B??" lists all entities whose name
starts with letter B and is followed by two characters.

Cross-section Diagrams are shown only on entities of selected cross-section.

Material Diagrams are shown only on entities of selected material.

Layer Diagrams are shown only on entities inserted into selected

layer.

Structure
This parameter is useful especially for nonlinear analysis construction stages analysis.
Initial The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the initial (non-
deformed) shape of the analysed structure.
The "smoothness" of the diagram is specified by the Number
of sections on average member that can be adjusted in
Solver setup.

Mesh The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the initial mesh
for the evaluated construction stage. For the results of stage 1
or for results of a simple (non-staged) calculation it is identical
with the previous option. However, for stage 2 and subsequent
ones it represents the "initial" shape of the structure at the

572
 Results

beginning of the evaluated constructions stage

The smoothness of the diagram is given by how fine the
generated mesh is.

Deformed The diagrams of result quantities are drawn at the final

(deformed) shape of the analysed structure.
The deformation of the structure uses fixed predefined scale
1:1.

Selecting the load for the display of results

The results may have calculated for: (i) load cases, (ii) load case combinations, (iii) result classes.
In service Results, the user may specify which group (or set) should be taken into account for display. The
selection can be made in item Type of loads in the Property window of service Results.
load case Diagrams are drawn for specific load case.
combination Diagrams are drawn for specific load case combination.
result class Diagrams are drawn for specific result class.

The choice of a particular load case, combination, or result class can be then made in item located just below
Types of loads in the Property window of service Results. Only one load case, combination or result class
may be selected at a time.

Adjusting the style of result diagrams

The style of the diagrams may be adjusted in the Drawing setup dialogue.
Representation
outline lines only

outline lines only with

hatches in sections

filled form

Limits
The limits may be adjusted to control the colour of the diagram. The user specifies two numerical values.
Three colours are used to display the diagram. The colours may be adjusted in the Setup > Colours and lines
dialogue. Rules for use of individual colour are explained in the enclosed table:

573
Reference Guide

Colour: This colour is used for those sections where the value of
Result if below min displayed component is lower that the minimum limit.

Colour: This colour is used for those sections where the value of
Result if above max displayed component is greater that the maximum limit.

Colour: This colour is applied for the sections where the value of
Result if between min displayed component is between the limits.
and max

Example of limits application

Let’s assume the following adjustment of limits and colours:
Maximum 1000
Minimum -4000
Colour: blue
Result if below min
Colour: red
Result if above max
Colour: green
Result if between min
and max

The diagram will look like:

Another example
The settings described above may be used to "hide" specific range of the result values. For example, if you
want to see just the positive branch of the diagram, it is possible to use the following trick.
Maximum 0
Minimum 0
Colour: colour that is very close or identical to the background colour;
Result if below min e.g. very very light blue if white background is used

Colour: e.g. blue

Result if above max
Colour: does not matter
Result if between min

574
 Results

and max

The diagram will look like:

Description
Values Numerical values are printed next to the diagram.
Sections in labels The relative co-ordinate of individual sections is printed next to
the diagram.
Load case or The name of appropriate load case or combination is printed
combination in labels next to the diagram.

Angle of text
The user may specify the inclination of the text for diagram labels.
Drawing of more components
If more than one component is drawn at the same time, it is possible to define the style of the composed
diagram.
Same scale All the diagrams for the same beam member use the same
scale.
Same height All the diagrams for the same beam member use the same
height.
Space between Defines the "gap" between two adjacent diagrams.
diagrams
Shift of the first Defines the shift of the first diagram from the beam member.
diagram

The procedure for the adjustment of display style parameters

1. Open service Results.
2. Select required group (or set) for the display (e.g. internal forces, bill of material, etc.).
3. Click button [Drawing setup].
4. The Drawing setup dialogue opens on the screen.
5. Set required parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK].

575
Reference Guide

Regenerating the diagrams

When the settings in the Property window of service Results are changed, the diagrams usually require
regeneration. Because the fully automatic regeneration could be very slow for excessive models, it is up to the
user to regenerate the drawing when necessary.
Any time the user makes a change that affects the display, the program paints the cell Refresh in red colour.
Until the user presses the button [Refresh], the cell remains highlighted.

Animation of results
Any result quantity that has been calculated and shown in the graphical window can be displayed also in the
Animation window. This window, as the name suggest, provides for animation of the currently displayed
quantity.
In practice, this may be useful e.g. when dynamic calculation was performed. The animation window enables
the user to view the vibration "in action".
Procedure to activate the animation
1. If necessary, perform the calculation.
2. Open service results and display the quantity you want to be animated including the load case or
combination.
3. Regenerate the window to see the result diagram.
4. Call function Edit > View > New animation window.
5. If required, set the parameters of the window (see below).
6. Start the animation through icon Start animation.
7. When satisfied, close the animation window.
Controls of the animation window

576

Start animation
Pause animation
Repeat the animation
indefinitely
Preset minimal ratio to invert
MAX
Set initial view parameters
Display frame time
Play time
Mode of calculation
Results
This button starts / stops the animation.
This button enables you to pause the animation.
If OFF, just one "cycle" of animation is shown.
If ON, the animation is repeat until stopped manually.
If ON, the quantity is animated in both positive and
negative direction.
The view in the animation window can be adjusted using
standard ESA PT "mouse+keyboard" controls (shift
view, rotate view, zoom in/out).
Specifies the time for how long each calculated screen
is shown. The lower the number, the "finer" the
animation is.
For large projects it may be necessary to adjust greater
number in order to give the computer enough time to
calculate the next screen.
The total time of the animation (i.e. of one "cycle" of the
animation).
The interpolation of the diagram can be performed in
two ways.
Linear
Standard linear interpolation is used.
Sinus
577
Reference Guide

This interpolation gives nicer "motion" of the diagram.

Results on beams
Displaying the internal forces
The procedure to display diagrams of internal forces
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Internal forces on beams.
3. Select the beams for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Adjust the diagram style.
6. Set other display parameters.
7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.
Display parameters for diagrams of internal forces
Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed.
Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.
Principal Specifies whether the components are evaluated in principal or
local axes of beam members.
Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are
attached.
Drawing The diagrams may be drawn in the plane of the screen or in
3D. The 3D option means that the diagrams for individual
components are drawn in corresponding plane.
Section Defines whether the diagram is drawn for defined sections or
only for end-sections on the beam member.
Min This item shows the minimum value of the selected component
on the structure.
Max This item shows the maximum value of the selected
component on the structure.

Extreme
The individual options for parameter Extreme are demonstrated in the table below. For each parameter option
a corresponding simple drawing is added.
No

578
 Results

Section

Local

Beam

Global

Displaying the deformation on beam members

The procedure to display diagrams of deformation on beam members
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Deformation on beams.
3. Select the beams for the display of results.

579
Reference Guide

4. Select the required type of loads.

5. Adjust the diagram style.
6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation on beam members
are analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).
7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Displaying the deformation of nodes

The procedure to display diagrams of deformation of nodes
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Deformation of nodes.
3. Select the beams for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Adjust the diagram style.
6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of deformation of nodes are
analogous to parameters for internal forces on beams).
7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Displaying the resultant of reactions

The procedure to display diagrams of resultant of reactions
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Resultant of reactions.
3. Select the supports for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Set the display parameters.
6. Refresh the screen
Display parameters for diagrams of resultant of reactions
Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed.
Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.
Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are
attached.
Possible options are:
No
Node
Global
Rotated supports Selects the type of supports.

Displaying the nodal space support resultant

ESA PT can display standard resultants of reactions – see chapter Results > Results on beams > Displaying
the resultant of reactions. However, for certain types of structures other representation of the reaction may be
suitable.
Example

580
 Results

Reactions in
node

Nodal Support
Space Resultant

Nodal Support Space Resultant

Function Nodal Support Space Resultant (NSSR) calculates the total resultant of a given reaction. In addition,
the function also calculates the total horizontal component of the reaction.

581
Reference Guide

Calculation principle
For each selected (nodal) support the program does the following:
1. The minimum and maximum extreme of reaction values Rx, Ry and Rz is found.
2. For each extreme reaction value the complementary values are calculated:
a. horizontal component;

a. total resultant;

a. direction (angle to diagonal) of the total resultant;

b. slope of the total resultant ( = Rz / HR);
c. the combination in which the extreme reaction value was achieved is shown.
If there are mope than one combination that have the same extreme reaction value, the combination in which
the maximal total resultant is calculated is displayed.
Note: The function has bee designed to give results for load case combinations and result
classes. It can be however applied also to load cases, and the resultant is calculates as well, but
the search for extreme is irrelevant.
Note: It is NOT the purpose of the function to determine the extreme resultant.
Possible application
The primary application of the function is in the design of masts. When the total resultant is known, it is
possible to determine the direction of the foundation poles under supports. The slope determines the
inclination of the foundation pole. It can be also found whether the pole is under tension or compression. The
angle with the diagonal is required for the following reason. If the angle is too large, an additional shear force
has to be taken into account for the calculation of the foundation.
Nodal Support Space Resultant table in the document
The layout of the default Nodal Support Space Resultant table will be explained on an example of the table
generated for support Sn1 located in node N21.
A table for one support has six lines. Each line contains the extreme value (minimum / maximum) of one
reaction component (Rx / Ry / Rz) and the corresponding calculated values of the Nodal Support Space
Resultant.

Case Shows the load case combination + load case index

from the combination key in which the corresponding
extreme of reaction component was reached.
Support Shows the name of the support and name of the node
where the support is located.
Extreme Indicates the component to which the extreme value
refers to.
Horizontal component Contains the calculated horizontal component of the
Nodal Support Space Resultant.
Resultant Displays the total value of the Nodal Support Space
Resultant.
Angle Shows the orientation of the resultant in plan view.
Contrary to many other functions, this function does not
measure the angle from the axis of the coordinate

582
 Results

system, but from a diagonal line.

What is measured is the deviation between the direction
of the resultant force and the diagonal line (because of
the connection of the supports). To have a general
solution, the diagonal line is the line from the support in
question to the point (0,0,0) in GCS.
Slope Shows the inclination of the resultant from the horizontal
plane.
Rx, Ry, Rz Displays the appropriate reaction component extreme
value.

Note: Some texts in the table header in the figure have been modified (in comparison with
original headers in the real document table) in order to reduce the width of the table to fit the page
in this documentation.
Note: It is convenient to add the Combination key table into the document too, as (in case of the
results for load case combinations and result classes) it provides useful information about the
particular load case in which the extreme value of the reaction component was reached.

The procedure to display the nodal space support resultant

1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Nodal space support resultant.
3. Select the supports for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Set other display parameters.
6. Refresh the screen.

Displaying the reactions

The procedure to display diagrams of reactions
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Supports.
3. Select the beams for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Adjust the diagram style.
6. Set other display parameters.
7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.
Display parameters for diagrams of reactions
Values Specifies the values, i.e. the components, which are displayed.
Either one or multiple components can be displayed at a time.
Extreme Specifies the position on diagrams where numerical values are
attached.
Possible options are:
No
Node
Global
Rotated supports Selects the type of supports.

583
Reference Guide

Displaying the foundation table

Service Reactions contains, among others, the possibility to generate a table with reactions in foundations.
Note: This option is only available for load cases.
A coefficient may be entered for each load case. The reactions in the table are multiplied by this coefficient.
This may be used with advantage to consider a safety factor in reactions.
The table generated in the Preview window contains in general four main parts:
Permanent loads All permanent load cases are considered together. Only the
total reaction (sum of all permanent load cases) is given.
Variable load case Variable load cases which are not in an exclusive group. They
- not exclusive can act simultaneously with all other variable loads.

Variable load cases These load cases cannot act simultaneously with other load
- exclusive cases of the same exclusive group.

Extremes This section contains extreme values composed from all

permanent and variable load cases.

The procedure for the generation of a foundation table

1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Foundation table (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).
4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.
a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,
b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.
5. Review the results.
Parameters of Foundation table function
Selection The results may be shown for either All or User-defined
entities.
Filter Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.
Coefficient This option enables the user to select and / or define a set of
coefficients for individual load cases. The reactions in the
foundation table are multiplied by these coefficients.
Rotated support This option has influence only when rotated supports exist the
project.
If this option is not marked, the reactions in the global axes are
drawn.
If this option is marked, the reactions in the axes of the support
are drawn.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the
service Results and Displaying the internal forces.
Example of a foundation table

584
Results

585
Reference Guide

Displaying the bill of material

The procedure to display diagrams of bill of material
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Bill of material.
3. Select the beams for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Adjust the diagram style.
6. Set other display parameters (Display parameters for diagrams of bill of material are analogous to
parameters for internal forces on beams, although their number is considerably lower).
7. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

586
 Results

Displaying the intensity

If a member of a structure is laid on foundation, it is possible to display the intensity (reaction per meter of
length) in the footing surface.
The procedure for displaying of intensity
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Intensity (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function.
4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.
5. Review the results.
Example

The procedure for displaying of intensity in Preview window

1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Intensity (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function.
4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.
a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,
b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.
5. Review the results.
Example

587
Reference Guide

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the
service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Displaying the stress on members

SCIA.ESA PT calculates various stress components for each member. Simple stress is given here considering
neither code checks nor stability check (buckling, lateral-torsional buckling).
Normal Normal stress in the member.
Shear Shear stress in the member.
von Mises Von Mises (or equivalent) stress in the member.

Fatigue The stress variation between the maximum and minimum

stress in each fibre for the selected load cases or
combinations.
Kappa The stress ratio. This ratio is used in some fatigue check rules
(e.g. DIN).

The procedure for displaying of stress

1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Member stress (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see Note below).
4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.
5. Review the results.
The procedure for displaying of stress in Preview window
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Member stress (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see Note below).
4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.
a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,
b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.
5. Review the results.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the
service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

588
 Results

Selecting the joints for display of connection forces

Usually, the user will probably use module Connections for design and checking of connections in the
structure. However, it may be sometimes useful to perform a manual design and fast checking of an individual
joint manually.
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to select required joints (or nodes), define the "configuration" of the connection
and review easily the internal forces acting in these connections (or nodes).
The term "configuration" in this context means the basic arrangement of the connection. If no "configuration" is
adjusted, the internal forces in the connection are equal to zero, as each joint of the structure must be in
equilibrium, which is one of the principles of numerical method applied for calculation. In order to obtain the
required internal forces, it is necessary to define:
 which beam member (entering the joint) is the owner of the connection,
 which other beam members contribute to the connection (i.e. the internal forces of which beam
members are transferred into the connection).
Let’s assume a node where four beam members meet. Two beam members are vertical and two are
horizontal. The joint then looks like a simple cross. If such a joint is selected and no other adjustment is made,
the resultant internal forces will be equal to zero and won’t be shown.
If, however, one of the beam members (e.g. the bottom vertical beam member) is selected as the owner of the
connection, the function shows internal forces that are transferred into the joint from the remaining three beam
members. The connection should be then designed to resist these forces.
The procedure for selection of required nodes and definition of the "configuration" of connection
1. Open service Results.
2. Activate (doubleclick) function Connection input.
3. If required, type the name of the connection.
4. Select the co-ordinate system. The internal forces will be then determined in the selected system.
5. Confirm with [OK].
6. Select node or nodes where the connection forces should be displayed. A circular mark is drawn
around each of the selected nodes.
7. Close the function.
8. If more than one connection has been defined, clear the selection and select the first one.
9. The Property window displays the parameters of the connection including all the entering beam
members.
10. Select, i.e. unmark, the beam member that is the "owner" of the connection.
11. Select, i.e. mark, all the beam members that contribute to the connection.
12. If necessary, clear the selection and select another connection.

Note: The internal forces in the connection may be then displayed using function Connection
forces.

Displaying the connection forces

Usually, the user will probably use module Connections for design and checking of connections in the
structure. However, it may sometimes be useful to perform a manual design and fast checking of an individual
joint manually. SCIA.ESA PT provides for a simple and fast determination of internal forces acting in selected
joints (nodes).
Once the node and the configuration of the connection are defined, the internal forces may be displayed.
The procedure to display the forces in connection on a screen
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Connection forces (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).
4. If required, redraw the screen using button Redraw in the Property window.
5. Review the results.
The procedure to display the forces in connection in the Preview window
1. Open service Results.

589
Reference Guide

2. Select function Connection forces (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Adjust the parameters of the function (see below).
4. Use function Print / Preview data to create a table in the Preview window.
a. either use menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview data,
b. or use function Print data > Print / Preview data on toolbar Project.
5. Review the results.
Parameters of function Connection forces
Redraw This item invokes a regeneration of the screen when the button
is pressed.
Selection The results may be shown in either All or User-defined
entities.
Type of load The results for load case, load case combination or class may
be displayed.
Load case / This item provides for selection of a particular load case or
Combination combination for the display.
Filter Here, the user may limit the selection to specific entities only.
Values Either all or only selected quantities may be shown.
Individual components If the previous item is set to More components, the user may
specify which particular component should be drawn.
Drawing setup This item enables the user to adjust the view parameters for
the result diagrams.
Extreme This item performs no action for this function.
Section This item performs no action for this function.

Note: More information about display settings for results may be found in chapter Opening the
service Results and Displaying the internal forces.

Displaying the calculation report

If required, the user may display (and subsequently print) a report summarising all the important about carried
out calculation.
The procedure to display the calculation report
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Calculation protocol (just click the function, do not open it by double-clicking).
3. Select the type of calculation you require to be reported.
4. Use function Print > Print / Preview table to create the report.
5. A brief summarising table is shown in the Preview window.

Note: If you double-click the Calculation protocol function in service Results, a small preview
window is opened on the screen. This window contains the required information about the last
performed calculation.

Displaying the results in tabular form

Any of available results can be displayed in tabular form in the Preview window,
The basic principle is explained in chapter Document > Creating the document > Inserting a new section into
document from the graphical window.
The same approach is applied to get the required result values into the Preview window. The user just has to
use function Print / Preview table.

590
 Results

Displaying the results in named fibres

Named fibres of a cross-section
ESA PT enables the user to name selected fibres of selected cross-sections. These named fibres can be then
referred to in the Results service in function Member Stress and the calculated stresses can be displayed in
these named fibres.
The standard procedure consists of two steps: (i) naming the required fibres in the Editing dialogue for the
selected cross-section, (ii) referring to the named fibres in function Member stress in service Results.
Named items dialogue
The first step is made in the Named items dialogue that consists of the following parts and controls.
Cross-section parts This window lists all parts of the selected cross-section.
For "normal" cross-sections there is just one line here.
For composite cross-sections consisting of multiple
partial cross-sections the list is longer.
Cross-section fibres This window contains all the vertices of the selected
cross-section. The list offers the vertices for all the
cross-section parts listed in the top window.
Graphical window This window shows the graphical representation of the
cross-section shape. It also highlights the vertex and/or
part that is currently selected in the lists.
[OK] and [Cancel] buttons These buttons close the dialogue. [OK] confirms the
changes made, [Cancel] abandons them.

Named fibres in function Results > Member stress

Property window in function Results > Member stress is extended by a couple of options to enable you to refer
to the named fibres.
Fibres
Cross-section parts
All
The stress is displayed in all fibres (i.e. the "envelope"
for the stress is displayed)
Top
The stress is displayed in the top fibres of the cross-
section.
Bottom
The stress is displayed in the bottom fibres of the cross-
section.
Named fibre
You may specify the fibre in which the stress is to be
displayed.
Note: You must remember the names of
the fibres defined in the Named items
dialogue as you are required to type the
name in the input field.
All named fibres
The stress diagram is displayed in all fibres that have
been given a name in the Named items dialogue.
If the cross-section consists of two or more parts, you
may select on which one the stress diagram is to be
drawn.
Note: You must remember the names of
the cross-section parts defined in the Named
items dialogue as you are required to type
the name in the input field.

Procedure to name the fibres

1. Open the Cross-section manager.

591
Reference Guide

2. Select the required cross-section.

3. Open the Cross-section editing dialogue.
4. In the properties table find item Edit named items and press the three-dot button [...] next to it.
5. The Named items dialogue is opened on the screen.
6. If required, type the names of the cross-section parts (you are not obliged to name all the parts unless
you want so).
7. If required, type the names of the selected fibres (you are not obliged to name all the fibres unless
you want so).
8. If required, you may:
a. invoke a pop-up menu in the graphical window of the dialogue and employ some
basic display-related functions, or
b. use combination "Press-and-hold keys Ctrl+Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse
right button" and zoom-in or zoom-out the drawing, or
c. use combination "Press-and-hold key Shift" + "Press-and-hold the mouse right
button" and move the drawing around the graphical window of the dialogue.
9. Confirm the Named items dialogue with [OK].
10. Confirm the Cross-section editing dialogue with [OK].
11. Close the Cross-section manager.
Procedure to display the results in the given named cross-section part
1. You must have the named cross-section parts defined.
2. Run the calculation and open service Results.
3. Select function Beams > Member stress.
4. In the Property table go to item Cross-section parts.
5. Select option Named item.
6. A new input box called Named item is added to the table.
7. Type the name of the required cross-section part.
8. Refresh the screen using the action button.
Note: You must remember the names of the cross-section parts defined in the Named items
dialogue as you are required to type the name in the input field.
Procedure to display the results in the named fibre
1. You must have the named fibres defined.
2. Run the calculation and open service Results.
3. Select function Beams > Member stress.
4. In the Property table go to item Fibres.
5. Select option Named item.
6. A new input box called Named item is added to the table.
7. Type the name of the required fibre.
8. Refresh the screen using the action button.
Note: You must remember the names of the fibres defined in the Named items dialogue as you
are required to type the name in the input field.

Note: Option Named fibres is of higher priority that the option Named cross-section parts.
Therefore, once you select Named fibres in the property table, the item Cross-section parts is
hidden.

Example
Let us have a solid rectangular cross-section as in figure below. Further, let us name the fibre number 4 "MY
TOP" and fibre number 8 "MY BOTTOM".
Note: The vertex (fibre) numbers are generated automatically by the program and cannot be
altered by the user.

592
 Results

Let input a beam fully fixed on both its ends and subject it to the self-weight. The deflection diagram clearly
indicates which part of the top and bottom surface of the beam is subjected to tension and which interval of the
top and bottom surface is under compression. (Top surface: towards the end tension occurs, in the middle the
face is under compression. Bottom surface: it is vice versa).

When displaying stress Normal + and Normal- for the user-defined MY TOP and MY BOTTOM fibres, the
diagrams look like:
bottom – compression:

bottom – tension:

593
Reference Guide

top – compression:

top- tension:

Note: The named fibres and named cross-sections work for stresses in beam members only.

Displaying the stress distribution over the cross-section

ESA PT provides for the display of stress distribution over the cross-section of beam members.
The procedure to display the stress distribution over the cross-section
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Beams > Member stress.
3. Set Fibres to All.
4. Set Drawing to 3D stress diagram.
5. Click the three-dot button in item Selection tool and select the beam members and sections in these
beam members where the stress diagram is to be drawn.
6. Select the quantity to be displayed.
7. If required, make other adjustments (e.g. Extreme, Drawing setup, etc.).
8. Refresh the screen.

594
 Results

Fast selection of result quantities for the display

Whenever service Results is opened, a new toolbar appears at the top of command line. Individual buttons
switch on appropriate diagrams.
N axial force
Vy shear force Vy
Vz shear force Vz
Mx bending moment Mx
My bending moment My
My bending moment Mz
ux displacement ux on beam members
uy displacement uy on beam members
uz displacement uz on beam members
deformed displacement of nodes
structure
Rx force reaction Rx
Ry force reaction Ry
Rz force reaction Rz
Mx moment reaction Mx
My moment reaction My
Mz moment reaction Mz

Note: If the command line is hidden, the toolbar does not appear. In order to see the toolbar,
display the command line first using function View > Toolbars.

Displaying the natural frequencies

The calculated eigenfrequencies (natural frequencies) may be displayed in summarised form in a preview
table.
The procedure to display the table with eigenfrequencies
1. If it is not the case, perform dynamic calculation of the project.
2. Open service Results.

595
Reference Guide

3. Double click function Eigen frequencies

Evaluating the results for harmonic load

Once the calculation has been finished, the user may review the results the same way s/he is accustomed to
doing for static calculations.
In addition to standard result quantities, some additional result can be found in the calculation report. These
are:
 omega, period, frequency,
 participation coefficients: wx, i/wx,tot, wy, i/wy,tot, wz, i/wz,tot.
The above-mentioned values are stated for every calculated eigenmode.

Calculation of internal forces in ribs

When calculating internal forces in a rib (see the procedure below to learn how to switch this feature on), a
substitute T-section is used to calculate the results. The web of this T-section is formed by the rib-beam itself,
the flange of the T-section is made of the appropriate effective width of the slab. The effective width of the slab
is then used to determine internal forces from the slab that must be added to the internal forces calculated in
the rib itself. The internal forces in the slab are transformed into the local coordinate system of the rib before
the integration.
T the centre of gravity of the whole substitute T-section
T1 the centre of gravity of the left hand side part of the effective width
T2 the centre of gravity of the right hand side part of the effective width
T3 the centre of gravity of the original rib

596
 Results

The coordinates of centres of gravity are used to determine lever arms in Y and Z direction:
Lever Arm Z1 = T1z – Tz Lever Arm Y1 = T1y – Ty
Lever Arm Z2 = T2z – Tz Lever Arm Y2 = T2y – Ty
Lever Arm Z3 = T3z – Tz Lever Arm Y3 = T3y – Ty
Lever Arm Z = Tz – 0z Lever Arm Y = Ty – 0y

The final internal forces in the rib can be calculated from the formulas below:
N = N beam + N slab, left + N slab, right

Vy = Vy beam + Vy slab, left + Vy slab, right

Vz = Vz beam + Vz slab, left + Vz slab, right

Mx = Mx beam + Mx slab, left + Mx slab, right

My = My beam + My slab, left + My slab, right +

N slab, left * (Lever Arm Z1) – N slab, right * (Lever Arm Z2) +
N beam * Lever Arm Z3;

Mz = Mz beam + Mz slab, left + Mz slab, right +

N slab, left * (Lever Arm Y1) – N slab, right * (Lever Arm Y2) +
N beam * Lever Arm Y3;

The procedure to recalculate internal forces in the rib

1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Beams > Internal forces on beams.
3. Select the beam member(s) where the results should be displayed.
4. Select the quantity to be displayed.
5. In the property dialogue select option Rib.
6. Press button Refresh to see the result diagram.

Results on slabs
Displaying the deformation of nodes on slabs
The procedure to display the deformation of nodes
1. Open service Results.

597
Reference Guide

2. Select function 2D members > Deformation of nodes.

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. Select the drawing style.
7. If required, change the Drawing setup.
8. Set any other parameter.
9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Note: This function displays deformation of both slabs and beam members.

The isolines/isobands of deformation can be displayed either on the original (nondeformed) structure or on the
deformed one. This can be selected in option Standard in the Property window when the function 2D
members > Deformation of nodes is opened.

See also Style of isolines.

Displaying the internal forces on slabs

The procedure to display the internal forces
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function 2D members > Internal forces.
3. Select the slabs for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. Select the drawing style.
7. If required, change the Drawing setup.
8. Set any other parameter.
9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Type of forces
Basic magnitude Results in local slab axes are displayed.
Principal magnitude Results in principal axes are evaluated.
Dimensional magnitude Dimensional quantities are calculated.

Basic magnitude
Project: plate Available quantities are:
mx, my, mxy, qx, qy
Project: wall Available quantities are:
nx, ny, qxy
Project: general (shell) Available quantities are:
mx, my, mxy, qx, qy, nx, ny, qxy

Principal magnitude
Note: Lower index "m" at the quantity name means the membrane component. Lower index "b"
at the quantity name means the bending component.
Project: plate
m1, m2 principal moments
P
alfa angle between the direction of m1 and planar axis x
mtmax maximal torque moment

598
 Results

qmax maximal shear force

Project: wall
n1, n2 principal axial forces
P
alfa angle between the direction of n1 and planar axis x

Project: general (shell)

m1, m2 principal moment
P
alfab angle between the direction of m1 and planar axis x
qmaxb maximal shear force from bending effects
P
beta angle between the direction of qmxo and planar axis x
n1, n2 principal axial forces
P
alfam angle between the direction of n1 and planar axis x
qmaxm maximal shear force from membrane effects

Design magnitude
Project: plate mxD+, myD+, mcD+, mxD–, myD–, mcD–
Project: wall nxD, nyD, ncD
Project: general mxD+, myD+, mcD+, mxD–, myD–, mcD–, nxD, nyD, ncD
(shell)

Design moments in slabs that are elated to the surface with positive element coordinate and are marked with +
(plus sign). Dimension moments in slabs that are elated to the surface with negative element coordinate and
are marked with – (minus sign).
Design forces in a wall are in the middle plane.
Corresponding surface of action of design moments in shells is given directly by the sigh of the moment.

See also chapters Principal internal forces and Design internal forces.

See also chapter Style of isolines.

Note: To activate the use of redistribution strips read chapter Results > Results on slabs >
Redistribution strips > Displaying the redistributed results.

Principal internal forces

The calculation of principal bending forces is performed to the formula below.
The calculation of principal membrane forces is performed to the formula below.

599
Reference Guide

Design internal forces

The calculation of design moments for plates and shells according to the EC2 algorithm (option EC2 is
selected) follows the flow chart from CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201), Annex 2, paragraph A2.8.
The following rule is used for indexes:

The calculation of design moments for walls and shells according to the EC2 algorithm (option EC2 is
selected) follows the flow chart from CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201), Annex 2, paragraph A2.9.
The following rule is used for indexes:

600
 Results

Quantities mxD and myD (respectively nxD and nyD) are design moments (respectively forces) in the
reinforcement. Negative design moments have no practical meaning and are stated just for the reason of
completeness.
Quantity mcD (resp. ncD) is design moment (resp. force) in concrete and these two quantities form an integral
trio with design moments (resp. forces) in the reinforcement in terms of invariant.

Design force in concrete ncD is used for checking of concrete crushing (see CSN P ENV 1992–1–1 (731201),
Annex 2, paragraph A2.9). The standard does not mention the design moments in concrete mcD, but their
meaning is analogous and are stated for the reason of completeness.

Values of design moments and forces according to the standard algorithm (option EC2 is NOT selected) are
calculated according to the left branch of the above mentioned flow charts, i.e. no account is taken of the
relation between mx, my and mxy (respectively nx, ny and qxy). This approach is on the safe side (see below)
but is less optimal.
The right branch of the flow charts is used if the left branch of the flow charts would lead to one reinforcement
direction in compression (negative value of the corresponding quantity). This direction is assigned zero value
of the design quantity, the value in the other direction (and also the necessary reinforcement area) is then
lower than it would be if the right branch of the flow charts were followed (the condition of completeness is met
in both variants). The difference is in increased compression in concrete (mcD and ncD). In this respect the
EC2 algorithm can be considered as more economic.

Displaying the stresses on slabs

The procedure to display the stresses
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function 2D members > Stresses.
3. Select the slabs for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. Select the drawing style.
7. If required, change the Drawing setup.
8. Set any other parameter.
9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

Available stress values

Project: plate, shell
sig1+, sig2+ principal stress at the surface with positive planar z-coordinate
P
alfa+ angle between the direction of sig1+ and planar axis x
sigE+ equivalent stress at the surface with positive planar z-coordinate
sig1–, sig2– principal stress at the surface with negative planar z-coordinate
P
alfa– angle between the direction of sig1– and planar axis x
sigE– equivalent stress at the surface with negative planar z-coordinate
taumaxb maximal transverse shear stress in middle plane

Project: wall
sig1, sig2 principal stress in middle plane
P
alfa angle between the direction of sig1 and planar axis x
sigE equivalent stress in middle plane

601
Reference Guide

taumaxb maximal membrane shear stress in middle plane

See also chapter Stresses.

See also chapter Style of isolines.

Stresses
Principal and maximal shear stresses are calculated by means of widely known formulas:

Equivalent stress is calculated by means of Huber–Mieses–Hencky theory:

Displaying the contact stress on slabs

The procedure to display the contact stresses
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function 2D members > Contact stress.
3. Select the slabs for the display of results.
4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. Select the drawing style.
7. If required, change the Drawing setup.
8. Set any other parameter.
9. If necessary, regenerate the diagrams.

See also Style of isolines.

Calculated C parameters
The calculated C parameters can be reviewed in 2D data viewer or in service Results.
The procedure to view the C parameters in 2D Data viewer
1. Perform the calculation
2. Open tree Calculation, mesh.
3. Start function 2D data viewer.
4. Select function Subsoil.
5. Select the required parameter.
6. Adjust other drawing parameters.
7. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

602
 Results

Note: This function offers all five C parameters. The two that are not calculated (C1x and C1y)
are constant across the whole groundslab. The other ones may have an arbitrary distribution
depending on input boundary conditions.

The procedure to view the C parameters in service Results

1. Perform the calculation
2. Open service Results.
3. Start function Subsoil – C parameters.
4. Select the required parameter.
5. Adjust other drawing parameters.
6. Invoke the refresh of the screen (through button [Refresh] in the property window)

Note: This function offers only the (really) calculated C parameters. The two that are not
calculated (C1x and C1y) and are constant across the whole groundslab are not shown here.

Displaying the settlement

The procedure to display the contact stresses
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function Subsoil - settlement.

603
Reference Guide

3. Select the slabs for the display of results.

4. Select the required type of loads.
5. Set any other parameter.
6. If necessary, refresh the diagram.

Results in membrane elements

With regard to the theoretical assumptions some of the internal forces in membrane elements are not defined
(are zero):
mx zero (see the fig. below)
my zero
mxy zero
qx zero
qy zero
nx defined
ny defined
qxy defined

Differences in the results between membrane and standard element

The difference in the obtained results resulting from the application of the membrane behaviour can be best
demonstrated on a simple example. Let us assume a rectangular plate made of a very thin sheet of steel. The
left-hand side of the figure shows the results obtained for a standard 2D element. The right-hand side then
contains the results for the membrane elements.
Moment mx

604
 Results

Stress Sigma X+

Displaying results for individual FE nodes or elements

SCIA•ESA PT offer the option to display in the screen and in the document the numerical result for all
loadcases in a selected finite element node or element.
This function is available for all types of results in slabs, walls and shells (i.e. 2D members).
Dialogue for the display of results for individual FE nodes or elements

605
Reference Guide

The dialogue consists of the following parts.

Value in element: the values in the nodes of the selected
element are displayed,
node: the value in the given node is displayed.
Get values This button reads the appropriate values and displays
them in the preview window.
Preview / Document This button inserts a table into the document with the
appropriate result for the selected node/element.
Preview window In this small window the selected results are shown.

The procedure to display the results for individual FE node or element

1. Open service Results.
2. Select the required type of results for 2D members.
3. Click action button Values for loadcase.
4. The function dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Specify if the values should be shown for a specific node or element.
6. Click button [Get values] to see the values in the small preview window.
7. If required, click the other button to insert the results into the Document.
8. When ready, close the dialogue.

Isolines, isobands, etc.

Style of isolines
Drawing setup
The style of "isolines" can be adjusted in any function for display of results on slabs using button Drawing
setup.
Display
Available display styles are shown in the following table.
One colour

606
 Results

Smooth

Isolines

607
Reference Guide

Isobands

Labelled isolines

608
 Results

Numbers

Note: Not all the options are necessarily available for every result quantity. Only some may be
accessible for some results.

Note: Some additional parameters may be available for every particular style. These
advanced parameters may differ from style to style.
Additional display parameters
Display mesh If ON, the finite element is drawn as well.
Lightning If ON, the effect of a light is applied.
Number of isolines Defines the number of isolines, i.e. the refinement of the "map"
of the result.
Colour Defines the colour used for the display.

Surfaces with isolines

The isolines may be drawn on a "transparent" slab, on a slab in "background" or on a slab of "rendered" colour.
This option is useful if the slabs are in several levels and the view is so adjusted that one slab overlaps the
other and hides a part of that slab from your view. See the pictures below.
Transparent

609
Reference Guide

Background

Rendered

Advanced settings
The advanced settings may differ accroding to the selected display style.
Advanced settings for isobands
Number of isobands Defines the "refineness" of the scale.
Style Specifies the style.
Filled
The bands are fully in colour.
Inserted isolines
The bands are not filled with the adjusted colour, just
intermediate isolines are drawn in each band (the final display
is similar to "labelled isolines").
Isoband contour: If ON, the band border is drawn as a olid line.
Display
Isoband contour: Label If ON, appropriate scale value is attached to each band.
Predefined palette The use may selecet one of several predefined colour
colours schemes.
Palette colours It is possible to adjust a user-defined colour for each band.

610
 Results

Numerical values for individual isobands or isolines can be adjusted by the user. For more read chapter
Palette values for isobands/isolines.
Advanced settings for labeled isolines
Number of isolines with Determines the number of drawn labelled isolines – see the
description examples below.
6 labelled isolines
+ 1 inserted

3 labelled isolines
+ 1 inserted

611
Reference Guide

3 labelled isolines
+ 3 inserted

Number of inserted Determines the number of drawn non-labelled isolines inserted

isolines between labelled ones – see the examples below.
Coloured isolines If ON, isolines are in colour. If OFF, isolines are black&white.

Maximum and minimum settings

It is possible to define the range of the scale. Normally, the program calculates the range on the basis of the
result values. If required, however, the user may decide to change the top and bottom limit value of the scale.
Ground value
Use value If ON, the user may specify a value (zero by default) that is marked in
Value the diagram. Sometimes the zero value may be useful to see where in
the structure a specific quantity passes from negative to positive
values. Sometimes a specific non-zero value may quickly reveal a
place where some quantity exceeds a certain limit.
The picture for example clearly shows where the deformation exceeds
10 mm.

Draw isoline This option accompanies the option above. If ON then a line marking
the "border" is drawn.
Use +/- palette If ON, not only the border (i.e. the ground value) is drawn but only two
colours are used for the diagram – one for "up-to-the-ground-value"
interval and the other one for the "above-the-ground-value" interval.

612
 Results

(see the picture above and the pictures below)

+/- ON

+/- OFF

Local extremes
This option allows the user to mark places where the displayed quantity reaches its local extreme. It is possible
to display only "minimum peaks" or only the "maximum peaks" or both. Various description options are
available.
Averaging of results in FE nodes
In addition, the type of averaging of the result values over the finite elements can be adjusted.
In centres Each quadrilateral finite element is divided into four triangles.
The values are displayed as they were calculated in the
centres of these triangles. The result is considered constant
over the triangle.

613
Reference Guide

In nodes, no averaging The result value in the four nodes of the quadrilateral finite
element is taken into account. The distribution of the particular
result quantity is considered linear over the element. no
averaging between adjacent finite elements is performed.

In nodes, averaging Similar to the option above, but the results values from
adjacent finite elements are averaged to smooth the
distribution of the result from one element to another

614
 Results

In nodes, averaging on Similar to above, but the averaging is performed for the
macro elements of one slab. On connection of two slabs, the results
from different slabs are NOT processed together.

Note: The averaging may not be available for every result quantity. Only some results may be
subject to this type of "postprocessing".

Detailed setup
The values set here are used as a default option in Drawing setup dialogues when the results on slabs are
drawn in the form of isolines.
Note: More information about the meaining of the parameters can be found in chapter Style of
isolines.

615
Reference Guide

Styles – isolines / isobands

Averaged Selects the default display style for isolines if averaging of results is set
values in nodes to Averaged values in nodes.
Constant values Selects the default display style for isolines if averaging of results is set
on elements to Constant values on elements.
Non-averaged Selects the default display style for isolines if averaging of results is set
values in nodes to Non-averaged values in nodes.
Constant values Selects the default display style for isolines if averaging of results is set
on elem. edge to Constant values on elem. edge.

Common properties
Display mesh The FE mesh is shown / hidden.
Lighting The light is ON / OFF.
Flat shading An Open GL option that can be used if lighting is ON. Provides for a
light effect.
Number of Defines the number of displayed isolines.
isolines
Surfaces with Isolines may be drawn on a transparent slab or the slab is drawn in
isolines specified style.
Isoband style The band (if used) may be filled with corresponding colour or just with
intermediate isolines.
Palette The font and font size of the scale legend can be selected here.
properties
Local extremes Local extremes may be shown or hidden.

Procedure to adjust the isolines parameters

1. Start menu function Setup > Colours/Lines.
2. Select tab Isolines.
3. Press button [Detailed setup].

Palette values for isobands/isolines

The numerical values used in isoline/isoband palette are normally calculated automatically by the program and
respect the range of the evaluated quantity (i.e. the minimal and maximal value) and the adjusted number of
isolines/isobands.
Under certain circumstances, it may be more convenient to adjust the palette values manually. For example,
when designing the reinforcement in concrete beam members it may be useful to adjust the values so that they
correspond to the area of let’s say 1, 2, 3, ... n bars of a certain diameter.
Types of palette values
Automatic palette values – The palette values are calculated automatically and
normal used AS IS, i.e. the decimal digits are used in the length
specified in Setup > Units.
E.g.:

616
 Results

Automatic palette values – The palette values are calculated automatically and
rounded rounded, so that the user can better "read" the results.
E.g.:

User-adjustable palette By default, the palette is identical to Automatic palette

values values – rounded option. But, the user can edit the
values and adjust such values that best meet his/her
needs.
Moreover, the palette becomes "frozen" and is used for
every result quantity.

The procedure to adjust the type of palette values

1. Open the required service (e.g. Results, Concrete, etc.).
2. Select the required function for evaluation of results (e.g. Internal forces in Results).
3. In the Property window, click three-dot button [...] to open the Drawing setup dialogue.
4. In the combo box in the left-hand side part of the dialogue select the required palette values type.
5. If necessary, use button [Advanced settings] to edit the values or to make other adjustments.
6. Confirm with [OK].

Important note: The option with user adjustable palette values requires that maximum and
minimum value of the corresponding quantity is know. These two values become known only after
the quantity has been displayed on the screen at least once. Therefore, until you display the result
diagrams on the screen using action button [Refresh], it is not possible to select the type of palette
values.

Saving the palette for later use

The palette with User-adjustable palette values can be saved and later read into another project or service or
function.
The procedure to save the palette
1. Open the required service (e.g. Results, Concrete, etc.).
2. Select the required function for evaluation of results (e.g. Internal forces in Results).
3. In the Property window, click three-dot button [...] to open the Drawing setup dialogue.
4. In the combo box in the left-hand side part of the dialogue select User-adjustable palette values.
5. The [Save palette ...] and [Load palette ...] buttons appear in the dialogue.
6. If necessary, use button [Advanced settings] to edit the values or to make other adjustments.
7. Use button [Save palette ...] to save the adjusted palette for later re-use.
8. Close the dialogue.

Note: When you need to load a palette you saved, the procedure is analogous to the procedure
above. Just use button [Load palette ...] instead of [Save palette ...].

Averaging strips
Averaging strips
This functionality provides for automatic averaging of peek results around defined points or along defined line
strips on slabs. The users can define several styles how to calculate the averaged values. The averaging can

617
Reference Guide

be applied to internal forces on slabs and to required reinforcement areas used in the design of reinforcement
in concrete slabs.
The averaging strips are defined as what is termed additional data. This fact together with some other
characteristics of the averaging strips leads to the following rules concerning the manipulation with the already
defined strips:
 No geometrical manipulation is supported (i.e. the averaging strip cannot be copied, moved, etc.)
The only exception is the direct editing of the coordinated of the definition points in the Property
Window.
 The averaging strip can be normally deleted.
 The removal or editing of the defined averaging strip DOES NOT influences the results.
 If the slab that contains the averaging strip is moved, copied, etc. the averaging strip "goes with" its
master slab.
 The averaging strips react to the activity of the slabs. It means that only averaging strips that are
defined on active slabs are visible.
 Check of data verifies the position of the strips and all invalid strips (e.g. located out of the master
slab) are deleted.
Averaging strips versus finite element mesh
The averaging algorithm uses only the FE nodes that are located inside the averaging strip. This may cause
certain inaccuracies especially in the combination with larger finite elements. Therefore, it is recommended to
define internal edges along the averaging strips. This ensures that finite element nodes are generated along
the edge of the averaging strip, which may significantly improve the accuracy.
The recommended procedure is thus:
1. Define the model of the structure.
2. Perform the calculation.
3. Review the results.
4. Define averaging strips.
5. Review the averaged results.
6. Decide on the final location and number of averaging strips.
7. Define internal edges along the averaging strips.
8. Repeat the calculation to obtain the improved results.
"Density" of averaging strips
The averaging strips can be defined almost arbitrarily. For the purpose of this paragraph we will distinguish two
situations. Averaging strips defined with a gap between individual strips and averaging strips defined one next
to another (e.g. strip above support and strip in the "middle" of the span defined without any gap in between).
The possible effect of these configurations can be best explained in the following pictures.
Separate strips (i.e. gap between strips)
If the averaging strips are defined as separate, the algorithm can meet the condition that the distribution of the
quantity should as much constant across the span as possible. In other words, the quantity is constant (more
or less) across the whole width of the strip. The vertical white line indicates the strip.

Adjacent strips (i.e. no gap between strips)

618
 Results

On the other hand, if the averaging strips are defined closely one next to another, there is no space between
them for the algorithm to handle the change of the magnitude of the given quantity, as the magnitude cannot
change in step, it must be gradual. Thus one of the strips must be affected by the change in the magnitude.
This is shown in the figure below where the value of the result quantity varies along the width of the strip.

Internal forces versus required reinforcement areas

The averaging algorithm can be applied to (i) internal forces in slabs and (ii) required reinforcement areas in
slabs. Each of the averaging is performed separately. It means that averaging internal forces are calculated
from non-averaged internal forces and averaged required reinforcement areas are calculated from non-
averaged required reinforcement areas. Thus it is NOT true that the averaged required reinforcement areas
are calculated from averaged internal forces.

Defining a new averaging strip

Procedure to define a new averaging strip
1. Define the project and perform the calculation. The completion of the calculation is necessary to get
access to service Results that contains the function for the definition of the averaging strips. See also
note below.
2. Open service Results.
3. Open branch 2D members.
4. Start (double-click) function Averaging strip.
5. Fill in the parameters in the input dialogue – see below.
6. Input the strip in the graphical window.
7. End the function.

Note: Alternatively, the same function can be accessed from service Concrete. The procedure
described above is useful when you want to review averaged internal forces. The alternative is
suitable for the design of required reinforcement areas with the averaging taken into account. This
function is accessible even prior to the completion of calculation. On the other hand, it is available
only to users who purchase the module for the design of concrete structures and on condition that
the material concrete has been defined in the project.
Averaging strip parameters
Name Specifies the name of the strip.
Type Strip
The averaging strip is defined by a line with a specified
width.
Point
The averaging strip is defined by a point, width, length,
and angle (that specifies the direction of the strip).
Width Defines the width of the averaging strip.
Length (only if Type = Point)
Defines the length of the averaging strip.

619
Reference Guide

Angle (only if Type = Point)

Defines the direction of the averaging strip.
Direction Specifies the direction in which the averaging is to be
calculated.
Longitudinal
The averaging is done along the defined strip. We can
imagine that the strip represents a beam member and
we want the program to smooth the distribution of the
result along that beam member.
Perpendicular
The averaging is performed in the direction that is
perpendicular to the length of the strip. This option is for
special purposes only.
Both
The averaging is made in both directions. Again, this
option is for special purposes only, e.g. heads of
columns.
None
No averaging is made. This option may be useful if one
(or several) defined averaging strip(s) should be
temporarily ignored while other strips are still required to
be used.

Practical demonstration
The following example demonstrates the meaning and effect of parameter Direction.
Let us have a simple plate supported by nine columns placed symmetrically in both directions and review
moment mx calculated without averaging strips and with different variants of the strips.

First, let us define horizontal averaging strips placed just over the supports (the support means the head of the
column).

620
 Results

Second, let us define horizontal averaging strips placed both above the supports and between them.

Third, let us define vertical averaging strips just over the supports.

Fourth, let us define vertical averaging strips placed both above the supports and between them.

Let us subject the plate to the self-weight and to a uniformly distributed load placed over the whole plate. The
result diagram for mx (horizontal direction) without any averaging looks like this.

621
Reference Guide

Now, let us adjust longitudinal direction for the averaging. It means that the results will be averaged along the
length of the strip and will be more or loss constant across the strip.
The result for the horizontal averaging strips defined only above the supports will be like this.

The result for the horizontal averaging strips defined above both the supports and between them will be like
this.

The following picture shows that vertically oriented strips has almost no impact on the distribution of moment
mx.

622
 Results

Now, let us try to change the direction of averaging to Perpendicular. The following picture represents the
results for the horizontal averaging strips defined above both the supports and between them. You can see
almost no difference in comparison with the unaveraged results.

On the other hand, the vertical averaging strips placed over the supports give the following result for moment
mx.

The vertical averaging strips placed both over the supports and between them give the following result.

623
Reference Guide

The averaging affects also the results drawn in the section (i.e. not using the isolines / isobands). Let us define
a section in the middle of the plate parallel to the x-axis. Let us adjust the longitudinal direction for the
averaging strips and look at the results for the horizontal averaging strips placed above the supports.
The first picture shows the result without averaging.

The second picture the result with the averaging.

Editing the existing averaging strip

Procedure to edit the properties of the defined averaging strip
1. Select the required averaging strip.
2. The properties of the strip are displayed in the Property Window.
3. Change the required parameter (Direction, node coordinate, etc.)
4. The change is automatically immediately accepted.
5. Clear the selection.

624
 Results

Tip: Open service Result. Open branch 2D members. Select function Averaging strip (just
select, do not double-click). In bottom right corner of the screen, on the status bar, click the "filter
field" and select Filter for tree. With these settings, the only entity the cursor can select is just the
averaging strip. This may simplify the process of selection.

Deleting the averaging strip

Procedure to delete the defined averaging strip
1. Select the required averaging strip.
2. The properties of the strip are displayed in the Property Window.
3. Press key [Del].
4. The strip is deleted.

Tip: Open service Result. Open branch 2D members. Select function Averaging strip (just
select, do not double-click). In bottom right corner of the screen, on the status bar, click the "filter
field" and select Filter for tree. With these settings, the only entity the cursor can select is just the
averaging strip. This may simplify the process of selection.

Displaying the averaged results

In order to activate the averaging algorithm, the user must select the appropriate option in service Results.
Procedure to activate the averaging of internal forces
1. Open service Results.
2. Select function 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces.
3. In the property Window adjust the required parameters for the display of the results.
4. Select option Averaging of peak (without this option being selected, the results are NOT averaged
even when averaging strips have been defined).
5. Refresh the screen.

Procedure to activate the averaging of required reinforcement areas

1. Open service Concrete.
2. Depending on the needs, select function 2D member > Member design – Design – ULS or 2D
member > Member design – Design – crack width.
3. In the property Window adjust the required parameters for the display of the results.
4. Select option Averaging of peak (without this option being selected, the results are NOT averaged
even when averaging strips have been defined).
5. Refresh the screen.

View parameters related to averaging strips

A special view parameter can be found in the View parameters setting dialogue.
Procedure to display / hide the defined averaging strips
1. Open View parameters settings dialogue.
2. Select Tab Structure.
3. Look into group Averaging strips.
4. Tick option Display to see the averaging strips (default) or clear the option to hide them.
5. Confirm with [OK].

625
Reference Guide

Refreshing the results

Principle
An ideal state would be if everything could be fully automatic and made immediately without any delay. This is
even more true with reference to software and its interaction with the user.
Unfortunately, this is only an ideal state that can hardly be achieved in practice. What’s more, sometimes the
immediate response to any user’s action can be even undesirable, especially when a set of successive steps
is necessary to complete a particular action.
SCIA.ESA PT therefore presents a well-thought-out compromise solution in service Results and also in the
Document.
The implemented solution consists of two separate steps:
1. The user can freely select "WHAT" should be displayed and also adjust "HOW" it should be
displayed.
2. The user then gives the command "refresh (or display or regenerate) everything NOW".

Refresh of results
In order to refresh (regenerate the display of) results on the screen a special Action button is located in the
Property Window of SCIA.ESA PT user interface. This button is called Refresh.

The procedure for refresh of results on the screen

1. Open service Results.
2. Select required function (e.g. Internal forces on beam, deformation of nodes, etc.)
3. In the Property Window, select required load case or combination, quantity and adjust other
parameters defining the display style.
4. When finished with the settings, press Action button [Refresh].
5. The screen is regenerated.
6. Evaluate the displayed diagrams.
7. When finished, select another result quantity and / or change the display settings and press Action
button [Refresh] again.
8. The screen is regenerated once more in order to reflect the latest adjustment.
9. Repeat steps 7 to 8 as many times as reguired.

Note: Whenever a change made in the Property Window requires a subsequent refresh of the
screen, item Refresh in Action buttons is highlighted in red.

626
 Results

Example for refresh of results

The following example demonstrates the use of [Refresh] button from service Results.
A model must be created and calculated. A simple frame will be used in this example.

The frame is subject to:

self weight
a vertical force located in
the middle of the span of
the beam

a horizontal force acting

at the top of the left
column

When service Results is opened and function Internal forces on beam is selected, no result diagrams appear
on the screen.

627
Reference Guide

In the Property window, make required adjustments, e.g. set Type of loads to Load cases, and under Load
cases select LC1 (i.e. the self weight). Press button [Refresh] in the Action buttons.

Once button [Refresh] is pressed, the diagram is displayed (this time, bending moment diagram for self weight
load).

In order to see the diagram for another load case, make the required setting in the Property Window.

628
 Results

And press button [Refresh] again.

The diagram is regenerated.

And the same may be repeated once more for the last load case.

Button [Refresh] must be pressed again.

The selected result is drawn on the screen.

629
Reference Guide

The same may procedure may be now be repeated for any other result quantity, load case, load case
combination, or for any other display-style related adjustments.

Selected sections
Selected sections for result diagrams
Beam members
Diagrams of result quantities are normally displayed in sections whose density is defined in the Solver setup
dialogue. If the need arises the density may be reduced significantly by means of "user-defined" sections. The
user may simply define a very limited (or excessive, if s/he likes) set of specific points on the structure (called
sections) and the calculated results will be shown in these particular points only.
A section on a beam member has the following parameters.
Name Identifies the section.
Position x Defines the position of the section on the beam member.
Coordination definition Specifies the coordinate system used for the definition. Either
absolute or relative coordinates may be used.
The relative coordinate must lie within interval <0; 1>.
The absolute coordinate must lie within interval <0; the length
of a particular beam member >.
Origin Defines whether the position is measured from the beginning or
end of the beam member.
Repeat Specifies the number of section defined at the same time.
Delta x If Repeat is greater than 1 (one), this value defines the
distance between individual sections on the beam member.

Slabs
Similarly to beam members, it is possible to define a specific section or section across the slab where the
results should be displayed. A section on a beam member has the following parameters.
Name Identifies the section.
Vector Defines the section

Vector
Perpendicular to
element
In element plane
Along X / Y / Z
The section plane is perpendicular to the element.
The section plane is oriented in the plane of the element.
The section plane is located along the specified global axis.

630
 Results

Defining a new section for display of results

Procedure to define a new section on a beam member
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Section on beam.
3. Adjust the section parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Select the beam members where the section / sections should be defined.
6. Close the function.
7. Close the service.
Procedure to define a new section on a slab
1. Open service Results.
2. Start function 2D Members > Section on 2D member.
3. Adjust the section parameters.
4. Confirm with [OK].
5. Define the section by its starting and end point.
6. Close the function.
7. Close the service.

Displaying the results in selected sections

Beam member
By default any result diagram is displayed in all calculated sections. If required, it is however possible to limit
the diagram to a limited set of explicitly defined points – user defined sections.
Whenever a function displaying some result quantity is started, the parameters controlling the behaviour of this
function are displayed in the Property window. One of the parameters is called Section. The meaning and
consequences of this parameter will be demonstrated on a simple continuous beam.
Let’s assume a simple three-span continuous beam subject to uniformly distributed load. The beam is
defined as a set of three beams attached to each other.

Further, let’s define one section in the middle of each span.

631
Reference Guide

Finally, let’s display the diagram of calculated bending moment My. Using the default setting (parameters
Section set to Ends), the diagram may look like:

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Ends. The calculated values of bending moment will be
drawn in end points of each defined beam.

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Input+Ends. The calculated values of bending moment
will be drawn in end points of each defined beam and in three defined sections.

632
 Results

Now, let’s change the setting of parameter Section to Input. The calculated values of bending moment will be
drawn only in the defined sections.

Slab
By default any result diagram is displayed by means of isolines / isobands. If required, it is however possible to
limit the display to a diagram along a defined section – user defined sections.
Whenever a function displaying some result quantity on slabs is started, the parameters controlling the
behaviour of this function are displayed in the Property window. One of the parameters is called Drawing.
The meaning and consequences of this parameter will be demonstrated on a simple slab.
Let’s define a rectangular slab subject to any load.

Further, let’s define a section cutting the section e.g. in the middle.

633
Reference Guide

Let’s calculate the slab and display e.g. internal forces.

Let’s try all the options for the Drawing parameter.
Standard The results are shown using isolines/isobands. A legend is
displayed in the top right corner of the graphical window.

Section The results are drawn along the defined section across the slab.
Function Setup > Scales can be used o control the size of the
diagram.

Resultant The resultant along the section is calculated. Again, function

634
 Results

Setup > Scales can be used o control the size of the diagram.

Standard + Section Options Standard and Section are cmbined together.

Trajetories This option works for principal quantities only. The direction
(trajectory) of the quantity is shown. A legend is displayed in the
top right corner of the graphical window.

Type of diagram in the section

635
Reference Guide

According to the needs of a particular calculation, ESA PT allows you to select the most appropriate type of
representation of the result in a section across the slab.
Precise The precise distribution of the displayed result quantity is draw along the section.

Uniform The average value of the result is displayed.

This option may be useful to see the effect of the structure and loads to the
particular section.

Trapezoid The distribution of the quantity along the section is approximated by a trapezoid.
This option may be useful if you model your structure in parts and use the
reactions of upper parts as load for lower parts. It may be practical to idealise the
effect of the upper part by this trapezoidal distribution.

Procedure to select the type of diagram in the section across a slab

1. Have the project calculated.
2. Open service Results.
3. Call a function that displays the results in slabs in sections, i.e.:
a. 2D members > Deformation of nodes,
b. 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces,
c. 2D members > Member 2D – Stresses.

636
 Results

4. Note that there are two items named Drawing in the property window – on condition that the first
Drawing is set to Section (otherwise there is just one Drawing item in the property window).
5. Set the first Drawing to Section.
6. Set the second Drawing to the required type of diagram (Precise, Uniform, Trapezoid).
7. Select the quantity to be displayed.
8. If required, adjust other display parameters.
9. Refresh the screen.

Displaying the resultant in the section across a slab

When displaying the results in sections across slabs, you may select between two options. Either the
distribution over the section is displayed or the resultant for that section is calculated and shown.
Procedure to display the resultant in the section across a slab
1. Have the project calculated.
2. Open service Results.
3. Call a function that displays the results in slabs in sections, i.e.:
a. 2D members > Deformation of nodes,
b. 2D members > Member 2D – Internal forces,
c. 2D members > Member 2D – Stresses.
4. Set the Drawing to Resultant.
5. Select the quantity to be displayed.
6. If required, adjust other display parameters.
7. Refresh the screen.

637
Graphic output
Introduction to graphic output
Making a project of a structure represents not only the creation of a precise model and performing of an exact
calculation but also a preparation of a complete documentation providing for clear lucid representation of
results.
SCIA.ESA PT offers the user a set of powerful tools for this task.
Direct graphical print This output type enables the user to make a direct print of a
drawing from the screen onto a graphical device. In other
words, "what you just see on the screen is what you get on
paper". The last sentence is however not precise as the user
can, before the very act of printing, arrange the layout of the
drawing to meet his/her requirements.
To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to print the
contents of the graphical window.
Picture gallery The Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect
and further edit various pictures. The pictures may be
"scanned" screens of the program or they may be created
manually, or both in one. The pictures collected here may be
printed, used in the Paper space gallery or inserted into the
Document.
To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to prepare
separate pictures for further processing.
Paper space gallery The Paper space gallery is an extremely powerful tool for
creation of "graphic output sheets." These "sheets" may consist
of multiple inserted pre-created pictures, manually added
drawings and text passages.
To sum up, the main purpose of this output option is to create
well-arranged professional drawings.
Document The Document is a universal environment for the preparation
and editing of sophisticated outputs consisting of pictures, text
passages, and tables in any order.

Direct graphic output

Making the direct graphic output
The procedure for making the direct graphical output
1. Activate function Print picture:

a. either using button [Print picture] > [Print picture] ( > ) on toolbar
Project,
b. or using menu function File > Print picture > Print picture,
c. or using the pop-up menu of the graphical window and its function Print picture.
2. The Graphic output dialogue is opened.
3. Make any modifications or amendments to the drawing.
4. If required, add the title block (stamp).
5. Adjust the page for printing.
6. Print the drawing on the connected printing device – using button [Print].

Editing the graphic output layout

A drawing in the Paper space editor may be processed by means of numerous editing and drawing functions
offered on the editor toolbar and in its pop-up menu.

639
Reference Guide

Control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue

Insert picture Inserts a picture from required source.
Select Switches on the "select" mode of the Graphic output dialogue.
Line When pressed, allows the user to draw a single line on the
page. The first left mouse button click defines the staring point
of the line. The second click defines the end point of the line.
In order to end the "line mode", button [Select] ( ) must be
pressed.
Polyline When pressed, allows the user to draw a polygon of straight
lines. The individual vertices of the polygon are defined by
means of a left mouse button click. In order to end the polygon,
button [Esc] must be pressed.

In order to end the "polyline mode", button [Select] ( ) must

be pressed.
Rectangle When pressed, allows the user to draw a rectangle on the page.
The first left mouse button click defines the first corner of the
rectangle. The second click defines the opposite corner of the
rectangle.
In order to end the "rectangle mode", button [Select] ( ) must
be pressed.
Text Provides for the insertion of text.
Group Several items on the drawing may be grouped into one.
Ungroup Items previously grouped together may be "broken" to individual
original items.
Delete Deletes selected items from the drawing.
Edit properties Adjusts properties of a particular picture in the drawing.
Undo Returns back the last performed action.
Update Updates all automatic text items inserted into the drawing.
automatic text E.g. if a DATE and TIME item is in the drawing, the update fills
these item with current date and time.
Stamp + header Adds a title block and a heading to the drawing.
wizard
Page setting Sets the parameters of the page.
Zoom buttons Adjust the required magnification of the printed sheet on the
screen.
Save Saves the drawing into an external file.
Save as Saves the current drawing as a template into the Template
template folder.
Print Prints the drawing on a connected graphical device.

For information about the adjustment of various parameters for individual items of the graphic output drawing
see chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Checkbox bar of the Graphic output editor

Ortho tick box Active only if a line is being drawn. If selected, the drawn line is
either horizontal or vertical only.
Snap to endpoint If ON, the cursor snaps endpoints of existing entities if it is
positioned near of any such a point.
Cursor step If ON, the step defined in Page settings is used. Otherwise, the
cursor moves freely and smoothly all over the area of the

640
 Graphic output

drawing.
Zoom wheel Located at the top right corner of the dialogue window. Enables
the user to zoom in and zoom out the view dynamically.
button [Print] Performs the printing and closes the dialogue.
button [Cancel] Closes the dialogue.

Pop-up menu of the Graphic output dialogue

Zoom Adjust the required magnification of the printed sheet on the
screen.
Wired model for view If ON, simplified wired model is drawn during view-adjusting
manipulations operations.
See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output
dialogue.
Draw picture frames If ON, only a picture’s frame is drawn on the screen.
only See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output
dialogue.
Fast dragging If ON, fast dragging feature is enabled.
See also chapter Adjusting the display style of Graphic output
dialogue.
Save to file Saves the drawing into an external file.
Save template Saves the current drawing as a template into the Template
folder.
Print Prints the drawing on a connected graphical device.
Copy Copies the selected object in the Windows clipboard.
Order Enables the user to arrange the order of individual drawing part
on the final drawing – i.e. to define which drawing part is at the
bottom and which on top.
This function is useful if two or more parts overlap.
Groups Individual drawing pars may be grouped. The manipulation with
such a group is easier than with "broken" entities.
Delete Deletes the selected drawing part.
Properties Opens a property dialogue for selected entity in the drawing.
Copy objects This function enables the user to make multiple copies of
selected objects:
1. Select the first object to be copied.
2. If required, press and hold Shift and select other
copies to be selected. Then release the Shift key.
3. A hair cross is drawn in the centroid of the selected
objects.
4. Click the new position for the copy.
5. Repeat step 4 if required.
Align objects Selected object may be aligned so that their edges are aligned
either horizontally (top and bottom alignment) or vertically (left
and right alignment).
Undo Returns back the last performed action.
Update automatic texts Updates all automatic text items inserted into the drawing.
E.g. if a DATE and TIME item is in the drawing, the update fills
these item with current date and time.

641
Reference Guide

Adjusting the page for the drawing

Paper size, margins
Page size Selects the size of used sheet format.
Landscape Defines whether portrait or landscape orientation of the sheet
should be used.
Page margins Specifies margins around the sheet.
Set printer margins Sets the margins according to the current printer.

Grid, step
Show grid Displays or hides the grid.
Snap If ON, the cursor snaps to the grid.
Step Specifies the step of the grid, i.e. the distance between two
points of the grid.
Grid Specifies which points of the grid are visible. E.g. number 10 in
this field means that each tenth point of the grid is visible. But
all the invisible points are "active" as well and can be used for
cursor snapping.
Grid origin Defines the location of grid starting point on the page.

Printer
Printer setup Sets the printer and his properties.
Show printable area Displays the printable area in the Graphic output dialogue.

Display mode
Graphics Selects the mode for drawings in the graphic output.
Windows – standard Windows drawing library is used.
OpenGL – OpenGL library is used which supports e.g.
rendered drawings.

Advanced
Line thickness Defines the multiplier for thickness of drawn lines.
multiplier
Line pattern Defines the line pattern.
Minimal line thickness This line thickness is used when the drawing is printed. If there
are lines in the drawing that are thinner than the specified
minimal line thickness, they are printed thicker to comply with
the adjusted limit.

Header / footer font

The graphic output can be fitted with a header and footer positioned at the top or the bottom of the page
respectively.
Font Selects the font for the header and footer.
Character set Selects the character set for the header and footer.
Bold The header and footer are in bold letters.
Italic The header and footer are in italic letters.
Underline The header and footer are in underlined letters.
Strikeout Letters of the header and footer are stroked out.
Colour Selects the colour of the header and footer letters.

642
 Graphic output

Header + footer at left + Positions the header and footer to the left and right hand side
right side of the page instead to the top and bottom sides.

Text in header and footer

Header Here the user can type the header text.
Alignment Specifies the alignment for the header.
Height Specifies the height of the header.
Offset Specifies the offset of the header.
Rotation Specifies the rotation of the header.
Footer Here the user can type the footer text.
Alignment Specifies the alignment for the footer.
Height Specifies the height of the footer.
Offset Specifies the offset of the footer.
Rotation Specifies the rotation of the footer.

Saving the drawing to an external file

Any drawing may be saved to an external file. The file may be later used and imported to another drawing.
SCIA.ESA PT offers numerous formats:
EPD Internal SCIA.ESA PT format. This drawing may be e.g.
inserted into another drawing.
BMP Windows bitmap.
EMF Extended meta file.
WMF Windows meta file.
DXF AutoCAD DXF format. The file exported from SCIA.ESA PT
can be read completely only in to AutoCAD versions 14 and
2000. Other versions of AutoCAD may import only a part of the
drawing.
DWG AutoCAD DWG format. The file exported from SCIA.ESA PT
can be read completely only in to AutoCAD versions 14 and
2000 and for 3D also 2006. Other versions of AutoCAD may
import only a part of the drawing.

The drawing may be saved via button Save on the toolbar.

Adjusting the display style of Graphic output dialogue

The Graphic output dialogue displays a preview of what will be printed. It is possible to adjust the display
style of this preview.
Wired model for view If ON, any rendered picture is temporarily converted to a wired
manipulations one during e.g. zooming of the drawing.
Draw picture frames If this option is ON, individual pictures are shown only
only schematically.
Fast dragging If ON, this option means that the original drawing remains
displayed during any manipulations (e.g. moving of items) with
the displayed items of the graphic output drawing. Only after
the manipulation has been completed, the drawing is
regenerated.
If the option is OFF, the drawing is automatically regenerated
during the manipulation. This may lead to slower response of
the program on lower-capacity computers or in the case of

643
Reference Guide

complex drawings.

The procedure to adjust the display style

1. Position the mouse cursor inside the preview.
2. Click the right mouse button.
3. Select the required option.
4. Click on it.

Using the templates in graphic output

New graphic outputs may be based on a previously defined template. It means that the drawing consists not
only of the "scanned" picture from the graphical window, but also of a pre-defined drawing part, e.g. a title
block with the company logo.
The procedure for the definition of a template is given in chapter Paper spacegallery > Creating a template for
Paper space gallery drawings.

Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for
Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must
be specified.

Items of graphic output drawing

Line
For a line, the user may set the following properties:
Colour Specifies the colour of the line.
Width Specifies the thickness of the line.
Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the line.
End point co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of both
line end points.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Polyline
For a polyline, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour Specifies the colour of the polyline.
Width Specifies the thickness of the polyline.
Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the polyline.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Rectangle
For a rectangle, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour Specifies the colour of the rectangle (i.e. rectangle border).
Width Specifies the thickness of the rectangle (i.e. rectangle border).
Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the rectangle (i.e.
rectangle border).
Brush colour Specifies the colour of the filling of the rectangle. The rectangle
may be hatched, if required and then the Brush controls the
filling of the rectangle area.
Brush pattern Specifies the pattern (hatch style) for the brush.

644
 Graphic output

Corner co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of two

opposite corners of the rectangle.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Circle
For a circle, it is possible to set the following properties:
Colour Specifies the colour of the circle (i.e. rectangle circle).
Width Specifies the thickness of the circle (i.e. circle border).
Pattern Specifies the line style (solid, dashed, etc.) of the circle (i.e.
circle border).
Brush colour Specifies the colour of the filling of the circle. The circle may be
hatched, if required and then the Brush controls the filling of
the circle area.
Brush pattern Specifies the pattern (hatch style) for the brush.
Corner co-ordinates It provides for numerical definition of the co-ordinates of the
corners of the circle.
Radius It defines the radius.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Text
Various formatting information may be specified for the inserted text.
Text Here the user types the text to appear on the drawing.
Height Specified the height of the text.
Horizontal align Specified the horizontal alignment of the text.
Vertical align Specified the vertical alignment of the text.
Angle Specified the inclination angle of the text.
Colour Specified the colour of the text.
Font type Specified the font used for the text.
Character set Selects the character set for the current font.
Bold Types the text in bold.
Italic Types the text in italic.
Underline Underlines the text.
Strikeout Strikes out the text.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Automatic text
SCIA.ESA PT offers a whole set of automatic text items. These text items look like a standard text on the
drawing. However, they may be updated any time to reflect the current situation. What’s more, they may be
edited and formatted like standard text.
Date Inserts the current date.
Time Inserts the current time.
Date + time Inserts the current date and time.
Project name Inserts the name of the current project.
Project comment Inserts the comment attached to the current project.

645
Reference Guide

Project type Inserts the type of the current project.

Load case name Inserts the name of the current load case.
Load case result Inserts the type of current result (e.g. internal forces,
deformation, etc.).
Load case result Inserts the mane of the displayed result quantity.
quantity
Plane Inserts the orientation of working plane.

The procedure for the editing of properties is given in chapter Editing the items of graphic output drawing.

Note: It is possible to combine in one text field an automatic text with a manually typed text.
Thus the user may create texts like e.g.
"Project: &PROJECT_NAME&, Load case: &LC_NAME&".

Title block
Title block (sometimes called a stamp) summarises the important information about the contents of a drawing.
It is an essential part of standard hand-made drawings. Therefore, also SCIA.ESA PT comes with the
possibility to add this drawing item.
The title block parts and parameters are:
Header
Display Specifies the number of rows in the header of the title block.
Frame around header Selects a frame around the header of the title block.
Line Contains the text for individual lines of the header of the title
block.
Alignment Specifies the alignment for individual lines of the header of the
title block.
Height Specifies the text height for individual lines of the header of the
title block.
Separator Specifies, whether the individual lines of the header are
separated or not.

Font
Font Specifies the font for the title block.
Character set Specifies the character set for the title block.
Bold Prints the title block in bold characters.
Italic Prints the title block in italic characters.
Underline Prints the title block in underlined characters.
Strikeout Prints the title block in stoked out characters.

Stamp
Display stamp If ON, both the header and the stamp are printed.
If OFF, only the header is printed.
Fit on page horizontally If ON, the width of the stamp is set in a way so that the stamp
fits the current page.
If OFF, the width of the stamp may be specified manually (see
below).
Width Specifies the width of the stamp if the option above is OFF:
Number of rows Specifies the number of stamp lines.
Number of columns Specifies the number of stamp columns.

646
 Graphic output

First line continuous
Frame around stamp
Separators
Text of stamp cell
Alignment of stamp cell
Height of stamp line
Tell whether the first line consists of above mentioned number
of columns or whether the columns are merged into one table
cell.
Controls whether a frame is drawn around the stamp.
If ON, separates individual lines of the stamp.
Contains the text in individual stamp table cells.
Defines the alignments for individual stamp table cells.
Specifies the text height for individual stamp table lines.

Frame
Display frame If ON, a frame is drawn around the page.

Advanced
Clear drawing Clears all manually drawn entities from the graphic output
drawing.
Colour Selects the colour for the title block (both the header, stamp,
and frame).

Preview
Shows preview of the title block (including the header).
Automatic text in the title block
Individual text items of a title block may be of automatic text type. That means that they can display some of
the predefined text information and may be automatically updated on request.
The procedure for insertion of an automatic text item into a title block
1. In the Title block editing dialogue select the text item you want to make automatic.
2. Press the small button at the right hand side of the input field.
3. Select the required automatic text item.
4. Confirm with [OK] button.
Example: The final title block (stamp) may look like:

Note: The Company logo has been imported later from an external BMP file and positioned
inside the title block. It is not an integral part of the title block itself.

Picture
The properties of a picture are:
Picture size
Width Specifies the width of the picture.
Height Specifies the height of the picture.

Background
Transparent Makes the background transparent.
Filled Makes the background fully coloured

647
Reference Guide

Colour Specifies the background colour for the Filled option.

Clipping box
Use Switches on or off the clipping box.
For more information about this SCIA.ESA PT feature see
chapter Advanced tools > Clipping box.
Edit Provides for editing of the clipping box.
Default box Sets the default clipping box.

On scale
Use If ON, tells the program to make the printing in required scale.
Scale If the option above is ON, the user may specify the scale for
the printing.

Advanced
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the picture.
OpenGL Selects the required rendering mode for the picture.
Hidden lines Specifies the mode that is used to draw hidden lines and
surfaces.
Perspective Switches on and off the perspective.
Lock view Locks the view so that it is not possible to adjust the view
direction. It is intended to prevent an accidental maladjustment
once the required view direction has been properly adjusted.
Line pattern Defines the pattern for dashed lines in the picture.

OpenGL
If the option Display style in the Page setup is set to OpenGL, this option is unavailable because the whole
graphic output drawing is rendered.
If the option Display style of the Page setup is set to Windows, this option allows the user to set required
rendering mode for the particular picture.
This option is present here to allow all users to use rendering in their graphical output regardless of the
particular type of graphical device that they are using. The unlucky fact is that some of printing devices may
have problems with rendered pictures. The main reason is the insufficiency of memory for printing if the
Display style in the Page setup is adjusted to OpenGL In order to overcome possible difficulties with some
printing devices, SCIA.ESA PT offer a unique solution. The rendered picture is created in the program using
only such amount of memory that the user specifies. Such "memory-limited" picture is then stretched to the
required size and sent to the printing device.
The possible options for the rendering are:
Photo Suitable for fully rendered drawings of details.
Dark lines Suitable for drawings in dark lines on light background.
Light lines Suitable for drawings in light lines on dark background.
More information about these options can be found in chapter Graphic output > Items of graphic output
drawing > Selecting the suitable stretch mode.
Each of the above mentioned optioned allows the user to specify the size of the memory for rendering made in
SCIA.ESA PT.
0.2 Mb The picture occupies 0.2 Mb of memory.
0.9 Mb The picture occupies 0.9 Mb of memory.
1.44 Mb The picture occupies 1.44 Mb of memory.
2.4 Mb The picture occupies 2.4 Mb of memory.
If this picture is stretched to fit an A4 format, the drawing can

648
 Graphic output

still be considered of a rather good quality.

12 Mb The picture occupies 12 Mb of memory.
If this picture is stretched to fit an A0 format, the drawing is of a
good quality.

The procedure for the editing of picture properties is given in chapter Adjusting the picture properties.

Inserting and editing the items of the drawing

Inserting the text into graphic output drawing
SCIA.ESA PT allows the user to add either manually typed text or automatically generated text information
such as the current date, time, project name, etc.
Inserting the manually typed text
The procedure for the insertion of manually typed text

1. In the Graphic output dialogue click button [Text] ( ).

2. The Add text dialogue is opened on the screen.
3. Type the text into field Text.
4. Adjust the required formatting parameters.
5. Confirm with [OK] button.
6. Use the mouse to position the text.
7. Click the left mouse button when the text is on the "right place".
Inserting the item of automatic text
The procedure for the insertion of automatic text

1. In the Graphic output dialogue click button [Text] ( ).

2. The Add text dialogue is opened on the screen.
3. Press the button at the right hand side of field Text.
4. Select the required automatic text item.
5. Adjust the required formatting parameters.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. Use the mouse cursor to position the text.
8. Click the left mouse button when the text is on the "right place".

Note: Please note that automatic text items like Project name or Author name read the
information typed in the Project Setup dialogue. If no information was input in the Project Setup
dialogue, no text may appear in the drawing.

Adding the title block to the drawing

Very often it is necessary to equip the drawing with a title block summarising basic information about what is
being displayed on the drawing. SCIA.ESA PT offers a wizard to create such a drawing item.
The procedure for insertion of a title block into the graphic output drawing

1. On the control toolbar, click button [Stamp + header wizard] ( ).

2. The title block editing dialogue is displayed on the screen.
3. Fill in the individual parameters.
4. If required, look at the preview.
5. Confirm with button [OK].

Inserting the picture into graphic output drawing

A picture may be inserted from various resources:

649
Reference Guide

Insert picture from
window
Insert picture from EP3
file
Insert picture from EP2
file
Insert picture from BMP
file
Insert picture from
DWG or DXF file
Load from EPD file
Append from EPD file
Insert drawing from
DWG or DXF file
Change template
Inserts the drawing from a required graphical window.
Inserts a picture from EP3 file.
Inserts a picture from EP2 file.
Inserts an external Windows bitmap file.
Inserts a picture from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the file
is inserted as a picture, i.e. including a frame.
Loads a previously saved graphic output drawing.
Appends a previously saved graphic output drawing.
Inserts a drawing from DWG or DXF file. The contents of the
file is inserted as a set of drawn entities grouped into one
group.
Changes the template of the drawing.

Inserting an external BMP file

The user may control the way an external Windows bitmap is inserted into the graphic output drawing.
Function Insert picture from BMP file opens a dialogue where the parameters controlling the insertion may
be adjusted.
Original picture Shows the original picture saved on disk.
Preview Shows the picture with adjusted effects taken into account.
Ignore aspect ratio If selected, the inserted picture is fitted (distorted) into the user-
specified area.
If not selected, the inserted picture keeps the original aspect
ration.
Greyscale The picture (if coloured) is reduced to greyscale picture.
Watermark The picture is inserted as a watermark.
Stretch mode Defines the stretch mode for the bitmap.

Note 1: While options Ignore aspect ration, Greyscale, and Watermark have effect only on the
Preview window of the dialogue, the selected Stretch mode affects both the Original picture and
Preview windows of the dialogue.
Note 2: Concerning BMP files, only 24-bit bitmaps can be inserted.
Note 3: Concerning DXF and DWG files, only drawings created in AutoCAD versions 2000 and
older can be imported. If a drawing created in AutoCAD 2004 and possible newer versions is
imported, the result may not be satisfactory. This is due to modifications in the file format definition.
The format definition varies for different AutoCAD versions.

Different procedures for insertion of an external drawing

The procedure for the insertion of an external drawing may vary by individual function.
Generally there are four procedures: (i) for insertion of a picture (including a picture created from a DXF/DWG
drawing), (ii) for insertion of a drawing (including a DXF/DWG drawing), (iii) for loading of EPD drawing and (iv)
for appending of EPD drawing.
EPD is a specialised graphical format developed by SCIA Company..
The procedure for the insertion of a picture

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.
2. Select the required picture format and, if required, its source.
3. Position the mouse cursor to the upper left corner of the intended picture location rectangle.
4. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
5. Drag the mouse to the bottom right corner of the intended picture location rectangle.

650
 Graphic output

6. Release the button.

7. The picture is inserted in the required size and on the required location. (Both may be later changed
if necessary).
The procedure for the insertion of a drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.
2. Select the required drawing format and its source.
3. Besides others adjust the parameters specifying the insertion point and scale.
4. Use the mouse cursor to position the drawing.
5. The drawing is inserted as a group of drawn entities. If required, it may be broken and individual
lines may be edited separately.
The procedure to load an EPD drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.
2. Select function Load from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.
3. The current drawing is discarded and the new drawing is inserted.
The procedure to append an EPD drawing

1. Click button [Insert picture] ( ) on the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue.
2. Select function Append from EPD file and browse for the required drawing file.
3. The current drawing remains unchanged and the new drawing is added over it.

Adjusting the picture properties

A picture inserted into the graphic output drawing may be "tuned" to reflect the user’s esthetical feeling and
serve to the intended purposes.
The procedure for the adjusting of picture properties
1. Position the mouse cursor over the picture border.
2. Click the left mouse button to select the picture.
3. Click button [Properties] ( ) on the control toolbar.
4. The picture editing dialogue is opened on the screen. The dialogue summarises all the properties of
the selected picture.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.

Pop-up menu of the editing dialogue

When the picture editing dialogue is opened, it is equipped with a pop-up menu. The pop-up menu may be
opened via the right mouse button click and offer the following functions:
View Sets the view in the direction of individual axes of drawing co-
ordinate system.
Zoom Offers the basic zooming functions.
Copy Copies the picture in the standard Windows clipboard.
Save to file Saves the picture into an external file.
Print Prints the drawing on the connected graphical device.
Wired model for Defines that a simplified wire representation of the drawing
manipulation should be used for view adjusting functions. This option affects
only fully rendered pictures.

Adjusting view in the editing dialogue

The graphical window of the picture editing dialogue is a standard SCIA.ESA PT graphical window. Therefore,
the view in it may be adjusted the same way as in normal graphical window of the program.
Window scroll-bar wheel-like buttons for adjustment of the view

651
Reference Guide

The graphical window has got three wheel-like buttons on the scroll-bar. The "wheels" may be used to adjust
the required view. The function of the three wheels-like buttons is:
Zoom (located on the bottom Zooms in or out.
scroll-bar)
Rotate horizontally (located Rotates the structure around the vertical axes (i.e.
on the bottom scroll-bar) vertical axis of the screen).
Rotate vertically (located on Rotates the structure around the horizontal axes (i.e.
the right hand side scroll-bar) horizontal axis of the screen).
The operation of the wheel-like buttons is simple. Just place the mouse cursor over the "wheel", press the left
mouse button, hold it down and "turn the wheel" with left-right, or up-down, movement of the mouse over the
pad.
Mouse controlled adjustment of the view
In addition, SCIA.ESA PT offers also a set of fast-access functions for the view adjustment in the graphical
window.
Zoom in Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold
them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you)
over the pad.
Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold
them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you)
over the pad.
Rotate Press [Ctrl] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required view direction.
[Shift] Press [Shift] key and hold it down. Then press the right
mouse button and hold it down as well. Move the mouse
over the pad in order to get the required position of the
structure on the screen.

Editing the items of graphic output drawing

Any item (picture, text, line, polyline, rectangle, or title box) of the final drawing can be edited any time after it
has been inserted. The parameters are different for different items and are described in chapter Items of
graphic output drawing.
The procedure for the editing of item properties
1. Position the mouse cursor over the required entity (in the case of picture over the border of the
picture).
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. On the control toolbar of the Graphic output dialogue press button [Properties] ( ).
4. The appropriate editing dialogue opens on the screen.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Confirm the changes with [OK] button.

Note 1: Until at least one item of the drawing has been selected, the button [Properties] is not
available.
Note 2: If required, it is possible to edit multiple items at a time. To select multiple items do the
following. Select the first item (i.e. move the mouse cursor over it and press the left mouse button).
Press down and hold key [Shift] on your keyboard. Select another item. Repeat as many times as
required.

Moving the item of a drawing

Every drawn entity (item) may be moved across the drawing.
The procedure to move the entity

652
 Graphic output

1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted

2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object moving".
3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the entity to the new location.
4. Release the mouse button.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the resizing and moving procedures. To start the video, just position the
mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke
the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Copying the item of a drawing

The procedure to copy one or more entities in the drawing
1. Select the entity or entities to be copied.
2. Invoke the pop-up menu and select function Copy objects.
3. A hair cross is drawn in the centroid of selected entities.
4. Use left button mouse click to position the copy of the selected entities.
5. Repeat step 4 as many times as required.

Resizing the item of a drawing

Some of drawn entities may be resized after they have been inserted into the main drawing. This refers to (i)
rectangle, (ii) circle, (iii) picture, (iv) text, and to some extent to (v) line.
When such an entity (item) is selected, its border or outline is highlighted and specific points shown. These
points (or some of them, may be grabbed and used for resizing of the entity.
The procedure to resize entities offering "Object resizing" point
(This refers to circle and text entity)
1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted
2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object resizing".
3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the size of the entity.
4. Release the mouse button.
The procedure to resize entities offering "Vertex moving" and/or "Edge moving" point
(This refers to rectangle, line and picture entity)
1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted
2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Vertex moving" or "Edge moving".
3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the size of the entity.
4. Release the mouse button.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the resizing and moving procedures. To start the video, just position the
mouse cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke
the video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Rotating the item of a drawing

Some of drawn entities may be rotated after they have been inserted into the main drawing. This refers to (i)
text and to some extent to (ii) line.
When such an entity (item) is selected, its border or outline is highlighted and specific points shown. These
points (or some of them, may be grabbed and used to rotate the entity.
The procedure to rotate entities
1. Click the entity to make it selected and highlighted
2. Move the cursor onto the point that shows tooltip "Object rotating" or "Vertex moving".
3. Press the left mouse button, hold it down and drag the point to change the orientation of the entity.
4. Release the mouse button.

653
Reference Guide

Selecting the suitable stretch mode

A bitmap picture has got a fixed size. If the user needs to resize it, the program must apply a special algorithm
that changes the size and even proportions of the original picture. This algorithm is called "stretch mode".
There are three different stretch modes. Each of them is suitable for different types of pictures and also for
different type of output graphical device.
Considering the picture type, it is possible to give a simple clue as to which stretch mode should be applied to
which picture type. Concerning the printing device, it is up to the user to find the most suitable stretch mode for
his/her particular conditions.
Stretch modes
Photo Suitable for photographs imported into SCIA.ESA PT or for fully
rendered coloured drawings of details made in SCIA.ESA PT.
Dark lines Suitable for drawings consisting of dark lines on light
background.
Light lines Suitable for drawings with light lines on dark background.

The table below demonstrates the effect of individual options on a sample imported photograph.
Photo

Dark lines

654
 Graphic output

Light lines

Grouping of items
Sometimes it may be useful to group several drawing items into a group. It may happen particularly if the user
decides to draw something manually. The "something" will usually consist of several lines (or polylines, etc.)
but it will represent a single object. Therefore, it will be very useful if such an object could be treated (e.g.
moved) as a single item.
The procedure to group several items into a group
1. Select the first item (e.g. line, polyline, etc.), i.e. position the mouse cursor over it and click the left
mouse button.
2. Press down and hold key [Shift] on your keyboard.
3. Select another item.
4. Repeat as many times as required.
5. Press the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu. Select function Groups > Group.
6. The selected items are grouped into one.
The procedure to ungroup previously grouped items
1. Select the required group.
2. Press the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu. Select function Groups > Ungroup.

Picture gallery
Introduction to the picture gallery
Picture gallery is a tool that enables the user to collect, review, modify, delete, and print individual pictures.
The pictures can be either "scanned" from a SCIA.ESA PT graphical window or created manually. It is also
possible to scan a window drawing and add some manually drawn entities to it.
The pictures can be then treated as the final product (i.e. printed or saved to graphical files) or inserted into the
graphic output drawings in the Paper space gallery.

Picture gallery manager

Using the Picture gallery manager
The Picture gallery manager is an advanced type of a standard SCIA.ESA PT’s database manager. It
consists mostly of standard "database manager parts".
Control buttons The buttons call all the available functions of the manager.

655
Reference Guide

List of defined pictures It lists all the created pictures.

Property table for the The table shows the basic properties of the selected picture.
selected picture
Preview of the selected It shows the preview of the selected picture.
picture
Additional information It may display some additional information for pictures
about selected picture generated by wizards.

Picture gallery manager functions

New picture Creates a new picture and adds it into the Picture
gallery.
New by wizard Creates a set of new pictures based on defined line
grids.
Adjust default Adjusts default parameters for a new picture.
parameters of new
picture
Edit picture Edits the selected picture.
Print picture Prints the selected picture.
Delete picture Deletes the selected picture.
Copy picture Copies the selected picture.
Export picture to file Exports the selected picture.
Copy picture to Copies the selected picture into the Windows
Clipboard Clipboard.
Regenerate picture Regenerates the selected pictures.
Refresh setup settings Re-reads the current setup.
Refresh colours setup Re-reads the current colours setup.
Adjust the view Arranges the list of created pictures.

656
 Graphic output

The Picture gallery manager can be opened:

 using button [Picture gallery] ( ) on toolbar Project,

 using function Picture gallery in the tree menu,
 using function Picture gallery from menu Tree.

Adjusting the manager

As the Picture gallery manager deals with drawings, it offers a feature known from various professional
graphical programs. The user may decide that the List of defined pictures will not be arranged as a simple list
but as a collection of thumbnails. There are three control buttons on the manager toolbar adjusting the layout
of the List of defined pictures.
Detail view The List of defined pictures is a simple list with information
about the creation and last modification of individual pictures.
List view The List of defined pictures shows miniature previews of
individual pictures.
Change This button sets the size of the miniature previews in the list (i.e.
thumbnail size the thumbnail size).

Inserting a new picture into the Picture gallery

Inserting a window drawing into the Picture gallery
Any drawing arranged in any graphical window of SCIA.ESA PT can be inserted into the Picture gallery. It
may be directly printed or further processed.
The procedure for the insertion of a picture into the Picture gallery
1. Arrange the view of structure in a graphical window to meet the required purpose.
2. Add the drawing into the Picture gallery:
a. either use menu function File > Graphic output > Picture to gallery,
b. or use the window pop-up menu and its function Picture to gallery.
3. Type the name of the drawing and confirm with [OK].
4. The drawing is added into the gallery.

Adjusting the default values for new pictures

When a new empty picture is being created (i.e. added into the Picture gallery), it is created with the
predefined default parameters.
Name prefix
Prefix of name Specifies the prefix of the name. This prefix is used for
generation of name for each new picture.
Scale Defines the scale of the picture.

Picture parameters
Picture width Specifies the size of the picture.
Picture height Specifies the size of the picture.
Display mode Defines the display mode for the picture. This display mode is
not used in the Picture gallery. It is however used when the
picture is inserted into the Graphic output drawing in the Paper
space gallery.
Text size reduction Defines the magnification factor for the size of text used in the
factor picture.
This parameter may be useful when the picture is intended for
large formats (e.g. A0). I such a case the text will be
significantly small in comparison with the size of the drawing. It

657
Reference Guide

may however happen that the user needs to make a draft

printing on smaller format. If this is made without any changes,
the text becomes illegible. The same may be true for the
preview on the screen. Therefore, it is possible to magnify the
text size in order to make the text readable even on smaller
formats.

Dimension lines
End mark style Specifies the style of end mark for dimension lines.
End mark size Specifies the size of end mark for dimension lines.
Text size Specifies the text size for dimension lines.

Picture name
Place name to picture If ON, the picture name is automatically added to the picture.
Picture name size Specifies the size of the picture name.

Save / Read buttons

Store settings as user Stores the current settings as the user’s default settings.
default settings
Load user default Read the saved user’s default settings.
settings
Load application Reads the default settings preset by the manufacturer of the
default settings program.

The procedure for the definition of default parameters

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. Click button [Edit default new picture parameters] ( ).
3. The dialogue for the adjustment of the parameters is opened.
4. Set the parameters as required.
5. Confirm with button [OK].

Creating a new empty picture

A new empty picture may be inserted into the Picture gallery. The picture is created with preset default
parameters.
The procedure for the creation of a new picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. Type the name of the new picture and confirm with [OK] button.
4. The new picture is added to the List of defined pictures.
5. If required, edit the picture.

Generating new pictures according to line grid

The Picture gallery manager has not been designed for pure management of manually created pictures. It
offers a powerful tool for an automatic generation of pictures. The generation may be based on line grids
defined in the project or on designed connections.
The generation based on defined line grids goes through the project data and generates pictures
corresponding to plane sections of the model made in individual line grid planes.
Parameters controlling the generation process
Definition of planes

658
 Graphic output

All Pictures will be generated for all possible planes of selected

line grids.
Selected The user will select the line grid planes that will be used for the
generation of pictures.

View parameters
To active window View parameters for the pictures will be taken from the active
window.
To structural types View parameters adjusted for structural types are used for the
pictures.

View direction
To active window View direction for the pictures will be taken from the active
window.
Perpendicular to plane All the pictures are made as viewed from the direction
perpendicular to the corresponding picture plane.

Make picture
For all selected planes The pictures are generated for all selected planes regardless of
whether there are any entities in the plane or not.
Only planes with The pictures that would be empty because no entity is located
existing members in the corresponding plane will not be created.

Draw members
Only members in plane Only members located exactly in the particular picture plane
are drawn on the corresponding picture.
Members around plane Members located exactly in the particular picture plane and
around it in the specified depth are drawn on the corresponding
picture.
Active depth forward If the option above is ON, it is possible to specify the depth of
the plane surrounding.
Active depth backward Ditto

Draw loads + supports

To active window Loads and supports are drawn only if they are shown in the
active window.
No Loads and supports are not put into the picture.

Draw result diagrams

To active window Result diagrams are drawn only if they are shown in the active
window.
No Result diagrams are not put into the picture.

Beam label size

Size This value specifies the height of text used to label beam
members.

Grid selection
If more than one line grid has been defined, it is possible to select which ones should be used for the
generation of planes for the pictures. This can be done in Used planes dialogue of the wizard.

659
Reference Guide

Used line grids This window lists all the line grids that have been selected for
the generation.
All used line grid This window lists all the planes that the wizard could generate
planes for the selected line grids.
Select grid This button allows the user to choose the line grids that will be
used for the generation.

The procedure for the generation of "line-grid-based" pictures

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. Click button [New by wizard] ( ).
3. The wizard starts.
4. If at least one item of both line grid and connection is defined in the project, select Create planes of
line grid and click button [Run wizard]. If no connection has been defined in the project, this step is
automatically skipped and the wizard started.
5. Now the first wizard dialogue is opened. It summarises default picture settings. If necessary, change
any of the values.
6. Click button [Next].
7. Another wizard dialogue is opened on the screen. Specify parameters controlling the generation
process.
8. Click button [Next].
9. The last wizard dialogue is shown to help you with the generation. Select grids that will be used for
the generation.
10. Click button [Finish].
11. The appropriate pictures are generated and added to the Picture gallery.

Note: Unless at least one line grid has been defined in the project it is not possible to run this
wizard.

Generating new pictures for defined connections

The user may automatically generate picture for defined connections. A set of specified pictures is generated
for each designed connection present in the project.
The procedure to generate drawings of connections
1. Define connections in your model.
2. Call the picture wizard:
a. invoke the pop-up menu and select Picture wizard, or
b. open the Picture gallery and click Picture wizard icon.
3. Depending on your current project, either confirm or select Steel connection monodrawings.
4. Adjust the picture properties.
5. Select the connections and type of drawings (see note below).
6. Complete the generation process.
7. The pictures are stored in the Picture gallery.

Note: If no connection is selected when the wizard is started, the drawings are generated for all
existing connections. If some connections are selected when the wizard is started, you may
choose, if the pictures should be generated for the selected connections only, or for all existing
connections.

Processing the pictures in the Picture gallery

Editing the picture
Any picture inserted into the Picture gallery, regardless of "how" it has been created, can be edited any time
later.

660
 Graphic output

The procedure for editing of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be modified.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The Gallery item editor for the selected picture is opened.
5. Make the required changes.
6. Close the editing dialogue.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Adjusting the picture properties

Each picture has got a set of basic parameters. The parameters may be edited directly in the Property table
for the selected picture in the Picture gallery manager. The meaning of individual parameters is explained
in chapter Adjusting the default values for new pictures.
The procedure for the adjusting of picture properties
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be modified.
3. The parameters of this picture are shown in Property table for the selected picture.
4. Modify required items.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.
6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Printing the picture

Any picture inserted in the Picture gallery can be printed on a connected graphical device.
The procedure for printing of selected picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be printed.
3. Click button [Print picture] ( ).
4. The Graphic output dialogue for the selected picture is opened.
5. If required, make any modifications to the layout of the drawing.
6. Make the printing and close the Graphic output dialogue.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Removing the picture from the gallery

The procedure for printing of selected picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be deleted.
3. Click button [Delete].
4. The selected picture or pictures are deleted.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.
6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Copying the picture

If required, any picture from the Picture gallery can be copied and possibly further processed.
The procedure for copying of selected picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.

661
Reference Guide

2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be copied.
3. Click button [Copy].
4. A copy of the selected picture is created.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.
6. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Regenerating the picture

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however
happen that any time later the project must be changed (e.g. some beam members are moved, some cross-
sections enlarged, etc.). The Picture gallery is fitted with a function that is able to match the picture with the
current project data.
The procedure for regeneration of selected picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.
3. Click button [Regenerate picture] ( ). The picture is regenerated using the current project data
and settings.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If the picture has been edited in the Gallery item editor and any structural entities
(scanned from the graphical window) have been removed from the picture or broken into single
lines, they are regenerated in the form that fully corresponds with the current state in the graphical
window of the application.
Note: If a set of pictures has been generated using the Wizard "overview drawings" and if any of
the generated pictures has been modified and if function Regenerate has been applied to this set,
the program asks whether the manual changes made in the automatically generated pictures
should be (i) preserved, (ii) discarded or (iii) whether the whole operation should be aborted.

See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the colours setup for additional
information.

Regenerating the picture setup

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however
happen that any time later the settings of the project must be changed. The Picture gallery is fitted with a
function that is able to match the picture with the current project settings.
The procedure for regeneration of settings for selected picture
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.
3. Click button [Refresh setup settings] ( ). The picture is regenerated.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be
used instead.

See chapters Regenerating the picture and Regenerating the colours setup for additional
information.

Regenerating the colours setup

When a picture is inserted into the Picture gallery, it is created from the current project data. It may however
happen that any time later the settings of colours are changed. Consequently, the picture does not reflect the
current status. The Picture gallery is fitted with a function that is able to match the picture with the current
colours settings.

662
 Graphic output

The procedure for regeneration of settings for selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be updated.

3. Click button [Refresh colours settings] ( ). The picture is regenerated.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: If also the update of the geometry is necessary, function Regenerate the picture can be
used instead.

See chapters Regenerating the picture setup and Regenerating the picture for additional
information.

Saving the picture into an external file

Any picture from the Picture gallery can be saved, or exported, into an external graphical file.
BMP Windows bitmap file
WMF Windows metafile
EMF Enhanced Windows metafile
EP3 Internal format of SCIA.ESA PT
WRL VRML format
3D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Three-dimensional DXF drawing.
2D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Two-dimensional DXF drawing.
3D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Three-dimensional DWG drawing.
2D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Two-dimensional DWG drawing.

The procedure for export of selected picture

1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be exported.
3. Click button [Export picture to file] ( ).
4. The Windows File save dialogue is opened.
5. Specify the file name and path to the file.
6. Confirm with Save.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Picture gallery manager.

Note: SCIA.ESA PT supports export into DXF and DWG format of AutoCAD versions R14 and
2000. If a picture is imported into another version of AutoCAD, the result may not be satisfactory.
This is due to modifications in the file format definition. The format definition varies for different
AutoCAD versions.

Copying the picture into the Clipboard

Any picture from the gallery can be copied into the Windows Clipboard directly from the Picture gallery
manager.
The procedure for copying of selected picture into the Windows Clipboard
1. Open the Picture gallery manager.
2. In the List of defined pictures select the particular picture that should be copied.
3. Click button [Copy picture to clipboard] ( ).
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Picture gallery manager.

663
Reference Guide

Editing the picture in the picture gallery

Introduction to editing of picture
A picture inserted into the Picture gallery does not have to be the final product. The Picture gallery offers a
powerful editing tool that allows the user to modify the picture so that it achieves perfection.
It is possible to:
 edit the picture that has been scanned from a particular graphical window,
 add additional graphical entities,
 add dimension lines,
 put useful text information on the picture,
 arrange the layout of the picture.
All these tasks can be done in the Gallery item editor. It can be opened from the Picture gallery manager by
means of function Edit.

Printing the edited picture

The edited picture can be printed directly from the Gallery item editor on the connected graphical device.
The procedure to print the picture from within the Gallery item editor
1. Click button [Print picture] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
2. The Graphic output dialogue is opened.
3. If necessary, make any modifications to the layout of the page.
4. Finish the print with button [Print].

Exporting the edited picture

The edited picture can be exported to an external graphical file directly from the Gallery item editor.
The procedure for export of picture to an external file
1. Click button [Export picture to file] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
2. The standard Windows Save as dialogue is opened.
3. Specify the file name and path to the file.
4. Confirm with button [Save].

Note: The "area" of the picture that is saved into the file is defined by the border of picture.

Copying the edited picture to clipboard

The edited picture can be copied to the Windows Clipboard.
The procedure for copying of the picture into the clipboard
1. Click button [Copy picture to clipboard] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

Adjusting the editing dialogue

Adjusting the basic properties of picture
Basic picture parameters that may have been adjusted in the Picture gallery manager may also be edited
directly from within the Gallery item editor.
The procedure for the editing of picture basic parameters

1. Click button [Picture properties] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The editing dialogue with the parameters opens on the screen
3. Change required parameters.

664
 Graphic output

4. Confirm with button [OK].

For full meaning of individual parameters see chapter Adjusting the default values for new pictures.

Adjusting the parameters of dot grid

As the user may add various manual drawings into the picture, the Gallery item editor is equipped with a dot
grid similar to the one implemented in the graphical windows of SCIA.ESA PT.
The procedure for adjustment of the dot grid in the Gallery item editor.

1. Click button [Adjustment of the dot grid] ( ) on toolbar Modify.

2. The adjusting dialogue opens on the screen.
3. Select type of the grid.
4. Set the parameters.
5. Confirm with button [OK].

Displaying the dot grid

The dot grid, whose parameters can be adjusted in the adjusting dialogue, can be either displayed or hidden.
The procedure to show / hide the dot grid

1. On toolbar Modify click button [Grid on / off] ( ).

2. If the grid is displayed, the button hides it and vice versa.

Adjusting the SNAP mode

Both the principle and realisation of the SNAP mode in the Gallery item editor is identical to the main
SCIA.ESA PT environment. The description is given in chapter Basic working tools > Cursor SNAP modes.
There is the only exception and it is the location of the SNAP toolbar. The toolbar is a separate self-standing
toolbar and is named Point snap.

Adjusting the view

Adjusting the view
The view of the picture in the Gallery item editor can be adjusted the same way as in the standard graphical
window of the application.
Adjusting the view via toolbars Zoom
Zoom in Zoom in.
Zoom out Zoom out.
Zoom by cut-out Requires to define a cut-out for the zoom. The cut-out is then
magnified in order to fit into the whole are of the graphical
window.
Once the function is started the mouse cursor changes. Position
it to the upper left corner of the cut-out. Press the left mouse
button and hold it down. Drag the mouse to place the cursor to
the bottom right corner of the cut-out. Release the button.
Zoom all Zoom in or out in order to fit the whole structure into the whole
area of the graphical window.
Zoom all – Zoom in or out in order to fit the selected entities into the whole
selection area of the graphical window.

Adjusting the view via key & mouse combination

665
Reference Guide

Zoom in Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold

them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse up (away from you)
over the pad.
Zoom out Press [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys simultaneously and hold
them down. Then press the right mouse button and hold
it down as well. Move the mouse down (towards you)
over the pad.

The functions described above are identical to standard view adjustment functions available in the main
SCIA.ESA PT environment.
In addition to the standard View-adjustment functions, SCIA.ESA PT offers also a set of sophisticated
functions such as: (i) reversing the view, (ii) border of picture, (iii) clipping box, (iv) layers.
The functions are described in separate chapters.

Reversing the view

Despite the fact that it is not possible to adjust the view direction in the Gallery item editor, it is possible to
look at the structure "from the other side".
The procedure for reversing the view

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Invert view direction] ( ).

2. The view is readjusted as if you change the position and look at the displayed structure from the
opposite side.
For more information about adjustment of the view see chapter Adjusting the view.

Adjusting the border of picture

The Gallery item editor enables the user to define a border of the picture and thus display its part only.
This border can be then used to:
 set the zoom,
 save the framed part into an external graphical file.
The procedure to define the border
1. Adjust the view in a way so that only the required part of the picture is displayed in the window.
2. Click button [Save picture zoom, position and border] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
3. The border is set.
The procedure to zoom in the part framed with the border

1. On toolbar Modify click button [Zoom according to picture border] ( ).

2. The view is adjusted in a way so that only the framed part of the picture is displayed in the window.
The procedure to define the border using Drag-and-Drop feature
1. Use view adjustment functions to see the required part of the picture and also the border rectangle.
2. Position the mouse cursor over any border line, press the left mouse button, hold it down and move
the border to its new position.
3. Position the mouse cursor over any border vertex, press the left mouse button, hold it down and
move the border vertex to adjust the required size of the border rectangle.

Using the layers

Graphical entities added manually to the picture (i.e. lines, polylines, text, dimension lines) can be sorted into
layers.
Parameters of layer
Name It is used for identification of the layer.
Colour It specifies the colour that is assigned to all entities inserted in

666
 Graphic output

the layer.
Visibility All entities inserted into one layer are visible or hidden.
Activity All entities inserted into one layer are active or not.
Comment The user may add a short comment to explain what the layer
represents.

The procedure for adjustment of layer parameters

1. Click button [Layers manager] ( ) on toolbar Gallery picture editor toolbar.

2. The Layers manager dialogue is opened on the screen.
3. Set the parameters.
4. Confirm with button [OK].

The procedure for selection of layer for a particular entity.

1. Select the entity or entities that should be inserted into one layer.

2. In combo box with layers ( ) on toolbar Gallery picture editor toolbar select the
required new layer for the selected entities.

Note: The number of layers in the Gallery item editor is fixed. That means that new layers
cannot be added and no layers can be removed.

Using the clipping box for picture

Similarly to the main SCIA.ESA PT environment the view in the Gallery item editor may be limited by means
of the clipping box.
The procedure for turning the clipping box ON or OFF

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Switch on/off clipping box] ( ).

2. If the clipping box has been OFF it is turned ON and vice versa.

667
Reference Guide

Adjusting the clipping box by mouse

The procedure to adjust the clipping by mouse
1. Turn the clipping box ON.
2. Position the mouse cursor over one of the clipping box borders.
3. Click the left mouse button to select the clipping box.
4. Special box-editing symbols are displayed in the centre of all clipping box surfaces. The ball symbol
provides for resizing of the box, the cylinder symbol enables the user to rotate the box.
5. Select corresponding symbol for required manipulation.
6. Position the mouse cursor over the symbol.
7. Press the left mouse button and hold it down.
8. Drag the mouse to adjust the clipping box as required.
9. Release the mouse button.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 as many times as required to tune the adjustment of the box.
11. Press [Esc] key to close the adjustment function.
The picture above is a video that demonstrates the adjusting of clipping box. To start the video, just position the mouse
cursor over the picture. Or you may position the mouse cursor over the picture, click the right mouse button to invoke the
video pop-up menu and select function Play.

Adjusting the clipping box in setup table

The procedure for tabular adjustment of the clipping box

1. On toolbar Zoom click button [Clipping box setting dialogue] ( ).

2. The setup dialogue appears on the screen.
3. Fill in the table.
4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note: If the clipping box was not displayed before the setup dialogue was invoked, the clipping
box is switched ON on confirming the settings with [OK] button.

Adding the manually drawn entities

Drawing a line
The procedure for drawing a line
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert new edges] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.
4. Select the line type you need to draw (i.e. straight line, circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve,
spline).
5. Define end points of the selected line or curve type.
6. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

Note: For details about the definition of curves see chapter Geometry > Beams > Inserting a
new beam of a complex axis shape.
Defining the end points of line
There are multiple possibilities to define the end-points of the line.
mouse in free hand Position the mouse cursor to the defined location and click the
left mouse button.
mouse with specified Adjust the required SNAP mode, use the mouse cursor to
SNAP mode select the point.
command line Type point co-ordinates on the command line of the Gallery

668
 Graphic output

item editor.

Drawing a polyline
The procedure for drawing a polyline
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert new polylines] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.
4. Select the line type you need to draw for the first segment of the polygon (i.e. straight line, circular
arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve, spline).
5. Define end points of the segment.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all required polygon segments. (For second and all the following segments
only one end-point must be defined.)
7. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Drawing a closed polyline

The procedure for drawing a closed polyline
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Closed polylines] ( ).

3. Toolbar Main graphic entry appears on the screen.
4. Select the line type you need to draw (i.e. straight line, circular arc, parabolic arc, Bezier curve,
spline).
5. Define end points of the selected line or curve type.
6. Finish the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert. The polygon is closed
and the function terminated.
The options for the definition of end-points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Inserting a text
The procedure for inserting text
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. On toolbar Insert click button [Insert text] ( ).

3. The property dialogue appears on the screen.
4. Type the text in the property dialogue.
5. If required, adjust other text parameters (size, style, rotation, letter type).
6. Position the text in the picture. Click the left mouse button to insert the text.
7. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of text position are the same as for the definition of line end-points and are given
in chapter Drawing a line.

Inserting a vertical dimension line

The procedure for inserting vertical dimension line
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. Click button [Insert vertical dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.
4. The style is pre-set to vertical and Label value to Projection.
5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).

669
Reference Guide

6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.

7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.
8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.
9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.
10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single vertical
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.

Inserting a horizontal dimension line

The procedure for inserting horizontal dimension line
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. Click button [Insert horizontal dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.
4. The style is pre-set to horizontal and Label value to Projection.
5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).
6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.
7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.
8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.
9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.
10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single horizontal
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.

Inserting a general dimension line

The procedure for inserting general dimension line
1. On Gallery picture editor toolbar adjust the colour, line thickness, line pattern, and layer.

2. Click button [Insert general dimension line] ( ) on toolbar Insert.

3. The property dialogue for dimension lines is opened on the screen.
4. The style is pre-set to general and Label value to Projection.
5. If needed, adjust other parameters (see chapter Changing the parameters of dimension line).
6. Input the first point to be dimensioned.
7. Input the second point to be dimensioned.
8. Input the point that defines the position of the dimension line.
9. If appropriate, insert other points to be dimensioned.
10. End the function by clicking on button [End action] ( ) on toolbar Insert.
The options for the definition of the points are given in chapter Drawing a line.

Note: If just a single dimension line should be inserted, use button [Insert single general
dimension line] instead. This option requires only the definition of two points that define the
dimensioned distance and one position point. Once these three points are defined, the dimension
line is complete.

670
 Graphic output

Using the command line

The command line of the Gallery item editor helps the user with completion of individual functions.
Short tool tips are displayed in it once a function that requires some kind of input has been started. It is also
possible to type co-ordinates of inserted point in the command line.

Using the SNAP mode

Both the principle and implementation of SNAP mode in the Gallery item editor is identical with the main
SCIA.ESA PT environment. The description is given in chapter Basic working tools > Cursor SNAP modes.
Also the temporary one-step SNAP mode can be applied.
There is only one exception and it is the location of the SNAP toolbar. The toolbar is a separate self-standing
toolbar and is named Point snap. It can be arranged anywhere on the screen.

Modifying the manually drawn entities

Selecting the entity
Principle and rules for making a selection and for its possible modification by removing some entities from it
are identical to the principle and rules for the main SCIA.ESA PT environment.

Moving the entity

The procedure for move of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Moving an entity
via a menu function.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Move] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Copying the entity

The procedure for copying of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Copying the entities > Making a single copy via menu function and
Geometry > Copying the entities > Making multiple copies via menu function.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Copy] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Rotating the entity

The procedure for rotating of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Rotating an
entity via a menu function.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Rotate] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Mirroring the entity

The procedure for mirroring of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Moving the geometric entities > Mirroring an
entity.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Mirror] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Trimming the entity

The procedure for trimming of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions > Trimming
the entities.

671
Reference Guide

The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Trim] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Stretching the entity

The procedure for stretching of entities is similar to the same manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions >
Stretching the entities.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Stretch] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Scaling the entity

The procedure for scaling of entities is similar to the sae manipulation in the main graphical window of
SCIA.ESA PT. See chapter Geometry > Moving the entities > Modifying the shape and dimensions > Scaling
the entities.
The function in the Gallery item editor may be started via button [Scale] on toolbar Geometrical
manipulations.

Changing the shape of entity

The Gallery item editor supports Drag & Drop feature. Therefore, this feature may be used for Drag & Drop
manipulations, i.e. move of entity or move of entity’s end-points.
Similarly to toolbar-invoked manipulation functions, this approach may be used for manually drawn entities
only. It is not possible to move structural members scanned from the SCIA.ESA PT’s graphical window.
The procedure is identical to the one for SCIA.ESA PT graphical window.

Deleting the entity

The procedure for deletion of entities
1. Select entities you need to delete.
2. Click button [Delete] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
3. The entities are deleted from the picture.

Note: This function can be used for both manually drawn entities (e.g. line, text, dimension line)
and scanned graphic window entities (e.g. beam member).

Adjusting the colour of entity

All manually added entities are drawn in a specific colour. There are two ways to specify the colour.
Colour of the The colour of the entity is determined according to entity’s
corresponding layer layer. The colour of layer can be specified in the Layers
manager.
Explicitly defined The colour of a particular entity is independent on the layer.
colour

The colour is adjusted by means of buttons on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.
The procedure to adjust the colour according to the layer
1. Select the entities you want to modify.
2. Click button [Colour by layers] ( ) so that it becomes "pressed down".
3. The colour of the entities is taken from the corresponding layer.
4. Clear the selection.
The procedure to adjust the colour independent on the layer
1. Select the entities you want to modify.
2. Click button [Colour by layers] ( ) so that it is not "pressed down".

672
 Graphic output

3. Button [Current colour] ( ) located next to button [Colour by layers] becomes accessible.

4. Press button [Current colour] ( ) and select the required colour.

5. The colour is adjusted.
6. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the thickness of line

Line thickness is adjusted by means of the edit box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.
The procedure for the adjustment of line thickness
1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Into the first edit box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) type the required
thickness.
3. The change is immediately taken into account.
4. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the pattern of line

Line pattern can be adjusted by means of the combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.
The procedure for the adjustment of line pattern
1. Select the entities you want to modify.

2. Into the combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) select the required line
pattern.
3. The change is immediately taken into account.
4. Clear the selection.

Adjusting the layer of entity

The layer can be adjusted by means of combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar.
The procedure for the adjustment of layer
1. Select the entities you want to edit.

2. Into the layer combo box on toolbar Gallery editor picture toolbar ( ) select the
required layer.
3. The change is immediately taken into account.
4. Clear the selection.

Changing the parameters of text

The procedure to change text parameters
1. Select the text entity you want to modify.
2. If the property dialogue is not displayed, click button [Show / hide properties of selection] ( ) on
Modify toolbar.
3. Adjust the parameters of the text.
4. The changes are automatically and immediately taken into account.
5. Clear the selection.
In addition, also colour and layer can be adjusted for the selected text items.

Changing the parameters of dimension line

Parameters of dimension line
Style The dimension line may be horizontal, vertical, or general.

673
Reference Guide

Plot line Plot line can be long, i.e. leading from the dimension line up to
the dimensioned object, or short.
Plot line offset This value specifies the length of the plot line.
Label alignment The option determines the position of dimension line value.
Label value

The procedure for the change of dimension line parameters

1. Select the dimension lines that should be edited.
2. If the Properties dialogue is not displayed, click button [Show/hide properties] ( ) on toolbar
Modify.
3. Make the necessary changes in the dialogue.
4. The changes are immediately taken into account.
5. If required, close the Properties dialogue.

Modifying the window drawing

Breaking the structural member into free entities
The picture can consist of:
 entities scanned from the graphical window of the application,
 entities added manually to the picture.
It is possible to make geometrical manipulations with all the entities in the picture. On the other hand,
parameters like colour, line thickness, line pattern and layer can be adjusted only to the manually added
entities.
If the user needs to modify these parameters for scanned entities as well, it is necessary to transfer the
scanned entities into manually drawn ones. This means that lines representing structural members are
converted into single lines. These single lines then can be processed like normal manually drawn lines.
The procedure for breaking of structural members
1. Select the beam members you need to break into single lines.
2. Click button [Break selected] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
3. The selected members are broken into single lines.
4. Clear the selection.

Deleting the entity

The procedure for deletion of entities
1. Select entities you need to delete.
2. Click button [Delete] ( ) on toolbar Modify.
3. The entities are deleted from the picture.

Note: This function can be used for both manually drawn entities (e.g. line, text, dimension line)
and scanned graphic window entities (e.g. beam member).

Paper space gallery

Introduction to Paper space gallery
The Paper space gallery is a tool that allows the user to prepare graphic output drawings in advance and
store them within the corresponding project. The individual graphic output drawings are the same drawings as
those created in function Print picture.
The difference is that instead of being directly printed on the connected graphical device, they are stored in a
gallery of drawings. Thus they may be processed any time later (i.e. edited, printed, saved to external file,
etc.).

674
 Graphic output

Paper space gallery manager

The Paper space gallery is controlled by means of a specially designed dialogue that resembles (in
appearance and function) database managers used through out SCIA.ESA PT.
The dialogue (from now on the Paper space gallery manager) provides for:
 creation of a new drawing,
 editing of an existing drawing,
 printing of an existing drawing,
 copying of an existing drawing,
 deleting of an existing drawing.
The Paper space gallery manager consists of the following parts:
Control buttons They perform the operations stated above.
List of existing It states all the drawings that have been created.
drawings
Preview of the selected This window displays the preview of the drawing that is
drawing currently selected in the List of existing drawings.
Property table of the In this table, the name of a particular drawing may be edited.
selected drawing

The Paper space gallery manager can be opened:

 using button [Paper space gallery] ( ) on toolbar Project,

 using function Paper space gallery in the tree menu,
 using function Paper space gallery from menu Tree.

Editing the drawing in the gallery

The procedure for editing of an existing drawing
1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.
2. Select the drawing you need to modify.
3. Click button [Edit].
4. The editing dialogue for a new drawing is opened.
5. Make the necessary changes to the drawing.
6. Confirm with [OK] button.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Creating a new drawing in the gallery

The procedure for the creation of a new drawing
1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.
2. Click button [New].
3. The editing dialogue for a new drawing is opened.
4. Make the drawing.
5. Confirm with [OK] button.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.
7. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

675
Reference Guide

Creating a new drawing based on a template

Especially for larger projects, it may be useful to define some part of the drawing that is repeated on each
drawing related to the project. This repeated part might be e.g. a title block with the company logo, etc.
SCIA.ESA PT enables the user to define a template for each new drawing created in the Paper space gallery.
The template is nothing else than a drawing that has been created in the Paper space gallery earlier and
saved as an external file.
If a template is specified in the application settings (see chapter Program settings > Application settings >
Graphic templates settings) each new drawing created in the Paper space gallery is based on this template.

Printing the drawing from the gallery

The procedure for printing of an existing drawing
1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.
2. Select the drawing you need to print.
3. Click button [Print].
4. Adjust printer parameters.
5. Confirm with [OK] button.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 as many times as required.
7. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Copying the drawing in the gallery

The procedure for editing of an existing drawing
1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.
2. Select the drawing you need to copy.
3. Click button [Copy].
4. A new copy of the selected drawing is created.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 as many times as required.
6. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Deleting the drawing from the gallery

The procedure for removal of an existing drawing
1. Open the Paper space gallery manager.
2. Select the drawing you want to delete.
3. Click button [Delete].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as required.
5. Close the Paper space gallery manager.

Making or changing the drawing

A drawing itself is created or edited in a dialogue that is almost identical to the Graphic output dialogue (see
chapter Graphic output > Direct graphic output > Editing the layout).

676
 Graphic output

There are a few changes or extensions that are described below.

Insertion of an external picture
An external picture may be inserted from the same resources as in the direct graphical output. In addition,
there are some more option:
from window Inserts a drawing from any of the opened graphical windows.
from gallery Insert a picture from the Picture gallery.

Editing picture properties

Button [Picture setting] is not present on the control toolbar. The properties of a particular picture may be
edited after its selection via button [Properties] ( ) on the control toolbar.

Saving a template
Any drawing may be saved as a template. The template may be later used as the basis (starting status) for
new drawings.
The procedure to save a template
1. Open the Paper space gallery.
2. Create a new drawing.
3. Draw and insert everything that should appear on the template.
4. Press button Save template on the toolbar.

Note: In order to make the saved template "active" follow the procedure given in chapter
Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings.

Creating a template for Paper space gallery drawings

Templates may be very useful when a part of the drawing should be present on numerous drawings. See also
Creating a new drawing based on a template.
The procedure for creation of a template for drawings

677
Reference Guide

1. Open the Paper space gallery.

2. Create a new drawing.
3. Prepare the part of the drawing that should be repeated on each drawing.
4. Save the drawing as template.
5. Close the Paper space gallery.
6. Use function Setup > Options.
7. Select tab Graphic templates.
8. In the field Overview drawings manager, browse for the file you have saved to the disk.
9. Confirm the settings.
Form now on, whenever a new drawing will be created in the Paper space gallery, it will contain the template
drawing.

Note: If the template is supposed to be used not for the Paper space gallery drawings, but for
Graphic output (i.e. Print picture function) field Print picture in the Setup > Options dialogue must
be adjusted acordingly.

678
Document
Introduction to document
The Document is a part of SCIA.ESA PT that enables you to produce output documents. The final Document
may consist of:
 separate tables,
 embedded tables,
 pictures,
 user-added comments,
 included external files,
 etc.
The chapter Document comprises three parts that are closely related to each other:
Document window The Document window is the very tool that serves for the
creation of above mentioned output documents.
Preview window The Preview window enables the user to look at selected
parts of the model in Document-like style.
Table composer The Table composer provides for formatting of tables in both
Document and Preview windows.

Document window
Introduction to document window
The Document window is a separate window of SCIA.ESA PT. While the graphical window of SCIA.ESA PT
displays the drawing of structure, the Document window is capable of displaying drawings together with
summarising tables and other user-specified information.
Example of Document window
The Document window in the picture shows fragments of tables of cross-sections and beam members defined
in the structure.

679
Reference Guide

Opening the document window

The Document window can be opened in several ways:
 in tree menu, open service Document,

 on toolbar Project click button [Document] ( ).

When the Document window is opened the Document tree is displayed in the tree menu window.

Document window toolbar

A Export Exports the contents of the document into an external file of

selected format.

B Document Opens Visual Style dialogue and enables you to change the
settings layout of the current visual style.

C Printer setup Provides for the adjustment of printer.

D Print Prints the contents of the document.

680
 Document

E No pagination The document in the Document window uses no pagination.

That is, the tables are shown one after another.

F Pagination, The Document window shows a preview of the document

fit page width including page breaks. The page fits the width of the document
window.

G Pagination, Similar to above, but you can see the page is zoomed so that
fit whole page the Document window shows the whole page.

H Refresh of Refreshes the document (may be necessary after some

document modifications of the Document).
The principle of manual refresh has been introduced in order to
speed up the response of the Document.

I Refresh of Refreshes the images inserted into the document (may be

images necessary after some modifications of the Document).
The principle of manual refresh has been introduced in order to
speed up the response of the Document.

J Fast selection of Selects the active visual style from the list of existing (defined)
Visual Style visual styles.

K Visual Style Opens the Visual styles manager.

manager
L Fast selection of Selects the active table style from the list of existing (defined)
Table Style table styles for the selected table.

M Table composer Opens the Table composer.

N Table manager Opens the Table manager.

Creating the document

Inserting a new item into document
The user manually specifies which tables, drawings, etc. will be present in the document.
Default Default components are e.g. user-defined text, external picture,
etc.
Project Basic information about the current project.
Libraries Libraries contain e.g. materials, cross-sections, etc. used in the
structure.
Sets From this group, load groups, load cases, etc. can be added to
the document.
Structure Group structure holds information about the members and
nodes of the model.
Load Individual loads may be listed in the document.
Results Result tables form a very important part of the document.
The result tables can only be included from the graphical
window.
Steel Design and check values for steel members.
Pipeline Data relating to pipeline design (special module).
Timber Design and check values for timber members.

681
Reference Guide

Concrete Design and check values for concrete members.

Mobile loads Results relating to the calculation with mobile loads.
Mobile loads – input Input data relating to mobile loads.
data
Influence lines Calculated influence lines.
Picture Picture from gallery.
Special Some special data.

Note: The list of available groups (sets) of items can vary depending on the type of project and
depending on selected functionality.
Each of the above mentioned groups (called sets) contains one or more individual items. It is possible to
include into the document either the whole set or only selected items. The procedure is the same – what
decides is what you select.
The selection of items inside a particular group can vary according to the type of the project and selected
functionality. E.g. if no predefined loads are defined in the project, they are not offered in the list.
Procedure for the insertion of a new section into the document
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. The New document item dialogue is opened. It contains the list of available sets and items.
3. Select the required set and item.
4. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
5. Close the New document item dialogue.
An alternative procedure for the insertion of a new section into the document
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. The New document item dialogue is opened. It contains the list of available sets and items.
3. Select the required set and item.
4. Using a standard Windows Drag&Drop feature, move the selected item into the document tree.
5. Close the New document item dialogue.

Inserting a new item into document from the graphical window

A table may be inserted into the document also directly from the graphical window of SCIA.ESA PT. In that
case, the table is created for the selected entities. The selection may be controlled by filters.
The procedure to insert a table into the document from the graphical window
1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.
2. Select the required entities.
3. Call function Table to document:
a. either using menu function File > Print data > Table to document,

b. or using button [Print] ( ) on toolbar Project and selecting function Table to

document,
c. or through the pop-up menu and its function Table to document.
4. The Insert-dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. If required, make necessary adjustments.
6. Confirm with [OK].
7. A new table for the selected entities is inserted into the document.

Insert-dialogue parameters
List of selected or
available entities
Name
This part of the Insert dialogue shows all the entities that are
available for insertion into the document at this moment.
Just one entity may and must be selected at a time.
Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.

682
 Document

Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.

Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or
not.
Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e.
not to divide it into two pages.
Selection All
All the entities of the type that was selected in the top list will
be included in the table.
List
The table will be limited to a finite list of entities. The selection
can be modified through the button [Edit].
Wildcard
Only entities meeting the typed "wildcard specification" (e.g.
BE*) will be input into the table.
Named selection
If exists, a user-defined named selection can be selected here.
Edit/Wildcard/Named This item extends the previous one.
selection

Examples
Assume the following simple planar structure:

It is subject to:
 self weight,
 line load acting on the top beams and defined by projection (displayed in the picture),
 point load in selected nodes defined in a separate load case (not displayed in the picture),
Example 1
No service is opened. All entities are selected. Function Table to document is called.
The program inserts all available information into the document. A dialogue is displayed on the screen where
the user may rename individual sections (tables).

683
Reference Guide

Example 2
No service is opened. Line loads are selected. Two nodes are selected. Function Table to document is
called.

The program inserts available information for the selected entities into the document. A dialogue is displayed
on the screen where the user may rename individual sections (tables).

Example 3
The structure is already calculated. Service Results is opened. Function Internal forces is focused and result-
diagrams displayed.

684
 Document

When function Table to document is called, the following table is included into the document.

Inserting a drawing into the document

The insertion of a drawing from the graphical window into the document is analogous to the insertion of a table
into the document.
The procedure for the insertion of a picture from the graphical window into document
1. Display the entities for which you want to insert a table into the document.
2. Adjust the required view and view parameters.
3. Call function Picture to document:
a. either using menu function File > Print picture > Picture to document,

b. or using button [Print picture] ( ) on toolbar Project,

c. or using the pop-up menu function Picture to document (it may be "hidden" in
View submenu if some entities are selected).
4. The picture is inserted into the document.

Note: Also pictures may be repeated the same way as tables. Thus e.g. a set of pictures
showing diagrams of internal forces for individual load cases may be easily created. Just insert a
drawing of internal forces into document item Load cases. See chapter Creating the repeating
tables for more information.

Inserting a picture from the Picture gallery

Procedure to insert a picture from the Picture gallery
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Picture group select From gallery.
3. Press button Add to open the Picture gallery manager.
4. Browse through the available pictures and select those that should be inserted into the document
(single or multi-selection can be used).
5. Close the Picture gallery manager.
6. The Insert-item dialogue is opened on the screen.
7. Adjust required parameters and confirm with [OK].

685
Reference Guide

8. Close the New document item dialogue.

Picture parameters
Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.
Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.
Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or
not.
Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e.
not to divide it into two pages.
Size definition The size of the picture can be defined through the scale or in
percentages of the page.
Scale Specifies the scale 1 : X.
Picture width Available for Scale option only. Defines the width of the picture.
Picture height Available for Scale option only. Defines the height of the
picture.
Percentage of page Specifies the size of the picture as a percentage of the page.
Fit to page Available for Percentage option only. If ON, the picture is
stretched to fit the page.

Inserting a new text line

Procedure for the insertion of a user-typed text
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select Text line.
3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.
5. In the document tree window select the Text line item.
6. The Property window displays its properties.
7. Click button [Edit text].
8. Fill in the editing dialogue: type the caption of the item and the text itself.
9. Confirm the action.

Inserting an external image file

Procedure for the insertion of an external image file
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select External Image file.
3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.
5. In the document tree window select the External image file item.
6. The Property window displays its properties.
7. Decide whether the file is embedded into the document or self-standing.
a. If option Embed data is ON, the file is copied into the document and the original
file may be deleted from the disk. This results in more consistent and independent
document, but it becomes larger.
b. If option Embed data is OFF, only a reference to the file is inserted into the
document. Once the original file is removed from the disk, or moved to another
location, it disappears from the document. This option leads to smaller document,
but it is susceptible to re-arrangement of files on the disk.
8. Browse for the file.

686
 Document

9. Adjust its size in Percentage of page.

Inserting an external text file

Procedure for the insertion of an external text file
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select External Text file.
3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.
5. In the document tree window select the External text file item.
6. The Property window displays its properties.
7. Decide whether the file is embedded into the document or self-standing.
a. If option Embed data is ON, the file is copied into the document and the original
file may be deleted from the disk. This results in more consistent and independent
document, but it becomes larger.
b. If option Embed data is OFF, only a reference to the file is inserted into the
document. Once the original file is removed from the disk, or moved to another
location, it disappears from the document. This option leads to smaller document,
but it is susceptible to re-arrangement of files on the disk.
8. Browse for the file.

Inserting the end of page

Procedure for the insertion of a page break (End of page)
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select Page break.
3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.
5. In the document tree window select the Page break item.
6. The Property window displays its properties.
7. Select if the item is printable or not.
8. If required, specify the number of skipped pages.

Inserting the table of contents

Procedure for the insertion of a table of contents
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select Table of contents.
3. Press button Add to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.

Inserting an empty chapter

Procedure for the insertion of an empty chapter
1. At the bottom of the document tree window click button [New].
2. In Default group select Chapter.
3. Press button [Add] to add the item into the document.
4. Close the New document item dialogue.

687
Reference Guide

Creating the advanced documents

Creating the repeating tables
Tables for related information included in the document may be repeated and thus provide for sorted
arrangement of the data.
The principle of repeating will be explained on an example of load cases and load.
Standard arrangement
Let’s assume that three tables are included into the document:
 load cases,
 line load,
 point load.
If the tables are inserted in a standard way, the document tree looks like:

And the document looks like:

Repeating arrangement
Let’s assume that the user wants the data to be sorted in the following way:
 information about the first load case,
 loads acting in the first load case,
 information about the second load case,
 loads acting in the second load case,

688
 Document

 etc.
The Document of SCIA.ESA PT provides even for this sophisticated arrangement of information in the
document.
The document tree then looks like:

And the document is arranged as shown below.

The procedure for the creation of repeating tables

1. Add the required tables into the document using the standard way. (The tables may be inserted
from the graphical window as well.)
2. In the document tree, select the item that should be repeated "under" the master item.
3. Using standard Windows Drag&Drop feature, move the selected item under (or into) the required
master. Alternatively you may invoke the document tree pop-up menu and perform function Indent.
4. That’s it.

Note: Even though the chapter is named "repeating tables", it is in fact any document item that
can be repeated, e.g. a picture. See the example below.
Example
Let us assume a three-span continuous beam subjected to: (i) self-weight, (ii) a concentrated force
in the middle of the first span, (iii) a concentrated force in the middle of the second span, and (iv) a
concentrated force in the middle of the third span.

689
Reference Guide

The document tree may be created in the following way:

The picture is a diagram of bending moments – displayed in the Results service and "saved" using
the Picture to document function.
The final document will look like:

690
 Document

Creating multiple documents for the project

Each project can have more than one document. Each of the documents is then treated separately as a single
self-standing document.
The procedure for creation of additional documents
1. Open the Document window.
2. At the top right corner of the document tree window click the button [Manager of documents].
3. The Manager of documents is opened on the screen.
4. Use button New to create a new document.
5. Close the Manager of documents.

Note: It is generally recommended to create multiple documents in one project instead of one
huge "mastodon". The manipulation with smaller documents is much faster and safer than the
necessity to handle hundreds or thousands of pages at a time.

Editing the basic document properties

Manager of documents
The Manager of documents is a standard SCIA.ESA PT manages.
To open it, click the button [...] (i.e. Manager of documents) at the top right corner of the document tree
window.

691
Reference Guide

You can edit the basic document properties in the Document manager. Or, alternatively, you can edit them
directly in the Document property window that is displayed next to the document window.
The document also offers the Document action buttons.

Basic document properties

Each document has got a set of basic properties.
Name The name is used for an easy identification of the document.
Description It may contain some additional information about the document.
Embed If YES, all the adjustments in the style of tables are stored with the current project. It
settings means that if you share the project with your colleague, when he/she opens it on
his/her computer, the layout and style of the tables will be the same as yours.
If NO, the style and layout of tables in the document is stored in ESA PT folder(s)
on your computer. It means that if you share the project with your colleague, when
he/she opens it on his/her computer, the style and layout will be read from his/her
computer and, consequently, may be different from the layout on your computer. On
the other hand, the project file is smaller as the formatting information does not
have to be stored with it.
Language Specifies the language of the document.
Please note that even if you change the language of the document, there are some
texts that remain in the original language, e.g. names of load cases, names of
cross-sections, etc.
Pictures The pictures can be left-aligned, centred, or right-aligned in the page.
alignment
Header This item specifies the style of the header of the document. If required, the header
template can be left out completely.
Edit header This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected header template.
template
Title page This item specifies the style of the title page of the document. If required, the title
template page can be left out completely.
Edit title This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected title page template.
page
template
Footer This item specifies the style of the footer of the document. If required, the footer can
template be left out completely.
Edit footer This item opens the Table composer for the currently selected footer template.
template
First page Specifies the number of the first page.
number When several documents are combined together, or when you need to have a
special "introduction" prior to the document itself, this item allows for the necessary
adjustment.
First Specifies the number of the first chapter.
chapter
number
Chapters Specifies which chapters are numbered.
numbers Let us assume this simple document:

None: There will be no chapters numbers at all.

All: All the chapters will be numbered (including the appropriate level). That is: Load
cases, Line forces on beam, Load groups and Combination key will be equipped

692
 Document

with a number.

Top level: Only the chapters from the first level will be numbered. In our example,
Load cases, Load groups and Combination key will be numbered. Line forces on
beam will be without any number. Also the tables with individual load cases will not
be numbered.

Chapters Similar to Chapters numbers, but affects not only the numbering, but the whole
description titles of individual chapters.
s

The properties may be edited in the Manager of documents.

Note: If you want to ensure that all the possible users who open the document from a particular
project on their local computers have the same layout of the document, always set option Embed
settings to ON. Otherwise, it may happen that different users will get different layout of the
document, depending on their local settings.

Adjusting basic document properties

The procedure to adjust the basic properties of a document

693
Reference Guide

1. Open the Document (e.g. through the tree function Document).

2. In the Document tree select the top level item.
3. The Property window shows the basic properties of he document.
4. Make required changes.
5. If required, regenerate the document and it can be printed, exported, or whatever you need.
6. Close the document.

Document action buttons

The property window of the document (and also the Manager of documents) offer a set of action buttons.
[Refresh of document] The document contents is refreshed.
[Refresh of picture] The images in the document are refreshed.
[Load settings] Settings previously saved into an external file are read.
[Save settings] The current settings are stored into an external file.
[Save template] The current document is saved as a new document template.

Editing the document layout

Introduction to editing of document layout
Once the document has been created, it is not supposed to only passively remain AS IS forever. Any time
when necessary, the user may edit the document.
It is possible to:
 edit the layout of individual tables in the Table composer,
 edit properties of individual items in the Property window,
 sort individual items of the document,
 remove unnecessary tables.

Editing the properties of document items

Whenever an item is selected (i.e. highlighted) in the document tree window, the corresponding part of the
document is displayed on the screen (i.e. the proper page is shown). Simultaneously the parameters of the
selected item are listed in the Property window and may be reviewed or edited. The parameters depend on the
type of the selected item. Different parameters will be available for table of result internal forces and different
parameters for e.g. an external image file. On the other hand, some of the parameters will be identical as they
define the general properties of the document item.
Name Specifies the name of the table. It can be changed if required.
Caption Specifies the caption of the table. It can be altered if required.
Visible Specifies whether the table will be visible in the document or
not.
Prefer one page If ON, the document will try to put the table on one page, i.e.
not to divide it into two pages.
Selection All
All the entities of the type that was selected in the top list will
be included in the table.
List
The table will be limited to a finite list of entities. The selection
can be modified through the button [Edit].
Wildcard
Only entities meeting the typed "wildcard specification" (e.g.
BE*) will be input into the table.

694
 Document

Named selection
If exists, a user-defined named selection can be selected here.
Edit/Wildcard/Named This item extends the previous one.
selection

Note: There may be additional parameters available for a perticulat document item. These
additional parameters are relating to the particular data, e.g. results > internal forces, picture
parameters, etc. Meaning of such parameters is usually clear from the context they appear in. The
meaning may be also found in the explanation of the appropriate part of the program (e.g.
parameters of Result tables can be found in chapter Results).

Sorting the items of the document

The procedure for sorting of items in the document
1. In the document tree window select the item that should be moved to a new position.
2. Press key [Ctrl] and hold it down.
3. Use arrow keys [Up] and [Down] to move the item to its new position within the document tree.
The sorting may also be done using the Drag&Drop feature or via the document-tree pop-up menu.

Deleting the items from the document

The procedure for deletion of an item from the document
1. In the document tree window, select the item that should be deleted.
2. Press key [Delete].
3. The item is removed from the document.
The required item can also be deleted or via the document-tree pop-up menu.

Editing the header

A default header is automatically inserted into the document. Its layout and style can be edited using the table
composer for the header.
The procedure for the editing of the header
1. Position the mouse cursor inside the document window.
2. Click right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.
3. Select function Header.
4. The table composer opens on the screen.
5. Use it to make the required modifications.

Note: Contrary to other tables inserted into the Document, Header and Footer can be edited in a
simplified Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens on the screen by default.
If required, the user may swap to full editor.

Editing the footer

A default header is automatically inserted into the document.
Its layout and style can be edited using the table composer for the header.
The procedure for the editing of the footer
1. Position the mouse cursor inside the document window.
2. Click right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.
3. Select function Footer.
4. The table composer opens on the screen.
5. Use it to make the required modifications.

695
Reference Guide

Note: Contrary to other tables inserted into the Document, Header and Footer can be edited in a
simplified Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens on the screen by default.
If required, the user may swap to full editor.

Document-tree pop-up menu

The tree window of the document is equipped with a pop-up menu. The menu ofer some basic functions for the
management of the layout of the document.
Move up Moves the current item up in the document tree.
Move down Moves the current item down in the document tree.
Indent Indents the current item, that is, it creates a repeating item.
Outdent Outdents the current item. It can be user to remove the repeating
items.
Copy Makes a copy of the current item. The item is put next to the original
one and can be then moved and/or edited.
The current item can also be copied using Drag-and-Drop approach
with simultaneously pressed and held Ctrl key on the keyboard.
Delete Deletes the current item.
Show list of Performs the same function as button [New], i.e. opens a dialogue with
insertable items a list of all items (tables) that can be inserted into the document.

Modifying the structure through the document

Editing the geometry in the document table
The Document is not only a passive printable representation of the modelled structure and calculated results.
The tables in the document may be used for tabular editing of the model.
Editing the nodal co-ordinates
Any co-ordinate of any nodal point of the model may be numerically edited in the document table.
The procedure for the editing of nodal co-ordinates
1. Find in the document the table with co-ordinates of nodal points.
2. Select the node you need to modify.
3. Click the cell with the co-ordinate.
4. Type the new value.
5. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.
Editing the end-nodes of beams
Any of the existing beam members may be "switched" to a new end-point.
The procedure for the change of beam’s end-node
1. Find in the document the table with beam members.
2. Select the beam member you need to modify.
3. Click the cell with the node name.
4. Type the new node name.
5. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.
Editing the beam properties
Also properties of beam members can be edited in the document, not only the geometry.
The procedure for the change of beam’s properties
1. Find in the document the table with beam members.
2. Select the beam member you need to modify.
3. Make the change:

696
 Document

4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.
5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use
the offered combo box to set the right choice.
6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.

Editing the additional data in the document table

Similarly to geometry, also other data of the model (e.g. supports, hinges, loads, etc.) can be edited from within
the document tables.
Editing the model data of the project (e.g. supports)
Any model data can be edited in the appropriate document table.
The procedure for the change of model data
1. Find in the document the table with required model data.
2. Select the entity you need to modify.
3. Make the change:
4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.
5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use
the offered combo box to set the right choice.
6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.
Editing the loads
Any loads can be edited in the appropriate document table.
The procedure for the editing of loads
1. Find in the document the table with required loads.
2. Select the load you need to modify.
3. Make the change:
4. If the value may be typed directly, click the cell and type the new value.
5. If the new value can be selected from a list of available options, double click the cell and then use
the offered combo box to set the right choice.
6. Press [Enter] on your keyboard to confirm the change.

Note: Changes made in any of the document tables are immediately taken into account.

Previewing the document

Adjusting the document preview
The document may be previewed using several pagination modes.
no pagination
pagination, fit page
width
pagination, fit whole
page
The document is displayed as a continuous uninterrupted
document.
The title page, headers and footers are not displayed.
Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The
page width fits the width of the screen.
The title page, headers and footers are displayed.
Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The
whole page is shown on the screen.
The title page, headers and footers are displayed.

697
Reference Guide

Printing and exporting the document

Adjusting the printing device
The procedure for the adjustment of the printing device

1. In the document window click button [Printer setup] ( ).

2. Make required settings.
3. Confirm with [OK].

Printing the document

The printer may be adjusted prior to the printing.
The procedure for printing

1. In the document window click button [Print] ( ).

2. Select required printing device.
3. Set other print parameters.
4. Finish the print.

Exporting the document

The procedure for export of the document

1. In the document window click button [Export] ( ).

2. Select the required format.
3. Select other export options.
4. Finish with button [Export].
Export formats
HTML The document is exported as a separate web page.
TXT The document is exported as a simple text. No drawings, no
pictures, and no embedded tables are exported.
RTF The document is exported as a Rich Text Format file. This
format is widely used for exchange of files between various
programs. Pictures and embedded tables are exported as well.
The pictures are included directly into the file.
PDF The document is exported to a file that can be view in the
Acrobat Reader that is downloadable for free from the Internet.
XLS The document is exported to a file that can be view and edited
in MS Excel.

Parameters and limitations

HTML
Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in your browser
associated with HTM files.
Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

Text
Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in Notepad or
other program associated with TXT file.
Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

RTF

698
 Document

Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in the program
associated with RTF files.
Max picture colour Defines the quality of pictures
depth
Enable vector pictures Pictures are stored as vector images.
This option works ONLY with MS Word XP, MS Word 2003,
or newer. It does not work with MS Word 2000 and older.

PDF
Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in the PDF-
format associated program (usually the free-available Adobe
reader).
Max pages per file This option can limit the number of pages generated in a single
file. If the total number of document pages exceeds the
specified number, multiple PDF files are generated.
Example
Let us assume a document occupying 3 pages. Let us assume
that Max pages per file is set to 1. Let us assume that the
name of the exported PDF file is input as
MyExportedDocument.pdf.
After the export into PDF, there are 3 files generated:
MyExportedDocument.1.pdf,
MyExportedDocument.2.pdf,
MyExportedDocument.3.pdf.
Each of the generated PDF files contains one page of the
document.
Note: It is, of course, clear that in practice you usually
specify more than 1 page per document.
Compression of It is possible to selecte a required method of compression.
pictures Users without any background knowledge on compressing the
graphics are recommended to use the default option.
Double pictures If ON, the quality of pictures is higher, the PDF file is larger.
resolution If OFF, it is the opposite way.
Pictures compression Defines the rate of compression. Again, users without any
level background knowledge on compressing the graphics are
recommended to use the default option.
Enable vector pictures If ON, the quality of pictures is better (if possible).

XLS
This export format creates a file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel. What is important, however, is the fact
that this export procedure does NOT generate a standard XLS file. In fact, it generates what is called XML
Spreadsheet. A whole system of several XML-format files that are stored in the specified output folder and one
automatically created subfolder. The extension of the main file is set to XLS, so it can be easily located.
Remember, when you want to copy the exported "XLS" file to another location, you must take the
corresponding subfolder as well. Otherwise, the copy of your spreadsheet won’t open.
Parameters
Open after export After the export is completed, the file is opened in your browser
associated with HTM files.
Unicode Unicode encoding is used to store the text.

699
Reference Guide

Refreshing the document

Principle
An ideal state would be if everything could be fully automatic and made immediately without any delay. This is
even more true with reference to software and its interaction with the user.
Unfortunately, this is only an ideal state that can hardly be achieved in practice. What’s more, sometimes the
immediate response to any user’s action can be even undesirable, especially when a set of successive steps
is necessary to complete a particular action.
SCIA.ESA PT therefore presents a well-thought-out compromise solution in service Results and also in the
Document.
The implemented solution consists of two separate steps:
1. The user can freely select "WHAT" should be displayed and also adjust "HOW" it should be
displayed.
2. The user then gives the command "refresh (or display or regenerate) everything NOW".

Refresh of document
A refresh of document can be made by means of two separate buttons.
Refresh of document It refreshes the contents of the document. If necessary,
it fills in the tables with appropriate and current data and
make the document up-to-date.
Refresh of pictures It refreshes all the pictures in the document so that they
reflect the current state of the project.

Whenever a document is opened, it is displayed in comprised form, i.e. with empty tables and only headings
shown. In order to see the full document, [Refresh of document] button must be used.
If any change is made to the contents of the document (e.g. a new table is added, some of the existing tables
is removed, etc.) [Refresh of document] button must be used as well in order to regenerate the document.
If a change is made to the model and this change results in a modification of drawings already inserted in the
document, [Refresh of picture] button must be used in order to regenerate the pictures.

Example for refresh of Document

Let’s assume the same structure as in the Example for Refresh of results.
Let’s create a new document created and insert two tables as shown below.

This document will show internal forces in beams for individual load cases sorted by the load cases.
Once the document is created in the above mentioned way, the document window will show the "contents" of
the document, but not the numerical values.

700
 Document

Once button [Refresh of document] ( ) is pressed, the document is regenerated and the individual tables
are filled in with appropriate numerical data.

701
Reference Guide

The picture above shows a fragment of the whole document.

Preview window
Introduction to preview window
The Preview window is a document-like window that can be used for:
 tabular preview of selected entities,
 tabular editing of the model.

Note: The philosophy and operation principles of the Preview window are identical with those
for the Document window. Therefore, the majority of instructions for use of the Document can be
applied to the Preview window as well.

702
 Document

Opening the preview window

The procedure for the opening of the Preview window
1. In the graphical window of SCIA.ESA PT select the entities that should be included into the preview.
2. Call function Print / Preview table:
a. either using menu function File > Print data > Print / Preview table,

b. or clicking button [Print] ( ) on toolbar Project.

3. The Preview window is opened and appropriate tables are displayed in it.

Note: If the Preview window has been already opened, its contents is replaced with the
appropriate new tables.
For more information about selection of entities for the display in the Preview window see chapter Inserting a
new section into document from the graphical window.

Adjusting the display style in the preview window

The preview window may be formatted:
no pagination
pagination, fit page
width
pagination, fit whole
page
The document in the Preview window is displayed as a
continuous uninterrupted document.
The title page, headers and footers are not displayed.
Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The
page width fits the width of the screen.
The title page, headers and footers are displayed as well.
Preview of individual pages of the document is displayed. The
whole page is shown on the screen.
The title page, headers and footers are displayed as well.

Note 1: The layout, style and contents of tables in the Preview window can be adjusted by
means of table composer.
Note 2: The preview can be supplemented with a header and footer. The formatting of these
preview elements is identical with formatting in the document window.

Adjusting the preview window settings

Similarly to the document window, the user may specify preview window settings. The procedure and meaning
of the parameters are analogous with the settings for the document window.

Exporting the preview

The contents of the Preview window can be exported into an external file.
The procedure is analogous to the procedure for exporting from the document window.

Printing the preview

The contents of the Preview window can be printed on the connected printing device.
The procedure is analogous to the procedure for printing from the document window.
The printing device may be adjusted the same way as in the document window.

Editing the structure from within the preview window

Both the geometry and additional data of the model can be edited numerically in the tables displayed in the
Preview window.
The procedure is identical to the procedure for editing of geometry and additional data from within the
document tables.

703
Reference Guide

Visual style of the document

Visual style
The overall layout of the document (page size, margins, fonts, colours, etc.) is called "Visual Style".
One document can have several visual styles defined. Only one visual style may be selected as the active one.
On the other hand, it is simple to swap from one visual style to another. This change effects ONLY the layout
of the document page. It has no impact at all on the contents of the document and on the style (let’s say
layout) of individual tables and images in the document.
The visual style is kept separately from the layout and contents of tables so that it can be easily copied
(distributed) to other computers where SCIA.ESA PT is installed.
This way, it is very simple to have a unified layout of document pages throughout the whole company.
On disk, each visual style is stored in one file. The files use extension .zdx and are stored in folder with table
templates.
Note: The .zdx file is of XML format.
The visual styles can be defined and also edited in the Visual Styles Manager.

Visual styles manager

The Visual styles manager is a standard SCIA.ESA PT database manager.
You can use it to:
 select required visual style for your document,
 create a new visual style,
 edit the existing visual style,
 delete the no-longer-used visual style.

The procedure to open the Visual styles manager

1. Open the Document.
2. Press button [Visual style manager] on the bar at the top of the Document window.
3. The Visual styles manager is opened on the screen.

Adjusting the visual style

The visual style can be adjusted in the Visual Style dialogue. The following groups of parameters are available.
Page On this tab the user may define the main properties of a page.
Styles On this tab the user may define the styles used in the
document.
Tables On this tab the user may specify the layout of tables in the
document.
Options Some advanced options may be set here.

Page
Printer This item defines the printer used for output of document. Any
of installed printers can be selected for the output.
"Part of the page" In the combo box, it is possible to choose which part of the
sheet is to be adjusted (e.g. body, footer, header, etc.).
For each part of the page the following settings are available.
Padding Defines the padding (free space or gap) between the "frame"
(border) of the selected part of the page and the contents (e.g.
text) of that part of the page.
Border Defines the thickness and colour of the frame (rectangle) that
can be drawn around the selected part of the page.
Margin Defines the outer "gap" around the selected part of the page.

704
 Document

Example: Horizontal padding and margins

The following example demonstrates the practical meaning of padding and margins. The horizontal left
padding and horizontal left margin is shown for the "page" and "body".

Page
A = left margin (distance between the edge of the sheet and the border)
B = left border (thickness of the border)
C = left padding (distance between the border and the "contents" of the page)
Body
D = left margin (distance between the "contents-edge" of the page and the frame of the body)
E = left border (thickness of the frame of the body)
F = left padding (distance between the border and the "contents" of the body)

Styles
This tab of the dialogue allows for the adjustment of font parameters. The first control element (the combo box)
selects the style (e.g. Normal, Table header, etc.). The control elements below then define the properties of
that particular style.
Font Specifies the font.
Height Defines the size of letters.
Width Defines the width of letters.
Weight Defines the thickness of letters.
Italic Specifies whether an Italic font should be used.
Underline Underlines the letters.
Colour Sets the colour of texts.
Background If available, defines the background of texts.
Padding Padding is the amount of space around the text, i.e. the gap
between the border of individual table cells and the text itself.
"Description and Below the parameters an official description and a short
sample texts" sample text printed in the selected font is attached.

Tables
It is possible to define the format for both table cells and table background.

705
Reference Guide

Lines
Use custom line width
Do not print any lines
"Individual lines"
The defined format of lines (cell border) is applied.
No table cell lines are printed.
A list of all the lines and frames that can be modified follows.
The user can adjust his/her favourite values.

Note: For more information see Layout settings.

Background
Use custom Defined colours are applied.
background colours
Do not print any The background is not printed. The cells are transparent.
background
"Colours" The colours for header, even and odd row and for important
cell can be adjusted.
Note: The fact that a particular cell is important is defined by
the author of the program and it cannot be altered by the user.
The user may only change the colour of such a cell.

Break narrow tables to strips

Do not break table to The tables are printed in the document as designed. E.g. even
strips if the table consists of one column only and 100 lines, it is
printed "AS IS".

Break table to strips This option may save a considerable amount of paper as it
whenever possible breaks narrow tables into multiple strips and prints individual
strips next to each other in order to better utilise the page
width.

Use built-in automatic Similar to the option above, but a built-in algorithm is applied
decision algorithm that tries to assess the best division of the table into strips.

Options
Picture colour depth
Defines the colour depth for individual output device.

YES/NO values at tables

The user may select a favourite symbol to stand for YES and NO value in output tables.

Overflowed objects
If an object (e.g. a table) is too wide to fit a page, it is possible to define a ratio of reduction.

Filename for export

Suggest last used The last used filename is offered.
Construct from name of The filename is derived from the name of the project.
project filename

System
Trap Exception This option has no practical meaning for a standard user. It is
relevant only for situations when a user cooperates directly with
the programmers and they try to trace a specific problem.
Maximum number of Maximum allowable number of pages of the document.
pages

706
 Document

Max size of auto Defines the size of a document table when the table is
refreshing table automatically refreshed. If the table is bigger, its regeneration
must be started manually by the user.

The procedure for the adjustment of visual style

1. If it is not the case, open the Document window.
2. Open the Document settings dialogue:

a. either using button

b. or using pop-up menu function Document settings (called Edit styles in some
older versions),
c. or through the Visual Styles manager.
3. Define the required settings.
4. Confirm the adjustment with [OK].

Note: The default document style may also be pre-adjusted using SCIA.ESA PT function Setup
> Document.

Table Manager and Table Composer

Introduction
The Document consists of individual document items. One document item can be a table, image, simple text,
etc. In this chapter we focus on tables only. Document items are sorted in the document tree.
Each table contains certain data (e.g. information about nodes, beam members, defined load cases,
characteristics of cross-sections, calculated results etc). The layout of the table is called a template. One table
can have (and usually really has) several templates defined. Thus, it is possible to choose between (i) brief or
detailed table, (ii) horizontal or vertical table, etc.
The developer of ESA PT has prepared a set of templates that should cover the common needs of majority of
users. On the other hand, it is clear that special situations may require special treatment, it means a special
layout of the tables in the document. It is also common that e.g. large companies want to have their documents
standardised and therefore, they may require some modification of the default templates or even creation of
tailor-made templates reflecting their particular needs or habits.
SCIA.ESA PT offers two tools that may provide for the above-mentioned tasks.
Table Manager
The Table Manager belongs to the extended family of SCIA.ESA PT database managers. It provides for
maintenance of table templates.
Table Composer
The Table Composer is an editing tool that can be used to modify the layout of a particular table template.

Manufacturer's versus user's table template

Table templates and OTS files
The introductory chapter mentioned a table template. Each table template has a corresponding file stored in
one of the SCIA.ESA PT folders. The exact location depends on the origin of the template. SCIA.ESA PT
distinguishes three different origins (or we may say types) of templates: (i) template prepared by the
manufacturer, (ii) template prepared by the manufacturer but modified by the user, (iii) template completely
created by the user.
All table template files use extension .OTS. The name of each particular OTS file is composed of three parts:
(i) prefix (optional), (ii) name of the table, (iii) name of the particular template (in square brackets). For
example, the for the Load Case table there are three templates available. Their name is default, Detailed, and
Header – see the picture below.

707
Reference Guide

The corresponding OTS files are named:

 DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [default].ots,
 DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [Detailed].ots,
 DataSetScia-EP_LoadCase [Header].ots,
where "DataSetScia-EP_" is the prefix, "LoadCase" is the name of the table, and "default" (or "Detailed" or
"Header") is the name of the template.

Tip: The full path to the corresponding OTS is shown in the top part of the Table Composer
dialogue.
Template prepared by the manufacturer
By default, SCIA.ESA PT is distributed with a set of basic templates for all tables that appear in the document.
Even though the manufacturer tried to do its best in the design of the templates, it is inevitable that for some
users the predefined layout will not be the right one. Therefore, the distributed templates may be edited if
required – see below.
The manufacturer’s templates are stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where SCIA.ESA PT
was installed.
Example: Let us assume that SCIA.ESA PT was installed on disk E in folder SciaEsa. The manufacturer’s
table templates files are then stored in folder: E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\.
Template prepared by the manufacturer but modified by the user
When the user modifies a manufacturer’s table template, the template file (.OTS) is first copied into the user’s
folder. Any modifications done by the user are thus made on the copy of the original template. It is therefore
possible to return easily back to the manufacturer’s settings.
The original table template file (the OTS file stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where
SCIA.ESA PT was installed) is never altered through the SCIA.ESA PT user interface. It is always preserved in
the original form.
Example: Let us assume that SCIA.ESA PT was installed on disk E in folder SciaEsa. The manufacturer’s
table templates files are then stored in folder: E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\. When any of the templates is
edited, the corresponding OTS file is first copied to the User folder, e.g. C:\Documents and
Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\DocumentTemplates\.
The exact location of the User folder can be specified in the Setup > Options dialogue in the tab sheet
Directories.

Note: As soon as the manufacturer’s table template is modified, the icon shown in the Table
Manager changes from to , with the pencil indicating that the template has been changed
somehow.

708
 Document

Template completely created by the user

The OTS file corresponding to a table template created by the user is automatically stored in the User folder.
The Table Manager uses a special icon ( ) for such a template.
Example: Let us assume that the User folder was adjusted to C:\Documents and
Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\. Any user-created table template has its corresponding OTS file stored
in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\User\DocumentTemplates\.
The exact location of the User folder can be specified in the Setup > Options dialogue in the tab sheet
Directories, see above.

Special table templates for Header, Footer, and Title Page

OTS files corresponding to table templates for header and footer of a document page and for the title page of a
document are kept in separate folders under the DocumentTemplates folder.
Example:
Manufacture’s templates:
Footer templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\Footer\,
Header templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\Header\,
Title page templates in E:\SciaEsa\DocumentTemplates\TitlePage\.
User templates:
Footer templates in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\Footer\,
Header templates in C:\Documents and Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\Header\,
Title page templates in C:\Documents and
Settings\PavelU.PRAHA\ESA52\user\DocumentTemplates\TitlePage\.

Table Manager
Table Manager dialogue
Description
In the Table Manager the following operations can be done:
 a new table template can be created for a particular table (i.e. document item),
 the existing template can be removed,
 the existing template can be modified through the Table Composer,
 the existing user-created template can be renamed,
 the existing template can be copied.
The Table Composer can be opened only for an existing document item. It means that (i) the document must
be already prepared using the available table templates, (ii) the required table must be selected in the
document, and (iii) only then the Table Manager can be opened and templates for the selected table can be
processed.
The Table Manager also shows the origin of each table. The origin is marked by the icon next to the template
name.
tables prepared by the manufacturer and NOT edited at all by the user
tables prepared by the manufacturer BUT already modified by the user
tables created by the user

More information about the origin of the table template can be found in chapter Manufacturer's versus user's
table template.

Procedure to open the Table Manager dialogue

1. Open the Document.
2. Select the required table (the document item) in your document window or in the document tree.

709
Reference Guide

3. Open the Table Manager dialogue through the icon Table Manager ( ) on the Document
toolbar (located at the top of the document window).
4. The Table Manager dialogue is opened on the screen.

Creating a new table template

The procedure to create a new template
1. Open the Document.
2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.
3. Open the Table Manager.
4. Select the existing template from which the new template should be derived (see Note below).
5. Define the template.
6. Confirm with [OK]. The Table Composer closes.
7. Close the Table Manager.

Note: If a new template is being created, the program offers you not an empty template, but a
template that is identical to the template that was selected in the Table Manager list at the moment
when function New (template) was invoked.
Example:

Let us assume that the Table Manager was opened for Load Case table. Further let us assume
that templates shown in the figure above were already defined for this table. Finally, let us assume
that the template named mytemplate is selected in the list at the moment when button [New] is
pressed. The Table Composer opens on the screen with the settings corresponding to template
mytemplate. It is up to the user how much the offered settings will be altered.

Modifying the existing table template

The procedure to modify the existing template
1. Open the Document.
2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.
3. Open the Table Manager.
4. Select the existing template that is to be edited.
5. Press button [Edit]. The Table Composer opens on the screen.
6. Modify the template.
7. Confirm with [OK]. The Table Composer closes.
8. Close the Table Manager.

710
 Document

Renaming the existing user-defined template

When a new template is being created, the user may specify its name. Once the Table Composer dialogue for
the new template is closed, the name is stored and is not editable in the Table Composer dialogue anymore.
Even when the template is later modified, the name cannot be changed.
However, if there is a need to rename the table template, it can be done the following way:
The procedure to rename the existing template
1. Open the Document.
2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.
3. Open the Table Manager.
4. Select the existing template that is to be renamed.
5. Press [F2] on your keyboard or click the template name in the list with the mouse left button – see
Note 1 below.
6. The name becomes editable.
7. Rename the template and press [Enter] on your keyboard.
8. That’s it.

Note 1: Either action (pressing [F2] or clicking the name) is a standard MS Windows feature for
renaming items in tree controls.
Note 2: Only user-created templates can be renamed. It is not possible to rename a
manufacturer’s template, even when it was modified by the user.

Deleting the existing table template

When you want to delete an existing table template, it is important to realise that ONLY user-defined or user-
modified templates can be deleted. The manufacturer’s templates CANNOT be removed.
The statement above may be clearer from the following table.
tables prepared by the This type of table template CANNOT be deleted.
manufacturer and NOT
edited at all by the user

tables prepared by the
manufacturer BUT already
modified by the user
When this type of table template is deleted, the
user-copy of the manufacturer’s template is
deleted and the manufacturer’s original template
is restored.
This change is indicated by the change of the
icon from to .

tables created by the user This type of table template can be freely deleted
whenever wanted.

Note: The templates, or to be precise the corresponding OTS files, can also be deleted directly
from the User folder on your disk. Read chapter Manufacturer's versus user's table template to
learn more about OTS files and their location. Use this method ONLY for table templates whose
OTS files are stored in the User folder. Under no circumstances apply this direct deletion to
templates stored in folder DocumentTemplates under the folder where SCIA.ESA PT was installed.
In any case, this procedure is recommended ONLY for advanced users of ESA PT with a good
knowledge of MS Windows.

Copying the existing table template

The procedure to create a new template
1. Open the Document.
2. Select the table (i.e. the document item) for which the new template is to be created.
3. Open the Table Manager.
4. Select the existing template that is to be copied.

711
Reference Guide

5. Click icon Copy ( ).

6. The template is copied.
7. Close the Table Manager.

Note: This procedure is similar to the creation of a new template, but it does not offer immediate
modification of the template.

Selecting the required template for display

When the required template has been created or modified using either the Table Manager or Table Composer
or both, it can be selected as the active template. It means that the data in the document will be displayed
through the selected template.
The procedure to select the required template in the Table Manager
1. In the Document, select the table for which you want to change the template.
2. Open the Table Manager.
3. In the list of defined templates select the required one.
4. Close the Table Manager using button [Close] (not the "cross" button in the top right corner of the
dialogue).

The procedure to select the required template in the Document Window

1. In the Document, select the table for which you want to change the template.
2. On the toolbar at the top part of the Document window, use the combox with available templates to
select the required one.

Table Composer
Table Composer dialogue
Description
The Table Composer Dialogue allows for a modification of the existing layout of a particular table. In the Table
Composer you can:
 select quantities will be shown in the table,
 specify the order of the quantities,
 sort the quantities column-wise or row-wise,
 define the font, size, alignment and other text-related parameters,
 if possible, specify special properties of certain quantities,
 etc.
Note: In the Table Composer, it is not possible to create a new layout. This can be done in the
Table Manager.

Procedure to open the Table Composer dialogue

1. Open the Document.
2. Select the required table (the document item) in your document window or in the document tree.
3. Open the Table Composer dialogue:

a. either click icon Table Composer ( ) on the Document toolbar (located at the
top of the document window).
b. or right click any cell in the required table to invoke the pop-up menu and select
function Table Composer (Note: Words "Table Composer" are normally followed
by a list of available .
4. The Table Composer dialogue is opened on the screen.

Parameters and controls in the Table Composer dialogue

712
 Document

The Table Composer dialogue contains a vast number of various settings, parameters, lists and other controls.
Common users usually do not need to bother with all the options. Therefore the Table Composer dialogue is
divided into several tab-sheets. The first one comprises all what a common user may need to make some
principal changes to the layout of a particular table. Other tab-sheets then offer advanced settings that may be
useful for advanced, painstaking or demanding users or for "administrators" in big companies who prepare the
official layout of company documents.
Detailed description of individual tab-sheets is given in separate chapters:
 Standard settings,
 Advanced settings for table,
 Advanced settings for column or row,
 Layout settings,
 Property settings.

Tip: In the top part of the dialogue, the full path to the corresponding OTS file is shown.

Standard settings
Contents of table
Items in Table This list contains all the items (quantities and formatting
commands) that are included into the currently edited table
template.
Available items This list offers all available items that can be inserted into the
table. The items are divided into three groups.
ESA properties
Available properties corresponding to individual parameters,
quantities, result values, etc.
Defined views
The whole defined views (i.e. table templates) for the given
table. It means that not only individual items, but even the
whole template can be inserted into a table.
For example MyBriefTemplate can contain only the main items.
And MyDetailedTemplate can include the same items extended
by some other information. This can save the user’s time
during the preparation of templates.
User properties
This group comprises mainly formatting items and some
general items like date, page number, etc.
[Remove] This button removes the selected item from the list of items in
the table. That means, the corresponding value is no longer
shown in the table.
[Add] This button adds the item selected from among Available items
into the List of items. That means, the selected quantity,
template, formatting character, etc. is added to the table and
shown in it.

Table
Template name Each template can have a name that simplifies the work eith it.
For renaming the template see chapter Renaming the
existing user-defined template.
Table type Horizontal table
Item headers in this type of table are arranged in a vertical
column and individual values are arranged horizontally in
rows.

713
Reference Guide

Vertical table
Item headers in this type of table are arranged in a horizontal
row and individual values are arranged vertically in
columns.

Simple form
This type is intended for tables inserted into other tables. It
does not allow to have headers for individual items in the table.
Fit table to page width This option stretches the table width so that it fits the page. See
the two pictures below.

Below, a horizontal table with the option Fit table to page width set to NO.

Below, a horizontal table with the option Fit table to page width set to YES.

714
 Document

Columns / Rows
Caption The caption used in the header of the item.
Alignment The alignment of the item.
No header If ON, the item header is not displayed.
If OFF, the item header is displayed.
Do not aggregate If Continue Line is used in a horizontal table, the headings are
caption at horizontal merged into one, e.g. Mx, My, Mz captions are merged
tables (aggregated) into "Mx,y,z". If this format is not suitable, the
aggregation of the headings may be suppressed by this option.

Options in this group are related not to the table as a whole, but to each particular item in the table (row or
column depending on the orientation of the table – horizontal / vertical).
Example
In order to prepare a vertical table (i.e. one column = one item) without the names of the items (option No
header), you must remove the header from all table items.
Let us take the Load case table. By default it look like:

If you open the Table Composer, go item by item in the list of Items in Table, and for each item tick the
option No header (see the picture)

715
Reference Guide

you obtain the following table of load cases:

Preview
In the Preview window of the dialogue you can see the layout of the table you are modifying.

Note: We are aware of the fact that modification of tables (table templates) in general is a
complex and rather complicated matter. Therefore, in order to simplify the task, the basic
parameters and controls were extracted to this (default on opening) sheet of the Table Composed
dialogue. We believe that these basic parameters are straightforward, easy-to-understand and
easy-to-handle. They are sufficient for the vast majority of actions you may require during the
modification of table templates. The other tab sheets of the dialogue with advanced parameters and
options are intended to be used by advanced users, administrators and specially trained staff.

Examples
User properties
Let’s assume a standard table of nodal points. By default the Properties in table window contains properties:
 Name
 Coord X
 Coord Y
 Coord Z
And the table looks like:

716
 Document

Line break
When the Line break property is inserted after the Coord X, the result will be:
The Properties in table window contains properties:
 Name
 Coord X
 Line break
 Coord Y
 Coord Z
And the table will look like:

Horizontal table
Now assume that the table is changed to a Horizontal table (on Table tab of the dialogue). The Properties in
table window contains again only the default properties:
 Name
 Coord X
 Coord Y
 Coord Z
The table will look like:

717
Reference Guide

Continue line
Finally, let’s add two Line continue properties to the Properties in table window:
 Name
 Coord X
 Line continue
 Coord Y
 Line continue
 Coord Z
The final table will look like:

718
 Document

Simplified Table Composer dialogue

Header and footer represent a special type of tables in the Document. They are usually simpler than tables
containing input values and results. Therefore, if required, both header and footer can be edited in a simplified
Table Composer dialogue. In fact, this simplified dialogue opens by default when editing of the header or footer
is activated.
The simplified table composer assumes that the header or footer contain only:
 A picture on the left hand side of the page (may be omitted if required).
 At maximum five lines and two columns of information shown in a simple table. Individual cells of
this table can be separately adjusted – concerning the contents. The legend (cell names) may be
shown or omitted.
 A picture on the right hand side of the page (may be omitted if required).

In addition, the user may decide whether the line width definition is taken from the current document visual
style or whether no lines are printed, and what background colour is used in print.
Of course, if necessary, the user may swap to the full Table Composer dialogue.

Advanced settings
Advanced settings for table
Caption
A user-typed caption can be added above the table.
Example: Let us assume that we have a table of load cases:

719
Reference Guide

When we add a caption (e.g. This is my caption on advanced tab sheet), we get

The button [...] next to the input box allows for the adjustment of the page style, e.g. the font for the caption
can be altered there.
Table style
Automatic style If ON, the style preset by the manufacturer is applied.
If OFF, you can define your own style for each "type" (header,
odd line, even line) of table line.
Header style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this
particular style will be used for the table header.
The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment
of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.
Odd line style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this
particular style will be used for the odd lines in the table.
The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment
of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.
Even line style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this
particular style will be used for even lines in the table.
The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment
of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Internal table
This option says that the table will be used as an internal (sub)template for another template. Such a template
is not offered among the available templates in the combo box on the document toolbar. It appears only in the
list of available items in the Standard settings tab sheet of the Table Composer dialogue.

Advanced settings for column or row

The settings in this tab sheet relate to individual table items.
Items in Table
This list contains all the items (quantities and formatting commands) that are included into the currently edited
table template (the same list is in the Standard settings tab sheet).
You need to select the item in this for which the settings are to be changed first, and then you may alter the
settings.
Column width
Use default If ON, the default (defined by the manufacturer) column width is
applied.
Minimal If the default width is not used, this item specifies the minimal
allowable width of the column.
Delta If the default width is not used, and the minimal allowable width
of the column (see the parameter above) is not sufficient for the
contents of the cell, the width is increased by this Delta.

Line(s)/Row(s) styles
Use table style If ON, the style defined for the whole table is used (defined in
Advanced settings for table).

720
 Document

If OFF, you can define your own style for each table lines.
Header style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this
particular style will be used for the item header.
The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment
of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.
Content style You can select one of the defined styles and say that this
particular style will be used for the selected line in the table.
The button [...] next to the combo box allows for the adjustment
of the page style, e.g. the selected font can be altered there.

Picture size
If the item is a picture, you can define the size of it here.
Other

Contents does not Generally, a line is removed from a table if all the cells of the
make valid line line are empty. In addition, if only cells corresponding to
marked columns (i.e. columns with this option ON) hold any
information and the other cells of the line are empty, the line is
removed as well.
Fixed width If ON, the width of this particular cell is fixed and will not be
changed in order to e.g. fit the table to the page, etc.

Layout settings
Lines
Use custom line width
Do not print any lines
Use document preset
The user-defined line parameters (width) are used.
No lines (cell and table borders) are printed at all.
The default settings adjusted in the document setup are used.

Available line types

Some settings are relevant to horizontal tables, some to vertical tables and some to both. The explanation of
the individual values is shown in the two pictures below.
Frame around table A
Frame around header B
Frame around body C
Frame around section D
Vertical space between E
sections
Frame around F
important cell (not shown in the figures)
Line under header G
Line between rows H
Line between columns I
in header
Line between columns J
in body

721
Reference Guide

Background
Use custom The user may specify the colour of individual components of
background colours the table: header, odd row, even row, important cell (that a cell
is important is defined by the author of the program and it
cannot be changed by the user).
Do not print any No background is printed at all, just the lines (if defined) around
background the cells and around the table.
Use document preset The default settings adjusted in the document setup are used.

Available background types

Table header Background colour of table header.

Odd row Background colour of odd rows in the table.
Even row Background colour of even rows in the table.
Important cell Background colour of important cells (that a cell is important is
defined by the author of the program and it cannot be changed
by the user).

722
 Document

Property settings
Certain items in the table can have specific properties. These can be defined in this tab sheet.
For example, user text has the property of "text", so the "message" can be typed in this tab sheet. Or a picture
needs to define the location on the disk and the size. In addition it offers a preview directly in the Property tab
sheet.

Sorting the table columns outside the table composer

The order of individual columns in the table can be sorted in the Table composer dialogue. In addition, it is
possible to arrange the order of columns even outside the Table composer.
The procedure for rearranging of columns in the table
1. In the Document of Preview window, position the mouse cursor over the heading of the column you
want to shift.
2. Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu.
3. Select function Move left or Move right, respectively.
4. The table is rearranged accordingly.

Note: This approach is available for vertical tables only.

723
Templates and parameters
Project templates
Introduction to templates
In practice it may quite often happen that some elements are used in every project. For example, material
types, cross-sections, predefined loads, and even parts of a structure may be the same in various projects.
Therefore, it would be efficient, if the user could store the repetitious elements aside and load them quickly into
every new project.
In SCIA.ESA PT this may be achieved via templates. Generally speaking, a template is an ordinary project that
holds required information and is saved in a special way.

Template manager
Template manager provides for any possible manipulation with already created templates. It consists of the
following control elements.
Tree-structured list of The left-hand side window lists all the available templates and
existing templates template groups.
Property of a selected The right-hand side window shows the parameters of the
template selected template, e.g. its name, description, etc.
Control buttons Control buttons provide for the actions.

Tree-structured list of existing templates

Templates may be sorted in groups. Each group may for example contain templates made by one user, or
templates related to one type of structural solution, etc.
Furthermore, the list gives all the templates in individual groups. The structure of the group-tree allows for
ONLY one level. That means that it is not possible to create encapsulated groups (or sub-groups).
Properties of a selected template
Name Gives the template name.
Info Gives a short description.
Load image Enables the user to browse for an image.
Edit image Enables the user to draw a simple image.

Control buttons
New group
This button creates a new group in the right-hand side window. The newly created group must be then "saved"
by means of Insert button.
Copy
This button copies the information about the template selected in the left-hand side window to the property
table in the right-hand side window.
Export
This button saves the template to an external file.
Import
This button reads a template from an external file.

Note: The name of the imported template may be altered (by appending a number after the
name) if a template of the same name already exists among the templates.
Delete
This button deletes the selected template or group.
Note: There is no warning about the action and the removal is carried out immediately.

725
Reference Guide

Insert
This button inserts a template or a group whose properties are stated in the right-hand side window into the
appropriate position in the left-hand side window.
Rewrite
This button puts a template or a group whose properties are stated in the right-hand side window into the
appropriate position in the left-hand side window. The currently selected item in the left-hand side window is
overwritten with the new item.
OK
This button confirms the changes in the template structure and closes the manager.
Cancel
This button discards all the changes in the template structure made from the last opening of the template
manager and closes the dialogue.

Tip: A few examples of possible operations made with templates are given in a separate
chapter.

Creating a template
The procedure for creation of a new template
1. Create a new project or open an existing one.
2. Define all the properties and even parts of a structure that should be included in the template. If an
already existing project is used, make any changes that are necessary.
3. When you are satisfied with the result and you think that the current state of the project is what
should become the template, save it As Template using menu function File > Save As Template.
4. A New project Template dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. In the left hand side window, select the group (if there are more than one) the template should be
saved into.
6. In the right hand side window fill in the table:
a. type the template name,
b. type a short template description,
c. if required, either browse for a image or create a simple icon.
7. Press [OK] to complete the action.

Note: The template is ALWAYS saved to the folder specified in the Directories settings dialogue.

Opening a template
The opening of a template is similar to the creation of a new empty project.
The procedure for opening a template
1. Call function New:
a. either via menu item File > New.
b. or via icon New from toolbar Main.
2. Select the required tab (each group of templates has got its separate tab in the dialogue).
3. Select the required template.
4. Confirm with button [OK].

Note: It is clear that the template must have been created and saved before it may be opened.

Selected manipulations with templates

Here a set of selected manipulations available in the Template manager is described.
Creating the template group

726
 Templates and parameters

1. Press button [New group].

2. Write the name of the group in the corresponding item in the right-hand side window.
3. Press button [Insert] to "save" the group.
4. The group appears in the list in the left-hand side window.
Sorting the templates into groups
In order to move a template from one group to another, use the following procedure.
1. In the left-hand side window, select the template to be moved.
2. Press button [Copy] to copy the template properties from the left-hand side window to the right-
hand side window.
3. Press button [Delete] to delete the template from the left-hand side window.
4. In the left-hand side window, select the required new target group for the template.
5. Press button [Insert] to store the template from the right-hand side window to the selected group in
the left-hand side window.
Renaming the templates
1. Select the template (or even the group) to be renamed.
2. Press button [Copy] to copy the template properties from the left-hand side window to the right-
hand side window.
3. Change the name in right-hand side window.
4. Press button [Rewrite] to store the changed template from the right-hand side window back to the
left-hand side window.
Exporting the templates
1. In the left-hand side window, select the template to be exported.
2. Press button [Export].
3. Type the name of the file.
4. Browse for the required target folder.
Importing the templates
1. Press button [Import].
2. Browse for the required template file.
3. Confirm the selection.

Note: The name of the imported template may be altered (by appending a number after the
name) if a template of the same name already exists among the templates.
Removing the templates
1. In the left-hand side window, select the template to be removed.
2. Press button [Delete].

Note: There is no warning about the action and the removal is carried out immediately.

Note: All the given examples MUST BE followed by closing the Template Manager via button
[OK] in order to confirm (and not to discard) the changes.

Parametric input
Introduction to parametric input
The parametric input enables the user to define some of structure properties as parameters. Thus, for
example, the geometry may be defined by means of parameters, loads can be defined as parameters, etc.
The parameter are fully editable and when changed they may lead to a very straightforward modification of the
calculated model.
What’s more, a model defined by means of parameters can be saved as a template. When opened, the user is
first asked to fill in the table with all the parameters present in the model. This may be effectively used for
creation of simple "programs" for e.g. calculation of continuous beam, simple frame, etc.

727
Reference Guide

The user has to create the structure only once. Then he/she has to define the parameters and save the
structure as template. In the future, he/she just fills in the table with a few parameters and can immediately
proceed to calculation and evaluation of results.

Using the parameters in the project

Parameters manager
Parameters may be defined and edited in a special dialogue that resembles standard SCIA.ESA PT database
managers.
The Parameters manager provides for all standard database manager manipulations. The parameters may
be defined, edited, deleted, and copied.
The Parameters manager can be opened:
 using menu function Tools > Parameters,
 using tree menu function Tools > Parameters.

Defining the parameters

The procedure for the definition of a new parameter
1. Open the Parameters manager.
2. Click button [New] to create a new parameter.
3. A new parameter with default values is created.
4. Select the parameter (usually it is selected automatically).
5. Click button [Edit] to modify the new parameter.
6. Select required type of the parameter.
7. Type the value of the parameter.
8. Close the editing dialogue with [OK].
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 as many times as required.
10. Close the Parameters manager.

Available parameter types

There are numerous parameters types available in SCIA.ESA PT. Each type may be used for other model
entity, some are intended for geometry, others for loads, others for cross-sections, etc.
Parameter types
Nothing The parameter is not used.
Integer The parameter is used as an integer.
Coefficient The parameter is used as coefficient.
Length The parameter is used for definition of length in the model.

728
 Templates and parameters

Force The parameter is used for definition of size of force load.

Moment The parameter is used for definition of size of moment load.
Line load The parameter is used for definition of size of line load.
Surface load The parameter is used for definition of size of surface load.
Mass The parameter is used for definition of size of masses.
Line mass The parameter is used for definition of size of line masses.
Surface mass The parameter is used for definition of size of surface masses.
Cross-section The parameter is used for definition of length at cross-sections.
length
Angle The parameter is used for definition of angles.
Relative The parameter is used for definition of relative values.
Boolean This parameter can have two values only: True (ON) or False (OFF).
Cross-section The parameter is used for definition of rolled cross-sections.
rolled
Library This parameter type can be used with any "library" item, i.e. any item
that is selected from one of ESA PT’s internal databases, such as
materials, cross-sections, subsoil, reinforcement pattern, etc.
Combination Combination factors for load cases inserted into a combination.
factor
Relative Applicable in the calculation of long term losses in prestress.
humidity
Time (history) Time of individual construction stages on time-line.
Stress (i) Stress in concrete that can be defined in measured values when the
Time Dependant Analysis is performed or
(ii) the initial stress of the strands for a strand pattern.
Temperature Used for temperature.
Length for Used to define length unit in stiffness.
stiffness
Point stiffness Used to define point stiffness.
Line stiffness Used to define line stiffness.
Reinforcement Used to define the diameter of reinforcement bars.
diameter

Example
The following Template dialogue contains parameters of several types:

729
Reference Guide

M, N integer
L, h, hd, hu length
B, U, V, D library

Value types
Value A specific numerical value is defined directly.
Formula The value of the parameter is given in the form of a simple formula..

Formula
Formula may consist of several values, parameters, functions and operands.
+ Adds the given numbers / parameters
- Subtracts the given numbers / parameters
* Multiplies the given numbers / parameters
/ Divides the given numbers / parameters
\ Modulo – gives the remainder after division of two numbers
^ Raises the given number to a given power
() Putting individual members of the expression may change the priority
of evaluation.
sin(x) Calculates the sine of parameter x
cos(x) Calculates the cosine of parameter x
tan(x) Calculates the tangent of parameter x
tg(x)
arcsin(x) Calculates the arcsine of parameter x
asin(x)

730
 Templates and parameters

arccos(x) Calculates the arccosine of parameter x

acos(x)
arctan(x) Calculates the arctangent of parameter x
arctg(x)
atan(x)
atg(x)
ln(x) Calculates the natural logarithm of x.
log(x) Calculates log10(x).
exp(x) Calculates the exponential e to the x-th power.
sign(x) Returns the sign of parameter x. Returns +1 for positive argument.
sgn(x) Returns -1 for negative argument.

sqrt(x) Calculates the positive square root of parameter x.

Examples
formula result
3*5+5 20
3*(5+5) 30
sin(90) 1
10*cos(45) 7.07
3^3 27
log(10) 1
ln(2.718281828) 1

Use range
It is possible to define the range in which each of the input parameters is valid. Thus one can verify the input
values that are inserted when later the template is opened.

Note: Constants used in formulas are ALWAYS in SI units. If you want to have it in units defined
in the Units setup, you cannot use constants in formula but pre-declared parameters of type Value.

Modifying the existing parameters

The procedure for the modification of an existing parameter
1. Open the Parameters manager.
2. Select the parameter you need to edit.
3. Click button [Edit] to modify the parameter.
4. Select required type of the parameter.
5. Type the value of the parameter.
6. Close the editing dialogue with [OK].
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 as many times as required.
8. Close the Parameters manager.

Deleting the existing parameters

The procedure for removal of an existing parameter
1. Open the Parameters manager.
2. Select the parameter that should be deleted.
3. Click button [Delete] to remove the parameter.

731
Reference Guide

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 as many times as required.

5. Close the Parameters manager.

Note: If the parameter is already in use in the project, it cannot be deleted.

Applying the parameters

The parameters, once defined, may be assigned to particular items of the model. It is quite clear that not all
parameters may be assigned to all possible items. E.g. magnitude of loads can only be specifies by
parameters of appropriate load type.
The procedure for assigning of parameters to particular items in the model
1. Select the entity to be parameterised.
2. The Property window shows the properties of the entity.

3. If any of the properties can be parameterised, a button with little down-arrow ( ) is displayed next
to the current value of the property.

4. Click the little down-arrow button ( ) to reveal the list of possible options.
5. If the property really can be parameterised, the list contains item Insert value and a list of available
parameters for this particular entity.
6. Select the required parameter.
7. Confirm with key [Enter].
8. The Property window now shows the name of the parameter instead of concrete numerical value.
From now on, if the parameter value is modified in the Parameters manager, the model of the structure
changes accordingly. If one parameter is used for several model entities, or if some parameters are defined
with formulas, it may happen that a change of value of a single parameter leads to an extensive change of the
model.
If well prepared, parameters may be very effectively used for (i) analysis of project where several variants must
be prepared, (ii) analysis of project where some level of optimisation is necessary, (iii) presentation and
teaching purposes to show what the effect of a small change may be, etc.

Boolean operators in parameters

Two parameters may be compared and the result of the comparison (i.e. 0 or 1) can be used for further
evaluation of parameterised formula.
Let’s assume parameter A and parameter B. Further, let’s assume that another parameter C should be
increased by a certain value only if A is greater than B. We may write, e.g., the following formula:
C = 2 * 5 + (A>B) * 1,25
If A > B, then the result of the formula above is 2 * 5 + (1) * 1.25 = 11.25.
If A <= B, then the result of the formula above is 2 * 5 + (0) * 1.25 = 10.
Example
Let’s take an arch that may be partially or fully subject water pressure depending on the actual water level. If
the arch is fully under the water level, the calculated load (defined by means of suitable parameters and
exploiting the capabilities of Boolean operators) can be seen in the figure below:

732
 Templates and parameters

If the arch is only partially under the water level, the calculated load is shown in the figure below:

Using numerical constants in parameters

There are two types of "value" that parameters may have.
 specific value (e.g. 10; 5.5; 3.14159265; etc.),
 formula (e.g. A + B; C + 6.8789; etc.).

Example
Parameter Value / Formula Final value
A 5
B 2.5
C A+B 7.5
D A+5 10

Note: Attention must be paid to units. If units adjusted for parameters are standard SI units,
there is nothing to care about. However, if you decide to use different units, let’s say millimetres for
length units, you must be aware of the fact that constants in formulas are still assumed to be in
standard SI units, that is in metres. See the following table

733
Reference Guide

Non-SI units in parameters

Units setup:
Units > Parameters > Length mm

Parameter Value / Formula Final value

A 5000
B 2500
C A+B 7500
D A + 3.5 8500
E A + 500 505000

Creating a parameter-based template

Preparing the project for becoming a parameter-based template
Any project with defined and applied parameters may be saved as a template. In general, it could be said no
special treatment is necessary before the parameterised project is saved as a template. On the other hand, if
the user spends some time on arrangement and sorting of parameters, it will pay off when the parameterised
template will be used in the future.
The preparation phase may consist of:
 well organised strategy for selection of names of the parameters,
 arrangement of parameters into sets (thematically focused sets such as dimensions, loads, cross-
sections, etc.),
 creation of explanatory and guiding pictures (the template may be accompanied with pictures that
are displayed when the template is opened and the user asked to fill in the template parameters).

Manager of parameter sets

The parameters may be organised into sets in the Manager of parameter sets. This manager is again a well
known SCIA.ESA PT standard database manager.
The parameter sets may be defined, edited, deleted, saved and copied.
The Parameter sets manager can be opened:
 using menu function Tools > Parameters template settings,
 using tree menu function Tools > Parameters template settings.

734
 Templates and parameters

Defining the set of parameters

A new parameter set can be defined in the Edit parameter set dialogue.

735
Reference Guide

The dialogue consist of the following parts:

Name It server for unique identification of the set.
Description It provides explanatory comment.
Available The window lists all defined parameters that has not been included into
parameters any of existing parameter sets.
Selected This list contains the parameters inserted into the current parameter
parameters set.
Control buttons The buttons provide for selection or un-selection of parameters for the
current set.
Button for This button enables the user to import an explanatory picture that will
picture be saved together with the set.
selection

Note: Each parameter can be inserted into one parameter set only.

The procedure for the definition of a new set

1. Open the Parameter sets manager.
2. Click button [New] to create a new parameter set.
3. The set editing dialogue opens on the screen.
4. Type the name of the set.
5. Type the description.
6. Use control buttons to select appropriate parameters for the set.
7. If possible and required, select the explanatory picture.
8. Confirm with [OK].

Saving the parameter-based template

The parameterised project can be saved as a template.
The procedure for saving the template
1. Start menu function File > Save as template.
2. The Save as template dialogue opens on the screen.
3. Pres button [New file] to make sure that the dialogue in awaiting the template file name.
4. Type the name of the template.
5. Press button [Insert] to save the template.

Using the parameter-based template

Opening the parameter-based template
The procedure for opening of the previously saved template
1. In SCIA.ESA PT select menu function File > New.
2. On the New project dialogue, select tab User templates.
3. Find and select the template you want to open.
4. Press [OK] to open the template.
5. The Template project settings dialogue is opened on the screen.
6. The number of tabs on the dialogue is equal to the number of parameter sets defined in the original
parameterised project increased by one.
7. Go through individual tabs and define required parameters. Each tab shows the depiction and
guiding picture as they were specified in the Parameter set manager.
8. The last tab provides for definition of standard project parameters.
9. Confirm with [OK].

736
 Templates and parameters

The project is opened and the template structure is automatically generated on the basis of defined
parameters. Now, the project may be just calculated and results evaluated. On the other hand, if required, any
modifications may be made to the project and the final structure may be far from the original template.
Everything depends on particular needs of the user.

Example - three span continuous beam

Defining a normal continuous beam
As an example, we will create here a model of a three-span continuous beam. The model will be then
parameterised and saved as parameterised template.
Using standard SCIA.ESA PT functions let’s create a model of a three-span continuous beam with fully fixed
supports. Be careful to position the first node into the origin of the global co-ordinate system (the geometric
parameters that will be defined later in this example assume this location of the beam). Make also sure that the
beam will be parallel to the global X-axis.

Let’s create four load cases load:

 one of self weight type,
 three standard, permanent.
Let’s define load for load classes 2, 3, 4.

737
Reference Guide

LC 2

LC 3

LC 4

Next step: Specifying the parameters

Specifying the parameters

Now, let’s open the Parameters manager and define the following parameters:
Parameter Type Value
span 1 Length 6
span 2 Length 12
span 3 Length 18
load – total Line load -1000

738
 Templates and parameters

load – outer beg Line load -1000

load – outer end Line load -1000
load – inner beg Line load -1000
load – inner end Line load -1000

Let’s close the Parameters manager and select the end node of the first span.

In the Property window let’s select item GCS coordinates > Coord X and change its content to "span 1"
(Using the little down-arrow button).

Similarly, let’s change the X co-ordinates of end nodes for the second and third span. Let’s change their values
to "span 2" and "span 3" respectively.
Now, let’s adjust the second load case to be displayed in the window. Select all the loads and let’s focus on the
Property window again. Let’s change the load value to parameter "load – total".

739
Reference Guide

Further, let’s adjust the third load case to be displayed in the window. Select all the loads and let’s focus on the
Property window again. First let’s change the Distribution to Trapez. Then, let’s change the load value 1
and value 2 to parameters "load – outer beg" and "load – outer end" respectively.

Similarly, let’s make the same change with the load in the last load case. Here, let’s use the parameters "load
– inner beg" and "load – inner beg".
Next step: Arranging the parameters into sets

Arranging the parameters into sets

As next step, let’s open the Parameter set manager. Let’s define two parameter sets according to the pictures
below.
First set:

740
 Templates and parameters

Second set:

Then, let’s prepare a picture to accompany the first set. Let’s close the manager and adjust, let’s say, a
standard AXO view in the graphical window. Use function File > Print picture > Export picture to save the
drawing into an external BMP file.
Let’s open the Parameter sets manager again and open for editing the Geometry set. Using button [Select
picture] let’s browse the saved file.
At this moment we’ve prepared the project to be saved as parameterise template.
Next step: Saving the project as template

Saving the project as template

Following the procedure given in chapter Saving the parameter-based template, let’s save the project under
name "My beam".

741
Reference Guide

Next step: Opening the template

Opening the template

As the final step, let’s open the saved template.
Call function File > New and select tab User templates.
Select template "My beam".
Open it.
Go through individual tabs and fill in the parameters.

742
 Templates and parameters

Note: Please note that the second tab Loads does not show any picture. Remember that no
picture has been defined for this parameters set in our example.

Once the parameters have been defined (notice that only eight numbers had to be inserted), the project is
opened and a new three-span continuous beam is automatically created in front of you.
The result for individual load cases will be:
LC 2

743
Reference Guide

LC 3

LC 4

This is the end of the example

744
Roundtrip - import, export, update
Introduction to roundtrip
Roundtrip – what does it mean?
In order to explain the term that has slowly but surely domesticated in the vocabulary of engineers, we refer to
the White Paper Roundtrip Engineering in Construction - Integrated CAE-CAD solutions for specific
market segments by J.P. Rammant, CEO of SCIA International in March 2006.
Start of quotation:

Practically every design of a construction is an iterative process of refining, reviewing, changing architectural,
engineering or building (fabrication) details. Therefore, a roundtrip solution, where a designer or detailer can
start or edit the model at any stage, is closest to reality and will lead to the shortest time between design and
fabrication or building.
Reverse engineering reconstructs the design model from the CAD geometrical model, again an extra benefit.
Roundtrip engineering is being achieved by SCIA through a joint development with Nemetschek of a common
interface between two platforms, one for CAE and for CAD.
Complex CAE calculations may be executed, hidden to the normal CAD user.

The SCIA PT (Professional Technology) platform addresses CAE modelling, with a consistent structural and
analysis model for steel and concrete building parts & structures. The structural objects are directly linked with
corresponding parts within the Allplan platform, using the Nemetschek Object Interface. Steel sections and
concrete constructive elements are one-to-one compliant.
In contrary to a link based on IFC between models of a same domain, here a transfer between a CAE and
CAD model is being realized (in both directions).
Roundtrip is much more than import / export. Some extra benefits which are being implemented:
- the upgrade engine keeps the CAE and CAD model compatible; outside data (e.g. design data) are stored as
Blob (Binary Large Objects) properties
- labels remain positioned in associated views after changes
-refinements and changes are possible in selected parts of a construction; they will be transferred to the other
application.

745
Reference Guide

...

- fast modelling techniques in one platform are reflected in the other platform

...

SCIA is addressing the functionality of the Allplan platform concerning modelling of steel
reinforcement.
Also with other CAD modelling systems such as Revit (Autodesk) SCIA is implementing the highest functional
link; Revit is providing an API (Programming Interface) that allows partly roundtrip engineering. With Revit
Structures SCIA will have a link to the SCIA PT analysis model. It means that from Revit Structures the input of
geometry and loading will be exported directly to SCIA ESA PT. Changes to the structural model can be
imported in the structural model of Revit.

...
...
...

Roundtrip engineering is drastically improving the design process; it is the most advanced implementation of
Building Information Modelling technology. Integrated open general CAE-CAD platforms provide customized
solutions without the necessity of dedicated programming. Ease of use and far going automation are key
elements of the success.

End of quotation.

Roundtrip (including the one-way import / export) in SCIA ESA PT

Format or Program Import Export Update

(Roundtrip)
SCIA ESA PT yes yes yes
XML yes yes yes
IFC 2x3 yes yes yes
Revit yes yes yes
Graphic format (excluding DXF, DWG, VRML) --- yes ---
DXF, DWG, VRML yes yes ---
Esa-PrimaWin yes yes ---
Esa In yes yes ---
DSTV yes yes ---
ProSteel yes yes yes
StepSteel (analysis model) yes yes ---
StepSteel (structural model) yes yes ---
CEA Pland-4D --- yes ---

In the program itself (SCIA ESA PT), the functions are distributed over several different menus and tree
menus:
 File > Import,
 File > Export,
 File > Update,
 service Structure > Drawing tools > Import DWG, DXF, VRML97 file,
 service Tools > XML,
 service Structure > Import ESA project.

746
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

SCIA ESA PT
SCIA ESA PT
SCIA ESA PT enables the user to perform the import, export and update operations not only through "third-
party format" files, but also directly through the .ESA file (i.e. the "native" format of SCIA ESA PT).
This capability opens the user new horizons. He/she can share data with the colleagues. He/she can add into
the currently processed project parts from older projects (and thus save considerable amount of time). The
work on one large project can be split among several users and the final model can be "glued" from several
parts.

SCIA ESA PT import

The procedure to import data from .ESA file
1. Open service Structure.
2. Start function Import ESA project.
3. Browse for the required input file.
4. Confirm the file.
5. Input the "point of insertion" for the imported data.

Note: Contrary to imports through other formats, this time the specified file is added to the
currently edited project.

SCIA ESA PT export

The procedure to export data into .ESA file
1. Start menu function File > Export > New project ESA.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. The Import/Export dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Specify which types of data are to be exported (only geometric entities or the whole model).¨
6. Complete the export operation.

SCIA ESA PT update

This function enables the user to exchange and share project data with colleagues who use SCIA ESA PT as
well.
The principle is simple. User A makes the first version of the project and sends it to the user B. User B
continues with the project and then returns it back to user A. Naturally, user A may have made some changes
during this period too.
Now comes the time for SCIA ESA PT and its Update function. This function compares the two projects and
finds added, deleted and modified entities. Everything is clearly summarised in a neat dialogue. Finally, it is the
user’s turn again to decide which variants are those to be kept for future work.
The procedure to import and compare the project processed by a third-party user
1. Open your version of the project.
2. Call function File > Update > ESA file.
3. Browse for the file with the version that should be compared.
4. The program reads the project file and opens the Update dialogue.
5. Decide which changes are to be accepted and which ones are to be declined.
6. Confirm with button [Accept].

SCIA ESA PT update dialogue

The dialogue is a three-pane dialogue with a toolbar. The panes are:
 preview window,
 property window,
 merge window.

747
Reference Guide

Toolbar
The control icons are mostly taken over from a standard SCIA ESA PT graphical window. Therefore, their
meaning will not be discussed in detail here.
View parameters icons
These icons enable the user to adjust "what" and "how" should be displayed.
View-adjustment icons
These icons make it possible to set the view direction.
Zoom icons
These icons enable the user to zoom-in or -out the model.
Clipping box icons
These icons control the clipping box.
Special icons
Generate report This icon generates a report about the update.
Display original entities If ON, the original entities are displayed.
Display merged entities If ON, the merged entities are displayed.

Preview window
The Preview window is a standard graphical window used throughout SCIA ESA PT.
The window supports standard features of SCIA ESA PT graphical windows:
(i) pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print, save etc. functions,
(ii) [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
(iii) [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing,
(iv) [Ctrl] + right-click and drag to rotate the drawing.

The window displays the two merged projects in one view.

Moreover, the entity currently selected in the merge window (see below) is highlighted in this window.
Property window
This window is linked to the Merge window. If a particular entity is selected in the Merge window, then the
corresponding properties are shown in the Property window. This is especially useful when the user has to
track changes made in the two variants of the project.
Merge window
This window lists all the entities that somehow do not coincide in the two projects that are being merged.
Added, deleted and changed entities are shown here. The user may select which changes are to be accepted
and which ones are to be ignored.
Individual groups (new, deleted, merged entities) will now be described in more details.
New entities
Accepting the group
By default, the check box at this item is selected (ticked). It means that new entities (as a group) will be
accepted in the final merged project. If you deselect this check box, no new entities will be considered by the
update function at all.
Specifying the colour of the group
You may adjust the colour for the new entities. Simply click on the coloured box on the right-hand side of the
"New entities" line and then select the required colour.
Accepting individual items from the group
You may select which particular entity (or sub-group) from the "New entities" group should be accepted and
which one should be declined. Just mark (tick) or unmark (untick) the appropriate item. Please note that once
you put cursor (click) on a specific item, its properties are shown in the middle pane (property window) and the
entity itself is highlighted in the preview window.
Some items may be "grouped" in sub-groups such as load cases in the picture below. This enables you to
decline (if required) the whole subgroup by unmarking the corresponding sub-group check box.

748
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Example:

Deleted entities
This is analogous to "New entities" described above.
Example:

Changes (Merged entities)

This part of the merge window lists all the entities that have different properties in the two compared projects.
The list always contains the "original" and the "merged" entity. The properties of both are shown in the property
window (one by one – not together). If you select (tick) a particular listed item, the changes made in the
merged (second) project will be accepted. If you do not select (unmark) a particular listed item, the original (the
first project) will be preserved.
Example:

Note: The Update function can process geometric entities, load cases, loads, supports, hinges,
etc.

749
Reference Guide

Allplan
Allplan
The exchange of data between Allplan and SCIA ESA PT can be realised in several ways. First, standard
export and import routines can be applied. Second, direct interlink of the two programs can be used.
The first approach uses standard SCIA ESA PT project files. Allplan is capable of both saving the project into
this format and reading the project from this format. The second approach leads to very fast connection –
SCIA ESA PT is opened directly from within the Allplan environment and the changes made in one program
are automatically taken into account in the second program. For example, the following scenario is possible
(the aim of this particular example is to give you the idea of what is possible, not to present the most effective
style of work, even though it may even the case for certain situations and types of structures):
1. The project is started in Allplan. Some SCIA ESA PT steel templates are inserted into the model.
2. SCIA ESA PT is opened and one or two beam members in the model are modified (moved,
changed cross-section, etc.).
3. The model is sent back to Allplan and a new SCIA ESA PT steel template is added.
4. SCIA ESA PT is opened again and a part of the model is removed.
5. The model is sent back to Allplan and the model is completed.

Note: The direct communication between the two programs has inevitably some limitations. The
user must decide which type of entities will be used: either Allplan architectural elements or SCIA
ESA PT steel templates. If this prerequisite is satisfied, the full roundtrip between the two programs
is fully functioning. On the other hand, if both the above-mentioned types are used in one project,
the direct and complete exchange of the data between the two programs is not possible.

The following list summarises all Allplan data-exchange functions:

 Importing SCIA ESA data,
 Update from ESA file,
 Exporting SCIA ESA data,
 Save to ESA file,
 Edit in Modeller,
 Calculate ESA.

Allplan - Importing SCIA ESA data

Allplan does not create a new project but adds the imported data to the existing currently opened model.
The import function requires that SCIA ESA PT is installed on the computer where Allplan is run – a demo-
version is sufficient.

The procedure to import .esa file to Allplan

1. Start function Create > Interfaces > Importing SCIA ESA data.
2. Browse for the file to-be-imported.
3. A dialogue with import parameters is opened on the screen.
4. Fill in the required parameters (see below).
5. Confirm the settings to proceed with the import.
6. If the option Make special adjustment was selected for the View parameters, the View
parameters dialogue opens on the screen. In that case, make the necessary settings and end the
import.
7. The import is done.

Import parameters dialogue

Colour
Use colours from ESA project The imported entities are assigned colours as they were
adjusted in SCIA ESA PT.
Colour from Allplan The colours are taken from the settings made in Allplan.

750
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

View parameters
Use adjustment from ESA
project
Make special adjustment
Precise member surface
The view parameters are taken exactly as they were set
in SCIA ESA PT.
The user may adjust the view parameters manually
during the import procedure.
If ON, the outline of cross-sections is drawn with utmost
precision.

3D geometry
One volume If ON, the whole imported structure is made a single
object in Allplan.

Allplan element
BIE Macro If ON, the imported data are stored as Allplan BIE
macros.
Structural element If ON, the the imported data are stored as Allplan
structural elements (Konstruktive Fertigteil).
The imported data cannot be edited by SCIA ESA PT
editing functions integrated in Allplan. The editing can
only be done through standard Allplan functions.

Allplan - Update from ESA file

This function reads a SCIA ESA PT data file and adds its contents to the currently opened project in Allplan.
The update function requires that a proper license of SCIA ESA PT is installed on the computer where Allplan
is run (demo-version is not sufficient).
The action of the function is analogous to import function Importing SCIA ESA data. The imported data are
added to the current project.
The procedure to update data in Allplan from .esa file
1. Start function Create > Add-On modules > Steel/Concrete Construction > Update from ESA
file.
2. Browse for the file to-be-imported.
3. A dialogue with import parameters is opened on the screen.
4. Fill in the required parameters (see Importing SCIA ESA data).
5. Confirm the settings to proceed with the import.
6. If the option Make special adjustment was selected for the View parameters, the View
parameters dialogue opens on the screen. In that case, make the necessary settings and end the
import.
7. The update is done.

Allplan - Exporting SCIA ESA data

This function exports the whole project created or edited in Allplan into SCIA ESA PT data file.
The export function requires that SCIA ESA PT is installed on the computer where Allplan is run – a demo-
version is sufficient.
The procedure to export data into .esa file from Allplan
1. Start function Create > Interfaces > Exporting SCIA ESA data.
2. Browse for the required folder and specify the file name.
3. Export is done.

Allplan - Save to ESA file

This function saves the project created or edited in Allplan into SCIA ESA PT data file.
The function requires that a proper license of SCIA ESA PT is installed on the computer where Allplan is run
(demo-version is not sufficient).

751
Reference Guide

The function enables the user to save either the whole project or just a selected part of it into the SCIA ESA
PT data file.
The procedure to save data into .esa file from Allplan
1. Start function Create > Add-On modules > Steel/Concrete Construction > Save to ESA file.
2. Select the entities to be saved or save the whole project.
3. Browse for the required folder and specify the file name.
4. Save-operation is complete.

Allplan - Edit in Modeller

If you are creating a model of a structure composed of SCIA ESA PT steel templates, you may freely swap
between Allplan and SCIA ESA PT and work in both programs almost at the same time. The scenario (given
also in the introductory chapter) can be like this:
1. The project is started in Allplan. Some SCIA ESA PT steel templates are inserted into the model.
2. SCIA ESA PT is opened and one or two beam members in the model are modified (moved,
changed cross-section, etc.).
3. The model is sent back to Allplan and a new SCIA ESA PT steel template added.
4. And so on and so forth.

Any change of the model made in either program is automatically reflected in the other program.

The procedure to perform this combined editing

1. In Allplan start with the model (i.e. insert some SCIA ESA PT steel templates).
2. Start function Modify > Add-on Modules > Steel/Concrete Construction > Edit in Modeller.
3. Select the entities to be sent to SCIA ESA PT Modeller.
4. The modeller is opened.
5. Do whatever you need.
6. Call function (in SCIA ESA PT) File > Close.
7. A small Save-Cancel dialogue opens on the screen.
8. Select the option that saves the changes.
9. You are back in Allplan.

Note: Please note that Allplan function Create > Add-on Modules > Steel/Concrete
Construction > Start Modeller starts the SCIA ESA PT Modeller and opens an empty project in
it. It does not transfer the data from your current Allplan project.

Note: It is not recommended to combine in one project Allplan architectural elements and SCIA
ESA PT steel templates. If both the types are used in one project, the direct and complete
exchange of the data between the two programs is not possible. On the other hand, separate
import and export functions are still fully applicable.

Allplan - Calculate ESA

If you are creating a model of a structure composed of architectural elements, you may freely swap between
Allplan and SCIA ESA PT and work in both programs almost at the same time. The general scenario is the
same like for Editing in Modeller. Any change of the model made in either program is automatically reflected in
the other one.

The procedure to perform this combined editing

1. In Allplan start with the model.
2. Start function Modify > Add-on Modules > Steel/Concrete Construction > Calculate ESA.
3. Select the entities to be sent to SCIA ESA PT.
4. SCIA ESA PT is opened.
5. Do whatever you need.
6. Call function (in SCIA ESA PT) File > Close.
7. A small Save-Cancel dialogue opens on the screen.

752
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

8. Select the option that saves the changes.

9. You are back in Allplan.

The important feature comes into play when you are swapping to SCIA ESA PT for the second (third, fourth,
etc.) time. SCIA ESA PT can recognise that you have been already editing the same project in it and (in order
to help you tracing the changes made in Allplan) opens the dialogue that compares two variants: (i) the data
that are currently sent from Allplan to SCIA ESA PT and (ii) the data that were saved the last time you were
working in SCIA ESA PT.
A special designed dialogue guides you through the changes and allows you to decide which changes are to
be approved and which ones are to be discarded. This is the SCIA ESA PT update dialogue that is described
in a separate chapter.

Note: It is not recommended to combine in one project Allplan architectural elements and SCIA
ESA PT steel templates. If both the types are used in one project, the direct and complete
exchange of the data between the two programs is not possible. On the other hand, separate
import and export functions are still fully applicable.

Esa-PrimaWin
Esa PrimaWin
SCIA ESA PT is a descendant of Esa-PrimaWin. In order to help the thousands of users of the EPW program,
SCIA ESA PT enables them to import (and export as well) their precious data.

Esa PrimaWin import

The procedure to import data from Esa-PrimaWin file
1. Start menu function File > Import > Esa-PrimaWin.
2. Browse for the required input file.
3. Finish the import.
4. A report is displayed on the screen when the import is finished.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Note: It may happen that code-dependent parts of the project are not fully imported. It is
necessary to verify these data. In addition, certain cross-sections may be imported as numerical
cross-section. The user is always informed about such "problems" in a report.

Esa PrimaWin export

The procedure to export data into Esa-PrimaWin file
1. Start menu function File > Export > Esa-PrimaWin.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. Complete the export.

Note: As the input of the model was completely different in EPW than it is now in SCIA ESA PT,
there are certain limitations as to what the user can do with the exported model in Esa-PrimaWin.
The model in EPW cannot be modified. The user may add some additional data such as loads,
beam members, etc. It is, however, not possible to add new load case combinations. The user can
perform calculation, review the results and use checks according to technical standards.

Esa In
Esa In
The Esa In format is an original SCIA file format developed for the transfer of data from the historically first
SCIA programs into IDA Prima and Esa-PrimaWin. Later, it was used to transfer data from IDA Prima to Esa-
PrimaWin.
The format can store straight beam members and simple walls that are rectangular in shape.
SCIA ESA PT supports both import from and export into this format.

753
Reference Guide

Note: More information about the Esa In format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

Esa In import
The procedure to import data from Esa In file
1. Start menu function File > Import > Esa In.
2. Browse for the required input file.
3. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Note: More information about the Esa In format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

Esa In export
The procedure to export data into Esa In file
1. Start menu function File > Export > Esa In.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file.
4. Complete the export.

Note: More information about the Esa In format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

XML
XML
SCIA ESA PT allows fro the exchange of data with third-party applications through the popular and powerful
XML format. Moreover, XML format can be used to develop tailor-made applications that use SCIA ESA PT
as a "hidden" engine working on the background and performing calculations of company-specific problems.

Note: The aim of this text is to present the principles of XML interface. The full explanation of all
features and all capabilities of XML import/export/update would occupy dozens and maybe even
hundreds of pages and exceeds the extent and scope of this text. Users who are interested in the
application of XML interface in their practice are kindly asked to contact the help-desk of SCIA
Company. SCIA specialists will be happy to give concrete piece of advice that could help solve the
particular problem of your company.

XML import
The procedure to import data from XML file
1. Start menu function File > Import > XML file.
2. Browse for the required .xml file.
3. Confirm the selection of the file.
4. If required by the import procedure, specify the national standard to be used.
5. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

XML export
The procedure to export data into XML file
1. Use the tree menu to start function Tools > XML.
2. XML file editor is opened on the screen. Before it is opened, the program may ask you to select the
default XML document template. You may select one or just close the dialogue without choosing
anything. If you want to export the whole structure into a XML file, it is convenient to select the
default.TDX template.

754
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

3. In the XML file editor define the structure of the XML document.
4. Use icon Export on the toolbar to export the created document into a XML file.
5. Close the XML file editor.

Note: Please remember that the order of SCIA ESA PT entities stored in the exported XML file
must guarantee that all the references are made to entities stored earlier in the file. It means, for
example, that materials must come before cross-sections, cross-sections and nodes must come
before beam members, load cases must come before load case combinations, etc.

XML file editor

The XML file editor is very similar to the Document of SCIA ESA PT. The principle is that the user defines
tables describing individual entities of the SCIA ESA PT projects and there order. This table-form can be
easily previewed (it is in fact identical to the standard SCIA ESA PT document). When ready, the final XML
file contents can be transformed into the real XML format through the Export function.

The dialogue contains the following parts:

XML document selection box Selects the required XML document if more than one
document has been created.

button to open the XML Opens the XML document manager where you can
document manager create new documents or delete the existing ones. It is a
standard SCIA ESA PT database manager.

XML file contents window This window shows the contents and structure of the
currently edited document. This is analogous to the
document tree window.

property window Displays parameters related to currently selected item in

the XML file contents window. This is analogous to the
document property window.

icon toolbar Contains buttons (icons) that perform various actions.

The toolbar is identical with the Document window
toolbar.

control buttons There are two control buttons:

[New] – adds a new item to the XML file contents
window.
[Close] – closes the XML file editor.

action button There is just one action button – it refreshes the preview
window of the XML file editor.

preview window Displays the currently edited XML file in table-form.

XML update
The procedure to update the project through XML file
1. Open in SCIA ESA PT the project to-be-updated.
2. Call function File > Update > XML file.
3. Browse for the file to-be-merged.
4. Confirm the selection of the file.
5. The project in SCIA ESA PT is updated by the data read from the file.

Note: For more information on the update function read chapter XML update example.

755
Reference Guide

XML update example

Let us have a project named Cantilever.esa with a simple cantilever beam of a circular cross-section.

The dimensions of the cross-section are defined through two parameters: Diameter and Thickness.

Both the parameters are of type Cross-section length (Css length) and their initial values are 200 mm and 5
mm.

Now we have to open the XML file editor (tree menu function Tools > XML).
There we have to create a new "XML document" containing the table of defined parameters.
To do so, we add the table Libraries > Parameters.

756
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

The inserted table looks like this:

The created XML document must be exported into XML file. This can be achieved through function Export
(available on the toolbar of the preview window in the XML file editor).
The generated XML file (named CantileverParameters.xml) looks like:
XML file Comment
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes" ?>
- <project xmlns="http://www.scia.cz">
<def uri="CantileverParameters.xml.def" />
- <container id="{5C62EA11-86D4-11D4-B3AB-00104BC3B531}"
t="EP_Parameters.EP_Param.1">

757
Reference Guide

- <table id="B4DDEC1E-5869-4B8C-8B4B-1A8C07B76699"
t="EP_Parameters.EP_Param.1">
- <h>
<h0 t="Name" />
<h1 t="UniqueID" />
<h2 t="Type" />
<h3 t="Evaluation" />
<h4 t="Use range" />
<h5 t="Value" />
</h>
- <obj id="1" nm="Diameter"> Parameter Diameter
<p0 v="Diameter" />
<p1 v="{FDD9298F-1A51-406B-9887-8C9302981A47}" />
<p2 v="11" t="Css length" />
<p3 v="0" t="Value" />
<p4 v="0" />
- <p5 t="">
- <h>
<h0 t="Real" />
</h> value = 0.2 m
- <row id="0">
<p0 v="0.2" />
</row>
</p5>
</obj>
- <obj id="2" nm="Thicknes"> Parameter Thickness
<p0 v="Thicknes" />
<p1 v="{9E8E662D-4B12-43EE-8A56-A33948D079A1}" />
<p2 v="11" t="Css length" />
<p3 v="0" t="Value" />
<p4 v="0" />
- <p5 t="">
- <h>
<h0 t="Real" />
</h> value = 0.005 m
- <row id="0">
<p0 v="0.005" />
</row>
</p5>
</obj>
</table>
</container>
</project>

We will not explain the meaning of every single line of the XML document. The example above demonstrates
the structure of the XML file and shows the way the two parameters from our example are stored.

Note: When the export function is invoked, the XML file editor generates in fact two files: XML
file and the corresponding definition file (DEF file). For example, if the name of the XML file is
MyFile.XML, the name of the definition file is MyFile.xml.DEF. Briefly said, the definition file
contains the definition of all the characteristics that are referred to in the XML file.

Manual XML update

758
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

And now, we may demonstrate the principle of the XML update function. Let us assume that we have a tool
that can read and modify the XML file. Using this tool we can change the value of the parameters in the XML
file. Let us assume that the value of the Diameter was changed to 0.8 m.

Note: Later we will show how exactly this can be done. For the time being, let us take it for
granted that the tool changed the XML file and modified parameter Diameter.

Let us go back to SCIA ESA PT where our original project is still open. Call function File > Update > XML file
and browse for our modified file.
The program updates the data of the project (in our example - the values of the parameters) and we can see
the result on the screen. The tube has increased its diameter four times.

Automatic XML update

Now, let us return to the idea of an external tool that is capable of modifying the XML file.
Probably every engineering office uses a kind of spreadsheet processor such as MS EXCEL. Taking into
account the fact that the Microsoft’s product is probably the most widespread tool available in the market, we
will use it in our example.
List of operations carried out by the EXCEL application
The EXCEL "application" will do the following operations:
A. it will take our input of the diameter and thickness of the cross-section,
B. it will generate the appropriate XML file,
C. it will open the SCIA ESA PT project with the cantilever in question,
D. it will update the cross-section using the values from the generated XML file,
E. it will perform the calculation,
F. it will generate output document containing the calculated deformation of the cantilever,
G. it will import this document into the EXCEL sheet,
H. it will show the vertical displacement of the free end of the cantilever directly in the EXCEL sheet.

Note: The EXCEL application could naturally display also other results. In the interests of
brevity, clarity, and comprehension, we will deal in our example just this single result value.

We will prepare a VBA script (run from a XLS sheet) that will perform all the described operations. SCIA ESA
PT as a calculation engine will be running "somewhere" on the background. The user won’t even spot it on the
screen and will be able to think that the EXCEL sheet itself does everything.

To start with, we have to pre-prepare something in SCIA ESA PT.

First, we have to generate the .XML "template" file and the corresponding .DEF file. This was already done
earlier in our example and we can simply take the produced .XML file. Unless we decide to use different folder
(different then SCIA ESA PT project folder) for our EXCEL application, we do not have to bother about the
.DEF file. It will be in the right place by default.
Second, we have to create a document in our SCIA ESA PT project. The document must contain the table
with calculated nodal displacements. The project must be then saved.

759
Reference Guide

Let us now start MS EXCEL, create a new document and define two sheets. Let us name them "Table" and
"XML". The first one (Table) will be our "User interface", i.e. it will be the sheet that will be used by the user.
The other one (XML) will be used as an auxiliary sheet to hold the contents of the XML file we have to
generate (Please note that there are other possibilities (in terms of programming techniques) to store the
contents of the XML-file-to-be-generated that may prove more efficient in terms of speed for large projects with
large XML files. Our example is quite a simple one and we may afford to store the data in the sheet).

Design the "Table" sheet as in the figure:

You can see that the sheet takes two values as input (the blue cells B17 and B18) and displays one value as
output (the yellow cell B25). The sheet contains a simple illustrative picture (scanned from SCIA ESA PT) and
a button that starts all the operations listed above.

The second sheet holds the contents of the XML file that is needed for the XML update functionality of SCIA
ESA PT.

760
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

The XML content is in the second column (B). The first column (A) is almost(!) empty. It just contains letters "d"
and "t" in rows where the values of the diameter and thickness are stored. This arrangement was selected with
regard to the algorithm programmed in our sample VBA script. The simplest way to fill in this "XML" sheet is to
open the exported CantileverParameters.xml file in a simple text editor, remove all blank lines and
copy+paste it to the second column of the "XML" sheet. The blank lines have been removed to allow for a very
simple VBA script.

761
Reference Guide

Now we have to define the procedure that is triggered by clicking the button [Recalculate] from the "Table"
sheet. The procedure may look like:

Private Sub Recalculate_Click()

' Open XML file for writing
Dim fs, f
Set fs = CreateObject("Scripting.FileSystemObject")
Set f = fs.CreateTextFile("E:\SCIA\EsaData\CantileverParameters.xml", True)
' we assume that the data are stored in folder E:\SCIA\EsaData
' Generate XML file using the two input values
Dim SomethingToWrite As Boolean
SomethingToWrite = True
Dim mystring As String
Dim i As Integer
i = 1
Do
mystring = Worksheets("XML").Cells(i, 2).Value
If mystring <> "" Then
If Worksheets("XML").Cells(i, 1).Value = "d" Then
' this line stores the value of the diameter
mystring = " <p0 v=""" & Str(Worksheets("Table").Cells(17, 2).Value / 1000) & """/>"
End If
If Worksheets("XML").Cells(i, 1).Value = "t" Then
' this line stores the value of the thickness
mystring = " <p0 v=""" & Str(Worksheets("Table").Cells(18, 2).Value / 1000) & """/>"
End If
f.WriteLine (mystring)
i = i + 1
Else
SomethingToWrite = False
End If
Loop While SomethingToWrite = True
f.Close
' Invoke the update of the project +
' Run the calculation +
' Export the document into XLS file
Shell ("D:\ESA\Esa_XML.exe LIN E:\SCIA\EsaData\Cantilever.esa
E:\EsaData\SCIA\CantileverParameters.xml /tHTML
/oE:\SCIA\EsaData\CantileverParameters.xls")
'Assumptions:
' SCIA ESA PT installed in folder D:\ESA
' project file stored in fodler E:\SCIA\EsaData
' XML file generated to folder E:\SCIA\EsaData
' Note:
' File Esa_XML.exe is an integral part of SCIA ESA PT installation
' Parameters of "SHELL" command
' D:\ESA\Esa_XML.exe = location of Esa_XML.exe
' LIN = linear calculation
' E:\SCIA\EsaData\Cantilever.esa = original project file
' E:\EsaData\SCIA\CantileverParameters.xml = XML file for the update function
' /tHTML /oE:\SCIA\EsaData\CantileverParameters.xls = export the document stored inside the
project file as HTML file with location and name E:\SCIA\EsaData\CantileverParameters.xls

Application.Wait (Now + TimeValue("0:00:15"))

762
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

' wait in order to guarantee that SCIA ESA PT completes the calculation before the control
of the operation is returned to the VBA script
' Read result into XLS sheet +
' Insert the result value into the appropriate cell of the "Table" sheet
Dim myresult As Variant
Workbooks.Open Filename:="E:\SCIA\EsaData\CantileverParameters.xls"
myresult = Sheets("CantileverParameters").Cells(8, 5).Value
' Cell (8,5) of the "document file" contains the required vertical displacement
' to find out this, you have to open the generated XLS file manually (only once) and note
down the cell coordinates
Workbooks("CantileverParameters.xls").Close
Worksheets("Table").Cells(25, 2).Value = myresult

End Sub

Now we can start playing with the EXCEL application. Just type the two input parameters, click button
[Recalculate] and (after a few seconds) you can see the vertical displacement shown in the "Deflection" cell.

Note: Please, consider this chapter to be only a brief introduction to the XML update and contact
SCIA support team for more information and/or guidance.

Graphical format
Graphic format
Export
SCIA ESA PT enables the user to export the graphical representation of the project into a graphical file. This
type of export usually work with the data that are displayed in the graphical window of SCIA ESA PT at the
moment the export procedure is started. Formats VRML, DXF and DWG are exceptions as they allow the user
to export the whole project and even specify special export parameters.
The procedure to export data into a graphical file is given in a separate topic.
Various graphical formats are available in SCIA ESA PT:
BMP Standard Windows bitmap

VRML Virtual Reality Modeling Language (V-R-M-L)

A standardised language used to transmit information
about 3D images over the web (WWW). Since the image
is built up on the local computer VRML information
transmission is more efficient than sending the actual
image.
For more information on this format read bellow the
table.

EP3 Internal graphical format of SCIA ESA PT

EMF Extended (Enhanced) Windows Metafile Format

WMF Windows Meta File (W-M-F)

A graphic file format used by Microsoft to transfer
graphics between Windows applications. Both bitmap
and vector graphics are supported by WMF. A variation
on WMF is and extended version known as EMF.

3D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Please note that only versions R14 and 2000 are
supported.

2D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 Please note that only versions R14 and 2000 are

763
Reference Guide

supported.

3D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Please note that only versions R14 and 2000 are
supported.

2D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 Please note that only versions R14 and 2000 are
supported.

Import
For special graphical formats DXF, DWG, VRML also the import procedure is supported in SCIA ESA PT.
This is described in separate topics.

VRML
This format represents a powerful tool enabling the users to publish virtual objects via VRML and also import
them into SCIA ESA PT. Vast number of CAD software applications support the export of VRML files (AllPlan,
AutoCAD, CEA Systems, etc.). The import of VRML files is done the same way as for DXF and DWG files. For
example, the imported data can be used as a 3D grid or as a background. They are not taken into account for
the analysis.
The virtual objects can be used:
 for the visualization architectural elements sent from 3rd parties,
 as a drawing tool – snapping functionality,
 for pro-active viewing of changes and consequences due to optimisation or structural adaptations
(e.g. deformations),
 for visualization of the analysed structure in its environment,
 for the visualization of piping generated by Plant design applications,
 etc.
The virtual objects can afterwards be exported again to VRML format file for 3D publishing of the structure
including the results of analysis.
Examples:

764
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Graphic format export

The procedure to export data into a graphical file
1. Start menu function File > Export > Graphic format.
2. Select the format of the graphical file.
3. Specify the required output folder.
4. Type the name of the file.
5. Complete the export.
6. Note: A special dialogue opens for DWG and DXF formats in which you can specify some export
parameters.

765
Reference Guide

Export and import of DXF, DWG and VRML

Export from the graphical window
The procedure to export DXF / DWG file from graphical window
1. Use one of the following functions:
a. File > Export > Graphic format.
b. Righ-mouse-button-pop-up menu > Save picture to file.
2. It is possible to choose from the following formats:
a. 3D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 (*.dwg)
b. 3D DWG AutoCAD R11 - 2006 (*.dwg)
c. 2D DWG AutoCAD R14, 2000 (*.dwg)
d. 3D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 (*.dxf)
e. 3D DXF AutoCAD R11 - 2006 (*.dxf)
f. 2D DXF AutoCAD R14, 2000 (*.dxf)
3. When you enter the file name and path, confirm with button [Save]. Another dialogue is opened on
the screen where you can define some details of the export.

12. Adjust the properties (see below) and confirm with [OK].

Export properties
File properties group name
Name Pathname of the exported file.
Text code page Windows ANSI or Eastern Europe coding can be adjusted.
Advanced group name
Scale Scale for text and graphical symbols that will be in the exported
drawing.
Structure surface If ON, the individual members will be exported including the
always as 3D solid surface.

Note: 2D DXF and 2D DWG export does not support option Structure surface always as 3D
solid, which is quite understandable.

766
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Note: See also Saving the picture into an external file.

Export from the picture gallery

The pictures from the Picture gallery may be exported into DWG or DXF file in the same way as from the
graphical window.
The procedure to export DXF / DWG file from the Picture gallery
1. Open the Picture gallery.
2. Select the picture to be exported.
3. Click icon Save picture to file.
4. Input the file name and path.
5. Adjust file parameters (see Export from graphical window).
6. Confirm with [OK].

Export from the Paperspace gallery

The pictures from the paperspace may be exported into DWG or DXF file in the similar way as from the
graphical window.
The procedure to export DXF / DWG file from the Paperspace gallery
1. Open the Paperspace gallery manager.
2. Select the picture to be exported.
3. Click icon Save picture to file.
4. Input the file name and path.
5. Adjust file parameters (see Export from graphical window).
6. Confirm with [OK].

Note: The export from Paperpace gallery is limited to 2D DWG and 2D DXF format.

Import into the graphical window

Procedure for the import of DWG, DXF or VRML file into the graphical window
1. Start the tree menu function Structure > Drawing tools > Import DWG, DXF, VRML 97 file.
2. The Open file dialogue is opened on the screen.
3. Browse for the file and confirm.
4. A special import dialogue is opened on the screen.

767
Reference Guide

5. Adjust the required parameters in dialogue and perform the import itself – see below.

Layers
This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are
shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.
Entity types
This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import
dialogue.
Selection mode
Lines The drawing is read as lines. The lines may be assigned to particular layers.
On pressing the "Import" button, the property dialogue is opened and you may
specify the required parameters.

768
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Beams The drawing is read as beam members. On pressing the "Import" button, the
property dialogue is opened and you may specify the required parameters.

Slabs The drawing is read as slabs. On pressing the "Import" button, the property
dialogue is opened and you may specify the required parameters.

769
Reference Guide

Solids The drawing is read as solid objects that are displayed together with the
analysed structure but are neglected during the calculation.

Note: When slabs are to be imported, it is required that the closed polygon was created already
in the file that will be imported.
Scale
The scale for the import. It may be necessary when the drawing is not in SI units. The item provides for the
transformation from "imaginary" units of the DWG/DXF file and metres (used in ESA PT as the basic unit).
Note: If the scale is set to 1 (one), ESA PT assumes the data to be stored in metres.
Sizes
This is an informative item, which shows the dimensions calculated from the input scale.
Connect single curves to closed polygon
The following procedure merges individual lines of the drawing into polygon
1. Press [Select curves].
2. Select lines to be inserted into the polygon.
3. Press [Connect curves].
4. Repeat as many times as required.
5. Press [End]
Preview window
The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard ESA PT mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated,
zoomed in/out).

770
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Note: Sometimes it may be convenient to import the drawing as lines and only later (i.e. in ESA
PT graphical environment) transform the lines to beam members using function Drawing a member
in mode Select line ( ).

Import selected / Import all

This button start the import itself. Either entities selected in the Preview window or All entities from the Preview
window are imported as lines or beam members or slabs (depending on the adjustment of other import
parameters). When the button is pressed, the property dialogue for lines or beam members or slabs
(depending on the adjustment of other import parameters) is opened on the screen and you may set the
required properties.

Import into the Paperspace gallery

DWG, DXF and VRML files can be imported as a picture or as a drawing.
Importing a picture
This function imports the DWG, DXF and VRML file as a "standalone" picture. The picture can be placed
anywhere to the drawing, resized, moved, etc.
Procedure to insert a picture from DWG or DXF file
1. Open the Paperspace gallery.
2. Open or create a drawing.
3. Start function Insert picture > Insert picture from DWG or DXF file.
4. Two file types are available:
a. AutoCAD R12, R13, R14, 2000 (*.dxf)
b. AutoCAD R12, R13, R14, 2000 (*.dwg)
2. Select the file and open it.
3. Import properties dialogue is opened on the screen.

771
Reference Guide

5. Adjust the required properties (see below) and confirm.

6. Use the mouse to position the picture and the left mouse button to drag the size of the picture on the
drawing.
Procedure to insert a picture from VRML file
1. Open the Paperspace gallery.
2. Open or create a drawing.
3. Start function Insert picture > Insert picture from VRML file.
4. Select the file and open it.
5. Use the mouse to position the picture and the left mouse button to drag the size of the picture on the
drawing.
Layers
This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are
shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.
Entity types
This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import
dialogue.
Line styles
This window contains all the line styles that are used in the imported file.
Style

772
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

This box offer the styles of a line that can be used in the program. They can be assigned to individual line
types from the original file.
Default line thickness
Lines in DWG/DXF files may have either specific thickness or default thickness. In order to avoid using
unknown thickness lines, the import dialogue enables you to define the numerical value for the default
thickness.
Optimize scene
If ON, the lines with the same properties are joined together and drawn at the same time.
Text scale
Specifies the scale of the text.
Preview, view direction
The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard ESA PT mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated,
zoomed in/out).

Importing a drawing
This function imports the DWG/DXF file as a drawing, i.e. it is added to the current drawing as a new part of it.
The "size" of the imported drawing can be defined through parameter Scale.
Procedure to insert a drawing from DWG or DXF file
1. Open the Paperspace gallery.
2. Open or create a drawing.
3. Start function Insert picture > Insert drawing from DWG or DXF file.
4. Two file types are available:
a. AutoCAD R12, R13, R14, 2000 (*.dxf)
b. AutoCAD R12, R13, R14, 2000 (*.dwg)
2. Select the file and open it.
3. Import properties dialogue is opened on the screen.

773
Reference Guide

5. Adjust the required properties (see below) and confirm.

6. Use the mouse to position the imported drawing to the current drawing.
Layers
This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are
shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.
Entity types
This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import
dialogue.
Line styles
This window contains all the line styles that are used in the imported file.
Style
This box offer the styles of a line that can be used in the program. They can be assigned to individual line
types from the original file.
Default line thickness
Lines in DWG/DXF files may have either specific thickness or default thickness. In order to avoid using
unknown thickness lines, the import dialogue enables you to define the numerical value for the default
thickness.

774
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Transformation – Insertion point

The imported drawing can be placed to a specified place in the current drawing (e.g. bottom left corner, centre,
etc.). The meaning of individual options is clear from the name of the option.

Note: When option By mouse two points is selected, the input box Scale is hidden. The two
points define the size of the imported drawing and the Scale parameter becomes redundant.

Scale
Specifies the scale for the imported drawing.
Text scale
Specifies the scale of the text.
Preview, view direction
The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard ESA PT mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated,
zoomed in/out).

Import of a general cross-section

Not only a structure itself, but also a cross-section shape can be imported from DWG/DXF files.
The editor of a general cross-section can be opened via the Cross-section manager. Use function New cross-
section > General cross-section.

Procedure to import the shape of a cross-section from DWG/DXF file

1. Open the Cross-section manager.
2. Start function New.
3. Select General.
4. The Cross-section editor is opened on the screen.
5. Double click function Import DXF/DWG.

775
Reference Guide

6. Browse for the file to be imported.

7. The import dialogue is opened on the screen.
8. Make necessary adjustments and/or actions (see below for the meaning of dialogue controls).
9. Complete the action of the import usng buttons [Import selected] or [Import all].

Layers
This list box contains the layers that were defined in the original DWG/DXF file. Only selected layers are
shown in the preview window of the Import dialogue.
Entity types
This list contains available entity types. Only selected types are shown in the preview window of the Import
dialogue.
Selection mode
Thin walled The selected lines are imported as a thin-walled section.
Polygons The selected lines are imported as a polygonal cross-section.
Polygonal openings The selected lines are imported as a polygonal opening in the
cross-section.
Scale
The scale for the import. It may be necessary when the drawing is not in SI units. The item provides for the
transformation from "imaginary" units of the DWG/DXF file and metres (used in ESA PT as the basic unit).
Sizes
This is an informative item, which shows the dimensions calculated from the input scale.
Connect single curves to closed polygon
The following procedure merges individual lines of the drawing into polygon
Press [Select curves].
Select lines to be inserted into the polygon.
Press [Connect curves].
Repeat as many times as required.
Press [End]
Preview window
The view in the preview can be adjusted using the standard ESA PT mouse+key controls (shifted, rotated,
zoomed in/out).

Revit
Revit
The SCIA ESA PT finite element analysis allows for (through the structural CAD model) a direct analysis of
plates, walls, frames and any kind of mixed structures of Autodesk® Revit® Structure 3 and 4.
What can be exported and imported?
 Geometry (Revit builds an architectural/structural model and converts it into an analysis model) -
Plates, walls, shells, beam members, columns, bracings.
 Supports (Revit footings are converted into rigid supports in SCIA ESA PT)
 Loads (Revit inputs loads in Load Cases - these are converted into free loads in SCIA ESA PT).
 Combinations (combinations are possible but can be ignored in the export to SCIA ESA PT)
What are the installation requirements?
The link works as a Revit’s plug-in, so you must have Revit installed - with or without SCIA ESA PT.
SCIA ESA PT user who have also Revit can make modifications in Revit and update them in SCIA ESA PT
or vice versa.
How does it work?

776
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Revit creates the model and it can be exported to SCIA ESA PT through function Tools > External Tools >
Send model to SCIA.ESA PT. There are two possible approaches.
1. Through a direct export to SCIA ESA PT. SCIA ESA PT is opened and the structure is visualized.
The structure can be sent to Revit again, changed there and again updated to SCIA ESA PT, and
over and over again.
2. Through a simple export to a file.

SCIA ESA PT checks the geometry, generates the FE mesh and performs the analysis. The structure can
also be optimized and modified and then updated in Revit:
1. Function Update from SCIA.ESA PT can be invoked: the structure in Revit is updated with the new
dimensions.
2. After updating the user saves the model to a Revit file and that file is read into Revit.

Changes can be traced in Revit: modifications or added members are highlighted; deletions are listed.
For further info read chapters: Revit import, Revit export, Revit update.

Revit import
The procedure to import data from Revit file
1. Start menu function File > Import > Revit file.
2. Browse for the required .r2s file.
3. Confirm the selection of the file.
4. If required by the import procedure, specify the national standard to be used.
5. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Revit export
The procedure to export data into Revit file
1. Start menu function File > Export > Revit file.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file.
4. Complete the export.

Revit update
The procedure to update the project through Revit file
1. Open in SCIA ESA PT the project to-be-updated.
2. Call function File > Update > Revit file.
3. Browse for the file to-be-merged.
4. Confirm the selection of the file.
5. The project in SCIA ESA PT is updated by the data read from the file.

Sample roundtrip procedure

Step 1: Autodesk® Revit® Structure
A 3D model is prepared in Autodesk Revit Structure:

777
Reference Guide

Then it is exported to SCIA ESA PT by the Revit Structure 3 or 4 plug-in, designed by SCIA:

The export features:

Either the complete model or only a selected part can be exported.
Revit combinations can be exported or ignored. If the latter is the case, new combinations must be defined in
SCIA ESA PT.
The export can be done directly to SCIA ESA PT, on condition that SCIA ESA PT is installed on the same
computer. The plug-in opens SCIA ESA PT – both applications will be open. Modifications done in SCIA ESA
PT can be then sent to Revit. When Revit function Update from SCIA.ESA PT is called, the model is accepted
in Revit and changes to the model can be traced in Revit Structure.
The export can also be done to an external file. This file with extension *.r2s can be sent to the construction
partner. This partner is able to open the mode in SCIA ESA PT and save it again to the file with the same
extension.

778
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Mapping tables must be defined by the user to link the Revit Structure cross-section list to the SCIA ESA PT
cross-section library. The same must be done for the materials defined in Revit Structure and for the Revit
cross-sections and material families.
After this primary export, new modifications made in Revit can be re-sent to SCIA ESA PT.
Step 2: SCIA.ESA PT - finite elements analysis software
The model received from Revit Structure can be checked and corrected automatically for analytical anomalies
and, if required, modified in SCIA ESA PT for further analysis.
The received model can contain:
 Columns, beams
 Plates
 Holes
 Walls
 Curved slabs
 Loads & load cases
 Supports

The structural model is automatically converted into an analysis model

At any time, the SCIA ESA PT Structural model can be reviewed in order to help with visual checks.

779
Reference Guide

After the consistency of the structure is checked, the structure can be meshed and analysed and the results in
the frame elements, plates and shells can be evaluated.

780
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Step 3: Autodesk® Revit® Structure

After the analysis and optimisation the model is sent (and updated) back to Autodesk Revit Structure

IFC
IFC
IFC stands for "Industry Foundation Classes", a set of internationally standardised object definitions for the
application in construction industry. It has been developed by the International Alliance for Interoperability (IAI).
The objective of the IAI is:
To integrate the AEC/FM (Architectural, Engineering, Construction and Facilities Management) industry by
specifying Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) as a universal language to improve the communication,

781
Reference Guide

productivity, delivery time, cost, and quality throughout the design, construction, operation and maintenance
lifecycle.

The IFC concept is based on the idea of objects brought together in an integrated model. These objects are
defined to support the whole lifecycle of facility development from inception through design, documentation
and construction, then facility management and finally demolition and disposal.
IFC offers a higher-level common language for sharing of intelligent objects between disciplines across the
building lifecycle

IFC 2x3 has been implemented in SCIA ESA PT and can be used for separate import and export of a
structure and for sophisticated update of model data.

SCIA ESA PT currently allows for the exchange of the following data:
 straight beam members (including columns),
 cross-sections:
 parametric: rectangle, circle, pipe, I, T, L, U, Z, O, C,
o thin-walled,
o rolled,
o planar slabs (including openings),
 walls of constant height,
 cut-outs of beam members by other entities,
 unrecognised shapes can be imported as general volumes and can be displayed in SCIA ESA PT.

IFC import
The procedure to import data from IFC file
1. Start menu function File > Import > IFC 2x3.
2. Browse for the required .IFC file.
3. Finish the import.

Note: The supported types of entities that can be imported into SCIA ESA PT through the IFC
format are listed in the introduction to IFC.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.
Example of structures imported through IFC 2x3 format.

782
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

IFC export
The procedure to export data into IFC file
1. Start menu function File > Export > IFC 2x3.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file.
4. Complete the export.
5. A short summary of exported entities is displayed on the screen.

Note: The supported types of entities that can be exported from SCIA ESA PT through the IFC
format are listed in the introduction to IFC.

IFC update
IFC update is an extension to SCIA ESA PT update. First, the specified IFC file is imported and the data are
converted into SCIA ESA PT format. Then, the Update from ESA file is invoked. It means that the user has to
learn just one update procedure (one update dialogue) and he/she uses it for the update from both .esa and
.ifc file.
The procedure to update the project through IFC file
1. Open in SCIA ESA PT the project to-be-updated.
2. Call function File > Update > IFC 2x3.
3. Browse for the file to-be-merged.
4. The Update from ESA project dialogue is opened on the screen.
5. Select the type of changes that you want to accept.
6. Confirm with [Update].
7. The update is completed.

Note: The IFC update can be used ONLY if the third-party application exports entities under the
same GUID (Globally Unique Identifier) as it imported them. If the third-party application assigns
different GUIDs during the export procedure, the update function in SCIA ESA PT –
understandably – fails and the IFC update cannot be used for the exchange of data with such
application (for example, Allplan features this unfavourable behaviour).

783
Reference Guide

DSTV
DSTV
SCIA ESA PT allows for both import and export of files in DSTV format.
The interface is based on the format according to:
Schnittstellenkonvention Statik-CAD, Köln : Deutscher Stahlbau-Verband, 1993

Note: Only steel frame structures (i.e. structures composed of beam members) can be
imported/exported through DSTV format.

Note: More information about the DSTV format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

DSTV import
The import is based on the file with extension SC2. Parts *B00, *B01, *B02, *B03 and *B04 of this file are read
into SCIA ESA PT.

The contents of the .SC2 file (origin : analysis)

Part Description
*B00 General information (units, delimiters, etc.)
*B01 Topology of beam members
*B02 Nodal co-ordinates
*B03 Names of cross-sections
*B04 Properties of beam members

Note: More information about the DSTV format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

The procedure to import data from DSTV file

1. Start menu function File > Import > DSTV.
2. Browse for the required .SC2 file.
3. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

DSTV export
SCIA ESA PT generates files with extension SC1, SC2, SC3.
The contents of .SC1 file (origin : CAD)
Part Description
*A01 Assembly definition

The contents of .SC2 file (origin : analysis)

Part Description
*B00 General information (units, delimiters, etc.)
*B01 Topology of beam members
*B02 Nodal co-ordinates
*B03 Names of cross-sections
*B04 Properties of beam members

784
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

The cross-section names written in this file can be the original SCIA ESA PT names or the corresponding
DSTV names. In order to have the DSTV names in the output file, you have to select the option "Use DSTV
name conversion for section name". A dialogue with this option appears on the screen during the export
procedure.
The contents of .SC3 file (origin : analysis)
Part Description
*C01 Assembly definition

Note: More information about the DSTV format can be found in a separate SCIA manual titled
SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

The procedure to export data into DSTV file

1. Start menu function File > Export > DSTV.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. Confirm the input.
5. During the export procedure a dialogue opens on the screen.
6. Decide whether to "Use DSTV name conversion for section name" or not.
7. Complete the export.

ProSteel
Pro Steel
The exchange of data between SCIA ESA PT and PeoSteel programs is achieved through a special format
developed by companies KIWI software and SCIA. It is a XML-based format and the files use extension .PRO.
The format has been designed to support the following entities:
 straight steel beam members,
 rolled cross-sections,
 connections: (i) end plate and (ii) frame connections for strong axis.

In order to use this feature, the user must have installed ProStell v.17 or later.
Both import, export and update functionalities are available for this format.

Pro Steel import

The procedure to import data from Pro Steel file
1. Start menu function File > Import > ProSteel.
2. Browse for the required input file.
3. The import dialogue opens on the screen.
4. Set the required options – see below.
5. Confirm with [Import].

Import from ProSteel dialogue

"graphical window of the It displays the structure to-be-imported. The user may
dialogue" preview here the data from the file-to-be-imported. In
addition, the window makes it possible to review the
result of the automatic connection of beam members.
The window supports standard features of SCIA ESA
PT graphical windows:
(i) pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print, save etc.
functions,
(ii) [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and
out the drawing,

785
Reference Guide

(iii) [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing,

(iv) [Ctrl] + right-click and drag to rotate the drawing.

Auto-connect members If ON, the import procedure automatically tries to

connect entities of the imported model in such a way
that the result is a correct analysis model.
If OFF, the beam members are imported in their actual
positions, which does not guarantee that the imported
model can be analysed by means of FEM algorithm.
Some modifications and tuning of the imported model
may be necessary to satisfy the prerequisites of the
finite element method.

Max. distance If the distance of two points in the imported structure is

smaller than the value specified here, the program tries
to "merge" the points into one.
If the distance of two points is greater then the value
specified here, the two points are treated as separate
points and the connection algorithm does not try to
"merge" them.

Display report If ON, the program issues a report about the import.

Refresh image This button performs in fact two actions:

(i) it starts the connection algorithm which connects the
beam members, so that the result of the import is a
correct FEM analysis model,
(ii) it refreshes the image in the graphical window of the
dialogue.

Import This button imports the data into the main environment
of SCIA ESA PT.
Note: If the option Auto-connect members is ON
and the button [Refresh image] has not been clicked
yet, the button [Import] is disabled. The reason is that
the user should review in the graphical window the result
of the connection algorithm, so that he/she may get the
chance not to accept it.

Cancel This button enables the user to abandon the current

action.

CAD model This disabled item has no meaning in the current

version.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Pro Steel export

The procedure to export data into ProSteel file
1. Start menu function File > Export > Pro Steel file.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. Confirm the dialogue.
5. During the export procedure another dialogue opens on the screen.
6. Select if you want to export the analysis or structural model – see below.
7. Complete the export.

786
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Structural versus analysis model

SCIA ESA PT enables the user to export either the analysis model (used for FEM calculations) or the
structural model (used for drawings).
The difference between the models can be best demonstrated on a simple example of a planar frame.
Let us have a simple frame:

The analysis model is the shape idealised for the needs of FEM analysis. It is an ideal axial model of the
structure.

On the other hand, the structural model (shown in fact in the first picture) shows the real position and
connection of individual structural members. Consequently, the "axial" representation of such model is different
from the idealised FEM model.

787
Reference Guide

The difference (and also problem during the import into calculation programs) is that the beam members and
columns do not intersect each other. This problem must be sorted out (somehow) after the import of the
structural model into a FEM-analysis program.

Pro Steel update

Once a project created (or at least processed) in SCIA ESA PT has been exported to ProSteel format and
handled outside of SCIA ESA PT, it is likely that some changes have been made to the project data.
In general, this may be a cause of troubles as someone must review both variants of the model (project in
SCIA ESA PT and the third-party-processed file) and decide what to do.
In order to facilitate this task, SCIA ESA PT offers the Update function that compares the two variants and
merges them together according to user-defined rules.

The procedure to update the project through ProSteel file

1. Open in SCIA ESA PT the project to-be-updated.
2. Call function File > Update > ProSteel.
3. Browse for the file to-be-merged.
4. The Update from ProSteel dialogue is opened on the screen – see below.
5. Select the type of changes that you want to accept.
6. Confirm with [Update].
7. If some new entities were added by the third-party, the Import from ProSteel dialogue is opened on
the screen.
8. Fill in the required options and perform necessary actions.
9. The update is completed.

Update from ProSteel dialogue

Group Update
This group contains a list of types of items that are compared during the update operation. If some items are
not relevant for the particular update operation, they are disabled. Only the enabled items have been
diagnosed by the update algorithm as relevant ones.
Added members If the ProSteel file contains some new members (in
comparison with the currently open project), the user
may use this checkbox to decide whether the added
members should be merged (item is ON) or ignored
(item is OFF).

Deleted members Analogous to the above.

788
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

If ON, the members deleted from the merged file are

deleted from the current project.
If OFF, any deletions made in the ProSteel file are
ignored.

Changed geometry If ON, all the changes of geometry are taken into
account.
If OFF, the changes of geometry are ignored. The
geometry remains as it is in the currently open project.

Changed cross-section If ON, any changes of cross-sections are taken into

account.
If OFF, the changes of cross-sections are ignored. The
cross-sections remain as they are in the currently open
project.

Added connections Analogous to above – but this time related to

connections.

Deleted connections Analogous to above – but this time related to

connections.

Changed connections Analogous to above – but this time related to

connections.

Other controls
Display report If ON, a report is generated about the update operation.

Button [Update] This button performs the update (taking into account the
adjustments made in group Update).

Button [Cancel] This button cancels the whole update operation.

Graphical window
It displays the structure to-be-updated and shows the found changes. The changes are displayed in colour.
Each type of change uses a specific colour that is indicated in the group Update of the dialogue.
The window supports standard features of SCIA ESA PT graphical windows:
(i) pop-up menu with a set of zoom, print, save etc. functions,
(ii) [Ctrl] + [Shift] + right-click and drag to zoom in and out the drawing,
(iii) [Shift] + right-click and drag to move the drawing,
(iv) [Ctrl] + right-click and drag to rotate the drawing.

Note: The behaviour of the update-function may differ in some details from the description given
here as the interface is still under development on both sides, i.e. SCIA ESA PT and ProSteel.

StepSteel
StepSteel - analysis model
The interface provides for the exchange of data with StepSteel and is based on the following references:
(1)
Standardbeschreibung Produktschnittstelle Stahlbau
Teil 1 : Emphehlungen für den Anwender
DSTV – Arbeitsausschuss EDV

789
Reference Guide

April 2000
(2)
Standardbeschreibung Produktschnittstelle Stahlbau
Teil 2 : DatenModell
DSTV – Arbeitsausschuss EDV
April 2000
(3)
Standardbeschreibung Produktschnittstelle Stahlbau
Teil 3 : Implementierungsbereiche und Konformitaetanforderungen
DSTV – Arbeitsausschuss EDV
April 2000

The implemented EXPRESS-scheme is PSS_2000_04.exp.

SCIA ESA PT allows for both import and export of StepSteel files. In addition to the analysis model, also the
structural model can be imported and exported – this is described in separate topics.

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

Note: Only steel frame structures (i.e. structures composed of beam members) can be
imported/exported through StepSteel format.

StepSteel - import of analysis model

The procedure to import data from StepSteel file
1. Start menu function File > Import > StepSteel.
2. Browse for the required input file.
3. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

StepSteel - export of analysis model

The procedure to export data into StepSteel file
1. Start menu function File > Export > StepSteel.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. Select the output level – see below.
5. Adjust parameters relating to section names – see below.
6. Complete the export.

Available implementation levels

Implementation level Entity group Abbreviation Note

Reading analysis structure General data 1(IN) Not available for

'Statische Struktur Einlesen' Analysis data I export

Writing analysis structure General data 1(OUT)

'Statische Struktur Schreiben' Analysis data I
Reading analysis General data 2(IN) Not available for
'Statik Einlesen' Analysis data I export

790
 Roundtrip - import, export, update

Analysis data II
Writing analysis General data 2(OUT) Two options
'Statik Schreiben' Analysis data I available for
export: with and
Analysis data II without results.
Writing design General data 3(OUT)
'Entwurf Schreiben' Design data

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

Section names
The cross-section shape is recognised from the name of the cross-section. The user may adjust a few
parameters that influence the applied conversion of cross-section names.
Use DSTV conversion for If ON, the DSTV convention is used for cross-section
section names names.
Use mapping table as If ON, the mapping table is used to convert the names of
conversion for section names cross-sections.

StepSteel - structural model

The import and export of structural model is an extension to the import and export of the analysis model.

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

Note: Only steel frame structures (i.e. structures composed of beam members) can be
imported/exported through StepSteel format.

StepSteel - import of structural model

The procedure to import data from StepSteel-CAD file
1. Start menu function File > Import > StepSteel-CAD.
2. Browse for the required input file.
3. Finish the import.

Note: The import function creates a new empty project and the specified file is imported into it.

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

StepSteel - export of structural model

The procedure to export data into StepSteel-CAD file
1. Start menu function File > Export > StepSteel-CAD.
2. Specify the required output folder.
3. Type the name of the file (i.e. the base name without extension).
4. Complete the export.

Note: More information about the StepSteel format can be found in a separate SCIA manual
titled SCIA ESA PT ASCII Import/Export Manual.

CEA Plant-4D
CEA Pland-4D
SCIA ESA PT allows for export of project data into CEA Pland-4D file. This option is available only if the
corresponding software is installed on your computer.

791
Reference Guide

Tekla
Tekla
Note: This import/export capability is not directly related to SCIA ESA PT functionality.
Nevertheless, it can prove useful to SCIA ESA PT users. Please, consider this chapter to be only a
brief introduction and contact SCIA support team for more information and/or guidance.

If IFC format is not a solution for you to export to and from Tekla Structures, you can use the STEP Steel
format as described in this chapter.
Tekla to SCIA ESA PT
1. Export a project by StepSteel export option in Tekla Structures to e.g. "Tekla_output.stp".
2. Open "Tekla_output.stp", and replace the text
'FILE_SCHEMA(('DATA_SECTION_SCHEMA_3_99'))' with 'FILE_SCHEMA(('PSS_2000_04'))' in
the header, then save it again.
3. Now import this output-stp ("Tekla_output.stp'" into SCIA ESA PT.
4. Make necessary modifications, analyses, checks, etc.
5. Export the structure into StepSteel CAD format (not levels 1-3), e.g. to "output01.stp" (see chapter
StepSteel - export of structural model).
6. Change the header back: So now replace 'FILE_SCHEMA(('PSS_2000_04'))' with
'FILE_SCHEMA(('DATA_SECTION_SCHEMA_3_99'))'.
7. Then save it as "output01e.stp".

SCIA ESA PT to Tekla

1. In SCIA ESA PT you have to generate a new STP-File (e.g."Esa_output.stp'". Choose the option:
Stepsteel export CAD (not levels 1-3) (see chapter StepSteel - export of structural model).
2. Open "Esa_output.stp", and replace the text 'FILE_SCHEMA(('PSS_2000_04'))' with
'FILE_SCHEMA(('DATA_SECTION_SCHEMA_3_99'))' in the header, then save it again.
3. Now import this output-stp ("Esa_output.stp'" into Tekla Structures.

Google Earth
Google Earth
Note: This import/export capability is not directly related to SCIA ESA PT functionality.
Nevertheless, it can prove useful to SCIA ESA PT users. Please, consider this chapter to be only a
brief introduction and contact SCIA support team for more information and/or guidance.

The export of your structure to Google Earth can be done in two steps.
1. The model of the structure must be exported to IFC format (see chapter IFC export).
2. The IFC file must be converted into .KML format. This format can be then opened in Google Earth.

Tip: A free tool IfcStoreyView can be used to make the conversion from .IFC to .KML format.

792
Advanced modules
Design of connections
Frame connections
A special module enables the used to perform the design of steel frame connections.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Connections.

Theoretical background for frame connections

Theoretical background for frame connections is given in a separate book.

Code checks
Code checks of steel structures
A special module enables the used to perform checking of steel structures to individual national technical
standards.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Steel code checks.

Theoretical background for steel code checks

Theoretical background for steel code checks is given in a separate book.

Code check of concrete structures

A special module enables the used to perform checking of concrete structures to individual national technical
standards.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Concrete code checks.

Theoretical background for concrete code check

Theoretical background for concrete code checks is given in a separate book.

Code checks of timber structures

A special module enables the used to perform checking of timber structures to technical standards.
Description of this module is given in a separate volume Module: Timber code checks.

793
Glossary
Additional-data entity
An additional-data entity is an entity that does not directly defines the shape of a structure being modelled. It
either defines some additional properties of the structure (e.g. haunches on beam members, supports, etc.) or
applies effects of phenomena having influence on the behaviour of the structure (e.g. load).
Structural model
The shape of structure that is not considered during calculations, but is used for preparation of drawings and
design of connections. It may be identical with the calculation shape. But usually will be different to reflect the
solution of details in the structure.
Cartesian co-ordinate system
A co-ordinate system in which the coordinates of a point are its distances from a set of perpendicular lines that
intersect at an origin, such as two lines in a plane or three in space.
The invention of the system
The year is 1630. Lying on his back, French mathematician René Descartes, watches a fly crawl across the ceiling.
Suddenly, an idea comes to him. He visualizes two number lines, intersecting at a 90° angle. He realizes that he can graph
the fly's location on a piece of paper. Descartes called the main horizontal line the x-axis and the main vertical line the y-axis.
He named the point where they intersect the origin.
Descartes represented the fly's location as an ordered pair of numbers. The first number, the x-value, is the horizontal
distance along the x-axis, measured from the origin. The second number, the y-value, is the vertical distance along the y-
axis, also measured from the origin. The locations in the plane where the x and y values intersect are called coordinates.
The plane containing these points is called the Cartesian plane (in honour of Descartes), or the coordinate plane. Together,
the x-axis, the y-axis, the coordinate plane, and all the coordinates make up the Cartesian coordinate system.
(Source: http://www.beyondbooks.com)

Catalogue block (also Geometric block)

A predefined template structure that represents some of the often or commonly used structure types. The
catalogue block shortens the phase of geometry definition as it can be re-loaded from the library any time and
as many times as required.
Clipping box
Clipping box is a tool that controls what part of a model is visible on the screen. The clipping box is in fact an
imaginary rectangular prism. Parts of the model located inside the clipping box are displayed. Parts located
outside the box are not displayed.
Cylindrical co-ordinate system
A three-dimensional coordinate system in which there is one straight axis, called the z-axis. The other two
coordinates are the angle, measured anticlockwise from some reference direction, and the perpendicular
distance from the z-axis. So this coordinate system is like two-dimensional polar coordinates, extended to
three dimensions by adding an ordinary z-axis.
Document
The document is a special part of SCIA.ESA PT. It uses its own user interface that provides for easy and
straightforward creation of output documents and reports describing the analysed structure, the input values
and results.
Geometric block (also Catalogue block)
A predefined template structure that represents some of the often or commonly used structure types. The
geometric block shortens the phase of geometry definition as it can be re-loaded from the library any time and
as many times as required.
Geometric entity
An entity that defines the shape of a structure that is being modelled. A geometric entity may be subject to
effect of additional-data entities; for example, it may be subject to some load, its surface may be altered by a
haunch, etc.
Paper space gallery
The Paper space gallery is a gallery of drawings. The drawings may represent real engineering drawings
containing multiple scanned program-screens that may be further edited. In addition, manually created
drawings may be added as well as manually typed or automatically formatted text information.
Influence line

795
Reference Guide

A line drawn to show how some quantity varies as unit load crosses e.g. a bridge.
For example, the influence line for say the left-hand reaction of a beam member would be a triangle, of unit
height at the left-hand end, decreasing to zero at the right-hand end. This would show that as unit load crossed
the span the left-hand reaction would fall away to nothing when the load reached the right-hand abutment.
Layer
A logical grouping of data that is like a transparent acetate overlay (slide) on a drawing. You can view layers
individually or in combination.
Manager
In SCIA.ESA PT the word manager is normally a part of a compound name denoting sophisticated tools
providing for maintenance of various databases. For example, the Cross-section manager allows the user to
perform available actions and operations with cross-sections, the Material manager provides for maintenance
of the database of materials in the current project, etc.
Node
In the context of the finite element method, a node is a point within a structure to which elements that make up
the structure are connected and at which "compatibility" relations are enforced. The "compatibility" conditions
include both equilibrium and kinematic compatibility.
Sometimes, little less formal definition of a node may be given.
If it has been possible to determine certain parts of a structure which have specific tasks (i.e. carrying shear stress, direct
stress, bending stress, etc.), these elements must be connected to each other. This connection in the real structure is
accomplished by riveting, welding or some type of adhesive bonding. In the finite element idealization of the structure, this
connection to other parts of the structure takes place at a finite number of points on each element and these points are
called node points. A finite element will have anywhere from 2 to n node points, depending upon the type of element, its'
characteristics and the role it plays within the structure.

Picture gallery
The Picture gallery is a collection of scanned program-screens and manually created drawings. The pictures
may be printed directly or further processed in other SCIA.ESA PT’s graphical output tools.
Preview
The preview window is a document-based window used to display various information about particular project
parts or elements. It may be invoked from within various program functions. E.g. the preview window may be
activated from within the cross-section manager to display characteristics of a cross-section in a document-like
style.
Property table
A property table is a control element used in SCIA.ESA PT dialogues that both (i) presents information in
tabular form and (ii) provides for straightforward editing of the displayed data.
Reference point of a cross-section
A reference point of a cross-section is defined as:
 for catalogue cross-sections it is located in the first point of the cross-section,
 for general cross-sections and cross-sections defined by a polygon it is identical with point [0,0].
Snap mode
A mode for locking a pointing device (mouse cursor) into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid. When
Snap mode is on, the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to the nearest point on the grid.
The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid. In SCIA.ESA PT this term covers also the feature called
Object Snap Mode. The Object Snap Mode is a method for selecting commonly needed points on an object
while you create or edit a model.
Solver
Solver is an integral part of SCIA.ESA PT that performs the numerical solution of the problem. As SCIA.ESA
PT is based on the finite element method, a set of equations describing the model, its boundary conditions and
loads must be assembled and solved. This particular task is carried out in the program part called Solver.
Spherical co-ordinate system
A three-dimensional coordinate system that does not have a single straight axis. The coordinates are: distance
from the origin, and two angles found by drawing a line from the given point to the origin and measuring the
angles formed with a given plane and a given line in that plane.
A way to think about this is that the coordinates might be distance from the centre of the earth, longitude, and
the angular distance from the north pole (not quite the same as latitude, but almost).

796
 Glossary

Title block / stamp

In order that any drawing may be identified and located quickly, an effective system of labelling and cross-
referencing is required. For this reason all drawings must have a title block (stamp), which should contain
information required for identification and interpretation of the drawing.
View
A graphical representation of a model from a specific location (viewpoint) in space.
View (in the context of table composer)
The View (in the context of table composer) means the style in which some data are displayed in the document
or preview window. It is in fact a representation of specific data in tabular form.
Wheel button
A wheel-like button located at the edge of a window. When the mouse cursor is positioned over it, the left
mouse button pressed and the mouse dragged, the view direction or zoom ratio changes accordingly.

797